Eighteenth-Century English Ideology and Change
The eighteenth century was a key period in the development of the English language and is when the modern standard emerged and many dictionaries and grammars first appeared. This book is divided into thematic sections which deal with issues central to English in the eighteenth century. These include linguistic ideology and the grammatical tradition, the contribution of women to the writing of grammars, the interactions of writers at this time and how politeness was encoded in language, including that on a regional level. The contributions also discuss how language was seen and discussed in public and how grammarians, lexicographers, journalists, pamphleteers and publishers judged on-going change. The novel insights offered in this book extend our knowledge of the English language at the onset of the modern period. is Professor of Linguistics in the English Department at Essen University, Germany. His recent publications include Legacies of Colonial English: Studies of Transported Dialects (Cambridge, ) and Irish English: History and Present-Day Forms (Cambridge, ). R AY M O N D H I C K E Y
S T U DI E S I N E NG L I S H L A NG UAG E
General editor Merja Kytö(Uppsala University) Editorial Board Bas Aarts(University College London) John Algeo(University of Georgia) Susan Fitzmaurice(University of Sheffield) Christian Mair(University of Freiburg) Charles F. Meyer(University of Massachusetts)
The aim of this series is to provide a framework for original studies of English, both present-day and past. All books are based securely on empirical research, and represent theoretical and descriptive contributions to our knowledge of national and international varieties of English, both written and spoken. The series covers a broad range of topics and approaches, including syntax, phonology, grammar, vocabulary, discourse, pragmatics and sociolinguistics, and is aimed at an international readership. Already published in this series: Charles F. Meyer: Apposition in Contemporary English Jan Firbas: Functional Sentence Perspective in Written and Spoken Communication Izchak M. Schlesinger: Cognitive Space and Linguistic Case Katie Wales: Personal Pronouns in Present-Day English Laura Wright: The Development of Standard English, 1300–1800: Theories, Descriptions, Conflicts Charles F. Meyer: English Corpus Linguistics: Theory and Practice Stephen J. Nagle and Sara L. Sanders (eds.): English in the Southern United States Anne Curzan: Gender Shifts in the History of English Kingsley Bolton: Chinese Englishes Irma Taavitsainen and Päivi Pahta (eds.): Medical and Scientific Writing in Late Medieval English Elizabeth GordonLyle CampbellJennifer HayMargaret MaclaganAndrea Sudbury and Peter Trudgill: New Zealand English: Its Origins and Evolution Raymond Hickey (ed.): Legacies of Colonial English Merja Kytö Mats Rydén and Erik Smitterberg (eds.): Nineteenth Century English: Stability and Change John Algeo: British or American English? A Handbook of Word and Grammar Patterns Christian Mair: Twentieth-Century English: History, Variation and Standardization Evelien Keizer: The English Noun Phrase: The Nature of Linguistic Categorization Raymond Hickey: Irish English: History and Present-Day Forms Günter Rohdenburg and Julia Schlüter (eds.): One Language, Two
Grammars?: Differences between British and American English Laurel J. Brinton: The Comment Clause in English Lieselotte Anderwald: The Morphology of English Dialects: Verb Formation in Nonstandard English Geoffrey Leech, Marianne Hundt, Christian Mair and Nicholas Smith: Change in Contemporary English: A Grammatical Study Jonathan Culpeper and Merja Kytö: Early Modern English Dialogues: Spoken Interaction as Writing Daniel Schreier, Peter Trudgill, Edgar Schneider and Jeffrey Williams: The Lesser-Known Varieties of English: An Introduction Hilde Hasselgård: Adjunct Adverbials in English
Eighteenth-Century English Ideology and Change
Edited by R AY M O N D H IC K E Y
CAMBR IDGE UNIVERSITY PR ESS
Cambridge, New York, Melbourne, Madrid, Cape Town, Singapore, São Paulo, Delhi, Dubai, Tokyo Cambridge University Press The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge CB RU, UK Published in the United States of America by Cambridge University Press, New York www.cambridge.org Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/ © Cambridge University Press This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception and to the provisions of relevant collective licensing agreements, no reproduction of any part may take place without the written permission of Cambridge University Press. First published Printed in the United Kingdom at the University Press, Cambridge A catalogue record for this publication is available from the British Library Library of Congress Cataloguing in Publication data Eighteenth-century English : ideology and change / [edited by] Raymond Hickey. p. cm. – (Studies in English language) Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN ---- . English language–th century–Rhetoric. . English language–th century–Usage. . English philology–History. I. Hickey, Raymond, – II. Title. III. Series. PE.E .'–dc ISBN
---- Hardback
Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy of URLs for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this publication, and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain, accurate or appropriate.
Contents
List of figures List of maps List of tables Notes on contributors Preface
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English
page ix x xi xii xvii
R AY M O N D H I C K E Y
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation JOAN C. BEAL
Women’s grammars
C A RO L P E RC Y
Eighteenth-century women and their norms of correctness I N G R I D T I E K E N - B O O N VA N O S TA D E
Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism I N G R I D T I E K E N - B O O N VA N O S TA D E
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar
K A R L I J N N AV E S T
Coalitions, networks, and discourse communities in Augustan England: The Spectator and the early eighteenth-century essay
S U S A N F I T Z M AU R I C E
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness: social distinction and metaphorical levelling
T E RT T U N E VA L A I N E N A N D H E L I T I S S A R I
Expressive speech acts and politeness in eighteenthcentury English I R M A TA AV I T S A I N E N A N D A N D R E A S H . J U C K E R
vii
viii
Contents
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English RICHARD W. BAILEY
Variation in sentential complements in eighteenth- and nineteenth-century English: a processing-based explanation
T E R E S A FA N E G O
Nationality and standardisation in eighteenth-century Scotland
CHARLES JONES
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
R AY M O N D H I C K E Y
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
B E R N D K O RT M A N N A N D S U S A N N E WAG N E R
‘Be pleased to report expressly’: the development of a public style in Late Modern English business and official correspondence
M A R I NA D O S S E NA
Registering the language – dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution
LY N DA M U G G L E S T O N E
Timeline for the eighteenth century
339
R AY M O N D H I C K E Y
References Late modern English language studies
R AY M O N D H I C K E Y
Indexes
Figures
.
Authors in the Network of Eighteenth-century English Texts . Relative frequencies (%) of the three sets of politeness words . Male and female usage of politeness words (per , words) . Frequencies of politeness words by gender and rank (per , words) . Distribution of eighteenth/nineteenth century dialect features in Ihalainen () . Distribution of morphosyntactic categories in Ihalainen ()
page
ix
Maps
. .
Main dialect distribution in Ulster Plural verbal -s in the SED fieldworker notebooks (all NP subjects; Pietsch a: ) . The NSR in Late Middle English (based on data in LALME I: , IV: f.; Pietsch a: ) . Personal pronouns (third person singular feminine and first person plural) – pronoun exchange . Relative markers as (), at () and what () in Ellis () . Regional distribution of isn’t
x
page
Tables
. Expressions of praise (positive) and condemnation (negation) in eighteenth-century language studies . The Spectator keywords . Word clusters with humble servant . Negative keywords for the Spectator . Frequencies of extraposed and non-extraposed subject infinitives in Middle and Early Modern English . Preverbal and extraposed non-finite sentential subjects in nineteenth- and twentieth-century British and American English . Frequencies of subjectless gerundives and infinitives as preverbal subjects from Early Modern to Present-day English, based on a ,, word sample . Gerundives and infinitives in subject position in three one-million-word corpora . Length of LME preverbal subject clauses relative to their matrix predicates . Length of preverbal subject clauses relative to their matrix predicates in earlier American English . Historical features of eighteenth-century Irish English . Main areas of Scots settlement in Ulster . Features of Older Scots and conservative Ulster Scots . Morphosyntactic features from Ihalainen () . Ellis, SED and FRED – coverage . Frequency of agreement features in Englishes worldwide . Number of PE-cases in total of pronouns (SED published) . Distribution of relative markers along the North–South axis in percentages . Distribution of pseudo-passives with stood/sat in FRED
page
xi
Contributors
R I C H A R D W. B A I L E Y
is emeritus Fred Newton Scott Collegiate Professor of English at the University of Michigan. His main research interest is the development of English in the early modern and late modern period. Among his recent publications in this field are Dictionaries of English: Prospects for the Record of our Language (Cambridge University Press, ), Images of English: A Cultural History of the Language (Cambridge University Press, ); Nineteenth-Century English (). He was lead editor of the electronic edition of the manuscript, transcript and modernisation of the mid-sixteenth-century chronicle of London life kept by Henry Machyn (). is Professor of English Language and Director of the National Centre for English Cultural Tradition at the University of Sheffield. Her main research interests are the English language in the late modern period and dialect and regional variation in Britain. Recent publications include English Pronunciation in the Eighteenth Century; Thomas Spence’s ‘Grand Repository of the English Language’ () (), English in Modern Times – (); (edited with Karen Corrigan and Hermann Moisl) Creating and Digitizing Language Corpora ( vols., ) and (edited with Massimo Sturiale and Carmela Nocera) Perspectives on Prescriptivism (). J OA N B E A L
M A R I N A D O S S E N A is Professor of English Language and Head of the Department of Comparative Languages, Literatures and Cultures at the University of Bergamo (Italy). Her research interests focus on the features and origins of British varieties of English and the history of specialised discourse. Recent publications include the proceedings of ICEHL ( vols., edited with Maurizio Gotti and Richard Dury) and the Proceedings of the first two International Conferences on English Historical Dialectology (both edited with Roger Lass). On Late Modern English she has published Studies in Late Modern English Correspondence: Methodology and Data (edited with Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade), Business and Official Correspondence: Historical Investigations (edited with Susan M. Fitzmaurice) and Diachronic Perspectives on Domain-Specific English (edited
xii
List of contributors xiii
with Irma Taavitsainen). She is also the author of Scotticisms in Grammar and Vocabulary (). In co-operation with Richard Dury she is currently compiling a corpus of nineteenth-century Scottish correspondence. has been Professor of English Language and Linguistics at the University of Santiago de Compostela since and is the director of the Research Unit for Variation, Linguistic Change and Grammaticalization (VLCG). She has published widely on aspects of English historical syntax, including the system of sentential complementation and its development since Middle English times. She is the editor of Folia Linguistica and is currently working on the history of verbs of motion in English and Spanish from a Construction Grammar perspective. T E R E S A FA N E G O
is Professor of English Language at the University of Sheffield. Her research involves sociohistorical linguistic and historical pragmatic approaches to change and variation in eighteenth-century English. She has also collaborated with colleagues to produce volumes whose contributions explore methodological issues in English linguistics. Most recently, with Donka Minkova, she co-edited Studies in the History of the English Language IV: Empirical and Analytical Advances in the Study of English Language Change (). S U S A N F I T Z M AU R I C E
was born in Dublin and studied at Trinity College, Dublin as well as in Kiel and Bonn, Germany. He has been Chair of Linguistics at the Department of English, Essen University, since . His main research interests are computer corpus processing, varieties of English (especially Irish English) and issues surrounding language contact, shift and change. Among his recent book publications are A Source Book for Irish English (), Motives for Language Change (Cambridge University Press, ), A Sound Atlas of Irish English (), Legacies of Colonial English (Cambridge University Press, ), Dublin English: Evolution and Change () and Irish English: History and Present-day Forms (Cambridge University Press, ). R AY M O N D H I C K E Y
is Professor Emeritus of English, Department of English Language, University of Edinburgh, Scotland. His research interests cover a wide spectrum which includes Scots, especially in its historical context, English diachronic phonology and questions of language change. Among his recent publications are Historical Linguistics: Problems and Perspectives: (), A Language Suppressed: The Pronunciation of Scots in the Eighteenth Century (), The Edinburgh History of the Scots Language (), The English Language in Scotland: An Introduction to Scots (), English in the Late Modern Period (ed. with Marina Dossena and Maurizio Gotti, ) and The Pronunciation of English in the Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries (). C H A R LES JON ES
A N DR EAS H. J UC K ER
is Professor of English Linguistics at the University of Zurich. His recent publications include Diachronic Perspectives on Address
xiv
List of contributors
Term Systems (), Speech Acts in the History of English (), both co-edited with Irma Taavitsainen, and Early Modern English News Discourse (). He is the editor of the Journal of Historical Pragmatics (with Irma Taavitsainen) and from to he was the editor of Pragmatics & Beyond New Series. His current research interests include historical pragmatics, speech act theory, politeness theory and the grammar and history of English. He also works on hypertexts and the language of the new media. B E R N D KO RT M A N N is Professor of English Language and Linguistics at the University of Freiburg, Germany. His publications include four monographs, seven edited volumes, and about eighty articles and reviews in journals and collective volumes. His research interests include semantics, grammaticalisation, typology, history of linguistics and English grammar. Over the last decade he has been investigating the grammar of nonstandard varieties of English around the world, especially from a typological perspective. Among his recent publications are the two-volume Handbook of Varieties of English with CD-ROM (; vol. paperback ). Together with Elizabeth Traugott he is editor of the series Topics in English Linguistics. He is currently working as a Senior Research Fellow in the School of Language and Literature of the Freiburg Institute of Advanced Studies.
is Professor of the History of English at the University of Oxford, and a Fellow of Pembroke College, Oxford. She has published widely on language in the late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. Recent work includes Lexicography and the OED: Pioneers in the Untrodden Forest (), ‘Talking Proper’: The Rise of Accent as Social Symbol, nd edition (; revised and extended paperback edition ), Lost for Words: The Hidden History of the Oxford English Dictionary () and The Oxford History of English ().
LY N DA M U G G L E S T O N E
K A R L I J N N AV E S T is a Ph.D. student in the research project The Codifi ers and the English Language: Tracing the Norms of Standard English, University of Leiden. She is one of the contributors to Grammars, Grammarians and Grammar-Writing in Eighteenth-Century England () and Acts of Reading: Teachers, Texts and Childhood (edited by Morag Styles and Evelyn Arizpe, ). She is currently completing her Ph.D. thesis on John Ash (–) and the rise of the children’s grammar.
is Professor of English Philology and Director of the Research Unit for Variation, Contacts and Change in English (VARIENG) at the University of Helsinki. Her research focuses on historical sociolinguistics, language change and Modern English before . She is one of the compilers of the Helsinki Corpus of English Texts, and director of the research project Sociolinguistics and Language History, T E RT T U N E VA L A I N E N
List of contributors xv
which has produced the Corpus of Early English Correspondence (CEEC). Her publications include ‘Early modern English lexis and semantics’, in The Cambridge History of the English Language (), Historical Sociolinguistics (, with H. Raumolin-Brunberg) and An Introduction to Early Modern English (). is an Associate Professor in the Department of English at the University of Toronto. Here research explores the cultural history of eighteenth-century English. Drawing on her doctoral work on editorial corrections to Captain James Cook’s grammar, her most recent publications have considered how editors, advertisers, book reviewers, schoolteachers and grammarians contributed to the development and dissemination of standard English and to the formation of social stereotypes. Particularly interested in gender issues and standardisation, she is currently at work on a book about bad grammar in Enlightenment Britain. C A RO L P E RC Y
is Professor of English Philology, Head of the Department of English and Deputy Director of the Research Unit for Variation, Contacts and Change in English at the University of Helsinki. Her research focuses on historical pragmatics, corpus linguistics, linguistic stylistics and the evolution of scientific and medical writing. She is the co-editor of the Journal of Historical Pragmatics. Her most recent edited books include Speech Acts in the History of English (, together with Andreas H. Jucker), The Dynamics of Linguistic Variation: Corpus Evidence on English Past and Present (, together with Terttu Nevalainen, Päivi Pahta and Minna Korhonen) and Methods in Historical Pragmatics (, together with Susan M. Fitzmaurice). I R M A TA AV I T S A I N E N
T I E K E N - B O O N VA N O S TA D E holds a chair in English Sociohistorical Linguistics at the University of Leiden. She has published on periphrastic do in eighteenth-century English () and on multiple negation in Malory’s Morte Darthur (). She has edited various international collections of articles, including, most recently, Grammars, Grammarians and Grammar Writing (). Her research interests include historical social network analysis and the standardisation process (codification and prescription). She publishes the internet journal Historical Sociolinguistics and Sociohistorical Linguistics, and is the director of the research project The Codifiers and the English Language at Leiden. She is currently writing a book on Robert Lowth and the rise of prescriptivism. I NGR I D
H E L I T I S S A R I completed her doctoral dissertation in on the senses of the English word ‘love’ and its conceptual metaphors in Early Modern and Present-day English. From to she was a Fellow at the Helsinki Collegium working on other words for emotions. She is now continuing her research on the expression of emotions, word meaning/ concepts and metaphor at the Research Unit for Variation, Contacts
xvi
List of contributors
and Change in English at the Department of English, University of Helsinki. received her MA and Ph.D. in English Linguistics from the University of Freiburg (Germany) where she most recently worked as head of a research project on English in Newfoundland. Her main areas of interest are variation in the morphology and syntax of English dialects on which she has published a number of articles, focusing in particular on Southwest England and Newfoundland. For the academic year / she was a Leverhulme Visiting Research Fellow at the University of Kent (Canterbury/UK), working on her postdoctorate thesis on Newfoundland English. She is currently working at the University of Technology, Chemnitz, Germany.
S U S A N N E WAG N E R
Preface
In the past decade or so the study of English in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries has established itself as an area of historical linguistics in its own right. This period has come to be known as Late Modern English and covers the period roughly from the reign of Queen Anne – the Augustan Age, that of Pope, Dryden and Swift – down to the end of the Victorian era at the beginning of the twentieth century. This is not a period of major categorial changes in English but of more subtle shifts in syntax and vocabulary and above all it is the time when pronunciation became a yardstick of acceptability in English society. The study of English in the late modern period is inextricably linked to the rise of prescriptivism, a phenomenon which has determined the attitudes to spoken language in present-day English society. The validity of the late modern period has been underlined by a series of recent conferences which have taken place at the universities of Edinburgh, Vigo and Leiden. The range of topics dealt with at these conferences testifies to the interest of English scholars in the period. In particular the rise in grammar writing has been a focus, but also the spread of dictionaries and their use as authoritative works in language use. The field of Late Modern English studies has been strengthened by a number of seminal publications in recent years. Joan Beal’s English in Modern Times () has provided an introduction which is already regarded as a standard. The proceedings of the Late Modern English conferences – Insights into Late Modern English () and New Insights into Late Modern English () – have gathered together the innovative work of many international scholars, both established in and new to the field. The area of grammar writing has been enriched by volumes such as that by Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade (), Grammars, Grammarians and Grammar Writing in Eighteenth-Century England, which summarises current thinking on this subject. It is hoped that the present volume – like its predecessor for nineteenthcentury English: Kytö et al. () – will contribute in the same vein to this vibrant field of research and be a useful source for those wishing to inform themselves about topics and insights into English in this formative period of its development. xvii
xviii
Preface
In the preparation of this book the editor received great assistance from the series editor, Prof. Merja Kytö, Uppsala University. Helen Barton, commissioning editor for linguistics at Cambridge University Press, was, as always, a great source of assistance and encouragement and ready to answer all the questions which arose in the course of the current project.
1
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English R AYMON D H IC K EY Essen University
Introduction
Like any period in the history of English there are certain recurrent themes to be found in the eighteenth century. Some of these have become standard wisdoms and are widespread among scholars and students alike. Other topics have not been in the forefront to the same extent but increasingly the focus of researchers has been directed towards them too. Among these matters can be counted the large body of grammars by female writers (Navest, Percy, Tieken-Boon van Ostade [], this volume) and the role of discourse communities within eighteenth-century English society (Fitzmaurice, this volume). The most prevalent standard wisdom about the eighteenth century is that it is the period in which prescriptivism in English established itself. Like all such wisdoms it is largely true but the details of both the nature of prescriptivism and the manner in which it arose have been shown not to correspond to the somewhat two-dimensional view which is often found, especially the view of the author who is seen as the arch-prescriptivist, Robert Lowth (Tieken-Boon van Ostade [], this volume). Another common view of the eighteenth century is that it is the period in which codes of politeness (Nevalainen and Tissari; Taavitsainen and Jucker, both this volume) became fixed and mandatory for the established classes in English society, and for those who aspired to belong to these. Again this is no doubt true and rules of etiquette were evidently rigid and compulsory. But there are clear differences between notions of politeness then and those which are prevalent today. Above all, the issue of face in social interactions (Brown and Levinson ) would seem to have been different in the eighteenth century. In addition, the tenor of disputes in print between authors had a directness and harshness which would not be accepted today. .
Britain and Ireland in the eighteenth century
The previous century, the seventeenth, was a period of violent upheavals. It was a century of forced plantations in Ireland and of military conflict in all 1
2 Eighteenth-century English
parts of Britain and Ireland. It was the century of the Civil War in England (–), which saw the execution of Charles I in and the rise of Oliver Cromwell as Lord Protector (–). The century saw the restoration of the monarchy in but also the discontent of the Jacobites (Szechi ) in Scotland and Ireland which included violent rebellion against English forces. Stability and order in England returned towards the end of the century with the reign of William III (of Orange) from to . The reign of Queen Anne (–), which opened the eighteenth century, was thus one of internal calm in England. For Scotland, the eighteenth century opened with the union with England in and, despite the attempts of the Jacobites to seize power, it was the union which determined Scottish political life in this century. For Ireland the eighteenth century was ‘the long peace’ (Johnston [] ) which lasted essentially from the Jacobite defeat in to the United Irishmen uprising in . The internal stability of eighteenth-century England means that in the present book, historical events do not play a central role in the discussions. It is perhaps significant that the two contributions concerned with English in Scotland (Jones) and Ireland (Hickey) respectively are those in which political and military events are referred to. There is little or no mention of politics in any of the other chapters, but much discussion of the social developments of the time. The chapters of the book are largely about externally motivated change whose roots lie in English social life, in attitudes to language and in the desire to have stability and order in language (Bailey ), much as it had been attained in English public life for the eighteenth century. .
The English language in the eighteenth century
It is true to say that the eighteenth century is a period in the history of English in which the major changes in the language had already taken place (Denison : ) and few, if any, categorial shifts occurred in the grammar. This fact is reflected in the nature of the contributions in this volume. Only one is specifically concerned with grammatical change (Fanego), whereas others consider the reactions in society to change which had already been initiated and which was still in a state of flux (Tieken-Boon van Ostade []). Indeed in many ways, the advice, if not to say strictures, of many authors has led to the continuing existence of variation in areas of English grammar in which one would expect incoming variants to become dominant and lead to the disappearance of older ones in the course of a few generations at the most. A case in point is prepositional stranding (Yáñez-Bouza a, b, Percy, this volume) which came to be considered inappropriate, this then triggering its avoidance in formal and prescriptive styles down to the present day (see the assessment in González-Díaz and Auer ). The majority of contributions in this volume are concerned with external factors, with language use and the role which individual authors may have
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English 3
played in its development. The size of the names index clearly shows this. The discussions in the volume are repeatedly about how language was seen and discussed in public, how individuals whose profession was connected to matters of language – grammarians, lexicographers, journalists, pamphleteers, publishers – judged on-going change. The eighteenth century is also the period in which speakers of English looked to see what variants among items of change in process were preferred by their social superiors. This is very obvious in the linguistic comments of John Walker (Beal ) who was singularly concerned with usage among the English nobility, for instance, with the English of Lord Chesterfield. On the other hand, those who already belonged to the established classes turned to recognised literary writers for guidance on form and usage, as can be seen with Lowth who in this matter held Swift in high esteem.
Books on the English language
Among the salient features of the eighteenth century is the sheer number of books on language which appeared (see Late Modern English language studies, this volume). This situation was the result of an expansion in a tradition of linguistic commentary which had begun earlier. The seventeenth century had seen many publications on language, chiefly concerned with (i) the difficulties in English vocabulary caused by the many creations and borrowings from classical languages, (ii) the pronunciation and orthography of English and (iii) the nature of English grammar compared to classical languages, above all Latin. One or two of these works actually date from the late sixteenth century, for instance John Hart’s An Orthographie of English (). However, it would be incorrect to see the works of eighteenth-century authors as a mere extension of the linguistic concerns of the previous century. There was also a change in orientation. To set this in context, the motivations for publishing works on language hitherto are outlined briefly below. .
Religious background
Before the eighteenth century studies of the English language frequently displayed a distinctly religious bias. It is a truism to say that before the advent of modern linguistics in the nineteenth century, much ‘linguistic’ work was produced in the belief that all languages can be traced to Hebrew, the language of the Old Testament, via Classical Greek, the language of the New Testament. Latin took its place after Greek and the result was a triad of classical languages which were continually referred to. For instance, in Robert Robinson’s The Art of Pronunciation () there is no mention of the social aspects of pronunciation but in the preface there are references to the derivation of words from Hebrew, Greek and Latin and many grateful references
4 Eighteenth-century English
to God from whom speech comes. This religious slant is in evidence in later works of the seventeenth century, for example Thomas Lye’s A New Spelling Book () which specifies in the subtitle that all the Words of our English Bible are set down in an Alphabetical order, and divided into their distinct Syllables Together with the Ground of the English Tongue laid in Verse, wherein are couch’d many Moral Precepts. .
Explaining ‘hard words’
The label ‘hard words’ is a technical term referring to those words which were either borrowed from Latin or Greek or which, more often than not, were created on the basis of stems whose origins lay in the classical languages. Already by the early seventeenth century, these words were perceived as a source of difficulty for speakers of English and the necessity was felt to produce books in which hard words were defined. For instance, The New World of English Words by Edward Phillips () specifies in the subtitle that it contains the Interpretations of such hard words as are derived from other Languages … Together with … All those Terms that relate to the Arts and Sciences … A Work very necessary for Strangers, as well as our own Countrymen, for all Persons that would rightly understand what they discourse, write, or read. Clearly the author felt called upon to supply such information as was necessary for both foreigners and natives alike to understand and use these words correctly. It might be imagined that one such definitive work would be sufficient to satisfy the needs of the reading public. However, already in the sixteenth century one finds in this area a degree of repetition, a duplication of effort, which was to mushroom in the eighteenth century. For instance, Elisha Coles mentions in the long subtitle to his English Dictionary () that it explains Many Thousands of Hard Words (and proper names of Places) more than are in any other English Dictionary or Expositor, together with The Etymological Derivation of them from their Fountains, whether Hebrew, Greek, Latin, French, or any other Language. In a Method more comprehensive, than any that is extant. Here one can see a confident assessment of one’s own efforts. And what better way of justifying one’s own work than to point to the putative shortcomings of one’s predecessors? This tack can be recognised in the titles of other works. Not only that but a blunt tone is found in the references to the work of colleagues. Already by the beginning of the eighteenth century, Richard Johnson () had published a book entitled Grammatical Commentaries which in the subtitle included the following: by way of animadversion [= severe criticism, RH] upon the falsities, obscurities, redundancies and defects of Lilly’s (sic!) system now in use. It may well be that in the interaction of the classes, for instance in both public and private correspondence, polite modes of address were prevalent during the eighteenth century (Nevala : –). However, one should not assume that the regulations
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English 5
of etiquette meant that modern notions of politeness applied on all levels and in all areas of society. In the realm of academic discourse authors had little trepidation when it came to criticising one another. .
The divergence of sound and spelling
It was not only the results of the Great Vowel Shift (Pyles and Algeo []: –) that led to a divergence between the pronunciation and spelling of English. There are a number of other developments of the early modern period which contributed to this divergence. The lowering and unrounding of short [ʊ] to [ʌ] in the STRUT lexical set (Wells : f.) and the vowel lengthening in the BATH lexical set can also be mentioned in this context. Many changes of this period gave rise to homophony and hence to distinctions in spelling which did not correspond to differences in pronunciation, for instance the TERN/tεrn/ and TURN/tʊrn/ lexical sets which merged to a rhotacised schwa /tɚːn/ which was then simplified solely to schwa /təːn, tɜːn/ (in south-eastern English). There is no formal distinction between stressed [Λ] and unstressed [ə] in the transcription systems used by eighteenth-century prescriptivists. In his scheme of vowels (: ) Sheridan refers to the former as the sound in but, calls it u and uses it in transcriptions of unstressed short vowels. Walker also has this sound, but represents it in different ways. For instance, he distinguishes six types of o-sound and contrasts his scheme with that devised by Sheridan. However, Walker’s fourth o-sound is Sheridan’s first u-sound, only written differently: ‘For a fourth, I have added the o in love, dove, &c.;’ (Walker : ). Hence the transcription he offers for a word like horizon is ‘ho-ri´zon’ which can be interpreted as [hoˈraizən] with a close mid back vowel in the first syllable and a schwa in the last syllable. The phonetic nature of unstressed vowels in eighteenth-century English has been a matter of some debate (see the comments in Beal a: –). While some scholars, such as Roger Lass (: ), see little evidence for the existence of schwa before the late modern period, Joan Beal is more cautious. She points out that the prescriptivists refer to what is later schwa as an ‘obscure u-vowel’ which suggests that it was indeed already a schwa in the eighteenth century. Spelling variations and not least the loss of inflectional syllables already in the early Middle English period would also seem to indicate that short unstressed vowels have had a centralised pronunciation in English for something like a thousand years.
I am grateful to Erik Smitterberg, Uppsala University, for a discussion about unstressed vowels and for suggesting that I deal with this matter in the current chapter. In the transcription used by the eighteenth-century prescriptivists, including Sheridan and Walker, the numbers are actually placed over the vowel symbols.
6 Eighteenth-century English
Walker further noted that there were two variants of short unstressed vowels which in IPA transcriptions would be [ə] and [ɪ]: [ə]: ‘there is a certain transient indistinct pronunciation of some of them [vowels] when they are not accented … when the accent is not upon it, no vowel is more apt to run into this imperfect sound than the a; thus the particle a before participlers, in the phrases a-going, a-walking, a-shooting, &c.…’ (Walker : ). [ɪ]: ‘The a goes into a sound approaching a short i, in the numerous termination [sic!] in age, when the accent is not on it, as cabbage, village, courage &c. and are pronounced nearly as if written cabbige, villige, courige, &c.’ (Walker : ). The increasingly divergent nature of writing and pronunciation was a concern which was dealt with openly. At the beginning of the eighteenth century one has works like John Jones Practical Phonography: Or, the New Art of Rightly Speling [sic!] and Writing Words by the Sound thereof and of Rightly Sounding and Reading Words by the Sight thereof. Applied to the English Tongue (). Lists of words which were spelt one way and pronounced another were published, for example Richard Brown The English School Reformed () which in the long subtitle specifies that the book contains A Collection of Words that are writ one way and sounded another. This concern is a common motif in many works on phonetics throughout the century, for example that by Abraham Tucker () which contains a section ‘English not spelt as spoken’ (Tucker : –). The phonological changes in English at the time led many authors to publicly campaign for a fixed form of the language in which these changes would no longer disrupt the relationship of spelling and sound. For example, Rice () closes his treatise on education with an appendix in which he offers ‘the sketch of a plan for establishing a Criterion, by which the Pronunciation of Languages may be ascertained; and, in particular that of the English Tongue, reduced to a Certain fixt Standard ’ (: ) [emphasis mine]. This notion of fixing the language is different in motivation from that put forward by Jonathan Swift in his famous Proposal for Correcting, Improving and Ascertaining the English Language (). While Swift wished to have the language fixed so that works of literature would be accessible to later generations, later non-literary authors, such as Rice just quoted, were concerned with the practical implications of not having a fixed standard. The divergence of the written and spoken language did occasionally lead to radically new proposals for English spelling. One such proposal is James Elphinston’s Inglish Orthoggraphy Epittomized: And Propriety’s PocketDictionary, containing Dhe Inglish Roots arrainged and explained () which in its title already shows the type of semi-phonetic spelling which he favoured. For other authors, notably the lexicographers and grammarians
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English 7
of the latter half of the eighteenth century (Johnson, Kenrick, Sheridan, Walker), tampering with English spelling was not an option. .
An educational dilemma
Both the expansion in vocabulary and the changes in phonology posed a dilemma for teachers of English. Of these two aspects of the language, it is probably the phonology which was the focus of eighteenth-century scholarship. The ‘hard words’ which caused such difficulty in the late sixteenth and seventeenth centuries had been largely assimilated into the language, the less used among these words had disappeared again and the remainder were there to stay and so were conveyed to following generations who mastered them more easily than when they were still fresh in the language. English phonology in the eighteenth century shows a number of instances of change where co-variation existed for some time and where it was not certain which variants would be preferred in a ‘fixed standard’ of the language. Syllable-final /-r/ was being lost in the south-east of England and those writers who favoured a more conservative pronunciation or one where there was the greatest degree of correspondence between spelling and sound were uncertain about what to recommend. John Walker was one of these. He espoused the notion of ‘analogy’ (< Latin analogia ‘proportion’), by which was meant regularity and conformity to general patterns and a correlation or correspondence between components of a whole. When applied to language, analogy was understood to be a one-to-one relationship between spelling and sound. For this reason Walker supported the use of syllable-final /-r/ while recognising that it was being lost across a broad front in the English society of his day. .. Target groups for educational works A particular concern of the time was the education of children. Works intended to offer assistance in this field had already appeared in the late seventeenth century. In Thomas Osborn published A Rational Way of Teaching. Whereby Children and others may be introduced in True Reading, Pronouncing and Writing of the English Tongue; in an Easier and Speedier Method, than any hitherto Published. Shortly after this Edward Cocker’s Cockers Accomplished Schoolmaster: Containing Sure and Easie Directions for Spelling, Reading and Writing English () appeared. This established a line among language studies which continued throughout the eighteenth century; consider, for instance, Henry Dixon’s The English Instructor; or, the Art of Spelling improved. Being a more Plain, Easy and Regular Method of Teaching Young Children, than any Extant () and John Hornsey’s A Short English Grammar in Two Parts: Simplified to the Capacities of Children (). An author who directed her particular attention to the education of children is Ellenor Fenn (, a, b). She was also concerned with
8 Eighteenth-century English
providing an instrument to those women who might not have had the opportunity to learn grammar during their own education. This concern is reflected in the title of her book The Child’s Grammar. Designed to Enable Ladies Who May Not Have Attended to the Subject Themselves to Instruct Their Children (b). In the long titles of language studies, eighteenth-century authors readily named their target group. Among the many grammars of this time there is a clear subset intended for the education of young ladies (see Percy and Tieken-Boon van Ostade [], both this volume). Most of these grammars were written by women, for example Devis (), Eves (), Gardiner (), Mercy (), though not always, see Ussher (), or the target group is mixed as is the case with Newbery (). The concern of women for the education of their children is a natural one, but there may have been additional motivation which lay in the social conditions and mores of the eighteenth century. In his study of women and the family, Ramsbottom (: ) notes that ‘domestic harmony, as portrayed by commentators such as Addison and Steele at the beginning of the century and by Evangelicals at the end, depended upon the wife’s exclusive devotion to her husband’s comfort and welfare.’ Given this situation, the scope for personal intellectual development was limited and so it is understandable that women often turned to the education of their children to attain fulfilment, if only vicariously. .
The question of class
Language use was an issue of relevance to a social group which was increasing steadily in numbers throughout the eighteenth century: the middle classes. Referred to as the ‘middling orders’ at this time (Earle , Rogers ), this was a group which obviously sought acceptance by the established elite who were above them on the social scale. In this context it is worth considering who formed the market for the very many books on language in the eighteenth century. For the poorer segments of English society – servants, artisans, agricultural workers, small farmers – books were beyond their financial reach, even if they were interested in acquiring them. It is also doubtful whether the landed aristocracy were the buyers of the language studies produced by their social inferiors. The all too often futile pleas of the latter for patronage would suggest that the interest of the nobility in matters linguistic was limited to say the least. This leaves a middle section which, by exclusion of the others, must have formed the bulk of book buyers in eighteenth-century England. An issue in research into the strata of eighteenth-century society concerns the relative weight of the ‘middling orders’. Rogers (: ) points out that ‘only a small cohort of merchants and lawyers consistently achieved parliamentary status, comprising at best per cent of the House; and some of these men
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English 9
were entangled in the patronage of the greater landlords’. Statements like these are a reminder that the middle class was still small, but also that it was striving upwards. In this search for social acceptance, the right pronunciation and grammar of English was essential. The middle classes in any society are an essentially urban phenomenon. If the middle classes were increasing numerically, then this must have been true of the cities in Britain at the same time. Indeed this is the case: there is a growing urban population in the eighteenth century (Borsay ). In about per cent of the population lived in centres of more than ,. By this figure was per cent in Britain (Borsay : f.). London had increased from half a million to over a million in the course of the eighteenth century. Edinburgh and Glasgow had similar growth rates, with Glasgow the faster-growing of the two. By the close of the eighteenth century both cities had reached populations of some , each. The population of Dublin went through a similar increase in size: from , to , at the outset of the eighteenth century, it grew to about , by the close of the century (Dickson ). While much of this population growth was at the end of the century and was due to in-migration of people from the surrounding countryside in search of work in the sites of mechanical production, it was also due to a growth in the urban ‘middling orders’ who would have been in charge of enterprises into which labour from the countryside was drawn. .
Grammars for the nation
The union of England and Scotland in led to the dissolution of the Scottish parliament and the transfer of all parliamentary powers to Westminster. The Treaty of Union was greeted in London but was the cause of anti-English riots in Scotland despite the large degree of autonomy which it bestowed on the church and legal system in Scotland. The union with Ireland was not to follow until almost a century later, coming into force on January . However, the United Kingdom of Great Britain in the eighteenth century made a single nation of the entire island of Britain and one of the spin-offs of this single nation was an increased desire to have a single form of English across Britain. An anonymous publication from makes this point in its title: The Many Advantages of a Good Language to any Nation with an Examination of the present State of our own: And also, an Essay towards correcting some Things that are wrong in it. At once there is the view that a single nation requires a single language and that what was available at the time was insufficient. This language should be rational and clearly structured: without something of a regular Grammatical Way of joining Words together, there can be no such thing as an intelligible Language. For a Language is not bare Words and Names put together without Art
10 Eighteenth-century English
and Reason; but words in such Construction, that Persons, and common Things, and their Qualities, Actions, States, Agreements and Disagreements, may be understood according to their Number and Times. Words spoken without the Benefit of the rational Construction, are not Sense, or the Voice of Reason, but Confusion. (Anon. : f.) The deficiencies of English are repeatedly emphasised in the many language studies of the eighteenth century; indeed it is this view which usually offered justification for each new book on the English language. The disarray in which English was at the time was to some a reflection of a general social malaise (or so they would have others see it). Thomas Sheridan, the selfappointed Irish authority on the English language, took this stance early on in his publishing career and in sought to put himself in a position to offer remedies for the then dire situation. Sheridan was not someone to mince words and in his British Education or, the Sources of the Disorders of Great Britain () he spells out in no uncertain terms what he feels is wrong and needs to be done; just consider the long subtitle to this work: Being an Essay Towards Proving, that the Immorality, Ignorance, and False Taste, which so Generally Prevail, are the Natural and Necessary Consequences of the Present Defective System of Education with an Attempt to Shew, that a Revival of the Art of Speaking, and the Study of our own Language, Might Contribute, in a Great Measure, to the Cure of those Evils. The notion that a grammar should serve the political entity of Great Britain and Ireland is evident in the eighteenth century. Richard Johnson () talked of his Grammatical Commentaries as ‘being an Apparatus to a new National Grammar’. A special place in this field must be accorded to Scottish and Irish authors. Growing up in the Celtic regions would have put them at a social disadvantage compared to their writer contemporaries from England. Thus many of them were more than anxious to gain acceptance from the centre of power in the south-east of England. On occasions the Celtic writers in fact recommend themselves as more linguistically aware than those in England. Here is the Scotsman William Kenrick commenting on this issue: It has been remarked as a phenomenon in the literary world, that, while our learned fellow subjects of Scotland and Ireland are making frequent attempts to ascertain, and fix a standard, to the pronunciation of the English tongue, the natives of England themselves seem to be little anxious either for the honour or improvement of their own language: for such the investigation and establishment of a rational criterion of English orthoepy, must certainly be considered. (Kenrick : i) By ‘rational criterion of English orthoepy’ Kenrick would seem to have meant a consistent and unambiguous means of indicating the pronunciation of English. As a Scot and fellow Celt, Kenrick supported the linguistic efforts
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English 11
of Thomas Sheridan. When considering how to indicate pronunciation using the spelling of English, he remarks that ‘The celebrated Mr Sheridan has avoided falling into this erroneous practice [of not having a consistent orthography], and very judiciously proposes to distinguish the sound of words by certain typographical marks to be placed over particular syllables (Kenrick : iv). Kenrick is not alone among Scottish authors in advocating uniformity and consistency in the use of English throughout Great Britain. His fellow Scot, James Buchanan, was equally zealous in his efforts (Emsley ). The title of his book shows this unequivocally: An Essay Towards Establishing a Standard for an Elegant and Uniform Pronunciation of the English Language Through the British Dominions. .
Training for public speaking
The idea of a single nation and a single form of language emanating from its centre is a predominant theme in eighteenth-century writings. These are public matters and the use of language in public was an integral part of the national language complex. Hence, training for speaking in public was a concern which was addressed in print; consider, for example, the title of John Mason’s An Essay on Elocution, Or, Pronunciation intended chiefly for the Assistance of those who instruct others in the Art of Reading. And of those who are often called to speak in Publick (). The major language commentators of the time were concerned with elocution and some of them published dedicated books on the subject. Notable among these is Thomas Sheridan’s Course of Lectures on Elocution () and John Walker’s Elements of Elocution (). The tradition continued across the threshold to the nineteenth century with Samuel Whyte’s An Introductory Essay on the Art of Reading, and Speaking in Public () and William Graham’s Principles of Elocution (). Indeed one can note that in Benjamin Smart’s The Practice of Elocution was already in its fourth edition. .
What is publicly acceptable?
It is only a small step from the effectiveness of public speech to the acceptance of its pronunciation and with this step one reaches that concern of eighteenth-century authors which has had the most enduring effect in English society, namely a concentration more on the form of speech than on its content. First and foremost, the form of speech encompassed pronunciation with grammar a good second. The shift in emphasis can be recognised by considering what authors highlight in their discussions. For instance, it is significant that Mason (: –) in his list of points about what constitutes a bad and what a good pronunciation does not mention any social factors, such as acceptance
12 Eighteenth-century English
of one’s accent in public. This changes with Sheridan who a little more than a decade later in his A Course of Lectures on Elocution () is concerned with specifying a standard for English, a lasting concern of this author; consider his General Dictionary of the English Language (), published towards the end of his life, of which Sheridan says that ‘one main object of [the dictionary] is to establish a plain and permanent standard of pronunciation’. .
Appropriation or plagiarism
To do something better than one’s predecessors was motivation enough for publishing in the seventeenth century. In the following century it was not necessary to have recourse to this justification. Indeed many books dealing with more or less the same subject matter were simply published, perhaps with the expectation of the authors that the reading public would see their efforts as an improvement on those of their predecessors, but it was not necessary to specify this in the title of a book or in a preface to it. However, there are cases where the desire to improve on the works on one’s predecessors was openly declared. By the tenth anniversary of Thomas Sheridan’s death in , Stephen Jones’s Sheridan Improved: A General Pronouncing and Explanatory Dictionary of the English Language was already in its third edition. Similar works continued well into the nineteenth century; consider for instance, Benjamin Smart’s Walker Remodelled: A New Critical Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language which was published in . This practice perhaps goes to show that the authors quoted in the titles of such works were household names and the mention of their names would evoke a feeling of both familiarity and authority in readers. It is true that certain authors had become well known as authorities in their fields and were acknowledged as such by others. For instance, Sedger (: v) stated, some years after Lowth’s grammar had first appeared, that ‘Dr. Lowth […] contributed more to promote the knowledge of English Grammar than any other’. Using precisely the same title of an already published work was not taboo either. In William Johnston brought out A Pronouncing and Spelling Dictionary of the English Language. In John Burn published a book with a very similar title. Only three years after Sheridan produced his Rhetorical Grammar of the English Language, William Kenrick published a book with precisely the same title (Kenrick ). It is true that this was originally prefaced to his dictionary of , but so was Sheridan’s grammar which was published in , one year after the dictionary. Does this practice count as plagiarism? It is difficult to be certain in this period. Generally, authors acknowledge the sources of data which they replicate in a wholesale manner. For instance, the anonymous Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language () gives explicit recognition of sources
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English 13
and predecessors in specifying that ‘the accentuation [is] adjusted according to SHERIDAN and WALKER and the orthography [is] chiefly taken from JOHNSON ’. It may well be that the mention of established authors was a guarantee of quality and hence helped book sales.
Variation in language
The linguistic study of dialectal variation is generally associated with the rise of historical linguistics in the nineteenth century and with the activities of such scholars as Henry Sweet (–) and somewhat later Joseph Wright (–). The lack of academic concern with dialects could be put down to the absence of a scientific framework for the study of language in general. But there is more to this issue than meets the eye. Looking at the eighteenth century one recognises a deliberate neglect of regional features in English (Beal, this volume), indeed of severe condemnation of all traits of language which do not correspond to ‘standard’ usage, whatever the latter might mean exactly. An awareness of dialect differences in England goes back at least to the Middle Ages: Geoffrey Chaucer used Northern English for the purpose of character portrayal in The Reeve’s Tale (Wales : ). The dichotomy between north and south is referred to by later authors on language, notably George Puttenham (d.) who, in his The Arte of English Poesie (), states his preference for ‘our Southerne English’ which is the ‘usual speech at court and that of London and the shires lying about London within lx. myles and not much aboue’ (Mugglestone [] a: ). Somewhat earlier John Hart (d.) in An Orthographie of English () had offered a reformed spelling of English so that ‘the rude countrie Englishman’ can speak the language ‘as the best sort use to speak it’. Furthermore, there was an awareness of the kinds of English spoken in the Celtic regions. Indeed Shakespeare in the ‘Four Nations Scene’ in Henry V uses eye dialect to characterise the speech of English, Welsh, Scottish and Irish characters. Given this awareness of dialects one might imagine that a concern with them would be obvious in works of the seventeenth century. There would seem to be two attitudes here. One is neutral with regard to dialect and the other decidedly in favour of southern speech. John Hart spoke of ‘the flower of the English tongue’, referring to the language of the court in London. About a century later, Christopher Cooper in his Grammatica Linguae Anglicanae () stated that he regarded London speech as ‘the best dialect’, the ‘most pure and correct’. But, significantly, he was liberal towards variation: ‘Everyone pronounceth them [= words] as himself pleases’. Another study worth mentioning here is by John Ray (, A Collection of English Words not Generally Used ) in which he mentions regional pronunciation, but without evaluative comments.
14 Eighteenth-century English
The more neutral attitude can be recognised in the detailed entries which some authors offer in dictionaries of English of the seventeenth century. Here is William Bullokar on dialect: Dialect, a difference of some words, or pronunciation in any language as in England the Dialect or manner of speech of the North, is different from that in the South, and the Western dialect differing from them both. The Grecians had five especiall Dialects: as in The property of speech in Athens: . in Ionia; . In Doris; . In Eolia: and . that manner of speech which was generally used of them all. So every country hath commonly in divers parts thereof some difference of language, which is called the Dialect of that place. (Bullokar, , entry for Dialect, [no pagination]) His entry is echoed later in the century by Thomas Blount who has an even more comprehensive definition: Dialect. is a manner of speech peculiar to some part of a Country or people, and differing from the manner used by other parts or people, yet all using the same Radical Language, for the main or substance of it. In England, the Dialect, or manner of speech in the North, is different from that in the South; and the Western differs from both. As in this example: At London we say, I would eat more cheese if I had it, the Northern man saith, Ay sud eat mare cheese gin ay hader, and the Western man saith, Chud ee’at more chiese on chad it: Chud ee’at more cheese un ich had it. The Grecians had five especial Dialects … So every Country commonly hath in diverse parts of it some difference of language, which is called the Dialect or Subdialect of that place. In Italy, there are above eight several dialects or Subdialects as … (Blount, , entry for Dialect, [no pagination]). Blount is remarkable in that he gives examples to illustrate different dialects of English. However, he was not followed by others. Some time later (), Elisha Coles published An English Dictionary in which he sees dialects as ‘Logick, speech; also a particular Propriety or Idiom in the same speech’ with no reference to regions whatever. Some authors do at least specify that dialects are found in different parts of a country, for example John Kersey who in his Dictionarium Anglo-Britannicum () defines dialect as ‘a Propriety of manner of Speech in any Language, peculiar to each several Province or Country’. This reference to region is also found in Thomas Spence () who says of dialect that it is ‘A polite manner of speaking, or diversity made in any language by the inhabitants in any part of the country where it is spoken; stile; speech’ (The Grand Repository of the English Language, entry for Dialect, [no pagination]). But the great lexicographers of the eighteenth century pay no attention to the regional essence of dialect, at most referring to dialects of classical Greek. Instead they concentrate on its meaning as a manner of expression. Here is the definition offered by Johnson in his authoritative Dictionary of the English Language ():
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English 15
DIALECT .
The subdivision of a language; as the Attic, Doric, Ionic, Æolic dialects. . Stile; manner of expression. When themselves do practise that whereof they write, they change their dialect; and those words they shun, as if there were in them some secret sting. Hooker, b. v. s. . . Language; speech. Both Thomas Sheridan and John Walker are content to adopt this definition and repeat it, for instance ‘Dialect. The subdivision of a language; stile, manner of expression; language, speech’ (Sheridan, , A General Dictionary of the English Language, entry for Dialect, [no pagination]). Both Sheridan and Walker had no time for dialectal variation in speech as this was in direct conflict with their ideology of a standard in English, hence their derisory comments on regional speech in Britain and Ireland. But if one leaves aside the prescriptivism of both Sheridan and Walker then another motivation is recognisable in the neglect of dialect in the eighteenth century. To see this, one can return briefly to Puttenham’s The Arte of English Poesie where one finds the following: ‘After a speach is fully fashioned to the common vnderstanding, & accepted by consent of a whole countrey & nation, it is called a language’. This is again the view of language as a unifying factor, in this case among the different regions of Britain. Here we have a very early reference to a ‘national language’, a notion which was picked up by later authors, see section . above. Attention to dialects would not be reconcilable with the desire for a ‘national language’. In the course of the eighteenth century notions of national language and standard language would seem to have merged, at least for many authors. The variation which was to be suppressed was regional (Beal, this volume) with the parallel valorisation of English in the south-east. As the variation was first and foremost phonetic, especially for speakers whose speech was otherwise non-local, one’s accent became an indicator of one’s relative standardness as a speaker (Beal a, b), something which has remained the case to the present day (Beal ). Standard pronunciation was identified with the pronunciation of the socially higher classes in London and its surroundings. In speech, as in other matters, it was deemed natural to ‘approve as elegant what is customary among our superiors’ (James Beattie in Mugglestone [] a: ). However, standard pronunciation was a fluid entity in itself. Nonetheless, it could be specified sufficiently to delimit speakers with this pronunciation from those without it. Thus the standard became a yardstick with which to measure others and very quickly became a prerequisite for social advancement. The view that mastering the standard improves one’s lot in life becomes increasingly apparent during the eighteenth century. Some of the
16 Eighteenth-century English
authors of this era explicitly recognise this, for example female grammarians such as Anne Fisher, Ellin Devis and Ellenor Fenn, as well as male authors such as Thomas Spence and William Cobbett. The prescription of the standard meant that the regional accents were condemned accordingly: ‘a strong provincial accent … destroys all idea of elegance’ (Roscoe in Mugglestone [] a: ). Indeed the more the standard became an instrument of social inclusion or exclusion, the more it lost its geographical basis in the south-east. By the early nineteenth century the standard was being defined as a form of speech which is characterised by the lack of just this regional basis. Consider the remarks of Benjamin Smart in Walker Remodelled (): ‘The common standard dialect is that in which all marks of a particular place and residence are lost, and nothing appears to indicate any other habit of intercourse than with the well-bred and wellinformed, wherever they be found’. This is not far from what contemporary sociolinguists regard a ‘standard’ to be: ‘an idea in the mind rather than a reality – a set of abstract norms to which actual usage will conform to a greater or lesser extent’ (Milroy and Milroy : ).
Linguistic insecurity: intention or side-effect?
Beal (this volume) rightly remarks that there was a change during the first half of the eighteenth century in the assessment of pronunciation. While Defoe in the s could remark non-judgementally on the attitude of the Northumbrians to features of their pronunciation, after the mid eighteenth century comments are far more critical. A vocabulary was adopted by authors on language which was quite censorious. Some usages were praised but more were condemned as not part of received southern English usage. Although ‘vulgarisms’ and ‘provincialisms’ are lampooned by commentators such as Sheridan and Walker, there is little attempt to specify just what is meant by the standard pronunciation. The standard would seem to have arisen not through an explicit specification of what it entailed, but rather by a process of exclusion. In a way, the standard pronunciation arose by default: it was what remained after all the ‘unacceptable’ features had been weeded out. One could ask why the late eighteenth-century commentators did not attempt a specification of the standard rather than an exclusion of features
This kind of language was to continue through the nineteenth century; consider the titles of such works as W. H. Savage, The Vulgarisms and Improprieties of the English Language, London (). Attitude to language use outside the British Isles could be notably different. For instance, Noah Webster complained about the self-appointed persons ‘who dictate to a nation the rules of speaking, with the same imperiousness as a tyrant gives orders to his vassals’. Webster also notes that ‘even well-bred people and scholars, often surrender their right of private judgement to these literary governors’.
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English 17 Table .. Expressions of praise (positive) and condemnation (negative) in eighteenth-century language studies Positive
elegant, polite, refined, cultivated
Negative
vulgar, ignorant, inaccurate, uneducated, shameful, disgraceful, glaring error, monstrous pronunciation
they disapproved of. One of the difficulties lay in the variation which existed with speakers whom these authors would have approved of. Walker not infrequently sees himself in a quandary given that the established classes of English society used pronunciations which he would not have favoured himself, for example the variation in the pronunciation of great – with [eː] or [iː]: . Ea is pronounced like long slender a in bare, in the following words: bear, bearer, break, forbear, forswear, great, pear, steak, swear, to tear, wear. . The word great is sometimes pronounced as if written greet, generally by people of education, and almost universally in Ireland; but this is contrary to the fixed and settled practice in England. That this is an affected pronunciation, will be perceived in a moment by pronouncing this word in the phrase, Alexander the great; for those who pronounce the word greet, in other cases, will generally in this rhyme it with fate. It is true the ee is the regular sound of this diphthong; but this slender sound of e has, in all probability, given way to that of a as deeper and more expressive of the epithet great. (Walker : , A Critical Pronouncing Dictionary and Expositor of the English Language) When compared to Sheridan one can see that Walker is more systematic: he insists on the value of ‘analogy’ (the one-to-one relationship of sound and spelling) in determining what item in a situation of variation should be preferred. This can be seen with syllable-final /-r/ which was disappearing in south-east English in the eighteenth century. In general, both Sheridan and Walker condemn loss of phonetic substance which is indicated orthographically and see this as a clear sign of vulgarity and slovenliness. ‘Vulgar’ is one of the key labels used by the eighteenth-century prescriptivists (Beal, this volume). Walker is particularly keen to point out what he thinks merits this label. For instance, given that provincial speakers are required to look to the capital for phonetic guidance, any ‘vulgarisms’ used by the inhabitants are especially to be condemned. In his Critical Pronouncing Dictionary a list of ‘faults of the Londoners’ is given, faults of people, who, he argues, ‘as they are the models of pronunciation to the distant provinces, ought to be the more scrupulously correct’ (: xii). Three
18 Eighteenth-century English
of these ‘faults’ are interesting with regard to the history of London English in the last two centuries: SECOND FAULT – Pronouncing w for v, and inversely. The pronunciation of v for w, and more frequently of w for v, among the inhabitants of London, and those not always of the lower order, is a blemish of the first magnitude. THIRD FAULT – Not sounding h after w. The aspirate h is often sunk, particularly in the capital, where we do not find the least distinction of sound between while and wile, whet and wet, where and were, &c. FOURTH FAULT – Not sounding h where it ought to be sounded, and inversely. A still worse habit than the last prevails, chiefly among the people of London, that of sinking the h at the beginning of words where it ought to be sounded, and of sounding it, either where it is not seen, or where it ought to be sunk. The ‘second fault’ listed above is no longer present, nor is the ‘third fault’, though it is found in conservative varieties of English in Scotland and Ireland. The ‘fourth fault’ has since become a prominent marker of urban vernaculars in Britain. By the mid eighteenth century ‘h’-dropping had been singled out as a particularly ‘vulgar’ trait of English pronunciation. Thomas Sheridan in his Course of Lectures on Elocution (: –) offers the following advice to those seeking to reinstate initial /h/ in their speech: ‘The best method of curing this [‘h’-dropping, RH] will be to read over frequently all the words beginning with the letter H and those beginning with Wh in the dictionary, and push them out with the full force of the breath, “till an habit is obtained of aspirating strongly”. ’ Apart from the features, the ‘types’, the phonetic instances, the ‘tokens’, are of interest because many of them reflect usages which failed to establish themselves in standard British English. For instance, contrary to presentday usage, Walker suggests that hospital and humble are properly pronounced without initial /h-/ (Walker [] : ). The upshot of all this criticism and brow-beating of the public was to create an atmosphere of linguistic insecurity. The message from the prescriptivists was clear: English as spoken by nearly everyone was in a perilous state and people needed to act to improve their language. But Sheridan, Walker and other authors like them do not offer a clear solution to what they see as a serious problem. Instead they are content to criticise at every turn without offering an overall remedy. However deficient this stance, it did ensure them continuing attention from an audience plagued by linguistic doubt. Of the two authorities discussed here, it is Walker who was to
Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English 19
become the authority on English usage throughout the entire nineteenth century. It is difficult now to imagine the esteem in which Walker’s dictionary was held, but the very many editions during the nineteenth century testify clearly to this. At the outset of the nineteenth century it was claimed to be ‘a glorious monument of human genius’ (Russel in Mugglestone [] a: ) and by the last third of the nineteenth century it could still be claimed that ‘the name of WALKER, as one of our earliest orthoepists, is known and duly appreciated wherever the English language is spoken’ (Peter Nuttall in Mugglestone [] a: ). Disputed grammatical features When it comes to grammar one cannot find quite the same tenor of condemnation which characterises the comments on English pronunciation. It is true that of all eighteenth-century grammarians, Robert Lowth has the greatest reputation for prescriptivism in the popular imagination, and all too often in the academic imagination as well. But it is to Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade’s merit to have shown that this view of Lowth is two-dimensional. In her contribution to this volume (Tieken-Boon van Ostade []) she has demonstrated that a more nuanced view of Lowth is called for. Posterity has readily seen him as the embodiment of eighteenth-century prescriptivism; whether this assessment is justified or not is a moot point. Notwithstanding the historical accuracy of later views of Lowth, prescriptivism clearly has had a grip on English grammar since the eighteenth century. There are many prohibitions which can be traced to this time. Among these are the following three which are discussed in detail in Tieken-Boon van Ostade [], this volume. (i) Double negation They do not want no support. (ii) Preposition stranding Something I am delighted about. (iii) Split infinitives He advised them to seriously consider the matter. The second and third of the above features have had a precarious existence down to the present day. Preposition stranding (Yáñez-Bouza a, b, Percy, this volume) is more or less the rule today though it can still be avoided in formal styles, as can split infinitives (Fischer ). Double negation disappeared entirely from standard English in the nineteenth century
Just why Walker won out over Sheridan in this respect cannot be determined with certainty. But Sheridan’s Irishness was clearly a disadvantage. Samuel Johnson was annoyed at an Irishman pronouncing on the English language and Victorian England would certainly have favoured an Englishman over an Irishman as a guide to correct usage in language.
20 Eighteenth-century English
and is now seen as a purely dialectal feature. The relegation to non-standard English is a fate which many grammatical features experienced. For instance, double comparatives are no longer found in standard English (Schlüter ; González-Díaz , , ) though they are amply attested dialectally. Change among grammatical constructions continued throughout the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. In particular, structures involving nonfinite verb forms (Molencki ) and sentential complements (Fanego, this volume) underwent subtle shifts in the past two centuries, but were not the object of prescriptive comment in the eighteenth century.
Conclusion
In general one can say that during the codification of English in the eighteenth century one variant was given preference and the others suppressed. This applied in nearly all cases in phonetics, though the variants given preference were not necessarily those which are found today, for instance the CLOTH lexical set (Wells : f.) now has a short vowel in Received Pronunciation. In grammar, codification led to strictures being applied which in many but not all cases led to the demise (in the standard) of one structure in favour of another, for example double negation. In other cases there is variation, for example with preposition stranding, and this has in turn led to insecurity among many speakers about which structure is to be preferred in standard speech and writing. Indeed on the whole one can point to linguistic insecurity as a lasting, if unintended, legacy of the eighteenth century and one which still characterises the relationship between vernacular and formal forms of English.
2
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation JOA N C . BEA L University of Sheffield
Towards a standard of pronunciation
It is generally agreed that Received Pronunciation as a distinct and widely recognised sociolect did not exist before the nineteenth century and was not named as such until Ellis used the phrase to describe a pronunciation used ‘all over the country, not widely differing in any particular locality’ (– : ). However, as Raymond Hickey has reminded us in the introduction, the notion that one type of pronunciation was superior to others had been around at least since the sixteenth century, when most commentators broadly agreed with Puttenham () that the ‘best’ pronunciation is ‘the vsuall speach of the Court, and that of London and the shires lying about London within lx myles’. What is lacking from these early accounts is any prescription or proscription of specific features: readers are told where and from whom the most prestigious pronunciation can be heard, but are not advised to adopt or avoid any particular sequence of phonemes. In the early seventeenth century Alexander Gil provides what Dobson acknowledges to be ‘the best account of seventeenth-century dialectal pronunciation’ (: ), giving examples of Northern, Western and Eastern pronunciations, but recommending that only the ‘Common Dialect’ should be used, at least in prose. He uses terms such as ‘barbarous’ to refer to regional pronunciations, and reserves his strongest condemnation for a social group which he calls the ‘Mopsae’, who appear to be advanced speakers carrying forward changes ‘from below’ which have their geographical origin to the East of London. However, even Gil allowed a certain licence to poets and, in setting out his recommendations for reformed spelling, suggested that this may vary according to dialect. Towards the end of the century Christopher Cooper, considered by Dobson (: ) to be the ‘greatest’ of the seventeenth-century phoneticians, included a two-page section on ‘Barbarous Dialect’ in which he uses semi-phonetic spelling to indicate pronunciations ‘not sounded after the best dialect’ (Sundby : ). These include chimley for ‘chimney’ and sarvice for ‘service’: pronunciations which would be proscribed in the eighteenth century. However, Cooper’s list is not long and it is aimed at the reader who ‘would write more exactly’: the list is there primarily 21
22 Eighteenth-century English
to warn against being misled by ‘Barbarous Pronunciation’ into misspelling the words, which is perhaps why Cooper here uses semi-phonetic spelling rather than describing the ‘barbarous’ sounds. This lack of explicit prescription or proscription in sixteenth- and early seventeenth-century accounts of English pronunciation is not surprising if we consider, on the one hand, the main objective of these texts and, on the other, the stage that standardisation of English had reached by this time. Orthoepists of this period were mainly concerned with spelling reform and wrote about the ‘best’ English mainly because a more ‘phonetic’ spelling would need to represent a particular set of pronunciations. In choosing to represent the speech of the Court and the London area, they were reflecting an existing consensus as to what was the most prestigious sociolect. There had been, as yet, no real attempt to specify what features of pronunciation made up this ‘best’ speech. This is exactly what could be expected of a period when, in Haugen’s terms, selection of a norm had taken place, and that norm had been accepted throughout the country, but as yet there had been no codification of the forms that characterised it (Haugen : –). Haugen defines codification as a process that leads to ‘minimal variation in form’ (: ), and it is generally agreed that, while the selection and acceptance of a spoken norm took place in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, codification began in the eighteenth century, a period often referred to in histories of English as ‘the age of correctness’. Milroy and Milroy point out that ‘the eighteenth century was the successful culmination of a long process. Its achievement was to establish, through codification, a much more widespread consciousness of a relatively uniform “correct” English than had been possible before’ (: ). They argue that access to the grammars and dictionaries which embody and transmit codification intensifies prescription as these books come to be regarded as authorities. While the idea of standardisation had been around at least since Caxton’s () lament against ‘dyuersite and change of langage’, the implementation of a standard was a long process which gathered momentum in the eighteenth century. Although ‘prescriptive’ grammars of English, such as Greenwood’s An Essay Towards a Practical English Grammar () were being published throughout the eighteenth century, the codification of pronunciation was not a primary concern until quite late in the century. As Charles Jones (: ) points out, Greenwood includes a section on ‘Orthoepy’, defined as ‘the Art of true Speaking’, but his proscriptions are on the same level as Cooper‘s ‘Barbarous Pronunciations’, scanty and concentrated on those that suggest divergence from the ‘true’ spelling: ‘we must not pronounce stomp, shet, sarvice, tunder, gove, eend, ommost but stamp, shut, service, tinder, gave, end, almost’ (: ). Elsewhere in his Essay, he warns against pronunciations of specific letters that he considers incorrect, thus under ‘O’: It is sometimes sounded like obscure U, as when we carelessly pronounce Condition, London, Compasse, as if they were written Cundition, Lundon,
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation 23
Cumpasse, &c. And so likewise some pronounce come, done, some, Son, Love, Dove, as if written cume, dune, sume &c.’ (: ) The ‘obscure u’, probably something similar to schwa, was to be a particular bugbear for eighteenth-century commentators because its use contravened the principle articulated by Johnson that ‘for pronunciation, the best general rule is, to consider those as the most elegant speakers who deviate least from the written word’ (). In the early eighteenth century, as in the seventeenth, ‘deviation from the written word’ seemed to be the principal reason for proscribing pronunciations, and comments of this kind are scattered among works whose primary focus is elsewhere. Referring to the period –, Jones notes that ‘one has to trawl through the many and various spelling books, grammars and treatises of the period to find statements which can be interpreted as commenting on the social value of pronunciation’ (: ). .
Codification of a ‘good’ pronunciation, – A change in attitude: the ‘snob value of a good pronunciation’
In his monograph on the history of Standard English pronunciation, Holmberg wrote that ‘it is in the eighteenth century that the snob value of a good pronunciation began to be recognised’ (: ). However, close examination of a wider range of eighteenth-century texts than was available to Holmberg reveals that precise prescription of a ‘good’ pronunciation, and, by implication, proscription of ‘bad’ ones, really begins in the second half of the century. Lynda Mugglestone tells us that ‘five times as many works on elocution appeared between and than had done so in the years before ’ ([] a: ). Likewise, Jones refers to the occurrence between and of ‘a sea-change in the way linguistic usage is perceived to relate to criteria such as social status and place of geographical origin’ (: ). Most commentators have attributed this change to social and economic factors in a period when greater social mobility created a class of upwardly mobile speakers prone to what Labov (: –) terms ‘linguistic insecurity’. Many late eighteenth-century authors acknowledge this, advertising their work as suitable for those engaged in ‘business’ or ‘trade’. Withers writes that ‘the importance of a correct Mode of Expression in Business is sufficiently obvious’ and recommends his work to ‘Shopmen, Clerks and all who are engaged in the Transactions of commercial Life’ (: ), noting on the same page that Britain is ‘a Country where the Industrious may become affluent, and the Affluent ascend to the chief Employments of the State’. It was precisely the newly affluent, now able to ‘ascend to the chief Employments of the State’, who both felt the need for and could afford the elocution lessons and printed guides which were to proliferate in the last few decades of the eighteenth century.
24 Eighteenth-century English
One of the keywords used by late-eighteenth-century commentators on language is ‘vulgar’, which appears ninety-six times in John Walker’s Critical Pronouncing Dictionary (), almost always with reference to the pronunciation of the lower classes. The upwardly mobile would be conscious of their ‘vulgar’ origins and anxious to avoid being mistaken for members of the class below them, from which they had risen. The elocutionist Thomas Sheridan recognises this when he writes that ‘pronunciation … is a sort of proof that a person has kept good company, and on that account is sought after by all, who wish to be considered as fashionable people, or members of the beau monde’ (: ). On the other hand, linguistic signs of ‘vulgarity’ might create a bar to social mobility. Thomas Spence, an autodidact of humble origin who dedicated his life to schemes for improving the lot of ‘the laborious part of the people’ (: Sig Br), asks: Why should People be laughed at all their lives for betraying their vulgar education, when the Evil is so easily remedied. How ridiculous it is to hear People that can read saying ‘Any Think – A Horange – Idear – Noar.’ (The Giant Killer, or Anti-Landlord No. , August ) Spence thought that this ‘evil’ could be ‘remedied’ simply by teaching the lower classes to read by means of a phonetic alphabet. It is worth noting that the pronunciations singled out here are precisely those that depart from the pronunciation suggested by the orthography:
pronounced [ɪŋk] rather than [ɪŋ], possibly as a hypercorrection of [ɪn]; /h/ added to a word beginning with a vowel, again a hypercorrection, this time of ‘h-dropping’; and intrusive /r/. Spence seems less aware of regional variation, but is concerned that the literate poor should not be perceived as uneducated because of their speech. As a notorious Radical, Spence was on the side of the poor, but others were less charitable. Charles Coote writes: Persons of vulgar breeding, instead of exhibiting any traces of improvement derived from the frequent hearing of such as excel in this respect, invariably pursue the same routine of barbarism and inaccuracy in their expression, neglectful of every opportunity of rectifying their taste in that particular. (: iii) In other words, the lower classes are to blame for their speech being ‘incorrect’ because they could easily emulate their betters, if only they took the trouble. Walker (: xii) considered his ‘countrymen, the cockneys’ particularly reprehensible because, living in London, they had access to the ‘best’ speakers, and so had no excuse for their ‘vulgar’ pronunciation.
Obviously, this total includes the headword VULGAR itself, which Walker defines as ‘Plebian [sic], suiting to the common people, practised among the common people, mean, low, being of the common rate; publick, commonly bruited.’
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation 25
Walker, in particular, warns against ‘vulgar’ pronunciations in many instances where he is attempting to suppress variants that were once considered acceptable. When describing the various sounds of the letter e, Walker discusses such a case: Thirty years ago everyone pronounced the first syllable of merchant like the monosyllable march, and as it was anciently written marchant. Service and servant are still heard among the lower order of speakers, as if written sarvice and sarvant: and, even among the better sort, we still hear, Sir, your Sarvant; though this pronunciation of the word singly would be looked upon as a mark of the lowest vulgarity … As this modern pronunciation of the e has the tendency to simplify the language by lessening the number of exceptions, it ought certainly to be indulged. (Walker : ) The actual dictionary entry for merchant has attached to it one of the longest notes to be found in the Critical Pronouncing Dictionary: Mr. Sheridan pronounces the e in the first syllable of this word, like the a in march ; and it is certain that, about thirty years ago, this was the general pronunciation; but since that time the sound of a has been gradually wearing away; and the sound of e is so fully established, that the former is now become gross and vulgar, and is only to be heard among the lower orders of the people. It is, indeed, highly probable, that, however coarse this sound of e may now seem, it was once, not only the common pronunciation, but the most agreeable to analogy … Sermon. service, vermin &c. are still pronounced by the vulgar, as if written sarmon, sarvice, varmint &c.; and this was probably the ancient manner of pronouncing every e in the same situation. This analogy is now totally exploded; and except clerk, sergeant and a few proper names, we have scarcely another word in the language where this e has not its true sound. … Dr Kenrick concurs, in my opinion, that pronouncing the e in this word like a is vulgar; and every other orthoepist, who gives the sound of the vowels, marks it as I have done. (: no pagination) In this case, the pronunciation prevalent in the earlier part of the eighteenth century, as evidenced in spellings such as sarvant, desarve in letters of the Wentworth family (see Wyld : –), had fallen out of favour by . As I have pointed out elsewhere (: –), Walker’s prescriptions here accord exactly with present-day RP: from this lexical set only clerk, sergeant and a few proper names such as Derby(shire), Hertford(shire) retain the /ɑː / pronunciation. In this case, Walker was approving what he judged to be an innovation, largely because it was ‘received’, as the opinion of the majority of his fellow-orthoepists shows, and so the alternative was judged ‘gross’ and ‘vulgar’. Walker recognised that fashions in language change, and that what was once considered ‘vulgar’ might later be ‘polite’ and vice versa. Discussing
26 Eighteenth-century English
the pronunciation of the word oblige, he invokes no less an authority than Johnson’s patron, Lord Chesterfield: When Lord Chesterfield wrote his letters to his son, the word oblige was, by many polite speakers, pronounced as if written obleege, to give a hint of their knowledge of the French language … But it was so far from having generally obtained, that Lord Chesterfield strictly enjoins his son to avoid this pronunciation as affected. In a few years, however, it became so general that none but the lowest vulgar ever pronounced it in the English manner; but upon the publication of this nobleman’s letters, which was about twenty years after he wrote them, his authority has had so much influence with the polite world as to bid fair for restoring the i in this word to its original rights; and we not unfrequently hear it now pronounced with the broad English i in those circles where, a few years ago, it would have been an infallible mark of vulgarity. (: ) Although, as I have stated in section , the phenomenon of ‘Received Pronunciation’ and the use of this term to refer to it, did not arise until the nineteenth century, Walker uses the word received to refer to and in collocation with pronunciation. In his Preface he writes of ‘those sounds … which are the most generally received among the learned and polite’ (: viii) and, referring to the various pronunciations of the word yeoman, he recommends the one with /oː/ in the first syllable as ‘the most received pronunciation’ (: no pagination). Walker and his contemporaries were prescribing the pronunciations which were most acceptable in ‘polite’ society and proscribing those deemed ‘vulgar’. . ‘An uniformity of pronunciation’: the suppression of national and regional variation As we saw in section , London had been singled out as the home of the ‘best’ English from at least the sixteenth century, and in the eighteenth century there is hardly any dissent from the view that the ‘best’ English is that of London, or rather of educated speakers in London. William Kenrick, while acknowledging that ‘sounds, which appear very uncouth and barbarous to some people, are easily uttered and pleasant enough to the ears of others’ (: ), nevertheless gives a clear indication of his definition of ‘proper’ pronunciation: By being properly pronounced, I would be always understood to mean, pronounced agreeable to the general practice of men of letters and polite speakers in the Metropolis; which is all the standard of propriety I concern myself about, respecting the arbitrary pronunciation or quality of sound in monosyllables. (: ) London’s sphere of influence, increased after the Act of Union, made it the capital, not just of England, but of Great Britain. James Buchanan’s
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation 27
Linguae Britannicae Vera Pronuntiatio (‘The true pronunciation of the British Language’) is acknowledged to be the first real pronouncing dictionary of English (Emsley : ). In using the Latin term for ‘Britons’ or ‘of the British’ (cf. Cooper’s Grammatica Linguae Anglicanae), Buchanan deliberately invokes the Union, and he makes it clear that he sees no merit in the pronunciation of his fellow Scots, or, to use the term which was ‘politically correct’ in the eighteenth century, ‘North Britons’: The people of North Britain seem, in general, to be almost at as great a loss for proper accent and just pronunciation as foreigners … I therefore beg leave to recommend this book to the perusal of all whose business requires them to speak in public, and all teachers of youth in that part of the united kingdom; by a proper application to which they may in a short time speak as properly and intelligibly, as if they had been born and bred in London: and be no more distinguished by that rough and uncouth brogue which is so harsh and unpleasant to an English ear. (: xv) Buchanan takes it for granted that any educated ‘North Briton’ would aspire to sound like a Londoner, and colludes in the English judgement of Scottish pronunciation as ‘rough … uncouth … harsh and unpleasant’. Educated Scots were among the most prolific purveyors and most eager consumers of guides to ‘correct’ pronunciation in the late eighteenth century. This is partly due to a politically motivated desire to enhance the unity of the nation by encouraging and enabling all citizens to ‘speak the same language’, that is that of London; but there is also a personal motivation to escape the stigma of the ‘rough and uncouth brogue’. Scots who were resident in London, such as James Elphinston and Sylvester Douglas, were acutely aware of the stigma. Douglas, who practised law in the capital, wrote: There are, I believe, few natives of North-Britain, who have had occasion either to visit or reside in this country, that have not learned by experience the disadvantages which accompany their idiom and pronounciation [sic]. I appeal especially to those whose professions or situations oblige them to speak in public. In the pulpit, at the bar, or in parliament, a provincial phrase sullies the lustre of the brightest eloquence, and the most forceful reasoning loses half its effect when disguised in the awkwardness of a provincial dress. (Jones : ) In the Select Society of Edinburgh, one of the most important debating clubs of the Scottish Enlightenment, published a set of regulations ‘for promoting the reading and speaking of the English Language in Scotland’ in which they argued that increased communication between Scotland and London had exacerbated the Scots’ sense of inferiority: As the intercourse between this part of GREAT-BRITAIN and the Capital daily increases, both on account of business and amusement, and must still go on increasing, gentlemen educated in SCOTLAND have
28 Eighteenth-century English
long been sensible of the disadvantages under which they labour, from their imperfect knowledge of the ENGLISH TONGUE, and the impropriety with which they speak it. (cited in Jones : ) The Select Society go on to argue that ‘it is not impossible for persons born and educated in this country, to acquire such knowledge of the ENGLISH TONGUE, as to write it with some tolerable purity’ and advocate the importation of ‘a proper number of persons from ENGLAND’ to teach the adult citizens and children of Edinburgh. As Jones points out, this plan reflects the Enlightenment view that ‘a betterment of society was possible through the rational framework of science, education and hard work’ (: ). They knew the value of a ‘good’ pronunciation and were prepared to pay for it and work at acquiring it and specific guidelines for Scots were to become a feature of the most successful pronouncing dictionaries of the late eighteenth century: both Sheridan () and Walker () include a set of ‘rules’ to help the ‘natives of Scotland’ avoid the shibboleths of their nationality. Although Buchanan used the term ‘united kingdom’ in the extract quoted above, he uses lower case letters because the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland was not yet in existence. However, even before the Act of Union brought this about, Ireland was a Dominion of the English Crown, and the English-speaking urban elite of Ireland, like their counterparts in Scotland, were aware of their own ‘harsh and unpleasant brogue’. One of the most successful elocutionists of the eighteenth century was the Irishman Thomas Sheridan, whose Lectures on Elocution were delivered in Bristol, Oxford and Edinburgh and published in . Here, he advocates the teaching of English and the establishment of a society like the Select Society of Edinburgh, one objective of which would be ‘the establishment of an uniformity of pronunciation throughout all his Majesty’s British dominions’ (: ). Sheridan goes on to argue the political and social benefits of such ‘uniformity’: [I]t can not be denied that an uniformity of pronunciation throughout Scotland, Wales and Ireland, as well as through the several counties of England, would be a point much to be wished; as it might in a great measure contribute to destroy those odious distinctions between subjects of the same king, and members of the same community, which are ever attended with ill consequences, and which are chiefly kept alive by difference of pronunciation and dialects; for these in a manner proclaim the place of a man’s birth, whenever he speaks, which otherwise could not be known by any other marks in mixed societies. (: ) No doubt Sheridan had experienced the ‘odious distinctions’ at first hand: he is thought to have had an uneasy relationship with Dr Johnson, who asked ‘what entitles Sheridan to fix the pronunciation of English? He has, in the first instance, the disadvantage of being an Irishman’ (Boswell, ed. Birkbeck
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation 29
Hill, : ii, ). Sheridan refers in the Lectures to the pronunciation of the ‘gentlemen of Ireland’ and the ‘mistakes’ they make in attempting to imitate the English, and, in his pronouncing dictionary, A General Dictionary of the English Language. One object of which, is to establish a plain and permanent standard of pronunciation (), he includes a set of ‘Rules to be observed by the Natives of Ireland, in order to attain a just pronunciation of English’ (: ) which were also incorporated into Walker’s Critical Pronouncing Dictionary (). Sheridan also has specific advice for the ‘inhabitants of Wales’: The peculiarity of the Welsh pronunciation arises chiefly from their constantly substituting the three pure mutes, in the room of the three impure; and the three aspirate semivowels in the place of the three flat. Thus instead of b they use p; for g they use k, or hard c; and for d they employ t. Thus instead of blood they say plut, for God, Cot, and for dear, tear. In like manner, in the use of the semivowels, they substitute f in the place of v; s in the place of z; etħ in the room of eth and eʃh in that of ezh. Thus instead of virtue and vice, they say firtue and fice; instead of zeal and praise, seal and praisse, instead of these and those, tħesse and tħosse, instead of azhur, osier, ashur, oshir. […] Thus there are no less than seven of our consonants which the Welsh never pronounce. (: ) As I have pointed out elsewhere (b: f.), this is one of the most long-standing stereotypes of Welsh English pronunciation, exploited by Shakespeare in Henry V to mark out the speech of Fluellen. What is to be noted here is Sheridan’s assumption that the Welsh are in the wrong, ‘constantly substituting’ their voiceless consonants for ‘our’ voiced ones, which they ‘never pronounce’. According to Sheridan, the ‘people of Somersetshire’ perversely perpetrate the opposite error: they ‘pronounce the semivowels in a way directly opposite to that of the Welsh … for father they say vather, for Somersetshire, Zomerzetshire, for tħin, thin’ (Sheridan ). In his Lectures on Elocution, Sheridan advocates the speech of the Court as a model, and notes that ‘all the other dialects, are sure marks, either of a provincial, rustic, pedantic or mechanic education; and therefore have some degree of disgrace annexed to them’ (: ). Walker likewise notes that ‘there is scarcely any part of England remote from the Capital where a different system of pronunciation does not prevail’ (: xiii). Wherever a regional pronunciation is described by these late-eighteenthcentury commentators, it is in derogatory terms, but comments in the earlier part of the century were more neutral. Daniel Defoe, encountering on his travels an idiosyncratic pronunciation later to become known as the
See Hickey (b) for a fuller discussion of these. Here the crossed < tħ> indicates the voiceless fricative.
30 Eighteenth-century English
‘Northumbrian burr’, notes this as a curiosity of which the ‘natives’ are proud: I must not quit Northumberland without taking notice, that the Natives of this Country, of the antient original Race or Families, are distinguished by a Shibboleth upon their Tongues in pronouncing the Letter R, which they cannot utter without a hollow Jarring in the Throat, by which they are as plainly known, as a foreigner is in pronouncing the Th: this they call the Northumberland R, or Wharle; and the Natives value themselves upon that Imperfection, because, forsooth, it shews the Antiquity of their Blood. (–: vol. iii. f.) As we might expect, later eighteenth-century commentators are much more proscriptive. Sheridan refers to the ‘difficulties of those who wish to cure themselves of a provincial or vitious pronunciation’, citing this northern pronunciation of /r/ as an example: The letter R is very indistinctly pronounced by many; nay in several of the Northern counties of England, there are scarce any of the inhabitants, who can pronounce it at all. Yet it would be strange to suppose, that all those people, should be so unfortunately distinguished, from the rest of the natives of this island, as to be born with any peculiar defect in their organs; when this matter is so plainly to be accounted for, upon this principle of imitation and habit. (: ) Sheridan sees the burr as a speech defect: northerners simply cannot pronounce /r/ correctly. Kenrick describes it in similar terms: In the northern parts of England, particularly in and about Newcastle, we find the r deprived of its tremulating sound, and very awkwardly pronounced somewhat like a w or oau. Round the rude rocks the ragged Rachel runs is a line frequently put into the mouths of Northumbrians, to expose their incapacity of pronouncing the r, as it is sounded by the inhabitants of the southern counties: and indeed their recital of it has a singular and whimsical effect. (: ) Even James Adams, who is more tolerant of regional diversity than most of his contemporaries, writes of the letter R that ‘the inhabitants of the county
This ‘tongue-twister’ originates in a nursery rhyme: Round and round the rugged rock The ragged rascal ran How many R’s are there in that? Tell me if you can.
Although Kenrick suggests here that it was used to ‘expose’ the Northumbrians, it is now recited as a ‘party-piece’ by Northumbrians who, like their ancestors encountered by Defoe, take pride in a feature that ‘shews the Antiquity of their Blood’. See Beal (b: –) for a fuller account of this. See Häcker () for a discussion of Adams’s linguistic ideas.
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation 31
of Durham … cannot pronounce these words, without a disagreeable rattling of the throat’ (: ). Another example of early eighteenth-century neutrality towards an observed regional variant giving way to late-century intolerance is the treatment of the northern pronunciation of in e.g. cup. Before the seventeenth century, reflexes of Middle English (ME) short u and ‘shortened’ ME ō as in cup, put, good, blood would all have been pronounced with something like [Ʊ] throughout England. The development which Wells describes as ‘the FOOT-STRUT split’ (: ) is first noticed by seventeenth-century orthoepists who ‘distinguish the ŭ of cut from that of put’ (Dobson : ). These orthoepists were presumably reporting developments in the South of England, for the lack of a FOOT-STRUT split is one of the most salient markers of northern English speech today. However, the ‘northernness’ of this feature (not, note, the ‘southernness’ of the split) was not remarked on until the eighteenth century, when the earliest evidence comes from John Kirkby, a native of Cumbria, who notes that his ‘seventh vowel’, found in skull, gun, supper, figure, nature, ‘is scarce known to the Inhabitants of the North, who always use the short sound of the eighth vowel’ (as in good, stood, foot)’ (: ). Apart from the assumption that the southern pronunciation is the norm, Kirkby has nothing derogatory to say about this, but at the end of a section in which he has outlined the faults of the Irish, Scots, Welsh and Cockneys, Walker singles this feature out for particular opprobrium: [T]hose at a considerable distance from the capital do not only mispronounce many words taken separately, but they scarcely pronounce with purity a single word, syllable or letter. If the short sound of the letter u in trunk, sunk etc., differ from the sound of that letter in the northern parts of England, where they sound it like the u in bull, and nearly as if the words were written troonk, soonk, etc., it necessarily follows that every word where that letter occurs must by these provincials be mispronounced. (: xiii) Several northern orthoepists show no evidence of a FOOT-STRUT split, confirming Kirkby’s observation that the equivalent of RP /Λ/ was ‘scarce known to Inhabitants of the North’. Thomas Spence, a native of Newcastle, has only one ‘short’ symbol, which he uses in cup, cut, trunk, and so on as well as bull, put, and so on. Likewise William Ward, from Beverley in the East Riding of Yorkshire, tells us that ‘U is commonly short before two or more Consonants; as in stubble, rust, percussion; and before single Consonants at the end of Words, as put, thus, rub’ (: ). Kenrick misinterprets Ward’s remark as evidence of what looks like hypercorrection: It is further observable of this sound, that the people of Ireland, Yorkshire, and many other provincials mistake its use; applying it to words which in London are pronounced with the u full as in no. of the Dictionary: as bull, wool, put, push, all of which they pronounce as the inhabitants of
32 Eighteenth-century English
the Metropolis do trull, blood, rut, rush. Thus the ingenious Mr. Ward of Beverley, has given us in his grammar the words put, thus and rub as having one quality of sound; but unless by the word put he meant the substantive, a Dutch game of cards so called, or the ludicrous appellation given to provincials of country put, it is never so pronounced. (: ) However, we can see from Ward’s statement cited above that he only shows a lack of FOOT-STRUT split, providing no evidence as to the quality of the vowel. Nevertheless, Kenrick’s remarks are typical of the metropolitan point of view: ‘provincials mistake its use’. The suppression of national and regional variation was thus a major objective for eighteenth-century elocutionists. Regional variants were viewed as ‘defects’ or ‘mistakes’, which could be corrected by the purchase of a pronouncing dictionary written by somebody familiar with the educated speech of London. Just as Sheridan’s credentials as an Irishman were questioned by Johnson, so ‘provincials’ who had the audacity to give advice were treated condescendingly: Kenrick’s reference to ‘the ingenious Mr Ward of Beverly’ is sarcastic, and, when seeking support for his pronouncing dictionary, Spence was openly challenged on this matter, as we are told by Welford: When soliciting subscriptions to this curious work he called upon the Rev. H. Moises, master of the Grammar-School, morning lecturer of All Saints’ Church, for the purpose of requesting him to become a subscriber to the work. As Mr. Spence had a strong Northern accent, Mr. Moises enquired what opportunities he had had of acquiring a just knowledge of the pronunciation of the English Language. ‘Pardon me’, said Spence, ‘I attend All Saints’ Church every Sunday Morning!’. (: f.) Although there was a consensus that London speech was the model of ‘correctness’, and doubt was cast on the credentials of ‘provincial’ authors who attempted to prescribe pronunciation, some Londoners were singled out for criticism. Sheridan includes in his list of ‘provincials’, who find ‘exactness’ of pronunciation ‘unattainable’, ‘all British subjects, whether inhabitants of Scotland, Ireland, Wales, the several counties of England, or the city of London, who speak a corrupt dialect of the English tongue’ (: ). John Walker, himself a Londoner, goes further, including in his Critical Pronouncing Dictionary a list of ‘faults of the Londoners’, who, he argues, ‘as they are the models of pronunciation to the distant provinces, ought to be the more scrupulously correct’ (: xii). A case in point here is that of ‘h-dropping’, a feature which Wells refers to as ‘the single most powerful pronunciation shibboleth in England’ (: ) and which was first proscribed by Sheridan: There is one defect which more generally prevails in the counties than any other, and indeed is gaining ground among the politer part of the
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation 33
world, I mean the omission of the aspirate in many words by some, and in most by others. (: ) Sheridan here gives no precise geographical location for the ‘defect’, but Walker writes that the habit ‘prevails, chiefly among the people of London, … of sinking the h at the beginning of words where it ought to be sounded, and of sounding it, either where it is not seen, or where it ought to be sunk’ (: xiii). Walker goes on to provide a definitive list of words in which orthographic should be silent: Heir, heiress, herb, herbage, honest, honesty, honestly, honour, honorable, honorably, hospital, hostler, hour, hourly, humble, humbly, humbles, humour, humourist, humorous, humorously, humoursome (). Neither Walker nor Sheridan describe ‘h-dropping’ as ‘vulgar’: their chief objection seems to be that it does not accord with the spelling, and so can only be allowed in a closed set of words of French or Latin origin. As I have discussed in more detail elsewhere (: –), late eighteenth-century authorities such as Sheridan, Walker and Elphinston disagree as to the exact membership of this set, Walker’s list being the most extensive. It is noticeable, though, that a list compiled with reference to twenty-first-century RP would be much shorter: herb, humble, humour and their derivatives are all now pronounced with initial /h/ in this variety. It would appear that Sheridan and Walker are providing very early evidence for the salience of /h/-dropping in the late eighteenth century, and that the stigmatisation of this feature as the most reprehensible of vulgarisms really belongs to the nineteenth century. .
‘Fixing’ the language
Quite apart from variation that was socially or geographically motivated, there were in the eighteenth century, as at any period in the history of English, variants that were the result of linguistic change in progress, or the residue of earlier changes. These were not necessarily associated with any particular social group or region, and, in the earlier part of the eighteenth century tended to be tolerated. However, the process of codification in the second half of the century ensured that one variant would be given preference and the other suppressed. Sometimes, the eighteenth-century orthoepists’ justification for their selection of variants seems arbitrary. There has been a great deal of research into the variability of pronunciations of words like great, break and steak in the Early Modern period, and their anomalous pronunciation in present-day RP (anomalous, that is, with regard to the pronunciation of the majority of
See Mugglestone ([] a: –) for an extensive and very well-illustrated account of the stigmatisation of ‘h-dropping’ in the nineteenth century.
34 Eighteenth-century English
words with the same Middle English vowel, for example peak, speak, meat). In his Plan of a Dictionary, Samuel Johnson notes the variability of pronunciation of great, but does not attempt to promote either as ‘correct’: Some words have two sounds, which may be equally admitted, as being equally defensible by authority. Thus great is differently used. For Swift and him despis’d the farce of state The sober follies of the wise and great POPE And if misfortune made the throne her seat And none could be unhappy but the great ROWE (: ) Walker has no such scruples: . Ea is pronounced like long slender a in bare, in the following words: bear, bearer, break, forbear, forswear, great, pear, steak, swear, to tear, wear. . The word great is sometimes pronounced as if written greet, generally by people of education, and almost universally in Ireland; but this is contrary to the fixed and settled practice in England. That this is an affected pronunciation, will be perceived in a moment by pronouncing this word in the phrase, Alexander the great; for those who pronounce the word greet, in other cases, will generally in this rhyme it with fate. It is true the ee is the regular sound of this diphthong; but this slender sound of e has, in all probability, given way to that of a as deeper and more expressive of the epithet great. (: ) Of course, Walker’s explanation for the anomalous pronunciation of great is a post-hoc rationalisation: there is no reason why /еː/ should be more ‘expressive’ of greatness than /iː/. Having made this point, he then needs to explain break: . The same observations are applicable to the word break; which is much more expressive of the action when pronounced brake than breek, as it is sometimes affectedly pronounced. () It is disappointing that Walker has no explanation for steak, as I am sure he could have argued that stake sounds ‘meatier’ than steek. Here, he is arguing for ‘irregular’ pronunciations on the basis that they ‘sound better’ and that the alternative seems ‘affected’. Arbitrary though his explanations may be, Walker has backed the winners here: apart from the later diphthongisation of /еː/ to /еi/ great, break and steak are pronounced in present-day RP exactly as Walker recommended. It is also worth remarking that Walker describes the disfavoured pronunciations as ‘affected’. He defines this word as ‘studied with over-much care’, and usually employs this term to describe pronunciations which are
See, for instance, Milroy and Harris ().
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation 35
‘French’, such as that of oblige against which Lord Chesterfield warned his son. Elsewhere, it seems to be used with reference to what would now be called ‘hypercorrection’: the over-extension of a rule. Thus, in determining which of the class of words spelt with the digraph should be pronounced with /аi/ and which with /ɔi/, Kenrick warns his reader to steer between the Scylla of vulgarity and the Charybdis of affectation: A vicious custom indeed prevails, in common conversation, of sinking the first broad sound intirely, or rather of converting both into the sound of i or y … marked … XVI in the Dictionary, thus oil, toil are frequently pronounced exactly like isle, tile. This is a fault which the Poets are inexcusable for promoting, by making such words rhime to each other. And yet there are some words so written, which by long use, have almost lost their true sound, such are boil, join and many others; which it would now appear affectation to pronounce otherwise than bile, jine. We find, indeed, that this mode of pronunciation becomes every day more general. (: ) In most cases where a choice is made between variant pronunciations, as with grammatical and orthographical variants, principles of regularity and analogy tended to be invoked by late eighteenth-century authorities. An example of this is Walker’s explanation for his recommendation of the pronunciation /su:t/ for soot in defiance of the recommendations of several of his fellow orthoepists and elocutionists and the chimney-sweeps themselves: Notwithstanding I have Mr Sheridan, Mr Nares, Dr Kenrick, W. Johnston, Mr Perry and the professors of the Black Art themselves, against me in the pronunciation of this word, I have ventured to prefer the regular pronunciation to the irregular. The adjective sooty has its regular sound among the correctest speakers; which has induced Mr Sheridan to mark it so; but nothing can be more absurd than to mark the substantive in one manner and the adjective deriving from it by adding y, in another. The other Orthoepists, therefore, who pronounce both these words with the oo like ŭ, are more consistent than Mr Sheridan, though, upon the whole, not so right. (: no pagination) Walker believes the ‘regular’ pronunciation of the digraph to be /uː/ and sets out the allowable exceptions in one of the ‘rules’ which appear at the beginning of his dictionary: ‘the sound of this diphthong [sic] is regular, except in a few words. It is pronounced long in moon, soon, fool, rood, food, mood &c. This is its regular sound’ (: ). He goes on to specify that it is pronounced with ‘a shorter sound corresponding to the u in bull [= /Ʊ/] in the words wool, wood, good, hood, foot, stood, understood: and these are the only words where this diphthong has this middle sound’ and that ‘it has the sound of the short u [= /Λ/] in the two words blood and flood, rhyming with mud’ (). Here we see how Walker balances the demands of ‘custom’ and ‘analogy’: if a pronunciation is established in the usage of the ‘correctest’
36 Eighteenth-century English
speakers, then it is allowed, but otherwise the principle of regularity will be invoked.
The legacy of the eighteenth century
I hope that the examples and discussion in section have demonstrated that the second half of the eighteenth century was, indeed, the period when the standardisation of English pronunciation reached the codification stage, as variants became prescribed or proscribed and clear guidelines for the attainment of ‘correct’ pronunciation appeared in the form of pronouncing dictionaries. In many cases, such as that of great, break and steak discussed above, the proscribed variants were to remain stigmatised and the recommended ones become ‘standard’. In other cases, pronunciations condemned as ‘vulgar’ by Walker and his contemporaries, probably because they were instances of changes ‘from below’, originating in lower-class London, eventually became features of Received Pronunciation. One example of this is the feature described by Wells (: –) as ‘BATH broadening’: the pronunciation with /ɑː/ in present-day RP and accents of the South of England of a subset of words which had a short a in Middle English. There is evidence of a lengthening of the vowel in some environments as early as the seventeenth century, when Cooper tells us that ‘in these can, pass by, a is short; in cast, past for passed, it is long’ [] (Sundby : ). However, more than a century later, Walker tells us that, while ‘Italian a’ was previously heard in words such as glass, fast, ‘this pronunciation seems to have been for some years advancing to the short sound of this letter, as heard in hand, land, grand etc. and pronouncing the a in after, answer, basket, plant, mast, etc. as long as in half, calf etc. borders very closely on vulgarity’ (: ). This comes as a surprise to twenty-first-century readers, who are accustomed to regarding the ‘flat’ northern /a/ as non-standard, and / ɑː/ as typical of RP. What Walker seems to be describing here is a reaction against the ‘broad’ back [ɑː], which was associated with ‘vulgar’ Cockney speech. This is corroborated by Horn and Lehnert (: ), who cite the remark of Georg Christoph Lichtenberg, who lived in England in and between and , that ‘zierlichen Mädchen’ (dainty young ladies) pronounced the in nasty so high that it sounded almost like nehsti and his comment that this was in order to avoid the ‘vulgar’ [ɑː]. Here, as elsewhere, Walker is describing the ‘received pronunciation’ of his day, even though, in this case, it was not to be included in the repertoire of Received Pronunciation in the following centuries. What, then, is the legacy of the eighteenth-century orthoepists and elocutionists? Their detailed prescriptions and proscriptions certainly give us
See Jones (: –, –) for a much fuller discussion of the complicated history of BATH broadening in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries.
Prescriptivism and the suppression of variation 37
a fascinating glimpse of the sociolinguistic landscape of their time, and we can see the process of codification at work in their pronouncements. What they have left us, above all, is a legacy of ‘linguistic insecurity’, by which ‘provincial’ and ‘vulgar’ pronunciations still carry a stigma. Richard Bailey argues that the nineteenth century saw ‘the institutionalisation of hierarchy among linguistic variants’ (: ) and Mugglestone ([] a) provides an extensive and entertaining account of the ‘sixpenny manuals’ dedicated to single issues such as ‘h’-dropping in this period. Although RP is no longer the prerequisite for social and professional success such that ‘your social life, or your career, or both, may be affected by whether you possess it or not’ (Abercrombie []: ), elocution lessons are making a comeback in twenty-first-century Britain with the modern equivalent of Withers’s ‘Shopmen, Clerks and all who are engaged in the Transactions of commercial Life’ as they attempt to give themselves an edge in a competitive job market.
See Beal () for a full account of this phenomenon.
3
Women’s grammars C A ROL PERC Y University of Toronto
Introduction
Approximately new grammars of English were published during the eighteenth century (figures from Michael : , –; McIntosh : ). At least fourteen of these were written by women: the first was Anne Fisher’s New Grammar, frequently republished after its first edition of . Several were written for a specifically female audience: these include some written by men as well as Ellin Devis’s The Accidence … for Young Ladies () and Lady Fenn’s The Mother’s Grammar (). What can we infer from these facts and figures? In general, the proliferating grammatical publications remind us that vernacular education was a necessary investment for men and women who sought to profit from their culture’s economic and social volatility. Moreover, by ordering English and its speakers, grammarians of both sexes participated in major Enlightenment debates, especially about the role of culture in shaping ‘nature’. Eighteenth-century women’s grammars give us an even sharper perspective on British culture. As Tieken-Boon van Ostade has observed, in comparison to countries such as the Netherlands with its single female grammarian, despite cultural restrictions on women’s intellectual activities, ambitious parents had sufficient interest in girls’ education in eighteenth-century Britain both to inspire and to reward some authors (b: ). Moreover, as Cajka has emphasised, some of the grammars written by women were as, or more, popular and influential than some of the now-canonical women’s novels (: f.). All English grammarians in one way or another appropriated elements of the Latin grammatical tradition, simultaneously demystifying and valorising the educational culture that excluded all but the elite men it produced. Although women grammarians were not unique in explicitly rejecting elements of classical culture, some of them could and did feature their ‘natural’ associations or private experience with children and make important innovations to vernacular pedagogy. Stanley’s claim that grammars have ‘always been written by men for the edification of other men’ was exploded long ago (for example Sklar : ). However, though not as ‘forgotten’ as Cajka’s splendid full-length study claims (), it is only relatively recently 38
Women’s grammars
39
that women’s grammars have attracted scholarly attention (for example Percy ; Tieken-Boon van Ostade c; Mitchell : –; RodríguezGil , , ; Cajka ; Navest a, b; Percy ). In this chapter, I will highlight and contextualise this recent scholarship, contrasting women’s grammars with some by men written at the same time. Illustrating how a grammar might advance the status of both women and English, Elizabeth Elstob’s Rudiments of Grammar, for the English-Saxon Tongue () is a useful preface to and foundation for this survey. Elstob’s grammar of Anglo-Saxon differed from men’s in that it was written in English (Staves : ). According to Morton, Elstob’s Rudiments was a popularisation of Edward Thwaites’ Grammatica Anglo-Saxonica (), itself a short Latin summary of her mentor George Hickes’ Institutiones Grammaticae Anglo-Saxonicae () (: f.). These grammars were highly politicised (Levine : –). With her name on the title page, Elstob’s contributed empirical evidence to the on-going debate about women’s intellectual capabilities (for example Staves : f., ) to which her translation of Mme de Scudery’s prize essay on Glory had already contributed (Sutherland ; Staves : f.). Elstob’s use of the vernacular rather than Latin brings into focus women’s exclusion from the educational institutions that trained their brothers in the Classics. Like Sarah Fielding, Hester Thrale, and many other women (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade and Navest, this volume), Elstob had learned Latin: her male mentors were Hickes and especially her brother William (Morton : ). Her description of her grammar as written in part for members of her own sex highlights the need of other women for intellectual mentorship; it also anticipates the way in which later women grammarians empowered women readers by demonstrating and disseminating their own knowledge and methods (Cajka : ; : ). Moreover, by disseminating a pedigree of English language and literature, Elstob engaged in the debate about the status of English relative to Latin. Responding to Swift’s charge that English was monosyllabic and barbaric, Elstob both qualified his generalisation and provided examples of elegant monosyllables from such poets as Chaucer, Dryden, and Swift himself (x–xxix; Morton ; Levine , especially –). Yet despite the wider market offered by the vernacular, Elstob did not profit from her Saxon studies (Gretsch ). Indeed, her poverty after the deaths of her brother and Hickes illustrates both the economic vulnerability even of educated eighteenth-century spinsters and the limitations of their most promising means of subsistence, teaching and writing. Marketing vernacular culture: ‘ladies’ and the Bellum Grammaticale of – Among the proliferating publications promoting the ideology that education could improve an individual’s economic and social status (Klein )
40
Eighteenth-century English
were vernacular grammars. From to a battle raged between three grammarians of English (Vorlat : –; Honoré ; BuschmannGöbels ). The grammarians’ different backgrounds reflect competition between classical and the rising commercial vernacular culture. The private teachers Michael Maittaire and James Greenwood had been employed in traditional and modern academies respectively, while the third, anonymous, author, hired by the commercial entrepreneur John Brightland, was likely Charles Gildon (Honoré : –; Austin ; Ross and Collins ; Sambrook ; Buschmann-Göbels : –). Their publications were preceded by advertisements in periodicals like the Tatler and the Spectator, and followed by a polemical pamphlet evidently penned by Gildon, the Bellum Grammaticale () (Honoré : , –). From their grammatical battle we can conclude that an English grammar was felt to be an investment worth defending, perhaps especially for the copyright holders Brightland and Greenwood after a act gave holders some rights (St Clair : , ; Buschmann-Göbels : , f.). We can also infer the value of courting the audiences of culturally authoritative periodicals, the Spectator one among many that had proliferated after the lapse of the Licensing Act in . Indeed, because the Brightland–Gildon grammar contained the Tatler’s endorsement, it has been erroneously attributed to the Tatler’s Richard Steele (Michael : f.). To some extent, print entrepreneurs’ awareness of their markets shaped the cultivation of vernacular culture that these grammars epitomise. In advertisements for these grammars and in their paratexts, their potential purchasers included females (for example Honoré : ; Sklar : f.; Tatler November ). The Tatler itself had included ‘the Fair Sex’ in the audience for its first issue, associating them explicitly with ‘Entertainment’ and the gossip suggested by the title ( April ). From such contexts we can infer that terms like ‘ladies’ epitomised readers both in need of education and aspiringly polite (see Klein : ; Smith : –). In the ‘Preface’ to the Brightland–Gildon grammar, ladies epitomised those ‘who were ignorant of those call’d the Learned Tongues’, a group that also included ‘Children’ and ‘the Ignorant of both Sexes’ including ‘our sagacious Friend Mr. Brightland’ himself, who had had to enlist the help of ‘his Learned Friends’ in order to produce the grammar ([]: n.p.). For men as well as women, ladies signify the slow decoupling of vernacular accuracy from the study of Latin. As teachers, Greenwood and especially Maittaire remained invested in some educational traditions. The classics remained socially superior: aristocrats, politicians, and influential writers such as Swift, Addison and Steele were to subscribe to Mattaire’s editions of Latin authors (Lelievre : –). Yet the featuring of ‘Grammar in General’ by Greenwood (Tatler November : ) and especially the Brightland–Gildon grammar reflects a general European trend to separate the study of grammar from
Women’s grammars
41
the study of Latin. Their subtitles alluded to the status of the Grammaire générale et raissonée (), also known as the ‘Port-Royal’ grammar, whose authors attempted to ascertain principles of grammar common to all languages (Vorlat : , , Michael : –, f.; Cohen : f.; Buschmann-Göbels : ). For many students, the study of ‘grammar’ remained the first step in the study of foreign languages, modern or classical. According to the earliest advertisement for their grammar, however, Brightland and Gildon’s primary aim in teaching grammar had been to help ‘the Youth of either Sex to speak and write English Truly and Learnedly, in a short time, with much Ease and abundance of Pleasure’ (British Mercury May : ; Honoré : ); and according to the preface, ‘with as great Justness and Exactness as the Learned may be suppos’d to do’ ([]: ‘Preface’ n.p.). The status of Latin is evident in the commonplace connection between classical learning and good English. The social salience of bad English is evident in its attribution not only to women but also to male monolingual consumers of history and politics. The latter complaint, made anonymously by Swift and printed in the Tatler of September , elicited a solution on October: an announcement for the Brightland–Gildon grammar. To make grammar accessible to unlearned readers, Brightland and Gildon ostentatiously departed from the classical tradition’s classification and naming of what were traditionally eight parts of speech (for example Michael : , ). Likely taken from the Port-Royal grammar, ‘Names’, ‘Qualities’, ‘Words of Affirmation’ and ‘Manner of Words’ replaced ‘Nouns’, ‘Adjectives’, ‘Verbs’ and ‘Adverbs’. Why else might men and women want to learn grammar? Because of Latin’s status as the foundation of classical learning generally, grammar was also regarded as an instrument of intellectual as well as linguistic improvement. The Brightland–Gildon grammar constructed its purchasers as aspiring to the ‘Arts and Sciences’, featured in the endorsement by ‘Isaac Bickerstaff ’ and in the dedication to the Queen ([]: n.p.]. The Tatler had constructed its audience as having the same desire: a mocking essay in the Female Tatler ( March : f.) associates it with pretentious female readers of the ‘Arts and Sciences’. The second edition of the Brightland– Gildon grammar promotes a vernacular education comprising grammar, rhetoric, poetry and logic: poetry, during the course of the advertising campaign (Honoré : –), eventually preceded rhetoric on the title page, likely because of the latter’s masculine associations (see Smith : ). At exactly this time, Pope made a fortune by translating the Iliad. Reflecting developments in intellectual culture, the English language was also associated with the rise of the sciences. Like the Port-Royal grammar, such important scholarly texts as Newton’s Opticks and Locke’s philosophical works had been composed in the vernacular. The scientific study of English can also be documented from this period: both Brightland and
42 Eighteenth-century English
Gildon ([]: preface, n.p.) and Greenwood (: f., f.) featured their translations of the work of John Wallis, a scientist who had composed an English grammar of a particularly empirical kind (for example Vorlat : –; Michael : f.; Kemp ; Buschmann-Göbels : , ). Wallis’s downplaying of the importance of inflections was inseparable from his promotion of prepositions in signalling the connection of sentence elements. Both Brightland–Gildon and Greenwood also represent Locke’s emphasis on prepositions as the sign of the mind: for instance, in his chapter on prepositions, Greenwood summarises Locke on ‘Particles’ as signifying the ‘Connexion [ joining] that the Mind gives to Ideas or Propositions, one with another’ (: , ; Brightland and Gildon []: ). Indeed, the conjunctions for and that are given particular attention in the Tatler ( August ) and Spectator ( May ). These connections between syntax and reason help to underline the importance of the subject for ambitious men in the early eighteenth century (Cohen : –). The prominence of Locke also helps to provide philosophical authority for the rejection of educational authority. Essays promoting an English Education included in some of the second editions of the Brightland–Gildon grammar also reminded its readers that English was the primary language of commerce (Brightland and Gildon : ). Indeed, promoting English grammar as the foundation of a practical education and using women as symbols of its accessibility, Brightland can be seen as responding to the rising economic and social influence of the commercial classes. With new schools proliferating in the decade after (Smith : ), English was a growth industry: the prospective market for it might be inferred not only from the aspiringly polite readers of the Tatler and Spectator, but especially from the subscribers to the periodical in which Brightland first advertised the grammar (Honoré ). The British Mercury, a newsletter for a fire insurance company, was read by an audience that was unlearned but which could afford both to own and to insure property: shopkeepers, tradesmen and craftsmen comprised per cent of the subscribers, the vague category of ‘gentlemen’ only per cent (Dickson : f.). The social climate of the period is epitomised by Brightland himself, a vintner who became a manager in the new field of fire insurance and who saw English as a business opportunity. The difficulty for such an audience of seventeenth-century philosophical language theory has recently been remarked upon by Buschmann-Göbels (: –). To what extent might ‘the Fair Sex’ have been merely symbols of accessibility for a mostly male readership? After all, the Spectator mocked booksellers for aiming at ‘the Ladies’ such unlikely titles as Dalton’s Country Justice and The Compleat Jockey ( June ). Like the rise in English schools, an appeal to women readers suggests a concern about children; mothers’ roles had recently been dignified by Locke’s philosophical emphasis on the importance of first impressions. Both Brightland–Gildon
Women’s grammars
43
and Greenwood emphasised women’s roles as mothers (Sklar : f.; Mitchell : –): Brightland and Gildon link the need to educate future mothers to their role as the first and among ‘the most numerous Teachers of [English] in this Nation’ (Brightland and Gildon []: preface, n.p.). To similar arguments Greenwood adds the broader claim that improving women will both please and improve men (: Av; quoted by Sklar : ). While this chapter cannot consider the grammatical education of girls in this decade, there is evidence that some women benefited from the vernacular activity of Brightland and Greenwood. According to Honoré, in his will Brightland bequeathed to his niece Mary Hudson ‘the copy [copyright] of my Grammar of the English Tounge’ (quoted in Honoré : ); by the fourth edition (), the grammar was being printed for others ([Brightland and Gildon] : title page). The private teacher Greenwood, during the years between his employment at Hackney Academy and at St Paul’s school, likely taught English to girls (Austin ). Among the evidence for this is what has been identified as the first anthology of English poetry compiled for teaching purposes (Michael : f.; f.), Greenwood’s Virgin Muse (). Containing the names not only of female students but also the work of female poets, this anthology both epitomises the connections between English grammar and English writing and anticipates the increasing prominence of women as English authors.
Women’s participation in print culture: Fisher’s New Grammar ()
Nothing on the title page or indeed in the text of the Newcastle New Grammar and Spelling Book identified it as the first grammar of modern English to have been written by a woman. First published in and initially attributed to ‘D. Fisher and others’, A New Grammar, with Exercises of Bad English was eventually attributed in its third London edition of to the gender-neutral ‘A. Fisher’, the maiden name of the wife of the Newcastle print entrepreneur Thomas Slack (Rodríguez-Gil , especially n and n; Rodríguez-Gil ). Unlike many members of the provincial print trade, the Slacks not only printed but wrote and published books, encouraged amateur and professional authors, and cultivated the public in their newspaper, the Newcastle Chronicle; as Rodríguez-Gil has emphasised, Mrs Slack was central to their businesses (Feather : , , ; RodríguezGil ; Cajka : ; Isaac a, b). At a time when women writers were supported and approved for supporting and approving women’s ‘natural’ cultural roles, the financial success of Anne Fisher’s forceful and non-feminine persona (Cajka : , , –) attests to her entrepreneurial acumen and to both the scope and the restrictions on women’s participation in print culture. Her innovative importation of ‘Exercises of Bad English’ from the Latin tradition (Michael : ) made her grammar
44 Eighteenth-century English
foundational to the English prescriptive tradition. Immediately imitated, sometimes plagiarised, and running into numerous editions during and after its author’s lifetime, Fisher’s grammar was the fourth most popular grammar of the period, according to Rodríguez-Gil (). Nevertheless, neglected in both the grammatical and the cultural canon, Fisher’s popular publications have recently been brought to deserved prominence (Percy ; TiekenBoon van Ostade c; Rodríguez-Gil , , ; Cajka ). Comparing Mrs Slack with her canonical contemporary John Newbery brings into focus the salience of class and gender in the market for authoritative grammars of English. Formerly in the provincial print and newspaper business, Newbery is of course known not as a grammarian but as an inventive disseminator of appealing instructive literature and as the ‘patron’ of such authors as Goldsmith. Indeed, the authorship of many books published by Newbery is uncertain (Maxted ). Although John Newbery signs the dedication to An Easy Introduction to the English Language; or, a Compendious Grammar for the Use of Young Gentlemen, Ladies, and Foreigners (), the title page features only his role as publisher and the text’s as the second volume in a series published ‘By the King’s authority’. If an early plan in his private memorandum book for is representative of his later practice, for marketing purposes Newbery was willing to substitute a clergyman’s name for his own on the title page of an elementary religious text that he planned to write (Welsh : ). Both Fisher and Newbery manipulate information about authorship in order to maximise its authority. External evidence confirms the importance of good English to both Fisher and Newbery. In another of Newbery’s ambitions was to read a number of English rhetorical treatises and then to apply his findings to an extract from Pope’s Iliad. However, from his assumption that his elementary religious text, mentioned above, would also have to be revised by the clergyman (Welsh : f.), we can infer not only the importance of correct language for an ambitious man like Newbery but also the difficulty of teaching oneself from books. Fisher’s early career exemplifies the importance of teaching, for students and teachers alike. In a advertisement for the school she ran before her marriage to Slack, Fisher appealed to an audience of ambitious and industrious ‘Young Ladies who chuse to learn the English Grammar’ outside their working hours. This advertisement appeared alongside one for the second edition of her grammar (quoted in Rodríguez-Gil ; : f.). Marketing their grammars to a wide audience that included women, both Newbery and Fisher raised the issue of who was responsible for the cultural impediments to women’s improvement. By epitomising the audience of her grammar with schoolmasters and autodidactic females (Fisher : vi, quoted in Rodríguez-Gil ; Cajka : f.), Fisher implicitly emphasises her culture’s institutionalised exclusion of girls from educational practice. Both Fisher and Newbery used similarly heightened language
Women’s grammars
45
to motivate their readers. In her subsequent publication, an anthology of improving extracts called The Pleasing Instructor (), Fisher’s specific opposition of ladies’ ‘Grammatical Learning’ to ‘Vice and Error’, ‘Good and Evil’ (: vii; Cajka : , ) clarifies the significance of Fénelon’s admission, quoted in the Newbery grammar, that a girl’s neglected education is no ‘dishonour’ or ‘crime’ to her (: v–vi). By attributing women’s ignorance to culture rather than nature and then criminalising it, both Fisher and Newbery persuade potential purchasers that they can and should take responsibility. These entrepreneurs’ attention to the female members of their wider mixed readership emphasises generally how educators, booksellers and their clients were invested in the power of culture to shape nature. As terms like ‘honour’ suggest, both Newbery and Fisher marketed their grammar as part of larger print programmes of social and moral improvement. Published the year after his Little Pretty Pocket-Book () which linked learning and virtue, Newbery’s began as the second of his sevenvolume Circle of the Sciences (–). Fisher’s became the first of a number of works on the English language (Rodríguez-Gil ) that can be seen in the context of her husband’s books on business but were more explicitly linked to literature. As the Pleasing Instructor, Fisher argued that studying grammar would help women understand improving literature: their stereotypical and pernicious love of romance reflected not their nature but an education that prevented them from understanding and appreciating more difficult works (: vii–x; Cajka : ). Later in her life, in the prefaces to her annual Lady’s Memorandum Book, Fisher unfolded a plan of education in which grammar played its part (Cajka : –). Women’s memorandum books, pirated from Dodsley () by both Newbery () and Fisher () and described by Solomon as suggesting ‘the economic stratification of eighteenth-century England’ (Solomon : ; Isaac a, b; Maxted ), testify to their publishers’ awareness of the market as well as to their purchasers’ desire to improve: it was in a memorandum book that Newbery recorded his personal schemes of self-improvement. By contextualising their grammars in a sequence composed of their other publications, Newbery and Fisher constructed the subject as accessible as well as improving. In both associated their grammars with more elementary reading and spelling lessons: Fisher’s first edition was a New Grammar and Spelling Book, also advertised alongside more elementary texts (Newcastle Journal, June ; see Rodríguez-Gil : ); the first volume of Newbery’s Circle was a spelling book that also came with a ‘royal battledore’ (Ferdinand : ). Both also decouple the study of grammar from the classical tradition. Both declare that the parts of speech are the same in all languages (Fisher Grammar , p. i–ii, , n; Newbery : ii, ). Both, like Brightland and Gildon and the grammarian William Loughton, an acknowledged source of Fisher’s, explicitly reject the traditional latinate terminology, using words like ‘Names’ and ‘Qualities’
46 Eighteenth-century English
(Newbery : ; Michael : , ; Rodríguez-Gil : –). Also like Loughton, Fisher and Newbery further diminish the authority of Latin by demonstrating its irrelevance to English, notably with reference to inflections (see Loughton : f.; Newbery : ii–iii; Fisher : ). For instance, Fisher observes that English nouns have simpler inflections: ‘Other Languages’ have ‘Names in twelve cases, and five or six different Declensions: So likewise our having no Difference of Gender in our Names, as an Advantage as great as the former, and which no other Language antient or modern enjoys, except the Chinese’ (: n). Her attempt to prove that there is no ‘Accusative Case’ in English resulted in revision of topics like object relative clauses. Early editions of the grammar promoted who as the object of prepositions and verbs in constructions like ‘this is the Man who I have a particular Value for’ and ‘The Man who I saw yesterday’ in energetic preference to ‘The Man whom I saw yesterday’. By she has added claims that English has ‘no Cases’ and ‘Whom … cannot directly follow a Verb’. (: , ). Reflecting the attention to the market of this highly popular author, not all of these statements survived into later editions of the grammar (see : f.). Although she ostentatiously rejected many elements of the classical tradition in the interests of accessibility, Fisher is and was best known for her appropriation of a pedagogical technique which as early as was featured in the text’s main title as Exercises of Bad English. The anxiety of ambitious but non-classically educated men and women about the correctness of their English can be illustrated not only by Newbery but by another successful print entrepreneur: from the early s onward, the language of Samuel Richardson’s fiction was assiduously revised (for example Eaves and Kimpel ). Perhaps responding to such anxiety, from the Latin tradition Fisher imported exercises of bad grammar for her students to correct. For instance, having read about subject–verb concord, about prepositions taking the ‘following State’, and about conjunctions connecting ‘like States’ in the chapter on syntax, students should recognise the errors deliberately introduced into sentences like ‘Peevish infants cries’ and ‘John is below I’ and ‘Thou and me is both accused of the same Fault’ (: , ). Demonstrating this Englishwoman’s awareness of the market, these were to become the second most popular type of exercise in English schoolbooks (Michael : ; Rodríguez-Gil : –). Fisher’s appropriation of them demonstrates that the classical tradition was not so inaccessible to women that she could not borrow from it (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade, ‘Eighteenth-century women and their norms of correctness’, this volume). It is in Fisher’s attention to gender that her transformation of the Latin tradition may reflect her sex. Characteristically, both she and Newbery observe that English had strategies other than inflections to mark gender (: f.; Newbery : f.). However, after the resourceful work of Tieken-Boon van Ostade (), it seems likely that Fisher was the first
Women’s grammars
47
author of the now ‘sexist’ grammar rule that defined the masculine pronoun he as gender-neutral: The Masculine Person answers to the general Name, which comprehends both Male and Female; as, any Person who knows what he says. (Fisher [] :n; : ) This rule is now regarded as sexist, but contextualising and analysing the rule and its phrasing might clarify why an enterprising woman promoted and indeed likely formulated it. The rule appears in Fisher’s ‘General Rules for Concord’, in which a student might need to know the relation of subjects to verbs, nouns to pronouns, and so on. In a corresponding Latin text such as Bailey’s English and Latin Exercises, the wording is different: in order properly to inflect the Latin adjective, a student faced with translating ‘My brother and sister are idle’ would need to know that ‘The Masculine Gender is more Worthy than the Feminine’ (: ). While Fisher’s example attests to the pre-eminence of the masculine pronoun, her changed phrasing levels and equates ‘male and female’ and makes ‘the Masculine Person answer to the general Name’, implicitly making the grammatical point that pronouns (even masculine ones) are subordinate to nouns. In its context, we might also conclude that featuring women’s equal capabilities makes an issue of their cultural invisibility. As it is phrased, this rule of grammar reflects Fisher’s successful strategy of publication: written in a voice that was (until her Memorandum Book) never feminine and sometimes masculine, her works promoted the equity she lived by and reached a wide audience (Cajka : ). Indeed, as recently as her work has been attributed to a man (for example Mitchell : f.).
Education and social mobility: Devis’s Accidence … for Young Ladies ()
It is not at all surprising that the first grammar expressly for ‘young ladies’ appeared in the s. Undoubtedly encouraged by Samuel Johnson’s lexicography (), Thomas Sheridan’s oratorical lectures (–) and the new critical reviews (Percy ), publishers in the s issued many English grammars (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a). Innovatively illustrated with ‘instances of grammatical inaccuracies in the works of our English writers’ (Percy : ), the grammar written by Robert Lowth and first published by Robert Dodsley in was immediately popular (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b: ). The s nevertheless saw additional publications on English grammar as well as more evidence that English was being taught for its own sake (for example Tieken-Boon van Ostade b: ). As well as grammar, women’s moral and intellectual education was another proper and profitable topic for male and female authors. From their disrespectful treatment by Richard Brinsley Sheridan’s Lydia Languish (in the play The
48
Eighteenth-century English
Rivals ), we might infer the perceived need for such popular conduct manuals as James Fordyce’s Sermons to Young Women () and Hester Chapone’s Letters on the Improvement of the Mind (). Representing the intersection of these two popular topics, The Accidence … for Young Ladies () was written explicitly by ‘a Lady’, soon identified as a teacher at one of the most prestigious girls’ schools in London. Like the work of other learned women (Guest : ) and perhaps like the superiority of young Lydia’s language to that of her aunt Malaprop, to its reviewers this grammar represented ‘late’ ‘improvements … in the mode of female education’ (quoted in Percy : ). The text’s success and her initial retention of the copyright allowed Ellin Devis to open a school which quickly rivaled that of her employer Mrs Terry in social status (for example Howard : ). Her career demonstrates the extent to which attitudes to women’s education allowed some intelligent and enterprising women to participate publicly as well as profitably in English culture (Cajka : ; : –; Percy : –). Devis’s grammar demonstrates, though much more implicitly than that by Robert Lowth, the social significance of vernacular accuracy. James Fordyce’s prescription of ‘unstudied correctness’ for ‘cultivated women’ reminds us that young women’s educations and marriages were interpreted by some of their contemporaries as social instability (quoted in Percy : ). Perhaps analogous to the chastity that (supposedly) characterised the unmarried elite maiden, linguistic correctness can be seen as one of the aesthetic accomplishments with which the ambitious young woman attracted marriageable males (Percy : ). In the opinion of Elizabeth Montagu, a boarding school in the ‘polished age’ of should help a student like her niece unlearn a ‘provincial dialect’ as well as a ‘bad carriage’ ([ ?]: f.). Hester Thrale’s obsessive collection of lexical and grammatical malaproprisms by social climbers like footmen and schoolgirls vividly illustrates the social anxieties on both sides of what we might think of as the grammatical gap. Having married out of an impoverished gentry family into a commercial one, Thrale invested a great deal of time spotting the ‘stigma’ of ‘low birth’ in others, once writing that neither ‘rank’ nor even ‘the polish of learning’ could totally cover ‘primaeval meanness’ (: ). In she was particularly pleased to expose a smug schoolgirl’s double vulgarity – the schoolgirl both failed to understand the content of her trendy grammar lesson and in the process used a vulgar dialect form (: , quoted in Percy : ). Thrale’s malicious satisfaction at such malapropisms perhaps also reflects her consciousness of the increasing power of the commercial classes into which she had had to marry. The energetic and unapologetic vulgarity of the Branghtons’ language in Burney’s contemporary novel Evelina () is another sign of the class differences brought into prominence in the public spaces of Georgian London.
Women’s grammars
49
The many grammars written by mid-century teachers were sometimes targeted at different markets. Of Lowth’s more influential male contemporaries, the British Grammar () of James Buchanan was published for his fellow Scot Andrew Millar, while the Dillys and Ralph Griffith respectively published the grammars of the religious nonconformists John Ash () and Joseph Priestley () (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a: ). The variety of vocational functions of vernacular grammar is evident by contrasting Devis with another male contemporary. Like Devis, John Bettesworth was a teacher whose first publication was an English grammar. In their prefaces, both characterised (in Bettesworth’s words) ‘the present age’ as one in which the study of vernacular grammar has become an important part of children’s education (Devis : v; Bettesworth : [iii]). Likely as a way of dignifying his text, the private teacher and former employee of the Royal Navy constructs his audience as destined to study the Classics, but from external information I would infer the likely users of Bettesworth’s book to be pupils at a new maritime school at which he was the mathematical master: in the event that they became ship’s captain, boys had to be able to read ‘in a manly manner’ (quoted in Bosanquet ). Bettesworth and Devis are an interesting pair to compare because both were to preside over schools that were famous for their practical training of their students in important life skills. At Bettesworth’s school by was a model ship large enough for twenty-four male students to practise on (Hans : ). Behind Devis’s was a stationary carriage in which girls could perfect their graceful ascents (quoted in Percy : ). The girls’ physical training acknowledges the social function of the practice that produced an apparently unstudied correctness. Bettesworth’s text happens to be more linguistically prescriptive than the early editions of that by Devis, although both are obviously conscious of correctness. Incidentally attesting to Fisher’s influence on the English grammatical tradition, Bettesworth transforms such examples as ‘Peevish Infants cries’ and ‘Tommy is below I’ from ‘Bad English … into Good’ (: –). In contrast to Bettesworth and of course to Lowth, through the first three editions of her grammar Devis emphasises ‘good’ English, rarely bringing the ‘bad’ into print (Percy : –). To the third edition of her grammar she added an ‘Appendix’ containing rules and examples of concord and government, but generally presented as positive examples. ‘PREPOSITIONS … always require the Objective Case after them; as, with him’; ‘CONJUNCTIONS join the same Cases together, as … She taught HER and ME to read’; ‘Two or more nouns of the singular number, having a copulative conjunction between them, agree with a verb in the plural number; as, ‘Judy and Patty ARE good girls; Demosthenes and Cicero WERE great orators’ (: –). The importance of correcting error can be confirmed by the appearance in the fourth edition of ‘Exercises of inelegant and false construction’, perhaps to attract a wider audience (: –).
50 Eighteenth-century English
Pedagogical, moral and social reasons may explain the initial absence of bad grammar from Devis’s text. Pedagogically, negative examples were not necessary: Devis claimed in the preface that her grammar would teach students how to parse sentences and thus how to understand rules. With respect to her readers’ moral education, like her former colleague John Rice, Devis may have encouraged her students not to conceal their natures but to express their improved selves sincerely; translating ‘bad’ into ‘good’ English may have thematised deception as well as social ambition (: –). Indeed, acknowledging the existence of ‘bad English’ may have undermined the image that Devis wished to present: both the school owned by her employer Mrs Terry and the school she herself opened after her grammar’s success were demonstrably prestigious (for example Howard : ). In fact, because of the prestige of Devis’s school, it is more appropriate to contrast her Accidence with one that the brothers of her female pupils would likely be using – a grammar of Latin. Indeed, I have argued elsewhere that without a context or attributive adjective, the word accidence denoted an elementary Latin grammar (Percy : f.). Such a contrast highlights the presence in modern English grammars of examples and extracts that highlight issues of more relevance to their readers. While Ryland’s edition of Ash (for instance) features extracts characterising readers as religious dissenters (Percy : ), Devis’s extracts sometimes portray girls’ minds and bodies as the objects of judgement (Percy : –, –). Examples such as the ‘Judy and Patty’ sentence above, for instance, might be said to underline females’ ultimate function as social rather than intellectual agents in their society. However, Cajka (: f., f.) has rightly emphasised the intellectual training provided by Devis to her pupils, and her contemporaries’ recognition of this. What Cajka nicely terms the ‘conjoining the scholarly and worldly’ (: –, ) and the quotations Devis added to the third edition from such contemporary women authors as Chapone and More highlight what her own successful authorship also demonstrates – the potential for English women to assume public authority on defined issues and to profit from it (Percy : f.). As well as writing on female education, More and Chapone were associated with the Bluestocking circle, whose work was interpreted as a sign of England’s cultural progress (for example Guest : ). It is even possible to interpret the ‘Judy and Patty’ quotation above as reinterpreting women’s virtue as stemming from education and giving them, too, public authority within that realm.
The cultural authority of natural roles: Lady Fenn’s grammars for mothers
The popularity of Lady Fenn’s grammars attests both to the continuing importance of education in the social and economic volatility of the s, and to the cultural importance of mothers in a post-Lockean society. Caregivers’
Women’s grammars
51
potential to impress appropriate early impressions gave some women writers for children a cultural authority greatly valued by publishers at the century’s end (for Fenn, see Stoker ). One function of ‘leisured’ mothers, taken for granted by Fenn in The Mother’s Grammar ([a]: ), was socially and intellectually to prepare sons at home for their difficult initiation to Latin grammar at school. Teaching grammar was difficult even for men. In his chapter ‘On grammar, and classical education’ in the contemporary Practical Education (: , –), Richard Lovell Edgeworth reminds his readers that memorising grammar, understanding grammar and teaching grammar were quite separate challenges that (he claimed) traditional teaching methods had not yet met. He invoked the ‘horror’ of ‘the first page of tremendous Lilly’ () and ‘the first sample of grammatical eloquence’ in it, ‘ “There be eight parts of speech”, a phrase which in some parts of this kingdom would perhaps be understood, but which to the generality of boys who go to school conveys no meaning, and is got by heart without reflection, and without advantage’ (). He characterises the traditional teaching methods of Latin as not only ineffective but as potentially corrupting, selecting examples from texts like Garretson’s exercises (see Cohen : ) which conveyed such dubious moral values as physical violence and financial incontinence, injuring sisters and mothers respectively (). For these reasons, Edgeworth recommends that ‘even where children are to be sent to school it will be a great advantage to them to have some general notions of grammar’ conveyed at home; he represents such instruction as being given by a father (). With ‘grammar, and classical education’ still so clearly connected and with grammar so daunting even for male teachers and students, it is no wonder that even such aristocratic women as the Duchess of Devonshire (quoted in Navest b: ) and Lady Holland (: ) were anxious. Indeed, it was the anxiety of women grammar teachers that provoked the publication of both Lindley Murray’s English Grammar Adapted to the Different Classes of Learners () (Austin : ) as well as of the grammars published by Fenn as ‘Mrs Lovechild’. The demand for such texts is confirmed by the sales figures for Fenn’s most popular grammars: Michael for instance reports forty editions of The Child’s Grammar [c.] before and twenty of The Mother’s Grammar [a] to (: f.). Marketed as having been ‘adapted to’ these grammars were her Parsing Lessons, one volume For Young Children and the other for Elder Pupils (London Packet, December ). When writing for John Marshall as ‘Mrs Teachwell’ in the s, Fenn had emphasised the importance of grammar. It was taught along with spelling and arithmetic to young children in her Art of Teaching in Sport ([]), a manual corresponding to an expensive game that was in turn represented in her most popular book, a series of graded dialogues called Cobwebs to Catch Flies () (Immel ; Percy : ). As Navest has confirmed in a series of careful comparisons, through her career Fenn was particularly
52 Eighteenth-century English
indebted to John Ash, whose grammar she had recommended in the ‘Library for young ladies’ appended to her Female Guardian and from which she imported both some definitions and likely also the idea of a children’s ‘library’ (Navest a: ; b: –). Packaged in by John Ryland as The Easiest Introduction to Dr Lowth’s English Grammar, Ash’s grammar retained its reputation as an elementary grammar of English (Navest a: ). The publications of all three – Lowth, Ash and Fenn – had begun as private guides for the authors’ children (Cajka : f., f.; Tieken-Boon van Ostade a: ; Navest b: ). What features of Fenn’s texts might have appealed specifically to mothers? In contrast with Ash, Fenn provided explicit pedagogical guidance for inexperienced teachers and graded lessons; emphasised the visual and the concrete, acknowledged and exploited the impatience and liveliness of both children and young mothers, and used language that was simple and extracts that were age-appropriate (Percy : , ; Navest a, esp. –; b: –). Simple language, graded lessons and formats attractive to children were recent innovations of the educator Anna Laetitia Barbauld, whom Fenn likely knew personally and whose series of age-graded Lessons for Children originally written in ‘infantine language’ for her adopted son were so well known that mentioning her name was unnecessary (Cajka : –). Like this allusion to this ‘lady of superior genius’, Fenn’s use of Barbauld’s texts as extracts for parsing emphasise the proven expertise of experienced women as innovative and effective educational writers. Publishers’ advertisements confirm the economic value of these women’s books, adding value to more advanced texts by other authors: Mrs Trimmer’s Little Spelling Book for Young Children and Mrs Barbauld’s Lessons for Children often begin Joseph Johnson’s lists of Books for Children, for instance (for example World January ). The two parts of ‘Mrs Lovechild’s spelling books’ begin the children’s lists of Fenn’s later publisher Elizabeth Newbery (for example The Times December ). Fenn’s attitude to memorisation must have appealed to her readers. Memorisation was the traditional method: according to his editor Ryland, Ash’s five-year-old daughter had memorised the grammar ‘and repeated the whole in a short time’ (: ‘Advertisement’); Lindley Murray’s English Grammar was Adapted to the Different Classes of Learners () in part by fonts that distinguished the parts to be memorised (Murray : iv). Children’s attitude to memorisation might be inferred from Murray’s ‘abridgment’ of this grammar in , done ‘to preserve the larger work from being torn and defaced by the younger scholars’ (). Moreover, as Thrale’s and Edgeworth’s comments have reminded us, children’s memorisation of a grammar rule did not guarantee their comprehension of it. Fenn did not challenge tradition: she intended that ‘the greater part’ of The Child’s Grammar ‘be committed to memory’ ([c.]: iv; Friend of Mothers a: ). However, through her career she provided her readers
Women’s grammars
53
with effective materials and scripts for teaching the preceding skills, and for introducing grammar in gentle sessions with pictures of nouns and with only five parts of speech (Navest a: , ; b: –). The publications of both ‘Mrs Lovechild’ and ‘Mrs Teachwell’ were advertised as forming a kind of series: her spelling books, grammars and parsing lessons ‘comprise Mrs Lovechild’s First Rudiments of Learning’ advertised by Newbery (London Packet December ), and her Child’s Grammar was an element of Marshall’s Juvenile, or Child’s Library (Laws ). Like her earlier games and illustrated books, as a concrete, collectible object Fenn’s tiny Child’s Grammar would have appealed to children (Percy : ; Navest a: ); like Lindley Murray’s Key to his exercises (), the Mother’s Grammar would have appealed to anxious adults. Moreover, while symbolising the socioeconomic differences entrenched by the study of grammar, Fenn’s games and graded books promised to transform children’s material acquisitiveness into controlled mental development (Percy : , ). Finally, despite the implications of women’s roles as ‘civilisers’ of men, Fenn empowered women as teachers and justified the education of girls (Cajka : –, ; Percy : –). From a survey of exempla in her works with those selectively represented by Edgeworth, boys’ capacity for violence seems to be a key theme in some grammatical texts, undoubtedly correlated with the traditional ‘rules, rote, rod’ approach and its pedagogical effects. The examples quoted by Edgeworth portray a world in which not only are some men violent and profligate, but also one in which happy endings result only from the irrational workings of mercy and marital deception. In her earlier works Fenn is aware of and represents vividly the capacity of young males for irresponsible behaviour (Cajka : ; Percy : –). Her works empower mothers to teach their male and their female children not only grammar but the habits of self-discipline necessary to learn it, perhaps transforming children’s greed into a love of learning generally. A mother who has taught her children grammar has not only given them the advantage of mental and social training, but has also given her daughters an additional measure of control over their own lives: if women cannot marry or if their husbands squander their family’s fortunes, then they are able to teach grammar to other people’s children.
Economic agency for the educated? Teacher-grammarians of the s
Of women’s educational writings of the s, the most numerous and bestknown are likely the elementary texts and tracts written by Hannah More and Sarah Trimmer for ‘reaching and teaching’ ‘the potentially revolutionary mass of poorer citizens’ at a time of war, food shortages, and riots (Hilton : ). However, in addition to Fenn’s texts, in the decade after new grammars were also published under the names of six teachers (Percy
54 Eighteenth-century English
; Tieken-Boon van Ostade a; Cajka : ). This figure partly reflects the increase in grammars and in books generally. While Michael identified fifty-five new grammars published in the decade after and thirty-two after , sixty-four appeared in the next decade (: ). As before, many of these grammars were written by schoolteachers. A reviewer complained about the proliferation of grammars and ‘system[s] of education’ when reviewing what was quickly to become the dominant text on the market, Murray’s English Grammar Adapted to the Different Classes of Learners () (quoted in Jones : ). In a volatile society without universal education, private schooling promised both clients and teachers some measure of control over their future. Generally not taught in charity schools at this time, grammar symbolised a certain educational elevation. But teaching grammar raised issues of authority for instructors of both sexes: as the stereotype of the whipwielding male teacher reminds us, the traditional method of memorisation made children unhappy and their teachers emotional (see Percy : –); moreover, like Shenstone’s schooldame, Hester Thrale also beat her children (Hyde : ; Baines ). As I have noted above, it was the anxiety of women grammar teachers that provoked the publication of the most popular grammars of the decade: Murray’s and Fenn’s. Other males wrote some texts designed for women teachers; indeed, for her schoolteaching one of Erasmus Darwin’s natural daughters used the second edition of Ussher’s Elements of English grammar … for the use of those … without a previous knowledge of the learned languages: and … Designed particularly for the use of ladies’ boarding schools ( []). The entrenched connection of grammar and Latin likely undermined women’s confidence and authority as teachers (Percy : ). However, demonstrating that women had cultural capital as elementary pedagogues, the London bookseller Law was willing to buy the copyright to a two-volume textbook that taught both grammar to students and teaching to the inexperienced ‘instructress’, Blanch Mercy’s Short Introduction to English Grammar (, ). This title, identical to that of Lowth’s statusful grammar of English (itself inspired by Lily’s authorised grammar of Latin) was used by both male and female teacher-grammarians (see Michael : –) not only to appropriate the authority of Lowth’s grammar but also to position theirs as an easy and efficient introduction to a subject that was difficult to teach and a grammar that was difficult to use. Like Fisher and Devis and Fenn, men as well as women valorised their teaching experience and claimed to be able to ‘explain [grammar rules] in a concise and familiar manner’ to ‘younger minds’ (Kitson : iii–iv, vi). Blanch Mercy indeed mentions no grammatical authorities, likely because her text both promoted instructors’ self-reliance and rejected traditional methods (see Cajka : –; Percy : –). Demonstrating their professionalism by participating in current debates about pedagogy, teacher-grammarians of both sexes claimed to minimise or
Women’s grammars
55
to reject memorisation as a method – Ussher as well as Mercy, for instance (: v–viii). Blanch Mercy rejects the traditional method of memorisation in favour of conversation: students have to explain why a relative pronoun appears in the accusative case, for instance (: iii; : ). Moreover, like Fenn, Mercy used ‘sensible objects’ to demonstrate such concepts as comparative adjectives (Mercy : ). The use of concrete objects was not uniquely feminine: however, the absence in Mercy’s grammars of references to such pedagogues as Comenius prioritises resourcefulness over deference to authority. In contrast, Mrs Eves of Birmingham adapts her English grammatical game from Abbé Gaultier’s and appropriates the philosophical authority of Locke (Eves : ‘Advertisement,’ vi; Cajka : –; Percy : ). In all of these cases, however, the potentially feminine gendering of conversation (Cohen : ), the concrete and play gives implicit authority to women as teachers. Because the education purchased from teachers by parents had a social as well as an intellectual function, examples in grammars sometimes constructed attributes of class or gender. It is unsurprising that the Birmingham riots have no place in Eves’s text, in which a poor child who had broken his leg epitomises their conventional portrayal of the poor as passive objects of charity (Eves : , , ). For schoolchildren of the leisured classes, to what extent was the study of grammar gendered? As Tieken-Boon van Ostade has observed (a), in the first edition of her grammar the teacher Jane Gardiner exploited the popularity of Murray’s grammar while demonstrating her assumption that there was a market for a Young Ladies’ English Grammar; Adapted to the Different Classes of Learners (). The number of grammars published in the decade undermines any rigorous contrast of men’s and women’s grammars. However, some strategic examples can illustrate some key differences. Though a connection between linguistic and moral correctness is suggestive, it is beyond the scope of this chapter to determine whether women’s grammars were more prescriptive than men’s. After the publication of William Kenrick’s A New Dictionary of the English Language: Containing, not only the Explanation of Words … But Likewise, their Orthoepia or Pronunciation (), Thomas Sheridan’s A General Dictionary of the English Language. One Main Object of which, is, to Establish a Plain and Permanent Standard of Pronunciation () and John Walker’s Critical Pronouncing Dictionary (), it is unsurprising that grammarians of both sexes were often attentive to provincial pronunciation (for example Bullen : ; Eves : ). Moreover, despite Walpole’s branding between you and I a ‘female inaccuracy’ (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade, ‘Eighteenth-century women and their norms of correctness’, this volume), from the presence in Roger Kitson’s negative exercises of ‘We are alone; here’s none but thee and I’ we might conclude that it was potentially also a male inaccuracy (: ). Finally, the absence of a correlation between a grammarian’s sex and her
56 Eighteenth-century English
prescriptive attitude might also be demonstrated by the different treatment of the issue of preposition stranding by the females Fenn, Gardiner, Mercy and Eves (Yáñez-Bouza b: f.). That studying grammar could and should relay moral and social lessons is evident from Sarah Trimmer’s praise of Murray’s grammar (: f.). For instance, reinforcing his rule that ‘Pronouns must always agree with their antecedents, and the nouns for which they stand, in gender, number, and person’, Murray uses such examples as ‘Each of the sexes should keep within its particular bounds, and content themselves with the advantages of their particular districts’ (: ). Did the grammars of this decade depart from Fisher’s emphasis on sexual equity? The extent to which studying grammar distinguished gender is considered more extensively elsewhere (Cajka : –, –; : f.; Percy : –) and suggested by Gardiner’s adaptation of Devis’s examples: ‘Eleanor and Caroline are good girls’, ‘Socrates and Plato were wise; they were the most eminent philosophers of Greece’ (: ). However, it is important historically to contextualise such examples. Eves’s examples of the article differ from Abbé Gaultier’s by portraying girls and describing them as both learning grammar and sewing clothes (: f.), but it is important to notice that these examples elevate leisured women by characterising them as intellectual as well as domestic (see Percy : ). That Gardiner, Mercy and Eves link learning English to French (Percy : , ; Cajka : ) reminds us that grammar continued to be an important marker of class. In a period when even educated and leisured women had restricted economic agency, these grammars demonstrate the continuing importance to men and to women of schoolteaching for both subsistence and dignity (Skedd ). Elstob, after her brother died, had turned to teaching for survival (Gretsch ). As the title pages of men’s grammars make explicit, there was a variety of pedagogical ‘professions’ for men: Kitson was a writing master (: t.p.), Fenn’s friend Bullen the first assistant master at a grammar school (: t.p.). Cajka has drawn a similar inference from her studies of the teacher-grammarians Edwards, Taylor, Eves and Gardiner (: , –, ). Some teachers not only subsisted but built successful businesses: one testament of women’s pedagogical professionalism is Eves’s reference in to Devis and her successful grammar (: xiii), into its ninth edition by . As Cajka has observed, the stereotype of the linguistically punctilious schoolmarm reflects the importance of grammar to educated women (: ; : ).
Education and enlightenment: empowering women writers
As well as teaching, writing was another way in which educated women might achieve economic agency (Hilton , passim). Few of the grammars that I have discussed so far give female students explicit encouragement to
Women’s grammars
57
become authors. Fisher uses a simile, a rhetorical device that creates distance between tenor and vehicle: ‘as if for the press’ (: v). Fenn, when quoting Lowth, omits his motivation of writing for the public from her purposes for learning grammar (Lowth : vi; Fenn [b]: vi). Some encouragement is oblique or circumstantial – the examples of women grammarians or the existence of women’s grammars. Fisher, never publishing as a female and soliciting mostly poetry for polite publications such as The Ladies Memorandum Book, must have served as a model mostly for women who knew her in Newcastle (Cajka : n). Moreover, I have not considered the evidence for women’s use of these books: although grammar books may have alleviated women writers’ anxiety about their language, there is more evidence for friends or family members correcting women’s language (for example see Tieken-Boon van Ostade, ‘Eighteenth-century women and their norms of correctness’, this volume). A grammatical text forms part of the Lady’s Polite Secretary (), a letter-writing manual published by ‘the Right Hon. Lady Dorothea Du Bois’; this text’s importance has been articulated by Cajka (: –). Establishing that this text uniquely contained real and fictional women’s letters about women’s issues, Cajka has argued that the linguistic instruction and social scripts provided by Du Bois might have empowered women actively and articulately ‘to take control of their own life stories and public personas’ (: , ). The women’s writings framed within Devis’s text are less transgressive: as women’s conduct manuals, both Chapone’s and More’s conduct books chart limits to the agency they cultivate (Percy : f.). Indeed, the demonstrable success of Devis and of the pedagogical works by Lady Fenn writing as ‘Mrs Teachwell’ and ‘Mrs Lovechild’ (and the exploitability of other women authors by her first publisher John Marshall) confirms women authors’ potential authority in the important domain of education (Hilton : ). Women’s experience was one source of this authority (Cajka : ). Fenn, comparing her grammar to Lowth’s, restricts his text to ‘private and domestic use’ because she claims it required his Lordship’s commentary to be intelligible to its users. In contrast, because her grammar’s rational structure and simple language make it possible for readers to use without help, Fenn gives the private experience of a ‘dame’ ‘general and public’ authority ([a]: ii; Cajka : ; Percy : f.).
Conclusion
This survey of women’s grammars has necessarily charted the rising status of the mother tongue and some of its speakers in a society that was itself changing and (for some) unstable. Elizabeth Elstob’s grammar of Old English, written not in Latin but in English, illustrated how a grammar might advance the status of both English and women. However, the English grammars highlighted here reached more readers. The three-way ‘grammar
58 Eighteenth-century English
war’ of – was partly provoked by changes in licensing and copyright laws that encouraged individuals to reach a wider market than Elstob’s. Brightland and Gildon, Greenwood and Maittaire addressed themselves to an audience including women because the vernacular was valued by men. First of all, as both Gildon and Greenwood argued, women’s natural roles as mothers made them essential targets for improvement. Secondly, as a group traditionally excluded from educational institutions, ‘women’ were also symbols of a larger market of men. Both male and female entrepreneurs promoted the power of ‘nurture’ to shape ‘nature’. However, women’s dubious status in mid-eighteenth-century Britain is suggested by the persona of the innovator of ‘Exercises of Bad English’, imported from the Latin tradition: Anne (Fisher) Slack, the first female grammarian, marketed her popular and influential New Grammar [] as a man. While Fisher’s easy familiarity with classical pedagogy emphasises the potential equity of the sexes, in school curricula English grammar nevertheless cultivated sexual and social difference. Some boys studied grammar as part of a naval curriculum; girls using Ellin Devis’s pioneering grammar for young ladies had their minds and bodies trained for the marriage market. Yet some later women grammarians asserted pedagogical authority not only from their ‘natural’ association with children but also from their professional experience. This survey of women’s grammars has also confirmed the status of Robert Lowth’s influential grammar of . Mercy used his title but disdained his authority, promoting her experience instead. Both the professional Ellin Devis and the maternal Lady Ellenor Fenn were among the experienced teachers of both sexes who claimed to be able to mediate him for the public. Although for many men and women teaching and writing were last-ditch measures of subsistence, Fenn’s evident value to her publishers and Devis’s extraordinary success as a schoolmistress confirm the importance of women as authors as well as audiences of eighteenth-century educational texts.
4
Eighteenth-century women and their norms of correctness I NGR I D TI EK EN- B O ON VA N OSTA DE * University of Leiden
Introduction
When Horace Walpole (–), the fourth Earl of Orford, discussed with a friend the alleged ‘female inaccuracy’ of constructions like between you and I, he was indulging in an incorrect allegation because men committed this grammatical ‘error’ just as often as women did (Tieken-Boon van Ostade : ). But the question also arises as to where women might have picked up the notion that prepositions are supposed to govern the accusative case. The education of the writer Lady Mary Wortley Montagu (–), for instance, consisted of learning to read, write, draw and do needlework (Halsband : ), while women of her class would have been taught music as well. Acquiring a thorough grounding in Latin grammar, which would have enabled her to apply the rule to produce the grammatically correct between you and me, was considered more suitable for boys than for girls (Cohen ). For a woman from the other end of the social scale, Elizabeth Clift (–), none of these subjects, let alone Latin, would have been within easy reach: she came from what we would now call a lower-workingclass family from Bodmin in Cornwall, and spent most her life as a servant. But she had at least learned to read and write, though at a very elementary level only, as her surviving letters testify (Austin ). If girls from her background were in a position to acquire literacy at all, the main purpose for this was to enable them to read the Bible and the Book of Common Prayer, but in Elizabeth’s case her writing skills stood her in further good stead, for they enabled her to keep her family together by letter. Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, however, was not content with the typical girls’ education she had been offered, for at the age of thirteen she secretly taught herself Latin from her brother’s grammar book. The results of these efforts were so successful that her skill in Latin came to equal that of any boy from her social class, according to the report of a contemporary (Halsband : ). She was, moreover, also taught French and Italian, and later in life learned German, * This chapter was written in the context of the NWO VICI project The Codifiers and the English Language: Tracing the Norms of Standard English. I am grateful to Karlijn Navest for her comments on an earlier version of this chapter.
59
60
Eighteenth-century English
Spanish and possibly some modern Greek, as well as Turkish (Halsband : –). Lady Mary can thus be considered to have been a relatively educated woman, even by the standards of male education of the period (see also Tieken-Boon van Ostade ). But she was not exceptional in her desire to acquire a skill in the classical languages: Sarah Fielding (–), for instance, novelist and translator of Xenophon’s Memoirs of Socrates (), learned Latin and Greek during the s privately from Arthur Collier (–), a friend from her Salisbury school days (Battestin and Probyn : xxii). Her skill in Greek evidently surpassed that of her brother Henry Fielding (–), much to his envy (Bree : ), and it was recognised as such by their friend James Harris (–), the author of Hermes, or, A Philosophical Inquiry Concerning Universal Grammar (), who encouraged Sarah in her Xenophon project (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a). Sarah Fielding was later to be upheld as an example by Collier when he taught Latin to the later writer and hostess of the well-known Streatham Circle, Mrs Thrale (–) (Bree : ; see also Navest, this volume). Another tutee of Collier’s, according to the Oxford Dictionary of National Biography (ODNB), was Sophia Streatfield (–), who clearly must have had more qualifications than the ODNB’s singular characterisation of her as ‘beauty’. Sherbo, the author of the entry, records the fact that ‘Sophia Streatfield’s classical learning aroused Hester Thrale’s jealousy’, though he also notes that Mrs Thrale’s feeling of rivalry may have been occasioned by her husband’s attentions towards Sophia. Mrs Thrale evidently considered a knowledge of Latin essential for girls, for she proudly recorded in her diary, called Thraliana, that her daughter Hester Maria, better known as Queeney (–), ‘was four Years and nine Months old when I lay in of Lucy [when] I first began to teach her Grammar shewing her the Difference between a Substantive and an Adjective as I lay in Bed’ (Hyde : ; see also Navest : , and, for an elaborate discussion of Queeney’s education, this volume). The nickname ‘Queeney’ had been given to Hester Maria by Dr Johnson (–), who was a friend of the family and a member of the Streatham Circle. Johnson taught Queeney Latin, at which activity she was joined for a while by Fanny Burney (–), who had just become known for the publication of her first novel Evelina () and had subsequently been drawn into the Streatham Circle. Intellectually speaking, Queeney appears to have had everything going for her, perhaps due to the fact that she had the ambitious Hester Thrale for a mother, and in the early s, according to the entry in the ODNB, she ‘studied Hebrew and mathematics, of which she became a considerable scholar’ (ODNB online, s.v. ‘Elphinstone [née Thrale], Hester Maria, Viscountess Keith’).
See also Cohen (), who lists a number of other women with a similar drive.
Eighteenth-century women and norms of correctness
61
Things were different for Fanny Burney, however, who evidently did not greatly enjoy learning Latin, as she wrote in her diary on July that ‘to devote so much Time to acquire something I shall always dread to have known is really unpleasant enough’. Furthermore, she wanted her Latin lessons to remain a secret, possibly due to a fairly realistic fear that educated women would not easily succeed on the marriage market. She was already in her late twenties at this time and still unmarried. Troide and Cooke (: ), indeed, note that her ‘misgivings about these lessons were confirmed when her father eventually disapproved of them’. The reason for Charles Burney’s (–) disapproval appears from an entry in Thraliana, two years later: ‘Dr Burney did not like his Daughter should learn Latin even of Johnson who offered to teach her for Friendship, because then She would have been as wise as himself forsooth, & Latin was too Masculine for Misses’ (quoted by Troide and Cooke : ). It is interesting to speculate on what Fanny Burney’s life would have been like if, instead of a conservative father, she had had a mother like Mrs Thrale (see Navest, this volume). But things did not stop when Fanny Burney eventually gave up her Latin lessons. When her niece Charlotte Barrett (–) published her diary two years after her death, she had taken care to suppress all evidence of her aunt’s interest in classical literature (which, however, had been read in translation only). By doing so she aimed at depicting Fanny Burney rather more like a typical woman of the age than as the kind of woman who had liked reading and educating herself despite evident misgivings which society might have concerning such women (Tieken-Boon van Ostade : ; see also Cohen ). Models of correctness Lacking a skill in Latin need obviously not have been a hindrance to the ability to write what in the eyes of people such as Walpole would have been considered grammatical English. Fanny Burney, for instance, knew how to discriminate between her own usage and that of the people she quoted in her diary, and in doing so she showed herself to be aware of the current grammatical norms of the time. She herself was, for instance, careful to avoid the use of he don’t, a form that was found both in the language of the higher and in that of the lower ranks at the time (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a: and : n). Consequently, he don’t would be a risky form to use for someone like herself, who belonged to the socially aspiring middle classes. But she does report her stepsister Bessy using he don’t, showing at the same time that her usage varied in this respect: .
because an English man don’t wear such a thing as this … but an English man does not wear such a Coat as this (Troide : ; emphasis added, as elsewhere)
62 Eighteenth-century English
Similarly, though she evidently did not use the shibboleth herself, Fanny Burney quotes an acquaintance called Daniel Crispin using an instance of double negation: .
nor the little Bowdler niether (Troide : ).
According to Waddell (: ), Fanny Burney was ‘as much an observer of language as she [was] of people’. Her major model of grammatical correctness appears to have been Dr Johnson (Bax ). According to Hemlow (: ), she herself had ‘formed the nucleus of “a bookish little coterie” that met every week to read current works like the Ramblers’, and it is indeed the influence from Johnson’s Ramblers that seems to account for a very different pattern of usage of the auxiliary do found in her novel Camilla (), which had been written well after she had become acquainted with Johnson (and, indeed, well after Johnson’s death) (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a: –). But this influence did not always give her credit in the eyes of later literary critics, for Cecil (: ), rather patronisingly, notes that in the novels she wrote after her appearance on the literary scene ‘the easy colloquial speech of Evelina is translated into stately “Johnsonese” – all abstraction and polysyllables and antitheses – a magnificent instrument in Johnson’s own hands but comically inappropriate as an expression of Fanny Burney’s homely and sociable little personality’. Apart from allowing herself to be influenced by the language of an established writer like Johnson, the linguistic differences between Fanny Burney’s novels Evelina and Camilla also illustrate her linguistic sensitivity generally. Bloom (: –5.) describes a number of grammatical changes which Fanny Burney made to the text of Camilla for the second edition, which was published in : Apparently intimidated forever by the past tense of to strive, Mme d’Arblay [as Fanny Burney came to be called after her marriage in ] banished it from the ‘new’ Camilla by offering synonymous ‘endeavoured’ and ‘attempted’. In the first edition she has difficulty with the past tenses of to lie down and with pronouns; only in the second edition was ‘laid’ emended to ‘lay’ or ‘lain’, and proper distinction made between which and that, who and whom, even I and me or he and him. In her early journals she similarly wrote sung for sang, rode for ridden, laid for lay, and varied between who and whom in object position (Troide : , , , vs. ), but such usages were by no means unusual in informal writing at the time, even in the private letters of someone like the grammarian Robert Lowth (–) (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a). That she attempted to correct them in her novel illustrates the extent to which she had grown aware of the specific requirements of the language of printed texts. Sarah Fielding is another writer whose letters show that in the course of her lifetime she became aware of the fact that different spelling norms
Eighteenth-century women and norms of correctness
63
operated in printed texts than in private writings. In a letter to her friend Samuel Richardson (–) she wrote: ‘I am very apt when I write to be too careless about great and small Letters and Stops, but I suppose that will naturally be set right in the printing’ ( December ; Battestin and Probyn : ). Her letters do indeed seem somewhat underpunctuated, but her use of extra initial capitals can be shown to correlate with formality in style: the more formal her letters, the more her capitalisation agrees with that of printed books (Tieken-Boon van Ostade : ). The same is true for her use of ’d in past tense forms and past participles of weak verbs, as in deferr’d, employ’d and encourag’d, which first makes its appearance in as a new feature in her spelling in a letter to Richardson. In adopting this usage she appears to have modelled herself on the spelling of printed texts. The person who must have made her aware of the existence of a double spelling convention, one acceptable in private correspondence and the other considered more suitable to printed documents (Osselton ), was her brother Henry. When her first novel The Adventures of David Simple () proved so popular that a second edition was to be published the same year, Henry decided that this could not be done without the stamp of approval from himself as an established novelist. His stamp of approval consisted in making a large variety of changes to the language of the novel, to spelling and punctuation but also to grammar. Often, these changes were unwarranted, and one feature in particular, his removal of what he evidently considered to be an excessive use of dashes, showed that he had failed to understand its purpose (Barchas ). Sarah Fielding, however, used the dash as a means to indicate pauses in reported speech, and as such it had a clear function. This feature was also used in the novels of Richardson − an author who was much admired by Sarah but who was Henry’s literary rival. Other changes affected her use of preposition stranding, as well as of the verb think into a number of other verbs, that is act, guess, consider, resolved, conceive and imagine; her use of the relative that into which or who (there are some forty instances of this altogether) and of what were evidently considered to be erroneous past tenses, forbid and catched, into forbade and caught. If the latter forms were still acceptable in colloquial speech, in printed texts they were considered unacceptable. Henry’s changes of his sister’s use of preposition stranding and the replacement of think by more elegant verbs shows an attempt on his part − rightly or wrongly − to increase the relative formality of the style of the novel. He may have considered the use of the relative that as another instance of his sister’s over-colloquial style; in the early nineteenth century, this relative was evidently typical of women’s language (Johansson
I am basing this information on a comparison between the text of the first and the second editions of David Simple carried out by Mirthe Brouwer. Even in private writing these forms are not very frequent throughout the eighteenth century (Oldireva : ).
64
Eighteenth-century English
: ), and Henry’s changes suggest that this may already have been the case during the previous century. Whether Sarah approved of her brother’s corrections of her language we do not know. Perhaps she simply acquiesced in his taking control over her writing like this; David Simple was after all her first novel, and Henry was by far the more experienced in publishing. Betsy Sheridan (–) similarly had a brother who must have set an example to her, socially as well as linguistically. Richard Brinsley Sheridan (–) was a playwright-turned-politician, who was socially highly ambitious. In his biography of Sheridan, Morwood (: ) describes him as suffering from the embarrassment of being merely ‘a poor player’s son’. Betsy, who until her marriage in lived with her father and after his death the year before with her brother and sister-in-law, consequently described him as ‘a little grand’ (Lefanu : ). She herself claimed not to share her brother’s social ambitions, for she wrote in her journal on March : ‘As I was a stranger to most of the company, I had little pleasure from the party − conscious that I was the only person in the room who had not some consequence in life from fortune, rank or acknowledg’d abilities, I felt alone in the croud … I have no business among them’ (Lefanu : −). Her language, however, betrays otherwise, for in her journal we find several instances of the form he don’t which, if she had been as careful as Fanny Burney in this respect (see above), she would have avoided. Furthermore, she takes care to use the form it is I prescribed by the normative grammarians of the time, and always correctly uses whom in object position in her journal (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a: –). The journal, however, also contains forms such as the inflectional comparatives and superlatives oftener, handsomer and pleasantest that in the eighteenth century were still common enough in the language of private diaries (Bax : ) but that eventually disappeared in the course of the nineteenth (Kytö and Romaine ). Betsy Sheridan’s language was thus clearly influenced by notions of what was considered linguistically correct but which, as being characteristic of formal usage, would nevertheless not be appropriate to a relatively private journal. I believe, therefore, that Betsy, though less openly so, was as much a social climber as her brother Richard. There is even some evidence in the journal that her language closely approximates that of Richard as well as that of Richard’s model, the language of the aristocracy. I found, for instance, that the use of periphrastic do in negative sentences in eighteenth-century English by upper-class writers is most advanced from the perspective of usage in Present-day English (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b). The occurrence of do-less negative sentences in the letters of Betsy and Richard is similarly very low. Also their use of the be/have periphrasis with mutative intransitive verbs, as in:
The journal actually consists of letters addressed to her sister Alicia in Dublin (ed. Lefanu ).
Eighteenth-century women and norms of correctness 65
. after the family were gone to Bed (Lefanu : ) . Miss L – has got as far as my Room (Lefanu : ) is not only very similar but can also be considered advanced in light of the development of the variation described by Rydén and Brorström (: ) (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade : ). Given Richard’s overt social aspirations, it seems likely that Betsy, perhaps unconsciously, may have modelled her usage on his language, or at any rate on the social network to which he belonged. If Betsy’s model of correctness was the language of her ambitious brother, in the case of her namesake and contemporary Elizabeth Clift and her much younger brother William (–) the situation was the reverse, at least before William left Bodmin to take up an apprenticeship with the famous surgeon John Hunter (–) in London. Austin () describes a number of instances in her analysis of the changes which the language of William Clift underwent after he moved to London at the age of seventeen. Prior to this his language was more similar to that of his sister, particularly in the case of his use of and which in a non-co-ordinate position, the use of where for whether and of was a week (Sennight) for a week ago. Examples are: . I told you some time ago that I knew a person onboard the St George and which I think may be very lucky for him ( January ) . Be pleased to let me know in your next letter, where you have had any letter from Brother Thomas ( March ) . The Footman left us last monday was Sennight ( April ) Upon his arrival in London William developed very strong social aspirations, and rather than modelling himself upon the language of the servants among whom he came to live, he adopted the language of his new master, for whom he came to feel something like hero-worship (Austin : ). In effect, in shedding his native dialect, he also shed the linguistic model of the language of his sister, who had as much as raised him after their mother died in . But the situation would come to be reversed, for having corresponded together for a number of years, during which period William’s social conditions had prospered considerably, William complained to his sister of her poor spelling: I shall never be convinced to the contrary of what I now think, by you, unless you learn to mend your Orthography or spell better; because No person on earth I am very certain can understand the true meaning of what they read unless they read it right … Now you surely do not understand the
This fairly late example illustrates a reappearance of the construction after William Clift had dropped it; Austin (: ) attributes this to reinforcement from the London dialect.
66 Eighteenth-century English
true definition and derivation of the words Lutheran, Calvinist, Methodist, &c, otherwise you could not spell them wrong (Austin : ). William had spent the years trying to improve himself through reading, with evident success, and in this criticism of his sister’s language he tried to impose on her his newly acquired norm of correctness as far as spelling was concerned. This was, it seems, to little effect, for the next letter from Elizabeth that has come down to us dates from as much as eighteen months later. The poor woman does not seem to have taken her socially ambitious brother’s criticism lightly.
Edward Synge’s letters to his daughter Alicia
So far, I have discussed a number of examples of eighteenth-century women whose linguistic norms of correctness were strongly influenced by certain men in their immediate social context, brothers in the case of Sarah Fielding, Betsy Sheridan and Elizabeth Clift, and an illustrious friend in the case of Fanny Burney. A friend of the family had also played a role in the education of Mrs Thrale: her Latin tutor, Arthur Collier, belonged to the social circle of James Harris, whom, according to Probyn (: ), she had regarded as ‘a mentor and friend’ before her marriage to Henry Thrale. As her tutor, Collier may thus also have represented a model of linguistic correctness to her. Later in life, Dr Johnson played an important role in this respect: in Tieken-Boon van Ostade and Bax () we demonstrated how Mrs Thrale’s spelling was influenced by that of Dr Johnson. The case of Lady Mary Wortley Montagu was different in that she took her education into her own hands, partly due to the fact that she appears to have been left much to her own devices from an early age after the death of her mother. One little girl who was certainly not neglected in this respect was Alicia Synge (−), daughter of the Irish bishop Edward Synge (−). Having lost his wife in and with Alicia being his only surviving daughter from their six children, Synge felt responsible for her welfare, including her education. When he was in Dublin, Synge ‘lived with his daughter, his niece Jane and their French governess’ (Legg : vii), but as Bishop of Elphin, Co. Roscommon, he spent the summer months in his diocese. While away from home he kept in close touch with his daughter by corresponding with her, and from the period − as many as two hundred letters have come down to us, all written by Edward Synge to his daughter (Legg ). The letters are of particular interest, according to Ruberg (: ), in that they functioned specifically as a ‘pedagogical tool’: ‘Through these letters, Bishop Synge taught his
It would be worthwhile to investigate this further by analysing Collier’s letters to Hester Thrale (née Salusbury) in search of possible influence on her language. The John Rylands Library in Manchester contains a sizeable number of them written between and . I am grateful to Willemijn Ruberg for drawing my attention to this interesting case.
Eighteenth-century women and norms of correctness
67
daughter how to spell and how to compose letters’. In addition, as Ruberg demonstrates in her paper, they served to make her acquainted with current notions of politeness. But they did more than that: from the perspective of this chaper it is interesting to note that Synge had taken it upon himself to teach his daughter correct grammar as well (Ruberg : ). There are frequent references in the letters to this, with Synge pointing out in the letters she wrote to him, but which have not survived, ‘a defect in Grammar’, a ‘bad expression’, an ‘error in your English’, ‘not correct English’, instances of ‘bad English’ or ‘false English’. These instances have to do with a variety of features, such as the use of correct verb forms (five times), as in the following comments: . Always in the Preter-tense, and Sometimes in the Present, wrote is more proper than writ (Legg : ) . When you would say They did eat, or They have eaten you should write They ate. You say of the Gold-fish They eat before us. That’s wrong, tho’ Common (Legg : ) with the use of who for whom and whom for who (once each): . ‘The Miss Holts, who We think to be sweet agreable girls’ It ought to be whom (Legg : ) . Whom, la Dame du logis had told us, design’d us a visit. It ought to be Who the Nominative, you have put the Accusative (Legg : ) with what appears to be the omission of the relative (once): . In the same paragraph I observe false English, a thing I must never pass by. I’ll give it you at length, and leave you to correct it, which pray do in your next. ‘It is a most mortifying thing to have a monkey taken such strict care of five years, [rel.] should turn out so incorrigibly wicked.’ (Legg : ) the use of between you and I (three instances): . In your account of M. Fagan’s bread, you have wrote bad English, Madam − You write, between John and She, It ought to be her (Legg : ); the omission of but (once), as in: . I doubt not that half the town. I can’t say I doubt, that this is not correct English. I am sure it is not. Consider it a little and you’ll find it out your Self. There ought to be but, between not and that, or you might drop that to make it run smoother, tho’ this is authoriz’d rather by Custom than Grammar (Legg : ) the omission or improper use of prepositions (three instances): . She could not dispense her self. So you have wrote. It ought to be dispense with (Legg : )
68 Eighteenth-century English
. I defended my Self for taking it. What think you of this, which is of the same kind? I defended my self for an Enemy. You certainly see it ought to be from (Legg : ) the lack of concord between subject and verb (three instances): . my respect, affection, and duty to my Dear Dada every day increases, It ought to be increase, Two or more Nominatives Singular, the Verb ought to be plural. This is a grammar rule (Legg : ) misplaced apostrophes in verb forms (once): . You put it sometimes, where it ought not to be, as in heard, discomposes (Legg : ) and a mistake in the use of the genitive (once): . How highly yours yesterdays. This is not right. It should be either yours of yesterday or your yesterday’s. The former is best (Legg : ). On one occasion Synge pointed out to Alicia an instance of what he called ‘Brogue English’: The first thing that offers is a fine piece of Brogue-English as ever I met with. You could not have wrote better, had you spent your whole life here. ‘Have you heard any thing of B.C. since you are [have been] in the Country’. (Legg : −) The problem identified here is the underrepresentation of the present perfect (Bliss : , Joyce [] : −) and the correspondingly greater scope of the present, as in Alicia’s letter with the adverb since. This is a general feature of Irish English which, as opposed to the habitual or for to-infinitives, is not stigmatised (Hickey : ). This fact can help to explain why Synge’s daughter Alicia, whose mother tongue was English, would have had this form in her speech and used it in writing. In addition, one could mention that in her case there may have been some influence from the language of servants, something which was a serious concern to writers of grammars of English such as Lowth and which was regarded as ‘contamination’ (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b –). Alicia Synge, according to Ruberg (: ), had, besides a governess, ‘a tutor, a dancing instructor and a music teacher’. It is clear that her father had taken it upon himself to teach her English grammar. As he wrote on May − Alicia was nineteen at the time − when explaining a mistake she had made in subject–verb concord, ‘This is a grammar rule. I blame my self, that you were not taught it early. We must try, as well as we can, to supply that defect’ (Legg : ). It was customary for parents to teach their
I am grateful to Wim Tigges and Raymond Hickey for providing me with these references.
Eighteenth-century women and norms of correctness
69
children to spell, as indeed Edward Synge continued to do in his letters, but for parents to take it upon themselves to teach grammar as well would not become common practice among the middle classes until much later in the century (see Navest, this volume). Another pioneer in this respect was Robert Lowth, whose famous grammar of originated as a grammar for his son Thomas Henry (TiekenBoon van Ostade a). Moreover, many of the items dealt with in the letters were to be discussed by Lowth in his grammar ten years later, which suggests that the two men shared similar linguistic norms, despite the fact that the one was English and the other Irish. As many of the items discussed by Lowth in his grammar were also commented upon at the time in the Monthly and the Critical Reviews (Percy : –), their norm of correctness was that commonly advocated at the time. Synge’s approach to grammar was a normative one, and like Lowth he taught his daughter by focusing on her grammatical errors, proscribing her mistakes and prescribing correct usage (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade b; a). Lowth’s grammar, had it been available to him, would have suited Synge to the letter. Perhaps because he was addressing his own child, Synge’s tone is more strongly prescriptive than that of Lowth (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade, ‘Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism’, this volume): while, like Lowth, he also frequently adopted the weaker ought to, his use of deontic should far outnumbers that of Lowth in his grammar, as the above quotations illustrate. Apart from teaching his daughter a norm of linguistic correctness, the bishop also taught her grammar at a more abstract level. Synge had already regularly referred to the concept ‘case’ when pointing out grammatical errors in Alicia’s letters, as when correcting her use of whom into who (‘It ought to be Who the Nominative, you have put the Accusative’, Legg : ) and when explaining to her the use of the apostrophe, or ‘asterisk’ as he called it: Thus it’s name, is an abbreviation for of it, or it, his, or her name. Daughter’s − of daughter. In all such cases the Asterisk must be. So believ’d, deceiv’d, sav’d. The e being everywhere omitted. Now, I warrant you’ll be ready to say, That heard is the same. But it is not. heard is the preter-Tense. But what say you for discomposes ? There is no omission of a letter there. If you don’t see the reason why there ought to be no s added to it, in the sentence which occasions this Criticism; I’ll tell it you. The s is an abbreviation of a Genitive case. But it there, is Nominative (Legg : ). In using the spelling it’s Lowth could have set Synge right if the grammar had been available to him (see Lowth : ), but this letter, which is dated June , appears to have prompted a question on Alicia’s part as to what a genitive is, for two letters later, the Bishop commented: ‘I did not think you a great Grammarian. But I find you are not so good a one as I thought
70 Eighteenth-century English
you’ ( June , Legg : ). He proceeds to explain the notion of case, as follows: Man − Woman are sometimes Nominative, sometimes Accusative. Of Man, of Woman, are Genitive. Instead of these We often write Man’s. There the s with the Asterisk, is the same as of. Look into your french Grammar. That will shew you the Cases and their Powers. Go a little further, and you’ll find the difference of Tenses. It will be necessary that you know a little of these things, in order to write correctly. For more information as well as for other grammatical subjects, such as the correct use of tense, another recurring issue in their correspondence (see above), he refers Alicia to her French − not Latin! − grammar. Which grammar this may have been does not become clear from the letters. There are, however, several references to ‘Boyer’, for example ‘Pray Ask Mrs Jourdan whether she be acquainted with this phrase, Dents de Sagesse. Boyer is not’ (Legg : ); ‘What is the English of Calmar? I know it is the name of a Fish. But Boyer does not inform me, what fish. This is not the only word about which I have lately consulted him in vain’ (Legg : ); and ‘I cant allow Boyer to be good authority for English, who is not admitted as such for his Mother Tongue’ (Legg : ). Abel Boyer was the author of a dictionary, as these references suggest, called The Royal Dictionary Abridged. In Two Parts. I. French and English. II. English and French first published in , of which ECCO (Eighteenth Century Collections Online) includes various editions published during the first half of the eighteenth century which might have been available to Edward Synge and his daughter. But ECCO also lists various editions of Boyer’s The Compleat French Master for Ladies and Gentlemen, originally published in . As this book also contained A New Methodical French Grammar, this might well have been the French grammar Synge referred to in the above quotation. Though several such works were around at the time, Alicia does not appear to have possessed a grammar of English. As her father said, ‘For all your purposes, French Grammar will do as well, as that of any other Language’ (Legg : ), and where her French grammar book proved deficient, he himself provided the additional information required.
Conclusion
Synge died in the year that Lowth’s grammar was published. It is, however, striking that both men had the same purpose in mind, that is to teach their children the grammar of English. Lowth did so by writing a grammar proper, Synge merely by correcting the grammatical mistakes made by his daughter in her letters to him. But both evidently considered themselves well qualified for such a job, as indeed they were, given the age they lived
One word for which Synge evidently did not consult Boyer is the word its: had he done so, he would have found its correct spelling there (Boyer , s.v. ‘its’).
Eighteenth-century women and norms of correctness
71
in. Their approach was similar: to explain the principles of grammar by negative example, and their underlying norm of correctness which they tried to impose upon their children was largely the same. And so was their reason for doing do: according to Ruberg (: ), the purpose of Synge’s correspondence with his daughter was to prepare her for polite society, and it is evident from his letters that a correct use of English was part of the requirements for this. In Lowth’s case I have also argued elsewhere in the present volume that the original purpose of the grammar was to enable his son to gain access to the type of society to which Lowth himself at this stage still aspired to belong (Lowth only became a bishop four years after the publication of the grammar). In this chapter I have offered case studies of seven women, that is, in the order of their year of birth, Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, Sarah Fielding, Alicia Synge, Hester Lynch Thrale, Fanny Burney, Elizabeth Clift and Betsy Sheridan, and I have dealt with them from the point of view of the question of where they would have found their linguistic norms of correctness. In most cases, men from their immediate social context, a father, a brother or a friend, played a significant role in this respect. That this should be the case need not surprise us: in pre-industrialist, pre-feminist days, women would rarely serve as linguistic models, either to other women, or, as Clarke (: ) argues, to young men. Elizabeth Clift was an exception to this, as, at least until William left their native Bodmin, her language had served as a model to her little brother. An exception from the other end of the social scale was Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, whose writing career can be compared with that of literary men such as Pope. As a central figure of the social network to which she belonged (Tieken-Boon van Ostade ) she would have served as a model for others, from a literary perspective, but also linguistically: Bijkerk () has shown that she was instrumental in spreading the new epistolary formula ‘yours sincerely’, which she had picked up from the poet John Gay. It seems unlikely that Lady Mary Wortley Montagu would have had recourse to an English grammar as a young girl. Her biography (Halsband ) only refers to her study of Latin grammar. That women did not usually serve as linguistic models to others does not mean to say that their language went wholly unnoticed at the time. Sundby et al. (), in their study of normative attitudes in eighteenth-century grammars of English, provide a list of over two hundred authors whose language was criticised in the grammars of the period. Only a very small number of them are women, that is ‘M. Montagu’, presumably Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, who with ten citations occupies thirty-sixth position on the list, Mrs Thrale (two citations) and an unidentified Louisa Mildmay (one citation) (Sundby et al. : −); the latter was probably not a real woman
For an analysis of the qualifications of eighteenth-century grammarians, see Chapman ().
72 Eighteenth-century English
but a character in a novel by Hugh Kelly (see ODNB, s.v. ‘Kelly, Hugh’). Lady Mary Wortley Montagu’s namesake, the well-known Bluestocking Elizabeth Montagu (–), is another interesting case from the perspective of this chapter in that she does seem to have looked to a woman as her model in matters of language and otherwise. Sairio () argues that she picked up her norm of linguistic correctness not from any grammar of the period but from the network of aristocrats to which she had had access in the days before her marriage, in particular through her connection with Margaret Cavendish, the Duchess of Portland (–). The language of the aristocracy similarly served as a model of correctness for grammarians such as Lowth (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a), but also for Edward Synge. The latter was proved right in this respect as the quotation at the beginning of this chapter illustrates: in repeatedly telling his daughter off for her use of the alleged ‘female inaccuracy’ between you and I, he was complying with emerging notions of correctness in English grammar.
5
Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism* I NGR I D TI EK EN-BO ON VA N OSTA DE University of Leiden
Introduction
Following the curious description of Robert Lowth (−) as a philologist ‘more inclined to melancholy than to mirth’, the Oxford Companion to the English Language (OCEL) notes that Lowth’s ‘name has become synonymous with prescriptive grammar’ (McArthur , s.v. ‘Lowth’). Lowth’s Short Introduction to English Grammar was first published in , and was frequently reprinted during the eighteenth century. Writing more than a century and a half before the OCEL, one William Hill, in the fourth of his Fifteen Lessons, on the Analogy and Syntax of the English Language, observed that ‘Bishop Lowth … may well be accounted the Father of English Grammar’ (Hill : Cr). Usually, this epithet is reserved for Lindley Murray (– ) (Nietz : ; Tieken-Boon van Ostade : ), the author of the phenomenally popular English Grammar () who had used Lowth’s grammar as one of his major sources (Vorlat ). As the bibliographical account provided in Alston () shows, Murray’s grammar was considerably more popular than Lowth’s, and he may therefore be held responsible for giving wider currency to Lowth’s grammar and the notions expressed in it. What writers like Nietz (), and Hill before him, mean by ‘grammar’ comprises the results of well over two centuries of prescriptivism, resulting in a vast number of rules of correct usage that have come to be laid down in linguistic handbooks and usage guides such as Fowler’s Modern English Usage (), the third edition of which, edited by Burchfield, appeared in . It is popularly believed that these strictures have their origin in the grammar published by Lowth (for example Bryson : −). Over the years, Lowth has been the subject of a great deal of prejudice, a fairly recent example of which may be found in Aitchison (, nd edition , rd edition ). Here, one may read that ‘Robert Lowth, Bishop of London’ was ‘a prominent Hebraist and theologian … with fixed and * This paper was written in the context of the NWO funded VICI project The Codifiers and the English Language. An earlier version of it was delivered, in Dutch, as part of the author’s inaugural lecture at the University of Leiden on 1 June 2007 . I owe this quotation to Lyda Fens-de Zeeuw.
73
74 Eighteenth-century English
eccentric opinions about language’ – note the disparaging use of adjectives highlighted in the passage quoted here who wrote A Short Introduction to English Grammar () which had a surprising influence, perhaps because of his own high status … His grammar is bespattered with pompous notes in which he deplores the lamentable English of great writers. He set out to put matters right by laying down “rules”, which were often based on currently fashionable or even personal stylistic preferences (Aitchison : –4; emphasis added). Well over thirty years ago, Pullum (: ) wrote that Lowth ‘is more mentioned than read by the majority of grammarians today’, and Aitchison’s approach to Lowth and what he stood for shows the persistence of this attitude almost down to this very day. In a paper on Joseph Priestley (–) and his grammar, Hodson () shows that Lowth is not exceptional in being treated like this. I have already shown elsewhere that there is a considerable discrepancy between what would have been Lowth’s ‘personal stylistic preferences’ and the strictures in his grammar (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a); in this chapter I want to tackle another claim made by Aitchison, that is that ‘Lowth’s influence was profound and pernicious because so many of his strictures were based on his own preconceived notions’ as well as the assumption ‘that he should have felt so confident about his prescriptions’ (: ; emphasis added). By focusing on three prescriptive strictures with which Lowth’s name has come to be linked specifically, that is against the use of double negation, preposition stranding and the split infinitive, I intend to show that none of Aitchison’s claims is correct. Furthermore, I seek to demonstrate that Lowth’s current status is that of an icon of prescriptivism which results from a misunderstanding of his aims and motivations in publishing his Short Introduction to English Grammar.
The origin of Lowth’s grammar
Lowth was far from being ‘divinely inspired’ as Aitchison suggests (: ) when he decided to write a grammar of English. He relates its more downto-earth origin in a letter to his friend James Merrick (–): The history of [the grammar] is this: I drew it up for the use of my little Boy, for the reasons mentioned in the Preface. Mr. Legge desired to have it for his Son; wch. purpose it could not well serve without being printed. I therefore finish’d it, as well as I could for the present; & have printed an Edition of no great number, in order to have the judgement of the Learned upon it. It is capable of considerable improvements, if it shall be thought worth the while. (c. February ; Bodleian Library MS. Eng. Lett. C f. )
This passage, as well as the subsequent discussion of Lowth and his grammar, continues unchanged in the third edition of Aitchison’s book.
Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism 75
Henry Bilson Legge (–), at that time Chancellor of the Exchequer (ODNB, s.v. ‘Legge’), was one of the powerful men who assisted Lowth in the advancement of his career in the Church (see Hepworth : ). On February , Legge’s wife Mary gave birth to a son also called Henry. Henry Legge Junior was about three years younger than Lowth’s own ‘little Boy’, Thomas Henry, for whom Lowth had started to write a grammar in the autumn of that same year (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b). Bilson Legge requested a copy of the grammar for his own son, and in order to meet with his patron’s request, Lowth approached his publisher Robert Dodsley (–). Only two years before, Dodsley had published Dr Johnson’s famous Dictionary of the English language (). Having a good eye for the market, Dodsley knew what would sell well (Tierney : ), and he was evidently on the lookout for an authoritative grammar of English as well. Bilson Legge’s request, passed on to Dodsley, therefore came at the right moment. Inevitably, however, Lowth’s original intentions for the grammar changed, and, as he explains in the above letter, he became curious to know ‘the judgement of the Learned’ on the grammar. The original aim of the grammar is still evident from several of the example sentences it contains, that is: .
Thomas’s book; I love Thomas; Thomas is loved by me; Who is loved? Thomas; a loving, more loving, most loving, father (Lowth : −, , −, −).
but the context in which these examples appear illustrates the extent to which Lowth adapted his grammar to a different readership. See, for instance, the following description of the verbs active and passive in the grammar in which some of the examples in () occur: A Verb Active expresses an Action, and necessarily implies an agent, and an object acted upon: as, to love; ‘I love Thomas.’ A Verb Passive expresses a Passion, or Suffering, or the receiving of an Action; and necessarily implies an Object acted upon, and an Agent by which it is acted upon: as, to be loved; ‘Thomas is loved by me.’ (: ) Such passages can hardly be considered suitable for the very young children for whom the gramar was intended originally, the ‘Learners even of the lowest class’ as Lowth referred to them in his preface (: xiv), and this was the grammar’s major point of criticism in the public press at the time (Percy : ). Lowth’s grammar in its published form was a grammar for scholars, not children, and this is how it was received and for which it was given the credit it was due (see section ).
These example sentences were identified by Karlijn Navest. For these and subsequent quotations from Lowth’s grammar as well as other eighteenth-century works I have made use of Eighteenth Century Collections Online (ECCO).
76 Eighteenth-century English
Another indication that Lowth had abandoned his original aim of writing a children’s grammar is the note he added to the end of the preface: If those, who are qualified to judge of such matters, and do not look upon them as beneath their notice, shall so far approve of it, as to think it worth a revisal, and capable of being improved into something really useful; their remarks and assistance, communicated through the hands of the Bookseller, shall be received with all proper deference and acknowledgement. (: xv) Remarks were indeed communicated to him in considerable numbers, for there are many additions to the second edition of the grammar (see Navest ), and my collection of Lowth’s correspondence contains several letters to this effect. As a result, the second edition was turned into a more complete grammar than the first, quite in accordance with Lowth’s own wishes in this respect, for about a month after its publication Lowth had informed Dodsley that for a second edition he would ‘certainly wait for the opinions of the Critics; & when I have leisure, will endeavour to give it all the improvements I can’ (BL Add. MSS ,, f. ) (Tieken-Boon van Ostade : ). Some examples of such additions were the strictures against double negation and the double comparative (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade b), which is interesting in light of the fact that the disappearance of double negation is often attributed to Lowth (see section .). The idea to include a stricture against these constructions may therefore very likely have come from someone else.
Three prescriptive strictures
.
Lowth and the disappearance of double negation
Many linguists, old and modern alike, appear to agree on the fact that the eighteenth-century normative grammarians were responsible for the disappearance of double negation from standard English (see for example Leonard : , van Kemenade : and Beal a: ). Baugh and Cable ( []: ) specifically refer to Lowth here, noting that he was the one who ‘stated the rule that we are now bound by’ and so does Aitchison (: ), while according to Leonard (: ) Lowth ‘may possibly have influenced a change in usage’ in this respect. Lowth, however, was not the first grammarian of English to deal with double negation: in the eighteenth century the stricture was first discussed in Greenwood (), after which we find it in six other grammars before Lowth, that is Jones (), Duncan (), Kirkby (), Martin (), Fisher (second edition ) and Gough (), and the stricture would continue to be present in grammars published after him. Leonard () also mentions Upton (), which, however, is not a grammar but a study on Shakespeare. The passage in question reads:
Beal makes the same claim for the disappearance of double comparatives and superlatives; see, however, González-Díaz () and Tieken-Boon van Ostade (a).
Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism 77
RULE IX. He uses, But, for otherwise than: Or, for before: Once, once for all, peremptorily: from, on account of: not, for not only: Nor do two negatives allways make an affirmative, but deny more strongly, as is well known from the Greek, and modern French languages. (Upton : ) It is not clear what triggered Upton’s comment on Shakespeare’s use of double negation in this particular section. Upon discussing a peculiar use of not in the sense of ‘not only’, Upton must have been struck by the fact that usage in Shakespeare’s time was different from that of his own day, for the old use of double negation was no longer very common at the time (Tieken-Boon van Ostade ), a comment which was made by Lowth in his grammar as well (see below). As shown by Nevalainen and Raumolin-Brunberg (: −), double negation was already well on the way out at the end of the seventeenth century, so it is striking to observe that the stricture played such an important role in normative grammars produced throughout the century after that. I have argued elsewhere (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b) that the reason why normative grammarians proved so obsessed with multiple negation was due to the function of the grammars as linguistic guidebooks for those who wished to rise in society. Today, according to Hughes and Trudgill (: ), multiple negation ‘can be found in most parts of the British Isles … because it is in fact the standard language which has diverged from the other varieties’. Evidently, this situation must already have obtained in the eighteenth century, and those with social aspirations had to be made aware of this, but also those who already belonged to the middle classes and who would have employed servants, as they were thus running the risk of having the language of their children contaminated with features from non-standard varieties of the language, such as double negatives (see also Jones : , who makes the same point with respect to the issue of pronunciation). But there may also be another reason why the stricture against double negation played such a prominent role in the eighteenth-century normative tradition: the dictum ‘two negatives make an affirmative’ was such a common expression at the time that no grammar of English was considered to be complete without it. This is confirmed by the results of a search for this string in ECCO, which yielded as many as seventy-seven instances, only four of which derive from a grammar. Among the earliest hits we find the following (emphasis added): . .
Two Negatives make an Affirmative in Grammar, but ten thousand will not make one in Divinity (Thomas Goodwin, The Works of Thomas Goodwin, −: ) and as two Negatives make an Affirmative, so these two Rules, which are severally False, being Artfully put together, compose betwixt them one true Rule for the finding out of Easter (Edmund Calamy, A Defence of Moderate Non-Conformity. Part II. London, −: )
78 Eighteenth-century English
. I have heard indeed, that two Negatives make an Affirmative, but I never heard before that two nothings ever made any thing (John Sheffield, Duke of. The Duke of Buckingham´s Speech, spoken in the House of Lords, Feb. the th., [London, ]: ) Lowth’s formulation of the stricture, that is ‘Two Negatives in English destroy one another, or are equivalent to an Affirmative’ ( []: ), is indeed highly similar, but by the time he adopted it in his grammar, it had apparently already developed into a fixed expression. Lowth therefore had nothing to do with the disappearance of double negation, nor is it true, as Baugh and Cable ( []) claim, that he should be credited with formulating the rule ‘that we are now bound by’. Not only did Lowth’s rule render a mere common expression in the language, the stricture as such is moreover formulated in such a way that it cannot be called prescriptive. It can in fact only be considered descriptive, as it does no more than formulate current usage illustrated with an example from Milton’s Paradise Lost, that is ‘Nor did they not perceive the evil plight / In which they were, or the fierce pains not feel’. In a footnote Lowth observes that ‘Shakespear uses this construction frequently. It is a relique of the antient style abounding with the Negatives, which is now grown wholly obsolete’ ( []: −). Lowth’s rule only becomes truly prescriptive when it is copied − without acknowledgement − by Lindley Murray (–) in his English Grammar of : RULE XVI. Two negatives, in English, destroy one another, or are equivalent to an affirmative; as, ‘Nor did they not perceive him;’ that is, ‘they did perceive him.’ ‘Never shall I not confess;’ that is, ‘I shall never avoid confessing’ or, ‘I shall always confess.’ But it is better to express an affirmation by a regular affirmative than by two negatives (: ; emphasis added). In adopting Lowth’s rule Murray omitted the sources of Lowth’s quotation as well as the historical perspective; while Lowth’s grammar has all the characteristics of a scholarly text, the one by Murray merely offered guidelines for correct usage. Murray’s further addition, ‘it is better to …’, in effect reflects a social warning: using two negatives even when the intention was to make them ‘express an affirmation’ might cause the speaker to be inadvertently taken for someone in whose everyday language double negation was the norm, a particularly risky business for the socially ambitious, which is after all the class of people grammars such as Murray’s were intended for (Fitzmaurice ). .
Preposition stranding
The stricture against preposition stranding is likewise linked with Lowth, for instance by Crystal (: ) and Görlach (: ) (see Yáñez-Bouza
Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism 79
a: ). In contrast to double negation, however, this stricture does occur in Lowth’s grammar from the first edition onwards. It reads as follows: The Preposition is often separated from the Relative which it governs, and joined to the Verb at the end of the Sentence, or of some member of it: as, ‘Horace is an author, whom I am much delighted with.’ ‘The world is too well bred to shock authors with a truth, which generally their booksellers are the first that inform them of.’ This is an Idiom which our language is strongly inclined to; it prevails in common conversation, and suits very well with the familiar style in writing; but the placing of the Preposition before the Relative is more graceful, as well as more perspicuous; and agrees much better with the solemn and elevated Style. (: −) Lowth here describes preposition stranding as a phenomenon that is typical of English, whereby the preposition does not occur in what according to the etymology of the word ‘preposition’ would be its proper place. This is indeed how he defines the term: ‘PREPOSITIONS, so called because they are commonly put before the words to which they are applied, serve to connect words with one another, and to shew the relation between them’ (: ; see also Beal a: ). It is therefore of interest to see that the above passage is found in a literal translation in MacKinnon’s Persian-English Grammar of , where the phenomenon is dealt with from a contrastive English–Persian perspective. A small, though interesting, difference is that in Lowth’s example ‘Horace is an author, whom I am much delighted with’, the name of Horace has been replaced by the somewhat similar sounding name of Hârith, a sixth-century pre-Islamic Arabic writer. In the above passage Lowth notes a stylistic differentiation with respect to the occurrence of preposition stranding and its allegedly ‘more graceful’ counterpart which is nowadays referred to as ‘pied piping’, with the former variant ‘prevailing in common conversation’ as well as ‘suiting very well with the familiar style in writing’, and the latter ‘agreeing much better with the solemn and elevated Style’. This observation correlates with his own usage, as we find preposition stranding only in the letters to his wife and to his closest friends (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a); the formulation of the phenomenon of preposition stranding can therefore only be called descriptive, thus once again belying Lowth’s reputation as a prescriptivist. The passage is also of interest in that it shows Lowth allowing himself − unexpectedly, I would say, given his status as a prescriptive grammarian − to make a linguistic joke, when he writes that ‘this is an Idiom which our language is strongly inclined to’ (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a: ). This typically purist joke is not usually recognised as such, neither by modern linguists such
I owe this information to Anna Livia Beelaert. According to Ineke Sluiter (pers. com.), such jokes are quite common in classical grammars.
80
Eighteenth-century English
as Finegan (: ) nor by Lowth’s immediate followers, such as Seally (), Story () and Murray (), who all copied the original stricture in its entirety except for the sentence with preposition stranding. This sentence is corrected into the stylistically more appropriate ‘This is an idiom to which our language is strongly inclined’ (Seally : , Story : and Murray : ) (see also Yáñez-Bouza a: –). These instances clearly show that Lowth left his mark on later grammarians and other writers. Other works than the ones already mentioned which reproduce the stricture are the anonymous English Grammar of , printed in Douai, and Bentick’s Spelling and Explanatory Dictionary of the English Language (), while Seally () is an encyclopedia for ladies. YáñezBouza (a: ), however, shows that Lowth, though being the first eighteenth-century grammarian to do so, was not the first writer to deal with preposition stranding. She found that the first book to discuss the issue was Joshua Poole’s The English Accidence, published in , which was subtitled ‘A short, plaine, and easie way for the more speedy attaining to the Latine tongue’. In other words, the stricture as such was already a hundred years old before it was given greater currency by Lowth. Whether Lowth was familiar with Poole’s work I do not know, but it is perhaps more likely that he encountered the phenomenon in Dryden’s Defense of the Epilogue (), in which Dryden disapproves of the construction, even when it occurs in his own writings (Bately : ). From his Will we know that Lowth possessed a copy of Dryden’s works, and in his own grammar he regularly refers to Dryden (Tieken-Boon van Ostade ; see also below). In copying the stricture from Lowth, later grammarians and other writers, according to Yáñez-Bouza (a), reformulated Lowth’s words in increasingly prescriptive terms, by which they did little justice to his careful and even slightly humorous approach to the subject. .
The split infinitive
Lowth’s role in the history of preposition stranding was thus limited to being the first eighteenth-century grammarian to introduce the stricture into the canon of English linguistic prescriptivism. But as in the case of double negation, it is striking that his formulation of preposition stranding was neither prescriptive nor normative but strictly and carefully descriptive. Both strictures were turned into proper prescriptive rules by grammarians coming after him, so to link both instances with Lowth and to brand him as a prescriptivist accordingly proves completely unjustified. From this perspective, the
Story () is an interesting grammar. ECCO includes only its third and fifth editions. In the third edition Lowth’s influence is already clearly present, e.g. in the definition of the preposition, the treatment of double negation and in the Horace example used as an illustration of the use of prepositions. On the other hand, the stricture on preposition stranding in found only in the fifth edition.
Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism 81
third stricture I wish to deal with, that against the use of a split infinitive, is even more interesting. It is a stricture which is frequently linked with Lowth’s name (see Beal a: ). According to Baugh and Cable ( []: ), eighteenth-century normative grammarians made use of three principles in formulating linguistic strictures, that is ‘reason, etymology, and the example of Latin and Greek’. While the first two principles were applied in the case of double negation and preposition stranding respectively, the case of the split infinitive illustrates how ‘the example of Latin’ was resorted to. Beal (a: ) quotes Burchfield (: ) saying that ‘in Latin such a construction could not arise because an infinitive (amare “to love”, crescere “to grow”) is indivisible and is not preceded by a grammatical particle’. This indeed is the argument presented on a website called ‘Bishop Lowth was a fool’: Hot linguistic debate often occurs over a number of normative usage rules. One example which leaps instantly to mind is the foolish ‘one must never split an infinitive’. In Lowth’s grammar infinitives cannot be split. It is not possible for Lowth because it is not possible in Latin to split an infinitive. Well, of course not. In Latin, an infinitive is one word. However, it is not in English. English infinitives are two words, such as ‘to split’, and there is little logic to keeping them fused together, except that it cannot be done in Latin and Bishop Lowth decided, quite on his own, that English should emulate Latin, and the world followed suit. Thus, one foolish man has made a messy mockery of the rich and dynamic English language. (Kapel, , ) There is, however, no such stricture in Lowth’s grammar, nor in any other grammar produced during the eighteenth century. According to Leonard () the rule was first formulated in the course of the nineteenth century
In the case of double negation, the argument against its use is best expressed by Benjamin Martin (c.–), whose approach to the subject was clearly influenced by his profession as a scientist: But the two negatives as used by the Saxons and French must be understood by way of apposition […] which way of speaking is still in use among us; and in this case the two negatives answer to the addition of two negative quantities in Algebra, the sum of which is negative. But our ordinary use of two negatives (in which the force of the first is much more than meerly destroyed by the latter) corresponds to the multiplication of two negative quantities in Algebra, the product of which is affirmative; as mathematicians very well know. (Martin : )
Interestingly, Martin tries to reconcile here the fact that double negation ‘is still in use among us’, i.e. used in non-standard varieties of the language and possibly the spoken language as well, with that in which ‘two negatives make an affirmative’, i.e. in the more standard registers including the written language. Beal (a: ) found a similar attribution to Lowth on the Internet: ‘one web encyclopedia goes so far as to blame the usual suspect, Robert Lowth, without citing one word of evidence’ (emphasis added). The website in question turns out to be Wikipedia, which appears to have changed its entry since. The original entry, quoted by Beal, can, however, still be traced on the Internet, at http://nostalgia.wikipedia.org/wiki/Robert_Lowth (accessed May ).
82 Eighteenth-century English
(see also Mittins et al. : ), which was the age in which prescriptivism was at its height (for example Mugglestone : ). The split infinitive was not a new construction at the time, as example () from one of Fanny Burney’s journal letters demonstrates: . to be in his good Graces, is to almost ensure his indulgence (, Troide and Cooke : ) and Mittins et al. () note that it can be traced as far back as the fourteenth century; they mention Wycliffe, Tyndale, Donne, Goldsmith, Burns, Browning, Coleridge and George Eliot as examples of authors who used the construction (Mittins et al. : ). Lowth, however, did not: I have not come across a single instance of it in his letters, nor in those of his correspondents. That the construction did not draw the attention of the normative grammarians until the nineteenth century is, I think, a matter of accident. In rejecting the construction, the same principle was used as in the motivations for criticising other grammatical issues, so it could easily have been an eighteenth-century phenomenon. But it was not, and it certainly has nothing to do with Lowth. Görlach (a: ) quotes the Daily Chronicle of April referring to the splitting of infinitives as a new phenomenon, while Molencki (: ) claims that the split infinitive was first commented on by Fitzedward Hall in his Modern English (), where he cited an example from . Beal, however, quoting Bailey (), notes that the split infinitive is first mentioned in , in the New England Magazine (a: ). All this is interesting, for once again we see that a construction becomes a controversial issue well before it finds its way into a normative English grammar, that is Hall’s. This is, however, a common phenomenon, for Dobson (: ), on the basis of his analysis of seventeenth-century rhyme words as evidence for changes of pronunciation, claims that usually ‘new developments [are shown] earlier than the native grammarians do − as a rule some thirty or forty years earlier, but sometimes more’. This was indeed the case with periphrastic do (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b: ), and apparently also in that of the split infinitive.
The reception of Lowth’s grammar
It will have become clear from the above that Lowth’s reputation as a prescriptivist lacks any substantial foundation. While one of the strictures discussed here, the one against the split infinitive, has its origin in the century after he lived and therefore cannot be associated with Lowth, neither of the other two is formulated in his grammar as a prescriptive rule. Close analysis
This, as well as the example from Fanny Burney, is in agreement with the fact, commented upon by Burchfield (: ), that ‘the split infinitive seems to have come back into favour at the end of the eighteenth century’.
Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism
83
of his discussion of multiple negation and of preposition stranding shows that his approach to these issues was descriptive, not prescriptive. That normative grammarians should adopt a prescriptive rather than a descriptive approach to language is one of the shortcomings for which they are usually criticised by linguists today (Pullum : ), but the strictures discussed here suggest that this is a stigma attached to them which is not supported by any evidence as such. Pullum’s article, in which he presents a well-argued case for a revaluation of Lowth’s status as a prescriptivist, seems to have had little impact when it first came out, but it is now being increasingly realised that normative grammarians may at times also take a descriptive approach to language (Vorlat : ; Tieken-Boon van Ostade b: , ; b: ; Rodríguez-Gil ; Hodson ). The OCEL (McArthur , s.v. ‘Lowth’) likewise notes that Lowth’s ‘approach to correctness was not invariably rigid, and, like most grammarians he described English as well as prescribing its rules’ (my emphasis). The strictures discussed in . and . are not presented as prescriptions, and this applies to much else in the grammar. Lowth, to be sure, condemned grammatical errors he had encountered in the language of ‘our best Authors’ as he called them (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade ), but an analysis of the way in which he did this shows that his condemnations are rarely as strong as those in some of the grammars published by other normative writers: he usually confined himself to terms such as improper, mistake, inaccuracy and superfluous, which are relatively mild compared with the terms listed in Sundby et al. (), such as ‘mere shopkeepers’ cant’, ‘childish phrases’, ‘shamefully adopted by the ignorant’ and ‘vulgar error’. Lowth, moreover, frequently hedged his comments, as in ‘Ought it not to be …?’ (: ), ‘would have made the sentence more strictly grammatical’ (: ), ‘I doubt much of the propriety of …’ (: ), ‘perhaps ought to be written in this manner’ (: ), ‘It would have been equally right, if …’ (: ). To be sure there are also a number of stronger condemnations, such as ‘obsolete, or at least vulgar; and we may add likewise improper’ (: ), ‘this abuse has long been growing upon us’ (: ), ‘Some of our best Writers have frequently fallen into this’ (: –) and ‘The Construction is hazardous, and hardly justifiable’ (: ), but we rarely come across the stronger ‘should be’, as would be expected from someone of Lowth’s reputation: this phrase occurs only once, as against twenty-one instances of the weaker ‘it ought to be’ and two instances of even weaker ‘ought it not to be …?’. The stronger deontic modal must occurs only eight times in the first edition, as in: .
Every Relative must have an Antecedent to which it refers (Lowth : )
According to Myhill (), should, as a modal expressing weak obligation, declined sharply in American English after the Civil War (–), while ought expressing weak obligation increased. Biber et al. (: ) note that ought is rare before in the text types news,
84
Eighteenth-century English
but only three of them are found in the section on syntax (: –), which is where most of the normative strictures occur. Compared to Murray, whose grammar contains sixty-two instances of deontic should, fifty-two instances of ought to and twenty-one instances of must (Vorlat :), these are small numbers indeed. The question arises as to how Lowth came to be an icon of prescriptivism. I believe that both his approach to grammar, and to language as such, and the reception of his grammar can be held responsible for this. Immediately upon its publication on February , the grammar proved so popular that within a month Dodsley decided to have it reprinted (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b). Lowth would have preferred to wait a little longer, so that he could incorporate the comments he was hoping to get from his readers; for all that, a second, expanded edition came out a year later. I have come across a letter from the hand of one Thomas Fitzmaurice, addressed to Adam Smith (−), who was later to publish An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations (). The letter, which was sent from Oxford, dates from as little as eighteen days after the publication of the grammar, which is astonishing given the fact that within this brief time span the grammar would have had to be sent for from London and subsequently read by the writer of the letter before he was able to comment on it. The following quotation from the letter explains why the grammar was so warmly received: Pray have you seen Dr Louths English Grammar which is just come out? It is talk’d of much. Some of the ingenious men with whom this University overflows, are picking faults and finding Errors in it at present. Pray what do you think of it? I am going to read Harris’s Hermes now, having read this Grammar. I heard lately an objection to an Expression in your Book, which I think has some foundation. It is in the Beginning of the st Section upon Custom: the Expression is a Haunch Button, which is not, I imagine exactly English. (Oxford, February ; ed. Mossner and Ross , letter ) In making this last comment Fitzmaurice was actually right, as searching for ‘Haunch Button’ with the help of Google or within ECCO only yielded references to Adam Smith’s Theory of Moral Sentiments (), evidently the book referred to by Fitzmaurice here: ‘not exactly English’ indeed. The grammar thus clearly inspired readers like Fitzmaurice in criticising each other’s linguistic mistakes as well as Lowth’s grammar itself, for this had been Lowth’s approach adopted in the grammar. The part in which he deals with English syntax is heavily annotated − ‘bespattered with pompous notes’ as Aitchison calls
fiction and drama. Lowth’s grammar thus provides evidence to the contrary, as would be expected from the nature of the text type concerned. The texts of Lowth’s and Murray’s grammars do, however, differ in size. Lowth totals pages and Murray pages, i.e. the former is only about per cent the length of the latter.
Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism 85
it (: ) − with comments on grammatical errors committed by ‘the most approved authors’. One example is the following randomly picked footnote:
Adjectives are sometimes employed as Adverbs; improperly, and not agreeably to the Genius of the English Language. As, ‘extreme elaborate:’ Dryden, Essay on Dram. Poet. ‘marvellous graceful:’ Clarendon, Life, p. , ‘extreme unwilling;’ ‘extreme subject:’ Swift, Tale of a Tub, and Battle of Books. ‘I shall endeavour to live hereafter suitable to a man in my station.’ Addison, Spect. No . ‘Homer describes this river agreeable to the vulgar reading.’ Pope, Note on Iliad, ii. x. . (: −) Linguistically speaking, Addison and Swift were the most influential writers at the time (see for example Wright ), but they were also the writers most criticised by Lowth in his grammar (Tieken-Boon van Ostade : ), followed by Dryden, Pope and Clarendon, who similarly occur in the above footnote. Lowth’s repeated criticism of Swift’s language led to the following comment by William Melmoth (−), who had been invited by Dodsley to read a first version of the grammar, and who had recommended publication of it (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b): ‘I was pleased to find several instances of gross inaccuracies produced from Swift: a writer wm. I have always looked upon as enjoying a reputation much higher than he deserves, in many respects’ (Tierney : ). Melmoth’s criticism related to Swift’s prose only: ‘In poetry I acknowledge his excellence’, he added. Lowth’s grammar is the first eighteenth-century normative grammar to adopt this proscriptive approach, but Percy (: –), upon an analysis of the reception of Lowth’s grammar in the Monthly Review and the Critical Review, shows that this approach had already been popular among reviewers who wrote for these periodicals before the grammar came out. My collection of Lowth’s letters shows that Lowth did indeed read the Monthly Review, so this is where he may have picked up this new approach. It is this approach which appears to have contributed to the popularity of Lowth’s grammar, of which down to his death in around , copies were published (Tieken-Boon van Ostade a:). However, according to Hussey (: ) this approach also gave him and his grammar such a bad press in modern times.
Conclusion
In this chapter I have tried to place Lowth and his grammar into a rather different light from that which reflects his current reputation as an arch-prescriptivist, and I have done so by considering him primarily as a person rather than as the formidable grammarian which he appears to have grown into over the past years. A major tool in bringing this about was an analysis of his correspondence, which in particular highlights his private motivation for writing the grammar, that is as a means to ensure the best opportunities in
86 Eighteenth-century English
society for his eldest son. The grammar therefore has its origin in a private project, which, through Lowth’s connections in the world around him, that is with his patron Henry Bilson Legge and his publisher Robert Dodsley, grew into a much larger publisher’s project, much like Johnson’s Dictionary had done previously (Sledd and Kolb : ; Reddick : ). Consequently, its intended readership changed from an audience of children into one of scholars, resulting in an enormously popular work which, according to the OCEL (McArthur , s.v. ‘Lowth’), developed into ‘a standard textbook’. Lowth records this unexpected achievement with evident pride in his brief Memoirs written towards the end of his life as follows: Publications … Short Introduction to English Grammar vo. . Many Editions since in mo. all corrected with some alterations, additions, &c by ye. Author. The number of Copies printed in the whole including the Edition of (or ) amounted to about .. (Bodleian Library MS Eng. misc. c., fols. −) As a grammarian, Lowth is seriously underestimated by the current generation of linguists, who, as I have tried to demonstrate here, are mistaken in viewing him merely as an authoritarian bishop intent on imposing a norm − his private norm − of correct language on the language user, but also as an exponent of an approach to language which would not be part of the discipline of linguistics. Lowth, however, was well aware of the fact that there were different ways of dealing with language. When explaining his aims in the preface to A Short Introduction, he made a distinction between language as a system (‘the Language’) and language use (‘the practice’): It is not owing then to any peculiar irregularity or difficulty of our Language, that the general practice both of speaking and writing it is chargeable with inaccuracy. It is not the Language, but the practice, that is in fault. (: v−vi) In his grammar, Lowth is concerned solely with grammar at the level of usage, and this was an approach taken deliberately (see also Tieken-Boon van Ostade b), for, as he wrote at the end of his preface: Those, who would enter more deeply into this Subject, will find it fully and accurately handled, with the greatest acuteness of investigation, perspicuity of explication, and elegance of method, in a Treatise intitled HERMES, by JAMES HARRIS Esq; the most beautiful and perfect example of Analysis that has been exhibited since the days of Aristotle. (: xiv−xv) And this was exactly what Thomas Fitzmaurice announced in his letter that he was going to do next: ‘I am going to read Harris’s Hermes now, having read this Grammar’.
Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism 87
I therefore believe that normative linguistics, the branch of linguistics of which Lowth is one of the best-known exponents, deserves to have its own recognised and independent position within linguistics as such. As long as linguists continue to treat with disdain the efforts undertaken by grammarians at the end of the standardisation process of a language like English, it will be impossible to give full credit to what they set out to achieve. Even down to fairly recently such an attitude led to the kind of prejudices discussed above, that normative grammarians took an authoritative, unscholarly and unscientific attitude to language. Such prejudices fail to do justice to their actual achievements, which primarily concerned the codification of the language by laying down the rules of grammar for those who wished to improve themselves linguistically or socially, or both. That in doing so they took recourse to Latin as a major source in the formulation of their linguistic strictures − another point on which they are usually criticised (Pullum : ) − is hardly something for which they deserve to be blamed. At a time when English was not an academic subject, knowledge of the grammar of Latin was the only skill which made them eligible as grammarians (see Chapman ). If, moreover, a scientific approach to language requires the making empirical observations which can be objectively verified, we have to conclude that English linguistics was definitely budding as a discipline around the middle of the eighteenth century. I know of at least four grammarians, that is White (), Ward (), Baker () and Fogg (/) (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b: −; Wright : ), who appear to have worked with a corpus as a source for their work. And so did Lowth, for he too had a corpus at his disposal, consisting of examples of grammatical errors committed by ‘our best Authors … [who] have sometimes fallen into mistakes, and been guilty of palpable errors in point of Grammar’ (: ix). He evidently considered his corpus to be representative of usage generally − an important requirement of corpus linguistics (see for example Biber et al. ; Meurman-Solin : ), for he claims to have collected his examples ‘such as [they] occurred in reading, without any very curious or methodical examination: and they might easily have been much increased in number by any one, who had leisure or phlegm enough to have gone through a regular course of reading with this particular view’ (: ix). In his analysis of the readership of the British Library between and , Cash () notes that during the year there were people who had access to the library, and one of them was Robert Lowth. This was the time when he was writing his grammar, and one of his activities may have been the relatively systematic collection of example sentences for the footnotes of its
I owe this information to Anthony Lowth.
88 Eighteenth-century English
syntax section. In order to give full credit to his work, we should therefore not deal with his grammar from the perspective of rigorous modern linguistic requirements. Only if we are prepared to view his work and that of his fellow normative grammarians in the context in which they lived and wrote will we be able to judge their achievements for what they were. And considerable they were, too.
6
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar K A R LIJ N NAV EST * University of Leiden
Introduction
On February Hester Lynch Thrale (later Piozzi) (−), an eighteenth-century literary hostess best known as a friend of Dr Johnson’s, noted in her journal that her daughter: Hester Maria Thrale was four Years and nine Months old when I lay in of Lucy; and then I first began to teach her Grammar shewing her the Difference between a Substantive and an Adjective as I lay in Bed. (Hyde : ) Hester Maria, otherwise known as Queeney (−), a nickname none other than Dr Johnson had given to her, may have been a precocious child (see Navest : −), but teaching grammar to such young children was by no means unusual at the time. According to Michael (: ), the Reverend John Ash (?–) of Pershore in Worcestershire wrote his Grammatical Institutes: or Grammar, Adapted to the Genius of the English Tongue () for his five-year-old daughter, who ‘learnt and repeated the whole in a short Time’ (Ash : Advertisement). It was Ash’s grammar which the novelist Fanny Burney (–) used while teaching her six-year-old son Alexander the rudiments of grammar in (Percy : ). Even Robert Lowth’s (–) popular and authoritative Short Introduction to English Grammar () was originally begun as a grammar for his son Thomas Henry (–), who was about four years old at the time (Tieken-Boon van Ostade b: –; : ). Evidence for this may be found in the example sentences in the grammar such as: ‘ “Thomas’s book:” that is, “Thomasis book;” not “Thomas his book”, as it is commonly supposed’ (: ), and ‘A Verb Active expresses an Action, and necessarily implies an agent, and an object acted upon: as, to love; “I love Thomas” (: ). Lowth’s grammar, however, is not a children’s grammar: it reads * The research for this chapter was carried out in the context of the NWO research project
The Codifiers and the English Language: Tracing the Norms of Standard English. This special journal, begun by Thrale in ‘as a record of the growth and education of her children’, was called the ‘Children’s or rather Family Book’ (Hyde : vii: ).
89
90 Eighteenth-century English
more like a scholarly treatise, and this was also how it was received at the time (Tieken-Boon van Ostade forthcoming). The grammarian Daniel Fenning (/–), for instance, thought Lowth’s grammar ‘much fitter for Men of Letters than for Youth at school’ (: v). That Ash understood much better than Lowth what it took to write a children’s grammar is made clear by John Collett Ryland (–), headmaster of a boys’ boarding school in Northampton, who in and reissued his friend’s work as ‘The easiest introduction to Dr. Lowth’s English grammar’. In the ‘Advertisement’ to the and editions of the grammar John Ryland states that: The Editor of this new Impression [that is Ryland], who has been engaged in the Province of instructing Youth for near eighteen Years, has pursued many Methods of teaching the first Rudiments of our own Tongue – and for six Years past has made full Trial of Mr. Ash’s Grammar, upon at least sixty Scholars; and he is obliged in Justice and Gratitude to his worthy Friend to own, that nothing of this Kind has succeeded so well – it is really surprising to see how easily it is learnt and recollected by many Children under ten Years of Age; and the Editor is certain, that if this little Book was prudently used, by Schoolmasters and Governesses of Ladies Boarding-schools, they would find their Scholars improve with greater Expedition, and be soon prepared to learn with Understanding and Pleasure, those higher and more excellent Grammars with which we are now favoured. He means Dr. Joseph Priestley’s English Grammar, mo. which should be read and taught after this, and then a Youth should be made acquainted with the Beauties and Blemishes, the Defects and Perfections of our finest English Writers, by reading with Attention and frequent Repetition, the best Grammar ever written in our Language, by one of the most amiable of men, Dr. Robert Lowth. (Ryland in Ash : Advertisement) Ash’s grammar was extremely popular. It reached almost fifty editions and reprints down to , and was translated into German in and again in (Alston : –). I believe that Ash’s grammar became such a success because his friend Ryland knew how to operate the market. Because Ryland decided to change the original title of the grammar in into The Easiest Introduction to Dr. Lowth’s English Grammar and Ash himself added the subtitle ‘An Easy Introduction to Dr. Lowth’s English Grammar’ to all editions published after (see Navest a), the work must have appealed to many schoolteachers as well as parents who were in need of an introduction to Lowth’s famous but difficult work. Another grammarian who presented her grammar as an introduction to Lowth’s was the children’s writer and educationist Ellenor Fenn (–). By the end of the eighteenth century Fenn’s popular Child’s Grammar. Designed to Enable Ladies Who May Not Have Attended to the
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar
91
Subject Themselves to Instruct Their Children (?) could be purchased at Elizabeth Newbery’s (/–) bookshop at the corner of St Paul’s Churchyard in London. In the preface to The Child’s Grammar, Fenn describes Lowth’s grammar as: a delightful Work! Highly entertaining to a young Person of Taste and Abilities, who is already initiated: and perhaps in the private and domestic Use for which it was designed; his Lordship’s Commentary might render it intelligible to those of his own family; but for general and public Use there is certainly Need of an Introduction to it. (b: vi) Unlike Lowth and Ash, Fenn realised that many ladies viewed the teaching of grammar ‘as an arduous undertaking’, and were ‘fearful of engaging in it’ (Fenn c: v; Percy : –). An example of such a mother was Georgiana Duchess of Devonshire (–), who, when writing to her mother in September , was about to teach her five-year-old daughter ‘little G’ (–) the rudiments of English grammar: Tomorrow I shall write you my idea of grammar, and what each part of speech is, that I may see if I am fit to instruct my G. I am asham’d of my own ignorance but I must learn for and with her. (Bessborough : ) In order to help such women as Georgiana, Fenn decided to write a series of grammar books in the s specifically designed for their needs. The grammars bear the following titles: The Child’s Grammar. Designed to Enable Ladies Who May Not Have Attended to the Subject Themselves to Instruct Their Children (?) The Mother’s Grammar. Being a Continuation of the Child’s Grammar () Parsing Lessons for Young Children () Parsing Lessons for Elder Pupils () The Friend of Mothers. Designed to Assist Them in Their Attempts to Instill the Rudiments of Language and Arithmetic, at an Early Age, and in a Manner Agreeable to their Children () Unlike Georgiana Duchess of Devonshire, who seemed to have been in great need of a grammar like Fenn’s, Thrale evidently felt confident enough to teach her daughter the rudiments of English grammar herself. Queeney must have received her first grammar lesson after June when she was ‘four Years and nine Months old’ and when her mother had just given birth to her fourth daughter Lucy Elizabeth (–) (Hyde : , ). Thrale’s grammar lessons seem to have been fruitful, since less than eight
According to Alston (:), ‘This is the earliest dated edition of this popular little grammar located.’ Because The Mother’s Grammar () was advertised as ‘Being a Continuation of the Child’s Grammar’, the first edition of The Child’s Grammar was probably published in as well, or maybe even earlier.
92 Eighteenth-century English
months later, on February , she proudly recorded in her journal that Queeney: has made since then [that is the day of her first grammar lesson] a Progress so considerable, that She this Day : Feb: persed [sic] the first Couplet of Pope’s Iliad, beginning of her own accord at the Vocative Case; tho this Coupplet [sic] is I think rather uncommonly difficult from the awkward Transposition of the Words – I mean awkward only to a Child. (Hyde : ) A friend of the Thrales who was particularly struck by Queeney’s parsing skills was the writer Oliver Goldsmith (?–). On September , when Queeney was celebrating her sixth birthday, Thrale noted in her journal that her daughter ‘read and persed to Dr. Goldsmith yesterday & he wonder’d at her Skill’ (Hyde : f.). Thrale apparently delighted in having Queeney examined by distinguished persons because some time later she mentions that Queeney ‘was examined before a Mr. Bright of Abingdon [a headmaster of a grammar school] who was astonished at her powers & Skill in persing some Lines of Dryden’s Virgil, explaining every difficult word, & even telling the derivation of most’ (Hyde : ). In this chapter I will discuss the question of why Thrale, unlike many women at the time, took it upon herself to teach her daughter grammar. In addition, I will try to find out which grammar she used during her grammar lessons. Did she, for instance, use the authoritative grammars of Lowth or Ash, or did she make use of the grammar prefixed to Johnson’s Dictionary (), a work which she had studied, according to her diary (Balderston [] : ). Finally, I intend to assess the effectiveness of Thrale’s grammar lessons.
Hester Lynch Thrale: a confident grammar teacher
Queeney Thrale’s education was evidently, as Linda Pollock puts it, ‘an exception to the general education for females’ at the time (: ). In her diary entry for November , Queeney’s contemporary, the twenty-yearold Elizabeth Vassall Fox (?–), laments the inadequate education she received as a young girl: as soon as I could think at all chance directed my studies; for though both my parents were as good and as virtuous people as ever breathed, and I was always an only child, yet I was entirely left, not from system, but from
The first couplet of Pope’s Iliad is as follows: ‘THE Wrath of Peleus’ Son, the direful Spring / Of all the Grecian Woes, O Goddess, sing! / That Wrath which hurl’d to Pluto’s gloomy Reign / The Souls of mighty Chiefs untimely slain; / Whose Limbs unbury’d on the naked Shore / Devouring Dogs and hungry Vultures tore’ (Pope : ).
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar 93
fondness and inactivity, to follow my own bent. Happily for me I devoured books, and a desire for information became my ruling passion. The experiment of leaving a child without guidance or advice is a dangerous one, and ought never to be done; for if parents will not educate it themselves they should seek for those that will; but I do not complain, as perhaps all is for the best in this instance, though I should be bien autre chose if I had been regularly taught. I never had any method in my pursuits, and I was always too greedy to follow a thing with any suite. Till lately I did not know the common principles of grammar, and still a boy of ten years old would outdo me. (Ilchester : f.; see also Blodgett : ) As the wife of the wealthy brewer Henry Thrale (–), Thrale could afford servants, which enabled her, unlike many parents at the time, to find the time to take care of the education of her own daughter (Shefrin : ). Pollock describes Thrale as being ‘constantly with her children, urging them on to even higher intellectual attainments’ (: ). However, in her diary Thrale confessed that it had been Queeney’s grandmother who had commanded her ‘to teach the little Girl’ (Balderston [] : ). According to Thrale, her mother believed that ‘I had now – or ought to have, something to amuse me without visiting or fooling at Places of publick Resort, like fashionable Wives & Parents. I therefore did buckle hard to my Business, taught this poor Infant twenty pretty Tricks, She was no better for Learning, and so my Time was employ’d’ (Balderston [] : ). As for English grammar, I believe Thrale felt confident enough to teach the subject herself due to the education she had received during her own youth. Although Thrale stated that when she was a little girl ‘Education was a Word then unknown, as applied to Females’, she does add that her parents had taught her ‘to read, & speak, & think, & translate from the French’ till she ‘was half a Prodigy’ (Clifford : ). Her aunt taught her Italian and Spanish and when Thrale was seventeen it was this same aunt who insisted that she should be taught Latin by Dr Arthur Collier (–) (Clifford : , ) (cf. Tieken-Boon van Ostade, ‘Eighteenth-century women and their norms of correctness’, this volume). Clifford (: ) observes that ‘[a]t first the tutor found her more enthusiastic than thorough, and as a result she made slow progress’. It was probably around this time that Collier wrote the following letter to his pupil: My Dear Child You are enough to make a Parson Swear, and I wont write a word of Latin more to you till you learn your Accidence at least, and know what ought to be nominative and what accusative case before and after verbs. What can be the matter? there must be something strangely wrong in your Head that so plain and simple a doctrine will not make its way into your understanding: In the very first sentence of your yesterdays Letter there are but seven words and six faults. (Clifford : )
94
Eighteenth-century English
Thrale must have been studying Latin from Lily’s grammar around this time, as becomes clear when we have a look at her diary entry for June : Once at a Shew of wild Beasts the Man made us examine a Panther so gentle that she purred like a Cat, and rolled, and rubbed herself about her Keeper in the manner Cats use; see Gentlemen & Ladies says Mr Cross – Here’s the fierce Animal mentioned in Lilly’s grammar, Nec vult Panthera domari; – & see here I will pull her Tongue out before you, & you shall count her Teeth Gentlemen. – My Father was so pleased that he gave the fellow a Crown. (Balderston [] : ) This is not the only reference to Lily’s grammar that I have come across in Thrale’s writings. The sentence ‘nec vult panthera domari’ can also be found in the journal of her honeymoon tour to France, Italy and Germany with her second husband, the Italian musician Gabriel Piozzi (–). Lily’s grammar, which had originally been published in (Padley : ), was reprinted about times (Alston : i), and was used in schools for three centuries (Vorlat : ). Padley (: ) lists Shakespeare, Ben Jonson, Milton and Dryden as some of the people who used this grammar (Wardhaugh : ), while Henry Fielding (–) and Laurence Sterne (–) had also studied the grammar as young boys. In Fielding’s The History of Tom Jones () the majority of the schoolmaster Partridge’s quotations come from Lily’s grammar (see Mutter in his edition of Fielding’s Tom Jones [] : ), while in his Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, Gentleman () Sterne gives the definition of a noun from Lily’s grammar (Sterne : ). According to McCarthy (: ), Thrale ‘was proud of her own Latin and ready to impart Latin to her daughter’ as well. He further states that ‘Hester Thrale, as a feminist, counted her daughter in the category of those who may learn Latin, a social decision not all of Thrale’s friends would have made’ (McCarthy : ). In Thrale indeed reports in her diary that Fanny Burney’s father ‘Dr. Burney did not like his Daughter should learn Latin even of Johnson who offered to teach her for Friendship, because then She would have been as wise as himself forsooth, & Latin was too Masculine for Misses’ (Balderston : ; see also Tieken-Boon van Ostade c, and ‘Eighteenth-century women and their norms of correctness’, this volume). On March Thrale records in her journal that her daughter, who was ‘ Years & Months’ at the time, can repeat ‘the :st Page of Lilly’s Grammar to the bottom’, while noting at the same time that the little girl ‘cannot however read at all’ (Hyde : –). One and a half years later, when she was four, Queeney was still busy studying Lily’s grammar because her mother then tells us that she has repeated ‘her Latin Grammar to the end of the Declensions’ (Hyde : ).
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar 95
Unlike Thrale, the educationalists Maria Edgeworth (–) and her father Richard Lovell Edgeworth (–) were not in favour of putting such a high emphasis on rote learning. In their Practical Education () they claimed that: By gentle degrees a child may be taught the relations of words to each other in common conversation, before he is presented with the first sample of grammatical eloquence in Lily’s Accidence. ‘There be eight parts of speech.’ A phrase which in some parts of this kingdom would perhaps be understood, but which to the generality of boys who go to school conveys no meaning, and is got by heart without reflection, and without advantage. (Edgeworth and Edgeworth : f.) I believe that it was probably due to the fact that she herself had started to learn Latin when already seventeen that Thrale decided to have her daughter learn Lily’s grammar as early as possible.
The teaching of English grammar
As for her attempts at studying the grammar of English, Thrale unfortunately does not inform us about which grammar she used. However, this does not mean that she showed no interest in the study of English grammar. Thrale was only nineteen years old when none other than James Harris (–) presented her with an interleaved copy of his Hermes, or a Philosophical Inquiry Concerning Universal Grammar () because he thought she was capable of studying philosophical grammar (Clifford : ). Clifford (: , n.) points out that ‘Opposite the dedication Mrs. Piozzi had written: “Dr. S. Johnson said that in his dedication, consisting of but lines, there were Grammatical faults – and these fellows (says he) will teach Philology” ’. In addition, Thrale also expressed her interest in English grammar in her diary, such as in the following entry for February , where she deals with a concept which is nowadays referred to as the developmental phenomenon of overregularisation, that is children imposing the -ed rule for the past tense in cases where it does not apply (see Marcus et al. ; Maslen et al. ): All Children, and untaught Foreigners make their Conjugations regular; and every one till they are tutor’d into contrary Practice, say I goed, instead of I went: this is right; for Went is the preterite of the Verb to wend in our old Saxon Language, & very perverse it is to keep that same Tense and change the Infinitive Mood. I would that Grammarians gave some Acct however why this Verb is irregular in so many other Languages: – We can account for it best in our own. (Balderston [] : f.)
I am grateful to Annemie Verbist for drawing my attention to these studies.
96
Eighteenth-century English
This quotation suggests that Mrs Thrale must have been familiar with some of the grammars which were available to her at the time when she was teaching her daughter, such as any of the following works: ) ) ) )
The grammar prefixed to Johnson’s Dictionary () Lowth’s Short Introduction to English Grammar () Ash’s Grammatical Institutes () Newbery’s An Easy Introduction to the English Language ()
I will consider each of these possibilities in turn. .
Johnson’s Dictionary
At the time of Queeney’s birth in Johnson had not yet been introduced to the Thrales. A year later, it was the playwright Arthur Murphy (– ) who brought Johnson to dine with the Thrales. Despite the age difference, Hyde notes that Johnson and the Thrales ‘were immediately attracted to each other’ (: ), and that it did not take long before Johnson became ‘a virtual member of the family’ (Hyde : vii). The Thrales’ library at Streatham Park soon became one of Johnson’s main concerns (Clifford : ). In he purchased a volume of ‘Saurin on the Bible’ for their library, which Thrale described as ‘An odd volume bought at a sale for s. d. by Dr. Johnson, for Streatham Park Library, ’ (quoted from Clifford : ). Some time later, probably in the early s, Johnson assisted Henry Thrale ‘in making wholesale additions to his stock of reference works, being given carte blanche to expend comparatively large sums of money’ (Clifford : ). Johnson apparently took this job seriously, since at a certain point he writes to Thrale that: I have now got more books for Mr. Thrale than can be carried in the coach, and I think, he may better send a cart than we can get one, because he may send with it baskets or sacks for the smaller volumes. We have of all sizes more than four hundred. (quoted from Clifford : ) His own Dictionary might indeed have been one of the books which Johnson bought for Streatham Park Library. That Thrale and her husband were familiar with the work becomes clear when we read the following entry from Thrale’s diary, written in the autumn of : I remember we had one Day – seven Years ago I suppose or ten perhaps; put him in Mind of four or five faults in his Dictionary, & express’d our Wishes for a new Edition. (Balderston [] : ) From the above it can be concluded that the Thrales had not only studied Johnson’s Dictionary but that they had even discussed the work with the lexicographer himself. Whether the Thrales already had access to Johnson’s Dictionary before is uncertain. Although the sale catalogue of
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar
97
Streatham Park Library lists an octavo edition of the Dictionary and a folio edition can be found in the sale catalogue of Mrs Piozzi’s Library, neither catalogue provides us with the year of publication of these two editions (Eddy : , ). Particularly interesting about Johnson’s Dictionary is the fact that words which in Present-day English are spelt -ic, such as romantic and music, are there spelled with final -k. The reason for this was that Johnson wanted to keep the final k as ‘a mark of Saxon original’ (Tieken-Boon van Ostade and Bax , quoted from Pottle : ). While going through my collection of Queeney’s letters, which at the moment consists of forty items of which thirty-six are autograph letters, I only found seven instances of -ick spellings, that is, Romantick, publick, publickly, Publick, politicks, Musick and Classick. Tieken-Boon van Ostade and Bax () have shown that from June onwards Thrale had started to use -ick in her letters to Johnson, whereas before that time she had used both variants when writing to him. The fact that Thrale switched to this -ick spelling is noteworthy since -ick was no longer very common at the time. Although it might have been Thrale herself who taught her daughter to use -ick spelling, we have some possible evidence that it was Johnson rather than her mother who was responsible for this. According to Thrale, her precocious daughter was already looking up words ‘in the Dictionary with perfect readiness’ from the age of six (Hyde : ). If Thrale allowed herself to be influenced by Johnson’s language, she might also have used the grammar prefixed to his Dictionary during her grammar lessons. Furthermore, Johnson’s grammar is arranged similarly to the one by Lily (Kolb and DeMaria : ). Since Thrale and her little daughter were already familiar with Lily’s grammar, Johnson’s grammar might therefore have been a good choice. Johnson himself, however, did not consider his grammar a children’s grammar at all. In the grammar section of his Dictionary entitled ‘A Grammar of the English Tongue’, he points out that: Thus have I collected rules and examples, by which the English language may be learned, if the reader be already acquainted with grammatical terms, or taught by a master to those that are more ignorant. To have written a grammar for such as are not yet initiated in the schools, would have been tedious, and perhaps at last ineffectual. (: Sig. dr) .
Lowth’s grammar
Another grammar Thrale might have used was that of Robert Lowth, which might even have been recommended by Johnson. It would not have been the
This does not apply to the parts of speech. Lily lists eight parts of speech, i.e. noun (article with substantive), pronoun, verb, participle, adverb, conjunction, preposition, interjection, while Johnson lists nine: substantive, adjective, pronoun, article, verb (incl. participle), adverb, conjunction, preposition, interjection (see Michael : , ).
98 Eighteenth-century English
first time for Johnson to do so. According to DeMaria (: f.), Johnson had apparently told the young Daniel Astle (c.–) to use Lowth’s grammar ‘rather than his own’. What we need to bear in mind, however, is that in , when Lowth’s grammar appeared on the market, Astle was already nineteen years old and thus no longer a child. It could also have been that Thrale had read the review of Lowth’s grammar in the Critical Review (see Percy ). From her diary we know that Thrale was familiar with this periodical. In December she recorded that ‘[Charles] Jennens of Gopsal too I sincerely believe lost his Life by being ridiculed in the Critical Review for his Notes upon King Lear’ (Balderston [] : ). But since, according to Percy, the Critical Review regarded ‘the “method of arrangement” of Lowth’s text as “a little embarrassed, so as not to be easily comprehended, or retained, by young beginners” ’ (: ), Thrale might have decided not to use it. .
Ash’s grammar
In the case of Ash’s grammar, Thrale might likewise have read about it in the Critical Review, which in had described the work as ‘a plain, easy, compendious system of English grammar, properly calculated for children’ (Anon. ). In spite of this favourable review, I doubt whether Ash’s Grammatical Institutes was indeed used by Thrale. Her journal entries inform us that she, unlike Fanny Burney thirty years later, used the Westminster Grammar while preparing her son Harry (–) for his entrance to school. Harry would have entered Westminster Grammar School in the autumn of if he had not died a few months before (Hyde : ). What is striking, however, is that in Ash’s grammar we find a parsing lesson, taken from the twenty-fourth book of Pope’s translation of the Iliad (). I have already referred to the fact that Mrs Thrale had given ‘the first Couplet of Pope’s Iliad’ to Queeney as a parsing exercise (Hyde : ). The possibility must, however, be reckoned with that this was no more than a coincidence, as Pope’s works were very popular at the time. .
Newbery’s grammar
Another possibility might be that Thrale used a copy of the third edition of the grammar by the publisher of children’s books, John Newbery (–), entitled Grammar Made Familiar and Easy to Young Gentlemen, Ladies, and Foreigners, Being the First Volume of the Circle of the Sciences (). In
I am indebted to Carol Percy for informing me about the review of Ash’s grammar and for providing me with information on Ash’s publications from her database (http://www. chass.utoronto.ca/reviews/). I am grateful to Anita Auer for providing me with a copy of the review of The Easiest Introduction to Dr Lowth’s English Grammar, Designed for the Use of Children under Ten Years of Age from the Critical Review.
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar
99
Newbery had published his Easy Introduction to the English Language; or, a Compendious Grammar for the Use of Young Gentlemen, Ladies, and Foreigners. The grammar was one of the seven ‘little volumes’ of Newbery’s Circle of the Sciences, a collection that ‘could be considered the first children’s encyclopaedia’ (Roscoe : ; ODNB, s.v. ‘Newbery, John’). Just like Thrale, Newbery believed that children should be taught English grammar ‘as soon as they have a Capacity for it, which is generally very early; for ’tis a Shame we should be ignorant of our own Tongue’ (: iii). This might have been the reason why Newbery decided to inscribe his grammar to none other than Prince William Henry (–), who was only two years old at the time. However, when reading Newbery’s preface, it becomes clear that children are not the only audience he had in mind for his work: THOUGH the following Grammar may be probably look’d upon, at first View, as nothing more than a new Invention for the Amusement of Children, yet we flatter ourselves, that upon a diligent and impartial Perusal, it will prove the Foundation or Ground-work of Polite Learning, and an acceptable Service, not only to Infants, but to persons more advanced in Years. (: i) We know that Thrale was familiar with Newbery’s publications for children since in her Anecdotes of the Late Samuel Johnson, LL.D. () she noted that Johnson: used to condemn me for putting Newbery’s books into their hands as too trifling to engage their attention. ‘Babies do not want (said he) to hear about babies; they like to be told of giants and castles, and of somewhat which can stretch and stimulate their little minds.’ When in answer I would urge the numerous editions and quick sale of Tommy Prudent or Goody Two Shoes: ‘Remember always (said he) that the parents buy the books, and that the children never read them.’ (Piozzi : ) While browsing in Newbery’s shop at Ludgate Street at the corner of St Paul’s Churchyard, where John Newbery’s business was carried on from first by John Newbery’s nephew Francis and after his death in by his wife Elizabeth Newbery (see ODNB, S.V. ‘Newbery, Francis’; Roscoe : f.), Thrale might have spotted Newbery’s grammar and decided to buy it for her daughter. The fact that Goody Two Shoes and Tommy Prudent are not listed in the sale catalogues of Streatham Park Library and Mrs Piozzi’s Library suggests that these chapbooks did not survive the Streatham nursery. The grammar Thrale used when teaching Queeney might have suffered the same fate. Another possibility is that the Thrale children were the owners of these books and that they remained in their possession. We know that Queeney had her own library (Lansdowne : xvi) and the same must have been true for her sister Susan (–), who in received a letter from Dr Johnson in which he gave her the following advice: ‘Do you
100 Eighteenth-century English
read the Tatlers? They are part of the books which every body should read, because they are the sources of conversation, therefore make them part of your library’ (Redford : ). The Thrale daughters apparently were not the only ones who had their own libraries. Martin refers to Thomas Talbot (–), who in bought his three little daughters ‘quite a library’ in London (Martin : ). The ownership marks Jackson came across in eighteenth- and nineteenth-century children’s books further suggests that many upper- and middle-class children had their own libraries, or at least their own shelves of books (: –).
A pioneer in teaching grammar to children
However, rather than using either of the grammars discussed here, Mrs Thrale, I believe, devised her own teaching scheme, in which attempt she can thus be considered a pioneer. Since she was well grounded in grammar herself, she might not even have felt the urge to use a grammar book during the first grammar lessons. Thrale’s grammar teaching would then have been similar to that of the father described by Tieken-Boon van Ostade elsewhere in this volume (see ‘Eighteenth-century women and their norms of correctness’), or to the one described in Edgeworth and Edgeworth’s Practical Education (): A few months ago, Mr. – – gave his little daughter H – –, a child of five years old, her first lesson in English grammar; but no alarming book of grammar was produced upon the occasion, nor did the father put on an unpropitious gravity of countenance. He explained to the smiling child the nature of a verb, a pronoun, and a substantive. Then he spoke a short familiar sentence, and asked H – – to try if she could find out which word in it was a verb, which a pronoun, and which a substantive. The little girl found them all out most successfully, and formed no painful associations with her first grammatical lesson. (Edgeworth and Edgeworth : ) Thrale similarly appears to have tested her children’s knowledge of the parts of speech by way of questioning. On February , her son Harry’s fifth birthday, she recorded in her journal: ‘I asked him this morning what part of Speech ring was? I don’t know now says he whether you mean the Noun or the Verb’ (Hyde : ). In addition, as I have already mentioned, Thrale provided her children with English and Latin parsing lessons which she selected herself, as is clear from the following. While describing her son Harry’s progress on February , Thrale wrote that: he is got as far as the Verbs in his Latin Grammar; he must now begin to read construe and perse in that Language – tomorrow we will make our Commencement with the Scrap of Latin at the Head of some Psalm or another. (Hyde : )
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar
101
Johnson’s Dictionary might, however, have played a part during the grammar lessons. I have already mentioned that Queeney knew how to look up words in Johnson’s Dictionary as a little girl. Johnson’s Dictionary was used by more children at the time, as appears from two of the children’s books written by Ellenor Fenn. Not only is Johnson’s Dictionary included in ‘Mrs Teachwell’s library for her young ladies’, a reading list of eightyone English and four French titles which can be found in Fenn’s Female Guardian (), it is also quoted in Fables, by Mrs. Teachwell (): ‘A FABLE – “a feigned story intended to enforce some moral precept.” This is the definition of Dr. Johnson’ (a: v). Apart from being an ‘admirable thesaurus of the English language’, which according to the anonymous author of The Juvenile Library ‘ought to occupy a place on the table of every young writer’ (Anon. : ), Johnson’s Dictionary could also contribute to a child’s grammatical knowledge. In Fenn’s Juvenile Correspondence (b) I came across a model letter in which a boy, referred to as Master Boiscot, tells a friend from school that he has ‘industry enough to enjoy searching in a dictionary, and I am confident you would. I delight in seeking the explanation of a word, and writing that and the part of speech’ (b: f.). During the year she spent at Miss Primrose’s fashionable boarding school in Mussleborough, near Edinburgh, the ten-year-old Mary Fairfax (– ) (later Somerville), who would later become a science writer (see ODNB, s.v. ‘Fairfax, Mary’), had to ‘learn by heart a page of Johnson’s dictionary, not only to spell the words, give their parts of speech and meaning, but as an exercise of memory to remember their succession’ (Somerville : ; see also Renton : ). According to Dille (a: ), ‘the dictionary that most of Johnson’s contemporaries used was not the familiar folio but the “abstracted” Dictionary.’ In January a two-volume octavo edition, ‘that Johnson abridged from the folio for benefit of the “common reader” ’, had been published (Dille a: f.). In order to reach its target audience, the abridged edition could be bought for ten shillings, which was considerably cheaper than the folio edition, which cost £ s. (Dille a: ). Although the abridged Dictionary remained popular well into the nineteenth century, Dille also points out that there was a market ‘for yet smaller versions’ of Johnson’s work (a: ). Thus, schoolchildren like Fairfax probably used one of ‘the miniature or “pocket” Johnson’s Dictionaries’, which began to appear on the market from the s (Dille b: , ). Thrale certainly approved of her own method of grammar teaching, for in her diary entry for March/April she expressed her criticism on the curriculum of girls’ schools: One of these educated Maidens fell under my Notice the other day – I asked her what Needle Work She could do, Oh none Madam, our
According to Dille (b: ), who consulted the second edition published in , ‘The first miniature edition of the Dictionary was compiled by the Rev. Joseph Hamilton,
102 Eighteenth-century English
Governess thinks little of such Matters, we are all learning the Sciences; Oh! the Sciences, and pray my Dear what are they – Many replies my Companion, but Grammar is one: & what do you know of Grammar Miss said I. I know answers the Girl that a Pronoun stands instead of a Noun for a Substitute and a Representative. – What part of Speech is His then for Example; as his Hat, his Sword &c? – His’n Ma’am? replies the Lass with an Air! I believe it is an Adverb, – A’nt it? – (Balderston [] : ; see also Percy : ) Interestingly, the girl’s definition of the pronoun is very similar to that found in Lowth’s Short Introduction to English Grammar: ‘A pronoun is a word standing instead of a Noun, as its Substitute or Representative’ (: ). Even though Thrale’s daughter Susan was educated at Mrs Cumyns’s school from the age of four, Thrale continued to examine her daughter’s grammatical knowledge in order to check whether she, unlike the girl described above, could put into practice what she had learned. On January Thrale records that her daughter, who would turn five in May, ‘has a Knowledge of the Parts of Speech that she cannot be ensnared by any Question’ (Hyde : ). Susan apparently continued studying grammar at Mrs Cumyns’s school because in September Thrale noted in her journal that ‘her Geography & Grammatical Knowledge go on to my Wish’ (Hyde : )], while in her journal entry for ‘the last Day of the Year ’, she wrote that ‘Susan’s Geographical & Grammatical Knowledge amazes even me’ (Hyde : ). 5
The effectiveness of Thrale’s grammar lessons
I believe that it was because of her mother’s grammar lessons and the presence of Johnson’s Dictionary in the Thrale household that Queeney’s language in her letters agreed to what was considered correct language at the time. Unlike the earlier mentioned Mary Fairfax, who at the age of eleven ‘was unable to compose even a short answer to a neighbour’s letter so poor were her writing and spelling’ (Renton : ), Queeney had started to write letters from an early age. According to Thrale, her daughter was already writing cards to her friends when she was three and a half years old (Hyde : ). In my search for letters written by Queeney I found two letters written by her as a young girl, that is at the age of eight and twelve. The second of these is a letter she wrote to Johnson on August , which reads as follows:
“master of the Academy at Hemel Hemsted”, in the late s or early ’s, and was almost certainly conceived as a dictionary for use in schools.’ These letters can be found in The John Rylands Library in Manchester.
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar
103
Streatham Aug : th: st
Sir I think both the Ladies and you did me great honour to take notice of my Letter: I have now been at Town Malling, and think it a very pretty odd old fashioned Place: the Cascade out of the Wall and that down by the Ponds are quite charming, and Mr:Brooke was vastly civil and gave Mama some fine old China, and sent some to Susan who is his Godaughter. I liked it all much upon the whole, but it seems there have been Alterations made by which my Mother thinks it not mended. I hope Doctor Taylor is well and all his pretty Animals, Jigg and Jessamy in particular, but I should have named Mrs Sally first and given my kind Service to her. I am Sir / Your most humble Servant / H: M: Thrale. (MS Ry. .) Apart from the word Godaughter Queeney’s letter does not contain any errors, either in spelling or in grammar. That a knowledge of grammar was particularly important when carrying out a correspondence is shown by the following quotation from a ‘Letter from a Mother to her Daughter’ (: ), which can be found in Henry Hogg’s New and Complete Universal Letter-Writer or, Whole Art of Polite Correspondence (): You pay uncommon attention, I understand to your grammar, which gives me no little satisfaction; for I assure you Harriot, nothing redounds more to the credit of a young Lady, than writing and speaking correctly; – how many of our sex expose themselves, by corrupt phrases and false concords! (: ) In this letter, the mother also expresses the hope that her daughter: will make herself mistress of her own language, before she attempts to learn another, for it is too often the case that a young lady will begin French before she knows English. (: ) I believe that it was because of her mother’s grammar lessons that, in , the nine-year-old Queeney was ready to begin studying a new language, and not one, but three. During the next three years Queeney’s Italian tutor, Giuseppe Baretti (–), taught her Italian, Spanish and French. According to Hyde, Baretti instructed his young pupil ‘according to his ingenious method of “dialogues”’ (: ). During her Italian lessons Queeney would choose a topic and Baretti would then write an Italian conversation with an English translation (Hyde : ). Fortunately, Baretti’s entertaining and imaginative Italian dialogues about the nursery and barnyard at Streatham have come down to us (Hyde : ). They can be found in his Easy
104 Eighteenth-century English
Phraseology for the Use of Young Ladies, Who Intend to Learn the Colloquial Part of the Italian Language (). One of these dialogues is of interest here, since it is concerned with the teaching of grammar. In ‘Dialogue the fifty-fourth Between a Cock called Macaroni-Cock, and Miss Hetty’, a cock asks Queeney whether her tutor Baretti would be willing to teach him and his spouse Italian as well: C. Tell him when you see him, that, if he will teach it me and my spouse Cottager, he shall have a new-laid egg every morning for his trouble. H. I will not fail; and I am sure he will not refuse so good an offer, as he loves omelets [sic] mightily. C. So much the better. He shall have eggs enough to make himself every morning a very pretty omelet [sic] after the Florentine manner. H. That’s a settled point: but do you know grammar, my good friend? C. No, not a word: I never studied it. H. I am sorry for it, as my master hates to teach rudiments: but I will lend you one, that you may fit yourself for his instructions. C. I will be very thankful to you for it, and I promise that I will study the whole day long. (Baretti : f.) Although it is a pity that Baretti does not provide us with the title of the English grammar with which Queeney was taught the rudiments of grammar, his dialogue does show that an English grammar must have formed part of her library.
Conclusion
In this chapter I have tried to shed light on the possible English grammars Thrale might have had at her disposal while teaching her daughter from onwards. Although Thrale appears to have devised her own teaching scheme, her grammar lessons definitely paid off. Not only was Queeney able to carry out a correspondence in correct English from an early age; she also appears to have been provided with a good foundation for learning foreign languages with ease. According to Thrale, Queeney’s tutor Baretti was so impressed by her daughter’s language skills that he ‘puffed her about the Town for a Wit, Genius a Linguist &c.’ [ May ] (Balderston [] : ). It was Johnson, however, who taught Queeney Latin from July onwards. I recently discovered that one of the books Queeney used
Baretti also translated his Dialogues into Spanish which he presented in MS to Queeney in (Lansdowne : xii). Baretti called Queeney ‘Hetty’ or ‘Esteruccia’ (Hyde : ).
Queeney Thrale and the teaching of English grammar
105
during these lessons can now be found in the University of Rochester Library (Rochester, USA). It is a edition of Lily’s grammar, and it contains Queeney’s autograph. So when she started her Latin lessons with Dr Johnson, Queeney renewed her acquaintance with the grammar she had been made to learn by heart as a young child.
I am grateful to Pablo Alvarez, Curator of Rare Books, for providing me with information on Queeney’s copy of Lily’s grammar.
7
Coalitions, networks, and discourse communities in Augustan England: The Spectator and the early eighteenthcentury essay SUSA N FITZM AU R IC E University of Sheffield
As, on the one Side, my Paper has not in it a single Word of News, a Reflection in Politics, nor a Stroak of Party; so on the other, there are no Fashionable Touches of Infidelity, no obscene Ideas, no Satyrs upon Priesthood, Marriage, and the like popular Topics of Ridicule; no private Scandal, nor any Thing that may tend to the Defamation of particular Persons, Families, or Societies. Spectator, No. . Monday December .
Introduction
Early eighteenth-century London saw the establishment of an energetic literary community of men (and some women), who shared political ambitions and literary interests. They pursued their ambitions and practised their interests in a number of ways, including the social-political forum of the Whig-sponsored Kit Cat Club, and through collaboration in publication ventures. The long association of publisher Jacob Tonson and poet John Dryden provided a model for collaborative work. They had given many young writers a start in literary London by encouraging contributions to Dryden’s Miscellanies. By this function had been assumed by Joseph Addison, who launched the Spectator with Richard Steele. These men forged a network of interests based on their politics, their literary interests, and their search for patronage from the most powerful men in the government of the day, the Whig grandees, including Charles Montagu, the Earl of Halifax, Chancellor of the Exchequer. The coalition of writers centred on the Spectator was soon recognised as a powerful cultural force in London and in the provinces; the group pronounced on language usage and literary style, fashion and popular taste. The coalition also served, though less overtly, as a means of enforcing normative behaviour, and its members exhibited little linguistic innovation in their ordinary day-to-day linguistic practices as a result. Although the Spectator was the most popular periodical of the period, it was just one of a number of periodical papers which were both more political 106
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 107
and more partisan. The Whig Medley and the Tory Examiner duelled on the major issues; Daniel Defoe’s Review participated in the social and political debates. The Spectator was preceded by the Tatler and followed by the Guardian and the Freeholder, the latter more politically oriented than its precursors. These publications were produced regularly, on a daily or weekly basis, and were designed to engage, not only with questions of policy and politics, but with the positions that they themselves assumed. Many of the writers who contributed to the periodicals also published pamphlets and essays in response to the controversies of the day. For example, Swift’s political pamphlet Conduct of the Allies was a key tool in the Tory propaganda arsenal, designed to sell government policies to the English public. Rather than being published in a serial publication, it was issued in a number of editions between its first publication on November and its sixth edition issued in January . Similarly, Mary Astell wrote polemical pamphlets such as A Fair Way with Dissenters, which the dissenter Daniel Defoe challenged in pamphlets of his own. However, she also published important essays on topics such as religion and the education of women which were printed in multiple editions in the first decades of the century, and which commentators like Steele mocked in the pages of the Tatler. Accordingly, early eighteenth-century literary London was distinguished by a discourse community of essay writers and journalists whose conversations took place, not in the coffee houses and clubs frequented by the coalition and its supporters, but in the pages of the periodicals and pamphlets sold by printers and corner shops. In this chapter I explore the nature of this discourse community and consider the extent to which its habits and conventions also characterise those adhered to by the Spectator coalition. To this end, the chapter provides a discussion of the relation of social networks and strategic alliances (as represented by the Spectator coalition) to the wider discourse community on the basis of the study of the linguistic behaviours and rhetorical concerns of a group of speakers in early eighteenth-century London. I use a set of corpus linguistic techniques to conduct an examination
Probyn notes, ‘The Conduct of the Allies attacks the whigs for prolonging a war ruinously expensive for the nation but profitable to a monied clique driven by self-interest at the cost of the landed interest. It charged Queen Anne’s general, the duke of Marlborough, with corruption and self-aggrandisement, and accused Godolphin and the whig junto of megalomania. It also described the inequitable financial burden carried by England on behalf of the allies. The pamphlet was read in proof and corrected by St John and others, and was purchased and distributed by the ministry. Harley made additions to both the second and fourth editions. The first edition of copies sold in two days, the second in five hours, the third in less than a week, and by the sixth edition in January a total of , copies had sold.’ (Clive Probyn, ‘Swift, Jonathan (–)’, Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Oxford University Press, ; online edition, [http://www.oxforddnb.com/ view/article/, accessed Feb ]). Ruth Perry, ‘Astell, Mary (–)’, Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Oxford University Press, ; online edition, Oct [http://www.oxforddnb.com/view/ article/, accessed February ].
108 Eighteenth-century English
of ‘keyness’ in the Spectator periodical essays with reference to the essays collected in the Network of Eighteenth-century English Texts (NEET). This allows us to explore the extent to which the Spectator project is unique as the product of the Addison–Steele coalition and at the same time to examine what makes the Spectator distinct. In the sections that follow I first discuss how the essay writers in early eighteenth-century London might be regarded as constituting a discourse community. I also consider social networks and the ways in which a coalition might operate within the broader discourse community. Then I outline the research procedures followed for the study, present and discuss the findings, and offer some directions for further investigation. One of the outcomes is an account of the degree to which we can regard the writers as a community with shared practices, standards, and conventions. Discourse communities and the early eighteenth-century essay writers The early years of the eighteenth century witnessed the blossoming of essay writing – the publication of political pamphlets, periodical essays, and essays on religion, philosophy, literature and society thrived. The essay seemed to be the big new thing in the literary community, building on the foundations set by Dryden’s literary criticism, as exemplified in his Essay on Dramatick Poesie (). Of the literary community in early eighteenth-century London, Sutherland (: ) observes that: after the restoration, with the rapid development of a well-organized literary community in London, the author–reader relationship was correspondingly transformed, and the writer was able to direct his observations to a body of readers whom he could easily visualize, and with whom he might almost be said to converse. He goes on to comment that despite this new literary and literate world, ‘it was some time before these new conditions led to any considerable growth in essay writing’. In form the eighteenth-century essay occupies a stylistic space between the letter and the dialogue. Periodicals provide the illusion of personal interaction in the form of eidola, exemplified most vividly by the Tatler’s Isaac Bickerstaff. They also typically appeal to the reader directly in adopting conventions that seem to be more characteristic of the letter or of the newspaper editorial than of the present-day essay genre. To the extent that there is a recognisable set of practices associated with essay writing and production in the time, I will invoke the idea of the discourse community to describe the behaviour that the essay writers of the period observe. The discourse community is a concept developed in applied linguistics and rhetoric research to capture the shared conventions and practices observed by people in a shared field or occupation (for example Swales
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 109
; Johns and Swales ). Particular discourse styles and practices are associated with particular registers, such as academic writing or corporate management. These practices and conventions may not necessarily be explicitly prescribed but they must be sufficiently valued to be upheld as norms of the domain, and targets for participants new to the field. Richard Watts (a: ) defines a discourse community as: a set of individuals who can be interpreted as constituting a community on the basis of the ways in which their oral or written discourse practices reveal common interests, goals and beliefs, i.e. on the degree of institutionalization that their discourse displays. The members of the community may or may not be conscious of sharing their discourse practices. Thus, a discourse community may show strong or weak member affiliation to the values of the community, and the community itself may only become ‘visible’ through the course of time. In this sense, a discourse community might also be defined as an embryonic institution with its own historicity. How might this definition apply to the essay writers of the early eighteenth century? The practices that would seem to cast essay writers as a discourse community involve their adherence to a set of genre or register conventions that members could recognise and easily identify. For example, we would expect essay writers to adopt the standard rhetorical and stylistic markers of the essay, regardless of whether they are writing a single treatise or pamphlet or contributing to a serial publication for a periodical audience. The material conditions that characterise the production, distribution and consumption of the essay in the early eighteenth century also shape the practices of the essay discourse community. Speck (: ) notes that with the lapse of the Licensing Act in , formal censorship of the press ended, allowing print and publication to play a major role in life and politics in England. He notes that once government control had been lifted, the press became highly active. In newspaper publishing the writers, printers and distributors worked very closely in order to deliver the product on time, and in book publication authors would sell the manuscript to publishers for production at a profit (Ezell ). The printer would take charge of the minutiae involved in producing the print from manuscript, but depending on the printer the writers themselves might have varying degrees of control over the final product. Ezell (: ) notes that ‘most printers relied on the authors to read proof’; in the event that authors were unable to check their proofs, the result was a text filled with errors. In many cases, however, the printers exerted complete control over the product because they were legally liable for the contents of the pamphlets produced and sold (Hyland ).
It is worth pointing out that there is no clear distinction between the roles and functions of printer, publisher and bookseller in the period; indeed, Raven (: , fn) notes that ‘bookseller’ is the standard eighteenth-century term for those publishing as well as selling books.
110 Eighteenth-century English
The early eighteenth-century periodicals had more in common with newspapers than with books as far as their printing and publishing were concerned. The bookseller and printer Samuel Buckley, who started the first daily newspaper, Daily Courant, in , also printed the Tatler, adopting the newspaper’s layout for the periodical. Knight (: ) comments that early periodicals were as ephemeral as newspapers and were similarly recycled for various household functions despite the fact that whereas newspapers published news, which by definition is ephemeral, the periodicals commented on more enduring truths of daily life. Many printers tended to have a stable of periodicals that they produced and distributed. For example, Abigail Baldwin ran a ‘flourishing business in Warwick Lane, publishing and distributing a wide range of pamphlets and periodicals under the imprint “A. Baldwin”. In addition to treatises on issues such as social welfare and the standing army, she published pamphlets by Whig authors, including Daniel Defoe, and periodicals which ranged from the economic journal the British Merchant of Commerce Preserved to the notorious Female Tatler’. Abigail Baldwin and Samuel Buckley collaborated on the Spectator project; while Baldwin was the official agent for the Spectator throughout the original run of issues, Buckley was identified as the paper’s printer. As the agent, Baldwin accepted advertisements for the Spectator. Charles Lillie, a perfumer and bookseller, also took in letters and advertisements for the paper. On the other side of the political fence, the trade publisher John Morphew published the Tory Examiner (the periodical to which Swift contributed copy) and Abel Roper’s Post Boy, as well as ephemera and anonymous pamphlets. For the most part, however, the London printers and publishers tended to ignore party lines in the interests of turning a profit. The printing and publication practices that yielded the eighteenth-century essay – as a periodical piece or as a standalone pamphlet – were key to the essay discourse community’s activities. The early eighteenth-century London essay discourse community as sampled by the essays subcorpus of the Network of Eighteenth-century English Texts (NEET) represents both the periodical press, as exemplified by Defoe’s Review, Steele’s Guardian and Addison’s Freeholder, as well as the stand-alone essay published as a pamphlet. Although the writers collected in NEET did not all reside in London when their work was published, it was published in London. As indicated above, the roles of printers, publishers and distributors were not insignificant in controlling the form, style and distribution of publication. The essays collected in NEET were published between and by members of Addison’s social network, including Steele, Swift, Pope, Congreve, Prior and Lady Mary Wortley Montagu (Fitzmaurice ). They also include essays produced by writers who were
Beth Lynch, ‘Baldwin, Richard (c.–)’, Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Oxford University Press, ; online edition, [http://www.oxforddnb.com/view/ article/, accessed July ].
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 111
not connected with his social circle, such as Daniel Defoe, Mary Astell and Susanna Wesley. Although the institutions governing essay-writing and the stylistic norms that mark the essay as a genre can be taken to have affected all of the writers in some way, the circumstances in which individual writers produced their essays may have differed. For instance, some writers, such as Jonathan Swift, published their prose work at intervals over a long period; others, such as Susanna Wesley, published virtually none of their work in their own lifetime. Swift published his work in Dublin as well as in London; in contrast, although Defoe travelled quite widely when working undercover for Robert Harley, all of his work was first published in London. London literary publishing was dominated by two figures, who both competed with one another for copy and collaborated to ensure that they both profited from the works they purchased. Jacob Tonson and Bernard Lintott were responsible for printing a significant portion of the literature, criticism, and philosophical and religious works of the first third of the eighteenth century. In consequence, all of the authors in the community would have been familiar with these publishers, at least by reputation; many, including Steele and Pope, were published by both men. Figure . illustrates how the essay writers in NEET are connected. The publication dates of the essays included in the corpus are also shown. This illustrates that the discourse community has a historicity as an institution; the essays that provide the basis for the corpus linguistic investigation are emblematic of the practices and habits associated with the essay rather than being comprehensively representative of all the products of the community.
Social networks analysis and the Spectator coalition
Social networks analysis provides the basis for examining the ways in which actors co-operate in specific projects in order to achieve certain goals. A social networks approach examines the ways in which the nature of ties between individuals shapes their linguistic behaviour. Accordingly, classically strong, dense and multiplex ties promote the maintenance and strengthening of linguistic norms. The effect is to create a cohesive community marked by a dense web of ties. In the literature weak ties are associated with fluid linguistic behaviour, where actors do not have strong social networks that promote the adherence to linguistic norms (for example Milroy and Milroy ; Gal
A quick survey of the publications by Daniel Defoe collected in the Eighteenth Century Collections Online (ECCO ) indicates that the majority of the texts have London imprints. There are which do not; these include Dublin printed editions of earlier London editions, and Edinburgh published editions of earlier London imprints. ECCO has London publications between and attributed to Jacob Tonson, including Addison (), Congreve (), Dryden ( not including his translations of Virgil), Pope (), Prior (), and Steele (). Lintott has London publications, including editions of Pope’s Homer, other works by Pope (), Steele () and Gay ().
112 Eighteenth-century English John Dryden (1667–1700)
Susanna Wesley (1741)
Richard Steele (1709–14)
Alexander Pope (1704–37)
Daniel Defoe (1701–17)
Jonathan Swift (1709–24)
Joseph Addison (1715–16)
William Congreve (1700–1705)
Matthew Prior (1700–14)
Lady M W Montagu (1713–38)
Mary Astell (1694–1704)
Figure .. Authors in the Network of Eighteenth-century English Texts
). The notion of ‘network’ adopted here is a technical one, derived from the fields of anthropology, social psychology, sociology, epidemiology, business studies and economics, and adopted in sociolinguistics to describe the relationship between individuals and the social structures which they construct and inhabit (Boissevain ; Milroy and Milroy , ; Milroy ). A network is used to refer to a group of individuals whose connections to one another are made up by social ties of varying strengths, types and lengths. The network that defines these individuals is not necessarily closed; one individual might also be connected to somebody that nobody else in the network is. The degree of proximity or closeness of actors might be measured in terms of the nature of the ties that connect them. The parameters on which strength of ties are calculated include the longevity of the relationship between actors, relative geographical proximity, formal social relationship measured using comparative rank (social equal/superior/inferior), and the type of relationship (intimates/equals/acquaintance; friendship/competition). The latter has to be inferred from the documentary evidence for the relationship, which may take the form of texts and other evidence connecting the actors, such as correspondence and memoirs, as well as collaboration in writing projects such as pamphlets, editions and plays. These factors represent a combination of subjective and objective criteria. The calculation of these ties and the characterisation of the group in terms of the values attributed to the ties between actors provide a structural basis for inferring and understanding social influence, both of one actor upon another, but also
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 113
of the network as a whole on other networks in the community. The processes taken to underlie influence include ‘relations of authority, identification, expertise and competition’ (Marsden and Friedkin : ). In his study of the morphosyntactic variation in the Paston Letters (), Alexander Bergs constructs the Pastons’ networks using egocentric and socio-centric perspectives, distinguishing between the internal links that bind family members and the ties that they construct with people outside the family. Clearly, variables appropriate for describing the daily routines of an early modern community such as travel patterns and destinations, or offices or village or city habitation, will be salient for the thick description of the ties inferred to connect the Pastons with their contemporaries. In order to describe the lives and connections of early eighteenth-century London writers, it is important to consider variables that are similarly appropriate and specific to the period. These include data drawn from the historical record, such as the registered membership of clubs, confirmed by multiple sources, and records of party political activity and contribution to other publications. Textual records that provide rich and minute, though uneven, detail provide supplementary data that are often not available for earlier periods. These include memoirs and collections of anecdotes, such as those collected by the literary scholar and anecdotist Joseph Spence, the extensive correspondences conducted among the writers, reference in the daily papers and periodicals to the activities of these early eighteenth-century London personalities, and official records in the form of parliamentary and government records. Joseph Addison’s egocentric social network provides the basic design and rationale for the construction of the Network of Eighteenth-century English Texts corpus, the corpus which houses the essays used as data for the keyword study reported in section . Addison’s own network consists primarily of people who are old friends, colleagues and enemies, who share correspondences as well as political convictions and loyalties, and who collaborate in publishing projects and contribute to the same periodicals. Previous work has examined in detail the impact of the Spectator coalition on the language and culture of the period (Fitzmaurice a, b). The men behind the Spectator formed a group which developed identifiably political and literary ties to achieve particular goals, which include personal success and fame. Addison’s own pursuit of the protection and sponsorship of powerful men such as Charles Montagu, Earl of Halifax, and Lord John Somers demonstrates quite clearly the usefulness of social networking, as does Pope’s pursuit of Addison himself in . The coalition was also allied with a particular political grouping, the Whig parliamentarians and government managers, who saw themselves as forward-looking and progressive by comparison with the Tories. In terms of language, this group made itself, through its
The first collected edition of the Spectator in vo and mo was dedicated to Lord John Somers, King William’s Lord Chancellor.
114 Eighteenth-century English
involvement (however peripheral) with the Spectator, emblematic of polite, modern English. The Spectator coalition, as constructed for the brief life of the Spectator, has its own historical moment. Importantly, when the periodical ceased to be published as a daily four-fold folio half sheet, the coalition dissolved too. There were a number of tensions that contributed to its collapse. The Spectator papers were originally produced and sold individually as separate issues on disparate and diverse topics; as such, they could be taken as individual pieces or they could be collected and arranged according to the collector’s inclination. In contrast, a volume paid for by subscription was organised as an ideal set of papers determined by the publisher. Jacob Tonson undertook a subscription edition of the Spectator in November , before the original series had run half its course. The volumes were advertised energetically in issues of the Spectator between November and January, generating no inconsiderable income in advance of the special edition’s publication. Knight (: ) discusses the republication of periodical papers in bound volumes that could become available before the end of the initial run of folio half sheets. With the publication of the first four volumes, Addison and Steele sold their rights to the work for £ – half to Tonson and half to Buckley. With ownership, the publishers gained the right to issue editions of the Spectator as a key business opportunity. Addison revived the Spectator as a paper published three times a week with the assistance of Thomas Tickell and Eustace Budgell for six months between June and December . By this time, however, Steele was no longer writing for the Spectator but working on his next periodical, the Guardian. The tensions between the interests of publishers and those of authors are highlighted by the opposition of
Of course, grammarians of the second half of the century, such as Lowth, noted that the early eighteenth-century essay writers, particularly Addison, were guilty of ‘improper’ usage and of ‘solecisms’. See Lowth ( : ) for comment on Addison’s singular use of you in ‘you was’, or p. on Addison’s use of past tense forms such as wrote instead of the past participle in past perfect constructions like ‘he had wrote’. Lowth, Robert. A short introduction to English grammar: with critical notes … London, . Based on information from English Short Title Catalogue. Eighteenth Century Collections Online. Gale Group. http://galenet.galegroup.com/servlet/ECCO (accessed February ). See Tieken-Boon van Ostade , a, for example, for extended treatment of these matters. Tickell’s first literary connection with Addison and Steele was occasioned by the publication in October of ‘a long poem, The Prospect of Peace, dedicated to the bishop of Bristol, a plenipotentiary in negotiations for the Treaty of Utrecht. Addison praised it in The Spectator (no. ). Tickell acknowledged the compliment in verses “To the supposed author of the Spectator” (calling Addison the “British Virgil”) in The Spectator, no. , and in “Verses to the Author” in the seventh edition of Cato and a prologue for a performance of Cato at Oxford (both ). In April he wrote five anonymous papers on pastoral poetry for Richard Steele’s The Guardian … By he had joined the group of Addison’s disciples who met regularly at Button’s Coffee House in Russell Street.’ James Sambrook, ‘Tickell, Thomas (–)’, Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Oxford University Press, September ; online edition, January [http://www.oxforddnb. com/view/ article/, accessed March ].
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 115
Thomas Tickell, Addison’s literary executor, to Tonson’s publication in of Addison’s Saturday Spectator pieces on Milton’s Paradise Lost. Who formed the Spectator coalition? It consisted primarily of the writers of the papers that made up the original run of issues published from March to December . These were Addison and Steele primarily ( papers each), and Eustace Budgell () and John Hughes () as minor contributors. Alexander Pope has at various times been linked (not unproblematically) with some essays, and Steele publicly acknowledged the assistance of Henry Martyn, Henry Carey, Thomas Parnell, Laurence Eusden and Richard Ince (Bond , : xlix–lvi). Bond also mentions as additional
Notes upon the twelve books of Paradise lost. Collected from the Spectator. Written by Mr. Addison. London, . Based on information from English Short Title Catalogue. Eighteenth Century Collections Online. Gale Group. http://galenet.galegroup.com/servlet/ ECCO. ‘Budgell’s ‘maternal grandfather was Bishop William Gulston of Bristol, whose sister was Joseph Addison’s mother. Addison took him as a clerk in his office when he was secretary to Lord Wharton, lord lieutenant of Ireland. During the last years of Queen Anne, Budgell contributed to The Spectator the papers signed with an “x”, and perhaps others, totalling some twenty-nine to the original series and about ten in the continuation. He also contributed to The Guardian, The Lover, and other papers, wrote a popular epilogue to Ambrose Philips’s The Distressed Mother (), and published a translation, The Moral Characters of Theophrastus (). In all these endeavours it was said (by Pope and Johnson, for example) that Addison was the real author.’ Paul Baines, ‘Budgell, Eustace (–)’, Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Oxford University Press, September ; online edition, January [http://www.oxforddnb.com/view/article/, accessed March ]. Hughes provided ‘booksellers with modern editions of English writers and translations of classical and continental authors. His translations include Euripides, Horace, Lucan, Pindar, Boileau, Boccalini, Molière, Fontenelle, and Vertot. He began compiling A Complete History of England (), the third volume of which was written by White Kennett, after whom the history is usually named. His extremely popular translation Letters of Abelard and Heloise () was the basis for Pope’s poem Eloisa to Abelard (). His largest undertaking was a six-volume edition of Edmund Spenser’s works (), the first critical edition of Spenser. His new acting version of Hamlet, prepared for Robert Wilks, held the stage from until Garrick’s version of . Probably through his connections with whig lords, his publisher Jacob Tonson, and the Kit-Cat Club, Hughes was drawn into the Steele–Addison circle, and from to wrote for The Tatler and its successors. Attributions are often uncertain, but Hughes contributed to at least three numbers of The Tatler, seventeen of The Spectator, and to number of The Guardian. His contributions (about one-third of the essays) to Sir Richard Blackmore’s Lay-Monk (–) provide a leavening of humour to the otherwise solemn essays.’ Thomas N. McGeary, ‘Hughes, John (?–)’, Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Oxford University Press, September ; online edition, October [www.oxforddnb.com/view/article/, accessed March ]. ‘Eusden’s verse compliments to Addison, Lord Halifax, and the duke of Newcastle brought him the patronage of highly placed whigs. Listed by Steele among Spectator and Guardian authors, Eusden was credited (by John Nichols) with letters in Spectator numbers , , and (), and Guardian numbers and (). Eusden certainly contributed translations from Claudian in The Guardian ( and ) which were reprinted with ten other poems by him in Steele’s Miscellanies (). He was one of seven poets granted the honour of having their commendatory verses on Addison’s Cato prefixed to the seventh edition of the play (). His lines “To a Lady that Wept at Hearing Cato Read” in Steele’s Miscellanies () were promptly parodied by Pope as “On a Lady who P – St at the Tragedy of Cato”.’ James Sambrook, ‘Eusden, Laurence (–)’, Oxford
116 Eighteenth-century English
very minor contributors men who later published under their own names letters that appeared in the periodical under pseudonyms. The key members, therefore, were Addison and Steele, but the project was undoubtedly facilitated by the publication and distribution machine overseen by Buckley and Baldwin as publisher and bookseller, and then from No. by Buckley and Jacob Tonson as co-publishers and Baldwin and Lillie as distributors. If a coalition is a set of individuals who are connected by a common set of interests and goals for the duration of a particular project or enterprise, then the Spectator group – Addison, Steele, Buckley, Tonson, Baldwin and perhaps Lillie – amounts to a coalition. We will assume that the Spectator agenda was set by these people. The lesser contributors were clients of Addison and Steele rather than peers and so their interests were not critical to the success of the Spectator. Our task now is to examine how distinctive the Spectator project is in the context of the contemporary London essay discourse community.
Keyness and the Spectator agenda
.
Keyness: corpus linguistics methodology
Keyword analysis is an empirical and systematic methodology increasingly used in corpus linguistic studies to explore the distinctiveness or unique characteristics of a body of texts compared with its textual context (see Rayson ; Archer, ; Culpeper ). A keyword list for a given corpus reflects the unusually frequent (or infrequent) occurrence of words in that corpus compared with another corpus for reference. For our purposes, a keyword analysis can be used to explore the lexical and structural linguistic distinctiveness of the Spectator essays in the context of the essays produced in the period. The methodology has been applied to the study of characterisation in drama (Culpeper ), and the stuff of political and cultural movements as reflected in newspaper coverage (for example Johnson et al. ; McEnery ), as well as register specificity (Xiao and McEnery ). Culpeper comments that the term ‘keyword’ is ‘simply another term for statisticallybased style markers’, and is not to be confused with the identification of lexical items that might be considered ‘key’ in terms of their social, political or cultural salience. Culpeper and McEnery have used Scott’s Wordsmith package in their keyword studies; I adopt Laurence Antony’s concordancer, AntConc ., for the same purpose. Keywords are derived in the following way. First a target corpus is selected – in this case, a text file of all issues of the Spectator between October and Thursday, June , which amounts to , words. AntConc can compare the words that appear in Dictionary of National Biography, Oxford University Press, [www. oxforddnb.com/ view/article/, accessed March ].
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 117
the target files with the words that appear in a ‘reference corpus’ to generate a list of keywords, words that are unusually frequent (or infrequent) in the target files. The reference corpus for this purpose is composed of the essays subcorpus in NEET except for the Spectator essays (, words). To derive keyness, the program compares: • • • •
Frequencies in target corpus Number of running words in target corpus Frequency in reference corpus Number of running words in reference corpus.
The program then cross-tabulates these and applies Ted Dunning’s Log Likelihood test as a statistical measure (Antony : ‘Readme’). As Mike Scott (: Help Menu) notes, ‘a word will get into the listing if it is unusually frequent (or unusually infrequent) in comparison with what one would expect on the basis of the larger wordlist’, that is, the wordlist generated for the reference corpus. So ‘keyness’ is a matter of unusual frequency (relative to the reference corpus). A few comments about the choice of the reference corpus are in order here. Because I am interested in the extent to which the Spectator is distinctive in the period as an institution with its own concerns and agenda, I decided to examine it in the context of the wider essay discourse community of the time. The reference corpus thus comprises periodical essays from the Review and the Examiner, as well as from the Guardian and the Freeholder. It also includes non-periodical pamphlets such as Swift’s Conduct of the Allies, Defoe’s Minutes of the Negotiation of Monsr. Mesnager at the Court of England during the Four Last Years of the Reign of Her Late Majesty Queen Anne, Mary Astell’s A Serious Proposal to the Ladies and Susanna Wesley’s epistolary essays on education. The fact that the relation of the Spectator target corpus to the contemporary essays reference corpus is as close as it is satisfies Scott’s recommendation that the reference corpus ‘should be an appropriate sample of the language which the text we are studying (the “node-text”) is written in’ (Scott, ). Culpeper observes that the ‘closer the relationship between the target corpus and the reference corpus, the more likely the resultant words will reflect something specific to the reference corpus.’
Paula R. Backscheider counts this work as ‘one of Defoe’s cleverest and most informed secret histories’, a ‘devastating critique of the treaty of Utrecht (a treaty universally acknowledged to be unworthy of England’s military achievement), of a queen determined to have peace at any price, and of a set of ministers doing Mesnager’s work by calling the war too costly in men and money.’ Paula R. Backscheider, ‘Defoe, Daniel (?–)’, Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Oxford University Press, September ; online edition, January [www.oxforddnb.com/view/article/, accessed February ]. Scott also recommends that an ‘appropriate sample’ should be substantially larger than the target corpus. In our case, the sample is twice the size of the reference corpus. This is not ideal but time and labour constraints prevented the compilation of a larger corpus for the purpose of this study.
118 Eighteenth-century English
(Culpeper : ). Thus we would expect that the keyword analysis would provide the basis for exploring the place of the Spectator in its context. .
Positive keywords
Table . presents the top thirty keywords for the Spectator. The first column indicates the rank of the keyword, the second reports the raw frequency with which the word occurs in the corpus, the third reports the ‘keyness’ of the item and the fourth consists of the word. ‘Keyness’, as reported above, is a statistical indication of the significance of the word’s unusualness. The top thirty keywords for the Spectator include three types of item: proper names and their abbreviations (for example Milton, Roger (de Coverley), Hor[ace], Virg[il]), lexical or open class items (humble, friend, eye, behaviour), and most prominently, closed class or structural items (my, her, self, me, she, and so on). Strikingly, though, the top-ranked item is not a word but an orthographic variant, <’d>, used in past tense forms such as ‘season’d’, or passive participles like ‘diversify’d’, or adjectives like ‘good-humour’d’ or ‘short-liv’d’. This is clearly a stylistic indicator, albeit a visual one that indicates more about the printing practices adopted in the production of the periodical than the preference of individual authors. It provides a visual reminder that the Spectator’s authors relied on the same printers for the issues produced between October and June . Let us examine the occurrence of the proper names and lexical items in the top-ranked keywords. Milton is striking for its keyness value in the Spectator. Addison first quotes Milton’s Paradise Lost in a reflection on curiosity and admiration (No. , Saturday, December ), then again a fortnight later, in a Saturday paper devoted to the consideration of laughter and ridicule (No. , December ). In a clutch of Saturday papers published between December and May , Addison treats his readers to an extended appraisal of Milton’s poem. He introduces the project in No. thus: .
As the first Place among our English Poets is due to Milton; and as I have drawn more Quotations out of him than from any other, I shall enter into a regular Criticism upon his Paradise Lost, which I shall publish every Saturday till I have given my Thoughts upon that Poem. I shall not however presume to impose upon others my own particular Judgment on this Author, but only deliver it as my private Opinion. Criticism is of a very large Extent, and every particular Master in this Art has his favourite Passages in an Author, which do not equally strike the best Judges. It will be sufficient for me if I discover many
See Fitzmaurice () for a discussion of the look of the essays in the NEET corpus. See Donald Bond (, vol : xxi–xxiii).
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 119 Table .. The Spectator keywords Rank
Frequency
Keyness
Keyword
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
’d my her self me she Milton sir servant Hor. humble I your Roger am a with you in friend an eye behaviour Virg. beautiful agreeable mind heart night thy
Beauties or Imperfections which others have not attended to, and I should be very glad to see any of our eminent Writers publish their Discoveries on the same Subject. In short, I would always be understood to write my Papers of Criticism in the Spirit which Horace has expressed … (No. , Monday, December ) The poet is invoked by other members of the coalition in discussing a range of topics, and his poem is woven into the fabric of the world of the Spectator, as characters such as Will Honeycomb are given a passage to read from it. Note that in example () quoted above, Addison refers to another poet, Horace, whom he declared to be ‘the greatest Wit and Critick in the Augustan Age’ (No. , Saturday, September ). The abbreviated forms of Horace (Hor.) and of Virgil (Virg.) occur as highly ranked keywords too ( and respectively). The frequency with which these names appear
The Spectator No. , Tuesday, April . Contributed by Budgell.
120 Eighteenth-century English
reflects the frequency with which the mottoes that open each number are drawn from their verses on the one hand, and the frequency with which their work is alluded to in the speculations themselves on the other. The fact that the names of poets show up unusually frequently suggests that the Spectator’s preoccupation is more cultural and intellectual than political. A quick survey of the contemporary literary scene as reflected in the publications in indicates the appearance of a new edition of Paradise Lost, and a new translation of Horace’s Odes, Satyrs and Epistles, thus underpinning the impression that the Spectator captured the tenor of the cultural scene. However, the presence of the name Roger (de Coverley) in the top thirty keywords might suggest otherwise. The literature on the characters of the Spectator and their social meaning is extensive and varied; some, such as Cowan (: ) remark that the characters are portrayed as ‘hopelessly out of date, romantic daydreamers who may be enjoyed for their quaint humour, the warm companionship and entertainment their company provides, but also clearly marked out as unsuitable for serious political responsibility’. Others such as Anthony Pollock () suggest that they contribute to the neutral, purely spectatorial, stance assumed in response to a society that they oppose but cannot change. Regardless, the juxtaposition of characters such as the Whig Andrew Freeport and squire Roger de Coverley dramatises the contrast and clash of political aspirations and inclinations rife in Augustan England: .
.
After having dispatched all our Country Matters, Sir ROGER made several Inquiries concerning the Club, and particularly of his old Antagonist Sir ANDREW FREEPORT. He asked me with a kind of Smile, whether Sir ANDREW had not taken Advantage of his Absence, to vent among them some of his Republican Doctrines; but soon after gathering up his Countenance into a more than ordinary Seriousness, Tell me truly, says he, don’t you think Sir ANDREW had a Hand in the Popes Procession – but without giving me time to answer him, Well, well, says he, I know you are a wary Man, and do not care to talk of publick Matters. (No. . Tuesday, January ). There is nothing which more astonishes a Foreigner, and frights a Country Squire, than the Cries of London. My good Friend Sir ROGER often declares, that he cannot get them out of his Head or go to Sleep for them, the first Week that he is in Town. On the contrary,
Both editions were published by Jacob Tonson. The full citations from ECCO are: Horace. The odes, satyrs, and epistles of Horace. Done into English by Mr. Creech. The third edition London, . Based on information from English Short Title Catalogue. Eighteenth Century Collections Online. Gale Group. http://galenet.galegroup.com/servlet/ECCO; Milton, John. Paradise lost. A poem, in twelve books. The author John Milton. The ninth edition, adorn’d with sculptures London, . Based on information from English Short Title Catalogue. Eighteenth Century Collections Online. Gale Group. http://galenet. galegroup.com/servlet/ECCO.
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 121
WILL.HONEYCOMB calls them the Ramage de la Ville, and prefers them to the Sounds of Larks and Nightingales, with all the Musick of the Fields and Woods. (No. . Tuesday, December ) In the examples () and () above, the stereotypical attitudes associated with traditional, old-fashioned Tory country interests on the one hand and urban, commercial, Whig interests on the other are the focus of Mr Spectator’s amused reflections. In (), Mr Spectator recounts a morning spent with Sir Roger who has come to town to see Prince Eugene of Savoy, hailed by Whigs and Tories alike as a military hero. They end up in Squires coffee house, where Sir Roger takes tobacco, coffee and the Supplement, a supplement to the Tory Post Boy published by John Morphew. The apparently impartial Mr Spectator provides situational details in order to provide a context for construing the political place of country squires in the world of the Spectator but appears to stand apart without passing judgement. However, Sir Roger’s pointed reference to Sir Andrew Freeport’s ‘republican doctrines’ over the strongly Protestant ‘Procession of His Holiness’ which was aborted by the Tory government highlights the depth of party division over religion and the protestant succession, as well as the traditional conflicts between old landed Tory interests and the commercial, trade-oriented Whig interests of modern London. In (), a key site of conflict in Augustan England – vested landed interests versus town – is juxtaposed in a jocular note on the attitudes of the squire and the city dandy toward the street noises of the city. By contrasting the two characters and stereotypes consistently, the Spectator presents a picture of Augustan England that is marked by a range of recognisable and recognisably contrasting interests. The stance of the spectatorial eidolon is highlighted by the prominence of the word friend in the periodical. In fact, friend (ranked on the keyword list) appears in all sorts of contexts, including the closing salutations of letters published in the Spectator. A common collocation of friend is the first person possessive pronoun my and an adjective such as good or old (to refer to Sir Roger de Coverley, or Sir Andrew Freeport) or worthy (to refer to Will Honeycomb), as illustrated in the following examples: a. I immediately recollected that it was my good Friend Sir ROGER’S Voice; and that I had promised to go with him on the Water to Spring-Garden, in case it proved a good Evening. The Knight put me in mind of my Promise from the Bottom of the Stair-Case, but told me that if I was Speculating he would stay below till I had done. Upon my coming down, I found all the Children of the Family got about my old Friend, and my Landlady herself, who is a notable prating Gossip, engaged in a Conference with him; being mightily pleased with his stroaking her little Boy upon the Head, and bidding him be a good Child and mind his Book. (No. . Tuesday, May )
122 Eighteenth-century English
b. My wise and good Friend, Sir Andrew Freeport, divides himself almost equally between the Town and the Country: His Time in Town is given up to the Publick, and the Management of his private Fortune; and after every three or four Days spent in this Manner, he retires for as many to his Seat within a few Miles of the Town, to the Enjoyment of himself, his Family, and his Friend. (No. . Monday, November ) c. Nor must I here omit my worthy Friend Mr. HONEYCOMB, who has often told us in the Club, that for twenty years successively, upon the death of a Childless rich Man, he immediately drew on his Boots, called for his Horse, and made up to the Widow. (No. . Tuesday, February ) Thus the Spectator coalition presents its attack on the values, manners and politics of the previous age as gentle ridicule. Using the persona of Mr Spectator, the coalition ridicules the eccentric and outmoded Tory Sir Roger somewhat affectionately as a harmless eccentric, willing to attend the theatre as long as he can be guaranteed a ‘Church-of-England Comedy’ rather than a tragedy. Similarly, Will Honeycomb is portrayed as a vain, affected fop, a caricature of a Restoration rake who ‘where Women are not concerned, he is an honest worthy Man’. In contrast, Sir Andrew Freeport is the epitome of the progressive, rising Whig merchant class, much vilified in the Tory press. The creation of this character allows the Spectator to reply to these attacks while managing to ‘avoid violating its professed neutrality in politics’ (Bond , : , fn.). The episodes in which Mr Spectator treats his readers to the follies and foibles of his ‘ordinary Companions’– the men who form the ‘Committee’ that inspects the papers submitted for publication (Bond , : , fn) – illustrate contemporary coffee house and club culture as lampooned by Addison and Steele and their associates. The characters for the Club were intended to represent a range of points of view and interests in contemporary society so that the Spectator’s aim of improving or polishing society in general by instructing readers in the arts of polite conversation could reach a readership that sought sociability rather than political engagement. The impression invited by the salience of friend in the Spectator is that sociability and companionship are central to the project of the periodical, so that the persona of Mr Spectator is dedicated to being ‘tender of every particular Person’s Reputation’, and to writing a paper that ‘draws Mens [sic] Minds off from the Bitterness of Party, and furnishes them with Subjects of Discourse that may be treated without Warmth or Passion’. Let us take a look at the contexts of occurrence and colligational characteristics of the structural items. Note that four out of the top ten keywords
No. . Tuesday, March . Addison introduces Sir Roger in order to review The Distrest Mother, a tragedy written by his protégé, Ambrose Philips. No. , Friday, March . No. , Monday, December .
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 123
are personal pronoun forms. The corpora examined are not lemmatised and this might be regarded as a limitation of the study as the result is confined to specific grammatical forms rather than lexemes. However, this apparent limitation might be an advantage for the close analysis of the text. Let us consider the detail more closely. The first two are my and her: first person and third person feminine possessive/object pronouns respectively. These are very frequently collocated with the fourth-ranked keyword self (raw frequencies and respectively). The second two pronouns are the first person singular object pronoun me and the third person singular feminine subject pronoun she. These facts in themselves do not tell us much about the orientation of the Spectator. However, the additional observation that the first person singular subject pronoun is the twelfth-ranked keyword adds to the impression of a perspective that foregrounds the egocentric perspective of the eidolon, Mr Spectator. Illustration of how these items combine in context helps to support the impression that one of the Spectator’s favourite topics is women. . My Father, whom I mentioned in my first Speculation, and whom I must always name with Honour and Gratitude, has very frequently talked to me upon the Subject of Marriage. I was in my younger Years engaged, partly by his Advice, and partly by my own Inclinations in the Courtship of a Person who had a great deal of Beauty, and did not at my first Approaches seem to have any Aversion to me; but as my natural Taciturnity hindred me from showing my self to the best Advantage, she by degrees began to look upon me as a very silly Fellow, and being resolved to regard Merit more than any Thing else in the Persons who made their Applications to her, she married a Captain of Dragoons who happened to be beating up for Recruits in those Parts. (Spectator No. . Saturday, December ) The second person pronouns you and your are also represented among the top-ranked keywords for the Spectator corpus (, respectively). Taken with the keyness of the first person pronouns, this fact might be used to examine the extent to which the Spectator essays are interactional in force. Closer examination indicates that the inclusion of letters to the Spectator in the essays may well account for the extraordinary concentration of first and second person pronouns in the corpus. The place of the letters in the Spectator has concerned commentators interested in the authorship of the letters. Bond (, : , fn) remarks on the important place of correspondents’ letters in the Spectator and reports ‘many of the later numbers, particularly those by Steele, are made up entirely of such contributions’. Addison (rather than Steele) deals directly with questions of authorship and the use to which the letters were put in No. .
‘I receive a double Advantage from the Letters of my Correspondents, first as they shew me which of my Papers are most acceptable to them; and in the next place as they furnish me
124 Eighteenth-century English
Because we are interested in the extent to which the keywords and their collocational patterns provide an indication of the distinctive flavour of the Spectator as the material expression of the coalition of the men behind it, we are not concerned with authorship questions per se. The two principal uses to Addison of the letters, namely as indices of the reception of the periodical essays and as ‘Materials for new Speculations’, suggest that the periodical was conceived as a highly interactive organ. The weight of the letters’ presence is underpinned by the prevalence of the epistolary closing salutation, your humble servant, which consists of the second person pronoun plus two words that feature prominently in the keyword list (ranked and respectively). Frequently, the salutation is prefaced by the conventional address, Sir (ranked in the keywords), as illustrated in (): .
Mr. SPECTATOR, I am a Woman of an unspotted Reputation, and know nothing I have ever done which should encourage such Insolence; but here was one the other Day, and he was dressed like a Gentleman too, who took the Liberty to name the Words Lusty Fellow in my Presence. I doubt not but you will resent it in Behalf of, SIR, Your Humble Servant, CELIA. (No. . Wednesday, January ).
The extent to which the salutation occurs in the sample analysed is reflected in Table ., which reports the expressions with which servant clusters. The first most frequently occurring clusters all function as closing salutations in letters. The fact that the typical collocation humble servant occurs times and that the formulaic salutation your humble servant occurs times indicates the prominence of letters in establishing the distinctive interactive style of the periodical. with Materials for new Speculations. Sometimes indeed I do not make use of the Letter it self, but form the Hints of it into Plans of my own Invention; sometimes I take the Liberty to change the Language or Thought into my own Way of Speaking and Thinking, and always (if it can be done without Prejudice to the Sense) omit the many Compliments and Applauses which are usually bestowed upon me. Besides the two Advantages above-mentioned which I receive from the Letters that are sent me, they give me an Opportunity of lengthning out my Paper by the skilful Management of the subscribing Part at the End of them, which perhaps does not a little conduce to the Ease, both of my self and Reader. Some will have it, that I often write to my self, and am the only punctual Correspondent I have. This Objection would indeed be material, were the Letters I communicate to the Publick stuffed with my own Commendations: and if, instead of endeavouring to divert or instruct my Readers, I admired in them the Beauty of my own Performances.’ (No. . Thursday, January ).
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 125 Table .. Word clusters with humble servant Rank
Freq
Word cluster
humble servant
your humble servant
most humble servant
your most humble servant
obedient servant
very humble servant
most obedient servant
your very humble servant
Sir, your humble servant
most obedient humble servant
obedient humble servant
your most obedient servant
a servant
and humble servant
obliged humble servant
your servant
and most obedient servant
devoted humble servant
your obliged humble servant
admirer and humble servant
The evidence shown in Table . indicates that servant also occurs with less predictable collocates, both in closing salutations and in the body of essays: .
But, alas, I am afraid it has lost its Virtue, and that a Woman of our Times would find no more Relief in taking such a Leap, than in singing an Hymn to Venus. So that I must cry out with Dido in Dryden’s Virgil, Ah! cruel Heaven, that made no Cure for Love! Your disconsolate Servant, ATHENAIS. (Spectator No. . Tuesday, November ).
.
I have taken the Liberty to make this Address to you. I am, SIR, Your most obscure Servant
126 Eighteenth-century English
Philanthropos. (Spectator No. . Monday, February ). The salutation in () above is taken from an issue compiled by Steele which consists entirely of letters to the Spectator. Of the five letters, three are on the theme of marriage; one of these incorporates an epistolary exchange between lovers. The final letter is a request to the Spectator not to print readers’ letters ‘as seem to be of no Use but to the Printer’. Other occurrences of the word servant indicate reference to servant as a social rank or occupational type rather than as a deferential signature: a. When I am commending Wilks for representing the Tenderness of a Husband and a Father in Mackbeth, the Contrition of a reformed Prodigal in Harry the Fourth, the winning Emptiness of a young Man of Good-nature and Wealth in the Trip to the Jubilee, – the Officiousness of an artful Servant in the Fox: when thus I celebrate Wilks, I talk to all the World who are engaged in any of those Circumstances. (No. . Monday, May ) b. You know the manner we sit at a Visit, and I need not describe the Circle; but Mr. Triplett came in, introduced by two Tapers supported by a spruce Servant, whose Hair is under a Cap till my Lady’s Candles are all lighted up, and the Hour of Ceremony begins: I say, Jack Triplett came in, and singing (for he is really good Company) Every Feature, Charming Creature, – he went on, It is a most unreasonable thing that People cannot go peaceably to see their Friends, but these Murderers are let loose. (No. . Wednesday, April ) The other lexical items that appear within the top thirty keywords for the Spectator seem to be less genre-specific. They include the nouns eye, behaviour, mind, heart and night, and the adjectives beautiful and agreeable. It is important to remember that these items register as keywords because they are unusually frequent in the Spectator target corpus relative to the essays reference corpus. A closer examination of the collocational and cluster characteristics of the lexical items allows us to see how these items figure in the Spectator and how they serve to distinguish the periodical (and its coalition of contributors) from the broader essay discourse community. The group of items is interesting for its relevance to the description of human behaviour in the Spectator. There are numerous speculations devoted to the eye: as an
This comment alludes to another issue compiled by Steele, No. , in which a petitioner who styles himself ‘Anthony Title-Page, Stationer’ informs his correspondent that ‘he has certain Intelligence that you receive great Numbers of defamatory Letters design’d by their Authors to be publish’d, which you throw aside and totally neglect’, and therefore requests that ‘You would please to bestow on him those Refuse Letters, and he hopes by printing them to get a more plentiful provision for his family; or at the worst, he may be allowed to sell them by the Pound Weight to his Customers the Pastry-Cooks of London and Westminster’.
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 127
organ of sight, as a metaphor for insight on the one hand and fame on the other, and as the instrument of spectatorship. The treatment takes the form of essays presented as letters to the Spectator (for example No. , Monday, December ) as well as the subject of short letters, as in (a) below: a. You a SPECTATOR, and not know that the Intelligence of Affection is carried on by the Eye only; that Good-breeding has made the Tongue falsify the Heart, and act a Part of continual Constraint, while Nature has preserved the Eyes to her self, that she may not be disguised or misrepresented. (No. , Wednesday, December ) Frequently, keywords like eye, mind and heart combine in the Spectator’s pronouncements on human nature and human behaviour. The excerpt quoted in (a) is a good illustration of how the eyes are treated as windows onto the human heart, while in (b) and (c) the term is used in the expression Eye of the World to refer to the ways in which society regards a person: b.
A Likeness of Inclinations in every Particular is so far from being requisite to form a Benevolence in two Minds towards each other, as it is generally imagined, that I believe we shall find some of the firmest Friendships to have been contracted between Persons of different Humours; the Mind being often pleased with those Perfections which are new to it, and which it does not find among its own Accomplishments. Besides that a Man in some measure supplies his own Defects, and fancies himself at second hand possessed of those good Qualities and Endowments, which are in the possession of him who in the Eye of the World is looked on as his other self. (No. . Thursday, May ) c. The Quality of Fortune, tho a Man has less Reason to value himself upon it than on that of the Body or Mind, is however the kind of Quality which makes the most shining Figure in the Eye of the World. (No. . Saturday, November ) The fact that the highly ranked lexical keywords seem to focus on human traits (behaviour) and characteristics, and include evaluative expressions (agreeable, beautiful ), reinforces the impression that the Spectator is interested in the place of the individual in society without regard for politics. However, the use of characters such as Sir Roger and Sir Andrew Freeport as (political and social) stereotypes allows the Spectator coalition to conduct a critique of the values of Augustan England in the guise of the reflection on individuals. If the keyword list in Table . provides some idea of the preoccupations of the Spectator coalition as reflected in the periodical, it also allows us to infer that the Spectator is distinctive in the broader discourse community in particular ways. For example, it appears to be distinctively interactive in adopting the letter as a medium for many of the speculations, and institutionalising
128 Eighteenth-century English Table .. Negative keywords for the Spectator Rank
Frequency
Keyness
Word
.
they
.
god
.
hath
.
be
.
tis
.
their
.
lord
.
king
.
Collier
.
yet
.
satire
.
or
interaction by including letters as contributions from readers, whether they are authentic or not. Additionally, by adopting the persona or eidolon of Mr Spectator, despite his declared impartiality and neutrality of stance, the Spectator conveys the sense of the personal and individual view of the world. The question now is how the Spectator differs from the broader essay community. In the final section we examine keywords that are unusually infrequent in the Spectator by comparison with the broader essay community. .
Negative keywords: the essays discourse community
The AntConc program can also calculate the negative keywords for a target corpus. These are the items that are unusually infrequent relative to the frequency of these items in the reference corpus. What this means is that these items are more likely to occur in the texts produced by the broader essay discourse community than the Spectator coalition. Table . has the twelve top negative keywords in the Spectator. Let us consider the structural or closed class items first. The most unusually infrequent item in the Spectator relative, that is, to its frequency in the reference corpus is the third person plural pronouns they (ranked ) and their (ranked ). Taken together with the fact that the first person pronouns my, me and I occur within the top twelve positive keywords, this suggests that the Spectator is indeed distinctive in its orientation to a participating speaker whose persona is present in the periodical. By implication, the broader essay discourse community exhibits a concern with external events and actors rather than foregrounding the speaker. Three verb forms,
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 129
the distinctly old-fashioned -th form of the third person singular present of have (hath), the infinitive copula be, and the contracted subject–verb phrase, tis, are also among the words that appear unusually infrequently in the Spectator compared with the essays. In earlier work (Fitzmaurice ) I examined the question of whether and how varying literacy and printing practices affected individuals’ language on the one hand and the language of printed genres on the other. I compared published essays with unprinted personal letters to see the extent to which writers choose to represent their language, whether autograph or print publication, using the same orthographic and grammatical conventions. Two of the features examined were the orthographic variants of the third person singular present tense of have (has v. hath) and the contraction tis. Susanna Wesley, the conservative Anglican mother of the founder of Methodism, John Wesley, shows a marked preference for the conservative variant of the third person present tense ending for have ( per cent). Jonathan Swift’s essays also show a clear preference for hath ( per cent). Example illustrates the context in which the conservative form occurs in Susanna Wesley’s work: . But though we believe that the divine mind doth in all things act agreeably to the law of its nature, yet this doth not imply any necessity, impulse or dependence on anything but itself, for he always must necessarily enjoy the highest liberty, there being no other cause equal or superior to him that can any way persuade, impel, excite, or animate him to do anything but what seemeth best to himself, but in all his productions he acteth according to the idea and rule which he hath conceived in his own eternal, most perfect mind, and he did in the creation of the world propose an end, answerable to the dignity and perfection of his nature, viz. his own glory, which is the ultimate end of all his actions. (Susanna Wesley, Obedience to the Laws of God – A Brief (Unfinished) Exposition on the Ten Commandments, [wess]) Wesley’s subject is the matter of obedience to God and the nature of God’s law, and to expound this subject, she adopts the language of the sermon. Now the sermon was a text type that appeared frequently in print in the period; although this text was circulated in manuscript form rather than as a printed pamphlet, it is yet marked by the stylistic conventions that characterise sermons that might be spoken from the pulpit, including the marked choice of -eth third person singular verb endings. Note that in the extract quoted in (), do, seem and act also exhibit the -th ending. Fitzmaurice () also revealed that the published essays in the corpus varied in the distribution of contracted forms such as tis; the printed essays of Susanna Wesley, John Dryden and Mary Astell show preference for the contraction between per cent and per cent of the time. In contrast, as evidenced in the negative keywords, the Spectator essays exhibit a marked disinclination for this contraction.
130 Eighteenth-century English
The lexical expressions that are among the most marked negative keywords for the Spectator include god, lord, king, and satire. A quick examination of the reference corpus indicates that these items occur across the discourse community. Some essayists, such as Mary Astell and Susanna Wesley, refer to God with greater regularity than others such as Pope, Congreve or Swift, but the expression appears in every work. Similarly, lord occurs right across the discourse community, sometimes to refer to God (for example, ‘the Holy Women who attended our LORD to His Cross’ (Astell, Some Reflections Upon Marriage)) and quite frequently as a title for a peer or other nobleman, for example, ‘that Wonderful Man my Lord Bacon’ (Astell [or Drake], In Defense of the Female Sex). The Spectator, in contrast, had scant use for the term in either function, supporting the view that its preoccupations lay with the characterisation of human types, rather than being focused either on religious matters or those concerned with real people. We can account for the fact that king is unusually infrequent in the Spectator by the fact that it is not explicitly political; it is concerned with social manners and individuals’ morality rather than the affairs of state. A quick survey of the expression in the essays corpus indicates that all the essays make some reference to kings and their times, including Charles I, Charles II, William of Orange, and the kings of France and Spain. The other two expressions that require some mention are Collier, a name, and satire, a genre of writing. The reason that these two items acquire negative keyness for the Spectator is that they appear with some density in two sets of essays in the essays corpus. William Congreve and John Dryden were among the playwrights whom Jeremy Collier attacked in his influential pamphlet A Short View of the Immorality and Profaneness of the English Stage, together with the Sense of Antiquity upon this Argument (). While Dryden never published a rebuttal, Congreve did, in his essay Amendments of Mr. Collier’s False & Imperfect Citations (). It is the preponderance of Collier’s name in this essay ( instances) coupled with the fact that it appears just once in the Spectator target corpus that probably accounts for it appearing at all as a negative keyword. The context in which Collier occurs in the Spectator is to attribute a quotation to his essay ‘Of Musick’ in a speculation on the cat-call (No. , Thursday, April ). The case of satire is slightly different. This item occurs just four times in the Spectator target corpus, in the following context: a. In my last Saturdays Paper I laid down some Thoughts upon Devotion in general, and shall here shew what were the Notions of the most refined Heathens on this Subject, as they are represented in Plato’s Dialogue upon Prayer, entitled, Alcibiades the Second, which doubtless gave Occasion to Juvenal’s tenth Satire, and to the second Satire of Persius; as the last of these Authors has almost transcribed the preceding Dialogue, entitled Alcibiades the First, in his Fourth Satire. (No. . Saturday, October )
Coalitions, networks and discourse communities 131
Addison adopts the form satire as part of the titles of Juvenal’s various works. Because the Spectator is interested in literary criticism, we might expect there to be more discussion of satire than the example in (a) should suggest. Indeed, if we search for the alternative form, satyr, we find that the term occurs much more frequently, as in example (b). Addison chooses this form for the discussion of the genre and for the commentary on particular works, such as Boileau’s Satire VIII (à Monsieur Morel ): b.
Such levelling Satyrs are of no Use to the World, and for this Reason I have often wondered how the French Author abovementioned, who was a Man of exquisite Judgment, and a Lover of Virtue, could think human Nature a proper Subject for Satyr in another of his celebrated Pieces, which is called The Satyr upon Man. (No. . Tuesday, October )
In contrast, satire occurs densely in the reference corpus in John Dryden’s Discourse upon the original and progress of satire, which accounts for the majority of instances of the expression. Congreve and Pope use the expression much less frequently. The fact that the negative keywords do occur in the Spectator yet unusually infrequently in the context of the essays in NEET indicates how the Spectator is both distinct from and yet part of the broader discourse community.
Keyness, coalitions and the essay discourse community
The historical record shows that the material conditions that characterise the production, distribution and consumption of the eighteenth-century essay are highly salient for the nature of the language or register that marks essaywriting of the period. The outcome is that public language use is identified with that of the essay, and in turn the essay is equated with and shapes good language. Social networks and discourse communities are dynamic social structures as products of specific historical and material circumstances. The coalition that sets the agenda for and produces the Spectator includes men who pursued other projects and business relationships outside the Spectator project. As already noted, Addison and Steele each worked on separate periodicals, both explicitly party political and more partisan than the Spectator, once they had sold their shares to Buckley and Tonson. These two businessmen behind the venture bought work from a wide range of authors for profitable publication at the same time that they were involved with the Spectator. So the coalition occupied a place in and subscribed to the values of the essay discourse community as a whole. Yet despite their diverse other commitments, the Spectator coalition produced a remarkably coherent and focused periodical. The keyword analysis provides the basis for examining the main topical and thematic concerns of the Spectator at the same time as
132 Eighteenth-century English
providing evidence for assessing the highly interactive format and rhetorical structure of the periodical. Thus the results of the keyness study allow us to explore the extent to which the practices of a specific network, such as the Spectator coalition, are linguistically distinguished from those of the broader essay discourse community. It seems that the integrity of the Spectator project is reflected in the lexical focus in the corpus examined in this study. The linguistic character of the Spectator indeed mirrors the special historical, cultural and material conditions in which it was produced.
8
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness: social distinction and metaphorical levelling* T ERT T U N EVA LA I N EN University of Helsinki H ELI TISSA R I University of Helsinki
For when to civil things, civil things are added, the whole will be civil. Q.E.D. ( Thomas Twining I, )
Introduction
Politeness was a buzzword in eighteenth-century England. In A Tale of a Tub (), Jonathan Swift refers to ‘this Polite and Learned Age’, and in the Spectator (), Joseph Addison talks about ‘all the polite Nations of the World’. The concept of politeness also occupies a prominent place in eighteenth-century scholarship. Paul Langford includes it in the title of his best-selling book A polite and commercial people: England, – * Sections – of this chapter were researched and written by Terttu Nevalainen, and sections – by Heli Tissari. Our study was supported by the Academy of Finland and University of Helsinki Centre of Excellence funding for the Research Unit for Variation, Contacts and Change in English (VARIENG). We would like to thank the audience of the Third Late Modern English Conference, held in Leiden in , for their comments on our ‘politeness’ paper, and Sylvia Adamson and her English Language and Literature students in Sheffield for discussing the first written version of this chapter with us. We are also grateful to Karen Harvey and Robert Shoemaker, who provided many helpful references to historical research on eighteenth-century politeness, and shared their findings with us. Many thanks to Arja Nurmi for drafting the search form we used to analyse the social rank distinctions of the CEECE data, and to Samuli Kaislaniemi and Tanja Säily for retrieving the primary data for this study. For discussion of the CEEC corpora, see Nurmi, Nevala and Palander-Collin (), and Raumolin-Brunberg and Nevalainen (). These two references come from the OED (s.v. polite, A. adj., b), which cites them as among the first uses of the noun politeness in English. It is noteworthy that the noun is not a loanword but a native formation by means of the suffix -ness. In our notation we will follow common linguistic practice and use italics to mark lexemes (civility, politeness), and single quotes to indicate their senses (‘educated’). Conceptual metaphors, their source and target domains, are all represented in small capitals (CIVILITIES ARE ENTITIES). Moreover, we will follow cultural historians by leaving the concepts themselves unmarked (civility, courtesy, politeness). The notation ‘politeness’ and ‘polite’ will, however, be made use of to refer to the general concept, the hyperonym of all three, when there may be a risk of confusion.
133
134 Eighteenth-century English
(). The pursuit of politeness became a major concern for these commercial people, as Susan Fitzmaurice () shows in her study of the emergence of ‘polite English’ in the eighteenth century. Politeness was not only considered to be an ideal of behaviour, but was also displayed in a material context. Lawrence Klein (: ) sums up the ramifications of the concept of politeness by noting that it is used to interpret ‘material and visual cultures, the organisation of space, the constitution of social and political identities, the character of intellectual and artistic life, and even institutional structures’. Our study approaches eighteenth-century politeness from the perspective of keywords, their socio-cultural embedding and the cognitive metaphors they embody. For this purpose we have selected three sets of ‘polite’ words, which we will study using a corpus of eighteenth-century correspondence. In addition to polite and politeness, we will focus on civil and civility and courteous and courtesy, the buzzwords of the Renaissance and of the Late Middle Ages, respectively. Cultural historians have identified a shift from courtesy to civility in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries (Bryson ), and a further move towards politeness in the eighteenth century, indicated by the frequent use of the word politeness itself (Klein a: –). Judging by cultural historians’ wide-ranging applications of the concept of politeness, it could be considered to be the dominant mode of cultural discourse in the eighteenth century (Klein ). The present study builds on the work that was begun in Nevalainen and Tissari (), which sketched the company these three cultural keywords keep and outlined the metaphors of ‘Good Behaviour’ and ‘Courtesy’ associated with polite vocabulary between and . One of the overarching issues we will address in this context is the extent to which the suggested transition from courtesy and civility to politeness can be observed in the use of these three sets of words. Were the earlier keywords as good as ousted by the politeness set in the language of social interaction in the eighteenth century, as is suggested by much of the literature on the topic? We will also be seeking answers to the more specific sociolinguistic question of how the lexical sets of ‘politeness’ were appropriated: who used them and with reference to what or whom? Last but not least, since ‘politeness’ was such a prominent concept, we will be interested in exploring the extent to which the abstract lexical sets of civility, politeness and courtesy could be understood and represented in terms of conceptual metaphors. One of our specific questions concerns which aspects of their use were captured metaphorically. After surveying previous research on these three notions of politeness (section ), we will introduce the issues that we will be addressing, along with our data, the eighteenth-century section of the Corpus of Early English Correspondence (section ). An analysis of the collocational properties of the lexical sets (section ) is followed by a sociolinguistic discussion of their appropriation by the writers in our corpus (section ). We will next outline certain basic assumptions that have been associated with conceptual
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
135
metaphors (section ), and then move on to construct a set of metaphors that characterise these three lexical sets of ‘politeness’ (sections –). These two approaches, sociolinguistic and cognitive, highlight complementary aspects of their use. Sections and reveal certain differences in their application by eighteenth-century writers, whereas sections to suggest that these writers nevertheless conceptualised these ‘polite’ words in quite similar ways at the metaphorical level. .
The historical background of eighteenth-century politeness The lexical roots of politeness
As discussed in Nevalainen and Tissari (), the terms courteous and courtesy go back to Middle English, and are associated with courtly behaviour: ‘manners such as befit the court of a prince; polite, kind and considerate’. By contrast, civil and civility pertain to citizens (see Harris ). The ‘civilised’, ‘educated’ and ‘well-bred’ senses of civil appeared in the sixteenth century, and give rise to meanings including ‘polite’, ‘obliging’ and ‘uneffusively courteous’ in the early seventeenth century. The Oxford English Dictionary (OED) record suggests that the adjective polite was originally used with reference to smoothed or polished objects; it continued to be associated with materials such as glass and stone until the eighteenth century. Besides its literal sense, it had two major extended senses at the turn of the sixteenth century: ‘cleansed’, ‘neat’ and ‘orderly’ with reference to material entities, and ‘refined’, ‘elegant’ and ‘cultivated’ with reference to intellectual pursuits such as the arts. This latter sense began to be applied to humans from the seventeenth century onwards. In his mid-eighteenth-century synonym dictionary, John Trusler made a further distinction between complaisance, politeness and being well-bred, noting that ‘Complaisance, is the characteristic of the lover; politeness, of the courtier; but, to be well-bred, denotes, the gentleman’ (: ). As evidenced by the Historical Thesaurus of English, however, these ‘polite’ words and their synonyms cover only a fraction of the English eighteenth-century vocabulary of politeness (Nevalainen and Tissari : –; see section .). .
Cultural histories of politeness
Much of the discussion on civility and politeness by cultural and social historians is based on courtesy literature and conduct books. A case in point is Bryson’s seminal study (), which argues for a gradual cultural shift in ways of presenting social conduct and social life in didactic writings on correct social behaviour in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. She finds that in late medieval conduct literature, ‘courteous’ conduct was defined by rules concerning rituals of lordship and service within the noble household,
136 Eighteenth-century English
while in early modern manuals, ‘civil’ behaviour was introduced as a technique whereby a personal virtue could be represented within a broader ‘civil’ community. In practice, in England this ‘civil’ code of conduct was typically associated with and influenced by the royal court and London (Bryson : –). However, Bryson (: ) concludes that courtesy and civility were not dissimilar, in that they shared values that expressed social status and enforced social exclusion and hierarchy. Eighteenth-century politeness, by contrast, is often viewed by cultural historians as embodying some degree of informalisation and a wider vision of social concerns than its forerunners; in the late eighteenth century polite society no longer looked up to the monarchy in the same way as in earlier times (Klein : ; Langford : ). In light of this, it is interesting that the word politeness itself is still associated with courtiers by lexicographers such as Trusler (). More specifically, two modes of politeness are discussed by cultural historians: what Langford (: ) calls the ‘Spectator mode’, expounded in periodicals, fiction and didactic literature, and the ‘Shaftesbury mode’, found in the philosophical writings of Anthony Ashley Cooper, the third Earl of Shaftesbury. Klein (a: f.) argues that Shaftesbury advocated sociability and politeness in order to attack what he saw as the older intellectual order of the Church and the Court, and to shift the guardianship of culture from the Tories to his own Whig party. His discussion was aimed at the social and intellectual elite. By contrast, Joseph Addison, Richard Steele and their followers used the print medium to promote a polite moralism and code of behaviour to a wider audience, thus basically enhancing social mobility. How far down on the social scale even the Spectator mode of politeness reached is, however, debatable. For example, continuing the Spectator tradition in the mid s, the Connoisseur (No. : ) remarks that ‘This roughness, which clings to the seaman’s behaviour like tar to his trowsers, makes him unfit for all civil and polite society’. Langford (: ) maintains that, at least to begin with, politeness provided a means for relatively well-placed people to empower themselves. Klein (: f.) agrees that the dividing line that distinguished polite society from the rest roughly followed the boundary between the propertied and the non-propertied, but makes the proviso that since politeness was manifested in a variety of ways, it is not helpful to pin it down to one social segment exclusively: people from different walks of life pursued politeness in various modes and for various reasons. Under the general umbrella term of politeness, new distinctions also emerged. In the middle of the eighteenth century, the notion of sensibility gained ground, emphasising the link between inner virtue and outer
Cited from the OED (s.v. polite, A. adj., b). Orduna Nocito’s pilot study () of the semantic field of ‘manners’, which is based on a small sample of the Spectator data, deals with such words as polish, refinement, cultured, courteous and behaviour.
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
137
manners (Carter : –, Harvey : ). By the end of the century, it is argued, politeness had also been partly reduced to etiquette, that is precise rules for interpersonal behaviour (Tosh : , Cohen : ). Significantly for our study, however, civility also continued to be used throughout the eighteenth century, often embedded in general discussions of politeness. Civil is the word employed by commentators such as Giuseppe (Joseph) Baretti, who predicted the improvement of the manners of the ‘common people’ in : ‘in about twenty years more they will become quite as civil to strangers as the French and Italians’ (cited from Langford : ). However, in his analysis of the incidence of civil and polite in the Old Bailey Records, Shoemaker (: –) finds that they are both marginal in this vast body of data, and that polite is in fact much less frequent than civil. He takes this as an indication that the segment of London population which was dealt with in these court records was rarely designated as civil, let alone polite, either by their peers or by the magistrates with whom they came into contact. One of the issues that has arisen in relation to cultural keywords such as politeness is historical continuity and change. The continuity aspect is emphasised by cultural historians who point out the impact of the medieval Latin courtesy tradition in England. Gillingham (: ) finds that the basic ideas of gentlemanly conduct go back to the Middle Ages, and are thus more deeply entrenched in English culture than is often assumed. He suggests that the fact that the English terms civil and civility surfaced in the sixteenth century might be connected with works such as Erasmus’s De Civilitate, bilingual editions of which were used as drill-books for the education of younger children (Gillingham : ). Similarly, Langford (: ) points out that the utility of politeness as a cultural catchword did not necessarily depend on its didactic originality. .
Contextual approaches to eighteenth-century politeness Research questions
Our study adopts three complementary approaches to eighteenth-century politeness. We will begin by accounting for the collocational properties of the three sets of politeness words, and analysing the linguistic elements they modify, as well as the ways in which they themselves are modified. Their antonyms, uncivil and impolite, will also be considered. These analyses prepare the ground for a sociolinguistic account of the categories of people who were concerned about politeness, and were thus instrumental in constructing the eighteenth-century culture of politeness. This analysis will seek to answer the question of which social segments saw politeness as an issue in the eighteenth century; as Shoemaker (: ) and Harvey (: f.)
138 Eighteenth-century English
demonstrate, it was obviously not a universal concern. In polite society, ideals of politeness probably affected male behaviour more fundamentally than female behaviour (McIntosh ; Carter ). We will discuss the types of people whom the advocates of politeness designated as civil, polite or courteous. Given that cultural historians suggest that politeness culture served the purposes of both distinction and solidarity (Klein : ), it will be interesting to see how these notions are constructed and reinforced by letter writers representing different social ranks. Moving from the social to the cognitive level, our aim is to investigate how these cultural keywords were conceptualised, that is, which aspects of their use were presented in metaphorical terms and how. The lexical information in section will also feed into this analysis. English eighteenthcentury letter writers were expected to exchange not only letters, but also greetings, compliments, hospitality and actual presents. It therefore comes as no surprise that the most frequent conceptual metaphors to be found in our data concern the objectification of CIVILITY, COURTESY and POLITENESS and their EXCHANGE. Once objectified, these concepts can readily assume the function of a metaphorical INSTRUMENT: the words, actions and gifts involved in them were consciously managed to achieve particular purposes. This is a crucial fact in light of the conceptual metaphor theory, which is interested in the relation between metaphors and what Kövecses calls the ‘social-physical reality’ (: –). Indeed, our study shows how metaphor and social-physical reality intertwine in practice when metaphors are enacted in society. To date, there has been hardly any historical research on the conceptual metaphors of the English politeness lexicon. However, the conceptual metaphor theory has previously been applied by Tissari () and KoivistoAlanko and Tissari () to words for emotion and reason, focusing on metaphors which co-occur with such words as fear, love and mind. Both their corpus-based method and the method used here are similar to that used by Stefanowitsch (), who provides a detailed discussion of how to retrieve an instance of a conceptual metaphor which occurs with a specific word in corpus data. .
The correspondence corpus
The material we use in this study is drawn from the eighteenth-century Extension of the Corpus of Early English Correspondence (CEECE), which amounts to roughly . million words. It contains letter collections and includes data produced by more than letter writers. The corpus returns instances of our three sets of ‘polite’ words from between and : instances of civil and civility, of polite and politeness, and of courteous and courtesy (see the Appendix). These findings support Carter’s conclusion (: ), based on eighteenth-century
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
139
100 80 civility
60
politeness 40
courtesy
20 0 1700-1739
1740-1779
1780-1800
Figure .. Relative frequencies (%) of the three sets of politeness words
conduct literature, that established and more modern politeness vocabularies occurred synchronously. Perhaps less self-evidently, our data suggest that eighteenth-century letter writers were in fact more concerned about ‘civility’ than ‘politeness’: on average, over per cent of the lexical items studied come from the civil set, and only about one third from the polite set. The courtesy set is the smallest of the three, representing less than per cent of the total. This set contains references to courtesy in Chaucer, displays the fixed collocation by the courtesy of, and makes fun in a retort courteous (see Kjellmer ). In sum, courtesy is marginal when compared to politeness and, in particular, to civility. If we consider the use of these three lexical sets in three subperiods, the data suggest some chronological changes in their respective frequencies. Notably, as shown by Figure ., the use of the polite set reaches its peak between and , but falls dramatically in the twenty years from to . These frequency changes reflect the trend identified by cultural historians of politeness losing ground towards the end of the eighteenth century (for example, Harvey : ).
Civil(ity) and polite(ness) in their lexical contexts
A collocation analysis of the two more common lexical sets, civility and politeness, reveals some similarities and differences in their use at the lexical level. As we can see from Figure ., the polite set becomes more frequent in the mid eighteenth century, but at no point in time outnumbers the civil set. The two also partly overlap in use. The nouns civility and politeness occasionally appear as one phrase, suggesting that they are nearly synonymous or at least complementary. The adjectives civil and polite premodify some of the same nouns in the corpus, including man, manner and people. The common
The total number of politeness words found exceeds one hundred in each subperiod: it is in –, in – and in –.
140 Eighteenth-century English
collocates of the adjectives are shown below (the lists are not exhaustive, but are nevertheless indicative of the frequencies of the collocates): Civil: answer, messages, note; manner, way; excuse, greeting, wish; young man, young woman; people, society Polite: accomplishments, behaviour, manner, motives, taste; amusement, arts, learning, literature; language, tongue, writers; message, letter; invitation, offer, reception, remembrances; delicacy, firmness, freedom; lady, gentleman; acquaintance; man, people; congregation, inhabitants, professions, world. Despite their similarities, the two adjectives differ in their overall profiles of use in several respects. As civil is typically used as a subject complement (x is civil), it is less frequent as a premodifier than polite. The beneficiary or experiencer of civility is commonly expressed throughout the eighteenth century: people are civil to each other. In contrast, the beneficiary is rarely expressed with polite; the first couple of instances of overt expression of the beneficiary in the corpus are found in the latter half of the eighteenth century, and discussed in Nevalainen and Tissari (: ). As shown by the above list, polite is typically used as a premodifier, characterising people, lifestyle and behaviour, especially verbal behaviour. Instances of the courtesy set are rare in our data; as a subject complement, courteous refers to Middle English literature (‘thus Gawaine is always drawn courteous & gentle’; TPERCY ). The two sets of politeness words also differ in their patterns of co-ordination. Most of the time, civil is associated with kindness and friendliness, common civility being a fixed collocation. Civil and civility are also frequently intensified and quantified. There are also a few negative references, such as dull and empty civility: Civil (ity) co-ordinated and modified: kind and civil, civil and kind, civil and friendly, civil and pleasing, civil and serious, soft and civil, civil and good-natured, civil and attentive, civil and obliging, civil and political; very civil, good; very modest, civil; civility and kindness, civility and humanity; courtesy, civility and calmness, civility and respect, civility and good humour; quiet and friendly civility, civil and friendly terms, attention and civility; also: dull civility, empty civility, mere civility, worldly civility; unmeaning civilities, stiff civilities. Civil (ity) compared, intensified and quantified: civiler, civilest; exceeding civil, extremely civil, highly civil, very civil, particularly civil, so civil, prodigiously civil, civil beyond measure; common and great civility, utmost, greatest civility imaginable, all civility, some civility, so much civility, vast civilities, immense civilities, uncommon civility.
The adjective civil is found in the subject complement function in one third of all the instances of the civil (ity) set, and the beneficiary is expressed in % of these cases. The adjective polite, by contrast, has this function in % of all occurrences of the polite (ness) set, and the beneficiary is expressed in only two instances.
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
141
Polite and politeness, by contrast, are characterised by learning, pleasing and, above all, ease. In the words of William Pitt the elder, politeness ‘must be easy, natural, unstudied, manly, noble’ ( WPITT ): Polite (ness) co-ordinated and modified: polite and learned, polite and pleasing, polite and agreeable, polite and easy, polite and ingenuous; polite, worthy and good-humoured; cheerfully polite; fine, polite, sentimental; politely simple; ease and politeness, natural politeness; usual politeness. Polite (ness) compared, intensified and quantified: politer, more politely, politest, the most polite; exceedingly polite and agreeable; extremely polite, polite enough; great politeness, pure politeness, true politeness; also: mere politeness. Although politeness attracts many positive qualifiers, there is also discussion about its true nature, especially in the second half of the century. While civility may sometimes be dull and civilities stiff, politeness can be undermined by too much effort – or, as Robert Dodsley put it in example (), ‘studied refinement’. It can also be spoilt by vanity and lack of inner feeling, as pointed out by Mary Wollstonecraft in (): ()
… and, believe me, the manners of our women of fashion in general would by no means improve your natural politeness. Be contented, therefore, with what you have, and do not wish to exchange a natural politeness for studied refinement, nor truth and simplicity for art and affectation. (A RDODSLEY ) () Vanity in one shape or other reigns triumphant – and has banished love in all its modifications – and without it what is society? A false kind of politeness throws a varnish over every character – neither the heart nor sentiments appear in their true colours. (A ? MWOLLSTON )
Politeness does not necessarily equal sincerity, as can be inferred from Hester Piozzi’s report in (). Fifty years earlier, Bishop Hurd noted that insincerity may be implied by a courtier’s politeness (): ()
()
It was with more Sincerity than Politeness that you told me in my own Apartments at Bath, when I complained of your coming there contrary to your solemn Promise – that your Visits were not to me but to my daughter. (A HPIOZZI II, ) In one point however I am willing to think my comparison fails; for tho’ I have charg’d you with a Courtier’s politeness, yet you have not, I am sure, his Insincerity; and that is an Idea, wch. the word Courtier has been usually made to convey. (A RHURD )
142 Eighteenth-century English
This idea of politeness as lacking in sincerity is echoed by Trusler’s dictionary, cited in (): ()
Complaisance, rises from the respect we shew those, whom we meet; is, sometimes, sincere, sometimes, not; politeness, from the flattering methods, we make use of in our behaviour and conversation; and is, generally, insincere; but, to be well-bred, is to shew the same honours, always, with sincerity. (Trusler : )
Civility, politeness and good breeding are also evoked in (), William Pitt’s mid-century advice to his nephew Thomas, a student at Cambridge, who was suffering from the bullying of his pleasure-seeking fellow students. Pitt relates civility to good breeding, and politeness to external ease of behaviour, which he contrasts with true, ‘inward estimation’: ()
As to your manner of behaving towards these unhappy young gentlemen you describe, let it be manly and easy; decline their parties with civility; retort their raillery with raillery, always tempered with good breeding: if they banter your regularity, order, decency, and love of study, banter in return their neglect of them; and venture to own frankly, that you came to Cambridge to learn what you can, not to follow what they are pleased to call pleasure. In short, let your external behaviour to them be as full of politeness and ease as your inward estimation of them is full of pity, mixed with contempt. (A WPITT f.)
There are only a few instances of the antonyms of civil and polite in the corpus. The common idea of civility as being directed towards other people is reflected in the use of uncivil. This word appears in Thomas Gray’s satirical letter to Horace Walpole in , quoted in (), where the writer deduces that, having inadvertently disturbed a certain elderly lady of quality, he has been condemned by her as an uncivil person: ()
but to see the frowzy Countenances of the Creatures especially one old Lady-Carcase, that made most hideous Grimaces, & would needs tell me, that I was a very uncivil Person to disturb a Woman of her Quality, that did me the honour to lie so near me. (A ? TGRAY )
In () Jane Austen tells her aunt how she would not on any account wish to show uncivil behaviour to those whom she has been visiting by declining their company but, at the same time, accepting another invitation. To her, being uncivil equals being insincere: () If I do not stay for the Ball, I would not on any account do so uncivil a thing by the Neighbourhood as to set off at that very time for another place. (A ? JAUSTEN ) In contrast, Eliza Draper relates impoliteness to the form of a discourse rather than to its content in her letter to her cousin, Thomas Sclater (). Repetitions
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
143
are termed not only ‘impolite’, but downright ‘disgusting’, suggesting that a failure to please may easily turn into disgust: ()
.
I have not wrote you since November last my dear Sclater, for I have not yet been furnished with the Necessary Informations from Bombay – and I know not how to write on any other subject, than that of my own very peculiar Situation. Repetitions are not only impolite, but disgusting, as they weaken the force of such arguments as derive their worth from Integrity and distress. (A EDRAPER )
Civil(ity) and polite(ness) in their social contexts Users of civility and politeness
Our access to a socially stratified corpus has allowed us to take a closer look at which sections of eighteenth-century society were concerned about politeness. The gender of the writer does not emerge as a statistically significant factor with the polite set – women and men use these words to the same extent – but it does make a difference in the use of the civil set: women were clearly more preoccupied by civility than men. These findings (normalised to , words) are presented in Figure .. 25 20 civil(ity)
15
polite(ness) 10
courtesy
5 0 men
women
Figure .. Male and female usage of politeness words (per , words)
A more complex picture emerges when the writers’ social status is taken into account. Using a model of social stratification developed in earlier research on the Corpus of Early English Correspondence, we constructed a social hierarchy which distinguishes three categories: the nobility and upper gentry; the lower gentry and professions (doctors, lawyers, army officers, and so on); and the mercantile and other middling and lower ranks (Nevalainen and Raumolin-Brunberg : ). This hierarchy thus makes a basic distinction between the gentry and educated professionals on the one hand, and the non-gentry on the other, which allows us to test the extent to which the writers’ status correlated with their relative concern for politeness. However, it clearly lacks detail concerning the ranks below the gentry/professions
144 Eighteenth-century English
line, which represent the majority of the population. This division reflects the material available in edited form, which is partly, although by no means entirely, a reflection of the general rate of literacy at the time (c. per cent of the population; Cressy : ). However, if the fifty-million-word Old Bailey Records are indicative of the relative lack of concern for politeness among the lower social ranks (Shoemaker ), we perhaps could not expect uses of the politeness lexis, and the polite set in particular, to occur in large quantities in a socially more representative corpus. The distribution of the two major sets of politeness words among the genders and social ranks in the CEECE is shown in Figure .. It indicates that, at this level of generality, there are no social differences in the use of the civil set among the male writers, while a distinction emerges between the gentry and non-gentry among the female writers (the difference between the upper and lower gentry/professions is not statistically significant, according to the chi-square test). The figure also indicates that the lower gentry and professional people use the polite set significantly more than either the upper or the lower ranks, and that within this group, women use these words more than men. A comparison of the lexical preferences of those writers whose work includes more than ten instances of civil (ity) and polite (ness) reveals some social variation. Those who used the polite set more than the civil one include the bookseller Robert Dodsley, Richard Hurd, the Bishop of Worcester, the hostess and writer Hester Piozzi, and Prime Minister William Pitt the elder, who came from a long line of politicians. By contrast, civil and civility predominate in the letters of authors and intellectuals such as Jane Austen, Edward Gibbon, Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, and Mary Wollstonecraft. The results shown in Figure . also lend support to the hypothesis that the ranks below the gentry/professions were little occupied by the relatively recent politeness lexis. However, they show that the older civil set had permeated the literate social spectrum represented by the corpus, reflecting the fact that gentry status played a minor role for the general concept of politeness: a key term such as gentleman had long ceased to be used of the landed gentry alone (Langford : ). .
The social spheres of civility and politeness
Despite the overlapping use of the civil and polite sets found in section , they are assigned to partly distinct social spheres. Polite (ness) is associated with the social elite, and with the town rather than the countryside. In (), Eliza Pierce contrasts the popular tastes of the polite people, the beau monde, with those of ‘a country girl’ like herself: () Notwithstanding the badness of your Direction I receiv’d Vertot Works and am oblig’d to you for the Lent of them especially at this time when I want something pour passer le tems & beleive I shall find more
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
145
25 civil(ity)
20
polite(ness) 15 10 5 0 N+UG men
LG+P men
M+O men
N+UG women
LG+P women
M+O women
Figure .. Frequencies of politeness words by gender and rank (per , words). (N = nobility, UG = upper gentry, LG = lower gentry, P = professions, M = merchants, O = other non-gentry)
entertainment in them then I even did in Mr. Fieldings Amelia. tho’ you probably and the rest of the polite people will laugh at the Rusticity of my Tast, but how can you expect a better from A Country Girl that has seen nothing of the beau Monde for allmost Year and when she did was so Stupid as not greatly to relish it (A EPIERCE ). When used to qualify people, civil covers a wider social spectrum than polite. The royalty, for example, are expected to be both ‘civil’ and ‘polite’. William Cowper ( WCOWPER II, 102) makes an explicit reference to ‘that civility and politeness in which monarchs are expected to excell’. In the upper echelons of society, politeness is associated with knowing one’s social standing. In his advice to Prince William in (), King George III locates it on a social scale, as behaviour directed towards social equals: () Though when at home a Prince, on board of the Prince George you are only a boy learning the naval profession; but the Prince so far accompanies you, that what other boys might do you must not; it must never be out of your thoughts that more obedience is necessary from you to your superiours in the Navy, more politeness to your equals, and more good nature to your inferiours, than from those who have not been told that these are essential for a gentleman (A GEORGE V,). In his letter to his nephew in (), William Pitt agrees, but expects proper behaviour to be adapted according to social standing and to have a more serious moral obligation than mere politeness: () I would trouble you with a word or two more upon some branches of behaviour, which have a more serious moral obligation in them, than those of mere politeness; which are equally important in the eye of the world. I mean a proper behaviour, adapted to the respective relations
146 Eighteenth-century English
we stand in, towards the different ranks of superiors, equals, and inferiors (A WPITT f.). Polite(ness) is a common attribute of ladies and gentlemen, both English and foreign, as reported by Henry Purefoy in (). It is also attributed to the ‘polite’ professions, such as doctors and clergymen, as suggested by the comments made by Dr Charles Burney about Doctor Wheeler in (), and by Mary Wollstonecraft about a young clergyman in (). However, Mary Wollstonecraft’s analysis of the people around her makes it clear that the traditional gentry/professions line is not crossed: a butler can be ‘beyond measure civil and attentive’, but not someone she would characterise as ‘polite’: () As to Mr. Garvan hee was a Catholick Gentleman & I was favoured with his ffreindship & acquaintance. Hee was a very polite gentleman & a man of veracity & much admired & esteemed by late Ld. North & Grey & the Visct. Mountague of Sussex as well as by everybody else who knew him (A HPUREFOY II, ). () Our dear & Good Doctor gave me Letters to Drs Wheeler & Edwards whom I like extreamly. The former is a polite & agreeable Man of the World, as well as a good Scholar & Christian; the latter almost an old School-Fellow, having left Shrewsbury School just when I entered it (A CBURNEY f.). () agreeable companion – a young Clergyman, who was going to settle in Ireland, in the same capacity as myself. He was intelligent and had that kind of politeness, which arises from sensibility. My conductor, was beyond measure civil and attentive to me, he is a good sort of a man, I was, at first, at a loss to guess what department he filled in the family; but I find now he is the Butler, and his wife the housekeeper (A ? MWOLLSTON ). Example () thus shows that, unlike politeness, civility extends to the social ranks below the gentry and professionals, not only in the town but also in the country. In (), Henry Purefoy identifies Goodman Enoch, a farmer, as a civil neighbour: () Sir! / In answer to yours can acquaint you Goodmn. Enoch was allways esteemed a civill neighbour but as to his circumstances & management of his ffarme, I know nothing of them (A HPUREFOY I, ). Significantly, for William Pitt, the antonym of the polite way of doing things appears to be not impolite but vulgar and mercantile. In () these terms are applied to letter-writing practices: () Pardon an observation on style: ‘I received yours’ is vulgar and mercantile; ‘your letter’ is the way of writing. Inclose your letters in a cover, it is more polite (A WPITT ).
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
147
As we have seen, civil (ity) and polite (ness) belong to the active vocabulary of most letter writers in our corpus, and more than one third of these people use both sets. This supports the conclusion Lawrence Stone and Jeanne Fawtier-Stone (: f.) reached when they analysed social mobility in England after : there was a consensus of cultural values and behaviour among the landed classes, wealthy merchants and bankers, and the gentrified ‘middling sort’. The upper and middle levels of English society were held together by a common bond of gentility – and, we may add, the cultural ideal of politeness. At the same time, the Stones go on to argue, the genteel ranks were separated by subtle but infinitely resistant lines of snobbery, something also borne out by our comparison of politeness and civility. .
Metaphor and metonymy in politeness Targets and sources
Moving on to the conceptualisation of politeness, we will begin by briefly defining the terms ‘conceptual metaphor’ and ‘conceptual metonymy’. We will then proceed to discuss how COURTESY, CIVILITY and POLITENESS become OBJECTS or ENTITIES which people may exchange or use as INSTRUMENTS. In some cases, what becomes objectified is in fact LANGUAGE itself rather than these concepts, and CIVIL OR POLITE LANGUAGE is also discussed in terms of other metaphors. Indeed, there are several further metaphors which characterise the concepts we are interested in. The gist of the conceptual metaphor theory is that metaphor is not only a rhetorical device or a linguistic issue, but also, and above all, a phenomenon of the mind. In George Lakoff and Mark Johnson claimed that metaphors are the basic building blocks of the way we think. In Women, Fire and Dangerous Things (), Lakoff argues that we understand the English concept of ANGER in terms of both metaphor and metonymy. The physiological effects of anger, such as INCREASED BODY HEAT and INCREASED BLOOD PRESSURE, belong to a folk-theoretical system of metonymies for ANGER. These in turn are a basis for such metaphors as ANGER IS THE HEAT OF A FLUID IN A CONTAINER. This metaphor is instantiated in such phrases as ‘she was brimming with rage’, or ‘you make my blood boil ’ (Lakoff : –). For Lakoff and other cognitive linguists, metonymy, like metaphor, is a conceptual phenomenon. Metonymy concerns conceptual domains which we associate with the concept ANGER because they co-occur with this emotion (contingent concepts). Metaphor, on the other hand, couples a ‘target domain’ such as ANGER with another conceptual domain called the ‘source domain’, for example THE HEAT OF A FLUID IN A CONTAINER. This conceptual domain is the ‘source’ from which we obtain the metaphor (see Deignan : –, Kövecses : –).
148 Eighteenth-century English
.
From concrete to abstract?
According to The Oxford English Dictionary (OED), the first senses of civility and courtesy were fairly abstract, concerning ideas rather than acts. The direction of metonymic association thus seems to be from the idea to the act, from the norm to the corresponding behaviour. The origins of politeness were different and rather concrete, the noun being derived from the verb polish (Nevalainen and Tissari : –, section .). The conceptual metaphor theory says that physical experience precedes abstract conceptualisation (Lakoff and Johnson , ). The history of the word politeness appears to support this theory, but civility and courtesy present more complex cases, both being Latinate loan words. To really investigate these, one should go back to Old French and Latin and their internal developments. The Oxford English Dictionary specifies that the semantic development of civility involves several metonymic shifts, from ‘obs[olete] senses, connected with citizenship, and civil polity’ to ‘senses connected with civilization [and] culture’, the latter involving ‘behaviour proper to the intercourse of civilized people’. The OED suggests that this last-mentioned sense of civility, which is the one we are interested in, is the basis for a further metonymic sense, ‘an act or expression of politeness’. All these senses existed in the English language before the eighteenth century (OED, s.v. civility, n.). The development of the meaning of the noun courtesy is somewhat different. The senses ascribed to it by the OED – ‘courteous behaviour’ and the ‘quality’ of ‘courteous disposition’ – both emerged in the thirteenth century. Later, it metonymically acquired further senses, such as ‘a courteous act or expression’ and the now common (by) courtesy of (OED, s.v. courtesy n., Kjellmer ). Returning to the etymology of politeness, since the attractiveness of polished objects resides in their beautiful surface, we may note that superficiality is inherent in the word. It is no wonder, then, that several metaphors of politeness relate to shape and surface (see section . in particular), and that eighteenth-century people discussing politeness juxtapose the surface with what is inside a person (see examples and above). In contrast, the phrase pure politeness suggests that some people or actions represent politeness through and through. Moreover, our lists of patterns of co-ordination indicate correspondences between civil (ity) and polite (ness), as civil (ity) is also represented in terms of content (empty civility), and both can be measured (for example exceeding civil, immense civilities; extremely polite, great politeness: section ). .
Singulars and plurals
The following example from our data rather typically combines metonymy and metaphor:
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
149
() I have given up my fellowship & this post carries my civilities to Dr Long concerning this great resignation (A WMASON ). The situation in () appears to be somewhat unpleasant for William Mason, and he knows that he should take some action. In other words, he appears to know how a ‘civil’ person should behave in these circumstances, and this behaviour is metonymically packed into the word civilities, which also refers to the actual words contained in a letter. The fact that the letter, including the words written in it, is carried to its recipient involves a continuum from a physical object (letter) to its contents (civilities). These stand in a metonymic relationship, as do the civil words and the meaning packed into them. In addition, the expression carries my civilities to Dr Long also has a metaphorical flavour. Abstract circumstantial know-how has become objectified in the word civilities, and can now move from one place to another. We may call this metaphor CIVILITIES ARE ENTITIES. Following the example set by several scholars (Goatly : –; Koller ; Deignan : –), we might ask how word class relates to or influences conceptual metaphors. In both the present data and the data on emotion words presented in Tissari (: , ), it is the nouns that provide the easiest and most frequent access to metaphors, although all these lexical sets also contain adjectives. In the correspondence data, the nouns civility, courtesy and politeness clearly differ with respect to whether they occur more often in the singular or the plural form. While civility occurs about as frequently in the singular ( per cent) as in the plural ( per cent), politeness almost always occurs in the singular ( per cent), and courtesy always does so. This suggests that civilities may be countable in a manner different from politenesses and courtesies, and implies the salience of civilities as instances which can be recorded, and which metaphorically resemble physical objects. Objects, substances and exchanges of eighteenth-century politeness .
Entities of politeness
Our data sometimes suggest the source domain PHYSICAL OBJECT, and sometimes the rather less bounded SUBSTANCE, and these are not always easy to
Our three lexical sets divide into nouns, adjectives and adverbs as follows: civility: noun .%, adjective .%, adverb .%; courtesy: noun %, adjective .%, adverb .%; politeness: noun .%, adjective .%, adverb .%. It seems that the same could be said of courtesy in the seventeenth century, when it could metonymically stand for something that was desired, as in: ‘Amongst other curtesis w’ch I have intreated you I pray forget me not about the littel of that drug of Tushma whatsoever it cost you’ (A T RWICKHAM ).
150 Eighteenth-century English
distinguish from each other. They can both be subsumed into the more general source domain of ENTITIES. A further point of interest is that this ‘object’ or ‘substance’ may relate to a physical object which is being exchanged, to polite behaviour (an act of politeness), or to a more abstract idea of acceptable behaviour. Revisiting example (), reproduced here in part in (), we may see the determiner more as (if) defining the quantity of A SUBSTANCE: () it must never be out of your thoughts that more obedience is necessary from you to your superiours in the Navy, more politeness to your equals, and more good nature to your inferiours, than from those who have not been told that these are essential for a gentleman (A GEORGE V, ). It is possible to distinguish at least two variants of the frequent metaphor CIVILITIES ARE OBJECTS, the first being CIVIL ACTIONS ARE OBJECTS, and the second CIVIL WORDS ARE OBJECTS. These words can be oral, as in the nonmetaphorical example (), or written, as in example (), above: () I say not this in pique my Coz, but if People’s Minds are so very different to each other as to be Incapable of Uttering a few reciprocal Civilities once a year without doing a violence to their Inclinations they had much better give up the farce of symphathizing at once (A EDRAPER, ). In (), civility is received, and in (), it is returned: () ()
CIVILITY IS EXCHANGE:
).
I receivd so much Civility (A APOPE I,
CIVIL LANGUAGE IS EXCHANGE: And I cannot but persuade myself that they will return a civil & serious answer to what I alledge (A TSECKER, ).
As suggested above, distinguishing the instances in which these words appear as metaphorical OBJECTS is not entirely straightforward, as they are so closely knitted with physical objects, such as the letter in example (). The data tell us that people exchanged not only letters, but also many other objects, such as the collar in example (), which was intended for the writer’s dog, whose thanks Eliza Pierce ‘ventriloquises’ in her letter: () Fido sends his Respectfull Civilities and thanks you for his Collar & will do it in person next Wednesday when we expect to see you if you don’t go to the Moors (A EPIERCE, ). A typical verb which occurs with the noun civility is to show, as in example (). This is interesting, because the primary meaning of show suggests that civilities are something that can be seen, if not physical entities such as gifts, food or a room for lodging, then at least physical actions by the person who shows civilities:
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
151
() Mr Taylor & his brother have been here, to whom I was glad to shew any civilities in my power, as well from inclination, as that you did me the favor to request it of me (A RHURD, ). The gist of the matter is that EXCHANGE, apart from occurring as a metaphor, is inherent in the concept of CIVILITY: civil people reciprocally exchange words, actions, acts of hospitality, food and presents. It is possible to see a concrete-to-abstract continuum from (a) physical objects to (b) physical actions to (c) letters and (d) verbal utterances to (e) an attitude of CIVILITY towards a person. Another way to see this is in terms of metonymy, to say that when civilities refer to physical objects, actions or words, the noun civility metonymically stands for concepts associated with or included in the concept of CIVILITY (see Dirven ). The idea that COURTESY and POLITENESS were also understood in terms of EXCHANGE is suggested by the words that occur together with courtesy and politeness. For example, people thought of polite actions as something that could be received (): () and you are one of those I’d rather be esteem’d by, than receive the greatest Acts of politeness from (A EDRAPER, ). .
Instruments
Anything that is exchanged may be seen as AN INSTRUMENT within a framework of exchange which defines each person’s social position. The metaphorical source domains ENTITY and SUBSTANCE form the basis for the metaphorical source domain INSTRUMENT; if CIVILITIES can be seen as ENTITIES, then it is only natural that such ENTITIES may be used, as is suggested by Daniel Defoe’s advice in (): () And here I beg your Leav to Give One hint – There Are Officers sent Down to the Customes and Excise. I make no Complaints Nor Do I say there is yet any Cause, but I Humbly Move those who Ever Are sent may be Commanded to use all the Courtisye, Civillity and Calmness possible here. Nothing Elce Can Oblige This Surly, Haughty, Vain Humour of the poorest and Meanest people (A DDEFOE, ). The concepts of EXCHANGE and INSTRUMENT co-occur in Charles Lennox’s account of a royal encounter in (): () mett her there, & received her R:H: with the utmost respect & politeness (A CLENNOX, ). .
More on civil and polite language
It seems that during the eighteenth century, especially as compared with similar data from the seventeenth century, there is a shift in emphasis in
152 Eighteenth-century English
which the target domain CIVILITY/POLITENESS is to some extent replaced by the target domain CIVIL/POLITE LANGUAGE. In such cases, the metaphors do not concern behaviour in general, but rather speech and writing. How this works can be seen by comparing example () with example () above. In example () what is received is civility, while in () what is returned is a civil and serious answer. This change may indeed be reflected in the use of the adjective instead of the noun. Example () couples POLITE LANGUAGE with EXCHANGE (of information, with the underlined words conveying the latter concept): () The very obliging answers I received to some former letters of mine, & your polite offer to procure me information concerning any books in your Libraries, encourage me to trouble you (A TPERCY, ). The shift of emphasis from behaviour in general to language in particular results in small changes in source domains. Curiously enough, CIVIL AND POLITE LANGUAGE tends not to be presented as AN INSTRUMENT. To be more precise, it seems that when it is employed ‘instrumentally’, it is not usual to make this explicit, as in the phrase a civil answer (example ), but rather the instrumental use is conveyed by the noun itself, as in example (). A new group of metaphors which appear with explicitly linguistic CIVILITY are metaphors of CONTAINMENT, as in example () from Elizabeth Carter, in which CIVIL CONVERSATION is presented as A CONTAINER to put words into (see Reddy ): () However I thought it but civil somtimes to put in a word which I did without caring what I said, & asked Questions without the least Attention to listen for an Answer (A ECARTER, ). In () Joseph Warton provides evidence for a metonymic connection between POLITENESS and POLITE LANGUAGE: it is natural to think that Smyth metonymically refers to ‘Smyth’s mind’ or ‘Smyth’s writing’ rather than ‘Smyth’s body’. His politeness is directly coupled with literary criticism and linguistic correctness, often associated with eighteenth-century POLITE LANGUAGE (Fitzmaurice ; Watts ): () You see by his Advertisement that he thinks to set up for the first correct English poet. I suppose Smyth is returned from London, full of Politeness and Criticism, & damns the musty University more heartily than ever (A ? JWARTON, ).
Variation in entity metaphors
In () Lady Mary Wortley Montagu discusses the characteristics desirable in a lover, which appear as ENTITIES that can form A UNITY. The UNITY metaphor thus seems to be a variation on the ENTITY theme:
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
153
() the greatest charm they can have, is a sweetnesse and complaisance of temper. Examine nicely into that; if your Lover’s [sic] joyns that to a good Understanding and Polite behaviour, endeavor to recall the rash Denial you have given him (A ? MMONTAGU I, ). Another variation on the ENTITY theme is the idea of A HIDDEN OBJECT. Example () could also be understood in terms of containment within the body or mind (POLITENESS IS IN THE BODY/MIND). The body, of course, contains the heart, mentioned in example () as (not being) a source of (worldly) civility: () Some days ago I was told Mr. Mackensie was appointed Ambassador to this Republic, which I was very glad to hear, not doubting to find in him his usual politeness (A MMONTAGU III, ). () Desire her not to immagine you mean by this to solicit the appearance of a wordly civility, for that you do not desire what does not come from the heart (A SLENNOX I, ). The source domain NUTRIENT/FOOD is related to the noun taste. The OED tells us that this noun first occurred in the sense ‘the faculty of perceiving and enjoying what is excellent in art, literature, and the like’ in the seventeenth century. POLITENESS is associated with this metaphor in () and (): () you might have spar’d yourself the trouble of proving to me, yt. the Country had not yet vitiated your taste of polite learning (A RHURD, ). () but would have saved himself the trouble of writing, and me of reading and answering, such an exquisite piece of polite delicacy (A THUGHES, ). CIVILITY is also seen as A GAME. (), from Dr Johnson, includes both the metaphor (rules) and a metaphor of CONTAINMENT (transgress). Note also that it is not as serious to break the rules of a game as to break the law. In this way, metaphors serve to weigh CIVILITY against FRIENDSHIP. These two concepts are also involved in example (), from Ignatius Sancho, who presents us with a metaphor based on the difference between warmth and coldness, and with the source domain of A CANDLE: GAME
() I would not have it thought that if I sometimes transgress the rules of civility, I would violate the laws of friendship (A SJOHNSON I, ). () There is such civil coldness in writing, a month perhaps after expectation has been snuffed out, that the very thought is enough to chill friendship (C ? ISANCHO, ).
154 Eighteenth-century English
Some passages, such as those in () and (), by Hester Piozzi and William Jones, respectively, suggest a scale of CIVILITY/POLITENESS, where GOOD IS UP: () we do not overrate his Civility and active Friendship (A HPIOZZI I, ). () She was mistress in a high degree of many polite arts (A WJONES I, ).
Broadening the contexts of politeness
.
The Historical Thesaurus of English
As pointed out in section ., above, civility, courtesy and politeness by no means represent the whole of the Late Modern English politeness lexicon. A wildcard search for politeness in the online version of the Historical Thesaurus of English (HTE) first produces references to the sections ‘Action’, ‘Space, extent’ and ‘Style of language, writing’. The connection between expected behaviour and people’s resulting actions is important for understanding conceptual metonymies and metaphors of words for politeness. One of the ways in which people frequently acted was to write a letter or to comment on someone else’s literary achievements. In our previous study we found that words for politeness generally attest metaphors which concern a person’s place in society (Nevalainen and Tissari : –). A continued HTE search produces data from the sections ‘Good behaviour’, ‘Elegance’ and ‘Smoothness’. Within these, we find some interesting new English uses emerging in the eighteenth century. One is the thing () for ‘seemly behaviour/propriety’, which connects to people’s knowledge of how to behave and the objectification of this knowledge. With regard to the countability of civilities mentioned in section ., we should note the use of accomplishment () for a ‘quality that fits one for society’, and of the adverb punctiliously () for ‘with strict propriety’, as if metaphorically referring to points in the course of a person’s conduct. In our corpus data, polite also co-occurs with accomplishments, as in Agnes Porter’s account of young Eliza in (): () Your sister Eliza is quite well and, I make no doubt, is much admired in the great world for her goodness, elegance, and polite accomplishments (A APORTER, ). The Historical Thesaurus section ‘Elegance’ includes the expressions command of language/words () and roundly (, ‘in polished/cultured manner’), which are interesting in terms of metaphors, one potentially presenting words as people (or soldiers?) to be put in the right order, and the other referring to shape. The adjective euphonious () describes the
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
155
agreeable sound of elegant language, while the adjective unangular (), from the section on ‘Smoothness’, may be associated with ROUNDNESS. In the eighteenth century, SMOOTHNESS was also associated with satin and velvet (satined [], velvety []), of which satin especially may be described as ‘glossy’ (OED satin n). Compare this with Mary Wollstonecraft’s description of Monseigneur Filliettaz in (): () I like Monsr Filliettaz, and you would like him for without being what is termed a polite man he has great softness of manners which you find so fascinating (C ? MWOLLSTON ). .
A comparison with respect
It is of further interest to note that the words which we have studied relate to other concepts which attest similar metaphors. Such source domains as ENTITY, EXCHANGE and INSTRUMENT are in fact so ubiquitous that, on their own, they may tell us little about which other concepts are related to CIVILITY, COURTESY, and POLITENESS. The ENTITY, EXCHANGE and INSTRUMENT metaphors could be called ‘constitutive metaphors’, as they are fairly abstract compared to metaphors such as ANGER IS THE HEAT OF A FLUID IN A CONTAINER (Lakoff : ). Our data nevertheless provide us with some idea of what kind of other concepts are coupled with CIVILITY, COURTESY and POLITENESS. For instance, example () above illustrates a case in which both POLITENESS and RESPECT are seen as INSTRUMENTS. In section our list ‘Civil (ity) coordinated and modified’ also attests the word pair civility and respect. We will conclude by briefly illustrating other similarities between the target domains CIVILITY, COURTESY, POLITENESS and RESPECT (see Tissari ). Like civility and courtesy, the noun respect may refer both to an ‘attitude’ and to actual behaviour. In other words, all these words have metonymically developed senses which refer to actions. Example () is from the OED ; note that it comes from the eighteenth century: () The Science of Respects, is, as I may say, the Soul of Society ( Refl. upon Ridicule ). Our data suggest that POLITENESS, on the other hand, is closely related to RESPECT, in that both are to some extent conceived as EMOTIONS. We base this argument on the knowledge that the source domains UNITY, CONTAINMENT IN THE BODY/HEART, A HIDDEN OBJECT and even NUTRIENT/FOOD, which occur in the present data, characterise emotions (see for example Kövecses : , Koivisto-Alanko and Tissari ). Tissari () argues that RESPECT is also strongly associated with REASON and INTELLECT. The idea that this observation applies to POLITENESS as well is suggested by connections such as that between one particular sense of the noun wit, the ‘use of (imaginative) intelligence in the expression of
156 Eighteenth-century English
speech and writing’ (Koivisto-Alanko and Tissari : ), and the frequent application of the adjective polite to letters and literature (see section ). The relationship between these concepts probably deserves a study of its own, but these observations point to similarities in the conceptualisation of target domains that have previously not been studied together in conceptual metaphor research, and in particular in historical metaphor research. We nevertheless note that, in his attempt to trace patterns of metaphors common to groups of concepts, Kövecses widened his scope from emotions (such as RESPECT) to human relationships (such as FRIENDSHIP; Kövecses , , see also : –). Further work on the co-ordination of civil (ity) and polite (ness) would certainly reveal and verify several interesting links between concepts (see section ). Conclusions Our findings indicate that both those who argue for changes in politeness cultures and those who trace long-term continuities appear to be right. In the correspondence data, change is clearly represented by the momentum the polite set gained in the eighteenth century. However, it still failed to oust the civil set, the application of which continued to broaden in social terms, as England continued as a ‘civil’ society. Towards the end of the eighteenth century, the use of the polite set was clearly declining, suggesting that by the nineteenth century, ‘[t]he idea of polite society … had lost its power to civilize’ (Tosh : ). Although some of our findings are tentative, we hope that we have shown that it makes sense to apply conceptual metaphor theory to the study of the politeness lexicon. We consider it significant that we have been able to flesh out hypotheses about the enactment of metaphors in society (Kövecses : –). The same source domains contribute to metaphors for both CIVILITY and POLITENESS: ENTITY, SUBSTANCE, EXCHANGE and INSTRUMENT. Our study highlights the respective roles of metaphor and metonymy, as well as the interdependence of these and their social enactment. We also further develop the idea expressed by commentators such as Dirven () that there is a continuum between metonymy and metaphor, emphasising that the continuum begins with physical objects and behaviour, rather than metonymy, and suggesting that we should investigate these issues within a multi-dimensional framework rather than in a linear fashion. On a less theoretical level, these findings contribute to our understanding of how Late Modern English letter writers linguistically conceptualised their civil, courteous and polite behaviour, and point to potential changes during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. A number of conceptual metaphors have to do with evaluating people’s behaviour, such as POLITENESS IS TASTE, POLITENESS IS IN THE MIND and AN UPWARDS SCALE OF CIVILITY/POLITENESS. There seems to have been a shift from
Contextualising eighteenth-century politeness
157
evaluating people’s physical behaviour in the seventeenth century to evaluating their self- expression in the eighteenth. Most importantly, people showed their skills in writing by cleverly employing metaphors for behaviour. These metaphors also help us to chart the conceptual network which includes CIVILITY, COURTESY and POLITENESS. Close metaphorical correspondences between target domains such as CIVILITY, COURTESY and POLITENESS may facilitate the introduction of new sets of polite words and hence new target domains, while allowing for cognitive continuity in the conceptualisation of politeness and related semantic domains in English.
Appendix: Distribution of the three lexical sets by social rank and gender Rank
Words
Percentage Civil
Royalty (Total)
.
Royalty (Men)
Royalty (Women)
Nobility (Total)
.
Polite
Courteous
Nobility (Men)
Nobility (Women)
Gentry Upper (Total)
Gentry Upper (Men)
Gentry Upper (Women)
.
Gentry Lower (Total)
Gentry Lower (Men)
Gentry Lower (Women)
Clergy Upper (Total)
Clergy Upper (Men)
.
.
Clergy Upper (Women) Clergy Lower (Total)
Clergy Lower (Men)
Clergy Lower (Women)
.
As Fludernik (: ) put it: ‘The epistolary medium made it possible to display oneself, to manipulate the recipient and to fine-tune one’s relationship in a discourse of great verve and subtlety, improving on the hazardous and bungling performance of face-to-face conversation.’
158 Eighteenth-century English Rank
Words
Percentage Civil
Professionals (Total)
.
Polite
Courteous
Professionals (Men)
Professionals (Women)
Merchants (Total)
Merchants (Men)
Merchants (Women)
Other (Total)
Other (Men)
Other (Women) Total
.
.
9
Expressive speech acts and politeness in eighteenth-century English I R M A TA AV ITSA I N EN University of Helsinki A N DR EAS H. J UC K ER University of Zurich
I consider a human soul without education like marble in the quarry, which shews none of its inherent beauties, until the skill of the polisher fetches out the colours, makes the surface shine, and discovers every ornamental cloud, spot, and vein that runs thro the body of it. Education, after the same manner, when it works upon a noble mind, draws out to view every latent virtue and perfection, which, without such helps, are never able to make their appearance. (Addison, Spectator, November , pages –) Background to eighteenth-century speech acts and politeness Searle (: –) divided speech acts into five different types: Assertives, Directives, Commissives, Expressives and Declarations. Of these, expressive speech acts reveal psychological states of mind and express personal attitudes and feelings. They deal with social and interpersonal relations. The list of expressives includes speech acts such as greetings, thanks, congratulations, condolences and apologies, and politeness considerations are among the main factors that determine the realisations of these speech acts. In the eighteenth century expressive speech acts received a great deal of attention and their linguistic manifestations received normative educational attention to the extent that they, with accompanying non-verbal signs of polished behaviour, became distinguishing features of status in society. The leading eighteenth-century author of the relevant politeness literature writes: An aukward country fellow, when he comes into company better than himself, is exceedingly disconcerted. He knows not what to do with
‘The illocutionary point of this class is to express the psychological state specified in the sincerity condition about a state of affairs specified in the propositional content’ (Searle : ).
159
160 Eighteenth-century English
his hands, or his hat, […] If spoken to, he is in a much worse situation, he answers with the utmost difficulty, and nearly stammers; whereas a gentleman, who is acquainted with life, enters a room with gracefulness, and a modest assurance; addresses even persons he does not know, in an easy and natural manner, and without the least embarrassment. This is the characteristic of good-breeding, a very necessary knowledge in our intercourse with men; for one of inferior parts, with the behaviour of a gentleman, is frequently better received than a man of sense, with the address and manners of a clown. (Chesterfield : ) In eighteenth-century England politeness played a particularly pertinent role as the country was undergoing major social and cultural change. The beginning of the Industrial Revolution, improvements in agricultural methods, new roads and canals and, in particular, rapidly increasing international commerce led to a new prosperity and, with it, a rise of the middle classes who now earned their income as lawyers, merchants or employees of the new trading companies. Against this backdrop of upward social mobility, it was important for the individual to know exactly how to behave in a way that was appropriate to his or her social position. Politeness was seen as an ideal that was aspired to in all aspects of daily life. As the above quote reveals, politeness included not only language but also gestures, postures, choice of conversational topics and all kinds of other general behaviours (Langford ; Klein a, b). In this chapter we shall approach the study of politeness in eighteenthcentury English through an analysis of some relevant expressive speech acts, in particular compliments and thanks. One important source for our analysis will be educational handbooks. Books of etiquette and politeness were an important genre throughout the century; they were in great demand and afforded frequent imprints and editions. The author of the above passage is the Earl of Chesterfield (–), a statesman distinguished by his wit and accomplishments, his abilities and integrity of conduct. The handbooks of late eighteenth-century England reveal that elegant diction with premeditated, learned phrasing of the communicative intent was highly esteemed. In addition, we discuss material that comes from new genres of writing in the eighteenth century, that is newspapers and novels. The eighteenth century in England saw a great increase in the number of newspapers. In the Licensing Act lapsed and, as a result, formal censorship of the press ceased. In the first daily newspaper appeared in England, and soon many new newspapers were published. They contained accounts of ceremonial speech acts in public settings. This century, sometimes described as the Age of Sentiment, also saw the rise of the novel, at first in the form of epistolary novels, for example Richardson’s Pamela. The patronage system of earlier centuries was replaced by the commercialisation of book production;
These phrases are used in the description of his character in the preface of the ‘Life of Lord Chesterfield’ (: vii).
Expressive speech acts and politeness
161
for the first time authors could make a living by selling their works to a reading public and were no longer forced to depend on rich patrons. As a result, new topics and new genres developed and novels provided fictional accounts of verbal interactions and of politeness. All these genres provide access to genuine examples of expressive speech acts of the eighteenth century. Although they show certain limitations, they can nonetheless provide us with new insights into politeness as a social practice of the period. Most of our examples come from the last quarter of the century, but we discuss the situation in the eighteenth century against the background of a long diachronic perspective from Late Medieval courtesy to present-day practices. Our aim is to outline some special features of eighteenth-century politeness, and how expressive, inherently polite speech acts reveal the ideology of politeness and how they change over the course of time. Politeness theory and eighteenth-century politeness ideology Brown and Levinson’s () concept of positive and negative politeness is concerned with strategic uses of language to mitigate real or perceived facethreats to the speaker or to the addressee. It has long been recognised that this covers only one specific aspect of what we might want to call politeness. In some languages and cultures this is actually a fairly significant part, while in others alternative aspects are more important. In the wake of Brown and Levinson’s studies, several researchers have described the history of politeness in the English language as a development from positive to negative politeness. Kopytko (, ), for instance, argued that, in his data of Shakespeare’s plays, positive politeness strategies predominate in contrast to the present-day predominance of negative politeness strategies, at least in British English (see also Jucker ). Nevalainen and Raumolin-Brunberg () and Nevala (), on the other hand, argue that there has been an increase in positive politeness (see section below). Di Martino (), who analysed politeness strategies in seventeenth-century didactic dialogues, also argues for an analysis in terms of positive politeness: The society reflected in the dialogues I have considered is predominantly that of in-group positive politeness, oriented towards the addressee’s positive face, and the speaker’s requirement is of satisfying the hearer’s positive self-image with admiration for his qualities, showing approval, seeking agreement, offering and promising, including both the speaker and the hearer in the activities, with the use of ‘we’ or ‘let’s’, giving sympathy and understanding with expressions like: ‘You are welcome’, ‘I’m glad to see you well’. (di Martino : ) However, in more recent research on politeness in the history of English it has become increasingly clear that the notions of face and positive/negative
162 Eighteenth-century English
politeness are more meaningful for Present-day English and its recent history. At earlier stages, on the other hand, politeness is more adequately captured in rather different terms. Kohnen (), for instance, has shown that, on the basis of his evidence, politeness in the sense of face work does not seem to have played a significant role in Anglo-Saxon England. In a Christian setting the concepts of caritas and humilitas were more important, while in the feudal setting of combat and heroic deeds the concepts of loyalty and kinship were paramount. By the time of Geoffrey Chaucer, the French language had had a major influence on English. One clear reflection of this was the new practice of using the plural pronoun ye for single address in order to express respect and politeness (see, for instance, Nathan ; Wilcockson ; Burnley ; Honegger ; Jucker b). In Middle English, as reflected in Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales, for instance, it is the term curteisie ‘courtliness, good manners, courtesy as a moral ideal’ which takes centre stage (see below) and which opens the way for politeness in premodern and present-day England. The eighteenth century in England has been described as the age of politeness and commerce (Langford ), but Langford stresses the dangers of misunderstanding these notions on the basis of present-day connotations of both these terms. It was a century that saw the rise and dramatic enrichment of the middle classes. Commerce, in this context, meant more than just trade; it signified also the new processes of production and exchange which drastically increased the wealth of the middle classes and improved living standards (Langford : ). Politeness was a direct result of commerce. In a feudal society the lower classes could easily be controlled and the relations among the higher social classes regulated by an elaborate code of honour: Politeness conveyed upper-class gentility, enlightenment, and sociability to a much wider elite whose only qualification was money, but who were glad to spend it on acquiring the status of gentleman. (…) Politeness was primarily about the control of the individual at a time of intense enthusiasm for individual rights and responsibilities. (Langford : , ) The same idea of eighteenth-century politeness as Augustan aspiration is advocated by Sell (: ). He emphasises the Shaftesburian underpinnings of benevolism, ameliorism and moral sensibility, and connects the notion of politeness with the metropolitan aristocracy, in contrast with the conservative provinciality of the countryside (see the quotation of Lord Chesterfield above). Elegant and polished manners were epitomised in polite conversation. Watts (b) draws attention to the ideological dimension of politeness in the eighteenth century. Politeness, according to him, was closely associated with polished and refined language use. The higher social classes used it to distinguish themselves from the lower social classes. Admittance to
Expressive speech acts and politeness
163
the higher social status was impossible without the appropriate variety of language (see also Watts ). Klein (a: ) adds the normative aspect: In later seventeenth- and early eighteenth-century England, the term ‘politeness’ came into particular prominence as a key word, used in a variety of settings, with a wide range of meanings. From the first, politeness was associated with and often identified with gentlemanliness since it applied to the social world of gentlemen and ladies. (…) Not all gentlemen were polite since ‘politeness’ was a criterion of proper behavior. The kernel of ‘politeness’ could be conveyed in the simple expression, ‘the art of pleasing in company’, or, in a contemporary definition, ‘a dextrous management of our Words and Actions, whereby we make other People have better Opinions of us and themselves.’ (Klein a: , , italics in original) Eighteenth-century handbooks of etiquette and politeness provide an ethnographic view of polite manners and elegant refinement in speech. The existence of such books in itself does not tell us how people actually behaved and how they spoke, but their popularity provides evidence for a widespread interest in matters of politeness and appropriate behaviour. The following quote reveals that it is ‘a certain manner, phraseology, and general conversation, that distinguishes the man of fashion’ and this manner of speaking and behaving ‘can only be acquired by frequenting good company, and being particularly attentive to all that passes there’ (Chesterfield : ). The quote continues with a passage about inherently polite speech acts and their appropriate wordings to meet the norms of polite society: When invited to dine or sup at the house of any well-bred man, observe how he does the honours of his table, and mark his manner of treating his company. Attend to the compliments of congratulation or condolence that he pays; and take notice of his address to his superiors, his equals, and his inferiors; nay, his very looks and tone of voice are worth your attention, for we cannot please without a union of them all. […] Saying to a man just married ‘I wish you joy’; or to one who has lost his wife, ‘I am sorry for your loss’; and both perhaps with an unmeaning countenance, may be civil, but it is nevertheless vulgar. A man of fashion will express the same thing more elegantly and with a look of sincerity, that shall attract the esteem of the person he speaks to. He will advance to the one, with warmth and cheerfulness, and perhaps, squeezing him by the hand, will say, ‘Believe me, my dear sir, I have scarce words to express the joy I feel, upon your happy alliance with such and such a family’, &c. to the other affliction he will advance more slowly, and with a peculiar composure of voice and countenance, begin his compliment of condolence with, ‘I hope, sir, you will do me the justice to be persuaded, that I am not insensible of your unhappiness, that I take part in your distress, and shall ever be affected where YOU are so.’ (emphasis in original, Chesterfield : –)
164 Eighteenth-century English
This particular book, The Beauties of Chesterfield: or, Remarks on Politeness, and of Knowing the World: Containing Necessary Instructions To complete the Gentleman and Man of Fashion, is a posthumous collection published in the last quarter of the eighteenth century, but the development towards the ideology of politeness described above had started well before Chesterfield’s time. A century earlier, Youths Behaviour, or Decency in Conversation Amongst Men declared that ‘EVery Action done in the view of the world, ought to be accompanied with some sign of reverence, which one beareth to all who are present’ (: ). This is the first of thirty-four short rules of behaviour, specifying the appropriate and inappropriate body movements and facial expressions, how coughing was to be avoided, spitting and other rude manners restricted or abandoned, and so on. Table manners received a great deal of attention. The advice takes the form of maxims and requests, for example ‘It is an uncivil thing to stretch out thine arms at length, and writhe them hither and thither’ (: ); ‘Turn not thy back to others, especially in speaking; Jog not the Table, or Desk, on which another doth read or write; Lean not upon any one; pull not him by his Cloak to speak to him; push him not with thine elbow’ (: ). Similar maxims and general advice for better behaviour can be found more than two centuries earlier in Late Medieval courtesy literature. Instruction in the Babee’s Book, Stans puer ad mensam and other courtesy books taught good manners and appropriate behaviour to aristocratic children and acquired a somewhat broader readership among the aspiring upper-middle classes, who were eager to improve their status in the world (Nicholls ). The same kind of enthusiasm to rise in the world can be found in the eighteenth-century handbooks of polite behaviour. What distinguished eighteenth-century politeness from the courtesy of the Late Medieval and Renaissance models was perhaps that its main emphasis was on a much wider layer of society as the middle classes had become more prominent and accounted for a larger part of the population. Thus, more sophisticated means of regulating interaction between people had to be found. Politeness in eighteenth-century England, therefore, should be seen as a much wider notion in which face concerns in the modern sense played a different and less important role. Politeness was very directly linked to the ideology of the higher social classes, to the art of pleasing in conversation, the art of behaving properly in the right social circles and therefore to an ideology of dominance and of standard English. The picture that emerges of politeness in the eighteenth century can be summed up with the words of Lord Chesterfield (: ): ‘True politeness consists in making every
Takada () finds a wealth of evidence for German eighteenth-century politeness culture even in a dictionary of the everyday language (Johan Christoph Adelung’s Grammatischkritisches Wörterbuch der deutschen Mundart [A critical grammatical dictionary of German dialect], Leipzig – and –).
Expressive speech acts and politeness
165
body happy about you.’ The distinction he makes is minute: he writes about genuine politeness, with emphasis on modesty and respect towards others. These qualities make the difference between politeness as a form of sociability and as mere ceremoniousness. The latter kind could cause tension, as pointed out by Klein (a: ), and provide a source of ridicule in drama comedy, or sprinkle ironical remarks more widely in the literature.
Forms of address as an indication of politeness
The concern with questions of politeness is in evidence throughout the eighteenth century, as can be recognised in a representative quotation such as the following: Now, if it is necessary to attend so particularly to our Manner of speaking, it is much more so, with respect to the Matter. Fine turns of expression, a genteel and correct style, are ornaments as requisite to common sense, as polite behaviour and an elegant address are to common good-manners; they are great assistants in the point of pleasing. (Chesterfield : ) Titles were very important, and the number of people describing themselves as ‘Mr’ or ‘Mrs’ increased dramatically in the second half of the eighteenth century (Langford : ). The designation ‘Madam’ also ceased to be an exclusive title: By the reign of George III ‘Mr’ and ‘Mrs’ were widely accepted in towns, and increasingly in the countryside, as the automatic entitlement of anyone who owned property, hired labour, or simply laid claim to a degree of rank and respectability. This debasement of gentility is one of the clearest signs of social change in the eighteenth century, the mark of fundamental transformation. (Langford : ) In correspondence, address lines were important. Letters became more private in the eighteenth century: they were no longer written by dictation, and postal services became more reliable, making it possible to keep the contents of letters more private. With these developments, the amount of positive politeness increased with the use of nicknames, terms of endearment and other more intimate forms of address, while the amount of negative politeness, as shown in formal terms of address, decreased (Nevalainen and Raumolin-Brunberg ; Nevala ). They argue that there was an increase in positive politeness in their data of address terms and subscription formulae in English family correspondence from the Late Middle English period to the seventeenth century. Rules for the correct use of titles and address forms can be found in handbooks. A New Academy of Compliments ([] ; seventeenth edition) contains detailed advice. The book was frequently reprinted between the
166 Eighteenth-century English
middle of the century and , and the norms and models set down in such handbooks must have been influential: but the chief Thing we must take care of herein, are his Titles, to give every one such as befit him, or he desires to have; otherways our Letters are not well accepted of, and breed Distaste. When we give a Title to a Prince, write, To his Highness, Prince – When to an Ambassador, To his Excellency, &c, When to a Lord, To the Honorable &c. When to an Archbishop, To the most Reverend Father in God, &c. When to a Bishop, To the Right Reverend, &c. When to the inferior Clergy To the Reverend, &c. When to a Mayor or Alderman, To the Worshipful, &c. To other Persons we write, To Mr. N together with their Titles, Office or Profession, […] Whe [sic] we write to our Inferior, and such as are of mean Quality, we use Abbreviations in the Superscription, in this Manner: To Master N. or To M. N. (emphasis in original; A New Academy of Compliments [] : –) Tieken-Boon van Ostade (d) provides an analysis of eighteenth-century politeness in the, increasingly voluminous, private correspondence. She uses the occurrence of abbreviations, such as Nov ‘November’, Abp. ‘Archbishop’, Br ‘brother’, ye ‘the’, ym ‘them’, yt ‘that’, as an index of politeness, in particular in the comparison of letters from one author to different recipients. The time-saving function of abbreviations stands in contrast to their facethreatening potential; in the above quote it is explicitly stated that they were used for addressing ‘our Inferior’. According to the study by Tieken-Boon van Ostade, abbreviations are avoided in more formal situations and in situations in which politeness concerns are more important. Her observations provide a microanalysis of the contradictory motivations at work in choosing the appropriate form of address in actual practice; in contrast, our focus on handbook quotes is at the macro-level of politeness ideology.
Inherently polite speech acts: compliments and thanks
Inherently polite speech acts work for the benefit of the addressee. The speech acts in focus in this chapter express appreciation or gratitude about something related to the addressee, that is compliments and thanks. They are neighbouring and partly overlapping speech acts; others in the same group include congratulations, invitations, greetings and farewells. The other end of the scale is occupied by inherently impolite speech acts, including insults and various other
ESTC gives Scougal, Henry (–) as the author of the book. The first edition is recorded from , and it seems to have become very popular as numerous subsequent editions in the following decades are listed. In addition, there are also handbooks with slight variations of the title such as The Academy of Compliments, The Best and Completest Academy of Compliments, The Delightful New Academy of Compliments, etc. See Leech (: , ) for politeness scales.
Expressive speech acts and politeness
167
forms of verbal aggression (Jucker and Taavitsainen ; Taavitsainen and Jucker ). Inherently polite speech acts can be seen as enhancing the positive face of the addressee, because they show the speaker’s appreciation of the addressee. In Holmes’s () terms they are positively affective speech acts. However, for both compliments and thanks we have to ask whether the speech act in its modern form is identical in the scope of its function with that of its eighteenth-century precursors. We will argue that we have to distinguish between the eighteenth-century ceremonious compliment, with a much wider range of functions, and the personal compliment which survives into Present-day English. Perhaps this development illustrates changes in the notion of politeness: from eloquent formulations based on the observance of rules of elegant diction and decorative ceremonies, to more personal comments on looks and possessions, but it is also a fact that the two types already existed side by side at the dawn of the eighteenth century. For thanks, the functional differences may be smaller in some respects as the core function is similar, but the illocutionary force indicating device (IFID) (thank you, thanks) has become routinised and the short forms have gained a range of additional functions that seem to be later developments (see below). Our examples show that compliments included thanks, and the field of inherently polite speech acts was not divided in the way it is now. . Compliments In Present-day English, compliments usually come in the form of what we would like to call the ‘personal compliment’. Holmes (: , : ) provides the standard definition of this speech act: A compliment is a speech act which explicitly or implicitly attributes credit to someone other than the speaker, usually the person addressed, for some ‘good’ (possession, characteristic, skill etc.) which is positively valued by the speaker and the hearer. This type of compliment is addressed to a single person, and it expresses a positive evaluation about some assessable good that is directly related to the addressee of the compliment. We want to distinguish this type of compliment from the earlier form, defined by the Oxford English Dictionary as: a ceremonial act or expression as a tribute of courtesy, ‘usually understood to mean less than it declares’ (J.); now, esp. a neatly-turned remark
In our previous study on the topic (Taavitsainen and Jucker ), the best example of the personal compliment in our extensive historical material came from the year from CED, in a dialogue between two newly married ladies. They pay compliments on looks and garments as social strokes to create intimacy and rapport, before the more serious discussion on moral issues begins.
168 Eighteenth-century English
addressed to any one, implying or involving praise; but, also applied to a polite expression of praise or commendation in speaking of a person, or to any act taken as equivalent thereto. (OED, ‘compliment’) We call this the ‘ceremonious compliment’ (see also Taavitsainen and Jucker ). In Present-day English it is the personal compliment that seems to be what people expect when they talk about compliments. The ceremonious compliment still exists in phrases like ‘With compliments’, which has acquired the meaning of ‘Formal respects, remembrances, greetings’. In the eighteenth century the ceremonious compliment was far more important. It extended to all aspects of polite interaction and courteous interaction (see Taavitsainen and Jucker : section , Beetz , ). .. Handbooks Handbooks of etiquette and politeness provide a rich source of ceremonious compliments in private settings, including compliments of introductions and greetings, as well as compliments of invitation and of accepting invitations. The handbook A New Academy of Compliments, for instance, contains a section called ‘Wit’s Improvement’ with instructions for various social situations, for example how to become acquainted upon accidentally meeting a person, containing two alternative model conversations. The turns begin with polite address and expressive speech acts, descriptions of the state of mind, joy and pleasure at the event of the encounter. All model conversations contain ceremonious and elaborate diction, in accordance with the norms of the period. The idea was for the readers to study the conversations carefully in order to memorise them: the polite phrases could have had a wider currency as useful acknowledgements or uptakes after introductions and greetings more generally, and many of them fit the descriptions of compliments of both types as given above. The first model discussion, our example (), consists of three turns in negotiation of interpersonal relations to reciprocal satisfaction, paying compliments and returning them, with thanks to follow: ()
A: Sir, I esteem it a singular Happiness, to have met with such good Company, seeing I have by this Means obtained the Favour of being acquainted with you. B: Sir, if the same Chance which brought us together in this place, did likewise render me capable of making my Friendship as useful to you as your Goodness is pleased to esteem it acceptable, I should think myself doubly happy; but till Opportunity presents itself, I shall pray you to accept of the good Will.
Examples include ‘Compliment of the Day to you!!’ (Spam email from ‘Mr Uche DSP Alamieyeseigha’, February ); ‘With the compliments of the season’ (Email from Sylvester Osu to the LAGB distribution list, November ); ‘With compliments’ (Email with a conference announcement from Dik Baker, Secretary of Societas Linguistica Europaea, January ).
Expressive speech acts and politeness
169
() A: Sir, Your Merits oblige me highly to esteem your Acquaintance, and desire your Love. And my Intent was to make tender of my Service to you. But now I am doubly indebted to you, for preventing my Purpose, by proffering your affection. I humbly thank you for it, and desire you reciprocally to accept mine. (A New Academy of Compliments [] : ) Similar short conversations for different occasions are given for a whole range of communicative situations like paying a visit, invitation to dinner, acceptance of the invitation, end of dinner speeches, and so on. Comments on personal appearances or characteristics are found as well, for example ‘Others seem glimmering Stars when compared with you, who outshine them like bright Luna’, ‘You are the Glory of your Sex, and bear the Palm of Beauty from them all’, ‘The Music of the Spheres is not so ravishing as your Voice’ or ‘Not the Mountain Ice congealed to Chrystal, is more bright than you’. Acknowledgement of success in creating good relations could be phrased as ‘Sir, I must enrol you in the Catalogue of my dearest Friends’. Some of the sentences represent the other side of the witty duel with words, providing second turns to compliments, such as ‘Your Tongue is as smooth as Oil with courtly Flatteries’, or even somewhat pejoratively as ‘Your Language is more dubious than an Oracle’ or, with disapproval ‘Sure Winter dwells upon your coy Lips, the Snow is not more cold’ (above examples come from A New Academy of Compliments [] : –). An edition from three years earlier () contains further astrological references such as ‘Sir, you are the Star I reach at’. The currency of such compliments was wide, as witnessed by some comedies of the time, for instance. Comments on women’s looks include ‘Madam, Mortal eyes are never to be satisfied with the wonders of your beauty’ (all examples from The New Academy of Complements [] : –, ). .. Compliments in newspapers The ceremonious nature of eighteenth-century compliments is reflected in the way in which early newspapers use this term. Direct speech is, at least for the early decades, extremely rare (Jucker a). But nevertheless the term ‘compliment’ (sometimes spelt ‘complement’) is often used, and it reveals a great deal about the development of this term and its associated speech act in the history of English. An investigation of the data in the Zurich English
Such compliments belonged to the stock of complimentary phrases. An example from the seventeenth century contains the following sequence: Sir Timothy Compliment. You are Lady, the Starre of your Sex. Lady Amorous. No truely, I am but a Meteor that soon goeth out (Literature Online (LION); Newcastle, Margaret Cavendish, Duchess of, Love’s adventures (), p. .). An eighteenth-century example plays the compliment down: Dam. Fair Nymph, that dost outshine the brightest Stars – Phil. Your Compliments are all thrown away upon me. You sail against the Wind, I assure you (LION; Bellamy, Daniel, The rival nymphs (, ), p. ).
170 Eighteenth-century English
Newspaper Corpus (ZEN, see Fries and Schneider ; Lehmann et al. ), which spans the period from to , reveals that the term ‘compliment’ initially referred exclusively to acts of diplomacy. Compliments were an important part of international politics. Representatives of a state paid appropriate compliments to the dignitaries of another state. Royals, the Pope, or other members of the nobility were often the recipients of compliments. From the examples, it can be deduced that these compliments were always used as an expression of good wishes and good intentions. Particularly frequent were compliments on the coronation of a new king or the accession of a dignitary to a high office. Welcome compliments were also frequent, as were compliments of condolence and thanks (see below). Some relevant examples from the seventeenth century are given below: ()
() ()
By these and our Artillery-Company (all in one Habit) he was Conducted hither, and Received, and Complimented by the Mayor and Aldermen in their Scarlet Gowns and Robes at the Guild-Hall. (, lgz) d Instant the Queen of Spain began to receive the Compliments of Condoleance for the Death of the late King. (, lgz). Cardinal Gabrieli, is by the intercession of the Popes Sister, dispenced with from his journey to his Residency, for which favour he has paid his Compliments, and is now Treating for the Purchase of the Lands of Fiano, belonging to Prince Ludovisio. (, lgz)
The above examples deal with compliments that were paid to a newly elected Pope. They report a welcome compliment, a compliment of condolence and a compliment of thanks. Compliments in the modern sense are not mentioned in any of the articles contained in the sections of ZEN covering the seventeenth and the early part of the eighteenth century. However, during these decades newspaper reporting was largely restricted to foreign news (see Studer ), and therefore the absence in the corpus of other meanings of the term ‘compliment’ is not very strong evidence for the absence of such meanings altogether. The year , just after the turn of the century, contains an unusually great number of such compliments of diplomacy. In particular, the compliments of good wishes on the accession to a high office, and the compliments of the type given in the examples above are attested with numerous examples in this extract of the ZEN corpus. In later years the term ‘compliment’ is used for other types of polite speech encounters as well. In the early years of the eighteenth century compliments are frequently conferred, according to these newspaper reports, on birthdays of royals, on weddings of dignitaries and on the occasion of the births of their
References to extracts from the Zurich English Newspaper Corpus (ZEN) follow the codes given by the retrieval software at http://es-corp.uzh.ch/.
Expressive speech acts and politeness
171
offspring. The news reports are written as third-person narratives and they pay detailed attention to the correct form of titles (see address terms above): () On the th Instant his Royal Highness enter’d into the th Year of his Age, and receiv’d the Compliments of the Chief Officers of the Court, and all the Foreign Ministers on that Occasion (, lgz). () Just now we hear, that the Courier from Spain, who arrived here on the th, brought the Consent of his Catholick Majesty and Council, to the Marriage of the Prince of Asturias, with Mademoiselle de Montpensier, Daughter of the Duke of Orleans, and the Marquis de Biron will set out the first Opportunity to Compliment their Catholick Majesties and Prince thereupon, in the Name of his Royal Highness (, fpt). () All the Cardinals at Rome have been one after another to compliment the Pretender on the Birth of his Son (, wjb). However, it is interesting that, even in the early years, there are occasionally either hints or very explicit indications that compliments are not always to be trusted: () Yesterday arrived some Deputies from two Provinces, and to day others from three more, whose business was to assure his Majesty that they would not appear in the Field in Arms till they knew against whom they were intended, and that here were none among them who had any thoughts of opposing his Majesty; but this is lookt on but as a complement, in regard the major part of Great and Little Poland are already in Arms, and wait only an advantage to give battel (, cui). () That far from making a Mystery of his Intentions as the Queen’s Rescript says, he explain’d them in a clear manner to the Marquess de Botta, who answer’d them only by uncertain Assurances of that Princess’s Friendship; so that we were oblig’d, more than once, to give that Minister to understand, that mere Compliments were not the Business in hand, but a very serious Affair (, dpt). In () the protestations of the deputies from the provinces are obviously not trusted: they are reported as being looked upon merely as compliments. In () the same point is made. Uncertain assurances given by the Marquess de Botta are seen as insufficient: ‘mere compliments’ are not enough to do business. .. Compliments in novels In novels we can see both the ceremonious compliments of diplomacy and those of refined and polite interactions in private settings. The following examples are taken from the Gothic novel The Monk by Matthew Lewis. It
172 Eighteenth-century English
was first published in , and thus it represents the very end of the period in focus: () Here She intended to throw a tender and significant look upon Don Christoval; But, as She unluckily happened to squint most abominably, the glance fell directly upon his Companion: Lorenzo took the compliment to himself, and answered it by a profound bow (The Monk, p. ). () He saluted me with politeness; and having replied to the usual compliments of introduction, He motioned to Theodore to quit the chamber. The Page instantly with-drew (The Monk, p. ). () He saluted me without speaking; I returned the compliment, observing an equal silence (The Monk, p. ). () The marriage was therefore celebrated as soon as the needful preparations had been made, for the Marquis wished to have the ceremony performed with all possible splendour and publicity. This being over, and the Bride having received the compliments of Madrid, She departed with Don Raymond for his Castle in Andalusia (The Monk, p. ). The compliments of the extracts (), () and () are compliments of greeting and introduction. It is noteworthy that gestures are just as important as speech. In fact, in () and in () the compliments consist of gestures only. Extract () relates the encounter of Don Lorenzo and Don Christoval with Leonella and her niece Antonia in the Cathedral of Madrid. The two cavaliers do not know the ladies, but they are attracted by the beauty of the younger of the two. The compliments that are exchanged here are not more than an inclination of the head or a glance. In extract () the narrator, Don Raymond, Marquis de las Cisternas, relates an encounter with a stranger. The opening of the conversation is described as ‘the usual compliments of introduction’. This testifies both to the ceremoniousness of the speech act and to its ritual form. It is not a creative and original speech act but one that is entirely appropriate and expected in this particular situation. In extract (), which takes place only a few days after the first introduction described in extract (), the narrator and the stranger meet again. The compliment of greeting and the reply are both acted out in silence and with gestures only. In extract () the compliments referred to are more like the diplomatic compliments reported in the newspapers. The Marquis is very much a public figure, and his bride receives the compliments of the city on their happy marriage. .
Thanks
In Present-day English, as in our historical material, the speech act verb ‘compliment’ is rarely used performatively, that is to perform the speech
Page references of extracts from Matthew Lewis’s The Monk are to the electronic version available at http://lion.chadwyck.co.uk/.
Expressive speech acts and politeness
173
act that it names, but it is used to report occasions on which compliments had been paid or to negotiate the illocutionary force of a speech act in interaction. In contrast, the speech act verb ‘thank’ is often used performatively, as an illocutionary force indicating device (IFID), to the extent that it has become a routinised speech act with formulaic expressions (Aijmer ). Thanking is an inherently polite speech act, and its force can be maximised by boosting, using intensifying adverbs, or by prosodic devices (Leech : ; Aijmer ). We can add address terms to this list of maximisers used in the eighteenth century, as they often accompany this speech act as a focusing device to bring the speech act the adequate level of politeness. In speech act terms, thanking expresses gratitude and appreciation, as specified by a set of rules, defined by Searle (: ) as: Propositional content rule: past act A done by H (hearer). Preparatory rule: A benefits S (speaker) and S believes A benefits S. Sincerity rule: S feels grateful or appreciative for A. Essential rule: Counts as an expression of gratitude or appreciation. The feeling of gratitude is the core function of thanks, but in Modern English it has developed other functions as the short forms thank you and thanks are used in marking segments of interaction. In such exchanges, the semantic meaning of gratitude has given way to the pragmatic meaning, for example of closing a phone conversation or finishing a transaction at a service counter. The subjective meaning of expressing the feeling of gratitude has developed into an interpersonal meaning in these discourse locations. These modern functions, like thanks as a discourse marker and signal in closing sequences, compliment-thanking, well-wish-thanking and proposal-acceptance, have been studied by Aijmer (), and her study provides an excellent reference point for diachronic developments. In a historical study using the Corpus of Early Modern Dialogues – (CED), the complexity observed in Modern English could not be found: the function of thanking was to express gratitude (Jacobsson ). Likewise in our eighteenth-century material, the speech act of thanking is connected with the feeling of gratitude, sometimes overlapping with the feeling of obligation. Manifestations of the speech act mostly occur as longer turns (see below). The motivation or ‘object’ of thanks is most often a benefit that one has already received, and thanks serve as an acknowledgement thereof. The norms of behaviour demanded thanking for appropriate reasons, and such speech acts were essential in polite society. It was important to observe these rules and dress the acknowledgement in appropriate terms. Thanking may have been required in different contexts from today, but the handbooks do not give explicit advice on when to use it; it must have been common
Thus the development is in line with the order of language change from subjective to intersubjective meanings as verified in processes such as discoursisation, pragmaticalisation and grammaticalisation (see Brinton ).
174 Eighteenth-century English
knowledge, learned by observation and imitation (see Lord Chesterfield’s advice above). In Modern English, in the category of ‘immaterial things’, ‘a proposal to do something (e.g. to close the conversation)’ provides the most common context for thanking (Aijmer : ); in CED such examples were not found (Jacobsson ). In contrast, our material provides evidence of this motivation (see below). Like compliments, thanks require a second part. Modern conventions differ from earlier practices, and in this point our observations are in line with those of Jacobsson. Alternative phrases for thanking can also be found, and even indirect and ornate ways to express gratitude and appreciation are frequent in our eighteenth-century materials. Expressions with ‘oblige’ are often intertwined with thanks, and this mode of expressing gratitude requires some further consideration. The Oxford English Dictionary gives the following definitions and examples: Obliged (adj. .) has the meaning ‘bound by law, duty, or any moral tie, esp. one of gratitude; Oblige (v. . a. trans. (in pass.)). To be indebted or grateful to a person or (occas.) a thing’. Some relevant examples from the eighteenth century are: G. ROBERTS Four Years Voy. , I told them, I was very much obliged to them for their Good-will. Gentleman’s Mag. / The republick of letters is infinitely obliged to M. Coste for the pains he has taken. The phrase b. much obliged: ‘I am very grateful’, ‘thank you very much’, is also found in the eighteenth century: J. O’KEEFFE Farmer II. ii. Col. Dor.: Well, I’ll speak to him. Jem.: Much obliged – here he is! We did not encounter the short form in our material, but there are several elaborate phrasings of thanks and indebtedness quoted in the examples below. It seems that these passages with ‘oblige’ serve mostly as acknowledgements of material favours, and meet the requirements of appropriate phrasing. The speech acts of thanking and acknowledging an obligation seem to overlap in these contexts, but the overlap is only partial and separate meanings are more common; the borderline of these neighbouring speech acts is fuzzy (see Jucker and Taavitsainen ). .. Thanks in handbooks A collection of thanking phrases with varying strengths of gratitude expressions and other compliments are found in The New Academy of Compliments ([] ). The influence of French court culture is obvious in these witty turns as mediated, for example, in Molière’s plays, which at this time were in great demand. Thanks are expressed in elaborate terms such as ‘Sir, should I not render you thanks for your many favours, I should die of a deep impatience’,
Ludwig XIV (–). Adaptations of Molière’s (–) plays appeared in English at the beginning of the eighteenth century, e.g. The Amorous Widow, based on Molière’s George Dandin, was printed at least seventeen times between and under slightly
Expressive speech acts and politeness
175
‘Sir, your goodness hath forced me to a silence that I am not able to render you sufficient thanks for so great a favour’, and ‘Sir, you are so highly generous, that I am altogether senceless’. The compliments contain acknowledgements of favours and obligations, and many of the more indirect ones would count as thanks in the modern sense as well, for example ‘Sir, your bounties have been shour’d upon me with such excess, that I am uncapable of a Complement’, ‘Sir, the Ocean’s not so boundless as the Obligations you daily heap on me’, ‘You overcharge me with too great a Favour, in your condescending to pay me a Visit’ or ‘Farewell, fair Regent of my Soul, you still oblige my Gratitude’. The transactional aspects are very strongly present, and these turns are always addressed to someone superior in the social hierarchy; an inferior can never ‘oblige’ a superior (Bryson : ). Terms of address are prefixed to these phrases, to enhance the appropriate level of politeness. Handbooks such as A New Academy of Compliments ([] ) contain model letters for various occasions, including letters of thanks. They are fairly general in nature, and thus flexible to be adapted to various occasions. Example () is interesting for present purposes as it directly ascribes thanks to the category of compliments and upgrades the contents by assuring that the expression of gratitude is coming directly from the heart: () Sir, Confessing you have obliged me with a very good Grace, and so perfectly, that I shall remain indebted to you all my life, I would to GOD some occasion would offer itself, which I might employ in your Service, thereby to witness, that as your Favours been extreme, I will attempt all Extremities to revenge myself. These are no Discourses of Compliment, my Heart dictates to my Pen all that my Pen writes to you, with Assurance that I will not long unprofitably bear the Quality of, Sir, Your most humble Servant. (A New Academy of Compliments [] : ) The following example of a model letter of thanks shows how humiliative discourse is intertwined in the above-mentioned ‘Discourses of Compliment’. This passage is very much in line with the genre of prefaces and dedications of early printed books where the virtues of the patron are enhanced and the author downplays his own merits with eloquent diction. The pattern is exactly the same in this letter, and shows that the social practice had wider applications in the period: () Sir, I Know not in what Terms to give you Thanks for the Favours which your generous disposition has been pleased to bestow upon me. I am
different names. Adaptations and translations of other plays were also frequent. ECCO (Eighteenth Century Collections Online) gives hits for items connected with Molière. The beginnings of several other model letters of thanks also contain ceremonious phrases and rely on the same alternation between praise of the recipient and humiliation of the self.
176 Eighteenth-century English
so unfortunate an Orator, that I am out of all hope to acquit myself that Way. It sufficeth me to put you in Mind of the Passion which I have to your Service, persuading myself, that the Remembrance it will excite in you, shall supplicate for the Fault of Incapacity; and that, considering the Ardor of my Zeal, rather than the Beauty of my Discourse, you will content yourself with my Disability, and that I assure you once again how perfectly I am, Sir, Your most humble Servant. (pp. –) Answers to the letters of thanks provide the required second turn, and continue in the same vein. Here, again, the word compliment is mentioned, and the passage displays a dexterous use of the first and second person pronouns: () Sir, Your Compliments have put me in a very ill Humour; I cannot write to you but in Choler, since you sue me as a Stranger, as appears by the Superfluity of your Ceremonies and unprofitable Thanks. It seems you have wholly forgot the absolute Power that your Merit has obtained over me. (p. ) The style of writing was neither peculiar nor new to the eighteenth century. A handbook of the previous century, called The Wits Academy (), contains an even more elaborate formulation for a letter of thanks, entitled ‘A Letter full of Complements’: () Most worthy Friend, I Being so infinitely obliged to you for those innumerable favours which you from time to time have been pleased to confer upon me, in common gratitude can do no less but make an humble acknowledgement in token of my great thankfulness for those unmerited kindnesses; having no other way to retaliate them at present but by telling you, that your unworthy Servant will be always ready at your command to obey and serve you to the very utmost of my poor power and ability, my daily prayers … (The Wits Academy : ) .. Thanks in newspapers: ZEN In a similar way, expressions of gratitude are intertwined with other polite turns of interaction in early newspaper materials. The ceremonious nature of the transactions is obvious. The titles (which also served as correct terms of address with deference) are carefully recorded in their appropriate forms. The earliest example comes from and contains an expression of gratitude in elaborate terms: () The Lord Commissioner brought into Parliament a Letter from his MAJESTY, signifying the great satisfaction his MAJESTY had
Expressive speech acts and politeness
177
taken at their Proceedings and how sensible he was of their good affections in so clear an asserting of his Prerogative; wherein also his MAJESTY calls upon them, that a General Act of Oblivion and Free Pardon may pass upon all, except such as the Parliament shall except, for which they all desired their most humble and hearty thanks should be returned to His MAJESTY. (, kin) Examples from the eighteenth century are similar. They refer to the speech act of thanking, for example how subjects expressed their gratitude to the sovereign in a hierarchical society, but no exact wordings are given: () May it please your Grace, WE Her Majesty’s most Dutiful and Loyal Subjects the Commons of Ireland in Parliament assembled, return our humble and hearty thanks to your Grace, for your Excellent Administration in this Government, and for your being the happy Instrument of obtaining so many good Laws for the Ease, Benefit, and Satisfaction of the Subjects of this Kingdom. (, pmn) ‘Address of thanks’ seems to have been a formalised part of a ceremonial compliment, a speech act required at certain occasions. There are several occurrences: () Mr Speaker Reported also, That at the same time he presented the Address of thanks of this House to his Grace the Lord Lieutenant for his Excellent Administration, and particularly for his being instrumental in obtaining so many good Bills for this Kingdom; which Address is as followeth. (, pmn) () At the same time the Speaker of the House of Commons presented their Address of thanks to his Grace, for his most Excellent Speech to both Houses; and this Day the House of Lords ordered their Address to his Grace on the same Occasion, to be printed. (, fpt) A more elaborate phrasing is found in an extract from , asking for permission to present thanks, with an acknowledgement of gratitude. The subscription is the same as commonly found in letters and seems to have spread to oral use as well, as Jacobsson (: ) recorded it among responses to thanks in the dialogue corpus. His material included instances in which the gratitude expression is boosted with an expression of deference: () Having had the Honour of being unanimously approved of at a General Meeting held here this Day to represent this County in the ensuing Parliament, We beg leave to return our sincere thanks for that Approbation; and entreat the Favour of your Votes and Interest on the Day of Election, which shall be ever most gratefully acknowledged, by GENTLEMEN, your most obliged, And obedient humble Servants, CHARLES GORE, JACOB HOUBLON. (, lcr)
178 Eighteenth-century English
Similar elaborations are found from the last decade of the century, here in an advertisement from a fan manufacturer: () E. SUDLOW returns his sincere thanks to the Nobility, Merchants, and the Public in general, for the very liberal support he has received; and begs leave to inform them that they will always find a great Assortment of Fans, Fansticks, Mounts, c. wholesale, retail, and for exportation. (, mcr) The verb ‘oblige’ occurs frequently in these formal and ceremonious accounts of interactions. Examples of the type ‘I am, Sir, your obliged humble Servant’ or ‘Which will much oblige Your most humble Servants’, are common (see letter subscriptions above): () Gentlemen, AT the earnest Request of our Friends, we have determined to join our Interest at the ensuing Election, and therefore jointly request the Favour of your Votes and Interest, which will greatly oblige, GENTLEMEN, Your most obedient, and most devoted humble Servants, JAMES CREED, WILLIAM MAYNE. (ex ) (, lep) () The inhabitants of Lambeth-Hill present their compliments to said gentlemen, and would have been much obliged to them had they ordered the Hill to have been repaved, instead of patching it up in places; and they apprehend they have the greater right to expect it, as many of the bye lanes leading from Thames-Street have been long since done. (, lev) .. Thanks in novels A lexical search of thank in The Monk () revealed that the word occurs in expressions of gratitude, but it is not used in any of the modern discourse functions (see above). In addition to the core meaning, phrases such as Thank Heaven! and God be thanked! occur in emphatic, affective language use in exclamations, with mild swearing functions, in accordance with other religious expressions of oaths and swearing in the early periods (see Hughes ). The reasons for gratitude are mostly favours, but an example of a new kind is found in the passage quoted below where the speech act of thanking provides a response to an offer of a future action. According to Aijmer () such offers are commonly responded to with thanks in Modern English: () ‘I know him intimately well. He is not at present in Madrid, but is expected here daily. He is one of the best of men; and if the lovely Antonia will permit me to be her advocate with him, I doubt not my being able to make a favourable report of her cause.’ Antonia raised her blue eyes, and silently thanked him for the offer by a smile of inexpressible sweetness. Leonella’s satisfaction was
Expressive speech acts and politeness
179
much more loud and audible. Indeed, as her niece was generally silent in her company, she thought it incumbent upon her to talk enough for both: this she managed without difficulty, for she very seldom found herself deficient in words. ‘Oh, Segnor!’ she cried; ‘you will lay our whole family under the most signal obligations! I accept your offer with all possible gratitude, and return you a thousand thanks for the generosity of your proposal. Antonia, why do you not speak, child? While the cavalier says all sorts of civil things to you, you sit like a statue, and never utter a syllable of thanks, either bad, good, or indifferent!’ (The Monk, p. ) The turn is complicated. The feeling of gratitude is expressed several times with repetitive phrases with somewhat different wordings, and the scolding for the lack of thanks with an everyday stereotypical phrase ‘bad, good, or indifferent’ further enhances the eloquence of the thanks. The examples in The Monk indicate that thanking in the eighteenth century was performed with perhaps common stock phrases but in longer and more elaborate turns. The short forms with the mere IFID are not found in our material; nor does CED contain them: () ‘Pursue, then, your design. I will accompany you to-morrow night, and conduct her myself to the house of the cardinal. My presence will be a sanction for her conduct, and prevent her incurring blame by her flight from the convent.’ The marquis thanked him in terms by no means deficient in gratitude. Lorenzo then informed him, that he had nothing more to apprehend from Donna Rodolpha’s enmity. (The Monk, p. ) Other examples indicate elaborate formulations such as: ‘The petitioner returned him thanks with every mark of gratitude’ (p. ) and ‘She thanked him with respect and gratitude for his former visits’ (p. ). Address terms are found in connection with the speech act of thanking; here the thanks are given in the minimum appropriate form of the period, which is a full sentence: () ‘But before I take this step, Ambrosio, give me your solemn oath never to enquire by what means I shall preserve myself.’ He did so, in a manner the most binding. ‘I thank you, my beloved. This precaution is necessary; for, though you know it not, you are under the command of vulgar prejudices. The business on which I must be employed this night might startle you, from its singularity, and lower me in your opinion. Tell me, are you possessed of the key of the low door on the western side of the garden?’ (The Monk, pp. –) The above is a rare example of the actual wording of thanks, and it is noteworthy that an address term is appended to it. Most often the passages give
180 Eighteenth-century English
indirect evidence of the formulations. ‘Oblige’ occurs in context with favours, as above, and the meanings come near to thanking, but are not identical: () ‘… power to oblige me in a business which I have much at heart, makes me very anxious to find you still deserving my esteem.’ ‘Lorenzo, you transport me! No greater pleasure can be given me, than an opportunity of serving the brother of Agnes.’ ‘Convince me that I can accept your favours without dishonour, and there is no man in the world to whom I am more willing to be obliged.’ (The Monk, p. ) () ‘That is more than I can pretend to tell you. All my knowledge of her history comes from an old tradition in this family, which has been handed down from father to son, and is firmly credited throughout the baron’s domains. Nay, the baron believes it himself; and as for my aunt, who has a natural turn for the marvellous, she would sooner doubt the veracity of the Bible than of the bleeding nun. Shall I tell you this history?’ I answered, that she would oblige me much by relating it: she resumed her drawing, and then proceeded as follows in a tone of burlesqued gravity: Being now left alone with my deliverer, I took the opportunity of thanking him. (The Monk, pp. –) () ‘However’, added he, smiling, ‘I think that these lines do you no discredit. Your versification is tolerably easy, and your ear seems to be just. The perusal of your little poem upon the whole gave me much pleasure; and if it is not asking too great a favour, I shall be highly obliged to you for a copy.’ (The Monk, pp. –)
Conclusions
Recent publications have argued that politeness in the history of the English language developed from a largely positive politeness culture to a largely negative politeness culture. It has also been pointed out that this development was accompanied in many domains by a development from public to private. Inherently polite speech acts were important in interaction between members of polite society. Simple formulations such as ‘I wish you joy’ were not enough; more elaborate phrasings were required if one were to pass as a well-bred, cultivated person with the behaviour of a gentleman. Handbooks give first-hand evidence of the norms and highlight the eloquent phrasings of these speech acts. The accompanying behaviour, with the right gestures and facial expressions, is also explained in them. Newspapers of the period mostly report what took place in the public world among diplomats and the highest classes of society. In contrast, novels give us glimpses of more private spheres of interaction, even if our examples are fictional accounts in the gothic vein. More comprehensive studies including other genres and other
Expressive speech acts and politeness
181
private domains of language use are needed for a more complete account of the topic. Both compliments and thanks have developed over the course of centuries. Compliments have become more private and personal. Thanks have acquired more interpersonal functions besides the core meaning of expressing the subjective feeling of gratitude. We intend to examine these developments in more detail in a future study. We can conclude with a reference to Lord Chesterfield, a leading figure of politeness education in the eighteenth century. The main points of his teachings were posthumously versified by an anonymous lady, which testifies to the wide appeal and popularity of his works. The framework of the teaching is in accordance with the long tradition of wisdom literature, from father to son, and shows how norms and rules of behaviour are passed down from one generation to another. The following passage deals with a confession: the author of the most influential etiquette books of the eighteenth century was striving for honour and fame in his life, and he achieved both. He was successful, as he knew how to live up to the expectations of polite society. The following passage deals with the power of appropriate and polished behaviour, including the application of inherently polite speech acts, as a confirmation of the efficacy of politeness as contained in Chesterfield‘s rules: These maxims, thro’ life, I wou’d have you pursue, I practis’d them once, and now hand them to you; Successful they were, they brought honours and fame, For still I had art to preserve my good name; The fine gentleman’s etiquette (: )
10
Variation and change in eighteenthcentury English R IC H A R D W. BA I LEY University of Michigan
Discussions of regulating (and regularising) English began in earnest with the restoration of the monarchy in and the intellectual renaissance that followed it. In the Royal Society, a committee was formed to consider the language, but its deliberations were interrupted by the Great Fire of London. Of course a whole variety of issues were raised for the committee’s consideration, but the principal one concerned making English sufficiently copious to enable serious intellectual work to be conducted in it. Thus, the task was to clarify the vocabulary. To these intellectuals the problem was to explore the relation between words and ideas, and making the language correct was very much a subsidiary goal. John Wilkins, a Royal Society member, even thought it might be possible to create a universal language in which every conceivable idea might be expressed in every language. The problem he hoped to solve was not correctness but the necessity of removing ambiguity (see Bailey ). About , however, things began to change. In , with the Battle of Blenheim, Britain (and its allies) defeated the French who had been both militarily and culturally the centre of European civilisation. England rose to the opportunity to assert sovereignty, including sovereignty over its own language. Latin soon ceased to be the language of learning; French began to diminish as the international language of diplomacy. English could now be the language of both. At the beginning of the eighteenth century many intellectuals were convinced of two principles: that it was possible to arrest language change; and that any language widely dispersed socially and geographically must fracture into dialects that would eventually become separate languages. In thinking about these matters, they had before them the example of Latin which, in their view, had reached a high degree of perfection in Augustan times and declined with the gradual collapse of the Empire. Remnants of Latin were to be observed in French and the other Romance languages, but they were only shadowy descendants of earlier perfection. Jonathan Swift observed the ‘ruinous corruption’ of both Latin and French, but Greek had not suffered the same fate, despite a millennium of its use and its dispersal to distant colonies. So such decay was not necessarily inevitable. English, Swift thought, 182
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English
183
might achieve similar lasting perfection if the proper ameliorative steps were taken. Like many powerful ideas, neither of these is quite dead, though we can date their decline with some precision. In when Samuel Johnson published his Plan for his dictionary, he believed that he might by means of it be able to ‘fix’ the language. By the time he had finished, in , he knew this idea was futile: ‘these were the dreams of a poet doomed at last to wake a lexicographer.’ But he believed that it would be possible to slow the inevitable progress of decay: ‘It remains that we retard what we cannot repel, that we palliate what we cannot cure.’ His successors sometimes liked to imagine that Johnson had realised his dream of keeping English from changing, or at least from changing very much, but of course supplements and revisions were required, even in Johnson’s lifetime, to keep his dictionary current because English continued to evolve and expand (see Kolb and DeMaria ). In the nineteenth century, the issue resolved itself into the need to capture change as it had occurred – and continued to occur – rather than arresting it. The second idea – that English would split into separate languages – lasted longer. Testimony from abroad suggested that the collapse into unintelligible varieties was already taking place. In a traveller reported from the Caribbean that: few Gentlemen or Ladies of Jamaica knew how to write, or even spell truly to the End of a common Letter: The very Propriety and Accent of the English language were quite corrupted in this Island, by conversing so much with Mulatoes and Negros, for they were so very closely intermixed, that they suckled, eat, drank, and lay together; wherefore their Tempers and Manners may be very easily accounted for. (Houstoun : ) A quarter of a century later, another reporter noted some distinctions. Describing African-descended slaves, he wrote: They give their dogs as many names as a German prince; or more frequently call them by a whole sentence, as, Run-brisk-you-catch-’um-good, &c. The Africans [i. e. recent arrivals from Africa] speak their respective dialects, with some mixture broken English. The language of the Creoles is bad English larded with the Guiney dialect, owing to their adopting the African words, in order to make themselves understood by the imported slaves; which they find much easier than teaching these strangers to learn English. The better sort are very fond of improving their Language, by catching at any hard word that the Whites happen to let fall in their hearing; and they alter and misapply it in a strange manner; but a tolerable collection of them gives an air of knowledge and importance in the eyes of their brethren, which tickles their vanity, and makes them more assiduous in stocking themselves with this unintelligible jargon. (Long , : f.)
184 Eighteenth-century English
Reports like these fuelled the idea that English, when spread over great distances, would break apart. This idea had remarkable staying power. In the great historian of English, Henry Sweet, predicted that American, Australian, South African and other kinds of English would become mutually unintelligible. He was the last of the intellectuals to have argued this position. The core beliefs of the early eighteenth-century pundits turned out to be wrong: language change could not be arrested; English did not split into different languages. But there were good reasons for thinking so, and during the century English crept almost imperceptibly toward uniformity. Uniformity, however, is not the same thing as standardisation: the institutionalisation of one variety as exclusively meriting prestige. Uniformity, as will be shown below, meant that dialects were more alike but individuals remained various in their usage (as judged by Present-day English). One obstacle to thinking sensibly about English was that these early eighteenth-century intellectuals had almost no idea about the history of their language. Joseph Addison believed that the -eth ending to thirdperson singular indicative verbs was more euphonious than -(e)s. Walketh was a more pleasant sounding word than walks. He did not know that, except for special circumstances, the words spelled with -eth had been pronounced with -(e)s for more than a century. He also regretted that -’s had taken the place of his in the English of earlier times: Purchas’s Pilgrimage instead of Purchas his hat. In response to Addison’s view, Elizabeth Elstob, the first scholar to write a grammar of Old English, pointed out that the –’s was merely a reflex of the Old English genitive inflection and that to suppose that children’s clothing was a damaged form of children his clothing was preposterous. The most prominent seem to have been the least informed; they applied a few general principles and complained, among other things, that consonant clusters were jarring; that monosyllables disfigured the language. They wished for a language that had never been (see Bolton for a selection of these views).
Demographics and language change
To understand what happened to English in the eighteenth century, we need to begin with a fundamental demographic fact: in the course of the century English gained more speakers and spread itself more widely than any of the other languages of Europe.
Prejudice against sibilants was long-lived. William Marshall described, in , a dialect in East Yorkshire where genitive -’s was entirely omitted. ‘This excision of the genitive termination gives great additional beauty and simplicity to the language, doing away almost entirely the declension of nouns, and lessening that hissing which is so disagreeable to the ears of foreigners, and which is undisputably one of the greatest blemishes of the English language’ (quoted by Görlach : ).
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English
185
From to the population of the England and Wales increased from about six million to something over nine million. In Scotland there were about . million people, most of them living in the Scots-English- speaking Lowlands. In Ireland, the inhabitants grew in numbers from . million to . million. Overall the population of the British Isles increased by about per cent. Far more dramatic was the increase in population in what would become the United States. In the number of people in the American colonies was estimated to be about ,; in the number had increased to ,, million, most of them immigrants from Britain and most English speakers. Substantial minorities in North America came from Germany and from Africa, and both groups settled in places where, for a time, their home languages were maintained. Pennsylvania was a favoured destination for Germans, and, in the course of the century, they established institutions that sustained their language – especially in churches and in the publication of books and newspapers. Africans came involuntarily as slaves and were concentrated in the south. For them, assimilation was enforced by mixing groups with different language backgrounds, and by the end of the century there were many African-descended English speakers, including substantial numbers of freed slaves, who participated in the cultural life of English (see Jones and Allen ). Thus, worldwide, the number of English speakers increased from about nine million to something over twenty million. By the end of the century, there were more people speaking more kinds of English than ever before (see Mitchell ; Dodd ). A variety of factors contributed to the assimilation of other languages to English – for instance, the ‘clearances’ of the Scottish highlands following the uprising hastened the migration of Gaelic speakers to the cities and to North America. Gaelic did not long survive in Glasgow or Nova Scotia, and English took its place. In Ireland the population of the pale (the eastern part of the island) grew through migration from rural areas and with that movement there was an increase in English among Irish people. London and the ports in the west of England and Scotland attracted and assimilated foreigners as international trade flourished.
New words from new worlds
Within the British Isles borrowings from minority languages of the country continued to enter English. Scotland provided crofter ‘farmer’ and kailyard ‘kitchen garden’; Ireland produced paddy ‘Irishman’ and shebeen ‘public house’ and idioms influenced by Gaelic were termed Irishisms (), a coinage based on the seventeenth-century category Scotticism. Though the Cornish language was moribund (and would lose the last of its native speakers at the end of the century), it provided eighteenth-century borrowings of
186 Eighteenth-century English
mining terms: costean ‘a shallow mining pit’ and scove ‘a rich lode’. Romany, the language of English Travellers, gave mauley ‘hand, fist’ and yack ‘a watch’. Doubtless there were many more such loan words on the boundaries where bilinguals interacted but records of them are scant. The major sources of loan words in eighteenth-century English came from Greek and Latin, languages that had been plundered by intellectuals since the Renaissance. Many historians have alleged that the eighteenth century was a period with less innovation in vocabulary than the centuries before and after it. Such a conclusion is an artefact of statistical information drawn from the Oxford English Dictionary, though it was known from the very beginning of its publication that the eighteenth century was vastly underrepresented in the database upon which it was based. Revision of the dictionary now underway has added thousands of first uses to the eighteenth century, and the introduction of words of Greek origin (sometimes mediated by Latin or French usages) number from to in each year divisible by ten in the century (, , … as measured in July ). Many of these were words rarely used or restricted to technical fields (especially medicine), but some are familiar in Present-day English: neurosis, octopus and platypus. The range of words from Latin sources by decade ranges from to in each of the tenth years (from the OED in progress) and includes, as did Greek borrowings, large numbers of technical terms. Nowadays familiar words from the period include memorabilia, migratory and petal. As the OED revision continues, these numbers will greatly increase, but it is now clear that the view of the eighteenth century as not receptive to classical borrowings is wrong (see Nevalainen : ). English speakers travelling abroad learned new languages, and their contact with them helped increase the variety of borrowings in English. Fashionable people made French fashionable, and Lord Chesterfield, the politician later remembered as a conduct writer when his letters to his illegitimate son were posthumously published, introduced these French words in the s: debut, gauche and sang-froid. It seemed as if English people did not know how to behave in their own language. Chesterfield felt obliged to borrow the word etiquette to fill the gap. Horace Walpole, the connoisseur and dilettante, coined the term Frenchism in to ridicule such borrowings. In America new words from Native American languages came into use, both as adapted borrowings and as translations: muskellunge, teepee, war-dance. These were termed Americanisms in . Imports from Italy brought into English imbroglio ‘confusion’ and a great variety of musical terms as performances of Italian compositions became increasingly popular.
Most of these words are found in the portions of the alphabet that have been revised since the so-called ‘second edition’. Interestingly, the words with Greek etymons number only in both and and and in and respectively, and it might be argued on this (slender) evidence that the eighteenth century was more prone to Greek borrowing than the periods immediately prior and subsequent to it.
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English
187
Emergent sciences borrowed words from German: cobalt, nickel, quartz. From the Dutch in North America came Yankee. Loanwords flooded English at an astonishing rate, though then, as now, the survival rate of these novelties was very low. Much depended on accidents, most particularly the inclusion of borrowings in dictionaries. In the early part of the century Lady Mary Wortley Montagu had eloped (sensationally) and accompanied her new husband on a diplomatic mission to Turkey. Her letters home, subsequently published as a book, fuelled the rage for orientalism that became increasingly important in English domestic culture during the century. She was remarkably curious and entered a harem dressed in Turkish women’s clothing. To succeed in these endeavours, she needed what she called an interpretess (one of her lexical innovations), a Greek woman able to translate on her behalf. Among the borrowings introduced to English through her was feridgi () ‘a Turkish woman’s ceremonial dress’. This word survives in the lexical record only because it was used by others and recorded in the OED. Lady Mary eventually made herself fluent in Turkish and translated poetry from it into English. These same letters also introduced the words she spelled asmack ‘veil’, atlerdan ‘hippodrome’ and ingri ‘pearl’, but they were not treated as entry words by the dictionary and hence do not have the same claim to being English words as feridgi. Nonetheless, these were words used in an English context in letters read by people with no knowledge of Turkish, and thanks to Lady Mary some of these words came to be known and used. Lady Mary recognised that English was merely one language in a multilingual world, and she mocked her countrywomen ‘who set up for such extraordinary Geniuses upon the credit of some superficial knowledge of French and Italian’. Knowledge of foreign languages was not common among English intellectuals, and when Samuel Johnson made his only trip to the continent, he was unable to speak French but conversed with the savants in Latin. In Constantinople Lady Mary wrote: I live in a place that very well represents the Tower of Babel … My Grooms are Arabs; my footmen French, English, and Germans; my Nurse an Armenian; my Housemaids Russians; my Janizarys Turks, that I live in the perpetual hearing of this medley of Sounds, which produces a very extraordinary Effect upon the people that are born here. ( March ; Halsband , : ) The ‘effect’, she reported, was that very young children spoke three or four languages. London could not produce a comparable diplomatic household with so many languages spoken in it. More English speakers in more places meant that the vocabulary became more varied. The convicts transported to Botany Bay in Australia at the end of the century provided the foundation for a new kind of English: kangaroo and wombat both arrive in English from Australia in the eighteenth century.
188 Eighteenth-century English
Some of these were borrowings; others adaptations of existing words. A mob of sheep, in Australia, took over the semantic turf of flock and herd. The independence of the American colonies gave English in America a flavour that it had not had before with new meanings for such political words as constitution and senate. In George Puttenham declared that good English was to be found in London and the districts within a sixty-mile radius. (He also allowed that the gentry in more remote places might also speak it.) In the eighteenth century good English spread over the globe and up and down the social scale. Jamaica, for instance, was a rich source of new expressions, some of them of African origin (such as obeah [] ‘magic’, nyam [] ‘to eat’.) Others still familiar in English include ackee () ‘a fruit’, begonia (), cayenne (), jerk () ‘to prepare sun-dried meat’. Whether or not they were well known in England, these are very much English words, and it is likely that visits by West Indian planters gave them at least some currency in London. In the lowlands of Scotland people spoke an English quite different from that of the south-east of the island, and in the second half of the century they were ridiculed for it. Knowing of Samuel Johnson’s aversion to Scots, James Boswell introduced himself by apologising: ‘I do indeed come from Scotland, but I cannot help it.’ Boswell even made efforts to affect the fashionable speech of London, but most Scots who stayed home, including the most prominent ones, saw no reason to regard their speech as any less worthy than that of southerners, nor found any reason to change it. Typical of this indifference to London fashion was Boswell’s father, a high court judge in Edinburgh (with the judicial title Auchinleck) who examined a youthful witness in a capital case in which his son James represented the accused: JUSTICE-CLERK.
Boy, do you go to the Church? – to the Kirk? BOY. I gang to the meeting house. AUCHINLECK. You know that God made you? BOY. (Stupid) AUCHINLECK. Wha made you? BOY. (with a shrill voice). God! AUCHINLECK. You ken it’s a sin to lie? BOY. Ay. The judge’s wise shift to Scots English produces the desired result: the boy claims to know truth from falsehood. Both the justice-clerk (offering kirk as a substitute for church) and Auchinleck (using wha for who and ken for know) use a kind of English that would never be heard in an English courtroom (see Bailey : ). In Scots English there were hundreds of expressions not used (or known) in the south. Some of these were the technical terms of the Scottish legal
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English
189
system (such as commonty and heritable); others were words cognate with southern norms but differently spelled and pronounced (for instance, amang ‘among’ and shairp ‘sharp’). Still others would have bewildered English people – for instance sunk ‘a seat made of peat turfs’ and wallie ‘fine, excellent, pleasant, beautiful’. (The Dictionary of the Scots Language, now available online, makes it easy to see just what words and senses had Scottish meanings in the eighteenth century.) What would become the United States not only grew in population but also in distinctive English expressions during the century. Some were of African origin (such as chigger [] ‘a tiny biting insect’). Others were compounds or phrases made from familiar English elements but applied in new circumstances: for instance, buckshot, copper belly ‘a water snake’, hunting camp, minuteman and moosewood. German did not contribute many expressions; that influence would become apparent in the following century. But overshoe () was one transparent loan translation that became current in the eighteenth century. With the independence of the American colonies, new political institutions produced words with American meanings: congressman (), Independence Day (). The merger of distinctions As English diffused, it became more various, and not until the nineteenth century does uniformity begin to take hold. Though the rise of purists and the explosive growth in the publication of grammar books had some influence on this development, far more important was migration. Within Britain, people moved and moved often. The enclosure of the commons forced people from the land, and the development of factories attracted them to new ways of life, particularly in the districts around Liverpool and Manchester in the west of England. In the statistical account of Scotland at the end of the century, clergymen reported that many outsiders had changed the nature of parish life, particularly in the communities surrounding Glasgow, especially the Gorbals which became an enormous slum and a linguistic melting pot at the end of the century and continuing into the next. Frequent population movement levelled dialects. In Samuel Johnson visited northern Scotland and the Hebrides, and he reflected that a distinctive Scots dialect was vanishing. ‘The great, the learned, the ambitious, and the vain, all cultivate the English phrase, and the English pronunciation, and in splendid companies Scotch is not much heard, except now and then from an old Lady’ (Johnson : ). Two years later John Collier, author of Lancashire dialect verses published under the name Tim Bobbin, expressed similar sentiments. Travel, education and visits from people outside the region had changed things linguistically: ‘the People within the few Years of the Authors Observation to speak much better English’ (quoted by Görlach : ). Visitors to the North American colonies regularly praised the
190 Eighteenth-century English
purity and uniformity of the English heard there. But dialects did not disappear; the expressions distinguishing them changed.
Regulating English
Observers were not content to look with pleased indifference at the evolution of a more uniform and better English. Instead, they felt that efforts needed to be made to hasten improvement. Jonathan Swift, in , had proposed an Academy to rule authoritatively on questions of correctness, and this idea is noted in nearly all histories of English as an index of anxiety about the state of the language and a plan to do something about it. His pamphlet is known in part because Swift was one of the luminaries of English writers in the early part of the century, and his Gulliver’s Travels, in a highly sanitised form, is a book still read by children. A far less famous literary figure, John Oldmixon (), wrote a spirited reply to Swift’s proposal that deserves to be better known, and in it he derided the idea that a few Tory politicians and aristocrats had any claim to exercise authority over English. Britons were too independent to kowtow to any such body, however constituted, and Swift – the Proposal was one of the few of his publications to carry his name – was hardly to be commended as the organiser of better English because of his use of scatological expressions and vulgarity. Yet if an Academy was not the answer, there still remained the question of what was to be done about the state of the language. The solution, many thought, lay in grammar, though just what it was about grammar that might lead to improvement was elusive and controversial. In general, there were two themes in these discussions. One was concerned with reason and regularity, that is, grammar as a branch of logic and thought. The other was based on elegance and propriety. Horace, the Latin poet, had commended the best speakers as the models for the best usage, and eighteenthcentury thinkers were eager to embrace that programme, not least because they had all read Horace’s Latin works or at least Dryden’s translations of his Odes. These two principles often clashed. Consider, for instance, the alternatives hisself and himself. Regularity suggests that the former should be employed since it is analogous to myself and herself – that is, possessive pronoun + self. Propriety and frequent use by educated people, on the other hand, holds up himself as the best usage since it is characteristic of the ‘best authors’. Eighteenth-century English suggests that this choice was not entirely settled. Here are a few examples of hisself:
The reader is bewildered in mazes … and at last finds hisself just where he set out. (Ritson : ) Our blessed Savior hisself … described the whole space of time. (Whitaker , )
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English
191
Father Jove his self willed, that the matter of cultivating the ground should not be easy. (Alexander , ) Now, can any judicious Christian imagine, that neither Christ hisself, in the institution of the supper, nor his Apostle, in restoring its decayed purity, should hint at observances which both knew to be connected with it? (Mason )
The most popular and influential grammarian of the eighteenth century, Robert Lowth, had this to say about hisself: ‘Himself, themselves, seem to be used in the Nominative Case by corruption instead of his self, them selves’ (Lowth : ; quoted by Sundby et al. : ). Lowth apparently originated this complaint, and his explanation was reproduced in most of the grammars following him. They demonstrate the conflict between regularity (which calls for all these pronouns to follow the same pattern) and propriety (most good authors do not use hisself ). Without any historical foundation – hisself was in English use since the fifteenth century – Lowth assumes that himself and themselves are ‘corrupted’ forms of an earlier and more regular state of the language. But he nonetheless recommends them. The first English grammars were written so the young could acquire knowledge that would assist them in learning Latin, and by the eighteenth century it was generally accepted that English was not a defective version of Latin – defective in that it lacked endings marking gender or case – but a language with its own distinctive grammatical properties. For the most part, however, eighteenth-century grammarians were not very successful at describing it, but a zeal for including grammatical instruction for all children grew apace. Between and just over grammars of English were published; between and , . Many of these were basic primers including orthoepy (or pronunciation) and identification of individual word classes, but grammatical counsel was also supplied, increasingly so in the later part of the century. Lowth provided the classical formulation of the ‘rule’ for the so-called double negative: ‘Two negatives in English destroy one another, or are equivalent to an affirmative’ (quoted with discussion by Gilman : ). Here is another wonderful example of the conflict between reason and propriety. The greater number of negatives the more emphatically negative the assertion, as is clear in the sentence quoted by Lowth from Richard Bentley, the great classical scholar of the eighteenth century: ‘I cannot by no means allow him, that this argument must prove’ (Gilman : ). Lowth managed to persuade his readers, especially grammarians who copied from his Grammar, that multiple negation was not reasonable and that therefore propriety ought to forbid it. Multiple negation has never gone away, of course, but its reputation has greatly diminished since the eighteenth century. Grammatical proscriptions in the eighteenth century increased in number, but there was very little in them to suggest a system or even unifying themes.
192 Eighteenth-century English
It was no great feat to claim victory over dying usages, like hisself and multiple negation, but quite another to undertake to reform widespread divisions in usage among the good and the wise. One example of this variety lies in the choice of that, which, who(m) and zero as relative pronouns. These options are illustrated by the following: that: The P[rocurator] G[rimini] ask’d me once if a young man that was here was of your Family, bearing the same name. (Halsband , : ) which: ‘I now begin with the first part of the Prayer, viz. the Preface, which is, as I said, a solemn Invocation of God to whom we direct our Prayer. Our Father which art in Heaven &c.’ (Blackhall : ) ‘We christened two of our landlord’s children, which might have remained infidels all their lives, had not we carried Christianity home to his own door.’ (Byrd and Ruffin []: ) who: I owe a great part of them to Grimini, who is in the first Esteem and Authority in the Republic. (Halsband , : ) whom: ‘Now, my dear children, whom I am going to send into the World, for the Instruction, and Good of these poor ignorant people.’ (A. F. , : ) ‘He … had many other great places under the late Emperor, to whom (they say) he was much a Favourite.’ (Halsband , : ) zero (contact clause): ‘This is the very man [Ø] I saw in my dream.’ (Account : ) In all of these relative clauses the antecedents are personal, and all of them (with the exception of which, perhaps) are available in the same way to writers and speakers today. In the eighteenth century, however, the frequency and structural role of these pronouns underwent significant change. In Richard Steele, Addison’s collaborator, published a ‘petition’ in the weekly Spectator in which the personified pronouns who and which complained: ‘We are descended of ancient Families, and kept up our Dignity and Honour many years that Jacksprat THAT supplanted us’ (Spectator , : ). As an aside, they complained about which in ‘Our Father, which art in Heaven’ which they said was a ‘misuse’. Once again, Steele’s innocence about the history of English made him look foolish; which and who were
Other choices, especially the which, had become obsolete and were rare in eighteenthcentury English: ‘for he was a noble captain as ever was, the which I pray Jesus have mercy on his soul’ (Bailey et al., Machyn’s Chronicle , ––.) The King James Bible has which universally for proper names (see Hewett ). In sixteenth-century English, which appeared with human antecedents about a third of the time; in the seventeenth century, it dropped to about a tenth, thus making the King James Version of the Lord’s Prayer (‘Our Father, which art in Heaven’) increasingly anachronistic (see Rissanen : ). The first use of who in a Book of Common Prayer authorised in the Anglo-American Communion seems to have been introduced in .
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English
193
relative newcomers to English, and in Wycliffe’s fourteenth-century translation of the Bible, the prayer began ‘Our fadir that art in heueyns’. Having decided on the basis of reason that who(m) was properly personal and which better than that, Addison set about altering his usage when he put the Spectator into book form (see Wright : –). And he did so both with personal antecedents (like those in the examples quoted above) and with impersonal ones as well: who and which often replaced that. On theory alone, he turned daily journalism into more enduring books, and the books showed what, by his lights, was greater propriety. However, this change had little influence, and that increased in use throughout the century with personal antecedents (see Hewett ). The evolution of the relative pronouns is more complicated than I have so far reported. There are differences in gender and style. Non-restrictive relative clauses, in formal writing, are more likely to have which and who(m) than to have that. But in genres akin to speech (such as drama) both that and Ø relatives increase in proportion in the early eighteenth century (Wright : ). Despite Steele and Addison’s powerful influence on eighteenth-century life, their prejudice against ‘jacksprat’ that seems not to have taken powerful hold. Lowth’s grammar notes the alternation of that and who(m) with personal antecedents but he makes no pronouncements beyond saying that ‘perhaps’ the latter is to be preferred to the former. The that–who(m) question is scarcely noticed by the other grammarians who followed Lowth; just three of them mention the usage and then only to point out that two parallel clauses ought to have the same relative rather than different ones (Sundby etxal. : ). Toward the end of the century, Frances Burney’s Evelina () could use all three principal relative pronouns with person: who: the person who explained all the devices (.) for a person who can behave in such a way (.) that: I saw not one person that I knew (.) a person that wants a room (.) Ø: with no other person [Ø] I have seen (.) [the town] does not, now, contain one person [Ø] I ever wish to see again (.) pray a’n’t you the person [Ø] I saw at the play one night (.)
As Jespersen, apparently the first to have first noticed these editorial changes, wrote: ‘In accordance with this own theory, Addison, when editing The Spectator into book form, corrected many a natural that into a less natural who or which’ (, pt. .: ). An exception is George Harris’s book: ‘The word THAT ought never to be used as an Article relative; it would therefore be improper to say, I know the Man, that preached Yesterday – The proper Expression would be – I know the Man, WHO preached Yesterday’ ().
194 Eighteenth-century English
In modern English that has again grown increasingly common: ‘relative clauses with that freely occur with animate heads, especially in conversation. In fact, for many head nouns referring to humans, that is almost as common as who in conversation’ (Biber et al. : ). Zero has also increased: ‘He’s one of the most unpretentious people [Ø] I’ve met.’ In such cases like this one, the zero relative occurs – per cent of the time (Biber et al. : ; see also Olofsson .) As is commonly the case, the views of opinion leaders (such as Steele and Addison) made little difference to the direction of language change.
Class trumps rank
What did make a difference began about mid century and can be summed up in the distinction of rank and class. As Hester Piozzi wrote in her notable British Synonymy, published in , rank ‘depend[s] upon kingly breath’ (). In other words, titles of nobility derive from the monarch, but are not, in her opinion, nearly as important as descent. Whether it is from kingly breath or descent, however, rank is conferred by the accident of birth (or remarkable accomplishment) and descent is entirely accidental. Class, however, is not fixed at birth but is fluid. One may remain in the class to which one is born (for instance ‘Ploughman Poet’) or may rise or fall to another class (for instance ‘Bard of Ayrshire’). (Robert Burns began as the former and ended as the latter.) Like regional origin, class might be altered by changing one’s speech, and Thomas Sheridan – a lecturer on elocution and author of the first dictionary devoted solely to the pronunciation of English words – knew what might be done and argued its cause. He believed that ‘Ignorance, Immorality, and false Taste’ might be overcome by instruction in English and in ‘the art of speaking.’ This work, British Education (), laid out how these laudable goals might be achieved. With the substantial increase in the numbers and duration of schools in the later eighteenth century, Sheridan’s ideas took hold, though it would not be until well into the nineteenth century that compulsory elementary education was mandated for all. Resistance to democratic education was widespread and intense. Sheridan’s ideas might do very well for ‘Persons of high Rank and exalted Station’ but they would only spoil the people who had only class to recommend them and not rank. These words come from an anonymous reply to British Education, and the author explains that, once a serving maid had learned to pour tea for the gentry, she was unfit for useful occupations. Education for young men would produce even greater social damage: That something like this would be the Case of the midling Gentry, were all to be shaped by Mr. Sheridan, and aim afterwards to a fashionable Manner, is very probable from what we daily may observe of plain, sensible, agreeable Companions, chearfully open, and naturally wellmannered, whilst they follow Nature, become insufferably affected, and
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English
195
despicably impertinent, after a Winter’s Conversation among People of Fashion in Town, and so ashamed of the good Sense they had, as to study Folly for the rest of their Lives. (Letter : ) Views like these were widespread and powerful. It was all very well for people of high rank and exalted descent to speak however they might choose to do so. But people bent on self-improvement through language bred discontent and put society in peril. However much someone like the author of A Letter might yearn for stability, linguistic change accelerated toward the end of the eighteenth century. In part, this change took place because of the emergence in numbers and power of the ‘midling Gentry’. By the time of the French Revolution they were sufficiently numerous and influential to prevent a similar revolt from taking place in Britain, since rank was marginalised and class ascendant. They were also, as noted above, increasingly mobile, particularly in the steady stream of Britons emigrating to North America and, at the end of the century, to points in the southern hemisphere. Levelling of English through migration, both social and geographical, changed the language. Individual variation Understanding the profound cultural and linguistic changes that took place over the course of the century requires attention to English in the middle decades. In her analysis of the English of Boswell’s London Journal, Esther Sheldon reached an important conclusion: ‘educated eighteenth-century English varied in the usage of one individual much more than does educated English of today’ (: ). Boswell’s English is of interest not because he uses expressions that would later be viewed as solecisms but because he uses both the favoured and the disfavoured usages. Thus, he uses it is and it was with a plural complement; exceedingly poor and exceeding good company; I and me in sentences such as ‘This was a day eagerly expected by Dempster, Erskine, and I’; he run off and he ran off ’ (examples passim from Sheldon ). In modern English we may expect variability between genres or between formal and informal styles, but we do not expect that the same document by the same writer will show such a variety of usages. Studies of small samples simply do not reveal that the same writer in the same genre in the same era may well employ different forms of the same expression. Consider these examples from the informal writings of Frances ‘Fanny’ Burney and Benjamin Franklin. Alongside expressions that would emerge as ‘standard’ in the nineteenth century, Fanny Burney (–) uses with equal propriety ones that would be vilified: Pronoun usage it shall have nothing to do with you and I (.)
196 Eighteenth-century English
He told Mrs. Davenport and me (.) Past participles he threw the luster down and it was broke (.) so it was broken (.) Treatment of indirect objects he sent it me (.) he recommended it to me (.) Between with two or more objects between a psalm, a minuet, and a country dance (.–) a conversation began between her and Mrs. Hamptden (.) Choice of forwards and forward to inquire what was going forwards (.) nothing has gone forward but picture-sitting (.) Benjamin Franklin’s letters and occasional writings show the same variety: Pronoun usage Between you and I, the late Measures have been, I suspect, very much the King’s own, the sole Question between you and me Past participles it has not even broke the white-wash I have broken many Phials by the Electric Strokes Treatment of indirect objects He … gave it me as his sincere Opinion I thank you much for the Newspapers you have from time to time sent me. unless an equal Number are sent to me here from America Between with two or more objects between the Lightning, thunder, and luminous appearance in the Waves between that Lake and Lake Superior Choice of backwards and backward the rivers ran backwards to the mountains the same saving in goods going backward Individual variety was not merely a matter of pronunciation. Johnson acknowledged variability in pronunciation in the grammar prefaced to his Dictionary: ‘Most of the writers of English grammars …
The website for the Franklin papers makes it difficult to cite the particulars of the work being quoted. However, it is not difficult to locate these passages using the search function: http://www.franklinpapers.org/franklin/framedVolumes.jsp.
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English
197
seem not sufficiently to have considered, that of English, as of all living tongues, there is a double pronunciation, one cursory and colloquial, the other regular and solemn’ (Kolb and DeMaria : ). In this observation he was considering the allocation of word stress in polysyllables, and his own marking of stress, along with those of other lexicographers, was very variable indeed. Acceptable might be stressed on the first or second syllable; caravan on the first or third; contemplator on the first, second, or third (see Görlach : ; for more extensive lists of stress variants, see MacMahon : –). Johnson occasionally recorded multiple pronunciations: acádemy ‘anciently, and properly, with the accent on the first syllable, now frequently on the second’. By the end of the century academy was thoroughly established. Some words fluctuated. Johnson recommended capillary over capillary but both pronunciations have remained current until the present day. Almost coexisted with almost until the early nineteenth century when the latter became the pronunciation of choice. Not only might one hear different people stressing these words in different ways; one might well hear different pronunciations from the same person. Sometimes variant pronunciations had different social values, and part of the steady movement toward uniformity characteristic of the century established and enforced pronunciation norms. Elisions and contractions took many forms, some as euphemisms and oaths: ’sblood (< ‘by God’s blood’), ’sheart (< ‘by God’s heart’), zounds (< ‘by God’s wounds’). These, along with bloody as an intensifier, became increasingly taboo during the century. But they could also be a source of humour: FARQUHAR Love & [a] Bottle II. ii, Zoons is only us’d by the disbanded Officers and Bullies: but Zauns is the Beaux pronuncation (sic) (OED, s. v. zounds). Elisions and contractions were frequently employed in seventeenthcentury English (and earlier), and they took many forms in both prose and verse: th’earth, t’other, ev’n, sov’reign, and many more. At the beginning of the eighteenth century, however, there commenced what has been called ‘the war upon contractions’, a battle begun by Addison and Swift in the first decade of the century. Most ensuing grammarians found space to attack them, arguing that they were improper or imprecise (for example, ambiguous, confused, unclear). For all the fervour of the purists, contractions endure in educated spoken English.
The bullies maintain the conservative and Northern pronunciation of the diphthong; the beaux anticipate the modern one (see Lass : –). ‘Contracted forms are rarely subjected to criticism in seventeenth century works’ (Sundby et al. : ).
198 Eighteenth-century English
Consider how usage varied within the writing of one eighteenth-century individual. These examples from the diary and letters of Fanny Burney (–): your father don’t come today (Burney –, .) he does not know (.) if you do not make haste (.) you’ve got so much humour (.) You have not, I hope, been angry (.) we’ll dine at the Lyells (.) we will talk of it no more (.) I’m afraid we shall not get you to London (.) I’m glad of it (.) I am not surprised (.) she’s quite in a rage (.) she is lively and entertaining (.) ‘Then it’s you,’ cried Mrs. Thrale’ (.) ‘tis never for their wisdom (.) it is evident (.) ‘twill be worth your while (.) But I hope it will be all over by the time the candles come (.) In modern English contracted and full forms are stylistically nuanced with contractions seen as cursory and colloquial and the full forms as regular and solemn. These stylistic norms were not so clearly influential in eighteenthcentury usage, nor does emphasis seem to be an important factor in their selection. (Full forms are now usually emphatic; contracted ones less so.) Burney was simply drawing on English that permitted the freedom to use whatever variant one might choose without fear of puristic censure.
Fluid and not fixed
English in the eighteenth century underwent a remarkable transformation: diverse at the beginning, far more uniform at the end – at least in written documents. Most changes took place through the unprecedented migration of people, whether social or geographical. In the mid century individuals seem to have varied their own speech unselfconsciously. Much happened, and this fascinating century deserves more attention than it has so far been given. Individuals were more likely to use a great variety of usages, not because they could not tell the difference between ‘standard’ and ‘non-standard’ but
Both didn’t and doesn’t were widely current in the eighteenth century: Addison had used them. They do not, however, appear in the volume (–) used to extract examples from Burney.
Variation and change in eighteenth-century English
199
because the difference was not important to them. Writers such as Lady Mary, Frances Burney, James Boswell, and Benjamin Franklin were far more interested in expressing themselves that in expressing themselves correctly. They were typical of many other writers, and Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade (2003b) has distinguished ‘printer’s English’ (something approaching uniformity) and ordinary English which, as shown above, could be remarkably varied. And it was not merely ordinary people; the purists themselves, including Johnson and Lowth, felt free to write English in any way that they chose – sometimes one way, sometimes another. While some have attempted to link variants to the intimacy between writer and reader, the variety seems to me to reflect pure exuberance and a willingness to accept variation as normal.
11
Variation in sentential complements in eighteenth- and nineteenth-century English: a processing-based explanation T ER ESA FA N EG O * University of Santiago de Compostela
Introduction Sentential complementation, that is the situation that arises when a subordinate clause functions as an argument with respect to a governing element or head, as in ‘I think that she will arrive tomorrow’ or ‘Calling the police would be a mistake’, has been a prolific area of research for many years among English historical and non-historical linguists; see, among many others, Warner (), Fischer (), Mair (, : –), Duffley (, , ), Fanego (, a, b, c, , a, b, ), Rohdenburg (, ), Los (), Rudanko (, , ), Miller (), Vosberg (), and De Smet (). Yet there are still many aspects of the complicated system of English sentential complements that have not been documented and analysed in detail, especially as regards developments since about . In what follows, therefore, I propose to look at some of the changes affecting complement clauses in Late Modern English (–), and to interpret them in the light of the processing principles formulated by John A. Hawkins in his research on performance preferences in language (Hawkins , ). The chapter is organised as follows. Section contains a brief account of the corpora used in this investigation. Section outlines Hawkins’s performance-based theory. Section gives an overview of English sentential complements and summarises their development since Old English times (–), with particular reference to the competition between infinitival and gerundive clauses in modern times. Section offers an in-depth analysis of some of the changes discussed in Section . Section shows how Hawkins’s model can be utilised to explain those changes.
* For generous financial support I am grateful to the Autonomous Government of Galicia (grants /, INCITEPXIBPR) and the Spanish Ministry of Education and Science and the European Regional Development Fund (grant HUM–).
200
Variation in sentential complements
201
The corpora
Evidence for eighteenth- and nineteenth-century English is based on the Corpus of Late Modern British and American English Prose (COLMOBAENG, –), a ,, word database comprising fiction and non-fiction texts retrieved from several miscellaneous sources, as detailed in Fanego (: –, –). Though the focus of this chapter is primarily on Late Modern English, linguistic change is gradual, hence occasional references are also made in the following pages to earlier and later periods in the history of English. Evidence of these has been obtained primarily from the Early Modern English section of the Helsinki Corpus of English Texts (HC / , words; see Kytö ) and from FLOB (Freiburg LOB Corpus) and FROWN (Freiburg-Brown Corpus), the two one-million-word corpora of British and American English compiled at the University of Freiburg in the s.
Hawkins’s performance-based theory of grammar
Hawkins (; see also Hawkins ) puts forward the hypothesis that performance preferences have had a significant impact on the basic design features of grammars. In other words, as against the Chomskyan tradition of research, which assumes that grammars are predetermined by an innate language faculty and have not been shaped by performance to any significant extent, Hawkins (: xi) argues that the variation patterns that we observe in the world’s languages ‘point to a causal role for principles of processing and use’. More specifically, the central organising principle of Hawkins () is the Performance–Grammar Correspondence Hypothesis (PGCH), as defined in (): ()
Performance–Grammar Correspondence Hypothesis (PGCH) Grammars have conventionalised syntactic structures in proportion to their degree of preference in performance, as evidenced by patterns of selection in corpora and by ease of processing in psycholinguistic experiments.
As is clear from (), the PGCH has a strong empirical basis, since it relies on performance data and grammatical data from a range of languages, and is also supported by a number of other parsing explanations for grammars that were summarised in Dryer (), Fodor (, ), Frazier (),
The following abbreviations are used henceforth for the different COLMOBAENG subperiods: BrE (–; , words), BrE (–; , words), BrE (–; , words), BrE (–; , words), AmE (–; , words), AmE (–; , words), AmE (–; , words). FLOB and FROWN are available in Hofland et al. ().
202
Eighteenth-century English
Hawkins (), and Haspelmath (), among others. Essentially, the PGCH predicts that when the grammar of one language is more restrictive and eliminates one or more structural options that are permitted by the grammar of another, the restriction will be in accordance with performance preferences attested cross-linguistically. The preferred structure will be retained and ‘fixed’ as a grammatical convention (that is, it will be grammaticalised), the dispreferred structure will be either eliminated altogether from the output of the grammar or it may be retained in some marginal form as a limited construction type. These correlating patterns of preference in performance and grammars are argued by Hawkins to be structured by the speakers’ attempt to increase efficiency by reducing structural complexity. Hawkins’s conception of complexity is strongly influenced by Miller and Chomsky’s () metric of syntactic complexity in terms of the ratio of non-terminal to terminal nodes in a sentence, and by the later formulation of it in Frazier (), the basic claim being that ‘the perceptual complexity of a sentence may be determined by simply dividing the number of nonterminals in the sentence by the number of terminals’ (Frazier : ; also –). Thus in a clause with a sentential subject in English, such as That John was sick surprised Sue, the non-terminal to terminal node ratio is higher than it is in the extraposed counterpart, It surprised Sue that John was sick, in which there is an additional terminal element (it) but the same amount of higher structure, and this results in a lower ratio of structure to words. Hawkins, however, attempts ‘to extend Miller and Chomsky’s insight into other areas of grammar’ (Hawkins : ), such as syntactic properties going beyond phrase structure nodes and dominance relations, morphology and even semantics. The basic idea is that complexity: increases with the number of linguistic forms and the number of conventionally associated (syntactic and semantic) properties that are assigned to them when constructing syntactic and semantic representations for sentences. That is it increases with more forms, and with more conventionally associated properties. It also increases with larger formal domains for the assignment of these properties (Hawkins : ). In turn, efficiency can be increased in three ways, or, as Hawkins puts it, in accordance with three functional motivations or efficiency principles, namely: () Minimise Domains (MiD) The human processor prefers to minimize the connected sequences of linguistic forms and their conventionally associated syntactic and semantic properties in which relations of combination and/or dependency are processed (Hawkins : ).
Combination and dependency denote the two general syntactic relations recognised by Hawkins. The terms are largely self-explanatory.
Variation in sentential complements 203
()
()
Minimise Forms (MiF) The human processor prefers to minimize the formal complexity of each linguistic form F (its phoneme, morpheme, word, or phrasal units) and the number of forms with unique conventionalized property assignments, thereby assigning more properties to fewer forms. These minimizations apply in proportion to the ease with which a given property P can be assigned in processing to a given F (Hawkins : ). Maximise On-line Processing (MaOP) The human processor prefers to maximize the set of properties that are assignable to each item X as X is processed, thereby increasing O(n-line) P(roperty) to U(ltimate) P(roperty) ratios. The maximization difference between competing orders and structures will be a function of the number of properties that are unassigned or misassigned to X in a structure/sequence S, compared with the number in an alternative (Hawkins : ).
Both MiD and MiF are simple principles of least effort, which Hawkins (: ) summarises with the slogan ‘Express the most with the least’. By contrast, the basic intuition that MaOP captures is ‘Express it earliest’, in other words, many performance preferences appear to be correlated with the earlier assignment of properties, in one ordering or structural variant, versus their late assignment in another. As an illustration of the Minimise Domains principle we can compare (a,b), which illustrate the well-known tendency of VO-type languages to consistently put shorter before longer constituents, as discussed in for instance Wasow (). Despite the fact that the pattern [V NP PP], as in (b), is the basic pattern with English ditransitives, in the case of the examples in () the heavy-NP-shifted pattern [V PP NP], as in (a), is consistently preferred by speakers. The explanation is that in (b) the domain that needs to be parsed in order to recognise the three ICs of the VP is much larger than in (a), as can be seen if we compare the italicised portions in both examples (that is, a full twelve words and their associated properties in (b), and only four words in (a)). () a.
Mary gave [to Bill ] [the book she had been searching for since last Christmas]
The abbreviations used here and below are: VO = Verb–Object, V = Verb, NP = Noun Phrase, PP = Prepositional Phrase, IC = Immediate Constituents, NRel = Nominal + Relative, RelN = Relative + Nominal. The word domain is understood in Hawkins (: ) as ‘the smallest connected sequence of terminal elements and their associated syntactic and semantic properties that must be processed for the recognition of the combinatorial or dependency relation’ under analysis at any given moment. This assuming that the preposition ‘constructs’ the PP and the definite article the NP, as argued in Hawkins (: , : –).
204
b.
Eighteenth-century English
Mary gave [the book she had been searching for since last Christmas] [to Bill].
The principle of MiD also offers a potential explanation for adjacency in syntax. Rules of phrase structure (for example Jackendoff ) have always defined relative degrees of adjacency between, for instance, heads and their subcategorised complements, and adjuncts of various kinds. According to Hawkins (: ), MiD provides an answer to why some patterns of adjacency are preferred to others: since each syntactic relation of combination or dependency prefers a minimal domain in which it can be processed, then the more relations there are between two categories, the stronger the adjacency effects in performance. Likewise, MiD predicts that a reduction in formal marking makes a phrase less independently processable, and it can then become dependent on some other category for property assignments; in other words, reduced formal marking increases adjacency as well and hence favours domain minimisation. The Minimise Forms principle is ‘inspired by Haiman’s (, ) principle of “economy” and by the supporting data that he summarizes from numerous languages’ (Hawkins : ). It also subsumes Grice’s () second Quantity maxim for pragmatic inferencing (‘Do not make your contribution more informative than is required’) and Levinson’s (: ) Minimisation principle derived from it (‘Say as little as necessary’). MiF is manifested, for instance, in the well-known correlation between brevity of form and frequency of use in English (Zipf ), and in Greenberg’s () markedness hierarchies such as Singular > Plural > Dual > Trial/ Paucal: the frequency of singularity across languages is greater than plurality and that of plurality is greater than dual, and these declining frequencies correlate with an almost universal tendency for morphemes expressing singularity to be often zero (Eng. boy, Spanish niño) whereas plurality has an explicit form (boys, niños), and dual is often more complex than plural. Finally, Maximise On-line Processing accounts for a large number of grammatical features attested cross-linguistically. The following ones involve left–right asymmetries: () Head noun to the left of a relative clause sister: If a language has basic VO, then NRel (and not *RelN) almost exceptionless. () Antecedent precedes anaphor: e.g. Johni washed himselfi In these and many other similar cases property assignments to the second element (B) require prior access to the first element (A), but property
MiD is thus analogous to Rohdenburg’s (, ) cognitive principle of transparency (also referred to as the Complexity Principle), which claims that explicitly marked phrases are preferred over zero-marked counterparts in cognitively complex environments.
Variation in sentential complements 205
assignments to A require no or significantly less access to B. Misassignments would arise if the dependent category B preceded the category on which it depends for property assignments, which is the reason why the order B + A is systematically dispreferred in all of the above cases. Summing up, as Newmeyer (: ) aptly points out, the dozens of typological generalisations that seem to be explained by the processing principles in Hawkins (, ) ‘provide a convincing alternative to the idea that such generalizations should be accounted for internally to grammatical theory’, that is, from a purely grammatical point of view. The development of English sentential complements: an overview If we leave aside interrogative complements (‘I’m wondering why I should go at all’, ‘I doubt whether they knew’), five major types of complement clauses can be distinguished in English, as illustrated in ()–(): () That/zero-declaratives: a. It is clear [that] he made a mistake. b. He knows [that] you are here. () Bare infinitives: a. All I did was ask a question. b. We saw Kim leave the bank. () To-infinitives with and without a subject: a. The best plan would be for them to go alone. b. Max wanted to change his name. () -ing participle clauses as complements of perception verbs: We saw Kim leaving the bank. () Gerundive clauses with and without a subject: a. I resented them/their going without me. b. Inviting the twins was a bad mistake. Types (), (), () and () have been on record from Old English, though all four types have undergone a number of important developments since then, as discussed in detail by Warner (), Rohdenburg (), Los () or Miller (: –), among many others. Most of these developments, at any rate, had been completed, or were well under way, before the start of the Early Modern period. By comparison with the other four complement types, gerundive clauses, as illustrated in (), emerged considerably later. As is well known, the -ing form in this type is not participial in origin, as in (), but descends instead from an Old English (OE) derivational suffix which could be freely added to verb stems to form abstract nouns of action, as in OE spilling ‘destruction’ (< spillan ‘destroy’) or OE wending ‘turning’ (< wendan ‘turn’). Following common practice among historians of the English language, I will employ
206
Eighteenth-century English
the label ‘nominal gerund’ to refer to this kind of noun and to its reflexes in Present-day English (PDE), as in ‘the exploring of the mountain took a long time’. The labels ‘verbal gerund’ or ‘gerundive clause’ will be applied to examples such as (a, b). In Old and Middle English nominal gerunds behaved like any other noun and could therefore take nominal dependents of various kinds. The following examples illustrate their use with determiners (the, his) and with of-phrases serving as their notional objects: () – Cely Letters, / [Tajima : ]: at the makyng of thys lettyr ‘at the [moment of] writing this letter / when writing this letter’ () c. Chaucer Troilus and Criseyde, V [Tajima : ]: And thus began his loving of Criseyde () c. (MS a) English Metrical Homilies, /– [Tajima : ]: Sain Jon was … bisi In ordaining of priestes, and clerkes, ‘Saint John was … busy ordaining priests and clerics,’ As a result of very complex factors which I have discussed elsewhere (Fanego a), from Late Middle English (–) onwards nominal gerunds began to acquire verbal properties, a development that has ultimately led to the Present-day English situation, where gerunds have the ability to: a) govern an object or a predicative complement (for example ‘their following the child into England,’ ‘I don’t like being ill’); b) be modified by adverbs or adverbials restricted to co-occurring only with verbs (for example ‘my quietly leaving before anyone noticed’); c) show tense and voice distinctions (for example ‘of having done it,’ ‘the necessity of being loved’); and d) take a subject in a case other than the genitive (for example ‘I resented them going without me’). Though, as noted above, the first instances of verbal gerunds can be dated back to Late Middle English, their spread across the grammar of English extended over a period of several centuries, with some subtypes becoming possible much earlier than others. In the early stages, for instance, verbalisation was largely restricted to prepositional environments, as in (): () c. (MS a) Handlyng Synne, HS [Tajima : ]: yn feblyng þe body with moche fastyng ‘in weakening the body by too much abstinence’ The common assumption is that prepositional contexts were the primary environment in which the gerundive was not blocked by the productive toinfinitive, as this was available in Old and Middle English in a variety of clausal functions, but could not occur after prepositions other than to. As long as the gerundive continued to be restricted to prepositional contexts, it remained functionally different from the infinitive, but this distribution
Variation in sentential complements
207
was unstable because the nominal gerund could also occur in other clausal slots (though with some restrictions; see Fanego a: , b: –). Gradually, therefore, verbal gerunds came to be licensed in functions other than that of prepositional complements, so that little by little (Fanego a: –) we come across scattered instances of verbal gerunds functioning as objects (for example T. Hoby Castiglione’s Courtyer ‘hee can not refraine telling them’); a little later verbal gerunds as preverbal subjects, as in (b) below, can also be found. The outcome of this remarkable development is that for the last five centuries to-infinitives have been yielding ground to gerundives in both object and subject position, thus bringing about a massive restructuring of the English complement system (see Fanego a, ). Witness, for instance, the changes outlined in ()–(): () Gerundives have replaced infinitives, either completely or in part, after selected classes of verbs of subject-control, that is, verbs with which the understood subject of the complement clause is co-referential with the matrix subject. Among the verb classes so affected the following could be mentioned (the list is by no means exhaustive): a. negative implicative verbs such as avoid, escape, eschew, forbear, refrain or shun, among others: Daus tr. Bullinger on Apoc. Preface (), [Oxford English Dictionary (OED) s.v. Refrain v. b]: Lawrence Ualla … could not refrayn to enveygh against the Popish clergie. T. Hoby tr. Castiglione’s Courtyer I (), D iv [OED s.v. Refrain v. b]: They come so to purpose, that hee can not refraine telling them. b. eggressives such as blin ‘cease’, cease, finish, give up, quit, stop, and so on (for details see Fanego a: , and Visser –: §§ff, –): c. To kiss mi fete wald sco not blin ‘she would not cease kissing my feet’ she never would blin telling how his grace sav’d…. c. thei sesyden to bilde the citee ‘they stopped building the city’ c. I cesse not doynge thankyngis ‘I do not stop saying thanks’ c. intention verbs (intend, consider, contemplate, meditate, propose and so on): Digby Voy. Medit. (), [OED s.v. Intend v. a]: I sett sayle for Zant, where I entended to sell the corne. HC Haddock Correspondence, : After we have got the castle, I hear the fleet will go for the Islands of Minorca and Majorca, and, after that, I hope home. If the S[ain]t George should not do, intend asking S[i]r J[oh]n Leake leave for my self.
208
Eighteenth-century English
()
()
()
()
COLMOBAENG AmE Tyler Algerine Captive, : To avoid starving, I again contemplated keeping a school. In that country, knowledge was viewed as a handicraft trade. With retrospective verbs such as remember or forget gerundives have become specialised to denote past time; infinitives to denote future time, as in c below. In other words, sequences such as a, where the reference is to the past, have given way to the pattern illustrated in b. a. Shakespeare King Lear (Evans ) ..: Since I was man, / Such sheets of fire, such bursts of horrid thunder, / Such groans of roaring wind and rain, I never / Remember to have heard. b. Lady Mary Wortley Montagu Complete Letters (Halsband ), : I perfectly remember carrying back the Manuscript you mention and delivering it to Lord Oxford. c. I will remember to do it. Since about the nineteenth century, the utility of the opposition to:ing has also been exploited to mark overtly the two senses of the conative try, namely ‘put to the test’ (a) and ‘make an effort’ (b); for discussion see Visser (–: §), Fanego (): a. After everything else failed, he tried reciting the pledge of allegiance, but the child kept crying. b. He tried to recite the pledge of allegiance, but no sound came out. Gerundives have replaced infinitives after matrix predicates governing object clauses with an unspecified missing subject. Thus structures such as (a,b) have been replaced by patterns with a gerundive clause, as in (c, d, e): a. Caxton Jason, b [Visser –: §]: He commanded to sadle his hors. b. HC Smith Of Usurie, Sample , CR: Christe expounding the commaundement which forbiddeth to steale, sayth, ‘lende freely’, shewing that Vsurie, because she lendeth not freely, is a kinde of theft. c. COLMOBAENG AmE Tyler The Algerine Captive, : The landlord forbad quarrelling in his house. d. COLMOBAENG BrE Wood East Lynne, : ‘I have been telling Barbara that a visit to London entails bringing gifts for friends,’ returned Mr. Carlyle. e. FROWN Press Reportage, A : I cannot for the life of me understand mobilizing demonstrations and demonstrating against your own country. Gerundives have largely replaced infinitives as preverbal subjects: a. Shakespeare King Lear (Evans ) ..: men / Are as the time is: to be tender-minded / Does not become a sword.
Variation in sentential complements
b.
209
HC Langford Plain and Full Instructions to Raise All Sorts of Fruit Trees, Sample , : Slitting the bark is an excellent additional help to most of the aforesaid evils, and also for barkbinding.
Despite the seemingly random variation observable in the early stages of the spread of the gerundive (for details see specially Fanego a, ), the direction of the changes has been, in most cases, towards a greater functional specialisation of the infinitive, which has largely come to be used in complementary distribution with the gerundive. Gerunds, in other words, have gradually spread to those clausal positions where they could be functionally more useful, thus giving rise to a much more efficient complement system. Most, if not all, of the many changes comprised in this large-scale restructuring – which Rohdenburg (: ) has aptly labelled the ‘Great Complement Shift’ – could be accounted for by reference to the processing principles put forward in Hawkins (, ) and summarised in section . For lack of space, however, in what follows I will focus primarily on one of those changes, namely, the replacement of preverbal subject infinitives by gerundives, as illustrated in (). This is the concern of the next section.
Gerundives and infinitives as sentential subjects
Old English to-infinitives, despite exhibiting a number of similarities to ordinary NPs, lacked some of the basic characteristics of fully-fledged nominals, such as the ability to be governed by prepositions other than to (see Los : ) or to occur as preverbal subjects, as in PDE ‘To know the truth is essential’ (see Traugott : ). From Middle English onwards, however, infinitives became available preverbally (see Warner : , O. Fischer : ), though at all times they have remained comparatively rare by comparison with their extraposed counterparts, as is clear from analyses of contemporary usage by Mair (), Biber et al. (: –) or Kaltenböck (), and from my own research based on FLOB and FROWN. See Tables . and . for some statistics. Since extraposition is essentially a property of clauses rather than of NPs (see Huddleston and Pullum et al. : –), one could predict that in the role of extraposed subjects gerundives, because of their nominal
The development of gerunds introduced by possessives, as in (a) and () above, or by the negative determiner no (e.g. ‘there was no getting a word from her on any other theme’) was substantially different (see Fanego b, a) from the development of subjectless gerunds and will not be discussed in this chapter. Most gerunds are, however, of the subjectless type: in my eighteenth-century material the frequency per , words of subjectless gerunds is ., that of gerunds with an overt subject .. In Present-day British English the frequencies per , words of these two types are respectively . and .; see Fanego ().
210
Eighteenth-century English
Table .. Frequencies of extraposed and non-extraposed subject infinitives in Middle and Early Modern English Wyclifite English (c.) [, w; based on Warner ]
Marlowe’s complete works (c.–) [, lines of prose and verse; based on Ando ]
Shakespearean plays (c.–) [, lines of prose and verse; based on Fanego ]
preposed
(.%)
(.%)
(.%)
extraposed
(.%)
(.%)
(.%)
totals
Table .. Preverbal and extraposed non-finite sentential subjects in nineteenth- and twentieth-century British and American English (figures for extraposed use appear to the right of the slash) BrE (–) [, w]
AmE (–) [, w]
FLOB () [, w]
FROWN () [, w]
gerundives
/
/
/
/
to-infinitives
/
/
/
/
origin, would not be serious competitors to infinitives. That this prediction is indeed correct is shown by the evidence from my corpus: in the eighteenth century the frequency of extraposed gerundives is of less than one token per , words – only two examples occur in a , word sample of the COLMOBAENG –, and it remains very low throughout the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, as can be seen from Table ., especially by comparison with the figures for extraposed infinitives over the same period. With regard to the twentieth century, a recent study by Kaltenböck () confirms that -ing extraposition continues to be rare today: he records only forty-eight extraposed gerundives in the one million word ICE-GB corpus, the British component of the International Corpus of English. As regards preverbal position, the nominal traits that render gerundives unfit for extraposed use could, by contrast, be expected to contribute to their increasing occurrence as preverbal subjects at the expense of infinitives. And indeed, as is apparent from Table ., gerundives have been encroaching upon preverbal to-infinitives since about the late eighteenth century. Prior to this, verbal gerunds as non-extraposed subjects were very uncommon, a comment that applies equally to nominal gerunds, probably as a reflection of the fact that, for reasons not yet well understood, since Old English times there has been a fairly constant trend for nominal gerunds to occur
Variation in sentential complements 211
preferably as the objects of prepositions (for discussion see Houston , Fanego b: and ). As can be inferred from the empty cells in Table ., I have not checked the frequencies of occurrence of preverbal infinitives and gerundives in all historical subperiods; however, it is clear that in earlier stages of the language preverbal to-infinitives were more common by far than gerundives. These appear to increase slightly in AmE (–; examples), but it is difficult to tell whether this increase has any statistical significance, as my data for AmE (–) are retrieved from a much smaller sample (, words). There can be no question, though, that coinciding with the second half of the nineteenth century preverbal to-infinitives ( examples) begin to yield ground to gerundives ( examples) in American English, a trend that is amply confirmed for both Present-day British and American English by the evidence from FLOB and FROWN, which show an almost complete reversal in the frequencies of gerunds and infinitives with respect to the earlier subperiods. The status of gerundives as the unmarked option to code preverbal sentential subjects in Contemporary English is also quite clear from recent research by Kaltenböck (): in the ICE-GB corpus, which consists of one million words of spoken and written British English produced between and , he found preverbal to-infinitives and extraposed, as opposed to preverbal gerunds and extraposed. These figures seem particularly striking when compared to those reported in Duffley (: ) for preverbal gerunds and infinitives in two corpora the same size of Kaltenböck’s, but comprising texts printed during the calendar year , namely the Brown University Corpus of American English and the Lancaster-Oslo/Bergen Corpus of British English (LOB): in the Brown corpus there were occurrences of -ing and to-infinitives; in LOB -ing and to-infinitives. As indicated in Table ., the application of the chi-square test shows that the differences between the two corpora of British English (LOB and ICE-GB) are statistically significant; in other words, preverbal gerundives have become much more common in British English over the last thirty years, an increase that cannot be ascribed simply to differences in the overall structure of those corpora or to the fact that the ICE-GB, unlike the LOB, contains spoken and written material. As is clear from my own research (Fanego : –) and from Kaltenböck (: , ), the frequency of preverbal -ing clauses is not directly linked to the formality–informality continuum; in fact, according to Kaltenböck, they are more common in written (. per cent) than in spoken (. per cent) English, so that if the ICE-GB contained only written texts, the overall number of preverbal gerundives would probably be higher than . All this suggests, I believe, that before
An important exception to this generalisation regarding the distribution of nominal gerunds will be discussed in section .
Table .. Frequencies of subjectless gerundives and infinitives as preverbal subjects from Early Modern to Present-day English, based on a ,, word sample [in brackets: frequencies normalised per , words] BRITISH ENGLISH
HC EModE (–) [, w]
HC EModE (–) [, w]
BrE (–) [, w]
BrE (–) [, w]
BrE (–) [, w]
BrE (–) [, w]
FLOB () [, w]
gerundives
(.)
(.)
(.)
(.)
(.)
(.)
(.)
to-infinitives
Shakespeare’s English [, w of prose and verse; based on Fanego ] (.)
not analysed
not analysed
(.)
(.)
(.)
(.)
AMERICAN ENGLISH
AmE (–) [, w]
AmE (–) [, w]
AmE (–) [, w]
FROWN () [, w]
gerundives
(.)
(.)
(.)
(.)
to-infinitives
(.)
(.)
(.)
(.)
In one of the six examples of gerundives recorded in AmE the gerund is left-dislocated and a recapitulatory it fills the subject slot; see Woolman Journal, : ‘A ship at sea commonly sails all night, and the seamen take their watches four hours at a time. Rising to work in the night, it is not commonly pleasant in any case, but in dark rainy nights it is very disagreeable’. Three of the preverbal infinitives in BrE are also left-dislocated and resumed by this ( ex.) and that ( ex.); the same applies to one of the examples in AmE, in which the preverbal infinitive is recapitulated by that.
Variation in sentential complements 213 Table .. Gerundives and infinitives in subject position in three onemillion-word corpora (after Duffley and Kaltenböck ). [BrE diachronic: p is less than or equal to .; the distribution is highly significant] preverbal gerundives
preverbal to-infinitives
BROWN ()
LOB ()
ICE-GB (–)
long non-extraposed to-infinitives will become even more marginal than at present, thus leaving gerundives as the only type of sentential complement generally available for preverbal use. Before going on to examine the variable or variables responsible for this remarkable development, it seems appropriate to conclude this section by alluding briefly to a paper by Mair and Leech () where they carefully document the influence, in recent times, of American English on British English. The available evidence suggests that the increase of preverbal -ing subjects at the expense of to-infinitives considered in this section was spearheaded by American English, so that this change would serve as one further illustration of the modern trend towards the ‘Americanisation’ of British English. . Variables controlling the spread of gerundives to preverbal position This section will try to answer how the statistical tendency towards a complementary distribution of gerundive and infinitival subjects with regard to extraposition which is so prominent today was developed. One possibility that comes to mind is that the replacement of preverbal infinitives by gerundives could be explained by reference to the variables usually invoked by research on sentential complementation in Present-day English when trying to define the semantic differences between the gerund and the infinitive, namely: (a)
general scope or validity (for which the -ing form is used) versus reference to a particular occasion (expressed by the infinitive); see for instance Poutsma (: , ), who contrasts He dreaded not engaging with the highest species of his art with I dread to hear you speak.
Note that non-extraposed that- clauses, though not directly in competition with either infinitives or gerundives, have always been very uncommon in English, to the extent that only examples are recorded in the one-million-word ICE-GB. See also Fanego (: , Table ).
214
Eighteenth-century English
(b) factivity, or presupposition of the truth of the complement, versus non-factivity; see among others Kiparsky and Kiparsky (: –) or Miller (: ), who claim that there exists a split along factive/ non-factive lines between gerundives and infinitives. (c) closely related to (b) above, fulfilment of the action versus potentiality, the infinitive being considered to denote ‘yet unrealised activities’ (Dixon : ) or to have a ‘bias towards potentiality [that] tends to favour its use in hypothetical and nonfactual contexts’ (Quirk et al. : –, also –), as in, for instance, Brian would loathe to live in the country, as opposed to Brian loathed living in the country. See also Huddleston and Pullum et al. (: –), who compare To have paid off the mortgage would have put us in a strong position with Paying off the mortgage has put us in a strong position. (d) information packaging and the trend for given information to generally precede new information. Thus Huddleston and Pullum et al. (: ) note that ‘to a significant extent the difference between infinitival and gerund-participial is a matter of information packaging: end position [i.e. extraposed position] tends to favour the infinitival while basic subject position tends to favour the gerundparticipial.’ I showed in Fanego (), however, that none of the above variables appear to have had any influence on the historical development under discussion; and, second, that even today they are of little use in order to account for the choice of gerunds and infinitives in preverbal position, as both types of clause can convey either potential events or events that have actually taken place, and both can refer, too, to an action in general or to a particular occasion. Similarly, in terms of information packaging preverbal infinitives and gerundives behave exactly alike in typically encoding given information and containing anaphoric references to prior discourse. We can illustrate this with examples ()–(), where I have underlined the entity in the preceding context to which the subject clause is anaphorically and/or informationally linked: () COLMOBAENG BrE Walpole Life of Mr. Thomas Baker, /-P: The sufferings of Charles I whose crimes were not of the magnitude of his son’s, had raised a spirit of enthusiasm in his partisans, and conjured up in their minds a profane idolatry of kings, that was inconsistent both with true religion and common sense; and had been extended even to genealogic succession – as if being born of a certain race could entitle any family to a right of violating with impunity all laws, both divine and human. () COLMOBAENG AmE Tyler The Algerine Captive, : I found one of the larger boys sitting by the fire in my arm chair. I gently requested him to remove. He replied that he would, when he
Variation in sentential complements 215
had warmed himself; ‘father finds wood, and not you’. To have my throne usurped, in the face of the whole school, shook my government to the centre. I immediately snatched my two foot rule, and laid it pretty smartly across his back. () COLMOBAENG AmE Melville Bartleby, Part II: I slowly went downstairs and out into the street, and while walking round the block considered what I should next do in this unheard-of perplexity. Turn the man out by an actual thrusting I could not; to drive him away by calling him hard names would not do; calling in the police was an unpleasant idea; and yet, permit him to enjoy his cadaverous triumph over me – this, too, I could not think of. What was to be done? In view of such inconclusive results, I decided to check whether syntactic weight could have a bearing on the long-term replacement of preverbal infinitives by gerundives. That weight might be a factor was suggested by Kaltenböck’s finding (: –), based on the one-million-word ICE-GB corpus, that in Present-day British English non-extraposed gerundives, with an average length of . words, are shorter than their matrix predicates (average length = . words), whereas non-extraposed infinitives (. words) tend to be longer than their matrices (. words). Kaltenböck does not seem to be aware of the implications of this statistical difference, but as will become clear in what follows, weight appears to have been the major factor in the spread of gerundives to preverbal subject position in modern times. Table . gives information on the length of Late Modern English preverbal infinitives and gerundives relative to their matrix clauses, and shows that at every stage gerundives were, on average, lighter than infinitives. Table ., in turn, combines the totals for infinitives and unintroduced gerundives in AmE– (–) and confirms that their distribution in terms of syntactic weight is statistically significant. Finally, examples (b) and ()–() illustrate the clear contrast in length between both types of non-finite clause; note in particular (), where a long subject infinitive and a short -ing clause occur in succession. It could be argued about this example that Melville’s change of clause type is motivated by stylistic considerations and the need for variety, but this would not explain why it is precisely the longer subject that is coded as an infinitive, and the shorter one as an -ing clause.
Concerning the data in this table, note that sequences of two or more co-ordinated subject clauses, as in (i) below, have been counted as one clause. This explains why the figures for infinitives and gerundives in Table . do not exactly coincide with the figures given in Table .. (i) COLMOBAENG AmE Hamilton The Federalist Papers, March th: And to take the senator of any State from his seat as senator, to place him in that of President of the Senate, would be to exchange, in regard to the State from which he came, a constant for a contingent vote.
Table .. Length of LME preverbal subject clauses relative to their matrix predicates BrE– [, words] longer
shorter
AmE [, words] same length
to-infinitives
not analysed not analysed not analysed
Gerundives
AmE [, words]
AmE [, words]
longer
shorter same length longer shorter same length longer
shorter
same length
Variation in sentential complements 217 Table .. Length of preverbal subject clauses relative to their matrix predicates in earlier American English [p is less than or equal to .; the distribution is highly significant] AmE– [–; , w] longer
shorter
totals
to-infinitives
Gerundives
Conclusions: back to Hawkins’s processing model
The question that remains to be considered before concluding this chapter is why length has come to play such a major role in determining the form of the subject clause. The necessary condition for the change was no doubt provided by one remarkable aspect of the grammar of the nominal gerund: I pointed out in section that in Middle and Early Modern English nominal gerunds only rarely occurred as subjects, and instead tended to occur preferably after prepositions. However, unmodified -ing nominals such as those adduced in ()–() below have been relatively common in both subject and object position at all stages of English, as I have shown in earlier research (Fanego a: , ; b: ). Thus, in a , sample from the Early Modern English section of the Helsinki Corpus I recorded instances of this kind functioning as subjects, which is by no means an inconsiderable number: () HC Smith Of Usurie, Sample , BV: First, they [the Jews] did lend vppon Vsurie to straungers; after they began to lend vppon Vsurie to their brethren … Wherby you may see how the malice of man hath turned mercie into crueltie. For whereas lending was commaunded for the benefite of men, Vsurie hath turned it to the vndoing of men. () HC Langford Plain and Full Instructions to Raise All Sorts of Fruit-Trees that Prosper in England, Sample , : And lastly, if it should miscarry (as it seldom doth) it will be perceived by Midsummer, and the stock may be enoculated again the same year. . Where inoculating succeeds well, it is to be prefer’d before Graffing.
Table in Fanego (b: ), which is based on the same sample, gives unmodified gerunds as subjects, but this figure includes a few examples of postposed subjects, as in ‘if there be required mundifying and clensing’ (HC Clowes Treatise for the Artificiall Cure of Struma, ).
218 Eighteenth-century English
As long as the gerund remained a member of the category of nouns, these -ing forms would pattern with deverbal substantives such as entrance (‘entrance is free’) or education (‘education is important’); but with the acquisition of verbal syntax by the gerund, ()–() and other analogous sequences became ambiguous between a nominal and a verbal analysis, as they still are in Present-day English (for discussion see Quirk et al. : ), and could thus be reanalysed as VPs. From this moment, the possibility existed for gerundives to start encroaching upon the other type of non-finite clause available in preverbal territory, namely infinitives. In language change variants are created from which speakers may choose, and, as aptly pointed out by Haspelmath (: ) in work closely related to Hawkins’s, speakers then ‘tend to choose those variants that suit them best’. In the case under discussion, the increasingly frequent choice of a new variant – the gerundive – for use in preverbal position has ultimately resulted in a new system where gerundives and infinitivals occur largely in complementary distribution with regard to extraposition, as noted at the end of section . In large measure, as predicted by Hawkins’s views on the conventionalisation of grammatical options, this new system is more ‘efficient’ than the previous one in a number of quite obvious ways, namely: (a)
It mirrors the trend towards the functional specialisation of infinitives and gerundives discernible in the English complementation system as a whole, see examples ()–(). (b) It illustrates form minimisation (MiF) in at least two ways. Firstly, patterns (a,b), both occurring as preverbal subjects, were synonymous, and synonymy is highly inefficient, since it increases the number of forms in a language, at no extra benefit in terms of property signalling (Hawkins : ). Synonymous words and structures are therefore ‘one of the first targets for removal by MiF’ (Hawkins : ). Secondly, zero marking, as in gerundives by comparison with to-infinitives, is also a kind of form minimisation: ‘there is less linguistic form to process phonologically, morphologically, and syntactically’ (Hawkins : ); crucially, there are also fewer terminal nodes (see section ). (c) It illustrates domain minimisation (MiD): the domain that needs to be processed in order to identify the combinatorial and dependency relations between the preverbal subject and the VP is smaller in, for instance ‘Inviting the twins was a bad mistake’ (four words) than in ‘To invite the twins was a bad mistake’ (five words). (d) In the new system, infinitival clauses have remained the preferred option by far for use in extraposition; this could be predicted also in the light of MiD, as we can expect to find that the degree of formal marking will increase in proportion to the surface distance between the interdependent categories, that is, the higher V and its
Variation in sentential complements 219
(e)
.
extraposed or non-extraposed subject. Consider from this perspective, for instance, a typical example of extraposition such as ‘It then would take the approval of members to bring the measure up for a vote’ (FROWN Press Reportage, A ) as compared with its non-extraposed counterpart ‘Bringing the measure up for a vote would take the approval of members’. Even more interestingly, the precise way in which the long-term replacement of preverbal infinitives by gerundives has proceeded constitutes another good example of MiD, as discussed in the next and final section.
More on domain minimisation
As has often been noted in the literature (Yngve ; Frazier ), preverbal sentential subjects are notoriously difficult to process. In an experiment using the eye movement recording technique, Frazier (: ), for instance, found that sentences with finite sentential subjects took significantly longer (. milliseconds) to process than sentences in which the sentential subject was extraposed (. milliseconds; p < .). Further evidence of the processing difficulty of subject clauses is the fact that in preverbal position they require unambiguous marking: thus the complementiser that is optional in object clauses (‘I believe [that] Jack is stupid’), but obligatory in subject clauses, since otherwise the structure would be misanalysed as a main clause (see Fodor and Garrett ; Frazier : –; Fanego b). For much the same reason, bare infinitivals cannot occur as subjects: () That they were lying /* They were lying is now quite obvious. () To refuse her request /*Refuse her request would be unthinkable. Let’s consider now gerundive clauses. These exhibit reduced formal marking by comparison with to-infinitives, and being one word shorter, involve an increase in the ratio of non-terminal to terminal nodes, and hence in perceptual complexity. Yet in a sentence such as () below, though the parser cannot know in advance that s/he is dealing with a sentential subject, any potential misassignment of properties to the very short -ing clause is solved very soon when we access the head verb is. In (), however, the parser has to process a lot of material before accessing the head verb, and, arguably, the more explicit marking on the infinitive clause helps to clarify the overall sentence structure: () HC Langford Plain and Full Instructions to Raise all Sorts of Fruit-Trees, Sample , : Slitting the bark is an excellent additional help to most of the aforesaid evils, and also for bark-binding.
220
Eighteenth-century English
() COLMOBAENG BrE Smith History of Astronomy, /P: To suppose that the sphere of the planet should by its own motion, if one may say so, sometimes roll forwards, sometimes roll backwards, and sometimes do neither the one nor the other, is contrary to all the natural propensities of the imagination. We might expect, therefore, that the spread of gerundives to preverbal position at the expense of to-infinitives in the history of English would proceed gradually, like all linguistic change, and, secondly, would comply with the requirements of domain minimisation, the selection of stronger or lighter marking correlating with the length of the subject clause. The evidence from the history of English fully confirms this hypothesis, since it was shown above that at every stage of the spread of gerundives to preverbal subject position gerundives were, on average, lighter than infinitives. This also explains, of course, why in my Present-day English material the few surviving preverbal infinitives are typically long and complex, as illustrated in (): () FLOB Press Reportage, A : At the end of the first ballot, to go on and to win this battle by a small majority – I did not even think she would win it, I thought she would lose it – would have meant her authority was broken.
12
Nationality and standardisation in eighteenth-century Scotland C H A R LES JON ES University of Edinburgh
The modern Scots visitor to Rome’s delightful little Piazza SS Apostoli must surely view the scene with a strong feeling of poignancy, for it was to apartments in a small pallazzo in that square (no. ) that Charles Edward Stewart repaired for sanctuary after his disastrous defeat at the hands of a government army (largely composed of Scots) on the moor of Culloden in . The effects of that debacle were, of course, wide-reaching in social, economic and political terms, but the defeat of the Jacobite armies also had enormous consequences for the languages of Scotland. Perhaps the most wide-ranging was the effect on the Gaelic language, henceforth subject to deliberate suppression, leading to its serious decline which has lasted to this day. But there was also a less immediate effect on the language spoken in non-Gaelic Scotland – the Lowlands with their large cities as well as the North Eastern counties with large population centres at Aberdeen and Dundee. This form of speech, usually described by contemporaries as Scotch or Scots, was itself also subject to pressures from a variety of sources throughout the eighteenth century, especially in its latter stages. Hostility to all things Scottish was a feature of post- England. For instance, in his entry of December in his London Journal James Boswell observes: ‘At night I went to Covent Garden and saw Love in a Village, a new comic opera … Just before the overture began to be played, two Highland officers came in. The mob in the upper gallery roared out, ‘No Scots! No Scots! Out with them!’ (Basker : ). David Garrick’s refusal to stage John Hume’s Scottish play Douglas was regarded in Scotland as a national affront, and when a version of it was subsequently performed in at the Canongate theatre in Edinburgh, the house was a sell-out. Such was the enthusiasm of the slighted audience for the work that there is a well-known anecdote to the effect that a voice from the gallery was heard to exclaim: ‘Whaur’s your Wullie Shakespeare noo?’ (Burton : ; cited in Mohr , I: ). Anti-Scottish sentiment was reinforced too by the controversial political career of the Scot Lord Bute, whose political machinations had led to a feeling in some circles that he had achieved for Scotland in terms of political influence what the Jacobite cause had failed to do only twenty or so years before. On the other hand, Scotland was also beginning to play a central 221
222 Eighteenth-century English
role in the intellectual, political and social movement we now know as the Enlightenment. The Enlightenment was, of course, a Europe-wide phenomenon, yet there is a case to be made in favour of recognising a specifically Scottish Enlightenment or Improvement epoch, resulting from the intensity of intellectual development and output across a wide range of disciplines which occurred in the country at that time and which gave Scotland a considerable level of Europe-wide recognition and acclaim; in philosophy, science, agriculture and the arts, the Scottish contribution was a dazzling one in this period, outweighing the country’s social, political and economic status. David Hume, Adam Smith, Adam Ferguson, John Millar, Allan Ramsay, Walter Scott and Robert Burns are among the many major figures in the arts, sciences and economics who achieved a Europe-wide reputation in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, and an educational system which at its apex had no fewer than five universities meant that there was a flourishing professional class of lawyers, teachers and academics. In such a context it is hardly surprising that there should be debate concerning the status and shape of Scots in the British state. In the seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries attitudes to Scots both in England and Scotland were by and large neutral, rarely pejorative. Scots was viewed as having a status equal to that of English and, by some observers, likened to that of the regional ‘standards’ of Italian and ancient Greece. Sylvester Douglas is an enthusiastic espouser of this position. Noting that Edinburgh, the ‘Capital of the Kingdom. After the Union … sunk from that distinction, and became, at most, the first provincial town of Great Britain’, a fact, he claims, to be seen as the chief cause ‘which completely established the English dialect of our language as the standard of what is considered as classical’ (Jones : ). However, ‘If the two kingdoms had continued as distinct, as they had been until the death of Queen Elizabeth, it has been thought probable, that two dialects might gradually have been formed, bearing that sort of relation to each other which subsisted between those of ancient Greece: that we might have possessed classical authors in both’. Such a view is still to be heard at the end of the century: ‘Had we retained a Court and Parliament of our own, the tongue of the two sister kingdoms would, indeed, have differed like the Castilian and the Portuguese; but each would have had its own classics, not in a single branch, but in the whole circle of literature’ (James Ramsey of Ochtertyre ; in Alexander Allardyce ). A similar position is taken by Alexander Geddes (: ): ‘if the Scots, remaining a separate nation, with a King and court residing among them, had continued to improve and embellish their own dialect, instead of servilely aping the English, they would at present be possessed of a language in many points superior to the English’: and again (: ): Had Jammie never seen the Thames, Nor chang’t the Abbey for St James’, Edina’s Court had nou been fund in
Nationality and standardisation in Scotland 223
As geud a plight, as that of Lundin: And nowther Pit or Fox had been Politer speakers than Macqueen But, in general, the perception of Scots, even on those occasions when it was devoid of its most robust regional and social characteristics, could be hostile and mocking. Sylvester Douglas records such an incident in the House of Lords (Jones : ): The oa as in boat. Not long ago, a Scotch Gentleman, in a debate in the House of Commons upon the Affairs of America, began a speech, in which he proposed to examine whether it would be more advisable to adopt compulsive, or soothing measures towards the colonies. Unfortunately instead of soothe, coax was the word that had presented itself to his mind. And he pronounced it as if written cox. This, added to several other peculiarities of manner and dialect, tickled the House extremely, and produced a general laugh. The Gentleman was unconscious of the false pronounciation into which he had fallen. His speech had been premeditated, and coax was, it seems, a sort of cue, or catch word. Every time therefore that the silence of his hearers permitted him to resume his harangue, he began by repeating this unlucky word. But every fresh repetition of it occasioning a louder burst of laughter, he was obliged at last fairly to give the matter up. And break off his oration in the middle. Although, on occasion, the prejudice could work in the other direction, as recorded by the English Jesuit, James Adams (Adams : ): In I lived in the Scotch College of Doway in Flanders, having learnt as good English and Latin as St Omers afforded to moderate proficients. The old Scotch gentlemen soon began to fear I should spoil the accent of their pupils, who endeavoured to imitate my pronunciation. Our table wanted not the better store and seasoning of instructive reading during meals. A young reader (Chearly Cameron) lighting on these words, the body of his father, read them according to the English way, upon which the presiding old Gentleman’s ears being shocked, he cleared his mouth as fast as possible, and dropping his spoon and hands on the table, made him repeat the words several times, and spell them again and again. Still the youth read baddy; then the old gentleman ordered each letter to be named and counted, which being done, and repeated again and again, he fixed his eyes on me, and with triumphant smile, mixed with a good Scotch grin, rebuked the reader sharply for spoiling the a, and introducing a second d, then ordered him to sound it bo-dy. Nevertheless, there was still a feeling that something had been lost even from the time of the Union of the Crowns; loss of political power was seen to have had a negative effect on what was perceived to have been the ‘pure’ Scots which had existed prior to that event. Walter Scott has the Duke of
224 Eighteenth-century English
Argyle describe Effie Deans’s speech as ‘not the broad coarse Scotch that is spoken in the Cowgate of Edinburgh, or in the Gorbals. This lady has been very little in Scotland, in fact – She was educated in a convent abroad, and speaks that pure court Scotch which was common in my younger days; but is so generally disused now, that it sounds like a different dialect entirely distinct from our modern patois’ (W. Scott , IV: –). Yet, as a lawyer himself, Scott could testify that his profession still used a form of Scots which retained many of the characteristics of the earlier language as Mohr (, I: ) observes: ‘Another well known case was that of John Clerk, afterwards a judge by the title of Lord Eldin. Pleading in the House of Lords for his client’s use of a mill-stream by prescriptive right, he advanced the point of ‘the watter haein rin that wei for mair nor forty year’. When the Chancellor interrupted his oration to inquire about the possible spelling of water with a double letter, Clerk had this reply ready: ‘Na, na, my Lord, we dinna spell watter wi’ twa ts, but we spell mainners wi’ twa ns’ (E. B. E. Ramsay ; ). By the late eighteenth century there is certainly a feeling among many observers that what had been the ‘pure’ or ‘ideal’ Scots of earlier times had degenerated into a mixture of Scots and English, in Sinclair’s (James Sinclair : ) words ‘neither English nor Scottish but a mixture of both’, graphically expressed by Alexander Ross’s character Scota in The Fortunate Shepherdess () as ‘neither gueed fish nor flesh, nor yet sa’t herrin’ (Mohr , I:). Yet such views on the illegitimacy of the Scots spoken language did not go unchallenged and we see Alexander Geddes turning the customary anti-provincial argument against English itself (: ): Let bragart England in disdain Ha’d ilka lingo, but her a’in: Her a’in, we war, say what she can, Is like her true-born Englishman, A vile promiscuous mungrel seed Of Danish, Dutch, an’ Norman breed, An’ prostituted, since, to a’ The jargons on this earthly ba’ ! Henry Mackenzie (Thomson : ) distinguishes: a pure classical Scots spoken by genteel people, which I thought very agreeable; it had nothing of the coarseness of the vulgar patois of the lower orders of the people’. Interesting too in this context are the remarks by Walter Scott in his letter of February to Archibald Constable of Castlebeare Park, Ealing in Middlesex: ‘Scotch was a language which we have heard spoken by the learned and the wise and witty and the accomplished and which had not a trace of vulgarity in it, but on the contrary sounded rather graceful and genteel. You remember how well Mrs Murray Keith – the late Lady Dumfries – my poor mother and other ladies of that day spoke their native language – it was different from
Nationality and standardisation in Scotland 225
English as the Venetian is from the Tuscan dialect of Italy but it never occurred to anyone that the Scotish [sic] any more than the Venetian was more vulgar than those who spoke the purer and more classical – But that is all gone and the remembrance will be drowned with us the elders of this existing generation and our Edinburgh – I can no longer say our Scottish gentry – will with some study speak rather a worse dialect than the Newcastle and Sheffield riders. So glides the world away. However, it is perhaps true to say that attitudes to Scots in the seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries were, by and large, non condemnatory – Scots being seen as different, but equal to English in status. Famously, Allan Ramsay (: vii), in one of the earliest uses of the term Scotticism (Mohr and Dossena ), while noting that they might attract criticism in some quarters, views their occurrence in poetry as a positive and expressive force: ‘The Scotticisms, which perhaps may offend some over-nice Ear, give new life and grace to the poetry, and become their place as well as the Doric Dialect of Theocretus, so much admired by the best judges.’ Indeed, several writers pointed to the fact that Scots vocabulary often preserved meanings which the English equivalents had lost, so that their use could be seen as enhancing the expressive power of English itself, seen in Smollett’s statement in Humphry Clinker (, II: ; see Thorson ): ‘the works of our best poets, such as Chaucer, Spenser, and even Shakespeare, were become, in many parts, unintelligible to the natives of south-Britain, whereas the Scots, who retain the antient language, understand them without the help of a glossary’ (cited in Mohr , I: ). But by the later part of the century attitudes like these had changed, and overtly Scots words and phrases (some of which were even becoming current in English itself) were coming to be seen as corruptions, a stance taken throughout one of the most prominent lists of Scotticisms in the late eighteenth century, James Beattie’s Scotticisms Arranged in Alphabetical Order, Designed to Correct Improprieties of Speech and Writing () where the use of ‘cant phrases’ and ‘provincial idioms’ is roundly condemned – yet even he notices that some Scotticisms had such wide currency that they were appearing in English usage itself. But by the second half of the eighteenth century attitudes to Scots, from both Scottish and English observers, had hardened considerably with Scots increasingly described in quite strongly pejorative terms. Such a development is hardly surprising given the judgemental attitudes to any form of English seen (for whatever reason) as ‘vulgar’ in this period – although perhaps there has been an over-emphasis on the prescriptive stance taken by its grammarians, dictionary compilers and authors of school books, with the many appeals to ‘custom’ as an arbiter of usage often overlooked (Jones : –). From many an English perspective, the English spoken in Scotland was regarded as at best second rate, the repository of ‘errors’, ‘barbarisms’ and ‘vulgarities’. Major dictionaries such as those by Sheridan and Walker contain lists of pronunciations where Scots speakers are ‘liable to
226 Eighteenth-century English
err’, and it is not unusual to read such condemnations of the national language even from eminent Scottish observers, thus Buchanan (: xv, footnote), condemns Scottish English as ‘that rough and uncouth brogue which is so harsh and unpleasant to an English ear’, while he is of the view too that ‘the people of North Britain seem, in general, to be almost at as great a loss for proper accent and just pronunciation as foreigners. And it would be surprising to find them writing English in the same manner, and some of them to as great perfection as any native of England, and yet pronouncing after a different, and for the most part unintelligible manner, did we not know, that they never had any proper guide or direction for that purpose’. There was a feeling in many quarters that Scottish commercial, political and business interests were being compromised by the use of a language which was viewed as at best ‘quaint’ and at worst unintelligible by the emergent middle classes of South Britain, a point of view elegantly expressed by James Sinclair (: –), one of Scotland’s most prominent Enlightenment figures and supporter of all things relating to ‘Improvement’: To many it seems of no importance, whether this or that word expresses, with the greater purity, a particular idea; and, perhaps, it is of little consequence to any individual, who lives in a retired or distant corner of the country, in what stile his sentiments are given. His highest ambition generally is to be understood, not to please his hearers. But such as wish to mix with the world, and particularly those whose object it is to have some share in the administration of national affairs, are under the necessity of conforming to the taste, the manners, and the language of the Public. Old things must then be done away – new manners must be assumed, and a new language adopted. Nor does this observation apply to Scotchmen only: the same remark may be extended to the Irish, to the Welsh, and to the inhabitants of several districts in England; all of whom have many words and phrases peculiar to themselves, which are unintelligible, in the senate-house, and in the capital. Sheridan’s desire to see a ‘national’ language throughout Britain (and its colonies) – ‘one common tongue’ – makes him particularly intolerant of regional variations: (: ): ‘persons born and bred in different and distant shires, could scarce anymore understand each others speech, than they could that of a foreigner’, while ‘The great difficulty of the English tongue lies in the pronunciation, an exactness in which, after all the pains they can take, is found to be unattainable, not only by foreigners, but Provincials (all British subjects, whether inhabitants of Scotland, Ireland, Wales, the several counties of England, or the city of London, who speak a corrupt dialect of the English tongue’ (: ). Yet while we still find appeals such as those of Beattie (: ) for tolerance of linguistic plurality: ‘To speak with the English, or with the Scotch, accent, is no more praiseworthy, or blameable, than to be born in England, or Scotland: a circumstance, which, though the ringleaders of sedition, or narrow-minded
Nationality and standardisation in Scotland 227
bigots, may applaud or censure, no person of sense, or common honesty, will ever consider as imputable to any man’, so strong is the prescriptive culture that he sees no contradiction to this ‘forbearance’, when he subsequently advocates as the ‘standard of the English tongue’ what he characterises as ‘The language … of the most learned and polite persons in London, and the neighbouring Universities of Oxford and Cambridge’. In the latter part of the eighteenth century there appear to be two distinctive views of the current and future status of the Scots language. One of these is nostalgic and backward-looking, seeking to preserve the auld leid as the national language in the face of some perceived onslaught from English. Indeed, there are those – notably Geddes () – who boast of the inherent superiority of Scots: especially in what he sees as its qualities of properties: of richness, energy and harmony: Our numerous monosyllables, rough, rigid, and inflexible as our oaks, are capable of supporting any burthen; whilst the polysyllables of our southern neighbours, tall, smooth, and slender, like the Lombardy poplar, bend under the smallest weight. From this, no doubt, arises the confessed superiority of our poetry; especially of the higher kinds, the epic and tragic. This, also, gives a peculiar strength to our apophthegms, and to every sort of composition, where strength is a chief ingredient. (: ) It was, for many observers, in the language of poetry that the ‘pure’ form of Scots was still to be found and, indeed, to be encouraged. Pinkerton’s famous remark is worth noting: ‘none can more sincerely wish a total extinction of the Scottish colloquial dialect than I, for there are few modern Scotticisms that are not barbarisms … Yet I believe, no man of either kingdom would wish an extinction of the Scottish dialect in poetry’ (Pinkerton , I: xvii; cited in Mohr , I: ). In other words, the auld lied, found in the works of the Makars, is still alive in the writing of many Scottish poets in the eighteenth century, a view (‘Back to Dunbar!’) not totally unlike that held by Hugh MacDiarmid in the twentieth century: ‘the independent literary traditions of Scotland … have always been discernable even when Scottish letters have seemed most submerged in English’ (Nash : ). Yet Geddes cautions against any temptation writers might have to ‘recreate’ any artificial form of the language (: ): It is my opinion, that those who, for almost a century past, have written in Scots, Allan Ramsay not excepted, have not duly discriminated the genuine Scottish idiom from its vulgarisms. They seem to have acted a similar part with certain pretended imitators of Spencer, Shakespeare, and Milton, who fondly imagine that they are copying from those great models, when they only mimic their antique mode of spelling, their obsolete terms, and their irregular constructions. Thus, to write Scottish poetry, (for prose has been seldom attempted), nothing more was deemed necessary than to interlard the composition with a number of low words
228 Eighteenth-century English
and trite proverbial phrases, in common use among the illiterate; and the more anomalous and farther removed from polite usage those words and phrases were, so much the more apposite and eligible they were accounted. It was enough that they were not found in an English lexicon to give them a preference in the Scottish glossary; nor was it ever once considered that all words truly Anglo-Saxon were as truly Scoto-Saxon words; and that every exotic term which the English have borrowed from other languages, the Scots had an equal right to appropriate. A caution some present-day Scots language resurrectionists would perhaps do well to heed. Nostalgia for the past is strong among eighteenth-century commentators, many seeing the ‘pure’ Scots language most clearly manifest in an antiquarian context and among contemporary older, non-urban speakers. The Society of Antiquaries of Scotland, that ‘Temple of Caledonian Virtue’ (founded in ) was viewed as an institution whereby the Scots language’s cause could be furthered. Callander of Craigforth (: ) concludes his Preface with the following remarks: We cannot conclude these cursory remarks without congratulating our readers on the establishment of a Society, which promises to revive a taste for the study of national antiquity. The worthy nobleman [the eleventh Earl of Buchan] to whose truly patriotic spirit it owes its institution, and the gentlemen associated for so laudable a purpose, it is hoped, will look with indulgence upon this poor attempt to second their endeavours, in restoring and explaining the ancient language of Scotland Again, in the Preface to his Two Ancient Scots Poems () Callander recommends the ‘usefulness and importance of investigating … our ancient language’, which he sees mainly in terms of the ways in which it justifies the study of comparative/historical etymology. Commenting on the necessity of producing a comparative Germanic language dictionary, he remarks (: ): ‘It is high time that something of this kind were attempted to be done, before the present English, which has now for many years been the written language of this country, shall banish our Scottish tongue entirely out of the world’, and, like several other contemporary Scots language apologists, appeals to what he sees as the language’s pristine state of preservation and originality (: –): Our language, as it is at present spoken by the common people in the Lowlands, has maintained its ground much longer than in England, and in much greater purity. This must be owing to the later cultivation of this part of the island, and its less frequent communication with strangers … we, in Scotland, have preserved the original tongue, while it has been mangled, and almost defaced, by our southern neighbours. It is probably true to say that throughout the period of the Enlightenment in Scotland – but more especially in the latter half of the eighteenth
Nationality and standardisation in Scotland 229
century – there were two opposing attitudes towards what could characterise a ‘standard’ (or socially acceptable) language for those Scots who saw themselves as belonging to the professional and newly enriched classes. On the one hand, there was a group – who we might call the ‘appeasers’ – who thought it appropriate to choose as a model for such a language some version of English which was close to that spoken by polite society in London or which, at the very least, had rid itself of as many overtly Scottish features as possible. On the other was a vociferous group who saw themselves as the defenders of a more overtly Scottish form of the language and who regarded attempts at its ‘Anglicisation’ with the greatest suspicion. This latter group defended the pedigree of the Scottish form of English, seeing it more as a separate identifiable language in its own right and advocated its preservation as an expression of national identity. Thomas Sheridan’s visits to Scotland were largely an attempt to promote the case of the English purist camp. Recall his aim of ‘the establishment of an uniformity of pronunciation throughout all His Majesty’s dominions’ (Sheridan : –). His Course of Lectures, delivered in Edinburgh in , were the catalyst for much of the interest in both English and Scots language there in the later part of the eighteenth century. Of his visit in , the Scots Magazine comments: In this course he will point out the true source of the difficulty (at present thought to be insuperable) which all foreigners as well as natives of different kingdoms and counties, that speak a corrupt dialect of English, find in the attainment of the right pronunciation of that tongue. In the close he will point out an easy and practicable way of reducing the living tongue to a standard, and establishing such a method of teaching it, that the adult may become masters of it with more ease and certainty, than of any other modern tongue; and that the rising generation in this country may be taught to speak it in its utmost purity. Again, the Scots Magazine applauds: Mr Sheridan’s Scheme for teaching all the British subjects to speak with such propriety, as may remove those broad, uncouth accents, which disgrace, and very often destroy, the effect of a very sensible discourse; nay, indeed, throw such an air of ridicule on the speech, and the speaker, as bring both into contempt with the audience. Disgrace of this type daily happens in the metropolis, to the natives of Ireland, Wales, Scotland, and even to the English pronunciation of Yorkshire, Somersetshire, and other remote counties. Yet this support is constrained by realism: ‘Whether such an uniformity of pronunciation can possible be established, we must question’ (Scots Magazine, July, : ). Sheridan’s lectures engendered in many of Edinburgh’s middle and upper classes a debate concerning the status of
230 Eighteenth-century English
Scots vis-à-vis standard London English, the Scots Magazine (July, , vol : ) recording that ‘Notice was given in the Edinburgh papers of July , that on the Tuesday following, the plan of a new establishment for carrying on, in that country, the study of the English tongue, in a regular and proper manner, was to be laid before the Select Society. Mention was made of this by Mr Sheridan, on the Friday before, in the last lecture of his first concourses’. The Select Society of Edinburgh is described by Henry Mackenzie (Thomson : ) as ‘A literary, or properly speaking a philosophic society, for they discussed all manner of subjects’. In we find the publication in Edinburgh by the Select Society of a special set of Regulations ‘for promoting the reading and speaking of the English Language in Scotland’: As the intercourse between this part of GREAT-BRITAIN and the Capital daily increases, both on account of business and amusement, and must still go on increasing, gentlemen educated in SCOTLAND have long been sensible of the disadvantages under which they labour, from their imperfect knowledge of the ENGLISH TONGUE, and the impropriety with which they speak it. Experience hath convinced SCOTSMEN, that it is not impossible for persons born and educated in this country, to acquire such knowledge of the ENGLISH TONGUE, as to write it with some tolerable purity. But, with regard to the other point, that of speaking with propriety, as little has been hitherto attempted, it has generally been taken for granted, that there was no prospect of attempting any thing with a probability of success; though, at the same time, it is allowed to be an accomplishment, more important, and more universally useful, than the former. The Select Society’s aim was to ensure that ‘a proper number of persons from ENGLAND, duly qualified to instruct gentlemen in the knowledge of the ENGLISH TONGUE, the manner of pronouncing it with purity, and the art of public speaking, were settled in EDINBURGH: And if, at the same time, a proper number of masters, from the same country, duly qualified for teaching children the reading of ENGLISH, should open schools in EDINBURGH for that purpose.’ That real success could be achieved in this area is implied by Sheridan in his A Rhetorical Grammar of the English Language (: ) where he observes of Lord Aylmoor, a prominent judge and a member of the Edinburgh Select Society: And yet there was still a more extraordinary instance which I met with at Edinburgh, in a Lord of Session (Lord Aylmoor), who, though he had never been out of Scotland, yet merely by his own pains, without rule or method, only conversing much with such English men as happened to be there, and reading regularly with some of the principal actors, arrived even at an accuracy of pronunciation, and had not the least tincture of the Scottish intonation.
Nationality and standardisation in Scotland 231
Indeed, Sheridan’s hypothesis that the decline of standards in spoken English are the result of inadequate school and university teaching is echoed by Alexander Scot () in a Scottish context, ‘thaut poalisht lengo, whoch ez noat spoc en Scoatlaund’ being unattainable there (Jones : –). But there was the problem (especially after ) that any attempt to promote a purely English model could risk a charge of national treachery. Could appeal be made to some more local, markedly Scottish version of ‘polite’ usage, and, if that, where was it to be found? Its provenance is hinted at in Douglas’s reference to ‘those whose professions or situations oblige them to speak in public. In the pulpit, at the bar, or in parliament’, ‘In the pulpit, at the bar, or in parliament, a provincial phrase sullies the lustre of the brightest eloquence, and the most forceful reasoning loses half its effect when disguised in the awkwardness of a provincial dress’, and in Buchanan’s ‘Their [the people of North Britain] acquiring a proper accent and graceful pronunciation, would embellish and set off to far greater advantage the many excellent and rhetorical speeches delivered by the learned both from the pulpit and at the bar’ (: xv, fn). There appears to be some evidence of a movement to promote a kind of national Scottish standard which, denuded of its most extreme regional and social class characteristics, might nonetheless still be classified as Scottish, serving at the same time as a ready and comprehensible linguistic medium for communication between Scottish regional types and between Scots and southern forms of English, thus enhancing commercial, cultural and political exchange – perhaps some kind of equivalent in Scots to Dante’s Volgare Illustre. James Adams () is quite explicit on this matter. While maintaining that even the ‘broad dialect rises above reproach, scorn and laughter’, he claims that there is another form of the Scots language, its ‘tempered medium’, which is ‘entitled to all the vindication, personal and local congruity can inforce, by the principles of reason, national honour, and native dignity’ ( : ). He argues that ‘refined English is neither the received standard of that country, and its most eminent scholars designedly retain the variation; retain it with dignity, subject to no real diminution of personal or national merit’ ( : ). The ‘refined’ metropolitan standard of London, advocated by so many contemporary commentators as the linguistic paragon, is not – Adams argues – the only ‘standard’ available to the Scots speaker, since the Scots ‘dialect manifests itself by two extremes’. The one is found in the ‘native broad and manly sounds of the Scoto-Saxon-English; the terms of coarse and harsh are more commonly employed. The other is that of a tempered medium, generally used by the polished class of society’ ( : –) – the implication being that there is no need to import a London standard to Scotland, since its own prestigious native norm is already flourishing, flourishing in particular among the members of the Scottish Bar ( : ):
232 Eighteenth-century English
The manly eloquence of the Scotch bar affords a singular pleasure to the candid English hearer, and gives merit and dignity to the noble speakers who retain so much of their own dialect, and tempered propriety of English sounds, that they may be emphatically named British Orators. In fine, there is a limited conformity in the present union of heart and interest of the two great kingdoms, beyond which total similarity of sounds would not be desirable, and dissonance itself has characteristic merit. Adams is almost unique in his time in recognising that a ‘polite and mitigated dialect’ and the ‘common and broad mode of speaking’ Scots ‘both have their merit, and give room for fair vindication’. His justification and support are primarily based on patriotic feeling and some sentimentality, since ‘every liberal and well educated observer will admit that there is something pleasing in the tempered dialect of the Scotch; that it is graceful and sweet in a well tuned female voice: that it would be a pity, nay an injury, to local merit, wholly to forgo it’ (: ). It is not possible in a short chapter like this to give more than a flavour of what appear to be the salient characteristics of the pronunciation of the ‘tempered medium’, what Alexander Scot () calls ‘Caledonian Scotch’ in the Enlightenment period; indeed, there is some evidence to suggest that contemporary observers, like Scot and Douglas, even saw ‘advanced’ and ‘conservative’ varieties of this type. Several generalised statements are to be found as to what constitutes the particularly Scottish linguistic shape in the period, typically A General View of English Pronunciation (to which are added Easy Lessons for the Use of the English Class) anonymously published in Edinburgh in . These statements point to six major and apparently salient characteristics of Scots pronunciation in the last quarter of the eighteenth century, some of which survive into the nineteenth century and can even be found in some twentieth-century sociophonetic contexts. The alternations in question appear to be between [a]/[ɛ]; [ɛ]/[e]; [ɔ]/[o]; [e]/[i]; [e]/[a]; [i]/[aɨ]. The last would seem to represent what we might see as an ‘advanced’ application of the Great Vowel Shift, with diphthongisation to [aɨ] of a pure palatal [i] vowel in an item like privy. Omissions from the General View’s list of Scotticisms are interesting too: for example, there is no mention of the rather obvious hoose/house contrast still so sensitive to sociological factors in the modern language (Johnston ). Why would this contrast not be recorded as a striking difference? Perhaps the reason for the omission lies in the perceived status of the monophthongal form in contemporary ‘polite’ Scots. For example, a surprising feature of Alexander Scot’s () characterisation of the pronunciation of Caledonian Scots, is his admission of renderings of the items ‘round’, ‘about’ and ‘however’ as roond, aboot, whoever, all showing a monophthongal [u] stressed vowel shape, rather than some expected [au] type. Twenty years later, on the other hand, Sylvester Douglas records little difference between Scots and English usage in this area of the phonology, almost everywhere
Nationality and standardisation in Scotland 233
recording an [ou] [sic] diphthong for historically long pure labial [uu] vowel space (Jones : –) while the Glasgow printed Spelling Book on a New Plan () assigns oor and oot realisations of ‘our’ and ‘out’ to the ‘Commonly Pronounced’ (that is to be avoided) category. Scot’s ‘Caledonian Scotch’ (Scot ) shows several other important differences from the ‘provincial dialect’ of Scots described by Sylvester Douglas at the turn of the century. Both writers seem to be describing the speech habits of the same group of professional-class speakers, but there are nevertheless interesting differences between their respective observations, mainly in their description of non-high front vowels. Both Scot and Douglas note that these speakers have a tendency to show a low value in [a] (or perhaps even [ɑ]) for what in ‘pure’ London speech would be high mid [e] vowels in items like lady, trade, favour, glade. Scot records laddy ‘lady’, trad ‘trade’ and favour ‘favour’ (where his probably represents [æ] or even a lowered [ɛ]), while Elphinston’s (: ) record of Scots mak, tak, brak, mappel, apel, craddel and sadel forms against English make, take, mapel, appel, cradle and saddel, also seems to point to some kind of low/mid vowel alternation, as do his garden/gairden, yard/yaird, dazzel/dazel, stag/staig and nag/naig contrasts. On the other hand, while Douglas observes that in an item like cradle, speakers are ‘apt to pronounce the a short as in bad, addle, paddle. But it should be pronounced as in shade, glade. Or as ladle’, it is important to note his caveat they will only do this when they are ‘endeavouring to speak properly’. A similar discrepancy arises in the observations of Scot and Douglas concerning the raising to [e] of both etymologically front low mid and low segments. Douglas is careful to suggest that it is only when speakers ‘try to catch the right pronunciation’, ‘aim at propriety’, or are ‘aiming at the improvement of their pronunciation’ that they will give a high mid [e] pronunciation to stressed vowel in items such as dragon, famine, camel, talent and several others (Jones : ). Scot shows nothing of this tendency, nor does he exemplify the commonly attested contemporary Scots characteristic of [ɛ, e] raising, most cogently witnessed under Douglas’s Clemency entry, where it is accorded considerable salience as a Scots feature: The e is short, and as in pen, hen, Pembroke. The Scotch pronounce it long, and like their sound to the Greek E; or like the English pronounciation of ay, in pay, say, a in phrase, and eigh in weigh. In delicate, delicacy, indelicacy, &c there is the same difference between the Scotch and English pronunciations of the e. This particularity, like the Scotch manner of pronouncing bought, sought, &c, is among the things which are most striking to an English ear, and are generally laid hold of in ‘taking off the Scotch dialect’, as the phrase is. The fact that Douglas sets aside such a long entry for this word itself attests to the ‘Scotchness’ of the stressed high mid vowel in this item, as does the
234 Eighteenth-century English
fact that he equates it – as a marker of regional salience – with the Scots high mid [o] in bought and, indeed, the peculiar Scots ‘short obscure i’ in ‘will’, ‘ill’ (perhaps some kind of [ɨ] segment) in reference to which he writes (Jones : ): ‘It is, however, so sensible to the English, that when they mean to ridicule the Scotch dialect they frequently lay hold of this circumstance, at the same time with the provincial sound of the ou in bought and sought, and of the e in clemency, memory, echo &c’. Douglas rather pointedly comments under his Helen entry that ‘the Scotch do not sound the h. And are apt, when they mean to speak correctly [my italics] to sound the e as they do in clemency’. In other words, the raised high mid front vowel is principally used by Douglas’s group of speakers in contexts where they are highly conscious of the situation and are likely to be open to hypercorrecting tendencies. Just such a vowel raising phenomenon is, of course, a notable characteristic of present-day prestigious (indeed stereotypically Upper Middle Class female) Edinburgh Morningside and Glasgow Kelvinside speech (Johnston ). But given what appear to be the General View’s stereotypical Scots mid vowel raisings of [a, ɛ], we are left with the difficulty of explaining the unraised [kradəl] ‘cradle’ pronunciations in Douglas: The Scotch (endeavouring to speak properly) are apt to pronounce the a short and as in bad, addle, paddle. But it should be pronounced as in shade, glade. Or as ladle. (Anon. ) and the trad ‘trade’ and laddy ‘lady’ versions in Scot. Although socially conscious speakers may have sought to ‘exaggerate’ the raised quality of the Caledonian Scotch haibit pronunciations by raising to [e], yet (and perhaps in a limited lexical set) the same group of speakers may have come to perceive that very vowel as itself too ‘marked’, too ‘over-refined’ or too stereotypically Scottish and ‘upper middle class’, provoking a return to a lowered vowel pronunciation. Indeed, the ‘polite’ Scots pronunciation may have come to be itself stigmatised. In much the same way, we might tentatively argue, do the daughters of upper middle class females in Edinburgh Morningside shun raised [e] and [ɛ] vowels in words like clement and tax, as too stereotypical of the social condition of their mothers and older female relatives, signalling their own identity through an avoidance of the raised vowel shape (Johnston , ; Jones : ). But whether Adam’s ‘tempered medium’ or Scot’s ‘Caledonian Scotch’ are themselves the ancestors of the modern prestige urban dialects of Edinburgh Morningside and Glasgow Kelvinside can only be assessed through further research.
13
English in eighteenth-century Ireland R AYMON D H IC K EY Essen University
Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to look at the development of the English language in eighteenth-century Ireland. By the eighteenth century English had been in the country for over years, but its distribution was nothing like what it was to become in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Although English established itself in the late twelfth century on the east coast of Ireland, the language played, and was to play, a minor role beside the two further languages of late medieval Ireland, Irish and Anglo-Norman (Hickey ). The invasion of Ireland from west Wales in was orchestrated by the Anglo-Norman lords of the Welsh marches in Pembrokeshire in south-west Wales. The English speakers who came in their retinue were not on the same social level as the Anglo-Normans, who quickly became the military leaders in Ireland. English in late medieval Ireland was confined to towns along the east coast, among tradesmen and artisans, while power resided with the Anglo-Normans. Despite this situation, English never died out in Ireland as Anglo-Norman was to do in the centuries following the initial invasion. The Normans assimilated linguistically and socially to the Irish in the countryside and their language had disappeared by the sixteenth century. The English showed less inclination to assimilate and the support they got from the fact that Ireland was an English colony further bolstered the position of English. Nonetheless, the story of English in Ireland is not one of a continuous replacement of Irish by English. The fortunes of the latter language waned in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries due to increasing Gaelicisation in Ireland. It was not until the turbulent seventeenth century that English gained the linguistic upper hand in the entire island of Ireland, something which was to remain the case to this day. The picture which the English language in Ireland presents at the beginning of the eighteenth century is a complex one and has four main aspects, each of which will be dealt with in this chapter. The first aspect concerns general forms of English which developed due to the interaction of earlier input varieties with the Irish language. These 235
236 Eighteenth-century English
forms are visible in the literary parodies of the Irish in eighteenth-century drama (see .–.). The second aspect refers to the oldest forms of English which survived in an enclave in the south-east corner of Ireland (see .). The third aspect has to do with the considerable Scots input to the north of Ireland in the early seventeenth century and which gave rise to Ulster Scots. This was in turn transported across the Atlantic by the many eighteenth-century Ulster immigrants to the New World. The fourth aspect involves the writer Thomas Sheridan and the sociolinguistic prescriptivism in the British Isles which he was instrumental in furthering, if not actually initiating. .
Background to the eighteenth century
Settlement policy from the late sixteenth to the mid seventeenth century was aimed at reorganising the demographic and property structure of Ireland by making it decidedly English, that is loyal to the Crown and Protestant in character. The picture of a harmonious society overrun by a more powerful neighbour is, however, a simplistic view of native Ireland at that time. Many elements of Irish society were already quite anachronistic (see chapter ‘The end of the old order’ in Lydon : –). The leaders were out of touch with reality in many respects; certainly the literary sectors of Irish society were (Canny : ). There were attempts to defend Irish culture against what was perceived as English dominance. The most notable example was made by Geoffrey Keating (Seathrún Céitinn, c.–, a member of an Old English family) in his native narrative of Irish history Foras Feasa ar Éirinn ‘Store of Knowledge about Ireland’ (Cunningham ) which did much to enhance the cultural assessment of pre-Norman Ireland and so throw a better light on native Irish culture (Canny : ). Whether native Irish society was robust and adaptive enough to have counterbalanced English influence in the seventeenth century is a matter of debate among historians. However, the survival of Irish society was not decided by its internal organisation but by military events. After the victory over the Catholic forces under James II by William III and his forces at the Battle of the Boyne () and after the militarily decisive Battle of Aughrim under his Dutch general Ginkel (Bardon : –) in the following year, Catholics were excluded from political power and from higher positions in society. After this the spread of English throughout the entire country could advance unhindered. The linguistic legacy of the seventeenth century is somewhat paradoxical. The only group, introduced into Ireland in this period, which changed the linguistic landscape was the one least loyal to the Crown and non-conformist in religion. Because of the perceived and practised otherness of the Ulster
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
237
Scots, it is their speech which has maintained itself longest and most distinctively. Indeed in Ulster the English planters, if anything, adopted features of the Scots probably by diffusion throughout the province. Other planters do not appear to have had an appreciable effect on the speech of the majority Irish, or if they did, then this effect was not lasting and has not been recorded to any clear extent. This may have been the case because in many instances the English settlements on the agriculturally more profitable land were interspersed with native Irish who remained as tenants rather than moving to less arable land (Clarke [] : ). The eighteenth century was the period of the Penal Laws (Byrne : f.), a set of legislative measures which had the effect of excluding the Catholic Irish from political and social life. These were relaxed towards the end of the century but without any substantial improvement in the lot of the Catholics. No general education was available for Catholics in this period but there was a loosely organised system of so-called ‘hedge-schools’ where migrant teachers offered tuition to individuals or small groups in largely rural areas. In Ireland the eighteenth century is at once a period of blossoming and decline, of liberty and of oppression. There was a long-lasting relative peace: between William’s suppression of the Jacobites in Ireland (–) and the United Irishmen uprising of there were no significant military campaigns against English rule. This is the age of the writer Jonathan Swift (–), of the philosopher Bishop Berkeley (–), of the political thinker Edmund Burke (–), of the elocutionist and grammarian Thomas Sheridan (–) and of his more famous son, the dramatist Richard Brinsley Sheridan (–). It is the period in which Dublin was almost on a par with London and could vie with it as a cultural centre with such events as the first performance of Handel’s Messiah in and the founding of the Royal Dublin Society in and the Royal Irish Academy in . Dublin Protestants prospered as burghers and landlords and their self-confidence is amply documented by the impressive Georgian buildings in the city, a living testimony to this period of relative wealth. During the eighteenth century the rural population was particularly disadvantaged. Not only did it not partake in the prosperity of the Protestant sector but it was subject to the ravages of famine, for instance when it struck very severely in –. However, despite the exclusion from urban prosperity, there was nonetheless a flourishing of Irish literature, particularly of poetry in Munster. This period produced such lasting literary works as Cúirt an Mheán-Oíche (‘The midnight court’, c., see dual language translation in Power ) by Brian Merriman (?–) and the Lament for Art O’Leary written by the widow of the individual in the poem’s title. It was also the period of Turlogh Carolan (–), the blind harpist who travelled in Connaught and Ulster and who has almost mythical status as a wandering bard, maintaining something of the old Gaelic order which had
238 Eighteenth-century English
flourished before the final defeat of the Irish at the beginning of the seventeenth century. The story of the Gaelic subculture of this time is recounted in a light much less favourable to the Protestants, and with an ideological slant of its own, in Daniel Corkery’s The Hidden Ireland ([] ). Ó Tuama and Kinsella () is a collection of neglected Irish poetry of this period. In the (early) eighteenth century there was still a survival of Irish literary culture, in this case in Dublin at a time when Jonathan Swift was the major literary figure of English in Ireland. Writers in Irish were present in the city and with Seán Ó Neachtain’s Stair Éamuinn Uí Chléire, ‘The story of Eamonn O’Cleary,’ one has an amusing story written about with linguistic jokes for a bilingual audience. For example, Ó Neachtain ridicules the efforts of the Irish to speak English and gives examples which show the strong influence of Irish syntax. This work offers support for the notion that both Irish and English literary cultures existed side by side in the capital at the beginning of the eighteenth century (Ó Háinle ).
Irish English in the eighteenth century
The documents for English in eighteenth-century Ireland are fairly abundant, at least compared to those for the centuries before this. A very obvious and accessible group is that of plays which were either written by Irish writers or by English writers wishing to portray Irish figures in their plays. The latter type must be treated with a degree of caution because only salient features of Irish English would have been obvious to English writers working in England. However, the dramas of these authors do give an indication of what features of Irish English were generally known to an English audience. Seen from this point of view, a play such as A Wife Well Managed () by Susannah Centlivre (–) is of interest. In general, there is more linguistic detail in the plays written by Irish authors themselves, for example by John Michelbourne (–) whose tragi-comedy Ireland Preserved, or the Siege of Londonderry () contains a lot of information on language. .
The tradition of linguistic caricature
The Irish figures who appear in Restoration and eighteenth-century drama are nearly always objects of ridicule used as a foil to the English characters with whom they contrasted. In these plays the character of the Stage Irishman makes a regular appearance. This figure has a long pedigree in English literature. It goes back at least to the end of the sixteenth century, for example to the anonymous play The Life and Death of Captain Stukeley (/) which contains unflattering portrayals of Irish characters. Throughout the following century a tradition arose of using Irish characters as stock figures
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
239
for parody and ridicule. In essence, this was a typically colonial attitude to the colonised who lacked power and prestige. The image stuck and the figure survived well into the twentieth century, at least to George Bernard Shaw. In linguistic terms there are no established features which are solely diagnostic of stage Irish characters. Rather the salient features of (largely rural) Irish English are emphasised: the fortition of /θ, ð/ to alveolar stops, the use of monophthongs for /eɪ/ and /əʊ/, a mid vowel in the MEAT lexical set and perhaps epenthesis in words such as arm [|aːrəm] and form [|fɒːrəm]. The characteristics depend largely on traditions of representing Irish pronunciations. Hence the spelling Oirish is often used by fictional authors for stage Irish characters. This can be taken to indicate [əɪrɪʃ] which is actually the pronunciation typical of local Dublin English (Hickey ) and the east coast and not of rural dialects in the west which would tend to have [aɪ] for /ai/. Literature by non-Irish writers reveals what features of Irish English were salient and thus registered by non-native speakers. These features have gone into forming the linguistic notion of the ‘Stage Irishman’ (Duggan [] ), a stock figure in much drama from the Restoration period, that is after . The stereotypical picture of the Irishman as excitable, eloquent and pugnacious, with a fair portion of national pride, is an image that Shakespeare fuelled in the figure of Captain Macmorris in Henry V. These are features which Kiberd () sees as consistent with the subsequent portrayals of the Stage Irishman. His function as a foil within English literature is of significance and continued into the twentieth century, see Kosok (: –) and the various references in Morash (). .
Drama in the eighteenth century
Not all Irish or Irish-related drama in the early modern period is centred around the Stage Irishman. Dramatists were active at the beginning of the eighteenth century who worked in the Restoration tradition of the comedy of manners. William Congreve (–) and George Farquhar (–) are the two best examples. Congreve was born in Leeds but his father was posted on military service to Ireland, which led to his being educated there, first at Kilkenny School and later at Trinity College, Dublin, where he was a fellow student of Swift. He is the author of a number of dramas, the best known of which is probably The Way of the World (). The language of his plays does not, however, betray any non-standard features and cannot be taken as particularly Irish in character. The other dramatist just mentioned, Farquhar, was born in Derry and later started studying in Trinity College, Dublin, and then worked as an actor in the Smock Alley Theatre, playing major Shakespearian roles. He left for London in where he began as a playwright. His best-known comedy, The Beaux Stratagem (), was written just before he died.
240 Eighteenth-century English
Farquhar is one of the last Restoration dramatists and his many plays, such as The Twin Rivals () and The Stage Coach (), had a strong influence on subsequent writers in the eighteenth century, including novelists such as Fielding, Smollett and Defoe. His plays sometimes contain Irish characters and Farquhar uses eye dialect (dialect features in English orthography) to represent the Irish speech of his time. The later eighteenth century (Morash : –) saw the novelist and dramatist Oliver Goldsmith (–) produce his popular comedy She Stoops to Conquer () as well as the Dublin playwright Richard Brinsley Sheridan (–) begin his dramatic production with The Rivals in , which was a success at Covent Garden. Soon afterwards, Sheridan produced his own major work, The School for Scandal (), which was quickly followed by another comedy of considerable merit, The Critic (). Neither Goldsmith nor Sheridan were particularly concerned with representing Irish speech in their plays. Indeed it was Sheridan’s father, the elocutionist Thomas Sheridan (–), who in his one play, Captain O’Blunder or The Brave Irishman (/), did portray Irish speech using conventional means of eye dialect. The eighteenth century also saw some minor dramatists of sentimental comedies who are now more or less forgotten. Of these one could mention John O’Keefe (–) who was quite successful and devised a distinctly Irish mode for plays produced in Ireland, often in the reputable Smock Alley Theatre (Morash : –). The above features are attested from at least the beginning of the early modern period in Ireland, that is from c., and can be seen in the eighteenth-century plays which have been alluded to above. To illustrate a selection of these features in actual texts, two small extracts of speech by an Irish figure in two typical plays of this era are given below. The first comes from a play by George Farquhar and the second from a farce written by Thomas Sheridan as a young man: ()
George Farquhar: The Twin Rivals (/) Teague. Fet [what], dear Joy, ’tis the bravest Plaase [place] I have sheen [seen] in my Peregrinations, exshepting [excepting] my nown brave Shitty [city] of Carick-Vergus. – uf, uf, dere ish [there is] a very fragrant Shmell [smell] hereabouts. – Maishter [master], shall I run to that Paishtry [pastry]-Cooks for shix [six] penyworths of boil’d Beef? Teague. Early! Deel tauke [devil take] me, Maishter, ’tish [Master, ’tis] a great deal more than almost twelve a-clock.
The texts of these plays are contained in A Corpus of Irish English by the present author which is contained on the CD-ROM accompanying Hickey (). See the website www. uni-due.de/CP for further information.
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
241
Table .. Historical features of eighteenth-century Irish English
. . . . . . . . . .
Feature
Realisation
Representation Attested until
Vowels Long U-retention Long I-retention Long A-retention Long OA-retention A-back raising ER-retraction SERVE lowering I-ʌ-interchange A-raising Short E-raising
now [nu:] lie [li:] face [faːs] clothes [klɔːz] take [tɔːk] were [wɔːr] serve [saːrv] just [jɪst] what [fɛt] yes [jɪs]
, noo <ee>, lee , faash , cloaths , tauke , wor <ar>, sarve , jist <e>, fet , yis
speak [spɛːk] follow [|fɑli] old [auld]
, spake , folly , ould
mid c mid c mid c mid c late c late c late c early c early c now only prenasally today, recessive today today
when [ɸɛn] went [βɛnt] ask [æks] self [ʃɛlf] sister [tʃɪstɚ] drop [d̪rɑp] nothing [nʌtɪŋ]
fen vent <x>, ax <sh>, shelf , chister , dhrop , noting
c c early c today, recessive early c today today
killed [kɪlt] pound [pɛʊn] pretty [pɚːti]
kilt poun’ purty
today today today, only in unstressed syllables
. Unraised long E . Final-O-fronting . OL-diphthongisation . . . . . . .
Consonants F [ɸ] for WH V [β] for W ASK-metathesis S-palatalisation SH-CH exchange T/D-dentalisation TH-fortition
Phonological processes . Post-sonorant devoicing . Post-sonorant stop deletion . R-Vowel-metathesis
Notes / The English long vowel shift (the ‘Great Vowel Shift’, Pyles and Algeo []: –), which began in the late Middle English period, was slow to be implemented in Ireland. /uː/ and /iː/ were recorded in the MOUTH and PRICE lexical sets respectively until the mid eighteenth century. Unraised long E is also connected to the English long vowel shift: the vowel stems from Middle English /ɛː/ (and by extension from words with /eː/ in Middle English) which was not raised to /iː/ in Ireland. In the nineteenth century, non-local Irish English adopted an /iː/ pronunciation in line with mainstream British English. / /aː/ in the FACE lexical set and /ɔː/ in GOAT set are further evidence that the long vowel shift had not taken place in Ireland by the early eighteenth century. This feature was censured by Thomas Sheridan in the late eighteenth century, see Sheridan (: ). Its origin is uncertain.
242 Eighteenth-century English Notes to Table .. (cont.)
Rounding after /w/ is probably responsible for this retraction. It is most likely a feature of the West Midland dialect of Middle English (Mossé : ) which was present in later input varieties of English in Ireland. Earlier Irish English (from the Kildare Poems to the eighteenth century, Hickey: : –) contains no attestations of this retraction. However, in the nineteenth century it is common, for instance in the works of William Carleton and Dion Boucicault. This is the same feature as produced barn, dark, Berkshire, Hertfordshire, etc. in British English. It had a much wider range in Irish English, probably owing to its quantitative representation in input varieties. A shift of [ɪ] to [ʌ] is a basilectal Ulster Scots feature (see below) and still found occasionally with speakers from Scots-settled parts of Ulster. Some words with this shift are lexicalised vernacular forms used by supraregional speakers for local flavour, e.g. onions [|ɪnənz] . [ɛ] for [ʌ] is a common feature of contact Irish English, e.g. brush [brɛʃ], justice /dʒɛstɪs/. This feature appears to have been continued with some speakers into the twentieth century (it was a prominent characteristic of conservative Received Pronunciation until the mid-twentieth century, Bauer : f.). Short E-raising is common today, but only in south-west and mid-west rural Irish English and only in pre-nasal position, e.g. when [ʍɪn], pen [pɪn]. Joyce [] (: ) states that ‘short e is always sounded before n and m, and sometimes in other positions, like short i: “How many arrived? Tin min and five women.” ’ Unraised long E has a special status as a stereotypically Irish feature which has been lexicalised in the expletive Jaysus! [dʒɛːzɪz] and in set expressions like lea’ [lɛː] me alone! It is found regularly in vernacular varieties throughout Ireland. Final-O-fronting is common in southern rural Irish English and also in parts of the north. It can appear as a reduction of the vowel to schwa. This leads to alternative pronunciations and lexical splits with non-local and vernacular form of words, e.g. fellow [fɛloʊ] and [fɛlə]. OL-diphthongisation is most common with old and bold today. Joyce ([] : ) mentions it with reference to these words and to hould where it is not found today in supraregional speech. However, in vernacular varieties, both north and south, there is a greater range of forms with OL-diphthongisation. On its occurrence in British English, see Tagliamonte and Temple (). This feature was already noted by John Ray in . / What appears to have happened here is that Irish non-palatal /f/ (phonetically [ɸ]) was used as an equivalent for [ʍ] and Irish non-palatal /v/ (phonetically [β]) for [w] by individuals in language shift. In eye dialect the bilabial fricative [ɸ] is rendered as f or ph, and its voiced counterpart [β] as v. This development would appear to be independent of developments in Britain, although a case might be made for the transportation of [ɸ] and [β] to the Caribbean by indentured Irish in the seventeenth century (see Trudgill et al. on approximants in this context but without a consideration of the Irish situation). Metathesis of /s/ + stop was already a feature of Old English (Lass : ) and the sequence /ks/ in ask is attested there. It was most likely a feature of input varieties to Ireland which was retained. / S-palatalisation is a still feature of contact Irish English. Related to this is the feature noted by Joyce ([] : ) that ‘there is a curious tendency among us to reverse the sounds of certain letters, as for instance sh and ch “When you’re coming to-morrow bring the spade and chovel, and a pound of butter frech from the shurn.” ’ T/D-dentalisation is a feature which is confined to vernacular varieties and found across Ireland. It occurs before /r/. TH-fortition takes on two forms (i) fortition to dental stops and (ii) fortition to alveolar stops. The former is part of supraregional Irish English, e.g. thin [t ɪ̪ n], this [d̪ɪs], whereas the latter is stigmatised. / Post-sonorant devoicing () is generally a rural feature and post-sonorant stop deletion (), in a way its mirror image, is typical of urban vernaculars of the east coast.
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
243
Notes to Table .. (cont.)
R-Vowel-metathesis is still very common in many varieties but is now confined to unstressed syllables and the metathesis of /r/ and a short vowel, e.g. modern [|mɒdɹən], secretary [|sɛkəɹtɛri]. However, metathesis involving stressed vowels, as in purty ‘pretty’ was common before the twentieth century.
Teague. Be me Shoul [By my soul], my fole [whole] Generation ish [is] so. – I have noting [nothing] but thish [this] poor Portmantel, and dat [that] it shelf ish [self is] not my own. Teague. [Aside.] I will tell a Lee [lie] now; but it shall be a true one. – Macfadin, dear Joy, was his Naam [name]. He vent [went] over vith [with] King Jamish into France. – He was my Master once. – Dere ish de [there is the] true Lee, noo [lie, now]. () Thomas Sheridan: Captain O’Blunder or The Brave Irishman (/) Captain. Yesh [yes], you shons [sons] of whores, don’t you see by my dress that I am a shentleman [gentleman]? And if I have not better cloaths [clothes] on now, phat [what] magnifies that? Sure I can have them on to-morrow. Captain. Arra then! … and they know my faash [face] ever since – Shir [Sir]. Captain. O, … you mean my chister’s [sister’s] husband … . Jonathan Swift and the English language Jonathan Swift was born in Dublin in and educated at Kilkenny Grammar School (later Kilkenny College), and began studying at Trinity College, Dublin, in . However, he left for England in where he became personal assistant to Sir William Temple. After some time Swift decided to enter the Church of Ireland, was ordained and became a prebendary in a parish in northern Ireland. He returned to England once more and to the service of Temple where he remained until the latter’s death in . In he was made a Doctor of Divinity by Trinity College, Dublin. After this he tried repeatedly to obtain a secure and respectable position in England but eventually failed; he became Dean of St Patrick’s Cathedral, Dublin, in and remained in this office until . Swift died in Dublin in after several years of illness. In his long career as a writer Swift wrote poetry, satires and political pamphlets and was considered one of the greatest masters of English prose. He was careful about language and had decided views on the state of English in his day. This is most obvious in his concern for resisting change in the language. Consider the following extract from A Proposal for Correcting, Improving and Ascertaining the English Language () which makes this point clearly:
244 Eighteenth-century English
()
what I have most at Heart is, that some Method should be thought on for ascertaining and fixing our Language for ever, after such Alterations are made in it as shall be thought requisite. For I am of Opinion, that it is better a Language should not be wholly perfect, than it should be perpetually changing; and we must give over at one Time, or at length infallibly change for the worse.
Much has been made of the fact that Swift and other Augustan writers were concerned with ascertaining (that is codifying, see Beal a: ) and fixing the English language (note the italics in Swift’s original). Their decided comments about language are directed against change, but not against socially determined variation. Swift, like Daniel Defoe (?–), favoured the establishment of an academy to protect English from further ‘corruption’, that is change. But the academy did not materialise in the end. After the publication of Samuel Johnson’s monumental dictionary in , the need was not felt so strongly because Johnson had established just what English was, and should be, in terms of vocabulary. English pronunciation was not a concern of Swift’s, perhaps because as someone who grew up in Ireland, his pronunciation would, by nature, have been different from that in the polite English society of his time. What Swift demanded in his proposal was delivered by others in the realm of grammar. A generation after his death authors appeared who were instrumental in the codification of English grammar, above all Robert Lowth (Tieken-Boon van Ostade, ‘Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism’ this volume). Whether their writings were as prescriptive as they were later taken to be is uncertain. The extent to which Lowth and other similar authors may have reflected rather than dictated contemporary usage is a matter of debate. For this reason present-day scholarship (Tieken-Boon van Ostade : ) chooses to speak of ‘codification’ in this context. The studies of Swift’s language fall into two broad categories. One looks at Swift’s views on standardisation and language change, the second considers evidence for eighteenth-century pronunciation in Swift works, especially in his poetry. The first type is illustrated by Strang () who examined Swift’s wish to influence the course of English. She offers explanations for this, chiefly the great changes in the lexicon of English of his period, and suggests that the desire to be understood by future generations was the motivation for Swift’s linguistic conservatism. Furthermore, Swift’s sense of order caused him to pay inordinate attention to such matters as the placing of adverbs and verbal particles. The second type of study is exemplified by Kniezsa () who, by using Swift’s rhyming poetry (various odes), attempts to trace the development of Middle English long vowels which in south-east Britain underwent the major English vowel shift. She finds confirmation for the view that in early eighteenth-century Ireland, represented by Swift, Middle English /aː/ had
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
245
not been raised very far, maximally to /ɛː/, as indicated by rhymes such as fame : stream. She also adduces evidence for the non-raising of /ɛː/ in words written with ea, a conservative feature of Irish English still found today, albeit recessively. As a public figure with a keen interest in language Swift would have been in a good position to report on the nature of Irish English in the early eighteenth century. However, his concerns were with the standard English of his time and there is only one very short piece – A Dialogue in Hybernian Stile (c.) – in which he ridicules the speech of two Irish individuals. In this piece he uses language which contains non-standard features, for example Them apples is very good, and there are a few puns based on Irish pronunciations of English words, for example bear [beːr] for beer. A number of words in English which are clearly renderings of Irish originals also appear, for example sougawn (Irish súgán) ‘straw rope’, spawlpeen (Irish spailpín) ‘farm labourer’. .
Linguistic antiquarianism: Forth and Bargy
In the context of the present volume this section ties up with the contribution by Kortmann and Wagner on dialectal forms of English in the eighteenth century. But the present section is concerned with a form of English which died out in the early nineteenth century. Its relevance today is that it clearly illustrates the phenomenon of linguistic antiquarianism found in Ireland in the latter half of the eighteenth century and into the nineteenth century. Furthermore, there are linguistic features here which are found in other parts of the anglophone world and their attestation in eighteenthcentury Ireland can help to throw light on situations elsewhere. The dialect considered here was once spoken in the south-east corner of Ireland, in the baronies of Forth and Bargy (read: [bargi]). After a period of decline, it was replaced entirely in the early nineteenth century by the general Irish English of the region. The earliest record may well be contained in a late sixteenth-century drama. The seventh scene of the play The Famous Historye of the Life and Death of Captain Thomas Stukeley (from the s, printed in ) has been handed down in two versions, the second of which was probably in the Forth and Bargy dialect. But for all practical purposes, the knowledge we have of this dialect is due to the work of a few scholars who at the end of the eighteenth and the beginning of the nineteenth century recorded it in the form of glossaries. These glossaries are available in database and text form in A Corpus of Irish English by the author, on the CD-ROM accompanying Hickey (), and have been used for the present analysis.
The insistence on the antiquity of things Irish served a clear purpose: it helped to show outsiders, i.e. English observers, just what a venerable cultural heritage the Irish had; see the eighteenth-century extracts emphasising this in Crowley (: –, –).
246 Eighteenth-century English
The main sources of information on Forth and Bargy are two studies: the first is a twenty-two-page essay with a glossary and some text by Charles Vallancey which was published as a ‘Proceeding of the Royal Irish Academy’ in . The second study is somewhat more substantial (seventy pages in all) and consists again of a glossary with some texts which were collected at the end of the eighteenth century by a Protestant farmer, Jacob Poole, though not published until by an Anglican clergyman, Rev. William Barnes (see the foreword in the reprint by Dolan and Ó Muirithe [] : ). A report by the Englishman J. A. Picton, also dating from , is of secondary interest although it contains an ostensibly original address in the dialect. Two further studies from the nineteenth century, which, however, hardly add to the decipherment of the dialect, are Hore (–) and Russell ( []). At the beginning of the twentieth century this variety of English aroused a degree of linguistic interest. The Anglicist philologists Edmund Curtis and James Jeremiah Hogan comment on the dialect in two works of a general nature on the history of Irish English (Curtis : ; Hogan : f.). The Celtologist T. F. O’Rahilly compared the stress system of this dialect with that of surrounding varieties of Irish (O’Rahilly : f.). Dolan and Ó Muirithe ([] ) is a reprint of Barnes () which, while it offers some etymological information, does not present a linguistic analysis of the material. The only scholar who tried to evaluate the material of Forth and Bargy linguistically is Heuser. He relies on Barnes’s edition of Poole (Heuser : ) and sees the dialect as a continuation of the language of the Kildare Poems despite the relatively long period of time which lies between the attestations of the two varieties of diachronic Irish English. This opinion is shared by the present author and arguments for it are offered in the more detailed analysis given in Hickey (: –). The south-east of Ireland is the area in which the first English settlers arrived so that the Forth and Bargy dialect can be assumed to reach back to the initial phase of settlement in the late Middle Ages. Furthermore, the baronies of Forth and Bargy were – and still are – quite isolated. Located to the south of Wexford, without any towns and no passage to any other part of the country, the baronies were geographically separate from the areas to the west and north. Their position as an enclave is shared with the area Fingal, an area immediately north of the city of Dublin. Knowledge of this variety of Irish English is due to historical references and to three small texts which are, however, corrupt (Bliss : ; for a relatively detailed analysis, see Hogan : ). Initial voicing, final stressed vowels and a number of Irish loanwords as well as syntactic constructions link Fingal linguistically with Forth and Bargy. After the seventeenth century there are no more extant texts in the Fingal dialect and – as opposed to the situation with Forth and Bargy in the south-east corner – there are no records of speakers of the dialect.
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
247
The origin of the enclaves of Fingal and of Forth and Bargy can be accounted for by considering the geopolitical developments in Ireland in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries. After the extensive cultural and political assimilation of the original settlers, Ireland became more and more Irish-speaking. The wave of Gaelicisation continued into the fifteenth century and was mentioned frequently by contemporary historians such as Richard Stanihurst in his ‘Description of Ireland’ in Raphael Holinshed’s Chronicles (Stanihurst []: ). He maintains that English was only spoken in the area of the Pale (then encompassing Co. Dublin and north Co. Kildare) and some adjoining counties such as Meath and Louth to the north and Wicklow, Carlow, Kilkenny, Wexford and Waterford to the south. Stanihurst also mentions a certain county ‘Fingal’, probably to him the area around Dublin City. A pocket in north county Dublin is the only area where the Fingal dialect survived in the seventeenth and perhaps into the eighteenth century. Stanihurst also refers to the second region in which English succeeded in maintaining itself: Forth and Bargy. From this it is evident that the two areas, Fingal and Forth and Bargy, are relic areas in which the English of the pre-Elizabethan period continued to be spoken beyond . The varieties of English which were introduced into Ireland in the course of the seventeenth century, in the period of general colonisation of the south of the country, formed the basis for general southern Irish English today and were clearly distinguished from the varieties of the older period, that is those of Fingal and of Forth and Bargy. These later varieties were themselves also influenced by Irish. However, certain prominent features of the English of the older period such as initial voicing or unshifted long vowels are no longer to be found. Further forms attest to the archaic nature of Forth and Bargy, for example ligt /lɪçt/ ‘light’, nickht /nɪçt/ ‘night’ which show a palatal fricative in the syllable coda which was lost in the late Middle English period in southern England (Wełna : ). .. Linguistic features of Forth and Bargy In the following a brief summary of the linguistic features which characterise this variety are listed. In each case a few examples are quoted for the purpose of illustration. Further examples can be found in Dolan and Ó Muirithe ([] ). Initial voicing This is a feature which Forth and Bargy share with southern and southwestern varieties of English and which confirms that these were the source of early Irish English. The voicing affects both fricatives and stops (the dental stops below are the result of the fortition of the corresponding fricatives, an established feature of Irish English): ()a. Initial voicing of fricatives
248 Eighteenth-century English
/f/ → /v/ vour ‘four’, vorty ‘forty’, vaat ‘fat’, vurst ‘first’, vrosth ‘frost’ /s/ → /z/ zouth ‘south’, zound ‘sound’, zin ‘sun’, zoon ‘soon’, zoot ‘soot’ b. Initial voicing of stops /p/ → /b/ blenty ‘plenty’, boor ‘poor’ /t/ → /d/ detch ‘thatch’, dap ‘tap’, drue ‘true’ /t /̪ → /d̪/ dhraat ‘throat’, dhree ‘three’, dhunder ‘thunder’ TH-fronting A shift which Forth and Bargy shares with vernacular London English (Wells : f.) and African American English (Green : –) is the shift of dental to labial fricative. It applies to the voiced fricative and can be seen in brover ~ brower ‘brother’ and aulaveer ‘altogether’. The shift must be quite archaic as the normal realisation of /ð/ in Irish English is a stop, [d̪] or [d]. This would not have shifted to a labial fricative so the shift must have taken place at the initial stages of Forth and Bargy before the specifically Irish fortition of dental fricatives had set in. There is no evidence that this feature was inherited from input forms of south-western English (the shift of ambidental to labiodental fricative is indicative of London and the Home Counties, Wakelin : ). The south-west is noted, if anything, for a stop realisation (Upton and Widdowson : f.). Intervocalic fricative deletion There are a few cases where the fricatives in intervocalic position are deleted, typically involving /ð/ or /v/, for example anoor ‘another’, shoule ‘shovel’, deel ‘devil’. The latter forms occur in other forms of eighteenth-century English, see the extract from Farquhar in () above. Fricative deletion is found in final position as well, for example lee ‘leave’, aboo ‘above’, and can be linked to general processes of cluster simplification in this variety (see next section). Cluster simplification Sequences of a sonorant and a homorganic stop are simplified to the sonorant alone, for example hone ~ hoan ‘hand’, lone ~ lloan ‘land’, sthrone ~ sthroan ‘strand’, houle ‘hold’, shuller ‘shoulder’ (/l/ < /ld/). This also applies to a sonorant and fricative or two sonorants, for example harrest ‘harvest’ (/r/ < /rv/), baarich < ME barlic ‘barley’ (/r/ < /rl/), arich < Middle English (ME) earlich ‘early’ (/r/ < /rl/). There would seem to be a generalisation here, namely that the least sonorant element is deleted, for example heal ‘health’, del ‘delve’, zil ‘self’, zar ‘serve’. Final devoicing In words of more than one syllable a final alveolar may be devoiced, for example marreet ‘married’, vorreat ‘forehead’.
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
249
Sibilant widening: s to ʃ The shift of /s/ to /ʃ/ after a front or low front vowel is attested here, for example lash ‘last’, treesh ‘trace’, treshpass ‘trespass’, threesh ‘trace’. This is a widespread feature of former rural Irish English and can be found occasionally today. The reason for this is probably the interpretation of consonants after front vowels as phonetically palatal by speakers of Irish, hence the shift of /s/ to /ʃ/. Approximant to labial shift The influence of Irish on the development of this variety can be clearly recognised in the current shift. An equivalent to the voiceless approximant [ʍ] was reached by using the bilabial realisation [ɸ] of Irish non-palatal /f/: fen [ɸ-] ‘when’, fidi [ɸ-] ‘whither’ and farthoo [ɸ-] ‘whereto’. See Notes / in Table . above. Velar fricative /x/ This sound would appear to have survived longest in Scots and Ulster Scots (where it is still found today, albeit recessively). In Forth and Bargy /x/ is found in inherited English forms, such as bougkt < ME boght ‘bought’, thaugkt < ME thought ‘thought’, and also in Irish loanwords such as saaughe < Irish sách ‘sated, satisfied’, boochelawn < Irish buachalán (buí) ‘ragwort’. The presence of /x/ in Irish and the continued contact of English speakers with Irish speakers would have favoured the retention of the velar fricative. SERVE-lowering The lowering of /e/ before /r/ is a very widely attested feature of Irish English (see Note in Table . above), more than in English where it became established in words like barn (ME bern) and dark (ME dark) as well as in toponyms such as county names, for example Hertfordshire, Derbyshire, etc. In Forth and Bargy this lowering is also evident, for example saareth ‘served’, garr ‘anger’. Through the process of supraregionalisation (Hickey : –), SERVE-lowering receded and was finally lost in the late nineteenth century (Hickey a). Dentalisation before /r/ In the glossaries for Forth and Bargy an alveolar plosive before or after /r/ is consistently written with a following h, that is as th or dh. This shift from alveolar to dental for stops followed by /r/ is widely attested for vernacular varieties of Irish English to the present day (Hickey : ). For Forth and Bargy there are a few instances of the shift forwards when the stop is preceded by /r/ as in hurdhel ‘hurdle’, shoorth ‘shirt’, angarth ‘angered’, returnth ‘returned’. The last two cases additionally show the devoicing of final stops after a sonorant, again a common feature in later Irish English.
250 Eighteenth-century English
Epenthesis Vowel epenthesis is found in Forth and Bargy and breaks up a heavy coda in a monosyllabic word by disyllabifying it. It occurs both with lexical stems and as a result of plural formation: callef ‘calf’, hallaf ‘half’, elles ‘else’; caroles ‘carols’, knuckeles ‘knuckles’. Epenthesis may have been present in the input varieties of English in the south-east of Ireland. But more significant is its widespread occurrence in Irish where it is similarly motivated, that is it breaks up heavy clusters by resyllabification. Epenthesis can thus be viewed as an areal phenomenon (Hickey , ) which spread from Irish into the forms of English spoken in its vicinity. Metathesis Metathesis in sequences of /r/ and a short vowel is also found in Forth and Bargy. This type of metathesis is recorded in the history of English and occurs in present-day Irish English as well (Hickey : –). Instances from the glossaries are the following: burgs ‘bridge’, aferth ‘afraid’, dhrives (plural) ‘turf’. The long vowel shift The forms of English taken to Ireland with the initial anglophone settlement of the country did not show the long vowel shift which later took place in southern England (see Notes / in Table . above). The appearance of words with this shift in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries in Ireland is due to a replacement of the older pronunciations with the newer one by a process of lexical diffusion (this is true because the replacement did not affect the entire lexicon at once). The dialect of Forth and Bargy clearly shows the earlier non-shifted vowels, for example in contexts where a diphthong is found later, cf. heeve /hiːv/ ‘hive’, dreeve /dri:v/ ‘drive’, dee /diː/ ‘die’ or where a raised vowel occurs, cf. laady ‘lady’, kaake ‘cake’, faace ‘face’. Word-final stress All authors who have concerned themselves with Forth and Bargy refer to two aspects of the dialect (see remarks in Hogan : and those of Barnes in Dolan and Ó Muirithe [] : ): firstly, the slow tempo of speech and secondly, the fact that the stress with most polysyllables fell on the final syllable. The slow tempo would seem to have contributed to the unexpected lengthening of vowels which is suggested by many spellings in the glossaries. The stress on the final syllable of polysyllabic forms also led to lengthening. This would seem to have been conditioned, that is it occurred when the final syllable ended in a sonorant: before /n/: za|moon ‘salmon’, smadde|reen ‘smattering’, lic|keen ‘looking’, chi|sool ‘chisel’, fa|shoon ‘fashion’, before /r/: wur|gheere ‘bellows’, wy|ddeer ‘furze’. This lengthening is also found in final open syllables, for example bellee ‘belly’.
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
251
The use of a grave accent on <e> by the glossarists might indicate that the epenthetic vowel in forms such as gaudès ‘fine clothes’, nollès ‘awls’ and oathès ‘oats’ was stressed. However, this cannot be confirmed by evidence from elsewhere, either within the variety or from others forms of Irish English. Final stress led in a few cases to procope of an initial unstressed vowel, for example with procope: garr ‘anger’, twish ‘betwixt’. With Irish loanwords a long vowel in the second syllable of a word is represented by a long vowel in Forth and Bargy: knau|ghaan < Irish cnocán ‘small hill, heap’. Retention of archaic morphology Finally, one can remark on the archaic morphology which appears in the short text pieces appended to the glossaries of Poole and reprinted in Barnes. Examples of this are the prefix-/i/ with past participles: ee-brougkt ‘brought’, ee-felt ‘felt’; /tʃ/ for I in compound forms: ‘Chas ‘I was’, ‘Cham ‘I am’, ‘Chull ‘I will’ as well as older plurals, for example those with a final nasal, as in been ‘bees’. The development of Ulster Scots The succession of James VI of Scotland (–) as James I (–) to the English throne led to the establishment of the Stuart monarchy. After the defeated Irish lords left Ulster in , James I moved quickly and their lands were escheated. The government decided to initiate the plantation of Ulster along the lines of the Munster plantation in the late sixteenth century. This time, however, the land was reserved for Scots settlers, encouraged by their compatriot James I, together with Englishmen, mostly from the north Midlands and north of England (Adams : ; : ). Because of the union of the Crowns in the Scottish were allowed to settle in Ireland without difficulty. Settlers were a mixture of private individuals along with royal officials (servitors) and some ‘deserving’ Irish, that is those loyal to the Crown during the Nine Years War (–). The plantation settlements were to form the basis for the demographic split of the country. Owing to the Scottish and English background of these immigrants the division of Ireland came to be as much linguistic as political and confessional. The Scottish undertakers tended to have smaller estates than the English, probably because they were not in as financially robust a position as the latter (Robinson [] : ). The settlers from lowland Scotland received the slightly less profitable lands because their average incomes were somewhat below that of the corresponding English undertakers. Furthermore, their estates were scattered across the escheated land. Additional factors for the demographic development of Ulster are important here: in many landless Irish, who were supposed to move to estates administered by
252 Eighteenth-century English
the Church or by officials, were given a stay of eviction. Initially, this was because undertakers had not yet arrived in Ulster. But when they did, tenancies were granted to the Irish because they were willing to pay higher rents. Indeed by this situation was given official recognition by a ruling which allowed undertakers to keep native tenants on maximally a quarter of their portions at double the normal rent. There was much competition between Irish, English and Scottish settlers with the Irish generally having to be content with poorer, more marginal land, such as the Sperrin Mountains of central Tyrone, while others, for whatever reason, remained to work under Scottish/English owners. The success of the Ulster plantation was relative: the numbers envisaged by the English administration did not always reach the targets set nor did the landlords always have the capital to carry through the agricultural and urban projects which the government had envisaged. Many of the companies retained Irish tenants (against the wishes of the English crown) and there were conspiracies against the English, notably in . The plantation of Ulster is regarded in works on Irish history, for example Canny () and Foster (), as the major event at the beginning of the early modern period. There are differences in the assessment of both its significance and value. The major grievance which it triggered stemmed from the banishment of local Irish to poorer, more marginal lands in Ulster with the fertile lowlands left in English or Scottish hands. The uneven spread of the Scots across Ulster meant that the regions where Ulster Scots was spoken did not encompass the entire province and nowadays these are no longer contiguous because of a reduction of their size. The remaining areas are, however, regions of historical settlement. Three are located on the northern periphery from the north-west through the north-east to the south-east of Ulster, hence the term ‘Coastal Crescent’ or ‘Northern Crescent’. Area () and most of () were established by private plantation schemes which preceded the official efforts under James I (these areas are nearest to Scotland). The north-east of Co. Derry was part of this early seventeenth-century plantation and linked up with the already existing Antrim Scots area. A British settlement of both the city and county of Derry was attempted by various London-based companies with varying success. In Donegal, Scots from Ayrshire settled from onwards (Montgomery and Gregg : ). This is the historical source of the Laggan settlement to the west, south-west of Derry City. Of the three areas listed in Table . that of Antrim is often considered the heartland, perhaps because it is closest to Scotland. The Donegal area is, and has been, a contact area with both Irish and other forms of Irish English; the Down area is smaller and is bordered on the south by varieties of Ulster English which merge fairly quickly into the transitional area with the south.
English in eighteenth-century Ireland Table .. Main areas of Scots settlement in Ulster () () ()
A broad band including most of Co. Antrim (except the south approaching Belfast and the north-east corner) and the north-east corner of Co. Derry. North Co. Down, most of the Ards peninsula and a section of the mainland on the west bank of Strangford Lough. An area flanked on the east by the River Foyle and extending in the north central part of Co. Donegal (the Laggan area).
Map .. Main dialect distribution in Ulster
253
254 Eighteenth-century English
The number of speakers of Ulster Scots is difficult to estimate, especially because there is no clear demarcation between Ulster Scots and Englishbased varieties. In the late s George Brendan Adams suggested that the population of the three Ulster Scots areas amounted to about ,. That figure is now larger due to a general increase in population (particularly in the towns contained in these areas such as Ballymena and Coleraine), but the number of Ulster Scots speakers is difficult to determine, not least because the difference between it and more general forms of English in Ulster is not always easy to perceive and this difference has been overlain by the strong antithesis of urban and rural speech in contemporary Ulster. The optimistic figure of , which is offered, not uncritically, by Montgomery and Gregg (: ) may serve as a general orientation but nothing more precise is available. The lexicography of Ulster Scots has been served by a large number of academic articles dealing with specific lexical items or word fields (see relevant section in Hickey ). A dictionary in popular style is available in James Fenton’s The Hamely Tongue. A Personal Record of Ulster-Scots in County Antrim ( []). Loreto Todd’s Words Apart. A Dictionary of Northern Irish English () is medium in size and coverage. A more academic work – with a broader brief – is the Concise Ulster Dictionary () edited by Caroline Macafee. Most of the items concern farming and rural life in general, but regional vocabulary for parts of the body, clothing and terms for individuals is also recorded. .
Attestations of Ulster Scots
The first documents which show Ulster Scots are from the second and third decades of the seventeenth century (Montgomery : ) and are mostly legal texts and family letters (though there is a letter to Elizabeth I which dates from , Montgomery and Gregg : ). The force operating against Ulster Scots was the ever-increasing anglicisation which was progressing steadily in both Ulster and Scotland. As a spoken medium, however, Ulster Scots was if anything reinforced in the course of the seventeenth century (P. Robinson ) with continuing emigration of settlers from the west of Scotland, long after the official plantation (–) had ceased. Indeed it is estimated that as many as , Scots (a generous figure by Macafee, quoted in Montgomery and Gregg : ) left for Ulster after the Williamite victory in Ireland in . The reason for this is that in England this victory led to the official eradication of rebellious elements in Scotland, not just among Catholics but among religious dissenters as well, notably the Presbyterians. Although written attestations of Ulster Scots declined in the seventeenth century, the core areas in Ulster continued to exist. There is also evidence of Ulster Scots features found in such documents as church records and
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
255
Table .. Features of Older Scots and conservative Ulster Scots )
Retention of OS ū (not shifted to /au/) : cow /kʉː/, hoos /hʉs/
)
A low, unrounded back vowel for OS o : soft /sɑːft/, top /tɑːp/
)
OS ei merges with /i/ and not /ai/ [əɪ, ɑe] : die /di:/
)
OS ō has a fronted, unrounded reflex : blood /blɪd/
)
Fronting and raising of Old English ā home /he:m/
)
Little raising of above vowel after labio-velars : two /twɔː/
)
Lowering of /ɪ/ to /ɛ/ : thick /θɛk/
)
No raising of Middle English /eː/ to /iː/ : beat /bet/, meat / met/
)
Raising of OS /a/ especially before /r/ : farm /feːrm/
)
Distinct open and close mid back vowels : horse /hɔːrs/, hoarse / hoːrs/
)
Distinction between short vowels before /r/ : term /tɛrm/, burn /bʌrn/
)
No rounding of /a/ after /w/ : swan /swan/
)
Retention of distinction between /ʍ/ and /w/ : whale /ʍeː (l)/, wale /weː (l)/
)
Retention of syllable-final /x/ : bought /boːxt/
)
Vocalisation of word-final velarised /l/ [ɬ] : full /fɩʉ/, still /stɛ/
emigrant letters and from research into neglected ephemeral publications (Montgomery : –). These show that Ulster Scots continued as an unofficial medium for a large section of the population. A modest literature in Ulster Scots flourished for about fifty years from the s to the mid nineteenth century, produced by a group of writers who have come to be known as the Rhyming Weavers (Hewitt ) because they were engaged in the traditional industry of linen weaving. This popular verse is by writers, without great education, who claimed to be representing the speech of the people in a movement similar in nature and intention to that of Robert Burns in Scotland (Montgomery : ). Perhaps the best known of the Rhyming Weavers was James Orr of Ballycarry, north-east of Belfast. This notion of Ulster Scots as ‘the voice of the people’ was continued in the nineteenth century in prose documents which described and commented on local issues. There does not, however, seem to have been a coherent concept of an Ulster Scots tradition as much of this writing was not in a conventionalised spelling and does not appear to have drawn consciously on the work of previous writers.
256 Eighteenth-century English
.
Delimiting Ulster Scots
Any treatment of Ulster Scots must start by distinguishing between conservative Ulster Scots – ‘braid’, that is broad, Ulster Scots – which has its base in rural areas of Ulster and more ‘standard’ forms which are spoken chiefly in urban centres, parallel to the established distinction in Scotland between Lowland Scots and Scottish Standard English. An essential feature of ‘standard’ Ulster Scots is that most words with non-standard Scots vowel values have reallocated values which are nearer to those in English throughout Ulster. The following list illustrates vowel values and some consonantal features which are indicative of conservative Ulster Scots. The yardstick of reference is Older Scots (OS below), up to (Aitken ), that is before large-scale emigration to Ulster began. When compared to southern British English the shifts of vowel values in Scots constitute a realignment of vowel space. A prominent shift is that of Middle English /oː/ to a front vowel, with or without rounding, that is Older Scots /ɪ, ø/. In Ulster Scots this vowel appears as /ɪ/: /oː/ → /ɪ/ loom / lɪm/. Other vowel changes are seen in the following forms: /ɪ/ → /æ/ limb /læm/, /æ/ → /ɑː/ lamb /lɑːm/. The vowel deriving from Older Scots ei is diphthongised so that a word like die is realised as [dəɪ]; the former vowel ai is realised as /e/ as with stay /ste/ (Harris : ). These realisations can be regarded as instances of standardisation as /əɪ/ and /e/ are, in the Ulster context, the equivalents of RP /aɪ/ and /ei/ respectively. With consonants, the reinstatement of word-final /l/ and the relative absence of /-x/ are salient. Among the vowels, one finds a general reallocation. For instance, many items from the FOOT lexical class, traditionally with /ɪ/, are reallocated to values which are derived from more standard forms of English, with /ʉ/ corresponding to /uː/. The attestations of /ʌ/ are considerably more numerous in Ulster Scots than in English throughout Ulster and hence reallocation may take place here as well: foot /fɪt/ → /fʉt/, blood /blɪd/ → /blʌd/, door /dɪr/ → /dor/; steady /stʌdɪ/ → /stɛdɪ/, winter /wʌntər/ → /wɪntər/, dog /dʌg/ → /dɒg/. Vowel length One of the features used to distinguish Ulster Scots is vowel length. Probably in the fifteenth to sixteenth centuries, phonemic vowel length was lost in Scots and the occurrence of long versus short vowels became a matter predictable by the nature of the following segment. Because of this, Scots departed from the organisational principle of the remaining Germanic languages, all of which retain phonemic vowel length and many of which (all the north Germanic languages, bar Danish) have phonemic consonant length as well. The innovation in Scots was to create a system where length depended on what followed the vowels. The factors determining the occurrence of phonetically long vowels are treated as a single complex, termed the
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
257
Scottish Vowel Length Rule, or alternatively Aitken’s Law, after the Scottish linguist Adam J. Aitken who was the first to describe the phenomenon explicitly (Aitken ). In stressed syllables, before /r/, /v/, /ð/, /z/ and /ʒ/, before another vowel and before a morpheme boundary vowels are long. In all other environments they are short. Hence one has /iː/ in here, leave, see, sees, in idea, in agreed (= agree # d ), but /i/ beat, bead, feel, leaf, cease, greed. The Scottish Vowel Length Rule can lead to distinctions arising which do not exist elsewhere in English, for instance, the verb use has a long vowel, [jʉːz], whereas the noun use has a short one [jʉs]. The matter of the morpheme boundary is important as it has led to minimal pairs such as brewed [brʉːd] (= brew # ed ) and brood [brʉd]). The vowels which are most subject to this regulation are the high vowels /i/ and /ʉ/ (= English /uː/). Many varieties also apply the rule to the mid vowels /e/ and /o/. For some conservative varieties of Scots, which have the vowel /ø/ (often unrounded to /ɪ/) – a front vowel deriving from Middle English /oː/ – there is a distinction between a long and short version, the words do, floor showing the long vowel with the words boot, fool having the short one. In addition, the vowel before /r/ is lowered: poor [peːr]. The operation of the vowel length rule has meant that many words which are distinguished primarily by vowel length (often with attendant quality differences) have homophonous counterparts in Ulster Scots as with cot /kɒt/ and caught /kɔːt/ both of which are [kot]. A more tenuous merger can be found where the effect of lowering and lengthening of /ɛ/ and the raising of /ɑ/ before velars yields the same phonetic value as in neck [nɛːk] and knack [nɛːk]. Diphthongs are also affected by the vowel length rule. For Modern English /ai/, deriving from Middle English /iː/, there are two main realisations. The first occurs in a short environment and is characterised by a raised onset, hence life, tide are [ləɪf] and [təɪd] respectively. The second realisation is found in the long environment, and shows a much lower onset and is phonetically long, for example alive, tie, tied are [ə|laɪv], [taɪ], [taɪd] respectively. Modern English /ei/, which stems from Middle English /ai/, has a realisation [əɪ], as in hay [həɪ]. This can lead to homophony or near homophony in some cases as with the word pair tail and tile which can both be [təɪl]. Equally, contrast can arise when /əɪ/ stands in opposition to /ɑe/. In word final position this is particularly obvious with word pairs like bay [bəɪ], pay [pəɪ] and buy [bɑe], pie [pɑe]. Consonants As opposed to the situation with vowels, consonant realisations are not useful in distinguishing Ulster Scots from Ulster English. Indeed, there are no consonants which occur in the one group of varieties and not in the other. A good indicator of affiliation is the velar fricative /x/. While it is true that
258 Eighteenth-century English
this occurs throughout Ulster, the lexical incidence in Ulster Scots is much higher than in English elsewhere in Ulster. In the latter, /x/ occurs in words which are definitely of Scottish origin, for example [pɛːx] ‘pant’, [sprɑːx] ‘sprawl’ (Montgomery and Gregg : ). It is also found in Gaelic loanwords which have gained general currency, such as loch ‘lake’. This applies of course to Ulster English as well, but /x/ is furthermore present as an inherited feature from Scots. It corresponds to the same sound in Middle English and is indicated orthographically by gh, as in bought [bɔːxt], enough [|ɪnʌx]. .
Grammar
The grammatical features of Ulster Scots (Robinson ) bear a close resemblance to those found in Lowland Scots as well (Montgomery a). For instance, contraction of pronoun and auxiliary (with no as negator), rather than that of auxiliary and negator, is a prominent feature, for example She’ll no be in time at this rate and the clitic form -nae/ny as in Ae didnae come home last night. He canny leave now are also common in Scotland. This latter usage in Ulster Scots has been highlighted by Montgomery and Gregg (: ) as one of the most salient grammatical aspects. Perhaps because of this, it has spread somewhat to Mid Ulster English. The principal parts of verbs show considerable deviation from those in general Ulster English. There are two reasons for this. The first concerns the vowel values found in Ulster Scots: [de] ‘do’, [heː] ‘have’ show fronted /oː/ and raised (and lengthened) /a/ respectively. The deletion of final /-v/, with lengthening of the nucleus vowel, can also be seen in /giː/ ‘give’. The second reason is the fact that in Ulster Scots two forms of verbs are often found where Mid Ulster English has three. Hence [din] is both ‘did’ and ‘done’ (compare the early modern English [dʊn], without the Scots fronting of course). Similarly, [gin] is both ‘gave’ and ‘given’. In these cases, the past participle functions as a preterite form. Modal verbs also have distinct forms in Ulster Scots: there is a special form of the modal verb must, maun [mɑːn] (Corrigan ) and can appears as an infinitive in phrases like [|ɑːl |noː kən |stəi] I’ll no can stay for the more standard I’ll not be able to stay (Montgomery and Gregg : ). Noun morphology has a distinct profile in Ulster Scots as remnants of nasal and umlaut plurals are still to be found, for example [in] eyes and [ʃin] shoes show an /n/ as plural marker where in other forms of English the general /s/ has long since been established. [kɑe] cows shows a vowel which is the long variant of the diphthong arising from a much older /i/ which in its turn is the unrounded version of /y/, the original umlaut found in the plural of cow. Further features are found among deictic elements: the demonstratives thon ‘yon’ and thonder ‘yonder’ are found as equivalents to the now obsolete
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
259
distal deictic pronouns of English: D’ye mind [remember] thon man from Galway? Some of the grammatical structures are definitely recessive while others have, if anything, spread beyond the traditional Ulster Scots areas (Montgomery and Gregg : ). A recessive feature would be the use of two modals in a single verb phrase as in She might could come this evening. Such double modal structures are an established feature of Appalachian English (Montgomery and Nagle ; Montgomery : ), which implies that they were to be found in Ulster Scots before the emigration to the New World in the eighteenth century, and they are also a feature of Lowland Scots (Miller : f.). A diffused feature in Ulster is what is termed ‘punctual whenever’ (Montgomery : ; Montgomery and Kirk ), a use of the iterative adverb in situations which imply a single point in time. Again this is a feature which is found in some rural forms of English in the eastern United States (Montgomery ). () What was the scene like whenever you arrived ? (Belfast English) Whenever I was about eight years, when I got old enough to know where I was at, I left. (Smoky Mountains in Tennessee) A grammatical trait of Ulster Scots which has received considerable attention from linguists in recent years is verb–subject concord in the present tense (Montgomery ; McCafferty ). This is a complex issue with the precise nature of the subject as well as the person and number of the verb determining whether an -s inflection is used on the verb in question (Ihalainen ). In general one can say that a personal pronoun as subject is least likely to trigger s-inflection as the pronoun has the function of a verbal clitic (Börjars and Chapman ). The more independent the subject and the greater the distance between it and the verb form, the more probable the occurrence of s-inflection becomes. Here are two examples from emigrant letters of Ulster Scots which have been analysed in detail by Montgomery (): () All the young men that has come here lately would be glad they had not come. Your letters comes on without delay. The first of these sentences shows a relative clause with a plural antecedent triggering s-inflection (has is interpreted as an s-inflected form here). The second sentence is similar in type but in this case a single noun qualified by a possessive pronoun functions as subject. Verbal concord is another example of a diffused feature. It is found not only in Ulster Scots. In Belfast English the phenomenon is also common, as James Milroy (: ) noted with examples like Them eggs is cracked so they are, a finding confirmed by Alison Henry in sentences like The glasses is broken; The books goes down well (Henry : ).
260 Eighteenth-century English
.
Vocabulary
Any consideration of the vocabulary of Ulster Scots must rest on the rural forms of the dialect as it is here that the most distinctive lexical items are to be found (Braidwood , ). There are some words which are now apparently confined to Ulster Scots such as clootie ‘left-handed’ (Braidwood ; Todd : ), lap ‘small heap of hay’, (hay)pike ‘haystack’, crew ‘pigsty’ (Montgomery and Gregg : ). Some of the items suspected of being Ulster Scots, like mitch ‘play truant’ (Todd : ) or cog ‘cheat in school’, are general in Irish English of the south and may simply be part of archaic/regional vocabulary which has survived in Ireland, not solely retentions of Scots input in the north. Occurrence in the south is not, however, a sufficient criterion for a nonScots origin: thole ‘tolerate’ (from OE tholian, Todd : ) is not found in the south but is not Scots either, rather a Middle English retention in Ulster (Adams : ). The clearest Scots examples are those which are attested in Lowland Scots and also found in Ulster, for example brae ‘hill, slope’, firnest ‘in front of’, greet ‘to cry’, ken ‘to know’, lum ‘chimney’, oxther ‘armpit’, tae ‘to’, glar ‘mud’. Ulster Scots words/usages have sometimes diffused into general Ulster English as with hogo ‘bad smell’ (Todd : ), drouth ‘thirst’; the word wean for ‘child’ is more common than Scots bairn (Todd : ). Southern Irish English may show these items on occasions, for example gawk ‘stare’ (Todd : ). .
Ulster Scots in the United States
The eighteenth century is a period during which considerable emigration from Ulster (and Scotland) took place to North America. Estimates for the numbers vary. At the one end, historians such as Kerby Miller suggest that anywhere between , and , people emigrated between and the American Revolution and that only between one fifth and one fourth of these were Catholics (Miller : ). Duffy et al. (: f.) maintain that throughout the eighteenth century emigration ran at about , people a year and totalled over a quarter of a million. At the other end one has estimates for the Ulster Scots migration in the eighteenth century which favour lower numbers. Louis Cullen suggests , in the period – (Cullen : f.). Bernard Bailyn suggests that , Protestant Irish (from the north and the south) left for North America in the years – (Bailyn : –). While Miller’s figures apply to Ulster and Scotland together, those of Cullen and Bailyn apply to Ulster alone. Nonetheless, there is a considerable discrepancy between the estimates, something which is no doubt due to the lack of exact figures, for example in census returns, for the period
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
261
in question. Notwithstanding these differences, one can still recognise that a sizeable proportion of settlers in eighteenth-century North America were of Ulster or Scots provenance and that these must have had a significant influence on emerging forms of speech in the New World. The situation in Ulster, which at the beginning of the eighteenth century triggered this emigration, was characterised by a combination of economic and religious grievances. The religious motivation was rooted in such demands as the sacramental test which, according to an Address of Protestant Dissenting Ministers to the King (), was found by Ulster Presbyterians to be ‘so very grievous that they have in great numbers transported themselves to the American Plantations for the sake of that liberty and ease which they are denied in their native country’ (Bardon : ). The desire of the Ulster Scots Presbyterians, who left in the eighteenth century, to seek more freedom to practise their variety of Protestantism in America has been underlined frequently (Miller : –). But there is consensus among historians today (Miller ; Foster : f.; Bardon ) that economic reasons were probably more important: the increase in rents and tithes compared with the prospect of paying little rent and no tithes or taxes in America. Added to this were food shortages due to failures of crops, resulting in famine in / and most severely in . Foster (: ) stresses that the nature of Ulster trade facilitated emigration: the ships which carried flax seed from America were able to carry emigrants on the outward journey. Up to the prime destination was New England and this then shifted somewhat southwards, to Pennsylvania (from where the Irish frequently pushed further south (Algeo : f.; Montgomery : ) and later to South Carolina. The rate of emigration depended on the situation in Ireland. In the late s, in the s and in the early s there were peaks of emigration which coincided with economic difficulties triggered by crop failure or destruction in Ireland (Montgomery : f.). The option of emigration in the eighteenth century was open more to Protestants than to Catholics. The latter would equally have had substantial motivation for emigrating; after all the Penal Laws, which discriminated against Catholics in public life, were in force from at least the late seventeenth to the end of the eighteenth century. But emigration did not take place to the same extent with Catholics (the overwhelming majority for the eighteenth century were Protestants). It could be postulated that the Catholics lacked the financial means for a move to the New World. However, the Protestants who left were not necessarily in a financially better position; indeed many were indentured labourers who thus obtained a free passage. Foster (: ) assumes that the Protestants were more ready to move and subdue new land (as their forefathers from Scotland had done in Ulster in the previous century). The Protestant communities were separate from the Catholics and more
262 Eighteenth-century English
closely knit. Furthermore, they were involved in linen production so that the cargo boats used for emigration would have been in Protestant hands anyway. The Ulster Scots emigration (Wood and Blethen ) is not only important because of its early date but because it established a pattern of exodus to North America which, apart from Merseyside and to a much lesser extent Tyneside and some other locations in the north of England, became the chief destination of Irish emigration in the northern hemisphere (Miller and Wagner ). The features of regional forms of American English which are suspected of deriving from Ulster Scots input in the eighteenth century cover phonology, morphology and lexis (Crozier ). In the following a few features of pronunciation and grammar are discussed. For a detailed consideration of lexis, see Montgomery (). The vowels in cot and caught are not always distinguished, either in length and/or quality. The lowering /ɔ/ to /ɒ/ and then unrounding and centralisation to /a/ (Wolfram and Schilling-Estes : f.) may have been influenced by Ulster Scots speakers (Montgomery b: xxvii). Traditionally, it is a feature of western Pennsylvania which had considerable Ulster Scots settlement (Montgomery : f.), though as Lass (: ) notes the shift is to the back vowel in Lowland Scots/Ulster Scots but to the central vowel in American English. The unrounding of /ɒ/ is common in the far north of England as well (Trudgill : ), for example lang for long. In Appalachian English (Christian ), the position of a reflexive is occupied by a simple personal pronoun as in I washed me quickly. This may well be a transported Ulster Scots feature, also found in Pittsburgh, western Pennsylvania (Montgomery : ). In varieties which historically have had an Ulster Scots and/or Scots input, notably Appalachian English, sequences of two modals can be found, for example She might could come tomorrow (Feagin ; Montgomery : ; Bernstein ). Here it might be more the mechanism than the actual form which was inherited. Such constructions are also found in African American English (see Martin and Wolfram : –). On the occurrence in Scottish English, see J. Miller (: f.); for Scots, see McClure (: f.). There are also attestations from Tyneside; see Beal (: ). According to Mishoe and Montgomery (: ) the most common multiple modals in both Northern Ireland and the Linguistic Atlas of the Gulf States Concordance are might could, used to could and might can. Multiple modals are quite scarce in both documentary records and dialect fiction on both sides of the Atlantic. A reason for this is offered by the two authors: multiple modals (Fennell and Butters ) are not neutral lexical items or idioms but bound to well-defined pragmatic restrictions which have to do with face-saving, negotiation among interlocutors and interactional ‘give and take’. Mishoe and Montgomery conclude (: ) that ‘the documents that
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
263
we have access to lack the types of contexts in which they most often were employed.’ So-called ‘positive anymore’ may occur in the Midland area of the United States (and further west, Wolfram and Schilling-Estes : ; Eitner ) as in They go to Florida on their holidays anymore. It may well derive from the speech of eighteenth-century Ulster Scots settlers whose predecessors had in turn picked this up from native speakers of Irish before emigration. Butters (: f.) views positive anymore as an extension of the negative use and is doubtful of the proposed Ulster Scots/Irish antecedent. However, he does not specify why this should have occurred in American English and not in other parts of the anglophone world. Another feature is the use of whenever is the sense of ‘when’ (see .. above), for example Whenever George VI was King (Milroy and Milroy : ). This is also attested for the American Midland region (Montgomery : ). A-prefixing has a source in English where the a is a reduced form of on much as in adverbs such as alive, asleep (< on life, on slæpe): She was a-singing. In Irish a similar construction exists: the preposition ag ‘at’ is used with the so-called verbal noun (a non-finite verb form with nominal characteristics) Bhí sí ag canadh lit.: ‘was she at singing’; Fiche bliain ag fás lit.: ‘twenty years at growing’. However, the structure is not found in contemporary Irish English and its attestation historically is meagre so that the English input is likely to be the source of the construction in Appalachian English (Montgomery : ); see Wolfram () and Wolfram and SchillingEstes (: ) as well as Dietrich (). The lexical influence of Ulster Scots on American English, above all on regional forms, cannot be dealt with here for reasons of space. A good assessment of this influence can be found in Montgomery (b) which is a dictionary with a general introduction. The entries offer documentation of the lexical items both in Ulster and in North America (labelled as ‘US’). Fenton ( []) is a detailed account of Ulster Scots lexis from the core area of Country Antrim (north-east corner of Ireland).
Thomas Sheridan, elocution and eighteenth-century prescriptivism
The latter half of the eighteenth century saw a steep rise in linguistic prescriptivism in Britain (Beal a: –). This is the time in which the publication of grammars of English increased greatly (Tieken-Boon von Ostade, c), grammars which were aimed at different audiences: at a general public, at young women competing with men for a good education, at men trying to improve their position in life. But all these grammars had in common that they were concerned with the use of English from an external, social point of view. The style of these grammars was frequently censorious;
264 Eighteenth-century English
usage which was regarded as unacceptable was condemned in no uncertain terms. The era of judgmental scholarship had begun and was to continue during the nineteenth century and indeed through the twentieth century to the present day. One the key figures in the rise of prescriptive language studies was the Irishman Thomas Sheridan who was born in , grew up in Dublin and died in London in . Sheridan enjoyed a diverse career as actor, lecturer and writer (Howell ). Significantly, he was the godson of Swift and produced The Works of Swift with Life ( volumes) in . As a dramatist Sheridan is known for one play, Captain O’Blunder or The Brave Irishman (), which he wrote in as an undergraduate. He was also manager of the Smock Alley Theatre in Dublin (Sheldon ) where he worked for some years. However, the plays of his son Richard Brinsley Sheridan (– ) were better known in his day and were regularly produced in London at Covent Garden and at the Drury Lane Theatre. In the present context, Sheridan senior is important as the author of A Rhetorical Grammar of the English Language () which contains a section on the Irish pronunciation of English. He is also the author of a successful General Dictionary of the English Language (, volumes) and an earlier A Course of Lectures on Elocution published in the same year as Lowth’s grammar – – and by the same publishers – R. and J. Dodsley in London. Probably on the grounds of these linguistic interests, Sheridan developed a close friendship with the lexicographer Samuel Johnson. The opinion of the latter on the work of Sheridan throws an interesting light on English–Irish attitudes of the time. Dr Johnson saw it as a distinct disadvantage for Thomas Sheridan to be Irish and pronouncing on English (Beal b: ). This contrasts strongly with the English attitude towards Swift, who was so often held up as a paragon of English style. But Swift was a Protestant dean who had worked in England and only occasionally wrote on specifically Irish matters. Sheridan, on the other hand, was a Catholic actor, minor playwright and self-appointed arbitrator of correct English usage. .
Elocution
Sheridan’s interest in language surfaces in his middle years with the publication of his lectures on elocution and there is a connection between this initial concern and his later pronouncements on correctness in language. The term ‘elocution’ acquired new shades of meaning during the eighteenth century. Originally one of the so-called five ‘offices’ of rhetoric (Hickey b), elocution was concerned with finding appropriate words for the topic, the speaker and the audience and was thus the domain of oratory and concerned with good style and expression. Furthermore, elocution came to be associated
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
265
with actors, given their professional concern with speaking in public, and Sheridan himself was originally an actor. Sheridan strived to establish serious academic underpinnings for elocution. He found in the work of the seventeenth-century philosopher John Locke assumptions which improved the credentials of elocution. Locke believed that ‘words are the signs of ideas, tones. i.e. spoken language, the signs of passions’. As elocution was taught by reciting previously composed material in public, it was clearly associated with ideas and hence to be taken more seriously. The opinion was adopted that the way to teach individuals to speak well was to train them in reciting written material. This stance characterised elocution within educational systems in the English-speaking world and still does inasmuch as it is still a school subject. .
Sheridan’s influence
It is known that Sheridan travelled widely throughout the British Isles, lecturing on elocution and English usage, notably in Scotland. He had a considerable influence on other authors, for instance on his main rival, London-born John Walker who in published A Critical Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language much in the vein of Sheridan’s works and in which he compares his dicta to those of his Irish colleague (see the many discussions in this respect in Beal a, for example p. ; see also Beal, this volume, section ). Walker seems to have had the greater success (Sheldon ) and his dictionary was reprinted repeatedly down to the early twentieth century (over times between and to be precise, Beal a: ). Many authors quickly recognised that among the rising middle classes there was a market for works on elocution and jumped on the bandwagon with alacrity. A good example is Stephen Jones () who produced a work self-confidently entitled Sheridan Improved: A General Pronouncing and Explanatory Dictionary of the English Language which by was already in its third edition. Apart from John Walker just mentioned, Sheridan had other rivals who produced works of the same type as he did, indeed in one case with the same title, and almost at the same time. For instance, William Kenrick produced A New Dictionary of the English Language in in London and brought out A Rhetorical Grammar of the English Language in only three years after Sheridan’s work of an almost identical name. There were not just imitators but detractors as well; for instance, there is an anonymous book entitled A Caution to Gentlemen who use Sheridan’s Dictionary. John Walker also had his imitators and improvers. In Benjamin. H. Smart brought out Walker Remodelled. A New Critical Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language and followed this with The Practice of Elocution in .
266 Eighteenth-century English
.
Correcting the natives
Eighteenth-century elocution is not just about teaching what is ‘correct’ but about censuring what is deemed by authority to be ‘base’, ‘vulgar’, ‘rude’ or just ‘provincial’. The censures of the elocutionists can be used by linguists today to glean information about regional and/or colloquial pronunciation of their time. In his A Rhetorical Grammar of the English Language () Sheridan inserted an appendix entitled ‘Rules to be observed by the natives of Ireland in order to attain a just pronunciation of English’ (Sheridan : –). This also contains a number of remarks on the ‘mistakes’ which the Irish make when speaking English. At one point he offers a list consisting of two columns with Irish and English pronunciations respectively. A detailed description and analysis of these features can be found in Hickey (b). The features are in general archaic traits of Irish English, for example where the long vowel shift had not taken place as in matron with a long [aː] or beat with [ɛː/eː]. Sheridan also notes instances of hypercorrection which stem from the presence of these vowel values, for example pree for pray, convee for convey. With the spread of the southern English vowel values in nineteenth-century Ireland (Hickey a) this hypercorrection died away. Sheridan does not hold back with criticism of regional accents in parts of Britain either: ‘With regard to the natives of Scotland as their dialect differs more, and in a greater number of points, from the English, than that of any others who speak their language, it will require a greater number of rules, and more pains to correct it’ (Sheridan : ). He is unashamedly censorious, but kindly offers suggestions for curing the unacceptable speech habits of the Scots. Here the goal is quite clear: provincial pronunciations are to be abandoned and those of educated south-east England are to be adopted. The Welsh are taken to task as well, this time for the devoicing of consonants in initial and medial position, for example fice for vice, seal for zeal, ashur for azure, and so on, and again the goal is to weed out such provincialisms from their speech and so make it acceptable in educated circles in and around the capital. .
Sheridan’s strictures and eighteenth-century Irish pronunciation
In the appendix to his grammar Sheridan compares the pronunciation of Irish English with southern British English. He is fairly accurate in his description and in the representation of vowel quality. The Irish English forms which he quotes are those in which ‘well-educated natives of Ireland differ from those of England’ (: ). Sheridan is referring here to the Protestant middle and upper class given the fact that at the end of the eighteenth century the attribute ‘well-educated’ in Ireland applied first and foremost to Protestants. At this time the middle class of the city was prospering (see Moody and Martin : and Johnston []: , for
English in eighteenth-century Ireland
267
descriptions of Dublin at this time). This social group enjoyed more independence from England than ever before (up to the ‘Act of Union’, Johnston [] : ). Dublin at this time enjoyed a certain political freedom and this would have minimised the direct influence of south-eastern British English on the Irish pronunciation of English. Although one can determine Sheridan’s group of speakers fairly easily, it is not so apparent just what he regarded as the standard English which he refers to and who is supposed to have spoken it. In the preface to his grammar he talks of ‘our pronunciation’ (: xxii) and refers to Johnson with regard to spelling (: xxiii). He further notes that the pronunciation of English by the people in Ireland, Scotland and Wales can deviate from the standard without offering any more specific information on what he regards this standard to be. His praising remarks (: xix) on the correct pronunciation of the ‘Augustan Age’ in England are in keeping with mid-eighteenth-century views of this era as found with Robert Lowth, for example.
Conclusion
Most of the developments discussed above continued into the nineteenth century, the period in which the majority of the native population were to switch from their native language Irish to English. The basic contours of the language shift variety of Irish English (Hickey , Chapter ) had been determined during the eighteenth century and its features still survive in vernacular forms of present-day Irish English, chiefly in rural areas. On the other hand, in the cities, above all in Dublin, it gradually yielded supraregional Irish English in the course of the nineteenth century. Ulster Scots established itself firmly in the north of Ireland and was transported to eastern parts of North America. In Ulster it persisted through the nineteenth and into the twentieth century when it began more and more to lose its specific traits and merge with general Ulster English, despite attempts at revival in the late twentieth century. The input it provided to the United States was a lasting influence and was not diminished despite the large-scale emigration from the south of Ireland to North America in the nineteenth century. What was not continued in Ireland after the eighteenth century was the concern with prescriptivism and the English language. This may be due to the fact that Thomas Sheridan was a unique author in the Irish context. But others could have followed in his footsteps and the reason that no-one did may well have to do with altered attitudes in Britain. The nineteenth century was not one in which an Irishman would have been readily accepted as an authority on the English language. This is clear from the Victorian preference for Walker over Sheridan when it came to authoritative works on English.
268 Eighteenth-century English
Overall, the English language in eighteenth-century Ireland presents a complex picture which ranges from Scots-derived English in Ulster through Irish-influenced English in the south and archaic forms of English in the south-east to the typically eighteenth-century prescriptivism of Sheridan who showed no interest in vernacular varieties of Irish English. The presence of these different strands at this time shows how important the eighteenth century was for later developments and why studying this period yields so many relevant insights about the English language in Ireland.
The dialect of Forth and Bargy died out in the early nineteenth century, merging into general Irish English of its locality (south-east Co. Wexford) in the process.
14
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar BER N D KORTM A N N University of Freiburg SUSA N N E WAGN ER Chemnitz University of Technology
English (dialects) in the eighteenth and nineteenth century
From a linguistic point of view, the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries are very different from the preceding centuries in the history of English. The radical changes the (grammatical) system had been undergoing in the Middle and (though much less so) in the Early Modern English period had largely been completed: The eighteenth century inherited a largely ordered grammar from Early Modern English. (Görlach b: ) Since relatively few categorical losses or innovations have occurred [from the late eighteenth century onwards], syntactic change has more often been statistical in nature, with a given construction occurring throughout the period and either becoming more or less common generally or in particular registers. The overall, rather elusive effect can seem more a matter of stylistic than syntactic change. (Denison : ) As a result, attention in contemporary publications on the (state of the) English language shifted to new areas, and one area in particular: standardisation in the form of (prescriptive) codification (see for example Görlach b: , ; Rissanen : ; Beal b: ). For the first time in the history of the language, both pronouncing dictionaries and grammars were published that were intended for average people. While in early centuries Latin grammar had been the ideal towards which English grammar should orient itself, the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries gave way to a more realistic position. Görlach (b: ) lists a number of patterns that were established in that period which were not modelled on (and in fact had
It should be noted that there is no agreement among scholars when exactly the Early Modern English period ends and the Late Modern one starts. Possible dates include (American secession), (round figure), (end of Napoleon’s reign) and (cheap printing becomes available; see Görlach b: ).
269
270 Eighteenth-century English
no parallel in) Latin grammar, including for example the development of the purely syntactic uses of do, the fixed word order and the consolidation of aspectual distinctions. Given the mostly prescriptive attitude of the time, regional accents and dialects, if mentioned at all, are generally only discussed in connection with avoidance strategies. Joan Beal (a, b) gives an overview of the general tenor in such publications as Walker’s and Sheridan’s pronouncing dictionaries. While they provide a wealth of information for researchers interested in historical phonology, dialectologists will find little of interest in them. To the former group, pronouncing dictionaries of the time are particularly useful since they were intended for the London middle class with Cockney as the norm to be avoided (see Beal b: ). Cockney is thus set as the counterexample of how not to pronounce words, which in turn allows conclusions about regional pronunciations at the time. Beal shows how a close reading of such sources can indeed be used to trace such ‘modern’ changes as TH fronting, t-glottalling or Northern/Scottish labiodental [ʋ], all of which are generally assumed to be recent innovations (see b: –). Eighteenth-century pronouncing dictionaries can thus provide evidence of three categories of non-standard pronunciation: provincialisms, or regional usage, vulgarisms, i.e. the non-standard usage of lower-class Londoners, and changes in progress which, when coming ‘from below’ might be attributed to one of the two former categories by eighteenthcentury authors. (Beal b: ) As Beal points out, ‘there was little interest in the study of dialect for its own sake before the end of the century’ (b: ). Moreover, Fitzmaurice () emphasises that little can be learned by looking at publications of ‘vernacular’ speech in printed media of the time, since: the presentation of language in printed texts is varied, and what creates variation is different house styles and publishers’ printing practices, not individual author preferences. Individual author preferences do shape variety in the look and representation of the language in manuscripts. (Fitzmaurice : f.; our emphasis) Studying non-standard morphosyntax in the history of English: major limitations Although the study of non-standard morphosyntax in English has received considerable attention from the s onwards (see for example the volumes edited by Milroy and Milroy or Trudgill and Chambers ), most of the research conducted in the field focuses on present-day variation. From the point of view of language change, dialects offer not only a unique
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
271
opportunity to look at language change in progress by studying innovative features of the spoken language, they also open a window to the past since traditional varieties often exhibit conservative features which help us understand the historical paths of language change. At the same time, however, the focus of dialectological work to this day has been on phonological variation, supplemented by traditional accounts of dialect lexicology. The study of dialect morphosyntax, however, is a relatively recent field of research (see for example the contributions in the special issue of English Language and Linguistics, vol. () or in the state-of-the-art volumes by Kortmann and Schneider , Kortmann et al. , or Beal et al. ). This neglect is especially noticeable for older periods of English. The reasons for this are complex and differ from period to period. From Old English to Present-day English, authors offer numerous reasons why dialects are not good candidates for investigation: Old English: Syntactic variation between dialects has scarcely been studied and in any event the material is relatively meagre (Toon : ). Middle English (ME): The Linguistic Atlas of Late Medieval English () provides an extensive survey of dialectal differences in the fields of phonology, morphology and lexis, but it has nothing on syntactic variants. In the introduction it is stated that ‘it may well be that syntax will perforce remain the Cinderella of Middle English dialectology’ (McIntosh, Samuels and Benskin : ). (Fischer : ). Early Modern English (EModE): evidence of Early Modern English dialect syntax is almost nil (Görlach b: ). Late Modern English (LME): Knowledge of dialect variation in the eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries was incidental and unsystematic […] and comments were almost invariably unfavourable (Finegan : ). Present-day English: Variation in syntax has been very little studied by dialectologists, for two reasons. In the first place, syntax as a branch of linguistics has not been given much attention until fairly recently. Secondly, most significant syntactic variation requires larger samples of a language than it has been convenient or even possible to collect by the usual methods (Francis : , our emphasis). When summarising these statements, a rather coherent picture emerges: most experts agree that one of the main reasons for the neglect of dialects, in general, and dialect morphosyntax, in particular, is the lack of suitable data. This is based on the fact that, first of all, only written (that is generally Standard English) material is available for earlier time periods. In addition, corpora such as the Helsinki Corpus of English Texts cover only the truly ‘interesting’ periods up to the end of the seventeenth century (see Rissanen : ). Secondly, researchers are faced with the problem of authenticity of the available data. Dialect literature is not as realistic as it claims to be and should be
272 Eighteenth-century English
treated with caution. Thus, so-called dialect realism hampers any attempt at reconstructing valid accounts of historical non-standard varieties and should result in critical distance to the available material. Witness David Crystal’s statement on the situation in the nineteenth century: ‘During the nineteenth century, non-standard English significantly increased its presence in national literature, moving from simple attempts at regional representation to subtle manipulations of dialect forms for literary effect’ (Crystal : ). A third reason for the neglect of dialect syntax in the nineteenth century was the focus of linguistic research on sound change. This is true of historical comparative linguistics in general and, towards the end of the nineteenth century, in the dialectological studies inspired by the Neogrammarian research programme. Finally, there is a very pragmatic reason for the neglect of dialects in linguistic research until fairly recently – there was no real interest in the topic. Rather, linguists felt that dialects have nothing to offer to researchers. They were ‘not usually viewed as a living medium of expression […] rather, they were thought of as relics of past times, quaint curiosities to be cherished and preserved’ (Crystal : ). Moreover, as already mentioned, the use of dialect in everyday speech came to be viewed as increasingly negative. It was associated with lower-class and/or rural background, a change that is connected with the standardisation of written language after the Middle English period (see Finegan’s quotation on LME above).
Alexander Ellis’s On Early English Pronunciation ()
From a modern perspective, it is only with the foundation of and publications by the English Dialect Society (EDS) and the Philological Society in the late nineteenth century that information about more than accent and lexicon peculiarities of regional varieties became available. Therefore, the focus of this chapter will be on those publications. However, it should be noted that Ellis’s On Early English Pronunciation (vol. ; Ellis ) in particular, very much like its modern counterpart, the Survey of English Dialects (SED; Orton and Dieth –), was a monumental publication for which research had been conducted over decades and that tended to target speakers who should become known as NORMs (see Chambers and Trudgill : ). As a result, it is a widely accepted procedure in the linguistic community today to view the language of such publications not as representative of the generation in which they were published (that is the end of the nineteenth and the mid-twentieth century, respectively), but rather as a kind of time capsule preserving idiosyncrasies of (an) earlier generation(s)/period(s). It seems legitimate to treat Ellis’s work on the
Görlach notes that ‘[s]tatements from the eighteenth century show that the split between phonetic and lexical treatments of dialect was more or less complete’ (Görlach b: ).
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
273
same level, given that his methods were very similar to those employed by Harold Orton and his team. Alexander Ellis’s five-volume On Early English Pronunciation (Ellis –) is possibly one of the most underrated publications in the field. Critics generally disapprove of his methods and most often his paleotype, the pseudo-phonetic script he invented before the advent of the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA), which appeared on the scene too late to be of any use to Ellis. The fifth volume, subtitled Existing Dialectal as Compared with West Saxon Pronunciation (Ellis ), contains a wealth of information on regional accents and dialects. Ellis primarily used an indirect method to collect information from all over England, Wales, Scotland and Ireland. A comparative specimen, consisting of fifteen two- to three-line paragraphs to be translated into the local dialect by (educated) natives, was sent out in early stages of the project. However, the rather long piece proved to be too ambitious, and was later substituted by a short dialect test. For the sake of convenience, both the comparative specimen and the dialect test are reprinted below (see Ellis : *; *). A word list was also used, and the information from these indirect sources was supplemented by fieldwork in a manner very similar to that of the SED fieldworkers almost a century later (see Ellis : f.). As can be gathered from the recording dates of dialect tests and comparative specimens (see below), data were collected over a period of some twenty years (c.–). Informants ranged in age from teens to over eighty, with birth dates covering the late eighteenth (for a number of informants, is given as their year of birth) and the first half of the nineteenth century. With such a coverage, Ellis’s survey thus provides access to data by speakers from much older generations (a minimum of one generation, but for the oldest speakers three generations) than those represented in the SED (where the oldest speakers were born in the last quarter of the nineteenth century). Ellis’s comparative specimen (Ellis : *): . . . . . .
Why John has no doubts. Well, neighbour, you and he may both laugh at this news of mine. Who cares? That is neither here nor there. Few men die because they are laughed at, we know, don’t we? What should make them? It is not very likely, is it? Howsoever, these are the facts of the case, so just hold your noise, friend, and be quiet till I have done. Hearken! I am certain I heard them say – some of those folks who went through the whole thing from the first themselves, – that did I, safe enough – that the youngest son himself, a great boy of nine, knew his father’s voice at once, though it was so queer and squeaking, and I would trust him to speak the truth any day, aye, I would.
An appreciative overview of Ellis’s work can be found in Shorrocks ().
274 Eighteenth-century English
. And the old woman herself will tell any of you that laugh now, and tell you straight off, too, without much bother, if you will only ask her, oh! won’t she? – . leastways she told it me when I asked her, two or three times over, did she, and she ought not to be wrong on such a point as this, what do you think? . Well as I was saying, she would tell you, how, where and when she found the drunken beast that she calls her husband. . She swore she saw him with her own eyes, lying stretched at full length, on the ground, in his good Sunday coat, close by the door of the house, down at the corner of yon lane. . He was whining away, says she, for all the world like a sick child, or a little girl in a fret. . And that happened, as she and her daughter-in-law came through the back yard from hanging out the wet clothes to dry on a washing day, . while the kettle was boiling for tea, one fine bright summer afternoon, only a week ago come next Thursday. . And, do you know?, I never learned any more than this of that business up to to-day, as sure as my name is John Shephard, and I don’t want to either, there now! . And so I am going home to sup. Good night, and don’t be so quick to crow over a body again, when he talks of this that or t’other. . It is a weak fool that prates without reason. And that is my last word. Good b’ye. Ellis’s dialect test (Ellis : *): . . . . . . .
So I say, mates, you see now that I am right about that little girl coming from the school yonder. She is going down the road there through the red gate on the left hand side of the way. Sure enough, the child has gone straight up to the door of the wrong house, where she will chance to find that drunken deaf shrivelled fellow of the name of Thomas. Well all know him very well. Won’t the old chap soon teach her not to do it again, poor thing! Look! Isn’t it true?
Shorrocks (: ) cites the negative attitude of later scholars (particularly those of SED fame like Eugen Dieth and Joseph Wright) towards Ellis’s work as one of the main reasons why many present-day researchers have not even heard of Ellis as a dialectologist. Shorrocks suggests that: [t]he reasons for the general lack of appreciation of his importance are […] (a) the negative evaluations of scholars such as Wright and Dieth;
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
275
(b) the supposed difficulty of the paleotype; (c) a tendency on the part of some dialectologists to be over-enamoured of the latest approaches and too readily dismissive of the more distant past; (d) the low esteem in which dialects and their study have traditionally been held in Great Britain. (: ) Summarising the information gathered from Ellis’s dialect tests and specimens, one can only conclude that On Early English Pronunciation (vol. ) is one of the most underrated sources of historical dialectology. In terms of accuracy, quantity and methodology, the wealth of information contained in this volume is very much comparable to that of the SED. Ellis’s paleotype, which is often considered a drawback in dealing with the data, is not very difficult to acquire once one has spent some time with it. Also, Ellis himself gives very detailed information on which sound is represented by which symbol (Ellis : *–*). For those seeking even more details, Eustance () has ‘translated’ Ellis’s symbols into the corresponding IPA symbols.
Existing catalogues of Late Modern English dialect features
What little we know about English dialects in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries is based on two sources in particular, namely Ellis’s fifth volume of On Early English Pronunciation and the publications of the English Dialect Society (EDS), which had been founded for two basic purposes (see for example Görlach a: ). First, its aim was to collect samples of rural speech which could be used for historical reconstruction, providing input for the comparative method, with the focus on sound comparison. The second aim was supported by the other major research interest of the time, namely lexicology: the projects were to record items of the dialect lexicon before they disappeared, ultimately serving as input for the English Dialect Dictionary (EDD; Wright –). It is not very surprising that these purposes very much shaped the output – just compare the EDD’s more than , A-sized pages with the very small pages of the English Dialect Grammar (Wright ). Moreover, approximately per cent of the publications used as sources for the EDD are descriptions of Northern dialects; only per cent contain information about the South-west (see Görlach a: ). This regional bias is another general drawback of the publications of the EDS. Highly indicative of the phonological and lexicological research focus of the EDS is the fact that only a handful of their approximately eighty publications contain information on morphological or syntactic issues. Ossi Ihalainen’s compilation of dialect markers in the late eighteenth and early nineteenth century (Ihalainen : –) is largely based on only six
Shorrocks goes so far to claim that had Ellis been German, his work would be widely known today, comparing him to Georg Wenker who was largely responsible for the Sprachatlas of Germany (Shorrocks : –).
276 Eighteenth-century English Table .. Morphosyntactic features from Ihalainen () Dialect region
Features
North
– – – –
second person singular verb (tha knows ‘you know’) I is ‘I am’ universal -s, subject to the Northern Subject Rule at ‘that’
South-west
– – – – – – – – – –
universal -th (present tense) universal -s (non-third person singular present tense) plural am second person singular verb (thee dost know) periphrastic do uninflected do, have pronoun exchange ich ‘I’ proclitic ‘ch ‘I’ otiose of
West Midlands
– – – – – –
hoo ‘she’ pronoun exchange -na-negation second person singular verbs (hast seen it – have you seen it?) plural present indicative marker -en (they sayn – they say) plural am
East Anglia
– – – –
that for it uninflected third singular present tense uninflected do, have otiose of
publications of the EDS (that is less than per cent of the total number of publications). Ihalainen () draws up a catalogue of morphosyntactic and phonological features; the regional distribution is given in Figure .. Of these, twenty-four are features of morphosyntax, falling into six groups. For each of these groups, the regional distribution is given in Figure .. The complete feature list can be found in the Appendix; the morphosyntactic features included in this list are shown in Table 14.1 above. Selected features of LME dialect syntax – past and present contexts In this section we will contrast ‘traditional’ and ‘modern’ features. The terminology used here requires some explanation. The working hypothesis is that traditional features are conservative features, whereas modern features are innovations in the respective dialects. The following analyses will show whether or not such labels are justified (thus the question marks in the section headings below). The sources for the studies presented here are Ellis’s On Early English Pronunciation (vol. ; speakers born c. to ), the Survey of English Dialects (SED; most
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
277
14
number of features
12 10 8
accent morphosyntax
6 4 2 0 North
West South-west East Anglia South-east Midlands
Figure .. Distribution of eighteenth/nineteenth century dialect features in Ihalainen () 35
% of features
30 Northern
25
West Midlands 20
South-west
15
East Anglia
10
relative clauses
negation
auxiliaries
personal pronouns
person marking in present
0
use of prepositions
5
Figure .. Distribution of morphosyntactic categories in Ihalainen ()
speakers born in the last quarter of nineteenth century) and the Freiburg English Dialect Corpus (FRED), which is used to validate and/or contrast results with earlier findings (speakers born between and ). The three sources are contrasted in Table .: details on Ellis can be found in
278 Eighteenth-century English Table .. Ellis, SED and FRED – coverage Ellis
SED
FRED
Compiled at/by
Alexander Ellis
University of Leeds (Eugen Dieth, Harold Orton)
University of Freiburg (Bernd Kortmann)
Covered area
, localities in England, in Scotland and Wales
localities all over England
major dialect areas
Method
questionnaires; translation tasks; fieldwork
questionnaire-based interview
authentic speech data (mostly from oral history collections)
Quantity
(variable; dialect test, comparative specimen, word list)
, questions per location
. million words h of speech texts
Time collected
c.–
–
–
Speaker profile
old and young
NORMs
NORMs
Ellis’s ‘Preliminary matter’ to Vol. (Ellis : *–*), details on the SED are published in Orton (), and detailed descriptions of FRED can be found in Kortmann and Wagner () and, especially, in Anderwald and Wagner (). Given the time frame of these publications, the focus of this chapter will be on the last half of the nineteenth century until the First World War (approximately a seventy-year span from until ). It is important to note in this context that the principles of compilation of both Ellis and the SED were (still) informed by the major research background of the time: description (Ellis) and historical reconstruction (SED) of sounds and lexicography. Thus, Ellis’s word list is quite extensive, and of the , questions of the SED questionnaire investigate lexical differences, while are concerned with phonological issues. Only questions (that is . per cent) address morphological or syntactic phenomena. Ellis’s dialect test and comparative specimens as well as the majority of the SED questions help us explore high-frequency features such as agreement and personal pronouns, while rarer features such as the use of unstressed periphrastic do in declaratives or the regional distribution of relative markers are difficult to assess. .
‘Traditional’ (conservative) features (?)
Below, we will put in perspective three features on the basis of (a) what we know about their history and (b) what we know about their distribution in
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
279
twentieth-century data. So it is primarily continuities and changes in dialect morphosyntax we will be interested in. All of these features are part of Ihalainen’s feature catalogue. Where possible, data from Ellis () will be used to illustrate parallels or differences in comparison with the SED material and the maps published in the Computerised Linguistic Atlas of England (CLAE; Viereck and Ramisch /). .. Non-standard agreement: focus on the Northern Subject Rule The Northern Subject Rule (NSR) is one of the well-known features of the morphosyntax of Northern dialects. Very generally, it states that every verb in the present tense can take an -s ending, unless it is directly adjacent to a personal pronoun. Thus, both of the following are correct in those varieties which employ the rule: people says but they think–and strongly believes. Pietsch (a; b) shows in a detailed study how the feature developed from Late Middle English times onwards. One of the major results of his analyses is the surprising stability of regional characteristics over time (cf. Maps . and .). Just compare the southern boundaries: the outer limits of the transitional zone in the SED data (Map .) are practically identical with the southern boundary in LME (cf. Map .). Thus we can see that the NSR is by no means a morphosyntactic feature distinctive of the dialect syntax of LME, but has a tradition reaching back at least years. Unfortunately, Ellis’s dialect test does not offer enough contexts to make any claims about the NSR. Most verbs occur directly adjacent to pronouns, and as a result, -s forms are almost non-existent in the North. From a global perspective another fact is of interest: although rules such as the Northern Subject Rule, also known as Singular Non-Concord in the sociolinguistic literature (for detailed background information, see Pietsch a, b), are very rare in varieties of English worldwide, variation in agreement is not. In fact, just the opposite is true: in forty-six non-standard varieties of English investigated, non-standard agreement was one of the features most frequently encountered (see Kortmann and Szmrecsanyi and Table .). The most frequent ones can be found in more than half of the investigated varieties, whereas rules such as the Northern Subject Rule are very rare. .. Pronoun exchange In his feature list, Ihalainen mentions pronoun exchange for the West Midlands and the South-west, but does not give examples. Putting it simply, pronoun exchange is the use of a subject personal pronoun in an object position or all other positions that would normally require the use of an oblique (that is non-subject) form. The reverse option (that is the use of an object form in a subject slot) is also possible, but seems to be more restricted even in very traditional dialects. Examples from FRED include they always called
280 Eighteenth-century English 0
50
100km field worker S.Ellis others 1
no tokens
no tokens
1-2 tokens
1-4 tokens
3-5 tokens
5-10 tokens
6 or more
11or more
2
3
Northumberland 4 5 6 1
8
7
1 9
2
Cumberland 3
4
5
2
Durham
3
4
1
5
6
2
3
3 1
Westmorland
6
4
1
6 7
2 12
4
8
15
16 20
9
18
28
27
2 1
31
30 1
3
33
32 14
25
24
26 29
12
13
Yorkshire
19
23
22
21
Lancashire
11
10
14
17
7
10 11
13
6
9
8
5 3
5
4
2
4
5
1
34 2
1
2
Derbyshire
3 3
4
Cheshire
4
6 1 3
6 7 7
5 4 8
6
7
2
Herefordshire 4 5
2
5
3
5
6
7
Worcestersh.
15
Norfolk 1
2
Warwicksh.4
3
1 14
1
7
3
2
4
1
7
1
12
2
10 1
11
Lincolnshire
13
6 8
Leicestershire 9
11
10
9
3
5
10
Staffordsh.
2
4
9
8
Shropshire
1
6
5
9
Nottinghamsh.
3
4
2
8 10 11
4
2
5
3
5
1
7
6
2
6
1
3
North’sh. 4
Hunt’sh.
1
2 2
Cambridgesh. 7
5 © L. Pietsch 2003
Map .. Plural verbal -s in the SED fieldworker notebooks (all NP subjects; Pietsch a: )
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
281
Linguistic Profiles Regular Verbal-s Occasional Verbal-s
0
50
100km
© L. Pietsch 2003
Map .. The NSR in Late Middle English (based on data in LALME I: , IV: f.; Pietsch a: )
I ‘Willie’, see (FRED Som_) and We used to stook it off didn’t us? (FRED Som_). The most common explanation for this type of use found in the literature is that the subject forms are used when the respective form is emphasised, while the oblique forms are used in all other contexts (Elworthy [] : –; Kruisinga : f.; Wright : ). Although pronoun exchange has had its place in the literature for centuries, it is impossible to determine how frequent it was in its heyday. Based on data in Ellis (), Map . was produced.
This as well as all of the following maps based on Ellis () are drawn on dialect tests and comparative specimens. Locations were mapped in Google Maps and assigned different markers according to the respective forms in use.
282 Eighteenth-century English Table .. Frequency of agreement features in Englishes worldwide Feature
Encountered regularly in … varieties
no third person sg. present tense marking
Encountered occasionally in … varieties
Encountered in … % of the investigated varieties .
was/were generalisation
.
existential there’s etc.
.
deletion of be
.
dummy subject in existential clauses
.
present tense -s extended to all persons
.
deletion of auxiliary have
.
.
Northern Subject Rule
The following markers are used in Map .: : : : : : : : : :
she in subject position (h)er in subject position (h)er in subject position and she in object position she in object position (h)oo in subject position shoo in subject position us in main clause subject position us in tag question us in main clause and tag
Please note that for technical reasons Map . only includes the distribution of one standard form, namely she (‘’); locations without labels between and show the Standard English (StE) distribution of we and us. When comparing Map . with the maps in The Computerised Linguistic Atlas of England (CLAE; Viereck and Ramisch /; for example M for she), similarities are obvious. Especially, the distribution of the rarer forms (h) oo and shoo ( and , respectively) is practically identical. Based on a study which examined the responses to some forty questions in the SED (see Wagner , ), pronoun exchange used to be very frequent, at least in certain contexts. About per cent of all pronominal forms are ‘exchanged’ there, with significant differences between the individual case forms (see Table .). However, when comparing these figures with data from FRED, it turns out that pronoun exchange is, with only about per cent (!) of all pronominal forms ‘exchanged’, almost non-existent in the latter. This is especially
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
283
Map .. Personal pronouns (third person singular feminine and first person plural) – pronoun exchange
noteworthy given the fact that the FRED informants are only about one generation younger than the SED informants. This contrast points to the basic problem faced by anyone studying accounts on dialects from earlier periods: in historical descriptions non-standard features are typically discussed in terms of their presence (or absence). Modern statements, however, focus on frequencies (relative and absolute) and distributional patterns rather than mere presence or absence. For example, it is highly unlikely that the statement of a nineteenth-century author about the presence of double negation in a certain region should be taken to mean that double negation was used in per cent of all negated utterances in that particular dialect, that is neither for all speakers of that dialect nor to the same degree for each of these speakers. Commentators on dialects will comment on what strikes them (and in all likeliness many contemporaries outside the relevant regions) as salient about the given dialect. But then what is salient? Salience, as our example of pronoun exchange shows, can not automatically be interpreted as a frequency effect. Rather salience of a feature in a given regional dialect may translate into no more than ‘different from’ the standard variety or the vast majority of other regional dialects.
284 Eighteenth-century English Table .. Number of PE-cases in total of pronouns (SED published) Cases with PE I for me her for she
Total
% PE
.
. .
them for they
.
Total
,
.
us for we
In the case of pronoun exchange, the nature of the SED interviews is hardly representative of actual language use. Most of the questions aimed at one particular term, and the fieldworker often used direct elicitation by asking ‘What do you call this?’, sometimes accompanied by showing a picture of the item in question. Thus, it is only natural for the informants to respond with ‘we used to call it …, didn’t we’ or ‘they used to call it …, didn’t they’, where the emphasis is clearly on the sought-after term, adding considerably to the number of us and them in subject position (in tags). In addition, contexts with feminine pronouns in subject position are also rather frequent (for example VI.. ‘She wears the breeches’ or III.. ‘slips the calf’), increasing the figure for her in subject position as well. Based on these findings, it is impossible to say whether pronoun exchange ever was more frequent than the data from FRED indicate. In order to determine such frequencies, it would be necessary to analyse stretches of actual speech from the time periods in question, a task that is next to impossible as interview data from the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries do not exist. On a more methodological note, the insight that high text frequency is not a necessary prerequisite for salience can indeed be interpreted in a positive manner: low overall frequencies of such comparatively rare features as pronoun exchange do not necessarily stand in the way of conclusions drawn from regional distributions. In a number of cases, nothing in the literature or (where available) natural language data indicates that the overall frequencies of certain phenomena changed dramatically. When we are dealing with a feature whose non-standard variant hovers around a mere per cent of all possible cases, overemphasis of those few non-standard forms is indeed more likely than ignorance. Therefore, when comparing the maps based on Ellis’s data presented here with SED-based ones, the obvious parallels encourage us to consider that it is indeed legitimate to use comparatively modern data such as compiled in FRED in making claims not only about present, but also past regional distributions of low-frequency dialect features.
Almost exclusively used in tags.
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
285
Table .. Distribution of relative markers along the North–South axis in percentages (Herrmann : )
North
South
zero
that
Northern Ireland
.%
.%
—
.%
Scotland
.%
.%
.%
—
Central North
%
.%
.%
.%
Central Midlands
.%
.%
.%
.%
East Anglia
.%
%
.%
—
Central South-west
.%
.%
.%
—
what
as
.. Relative clauses and relative pronouns/particles Relative clause formation is of interest here as it represents both ‘traditional’ and ‘modern’ features in the sense described earlier. Traditional (conservative) relative markers such as Northern at or (South-)western as (so all as he had to do were go round in a circle all the time FRED Som_) compete with modern (innovative) ones such as what (See he was the man what brought in decasualization during the war; British National Corpus (BNC) HH). In her study, Tanja Herrmann (Herrmann , ) compared traditional data (SED) with modern corpus material (data from FRED and the British National Corpus). Two major findings resulted from that study, namely that (a) traditional forms are on the retreat, both to and even within their homelands, and that (b) the retreat follows the predictions made by the Noun Phrase Accessibility Hierarchy. Herrmann could also show that those strategies which are supposedly not regionally restricted (‘zero’, that is gapping in subject position, and that) do indeed show regional preferences (see Table .). It is obvious that a corresponding table with such detailed statistics is simply impossible for LME. Ellis’s dialect test and specimens do not offer enough contexts to produce a distributional map more elaborate than Map ., that is only for as, at and what. However, both in Ellis’s and Herrmann’s data, certain continuities as regards regional preferences for these three relative markers are obvious. Even the fact that what, the newcomer among the relative particles in British English (BrE) dialects, is clearly making inroads from the South, as Hermann’s FRED data show, is reflected, if only weakly, in Map .. The only two instances of relativiser what in Ellis’s data are documented in the South-east and the South-west. .
‘Modern’ – innovative – features (?)
This section will focus on those features that are not explicitly mentioned by Ihalainen but which were very likely present during the time period
286 Eighteenth-century English
Map .. Relative markers as (), at () and what () in Ellis ()
under discussion. Among the most likely motives why these features were not reported on are stigmatisation (likely for example for multiple negation) and/or unawareness of regional contrasts. .. Multiple negation and forms of isn’t Multiple negation had been retreating naturally since Late Middle English (see for example Iyeiri : ) before it was finally ruled out by prescriptivists. Nevertheless, it is one of the most frequently found features of nonstandard varieties worldwide and lives on in many English dialects to the present day. It is among those features which are generally considered ‘universal’ in the sense that it does not exhibit regional contrasts or a clear-cut regional distribution. Contrasting with this established view, Anderwald () shows that there is a clear North–South contrast for the frequency of negative concord: based on data from the BNC and FRED, it turns out that multiple negation is most frequently found in the South. It is least frequent in Wales, Scotland and the North of England, with intermediate values for the Midlands. Although
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
287
Map .. Regional distribution of isn’t
this was hinted at in earlier publications (see for example Cheshire et al. : f.; : f.), quantitative evidence to strengthen the claim could generally not be provided. In contrast to this ‘modern’ feature, traditional forms of isn’t, such as south-western bain’t, are very clearly retreating and basically non-existent in modern data: only two informants in FRED use bain’t. When compared with both Ellis and the SED data (CLAE Map , isn’t he), changes have been comparatively rapid, given that the distribution of forms is almost identical for the data in Ellis and the SED. Map . employs the following symbols: ain’t type:: initial [b-] (bain’t etc.); : initial [j-] ( jen’t etc.); : ain’t : [-d] type (idn’t etc.)
In a recent article, Bresnan, Deo and Sharma discuss typological patterns of be and n’t in the SED. One of their findings is the clear restriction of b-initial forms to the South(west) (cf. Bresnan et al. ).
288 Eighteenth-century English
: -na/-er type (isna etc.) : innit type (in’t etc.) : isn’t .. Pseudo-passives with stood/sat It appears that the pseudo-passive construction with sat and stood represents a relatively recent, nineteenth-century Northern innovation, an innovation that took place as a consequence of dialect contact between speakers of the standard dialect and speakers of Northern vernacular varieties of English (Klemola : ). Pseudo-passives with stood and sat are well known and generally classified as a colloquialism rather than a regional dialect feature. However, Klemola’s analysis (: f.) reveals a clear Northern bias. He found frequencies of pseudo-passive stood/sat of . per , words in the SED recordings and c. per , words in the BNC demographic sample. In their more modern data, Cheshire et al. found that the distribution of the construction in their survey ‘points to a recent diffusion […] from the north and west of England’. They therefore concluded that the feature may now be ‘becoming a characteristic of a general non-standard or semistandard variety of English’ (: ; see also : f.). Why the feature spreads from the North and the South-west, two discontinuous areas, is unclear and should be investigated in the future. The regional distribution of pseudo-passives with stood/sat in FRED (see Table .) is very much in line with Klemola’s findings, with frequencies similar to those of the SED recordings. Based on the rather high frequencies in the SED material, and even higher ones in FRED, we assume that stood/sat pseudo-passives are another candidate for a regionally distinctive dialect feature (North and South-west) in the LME period, despite the fact that they are not mentioned in contemporary dialect descriptions.
Conclusion and outlook
It has become clear that we know much less about dialect grammar in the nineteenth and, especially, eighteenth century than we would like to know. And even those relatively few accounts that we have are strongly regionally skewed: recall that, to start with, about per cent of all nineteenth-century EDS publications cover the dialects of the North and the South-west (see Görlach a: ), and that for the relatively small set of twenty-four grammatical features discussed by Ihalainen () in his important survey article, the South-west is far more prominent even than the Northern dialects (see section above). Moreover, the relevant nineteenth-century accounts invariably mention dialect features only for their presence or absence, thus standing in stark contrast with late twentieth-century accounts of dialect
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar
289
Table .. Distribution of pseudo-passives with stood/sat in FRED stood
Per , words
.
.
,
.
North
,
.
Celtic
,
.
TOTAL
,,
.
# of words
sat
South-west
,
South-east
,
Midlands
data based on informants born between and , as represented in the Survey of English Dialects (SED) and, especially, the Freiburg English Dialect Corpus (FRED). These recent accounts tend to focus on the distribution of features in terms of frequencies of occurrence, which makes it very difficult to compare feature catalogues from the eighteenth and nineteenth century with descriptions of late nineteenth/early twentieth-century variation focusing on quantitative statements. This includes the problem of judging to what extent SED and FRED data are innovative or conservative compared with dialect data from the eighteenth or early and mid-nineteenth century, and thus of determining the nature and range of continuities and changes. Grammatical features documented in the SED and FRED may well have existed (and in many cases definitely did exist) in earlier periods of LME, but were simply not found worth reporting on. This applies to both lowfrequency and high-frequency phenomena, which leads us to another lesson to be learned from this chapter. We should not be surprised if features mentioned and commented on for earlier periods of LME up to the mid nineteenth century were never more frequent than they are in the late LME data. As our discussion of pronoun exchange has clearly shown (see section ..), what invites mention of and comments on dialect features is salience as perceived by the fieldworker/dialectologist, but salience is not to be equated with a high token frequency in actual usage. Even those features which would be considered extremely rare (at a level of –) by the modern dialectologist working with electronic corpora may never have been more frequent in the past. This problem is particularly pronounced on the level of dialect grammar compared with dialect lexis and accents, since dialect grammar in general operates on a lower level of consciousness than lexical and phonological variation (both for native speakers and dialect experts). On a more positive note, the salience-despitelow-frequency phenomenon makes early dialectological accounts, which merely state the existence of certain grammatical features in individual
290 Eighteenth-century English
dialects rather than quantify the degree of their usage, somewhat less problematic: if even highly infrequent features are perceived as salient and distinctive of a given dialect (area), determining the degree of this infrequency would ultimately hardly be more informative than simply stating the existence of the relevant feature. Given the extremely poor data situation for LME dialects before the late nineteenth century, English historical dialectology cannot afford to ignore such invaluable sources on nineteenth-century dialects as Alexander Ellis’s On Early English Pronunciation (vol. , ). As we have tried to show in this chapter (see sections and ), the quality of his data has long been underrated and is, in fact, very well suited for many interesting comparisons with the SED and FRED data, helping us to identify, among other things, a number of fascinating continuities in the dialects of England from the late eighteenth and early nineteenth century until the early twentieth century. The final question we would like to raise is whether there is hope that the poor data situation especially for the early and mid LME period will improve. It is easy enough to say that this situation can only be remedied by compiling corpora which are representative of the regional differences of the time. But the data collection for such corpora is very timeconsuming, involving searches through archives and private collections in order to unearth written material, especially private letters, pauper letters, trial records, and so on. Even if such material has been found, determining the degree of authenticity of the relevant documents and pinning down an author’s regional background are anything but easy tasks, leaving much room for doubt. Looking at the current situation of the research landscape in corpus-based historical dialectology and historical sociolinguistics, the prospects at least for the immediate future are not too bright. The extension of the Helsinki Corpus of Early English Correspondence (see Nevalainen and Raumolin-Brunberg ) from the Early Modern period to the eighteenth century is currently under way (with the question of the necessary representativeness, quantity and quality of the data from a dialectologist’s point of view remaining wide open), and no extension to the nineteenth century is as yet planned. Here, one might think that the one-million-word Corpus of Nineteenth Century English (CONCE) can be of help. CONCE was recently compiled at the universities of Uppsala and Tampere but, unfortunately for the historical dialectologist, provides largely data which represent the Standard English of South-east England (see Kytö, Rydén and Smitterberg ). And even early nineteenth-century pauper letters, as recently collected and analysed in large measure by Tony Fairman (, letters from until , running up to a total of about , words; see Fairman and ), do not fulfil the promise of improving the data situation as regards dialect variation. As Fairman spells out very clearly: ‘The language of these letters cannot be called dialect. Minimallyschooled English is so similar throughout England that it is possible to
Changes and continuities in dialect grammar 291
consider it as an emerging standard, which the official Standard disrupted’ (: ). This emerging socially conditioned supraregional standard (or rather variety) is labelled Mainstream English by Fairman in a different article (: f.), where he also lists a number of reasons why anyone trying to learn something about dialect and accent variation from these pauper letters is bound to fail. In the light of this situation, the most optimistic outlook it seems possible to offer is that LME dialect grammar will for a considerable time remain an area of English historical linguistics where solid empirical, philological (and detective) work is called for in order to provide us with the appropriate data necessary for adding the many missing pieces to our puzzle of grammatical variation among dialects in the history of English. Appendix: Dialect markers in the late eighteenth and early nineteenth century (Ihalainen : –) Northern features: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Northern lack of rounding Northern oo-fronting Northern long a /ai/-monophthongisation yod-formation l-vocalisation/dropping linking v soom ‘some’ hoose ‘house’ y-laxing t’ for the (def. article realised as stop) sal, ‘s ‘shall’ second person singular verb (tha knows ‘you know’) I is ‘I am’ universal -s, subject to the Northern Subject Rule at ‘that’
West Midlands . . . . . . . .
West midland ngg rounding before nasals ai-rounding same/seem switch hoo ‘she’ pronoun exchange -na-negation second person singular verbs (hast seen it – have you seen it?)
292 Eighteenth-century English
. plural present indicative marker -en (they sayn – they say) . plural am South-western features . . . . . . . . . . . . .
voicing of initial fricatives retention of ME ai r for gh universal -th (present tense) universal -s (non-rd person singular present tense) plural am second person singular verb (thee dost know) periphrastic do uninflected do, have pronoun exchange ich ‘I’ proclitic ‘ch ‘I’ otiose of
East Anglian features . . . . .
Norwich a that for it uninflected third singular present tense uninflected do, have otiose of
15
‘Be pleased to report expressly’: the development of a public style in Late Modern English business and official correspondence M A R I NA D OSSENA University of Bergamo
Introduction: issues in method and terminology
In line with other contributions in this volume, this chapter will concentrate on the pragmatic strategies employed by encoders to convey their messages in a socially acceptable way; in particular, I intend to focus on business and official communication, in an attempt to identify patterns in the development of ‘public style English’. Although numerous studies have already appeared on the development of scientific English, especially in Early Modern times, it is only much more recently that attention has been given to the roots of business English (Dossena and Fitzmaurice ). Indeed, such investigations have shown that encoders appear to adapt their self-representation in relation to the purpose of their communication and the presupposed status of the recipient (not necessarily coinciding with actual status: see Dossena a, b and ). Such pragmatic strategies will be analysed in a broad range of texts, encompassing the last decades of the eighteenth century and the very beginning of the twentieth century, giving special attention to the keywords employed in official exchanges. The aim is to identify the elements that could characterise the ‘public’ style of the time, especially as far as evaluation is concerned. The chapter will rely mainly, though not exclusively, on the letters currently being transcribed for inclusion in the Corpus of NineteenthCentury Scottish Correspondence (henceforth CSC – see Dossena and Dury ); this will also allow me to comment (albeit briefly) on the diffusion of Scottish Standard English in such texts.
Permission to quote from MSS held in the National Library of Scotland, Glasgow University Archives and the Bank of Scotland Archives is gratefully acknowledged; such permission does not extend to third parties, so the quotations presented in this contribution should not be used elsewhere. I am also grateful to Richard Dury for his help in the design and compilation of CSC, and for valuable comments throughout its analysis.
293
294 Eighteenth-century English
So far corpora have mostly allowed scholars to investigate phenomena in terms of their frequency and therefore required vast amounts of data, so as to ensure statistical reliability, lest the validity of the conclusions should be weakened. But so-called ‘second-generation corpora’ (Mäkinen ) – such as CSC aims to be – allow clearly defined, focused investigations in which scholars can concentrate on the study of relatively few, but authentic, texts rather than edited ones. This allows them to highlight specific linguistic traits without the risk of interfering ‘noise’ created by editorial choices (see Lass ). In this respect, the study conducted by Kohnen () appears to be a good instance of just the way in which qualitative analyses of a homogeneous corpus may show a validity that goes beyond the statistical one, especially when the object of investigation is barely quantifiable, on account of its elusiveness or intrinsic variability (speech acts, but also evaluation and even modality, are cases in point). In this respect, CSC is meant to cater for such an approach, at least for the time being, while the corpus is still in preparation; at the moment of writing (December ) it comprises c. letters (between drafts, fair copies and copies, equally distributed between familiar and business letters), for a total of c., orthographic units. In order to define the methodology of this study, it is important to begin by discussing some terminological issues relating to the study of written exchanges, whether formal or informal. In its central section, I intend to offer an outline of the keywords employed by encoders of late modern business and official correspondence for self-representation and recipient construction. Such keywords should not be taken to reflect – as mentioned above – purely numerical frequency; instead, identifying their saliency is deemed to be important for the assessment of the social and ideologically conditioned relationships existing between interactants. This is the case, for instance, of words like ‘favour’ (meaning ‘letter’) and ‘oblige’ (that is, causing the subject’s gratitude), the pragmatic value of which can only be assessed if their semantic value is interpreted taking into consideration a larger context than the typical concordancing software allows when frequencies and collocations are studied. This is because such tokens of politeness are likely to collocate with other politeness moves, searches for which can hardly be automated, as in the case of speech acts. Within this framework, special attention will be given to (self-)evaluative language, in order to identify the semantic patterns characterising nineteenth-century public style English. Finally, an assessment of the convergence between Scottish and Southern English in formal documents of the period will be taken into consideration, also in relation to letter-writing manuals in use at the time, and the cultural agenda that they appeared to express.
By ‘fair copies’ I mean letters that were actually sent. In some cases, fair copies were in fact the first and only draft, as shown by the self-corrections appearing in them. As in eighteenth- and nineteenth-century manuscripts words were often linked up, the label ‘orthographic unit’ is deemed to be preferable to ‘word’. Other terminological issues pertaining to CSC are discussed below.
Public style in business and official correspondence
295
Before data and findings are discussed, it is important to clarify a few terminological issues, the relevance of which is clear when we consider that sending messages and letters in late modern times had different requirements and followed different conventions from what we observe today. First of all, a few remarks are in order about the object and time focus of this study. As for the latter, the nineteenth century is finally beginning to emerge as a crucial turning point in the history of English (see Bailey ; Görlach a; Kytö et al. ); societal and technological changes affected the cultural landscape in very deep ways, and had an obvious impact on language: not only did the reading public expand considerably, but also new forms of participation in political and economic activities ensured that a new group of speakers and writers should develop their skills to meet new communicative requirements. In this respect, while ‘public style’ English could be taken to mean style employed in all those texts addressed to the general public (such as argumentative pamphlets, especially of political propaganda, but also news discourse, advertisements or indeed literary texts of greater or lesser popularity), it is nonetheless true that such an interpretation would cause the scope of this investigation to grow considerably, far beyond what is allowed here. It was therefore decided to restrict the scope of the analysis to the area of business and official correspondence for two main reasons: one is that this type of correspondence (unlike private exchanges) has only just begun to be investigated – to the extent that, to the best of my knowledge, so far no large-scale, fully annotated corpus entirely relying on authentic manuscripts exists for the study of linguistic phenomena, despite the availability of vast quantities of documents in private and public archives throughout the English-speaking world. Secondly, the kind of correspondence discussed here witnesses very interesting shifts in mode of self-representation on the part of encoders, depending on the object of the exchange and the kind of relationship existing, or meant to be established, between participants. This takes us to the next terminological question, the one pertaining to the subjects and the object of the exchange. Concerning the latter, ‘correspondence’ is a useful superordinate for the definition of a ‘genre’ in which various ‘text types’ can be included – letters, of course, but also shorter notes, memos, circulars, drafts and copies of finalised texts, which may now be impossible to recover. As for the distinction between ‘business’ and ‘official’ correspondence, in late modern times the term ‘official’ may be taken to refer to letters addressed to government officials, ambassadors or other subjects with a role at Court (see Fitzmaurice ). The term ‘business’, on the other hand, begins to adopt its current meaning, although stylistic patterns are still far from the ones observed in ‘corporate’ documents in use today. In both cases, the exchange of personal comments is not excluded, but it does not constitute the primary reason for writing the letter, unlike what is seen in familiar correspondence (where by ‘familiar’ we mean that encoders and recipients can be both relations and close friends). Note that
296 Eighteenth-century English
business, official and familiar letters were normally meant to be private, but not in the twenty-first-century sense of the word; as a result, terms in current use today, such as ‘writer’ and ‘addressee’, might prove anachronistic in contexts where social norms and conditions were different. First of all, the ‘writer’ is also the encoder only in those cases where the letter can be shown to be a holograph; in all the other cases, whether the amanuensis was helping an illiterate person who prompted the letter, or was the secretary of a wealthy manager or land-owner, the person who actually wrote the letter is not the same person whose meaning is conveyed in the document, that is the actual ‘encoder’. Secondly, there is no guarantee that the addressee always remained the sole ‘recipient’ of the letter – in fact, we know that familiar letters were often circulated to other relations, when they were not actually read in public; similarly, business and official letters that were not obviously ‘confidential’ may have been read by other people in the company, such as secretaries or business partners. Meaning was therefore conveyed in the awareness that a plurality of subjects could be involved at both ends, and – particularly in business and official correspondence – this is necessarily reflected in a style that can be defined as ‘public’, although the addressee is one specific person and it is only one person that signs the letter. Finally, I conclude this section with a few comments on the kind of geohistorical variety discussed here, that is Scottish Standard English. In the section of CSC that will be employed for this study, dialectal uses are not observed; it is possible that future additions to the corpus will include letters by partly schooled encoders in which dialect forms are actually found, as they are found in familiar letters. For now, the business letters collected so far do reflect Southern (standard) forms in syntax, morphology and lexis, as the encoders’ level of education led them to use those. Occasional Scotticisms are only observed when the topic requires references to the Scottish legal system, or other cultural specificities, such as the ‘manse’, or the ‘minister’. The ‘public style’ of Scottish texts thus seems to conform to the models presented in grammar books and dictionaries so popular and so widespread in late modern times (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade, ‘Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism’, this volume).
(Self-)representation, stance and evaluation in ‘public-style’ texts
The concept of ‘public-style’ is intrinsically connected with that of ‘face’, as both concern the image that participants wish to present to each other.
See for example the numerous incidents of this kind in John Galt’s epistolary novel The Ayrshire Legatees (). This may actually be done on behalf of others, and be stated explicitly, for instance in bank correspondence, when the ‘secretary’ writes on behalf of the ‘directors’ (see Dossena a). On the processes of language ‘standardisation’ in Scotland, see Dossena () and – especially in relation to lexis – Dossena ().
Public style in business and official correspondence
297
A key element in the investigation of texts conveying such images is therefore the way in which ‘facework’ (in the sense discussed by Brown and Levinson ) is managed, as it is of crucial importance that participants should interact following patterns of linguistic behaviour that suit and reflect socially accepted conventions. In this respect, it is equally important that scholars should be aware of such conventions, as in this case the theoretical principles of historical sociolinguistics provide the foundations upon which phenomena can be analyzed. This means that concepts such as ‘politeness’ and ‘propriety’ (with all their ideological overtones) play a highly significant role on account of their relevance in the decades under discussion; similarly, awareness of writing styles, even at the level of acceptable ‘hands’ in business contexts (see Dury ), need to be taken into consideration, as the way in which a letter was posted or presented could affect the recipient’s perception of the encoder’s message. As is well known, envelopes are an innovation of the mid nineteenth century; the indication of addresses, however, was already codified clearly, and – for instance – it is tempting to perceive a unionist attitude in those encoders who addressed letters to ‘North Britain’ as opposed to those who addressed them to ‘Scotland’, choosing the label that had come into use after the Union of Parliaments of . Addresses (both on folded letters and, later, on envelopes), forms of address in salutations and closing formulae in subscriptions were thus the first elements that reflected the tone and quality of the relationship between participants, expressing it almost metonymically by means of few highly codified words. Scholars have investigated these uses, both in the model letters provided in letter-writing manuals and in authentic texts (see Bannet , Mitchell and Fens-de Zeeuw ), showing how the inclusion or
In such cases language is not studied in terms of its ‘external history’ in any traditional sense of the word, as it is not the influence of external circumstances such as invasions or migrations that condition usage and cause variation or change, but it is phenomena that pertain to the social context within which language occurs synchronically. Variation (and possibly resulting change) therefore derives from the social milieu to which participants belong, not only in terms of social networks, but also in terms of the social roles they are expected to fulfil in varying circumstances. For instance, Bannet (: ) discusses the ‘semiotics of blank spaces’, by means of which social distance between participants was visually represented by the empty lines left between salutation and text at the top of the letter, and between text, subscription and signature at the foot of the page. It is an important point, stressing that both verbal and nonverbal elements contribute to the pragmatic value of the text; clearly, such synergies can only be investigated if we have access to manuscripts or diplomatic transcriptions, hence the need for second- (or even third-) generation corpora of the kind outlined in Section above. Richard Dury has kindly drawn my attention to a letter in which Robert Louis Stevenson rejects the use of ‘North Britain’, or ‘N.B.’ as it could be abbreviated: ‘Don’t put “N.B.” on your paper: put Scotland, and be done with it. Alas, that I should be thus stabbed in the home of my friends! The name of my native land is not North Britain, whatever may be the name of yours’ (RLS to S. R. Crockett, c. April , Letters : , see Booth and Mehew (eds.) –). These are discussed by Nevalainen () and Nevala ( []). Earlier texts are analysed by Tanskanen ().
298 Eighteenth-century English
omission of an adjective could indicate greater or lesser psychological distance. For instance, the use of ‘Dear’ as opposed to ‘My Dear’ is a case in point, as the former expresses less involvement (Dossena ). Similarly, including or omitting ‘humble’ and ‘obedient’ in the subscription, or their modifiers ‘very’ and ‘most’, or abbreviating forms, indicated what mutual status recipients wished to convey to each other; a few examples are given below: () a. I have the honor to be, with great respect, Sir Your Most obedt. humble Servt b. I am Sir Your Most Obedt Humble Sert c. Sir I now Conclude with my best respects to you and remain your Most Obt + Humble Sert d. I have the honor to be Sir/ Your most Obedt humble Servant subscribes Herself Your most Humble Servant, As we can see, subscriptions could be expanded with interpolated phrases, such as ‘with great respect’ or ‘with much esteem’, which underlined the greater authority of the recipient, and were therefore a very important positive politeness move (see also Taavitsainen and Jucker, this volume). References to ‘having the honour’ to be, or remain, in the circle of the recipients’ acquaintances was equally a significant positive politeness move, attributing status to the recipient. The links within the social network could be strengthened also through references to third parties to whom or on behalf of whom ‘compliments’ were presented: () a. Give my Compliments to all friends and Cambleton acquaintance. b. Dr Heron Watson presents his compliments and begs to intimate that Very commonly, a vocative such as ‘Sir’ was interpolated, as if to re-elicit the attention of the recipient; even in familiar letters we find subscriptions in which the recipient is named as in the salutation, for example: ‘dear Father, dear Brother’, and the signature itself restates the relationship existing between participants, as in: ‘Your dutiful Daughter, Your loving Sister’. On the other hand, in draft letters and in copies subscriptions are abbreviated, as in ‘I am &cc’; in these cases it is impossible to reconstruct what the encoder had actually written, unless the original has been preserved alongside the draft and/or the copy, but this is a very rare case indeed. However, such abbreviations point to the degree of codification that these formulae had achieved: so fixed and invariable were the formulae, that the encoder did
A very small amount of punctuation and computer mark-up has been removed from the samples in this chapter for reasons of legibility – the editor. For reasons of privacy, in the examples names are normally omitted or abbreviated to initials.
Public style in business and official correspondence
299
not even need to note them down; given a certain type of message to a certain kind of recipient, there was no other possible alternative to the ordinary, expected formula. The social relationship existing between participants was thus reinforced through linguistic means that reflected standard social constructions and expectations in terms of propriety and politeness; in addition to the use of codified formulae, encoders and recipients deliberately conveyed greater modesty and deference than their actual status would have required, in order to emphasise both positive and negative politeness (see Dossena b). Similarly, their very handwriting conveyed hints of their relationship with the participant (see Fitzmaurice ). On the other hand, authority could be conveyed quite directly to subordinates, thus stressing the hierarchical relationship existing in the business network of interactants. In the following examples, the encoders frame their request with the introductory phrase ‘be pleased to’, which is typically recorded as an imperative form; only rarely do we come across instances of modalisation, as in (c), downtoning the forcefulness of the request: () a. Be pleased to send us the Bank Book b. Be pleased […] to send that document with your name written on the back. c. you may be pleased to Suggest to one or other, of your acquaintances to favour In CSC ‘be pleased’ is almost as frequent as its elliptical equivalent ‘please’, suggesting that the latter was becoming more widespread, but earlier forms still had great currency (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade and Faya Cerqueiro ). Studies conducted so far have concentrated on the interpersonal quality of business and official interactions in writing. However, their transactional aspects may prove equally interesting to investigate, so as to observe what strategies were employed to convey an acceptable image, not only of the participants, but also of the object of their exchange – that is, the way in which projects, products and results are both described and evaluated. As a matter of fact, the interplay of description and evaluation has received increasing scholarly attention in recent times (see Dossena and Jucker ). While description is generally supposed to be neutral, the pervasiveness of evaluation makes objectivity actually quite difficult to achieve. On the other hand, evaluation is intrinsically face-threatening, as it normally invites agreement on the part of the recipient, and disagreeing would need to be supported by reasons and justifications. It could therefore be argued that explicit evaluation correlates with greater authority on the part of the encoder, who can
On social roles, identity and linguistic choices, see also Dossena (c). On ‘humility formulae’ see Bannet (: ).
300 Eighteenth-century English
‘afford’ to invite the recipients’ agreement, thus threatening their negative face; similarly, disagreement also correlates with authority, as it poses a threat to the recipients’ positive face. In the next paragraphs I intend to discuss a few instances in which such mechanisms appear to be at work, in order to assess the extent to which linguistic choices reflect the pragmatic context of the exchange, and mirror ideologically informed perceptions of what encoders could afford to say in the context of formal, ‘public’ exchanges. .
Opinion and point of view in ‘public-style’ texts
In interaction the expression of views and opinions is a very delicate, although very natural, process. The encoders’ participation may emerge from the ways in which the topic appears to affect, or be judged by, the encoders themselves; lack of interest results in a dearth of comments, and may bring about a change of topic – on the other hand, the more the participants take an interest in, and care about, topics, the more such topics will elicit discussion, even to the point of argument. Late modern times were no strangers to lively controversy – already for many decades pamphlets on religious, political and social issues had been both very widespread and vociferous (see Brownlees ); at the same time, there was an on-going and very fruitful scientific debate (especially within the Royal Society – see Gotti ) on new discoveries and recent experiments. Also ‘antiquarians’ with an interest in language – the ancestors of modern philologists – and indeed grammarians and lexicographers responded to each other’s work, in a kind of virtual dialogue that summarised the opponent’s views in order to challenge them, highlighting where they could be shown to be faulty, and thus emphasising the encoder’s (counter-) argument. For instance, when at the turn of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries the debate on the roots of Scots and English was raging, Murray (: –) summarised the claims of one of his opponents and stated: [Pinkerton’s] method of establishing the presence of the Pictish or Scandinavian dialect, […] is both exceedingly unfair and unphilological. He seems to have looked into an Atlas; and wherever any Danish or Swedish name appeared to have the slightest resemblance to one found in a map of Scotland, he instantly declared their affinity, and set down the Scotish as a Gothic name. Similarly, Chalmers criticised Jamieson, the author of the first significant dictionary of Scots, saying: Every intelligent person has acquiesced, in its moral certainties, however new, and unexpected, except Doctor Jamieson alone, who has attempted to controvert them, in his Prefatory Dissertation on the Scotish
Public style in business and official correspondence
301
language: Yet, he, who reasons against facts, shews little discretion, as a logician; and he, who pretends to outargue demonstration, only evinces that, as a lexicographer, he loves theory better than truth. (: II/iv) In this type of register, strongly reminiscent of the argumentative style observed in pamphlets, encoders did not seem to have any excessive fear of face-threatening moves. However, the situation appeared to be different in business contexts, where the balance of the relationship has always been crucial for its continuation and indeed for the success of any transaction. In addition to the vital importance of a good relationship between business partners, if satisfactory outcomes are to be ensured, there are other significant differences between business exchanges and other types of controversy conducted on a wider stage. If, from the economic and financial background agenda of participants, we focus on the circle of recipients to which texts are addressed, we see that the registers mentioned above could be said to be ‘public’ in varying degrees. While the ideal recipients of pamphlets were the readers with an interest in the topic, letters and essays exchanged among scholars had a more limited circulation. This is true both for what nowadays we would call ‘hard sciences’, but which at the time was viewed as ‘natural philosophy’, and for language and its historical roots. Similarly, as I mentioned in Section , business letters were formally addressed to one person, but – unless they were clearly private – they could be accessed also by other people. The presentation of views and opinions had therefore to be conveyed in terms that signalled their subjectivity, but that could also be shared by the recipients, especially if the debate was on issues, the consequences of which would not just affect the participants. In what follows I intend to discuss a few instances pertaining to different contexts, drawing attention to the linguistic strategies that enabled encoders to address a specific person, or a group of people, or issue circulars addressed to a more general audience, albeit with a mutual and common interest despite any face threats that an initiative might have posed. While circulars can be assumed to have a more ‘public’ character than letters, it will be interesting to assess (de)personalisation strategies in both, especially when the expression of subjective views is concerned. .. Setting the tone Among speech acts, providing information or requesting action certainly pose a threat to the recipients’ positive and negative face respectively. In both cases, therefore, encoders redress the threat by means of linguistic choices that express their stance, so that subjectivity may distance (and thus mitigate) the speech act. When encoders send documents or perhaps even
One encoder actually does talk about the link existing between business initiatives and their function as a connector between participants: ‘We trust that this new undertaking may prove a fresh bond between us.’
302 Eighteenth-century English
unsolicited objects, they have to signal that this is not meant to threaten the recipient’s face too badly, hence they ask for permission for doing so, although the act is actually being carried out at the same moment. In such contexts, the word ‘permission’ does occur, but only very rarely; the typical formula appears to be ‘I beg leave to’, as in the example below, in which the encoder stresses humility and modesty, while sending the objects he wishes the recipients to have, no matter how welcome they may be: () I now beg leave to send you a copy I also beg leave to send you the old Manuscript When encoders instead intrude in the recipients’ time and privacy, in order to convey good news, or send something which the recipient is expected to welcome, such as payment, this is pre-assessed by means of evaluative phrases like ‘I have the pleasure to’ or ‘I am delighted/happy/pleased to’ – see the following examples and section ... below: () a. Dear Sir I have the pleasure to inform you that b. I have now the pleasure to acquaint you that the Directors have agreed to accommodate you, c. Dear Sir I have now the pleasure to enclose excerpt from the Deed of Entail by d. I have therefore the pleasure of enclosing a checque on the Royal Bank for one thousand pounds, Similarly, unwelcome news is preceded by ‘I am sorry’ or, more formally, ‘I regret’, that is phrases setting the tone for the message to follow: () a. SIR, We regret to inform you that in consequence of the War, b. We regret much, that, acting by the advice of an eminent Stockbroker, we proposed The recipients’ interpretation of the message is therefore guided by means of the ‘key’ word or phrase which the encoder chooses, in order to provide the evaluative tone of the message itself, as if the item chosen to begin the sentence functioned as a kind of semantic and pragmatic cataphora. .. Evaluative language In the light of the ‘appraisal’ system outlined in Martin and White (), attitude can be conveyed in terms of affect, judgement and appreciation. When this is applied to earlier stages of the language, and to specific registers, the patterns that emerge shed light on the way in which affect, judgement and appreciation could actually function as effective pragmatic tools. As we saw above, doing business with the recipient could be an honour or
On the notion of ‘keyness’ see Rayson (), Culpeper () and the contributions in Archer ().
Public style in business and official correspondence
303
a pleasure for the encoder; indeed, happiness could be derived from the opportunity to supply information or goods: () a. I should be happy to submit a sample for inspection b. Dear Sir, I am happy to be able to tell you that I have at last got from the Accountant c. I shall be happy to receive the applications you procure. d. I shall be happy to hear from you when you have got the Charter completed. When the encoder acknowledged receipt of goods or documents, appreciation could also be shown for the sake of positive politeness: () I am delighted with the M.S. & augur great things, Characteristics of appreciated work were, then as now, completeness and accuracy – see the examples below: () a. I trust you will get it Commodious. Compleat, & Suitable so as to answer all purposes, b. it contains a complete new system of Bank Economics, including Bank Supervision, Bank Detail, c. and is the most accurate, it is believed, that exists, of that part of the Island. However, the vagueness of an adjective such as ‘proper’ or of an adverb such as ‘properly’ did not prevent them from having a very positive connotation in the kind of exchanges discussed here – an indication that participants shared evaluative presuppositions, and had clear ideas about what was deemed to be proper, that is suitable and acceptable in a certain social context, or not: () a. Mr D. thought it most advisable in the most proper and surest manner of succeſs to write to Your honour, b. and are to be bound to maintain and leave the whole gates, fences in proper order and condition c. would fain hope that you will have the goodness either to grant a proper discharge, or a Letter, d. I take the liberty to return it to be replaced by a properly stamped document As a matter of fact, the subjectivity of the evaluation of ‘propriety’ emerges very clearly when we see that it collocates with ‘think’: that is, with an indicator of epistemic modality which attributes responsibility for the evaluation to the encoder, while toning down its force. In order to assess the importance of modality in public style English, instances of both deontic and epistemic uses will be discussed below.
While dynamic modality is of course important, it is deemed to be less relevant in the current investigation, as the aim is to assess in what ways participants use language to convey
304 Eighteenth-century English
Finally, gratitude and indebtedness also indicated the strong links existing between participants, and could be expressed somewhat redundantly, as in the expression of ‘grateful thanks’ in (a) below, in which the concept is stressed and therefore emphasised also by means of the superlative form: () a. My Dear Major Accept of mine and my familys most grateful thanks for your very great kindness to us in assisting us to buy b. I beg to offer my most sincere thanks, and heart-felt gratitude, Similarly, a comment on any third party’s expected attitude or behaviour could also serve a purpose of positive politeness, expressing a fairly direct compliment to the recipient: ()
I think the parties are much indebted toyou forthe friendly manner in which youhave acted
Gratitude could of course accompany respects, as in the example below, which is a clear token of positive politeness: ()
the Writer of this Letter, who Subscribes herself, with the sincerest respect, Gratitude for many very many favours,
In this sense, deference is reinforced; however, ‘respect’ is also mentioned when encoders wish to suggest a certain answer or a certain course of action, so as to mitigate any threats to negative face, even if the party under discussion is not present (see b below): () a. we would respectfully suggest that you should send through a Clerk b. To these applications, which have come, exclusively, from parties in Scotland, we would respectfully answer, that we are unwilling to exhibit any symptom of unsteadiness, by departing from the original proposals, Encoders thus attempt to present an all-round acceptable public image: in terms of politeness, their behaviour is exactly what social rules dictate, whether their words and actions concern recipients who are actually participating in the exchange, or third parties with whom either encoder or recipient may get in touch, no matter how unlikely this is, and how remotely distant in the future this may be. .. Modality in public style discourse Concerning the morphosyntactic features of modal auxiliaries observed in CSC, it is worth noting that usage reflects the subject–verb concordance codified so frequently in the eighteenth century, and indeed since the suggestions, requests, opinions and ideas – that is, in those speech acts in which deference and authoritativeness are equally important, as these concepts are particularly relevant in studies dealing with the ideological profile of a certain social context.
Public style in business and official correspondence
305
so-called ‘Wallis rules’ were set down in the seventeenth century: in the vast majority of cases, shall occurs with I or we, in the same way as will occurs mostly with you: () a. we shall take the necessary steps for proving the Banks claim b. we shall in a day post or two inform you whether or not we adhere c. in my next I shall report progress on the Removings age Mr Falconer &c &c &c d. I shall order Copies to be made of his Examination, transmit them to you, Interestingly, in the example below we see the two modal auxiliaries being employed with the same subject I, on account of their different meaning: one, shall, conveys dynamic modality (futurity); the other, will, conveys deontic modality (promise): () I shall only say that I will be most sincerely thankful for any favor you do As a matter of fact, gratefulness correlates quite frequently with deontic modality; for instance, when references to the encoders’ obligations are made: () a. [further requests for information] will be esteemed as an obligation by, Gentlemen Your Obedient Servant b. [let me] assure you of my high regard for yourself personally, & my deep sense of the obligations which we owe to you: Much more frequently than the noun, the verb, both in its infinitive and in its participial forms, is recorded: () a. Would you further oblige me by looking over the deed of copartnery b. You will therefore oblige me by referring to him about anything requiring my consent, c. We shall be obliged if you will kindly return these papers, as we have no other copies. d. Dear Sir I had lately the Pleasure of your most obliging letter and thank you cordially for your kind endeavours As for the distinction between should and would, it is less obvious to see how far they reflect the ‘Wallis rules’ mentioned above, as they are found to occur with all subjects, although of course with different meanings. What seems to be much more relevant for the purpose of our investigation is that their
As the corpus is still being compiled, it would be difficult to claim representativeness at this stage. This is true because of the sheer amount of data potentially available. It furthermore means that quantitative findings can only be offered in broad terms in order to outline general trends.
306 Eighteenth-century English
function is to distance the predication, and therefore the same encoder may use the present or the past tense form, depending on whether the illocutionary force is a prediction, or a hypothesis: a promise, an order, or a piece of advice. In the same way, can, could, may and might appear to reflect the same types of usage as they have today, indicating greater or lesser tentativeness, depending on the topic of the predication and the relationship existing (or supposed to exist) between participants – see the examples below: () a. you are still buying Sugar very low – you can hardly go wrong at these prices, b. This is all I can properly say at present. c. We could be prepared to consider details afterwards. d. we could always obtain Sales for what ready goods were on hand, e. It will be a guide in any matter that may come up for your decision. f. I should feel highly honoured by transacting any business you might think proper to entrust to my charge, g. Now you might ascertain what Mr Miller’s ideas are upon the subject, .
Style across languages
The last part of this study concentrates on a letter, sent in Italian and translated into English in pencil by the recipient, or one of his staff. A comparison of the set phrases employed in the original and in the translation will allow us to shed further light on the mechanisms at work in public style texts, as the translation is not literal, but rather provides a summary of the contents, while attempting to reproduce the tone of deference conveyed by the encoder. The letter, dated March , is an offer for co-operation on the part of Nella mia qualità di Direttore della ‘Enciclopedia italiana’, ho pure in biblioteca la loro pregevole opera Blackie’s Modern Cyclopedia, edizione del . Per nuove edizioni, io potrei offrire la mia collaborazione intorno a gli ultimi avvenimenti Italiani, possedendo sempre un largo materiale che ringiovanisco di giorno in giorno. Potrei mandare gli articoli – di qualunque indole – tradotti in Inglese, corredandoli anche di opportuni disegni illustrativi. Se l’offerta non dispiaccia e la si creda utile – come io lo credo – gradirò di ricevere una Loro cortese risposta. In attesa e con molta stima dev.mo prof. GB
As_director of_the Italian Encyclopedia I have a copy of your excellent Modern Cyclopedia, edition . I would offer my collaboration for new editions in regard to Italian subjects, having always a large stock of material constantly kept up to date. I could send the articles – of any kind – translated into English, accompanied with suitable illustrations. If my offer is approved of please send reply. Meantime I remain Prof. GB, Via Carroccio, (apparently his private address) Milano
Public style in business and official correspondence
307
an Italian scholar and lexicographer based in Milan, in relation to Blackie’s Modern Cyclopedia; the texts are given below (emphasis as in the original): The Italian text, on headed paper of the publisher, with the private address supplied in brackets under the date in the top right-hand corner of the page, is in an elegant secretarial hand, while the English one, on the verso of the page, appears to have been drafted much more hurriedly, with many linked-up words. The English text starts on the same line as the body of the letter, and it is interesting to see what is ellipted and what is kept in the two versions. First of all, the translator preserved the evaluation of the recipient’s work: ‘la loro pregevole opera’ is rendered as ‘your excellent’ – as we saw above, appreciation of the recipients’ activities is a very significant positive politeness move, and the translator cannot omit it, as this would make the encoder seem impolite. On the other hand, the subscription is considerably shortened in the English text (‘I remain +c’), signalling the formulaic character of the phrase, for which no literal translation is needed. The translator adds a comment on the address of the encoder (deduced to be private because the headed paper of the publisher indicates a different one), but before then he or she shortened a very important concluding move. In the Italian text the request for a reply is preceded by three moves: two conditions (literally, ‘if the offer is not disliked and is believed to be useful’) and a personal evaluation of the offer itself on the part of the encoder (‘as I believe it is’, that is useful). However, only one condition is rendered in a shorter form (‘if my offer is approved of’) and with reversed polarity, from negative to positive; the encoder’s judgement is not reflected in the translation, as if it were irrelevant. Nor is the encoder’s attitude reflected in the translation of the request for an answer: ‘gradirò di ricevere una Loro cortese risposta’ (literally, ‘I shall be pleased to receive your kind reply’) is shortened to a much more direct ‘please send reply’. The two sentences are reported below, so that differences in length and word choices are more obvious: () a. Se l’offerta non dispiaccia e la si creda utile – come io lo credo – If my offer is approved of b. gradirò di ricevere una Loro cortese risposta please send reply In this case we have an insight of the difference between what was meant to be the ‘public’ version of the text (that is the Italian one), with all its politeness moves, and the less formal English translation, meant to be ‘for insiders only’, and therefore omitting whatever was deemed to be purely formulaic. This seems to be a fairly unique opportunity to compare two versions of the same message, beyond the superficial difference of codes. In this instance the text is translated twice, not only from one language to another, but also from one style to another. Here the linguistic traits characterising ‘public’ texts are reduced to a minimum, allowing us to see what expressions formed the typical patterns of ‘polite’ interaction. These were not found to be so
308 Eighteenth-century English
important as to require a literal translation. It is as if their presence was taken for granted.
Concluding remarks
In the course of late modern times, considerable changes appear to have intervened in ‘public style’ texts. The kind of deference and authority observed in eighteenth-century letters requesting and offering patronage respectively (see Bannet and Fitzmaurice ), for instance, is not mirrored in similar linguistic patterns in nineteenth-century business letters, though these also aim to create and maintain as good a relationship as possible between participants. Linda Mitchell (: ), summarising the recommendations of letter-writing manuals, lists ‘project a good attitude’ and ‘create an ethos’ among these. From the analysis carried out in this study, this is exactly what the documents taken into consideration seem to suggest. Although the exchange may take place between participants who are supposed to know each other, this cannot be assumed to be the case at all times; in fact, even the possibility that the letter may be seen by complete strangers co-operating with the recipient cannot be ruled out, hence the need for the encoder to present a text in which the kind of psychological distance reflected by positive and negative politeness moves may be safeguarded. Deference, respect and authority thus coexist in texts in various guises, ranging from evaluation to modality, and allow us to glimpse the kind of ‘ethos’ that participants shared, that is the ideological framework that informed their linguistic choices, and for which ‘propriety’ appears to have been a key term at various levels.
16
Registering the language – dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution LY N DA MUG GLESTON E University of Oxford
The eighteenth-century context
A large number of persons habitually speak of ‘the Dictionary’, just as they do of ‘the Bible’ or ‘the Psalms’; and who, if pressed as to the authorship of these works, would certainly say that ‘the Psalms’ were composed by David, and ‘the Dictionary’ by Dr Johnson’ (Murray : ). As James Murray (editor of the Oxford English Dictionary (OED) –) here indicates, it is Johnson who, at least in popular belief, towers over eighteenth-century lexicography, often being accorded the status of writer of the prototypical dictionary, as well as – mythically if erroneously – of writer of the ‘first’ dictionary. In reality, of course, the centenary of the first monolingual dictionary – Cawdrey’s Table Alphabeticall () – was fast approaching even as the eighteenth century began. As John Marchant moreover stressed, it was ‘the Number and Variety of English Dictionaries’ which was instead more accurately to characterise this period (: br). Against the canonical preeminence of Johnson (the ‘stupendous Undertaking’ praised by David Baker (); the ‘indefatigable industry’ by which Johnson ‘from the best authorities, corrected the mistakes, retrenched the superfluities, and supplied the defects of those who went before him’), stand therefore a whole range of other works, diversified by size and price, by audience and addressees, by contents and language attitudes, as well as by their differential positioning within a genre which was by no means either monosemic or capable of being reduced to a single representative text. It is this diversity – of both methodology and ideological construction – which this chapter will explore. Long before the Lexicon totius Anglicitatis which was proclaimed as one of the OED’s founding ideals (see Trench : ), dictionaries in the eighteenth century had already announced their formal inclusivity. Allen’s Compete English Dictionary appeared in , Ash’s New and Complete English Dictionary ten
This paean appears in An Universal Dictionary of the English Language (: iv), and in the identical preface to M. Bayley’s Universal Etymological Dictionary of the English Language (: iv), incidentally illustrating other problems of eighteenth-century lexicography. In spite of its different title (not to mention its specification of an author and its claim that ‘this is the first work of the kind attempted in Scotland’), the latter is a pirated edition of the former.
309
310 Eighteenth-century English
years later. James Barclay produced a dictionary both Complete and Universal in . The semantic latitude which such adjectives implied was nevertheless obvious. As the title page of Wesley’s Complete English Dictionary of stated, its intention was merely to explain ‘most of these hard Words, which are to be found in the Best English Writers’ [my emphasis]. The fact that two entries make up X (xenodochium, ‘an inn, an hospital’; xystus, ‘a portico, a close shady walk’), while Y comprises three ( yeoman, yeoman of the guard, yore), confirms the distance yet to made up between such works and that ‘inventory of the language’ by which Trench would later define the very different ‘completeness’ of the OED (see Trench : ). As this suggests – and irrespective of their titles – conceptions of the dictionary as the rightful guide to specific, and often highly restricted, sections of the vocabulary continued to flourish, just as they had in the seventeenth century. It was the belief that dictionaries dealt with ‘hard words’ which ensured, for example, the continuing popularity of Bullokar’s English Expositor. First published in , it was in its twelfth edition in (having been ‘abundantly augmented’ by R. Browne); a nineteenth edition appeared in . John Kersey likewise revised Phillips’ New World of English Words (originally published in ) in , publishing his own Dictionarium Anglo-Britannicum in . Later editions followed in and . Here he promised ‘a Brief, but Emphatical and Clear Explication of all sorts of difficult WORDS, that derive their Original from other Ancient and Modern Languages’. The Glossographia Anglicana Nova () or, as its subtitle explained, ‘A Dictionary, Interpreting Such HARD WORDS of whatever Language, as are at present used in the English Tongue’ effectively drew attention, by means of the bilingual structure on its title page, to its intended efficacy in bridging the divide between loan words of classical origin and the limited linguistic competence which was assumed for the ‘Ignorant’ who ‘have not Money sufficient to lay in necessary Furniture of Learning’. Dictionary entries included calidity, glossed ‘warmness or heat’ and canorous (‘loud, shrill’), as well as recondite (defined as ‘secret, hidden’), a word borrowed from Latin in the mid seventeenth century. Such dictionaries positioned themselves at the interface between different strata in the English lexicon, promising the acquisition of a vocabulary distinguished by its capacity for nuance, and by words of striking specificity (if perhaps doubtful utility in practice). Abactor, for example (in Johnson, Ash and Allen, among others), was defined as ‘Those who drive away or steal cattle in herds, or great numbers at once, in distinction from those that steal only a sheep or two’. Other dictionaries proffered admurmeration (‘The act of murmuring’, in Ash) and adnubilated which appears in Nathan Bailey () with the meaning ‘Darkened or clouded’.
‘The lexicographer is making an inventory; … his task is to make his inventory complete’ (Trench : –).
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 311
The dominance of polysyllabic, often densely Latinate, headwords of this kind could remain a significant part of the historical narrative of dictionary-writing, even if actual usage – and the realities of eighteenthcentury language practice – were at some remove. ‘Never used’, James Murray would conclude of admurmuration, for example; ‘probably never used’, was his verdict on abjectate (in Bailey as a synonym of abject, (v.)). Actitation, defined as ‘debating of lawsuits’ in Bailey (but ‘action quick and frequent’ in Johnson), was similar. The ‘historical principles’ of the OED would subject words of this kind to rigorous investigation as part of the descriptive revolution (and scientific regard for evidence) which characterised late nineteenth-century philology. Dictionaries in the eighteenth century could conversely achieve a wholly spurious expansiveness, constructing a lexicon impressive in size and scope but with evidently tenuous links to the speech acts of the native user at various points. ‘A heap of Greek and Latin words, just tagged with English terminations’ hence created a distorted image of English in several dictionaries, as Wesley (: Ar) contended. The validity of recording of ‘easy words’ could, however, also be open to question. ‘English words as and, of, but … which stand so gravely in Mr. Baily’s, Pardon’s and Martin’s dictionaries’ have been deliberately rejected’ (: Ar), Wesley noted, deliberately compromising completeness in this respect too. Baskerville similarly reassured his readers of the virtues of such patterns of exclusion. ‘This Dictionary’, he affirmed in his Preface (: n.p), ‘will be found better calculated for their Use than any hitherto extant; as it is not crowded with the common Words of the Language, such as every Person must be supposed to understand.’ While Osselton has stressed the emergence of the ‘general’ dictionary during this period, noting in particular the increase in ‘ordinary words’ in Kersey at the very beginning of the eighteenth century (see Osselton ), comments such as those by Wesley and Baskerville clearly continue to probe the role of the dictionary as reference book and the range of ideologies which could underpin its construction. As Baskerville indicates, even in the mid eighteenth century the utility of recording words in common knowledge could indeed seem doubtful when set against lexemes which challenged the understanding of the generality of readers – such as incompensable (‘unable to be compensated’ in Bailey ) or megalography (cryptically defined in Bailey as ‘A drawing of pictures at large’). ‘A term … not much used in common speech’, Johnson noted for abalienate, failing to provide an illustrative citation for its written use. If words such as at do therefore appear as head-words in Bailey’s Universal Etymological English Dictionary, its four-word definition (‘as at a place’) stands in sharp contrast to the expansiveness of the adjacent nine-line entry for asyndeton. At in Johnson, on the other hand, is anatomised with
The OED would fail to find evidence for the usage of either of these forms outside their occurrence in dictionaries.
312 Eighteenth-century English
reference to sixteen different sub-senses, revealing the complex meanings of this ‘easy’ word. As here, Johnson could prove himself a lexicographer who was not so much emblematic of the eighteenth century but instead one who was, in reality, strikingly different. Economies within the available or possible lexicon could also be prompted by the desired size (and price) of the volume. This too impacted upon shifting conceptions of the dictionary and its role. Even in Kersey criticised the ‘Voluminous’ works then in existence, pressing the claims of his own dictionary as a ‘Portable Volume, (which may be had at an easie rate)’. Pocket dictionary is recorded in the OED only from (a fact which reveals still other problems of completeness, even in a more empirical age). The pocket dictionary as an eighteenth-century genre was nevertheless both popular and well established, as in A Pocket Dictionary or Complete English Expositor () or Baskerville’s Vocabulary, or Pocket Dictionary (). ‘The want of a Useful POCKET DICTIONARY has for many years been complained of’, Entick affirmed in (thereby, of course, also commending the utility of his own). Concise works facilitated ease of reference while also attesting to a heightened lexical consciousness which made ‘portability’ a frequent proclaimed advantage: ‘natives, who stand in need of a work of this kind, must acknowledge it necessary to have it always at hand, that they might recur to it either when reading, or writing, or speaking’, wrote Allen (). Cost, of course, was also important. Johnson’s handsome two-volume folio was priced at £ shillings (Bailey’s various productions habitually cost six shillings). For some, this too offered a spur to lexicography of a different kind. As Marchant argued in a ‘Volume of much less Compass’ (: br), ‘large Dictionaries in Folio, are too dear for the Purchase of most People in private Life, who, even if they had Ability, have not always Leisure for the Perusal of such voluminous Works.’ Johnson prepared an abridged edition of his own work while the popularity of ‘miniature’ formats ( Johnson’s Dictionary of the English Language in Miniature), such as that by Hamilton in , is confirmed by the fact that it had reached its eleventh edition within five years. ‘This small Volume contains in Substance the Quintessence of Lexicography’, Hamilton’s prefatory ‘Advertisement’ stated, promising too that ‘the more obsolete Excrescences of JOHNSON’ were excised while ‘no Pains have been spared to render this Work as complete as its Limits would admit’. Rather than being defined by a single iconic text, it is the mutability of the eighteenth-century dictionary – in both form and content – which can be particularly conspicuous. In this context, Johnson’s own lexicographical
M. Wilmot Let. Apr. () : ‘They all expect to be your pocket dictionarys and lionizers and walking sticks.’ Another solution was to publish in parts, a procedure adopted by Johnson’s publishers for the second edition in (see Reddick : ), as well as for Barlow’s Complete English Dictionary (–). Barlow offered the first part free as an additional inducement to purchase.
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 313
work can in fact at times prove emblematic in an entirely different way. ‘It may sometimes happen, by hasty detruncation, that the general tendency of the sentence may be changed: the divine may desert his tenets, or the philosopher his system’, Johnson had noted of his treatment of citational evidence and the changes which could be imposed upon individual quotations (: Bv). Johnson had, however, probably failed to envisage a similar desertion being enforced upon his own lexicographical precepts in subsequent versions of his text. Hamilton, for instance, not only reduced Johnson to a miniature format but added ‘an alphabetical Account of the Heathen Deities’ (even though – unlike many of his contemporaries – Johnson had rejected proper names as outside the rightful territory of the dictionary). Hamilton’s decision to incorporate ‘a concise Epitome of the most remarkable EVENTS of the FRENCH REVOLUTION’ was still more noteworthy, not least given the Gallophobia evident in Johnson’s original text ( frenchify: ‘to infect with the manner of France; to make a coxcomb’; manage: ‘To treat with caution or decency: this is a phrase merely Gallick; not to be imitated’). Contemporary conceptions of dictionary-makers as ‘compilers’ rather than editors (see for example Marchant (), Allen ()) were also significant here. To compile – ‘to collect from several Authors, to amass or heap together’, as Bailey’s definition confirms – could imply a very different remit from that of modern lexicography. ‘Every word shall be critically investigated, and every statement verified’, James Murray would stress of the determined independence of lexicographical practice in the OED. This return to first principles, in terms of both data and definition, would bring important benefits for linguistic knowledge of both lexicon and usage. As Murray warned, well-established habits of deferential or careless appropriation instead often characterised the lexicography of the past. ‘It is marvellous, and to the inexperienced, incredible, how Dictionaries and Encyclopaedias simply copy each other, without any attempt to verify either quotations or facts’, he expostulated to the London Philological Society (Murray : ). Entries for abacot (defined as ‘a Royal Cap of State, like Double Crown, anciently worn by the Kings of England’ in Kersey) constitute a prime example of this fallibility – and its consequences. While abacot appears on the opening page of a range of eighteenth-century dictionaries (see for example Glossographia (), Bailey (), Ash ()), it did not in fact exist as a lexeme at all. Instead ‘a remarkable series of blunders and ignorant reproductions of error’ had led to the apparent validation of a form which was in reality simply a misprint of the word bycoket (see OED s.v. bycoket). Such ‘ghost words’ abounded; dissoned in Bailey (), given an origin in Chaucer and a meaning ‘dissonant’, was in fact the word distoned; Johnson’s entry for depectible (‘Capable of being divided into parts; divisible’) rather than depertible (the correct form) led a fictive headword which appeared in a range of later dictionaries; similar was his entry for foupe (which later appeared in Ash) but was, in reality, a historical misreading of long-tailed <ſ > as in Camden’s
314 Eighteenth-century English
Remaines of a Greater Worke Concerning Britaine (‘To ſoupe their words out of their throats with fat and full spirits’). Other writers, however, deftly presented the act of compilation – and the levels of appropriation which this could entail – as virtue rather than vice. ‘To copy the best Examples is not only the necessary Resource of the Writers of the present Age, but it exhibits, at the same Time, a proof of their Modesty and Discernment’, Hamilton argued in the ‘Advertisement’ to his ‘miniature’ Johnson. After all, he added, ‘if a Word has been once explained with Accuracy, and its various Meanings discriminated with critical Acumen, nothing remains for the succeeding Writer, but to collect and arrange the Labours of his Predecessors, in a Manner which coincides with his own particular Plan’. Such comments confirm the existence of a different set of attitudes underpinning the art of lexicography. ‘Adoption signified approval of and acceptance of an earlier work’, as Burchfield notes (: ), pointing out that our modern notions of plagiarism in this context are perhaps anachronistic: ‘The lexicographers were rather like the beneficiaries of a will – “Look”, they seemed to say, “I have inherited all these gems from my predecessors … I have kept them all and here are some more” .’ Such patterns of inheritance and appropriation can of course be constructed less charitably, being for Landau, for example, emblematic of the ‘successive and often successful acts of piracy’ which constitute a dominant feature of the lexicography of this period (Landau : ). His description of the ‘grudging acknowledgment’ which was accorded as part of this process (when acknowledgement is given at all), is nevertheless countered by the homage which certain writers (or ‘compilers’) were clearly prepared to give. ‘In compiling the following work, we have carefully selected every thing valuable to be found in former dictionaries; and as Mr Johnson’s plan is certainly the best, we have conformed to it more than any other’, the anonymous writer of the Universal Dictionary stated (: iv). If the consonance of many entries is thereby explained (Johnson, wad, ‘a bundle of straw thrust close together’; Universal Dictionary, wad, ‘a bundle of straw thrust close together’; Johnson, wadding, ‘a kind of soft stuff loosely woven, with which the skirts of coats are stuffed out’; Universal Dictionary, wadding: ‘a kind of soft stuff loosely woven, with which the skirts of coats are stuffed out’), in wider terms it is clear that Johnson’s name (and lexical authority) is indeed, as here, able to be appropriated as an attempted guarantee of textual quality. Johnson’s definitions are therefore assimilated in their
See OED s.v. foupe. Johnson omitted abacot, and had already expressed reservations about the wholesale importation of mere ‘dictionary words’ (‘Many words yet stand supported only by the name of Bailey, Ainsworth, Philips, or the contracted Dict. for Dictionaries subjoined: of these I am not always certain that they are seen in any book but the works of lexicographers. Of such, I have omitted many, because I had never read them; and many I have inserted, because they may perhaps exist, though they have escaped my notice’ (: Ar–Av).
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 315
broader outlines; self-evident too, however, is the decision to abandon salient elements of Johnson’s lexicographical style such as numbered sense-division, specification of etymology and his extensive inclusion of citational and supporting evidence. The principles of inheritance were subordinated to the aims – and audience – of the text. Other dictionaries can reveal still more disturbing aspects of both consonance and mutability. As Starnes and Noyes point out (: ), Defoe’s Compleat English Dictionary (), the New English Dictionary of (‘Containing a large and almost Compleat Collection of Useful English Words’), Sparrow’s New English Dictionary (which promised ‘a compleat Collection of useful English Words’), and Manlove’s New English Dictionary of All Such English Words (With Their Explanation) as are generally made Use of, in Speaking and Writing the English Language () are, in reality, all identical. Bailey’s eighteenth-century dictionaries could similarly be reproduced in a variety of forms, while he himself participated in a creative intertextuality with earlier dictionary-makers such as Kersey (as well as Coles, Phillips and Blount). Kersey’s specified addressees of (‘The whole Work Compil’d, and methodically Digested, for the Benefit of Young Students, Tradesmen, Artificers, Foreigners, and others, who are desirous thoroughly to understand what they Speak, Read, or Write’) hence make regular appearances on Bailey’s title pages, as in his Universal Etymological Dictionary (and its various editions throughout the century); they occupy too a prominent place on the title page of Entick’s New Spelling Dictionary, and its own iterations. The edition of the latter published in by William Crakelt (‘revised, corrected, and enlarged throughout’) still proclaims its usefulness for ‘young People, Artificers, Tradesmen and Foreigners, desirous of understanding what they speak, read and write’ in a line of descent which clearly runs across the eighteenth century. Such silent witnesses to textual history and the role of emulation can be counterbalanced by the level of dispute and dissent which other dictionarymakers intrude into their prefatory matter. Johnson’s hope that his dictionary ‘would incite no contention’ was here to be particularly vain. If Johnson is praised by some, as in Kenrick’s deferential appropriation in his New English Dictionary (‘With respect to the etymology, explanation of words, and illustration of idiom and phraseology, the reader will find that I have generally followed the celebrated dictionary of the learned Dr. Johnson’ (: viii)), dissent could be equally prominent elsewhere. ‘Another compiler is so very explicit in the Meaning of every trifling Word, that, sometimes, he gives it three or fourscore different Significations’, Marchant (: blr) stressed with reference to perceived redundancies in the treatment of polysemy and sense-differentiation (which, for many, constituted part of Johnson’s
For a comprehensive account of Bailey’s sources, see Starnes and Noyes (: –).
316 Eighteenth-century English
enduring value as a lexicographer). Marchant was still more critical in the second edition of his work: Mr. Johnson’s Dictionary (I mean that in Octavo) is but of very little Use to a mere English Reader. For, is it not true, is it not plain on the most superficial View of it, that, in a thousand common Words, and an infinite Number of Monosyllables, which a Child of five Years of Age would be ashamed to be ignorant of, he has run his Divisions into three- or four-score different Significations, which might easily have been reduced to three or four, or at most half a Score; the rest being so very synonymous, that they contain only a Turn of Words without the least Difference in the Sense ? (: ii–iii) Johnson’s sixty-eight senses of ‘go’ were hence subject to determined curtailment: ‘to walk; to move step by step; to record’, as Marchant’s entry concisely states. In this respect too, a marked pluralism of the eighteenthcentury dictionary (and considerations of its role and contents) is thereby in evidence as rival products sought to gain a secure and economically viable foothold in a highly competitive marketplace. ‘The AUTHOR assures you, he thinks this is the best ENGLISH DICTIONARY in the World’, the title page of Wesley’s Complete English Dictionary () unequivocally proclaimed.
Redefining the dictionary
As Béjoint () has noted, the individual components of the modern dictionary were all in existence by . It was, however, still far from the case that these components regularly or even necessarily found themselves united in individual works. Johnson, for example, included numbered and discrete sense divisions, together with etymological information and part of speech, as well as citational evidence in most entries, but excluded pronunciation (beyond specifying preferred position of stress). Kenrick in provided a numerical transcription system as a means of indicating ‘polished pronunciation’, gave some inconsistent attention to etymology, variably divided senses by dashes or semi-colons, and omitted examples of usage. Perry () two years later specified parts of speech, excluded etymology and reduced senseexplication to a single line, without illustrative examples (and abandoned the discrete numbering of senses). Thomas Browne’s Union Dictionary of (Containing all that is Truly Useful in the Dictionaries of Johnson, Sheridan, and Walker), adopts a (different) numerical transcription system for pronunciation, together with a semi-phonetic respelling of the entry-word, an inconsistent method of representing sense-division (which again abandons the numerical system used by Johnson and others in the middle of the century), and incorporates a set of truncated references to sources used by Johnson to illustrate usage (‘Lace. lase. v. a. a cord. Spens. – A platted string, Swift. – Texture of thread, &c. Herbert’). If, with hindsight, we can indeed identify the now familiar components of modern lexicographical practice
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 317
within a range of individual dictionaries, the notion of a shared and uniform system within their macro- and micro-structure is therefore clearly open to question, even in works produced at the very end of this period. Just as Trench in his lectures scrutinised the dictionaries of the past and found them wanting, writers in the eighteenth century could perceive – and indeed articulate – the problems of what could already seem a markedly unstable genre. ‘How little those books which go by this name in the English language may deserve it, may easily be perceived by considering that few or none claim any other merit but scraping together as many synonimes as they can, and leaving the reader to pick out the meaning from the rubbish that is collected’, as Barlow () critically noted (s.v. dictionary). It is Benjamin Martin, however, who stands most readily as Trench’s counterpart in the eighteenth century, his Lingua Britannica Reformata () functioning as an early treatise on the deficiencies – and necessary directions for reform – of the English dictionary. ‘The Article of English Dictionaries especially has been so far from any thing of a Progressive Improvement, that it is manifestly retrograde, and sinks from its low Apex; from bad, to very bad indeed’, Benjamin Martin declared. ‘So far have our Dictionaries been from answering the End or Purposes of such a Book, than little more Use can be made of them than barely to know how to spell, and what is the Meaning of a Word in the gross’ (: iii). He set out to ‘specify and enumerate the proper Requisites of a Genuine English Dictionary’ (: iv), dealing systematically with contents and coverage, etymology and sense-division, pronunciation and spelling, as well as the treatment of loanwords. Like Johnson therefore, Martin provides ‘a dictionary with a plan’ (Starnes and Noyes : ). Nevertheless, while Johnson’s Plan () is addressed more to the specifics of his own projected work – while also providing a range of illuminating comments on the discrimination of senses, the value of etymology, or the aims of standardisation which his dictionary might effect – it is Martin who, in some ways, offers the more critical overview of lexicographical principle per se. Both writers, as we shall see, moreover followed different trajectories in their attitudes to inclusion and to usage, as well as to matters as fundamental to the dictionary as spelling and alphabetical organisation. That the alphabet (and its rightful organisation) could be open both to dissent and conflicting practice offers a concise illustration of the levels of reform – and variability – which could be at stake. Even if dictionarymakers no longer had to explain principles of alphabetical arrangement and the means by which entries should be consulted (as Cawdrey had in ),
‘If thou be desirous (gentle Reader) rightly and readily to vnderstand, and to profit by this Table, and such like, then thou must learne the Alphabet, to wit, the order of the Letters as they stand, perfecty without booke, and where euery Letter standeth: as (b) neere the beginning, (n) about the middest, and (t) toward the end. Nowe if the word, which thou art desirous to finde, begin with (a) then looke in the beginning of this Table, but if with (v) looke towards the end … And so of all the rest’ (Cawdrey : Av).
318 Eighteenth-century English
significant variation could still occur. Were, for example, and , and equally and <j>, to be treated as discrete alphabetical symbols and given their own sections within the dictionary? Or were they, as tradition demanded, to function as variant forms of the ‘same’ grapheme? Cawdrey’s implementation of the latter system had, in the early seventeenth century, been matched by the self-evident realities of usage. At this date, and (and and <j>) were indeed positional variants within contemporary textual practice (as in vpon, loue). Though this positional variation was resolved in printed texts after c., eighteenth-century dictionaries could reveal a steadfast inertia in this respect. In Johnson’s dictionary, uttermost and uveous (a word without definition though with an illustrative citation) are followed by volcano and vulgar; vulturine (which possesses a definition but no citation) is followed by uvula. Earlier in the dictionary inwreathe is followed by job, a word of which Johnson was evidently suspicious (‘a low word now much in use’). Ann Fisher drew attention to the anomalies which could result, noting that ‘though the I and J, and also the U and V, are four distinct and different letters, both in name, shape, and sound; yet they have been ever blended and confounded in Dictionaries, to the great entanglement of youth’ (: ii). While Martin provided a clear dictum for better practice (‘a Person should be always able, by means of his Dictionary, to see how every Word is wrote or spelt, according to the current usage of the most approved and polite Writers of the Age’ (: v–vi)), even he failed to follow his own recommendations in this particular context. U and V hence appear as a single alphabetic division in spite of their divergence from that ‘current usage’ Martin formally advocates. Fisher, in contrast, chose to implement a system more reflective of contemporary language practice. ‘In this book’, she wrote of her Accurate New Spelling Dictionary (in its sixth edition by ), ‘they are classed in separate and distinct tables, under each respective letter, occurring in alphabetical order’. If Fisher stresses her ‘originality’ (‘without censuring the performance of others, I shall only point out the originality of my own’ (: ii)), tradition nevertheless continued to inform the positioning of relevant words in many dictionaries. Even in the final decades of the century, Walker () and Browne () provided twenty-four rather than twenty-six alphabetic divisions, thereby continuing – in their headwords – to conflate words beginning with and <j>, and and (even if, in the text itself, the principles of modern spelling were consistently adopted). Orthographical conservatism on other matters could attract widespread criticism. Principle was, for instance, matched by appropriate practice in Martin’s intended reform of ‘the old Way of writing technical Words with the redundant final k, after c’. This has been ‘justly discarded’ by ‘later Writers’, he argued, advocating logic rather than logick, and music rather than musick as reference models (: vi). Johnson, however, in line with his expressed ‘scholar’s reverence for … antiquity’ (: Av), maintained the older patterns intact. The resulting conflict between modern practice and traditional
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 319
authority was a recurrent topos, offering conflicting norms of correctness for readers who consulted entries for relevant words. Buchanan, providing headwords such as acrostic and critic, stressed that ‘K is a very useless and superfluous letter … and should not be wrote at the end of words exceeding one syllable’ (: ). ‘Mr. Samuel Johnson, whose works have rendered him justly esteemed, for their elegant correctness, and sublime sentiments, has endeavoured to restore this spelling’; Fenning conversely endorsed: ‘it were to be wished, that if the analogy of our language will not strengthen his reasons, yet even fashion will give a force to his example’ (: ). The fact that writers such as Hester Thrale attempted to remodel their own practice in this respect, especially when writing to Johnson, confirms the validity of his words (see Tieken-Boon van Ostade c: ). Kenrick introduced an alternative pattern: ‘In the orthographical part of this dictionary, there will be noticed a little singularity in the mode of spelling some words ending in c or ck; as lunatic and lunatick which, for distinction sake merely, I spell with a c when they are adjectives, and with ck when they are substantives’ (: viii). Other problems surrounded the ordering and treatment of words with initial or such as phancy or fancy, phrenzy or frenzy. For Martin the distinction was a matter of register and style (‘Orthography has appointed one Way of spelling a Word in common Language, and another in the learned and polite Diction; thus in ordinary we say and write Fancy, Fantasm, Frensy or Frenzy, &c. for Phantasy, Phantom, Phrenzy &c. according to the original Stile’ (: vi). Variability between public and private norms of spelling compounded these problems. As Osselton () has demonstrated, Johnson’s spelling in his letters did not agree with that he prescribed in his dictionary. Likewise Fisher’s correspondence reveals a range of forms such as ‘Scrutiney’, ‘simular’ (for similar), or indeed ‘Difinition’ which differ from those formally sanctioned by the authority – and headwords – of her lexicographical work.
The dictionary and the lexicon
‘A Dictionary ought to know its own limits, not merely as to what it should include, but also what it should exclude’, Trench stated as an important maxim for modern lexicography (: ). Even in , however, the limits of eighteenth-century lexicography were causing Martin considerable qualms. Definitions (and thereby the self-definition) of dictionary within a range of works foregrounded the image of completeness. ‘A collection of all the words in a language, or of the terms of art in any science explained and commonly digested in an alphabetic order’, as Bailey wrote in . Nevertheless, just as in the flexible signification of ‘complete’ on
See e.g. Fisher’s extant correspondence and draft versions of the dictionary Preface in the Hodgson papers in the British Library (Ms. Add. , Vol.V).
320 Eighteenth-century English
contemporary title pages, the notion of ‘all words’ within the dictionary could be open to nuanced (re)interpretation. This too was governed by conflicting perceptions of what dictionaries should, in fact, aim to do. Martin’s strictures for reform, for example, prioritised the synchronic. ‘A Dictionary is a Collection of all the Words in Use in any Language’ he wrote (: iv), criticising the ‘Redundancy of useless and obsolete Words’ which, as we have seen, could dominate existing works of lexicography. He urged the incorporation of ‘modern words’ (‘those which are useful and necessary’) in view of their greater value to those consulting the dictionary in search of elucidation. Fisher, Buchanan, Entick and Kenrick expressed similar convictions, as did Fenning in his stated preference for ‘every word made use of in the common occurrences of life’ (: viii). Omitting forms such as pauciloquy (‘sparing and rare speech’) and peace-parted (‘Dismissed from the world in peace’), both of which appeared in Johnson, Buchanan stressed his excision of the ‘obsolete’ in order ‘to make room for those [words] that are new’ (: v). ‘A much larger COLLECTION of Modern WORDS than any Book of the Kind and Price extant’, Fisher proclaimed (: title page). Principle could, however, fail to accord with subsequent practice. Fisher’s protestations on the subject of lexical selection (‘this is compiled on a plan entirely new; containing more modern, primitive, or original conversation words, than any larger Dictionary whatever, without any obsolete or inelegant ones’; ‘not containing any but modern words, which should, I think, render it, for the use of foreigners and others, one of the most elegant and expressive vocabularies of our language in its present state’ (: iv–v)) exist alongside entries such as cornific (‘productive of horns’) or coriaceous (‘consisting of leather’). In the later OED, the former would be recorded as existing only in dictionaries; evidence for the latter was rare, except for (in a slightly different sense) in natural history. Johnson, conversely, favoured the diachronic as a principle of selection: ‘My purpose was to admit no testimony of living authours, that I might not be misled by partiality, and that none of my contemporaries might have reason to complain’ (: B v). Three citations from Shakespeare illustrate madbrained; two more comprise the evidence for madcap. If empirical evidence is thereby provided (an important development in English lexicography, see for example Beal a: ), it was past rather than present which, for Johnson, acted as the preferred source of authority. As his entry for precarious illustrates, current usage could instead be seen as reflective of on-going change in language – and hence framed in the metalanguage of ‘decay’ and ‘degeneration’ (especially when this involved a departure from etymological roots). Empiricism can, in this sense, be fractured by firmly articulated opinion as well as principles of selection which run along prescriptive rather than descriptive lines. The legitimate sense of precarious was, Johnson noted, ‘Dependent; uncertain, because depending on the will of another; held by courtesy; changeable or alienable at the pleasure of
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 321
another’. Contemporary usage revealed only error: ‘No word is more unskilfully used than this, with all its derivatives. It is used for uncertain in all its senses, but it only means uncertain, as dependent on others: thus there are authors who mention the precariousness of an account; of the weather; of a die.’ This privileging of particular forms of data and interpretation is equally evident in Johnson’s praise for blore (‘an expressive word, but not used’, he noted in ) and in his condemnation of to have rather as merely ‘a barbarous expression of late intrusion into the language’. As in other texts on language at this time, ‘custom’ – and particularly what Johnson termed ‘colloquial licentiousness’ – could be viewed as distinctly fallible guides when it came to the norms which dictionaries should instil. Other entries in Johnson’s dictionary – such as giggler (supported by a citation from David Garrick), talent (attested in Charlotte Lennox) – as well as dissipate, intimidate and lacerate (all with citations from Johnson himself) – can bring the word-hoard nearer the contemporary linguistic situation, even if not necessarily closer to the reality of everyday usage. Predal (‘of or pertaining to plunder; predatory’, and based on the Latin præda ‘prey’) was, for instance, a word included on the basis of its use by Johnson’s friend Samuel Boyse in (‘Sarmatia, laid by prædal Rapine low’). Yet even in the OED no further evidence for its usage would be traced. Later revisions of Johnson could nevertheless build on the sense that dictionaries should, in fact, engage with the lexis of the present day, even if the bias tended to remain firmly towards formal written usage: Croft’s proposed four-volume edition of Johnson’s dictionary () hence promised to include ‘more than Twenty Thousand Words … from others of the best Authority in our own and former Times’. The persistence of additive and accretive methods of compilation meant, however, that few dictionaries provided a genuine engagement with newer forms of diction such as abhorrent in the sense ‘Abhorring, shrinking with horror; having or showing abhorrence, repugnance, or detestation (of )’ (given by the OED as first used by Smollett in ) or biographically, recorded by the OED in Lawrence Sterne in . Only with the wide-ranging collection of data for the OED in the second half of the nineteenth century would, as Murray noted, evidence-based lexicography (and inductive methodology) really come into their own as a basis for determining which entry-words should be admitted into the dictionary, as well as their appropriate treatment (though even here, the question of selection still intervened, bringing problems of a different kind). Johnson, on the other hand, could declare current usage to be obsolete as in his entry for deft, omit current words such as amorphous (even though they appeared in the interleaved
The citation in fact illustrated the form giggling (‘We shew our present, joking, giggling race; / True joy consists in gravity and grace’. Garrick’s Epilogue) and was removed from the edition of the dictionary. See Mugglestone ().
322 Eighteenth-century English
copy of Bailey he used while writing the dictionary), or – through the fallibilities of memory as a basis for citational accuracy – deploy the same speech in Hamlet as evidence of both instilment and distilment (‘Upon my secure hour thy uncle stole, / With juice of cursed hebenon in a viol, / And in the porches of mine ears did pour / The leperous distilment’). For other dictionary-makers, a commitment to the synchronic was manifest in the inclusion of entries characterised by their factual rather than strictly lexical or semantic information. As this indicates, the ways in which dictionaries might be ‘useful’ were also open to conflicting interpretations. The Pocket Dictionary – here like Dyche and Pardon () – omitted etymology on the grounds that it is ‘of no use to those who aim at English only’. It nevertheless included geographical information and the specification of market-days on precisely the opposite basis: ‘though … not of a philological kind, [these entries] will yet be found of importance in the concerns of life; such as the names of all towns of note in England, their distances from London, and the days of their markets, and fairs’ (: ). Bentick in likewise proclaimed that his work was ‘universally useful to all’, a fact attested in part by his decision to exclude ‘obsolete and useless Words’, together with his inclusion of ‘a mythological and biographical Dictionary of all the Heathen Gods and Goddesses, Heroes and Philosophers, mentioned in the Writings of the Ancients’. Such patterns of selection further confirm the different configurations of the notion of ‘dictionary’ at this time. ‘A Dictionary for the English Tongue, would require an Encyclopedy of knowledge’, Edward Phillips had proclaimed ([] : ‘Advertisement’). The same tendencies clearly held true for many writers in the eighteenth century. ‘Here you are to note, that a great Number of Words are purposely omitted, purely to make Room, for many useful, short, and beneficial Abstracts, from large Treatises, upon the Manners, and religious Customs of the Ancients, as well Jews, as Gentiles; as also the various Sects of Christians, likewise in Philosophy &c’, Dyche and Pardon informed their prospective readers (: Ar). Or as Barlow’s opening address ‘To the Reader’ noted almost forty years later: ‘The Work now proposed will contain not only every Article necessary for understanding our Language, but will likewise comprehend the Biography or Lives of the most celebrated Persons who have flourished in these Kingdoms; … to render it still more instructive [it] will contain a general geographical Description of the four Quarters of the World’. Johnson’s interest in words (and semantic value) rather than things again served to render his dictionary particularly distinctive.
While etymology was presented as one of Johnson’s guiding principles, its utility was often contested by other lexicographers, especially in earlier works. Dyche and Pardon stress the deliberate omission of etymologies ‘First, Because of their Uncertainty, in a very large Number of Instances: And, Secondly, upon Account of their Uselessness to those Persons that these Sort of Books are most Helpful to’ (: Ar).
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 323
It was this often-attested fuzziness of generic boundary between ‘dictionary’ and ‘encyclopaedia’ which acted as further stimulus for Trench’s determined redefinition of the dictionary in the middle of the nineteenth century. ‘Our early lexicographers … from failing to recognise any proper limits to their work, from the desire to combine in it as many utilities as possible, present often the strangest medleys in the books they have produced’, he noted (: ); ‘These are not Dictionaries of words only, but of persons, places, things; they are gazetteers, mythologies, scientific encyclopaedias, and a hundred things more.’
The dictionary as interpreter
Central, of course, to the real utility of the dictionary is its role in explication and interpretation. This too operated on a variety of principles over the course of the eighteenth century. ‘To know any science is one thing – to communicate it to the conception of others is quite another’, Ann Fisher warned (: iv). The ideal mode of definition was open to considerable debate; Allen (: title page) proclaimed the advantages of a ‘precise and determinate Idea of … Meaning’. Barlow countered by promising ‘a copious explanation of all the Words in the English Language’ (: title page); Entick favoured a structure in which definitions were encompassed within a single line since both ‘unnecessary prolixity’ and ‘abstruse brevity’ could cause ‘miscarriages’ in understanding (: vi). Definitions such as ‘the advantage of the wind’ (weather-gage) in Wesley () or, in the same work, ‘a thing lost, and coming to the lord of the manor’ (weft) reveal the challenges which lexicography could bring. Contemporary criticism could, with some justice, also focus on the tendency ‘to explain terms by others equally difficult’ (Pocket Dictionary : ), so that abscess commonly received a gloss as ‘impostume’, or dross in Johnson remained memorably unexplained by ‘The recrement or despumation of metals’. Whereas Johnson’s definition of cough has become a staple feature in popular comment on his dictionary, the fact that a truncated version of it appeared in many succeeding works is often forgotten. ‘A convulsion of the lungs’ hence stands, elliptically, in Fisher () and Hamilton (). This principle of inherited definition, as Martin contended (: viii), could pose severe problems. Labyrinth was, for instance, defined in a number of dictionaries over the century, for example Bentick () as ‘a maze full of windings’ (a truncated version of Johnson’s ‘A maze; a place formed with inextricable windings’ which was itself a mutation of Cawdrey’s far more transparent text: ‘laborinth: a place so full of windings and turnings, that a man cannot finde the way out of it’). The unfortunate definition of wade (‘to pass water without swimming’) – also in John Johnson – was another such example, appropriated into the Universal English Dictionary (), and a range of other works. In yet another casualty of the act of compilation, transferred authority could, as here, lead to the suspension of critical judgement.
324 Eighteenth-century English
Defining practice varied widely, even within a single work. Elliptical defining styles – and ones which operate in terms of full sentences – often co-existed (see for example Marchant (), formality, formation). Defining formulae could be similarly inconsistent so that agentive nouns such as desirer or deserver could be defined as ‘one that is eager for any thing’ or ‘a man who merits rewards’ (here on the same page in Scott ()); likewise ‘he who knocks’ (knocker) appears alongside labourer (‘one who does the most laborious work’) in Bentick (). Latin–English dictionaries provided an effective model for defining many ‘hard’ words which are, in effect, simply ‘translated’ in an accompanying gloss (see for example habilitate ‘to qualify; to entitle’, which appeared, say, in Samuel Johnson () and in identical form in John Johnson ()). It was, however, ‘easy’ words which frequently engendered the most difficulty. Pineapple is, for example, described – if not necessarily defined – by Buchanan’s () selection of ‘A delicious fruit’; pitchfork in the same work is simply ‘an instrument used by husbandmen’ with no elucidation beyond this vague specification of domain. For those without the background knowledge to supplement the information supplied, the dictionary as reference work could be distinctly perplexing. Phlegm, formally defined only as ‘a slimy excrement’ in Buchanan (), could surely only increase anxiety. The agency of the reader could hence be vital in the active reconstruction of meaning. ‘An instrument well known’ is a popular definition of knife (see for example Bentick (); ‘A tree well known’ stands alongside willow in a range of works (see for example Pocket Dictionary ()) – even if other dictionaries pursued a different semantic tack entirely. ‘A tree worn by lovers’, states Perry’s Royal Standard English Dictionary () in a definition which, at least if applied literally, offers still more potential for confusion. ‘A garment worn by women, well known’, ‘A wall fruit, well known’, as a range of dictionaries state for petticoat and peach, deploying a formula now consigned to history as a mechanism of (non)-definition; dog is, for example, merely ‘an animal well known’ in Bailey () and a range of subsequent texts. Johnson’s Plan had, however, stressed the significance of genus types and the role of the dictionary in offering precise information on this head. As he admitted, on one level ‘it seems of no great use to set down the words horse, dog, cat, willow … of which it will be hard to give an explanation not more obscure than the word itself’ (: ). Nevertheless, it was, in other ways, important to remember that this too was part of the ‘rigour of interpretative lexicography’ which the dictionary-maker undertook: it is to be considered, that, if the names of animals be inserted, we must admit those which are more known, as well as those with which we are, by accident, less acquainted; and if they are all rejected, how will the reader be relieved from difficulties produced by allusions to the crocodile, the camæleon, the ichneumon, and the hyæna ? … If only those which are less known are to be mentioned, who shall fix the limits of the reader’s learning? (: )
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 325
The apparent semantic equivalence of discrete items had, for example, been a recurrent problem in English lexicography. Cawdrey had memorably rendered cockatrice and crocodile as lexemes capable of bearing the same definition (‘a beast’); dictionary-makers in the eighteenth century could reveal similar problems in their attempts to grapple with how such words might best be defined. The success of ‘well-known’ as an all-embracing defining formula depends, of course, on the presence of the requisite level of knowledge in the reader. Yet attempts to be more specific could introduce other problems, as in the definition of lynx as ‘a spotted beast’ and panther as ‘a spotted wild beast’ (both of which occur in A Dictionary of the English Language (), hence inadvertently suggesting the relative domesticisation of the lynx). If Bailey improves on Cawdrey’s crocodile (‘a very large Beast in the Shape of a Lizard, living both on the Land and in the Water’), lynx evidently remained challenging: ‘a wild Beast very much spotted all over his Body, and very quick-sighted, much of the nature of the Wolf’. Johnson’s definition of words such as mouse – even if lacking the scientific terminology of the later OED – did effectively capture the essence of the creature being described (‘The smallest of all beasts; a little animal haunting houses and corn fields, destroyed by cats’). Johnson would – as here – often reveal that close engagement with meaning later commended by Murray. Rejecting ‘well-known’ as defining formula, Johnson instead engaged with words such as knife and pitchfork with praiseworthy specificity (‘An instrument edged and pointed, wherewith meat is cut, and animals killed’; ‘a fork with which corn is thrown upon the waggon’). Johnson’s ‘delicate appreciation’ of senses (Murray : ) would in fact lead to the appropriation of many definitions – though now with proper acknowledgement and attribution – by the OED itself, as in the entries for belly (‘The part of anything that swells out into a larger capacity’) or bright which Johnson eloquently defined as ‘Resplendent with charms’ when used to describe people (see further Mugglestone ). For Martin in (and writing of course before the publication of Johnson’s dictionary), it was the art of definition – and the level of elucidation which should thereby be supplied – which appeared as the ‘grand Defect’ of then existing lexicographical work. This, he admits, was ‘the greatest Motive to my undertaking this Work’. The proper treatment of polysemy (hitherto ‘defective and imperfect’) was of most concern. Martin carefully enumerated the way in which sense-division might be represented (so that etymological meaning is succeeded by the ‘General and Popular’, then ‘Figurative and Mechanical uses’, then ‘Humorous, Political, and Burlesque’, and concluding with ‘the various Scientifical Acceptations’ (: viii). His thoroughness in this respect is acknowledged to have been an important influence on Johnson, whose Plan (: ) had allowed only for the ordered specification of ‘natural and primitive signification’, ‘consequential meaning’, ‘metaphorical sense’, followed by any additional observations which might seem
326 Eighteenth-century English
necessary. Defining conventions advocated (and implemented) by Martin – by which senses are carefully numbered in entries (a format which would be adopted in the Pocket Dictionary (), Johnson () and Buchanan () for example) enable a clarity and specificity which many dictionaries – both before and after – transparently lacked. The role of commas in (a) merely separating synonyms used as explanatory glosses, as well as (b) in indicating intentionally discrete senses would retain a marked ambiguity throughout the century, with the agency of the reader again necessarily coming to the fore in determining the appropriate level of interpretation. Accommodate is, for instance, defined by Wesley () as ‘to provide for, make up for, or apply’. Acrimony is ‘sharpness, sourness’. Adjacent entries in Bentick () confirm this polysemy of punctuation so that wary is given the definition ‘prudent, cautious, provident’ while wash is ‘to clean with water, to bathe, to colour’. As in these instances, the decision to read some as giving a set of elucidatory glosses, and others as a series of separate senses rests only upon the competence – and judgement – of the reader. Other dictionaries could deploy semicolons in similar (and overlapping) functions, or simple dashes – without, however, necessarily reducing the interpretative difficulties. ‘A critical and accurate Enumeration and Distinction of the several Signification of each respective Word must be allow’d by all to be indispensably the chiefest Care of every Writer of Dictionaries’, Martin declared (: vii–viii), condemning the ‘promiscuous Manner’ in which sense-division was both treated and represented. Sadly, this was still in evidence in many dictionaries by the end of the eighteenth century – in spite of Martin’s and Johnson’s endeavours (and example) in this respect.
Decorum
Eighteenth-century dictionaries could therefore conspicuously fail to exhibit a set of settled conventions – and indeed convictions – about their form and role as reference works. Even as reference works, however, there was marked divergence in what was felt to be appropriate in terms of representation, as well as in the degree of moral framing (and instruction) which definitions should provide. Notions of lexical decorum – and other problems of ‘completeness’ – surface as an explicit concern as the century advances. Cawdrey, for example, had included buggery (‘coniunction with one of the same kinde, or of men with beasts’) within his limited word-hoard of . Bailey likewise included a range of words about which the later OED (with its origins in Victorian England) would have noticeable scruples. In this respect, Bailey would, in fact, ironically prove to be more of an ‘inventory’ than the OED, including as he did fuck (which appeared in the OED only in the Supplements published by Burchfield at the end of the twentieth century) as well as cunt and words such as arse-worm (defined as ‘a kind of little Worms sometimes found in the Rectum, which tickle it, and are troublesome’).
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 327
General concerns about the public presentation of controversial vocabulary (of various kinds) were already starting to be an issue by the second half of the eighteenth century. Given the youthful addressees specified for many dictionaries, and the educative function often proclaimed, the fact that a certain degree of lexical restriction should be implemented is therefore not surprising. ‘As it is principally intended for the youth of both sexes at boarding-schools’, Dictionary () stated in the opening ‘Advertisement’, ‘such words only have been admitted as are found in the purest classical writers’. Marchant was notably critical of the latitude of his own predecessors in this respect: ‘Another, without any Regard to the Morals of his young Readers, introduces into his Dictionary some of the most obscene Terms our Language is acquainted with, and explains them in the most vulgar Acceptation’ (: br). His dictionary would be different, he assured prospective readers: ‘we have … taken especial Care to exclude all those terms that carry any Indecency in their Meaning, or have the least Tendencies to corrupt the Mind of Youth.’ Like other elements within the eighteenthcentury dictionary, the precise characteristics of this ‘Care’ were variably constructed. Words included by Johnson – such as strumpet or priapism – are, in keeping with Marchant’s critical position on the ‘great Cham’, nowhere to be found. Whore-master (a common form in earlier dictionaries, as in Johnson), is likewise excluded as a headword by Marchant though it still appears in defining fornicator (‘a whore-master; one who has a criminal commerce with any woman, married or unmarried’). Fornication is, however, present, though its definition is informed by a certain euphemistic delicacy, as well as a strong moral bias (‘the act of incontinency between single persons, for when either of the parties is married, such act is adultery. It is sometimes uses as a generical term, including all kinds of offences against chastity’). A similar fusion of morality and euphemism is evident in incontinence which is glossed as both ‘unchastity’ and ‘an unrestrained appetite’. Whore is also included, though with a definition in which moral condemnation is again apparent (‘a woman who prostitutes herself for hire’). Like the legendary ladies who were supposed to have scoured Johnson’s dictionary in search of the ‘naughty words’ (see Mugglestone (a); Johnston (: )), a similar scouring of Marchant can be relatively productive. Reassurances about lexical purity can evolve into an iterated formula by the end of the century; ‘He has rejected all obsolete, bad, low, and despicable words’, states the testimonial (by J. Bevis) in the Pocket Dictionary (: ); ‘I have rejected all low, bad, and despicable words’, Buchanan assured his readers (: v). Entick voiced identical reassurances in (vi). Principle and practice could nevertheless again reveal a somewhat uneasy relationship.
Garrick edited words such as clap and pox when directing Vanbrugh’s The Provok’d Wife in the s, displaying a similar reticence with regard to ‘commit Fornication’ which was rephrased as ‘have me do I don’t know what’. Fart was similarly edited out of Jonson’s The Alchemist so that ‘I fart on thee’ becomes ‘I dare thee’. See McIntyre (: –).
328 Eighteenth-century English
Pizzle (‘The gristly part of the penis of man or beast’) is included in the Pocket Dictionary (), in Buchanan and, without definition, in Johnson. It is, however, excluded from Entick (), Fenning (), Dictionary () and Browne (). Anus is widely excluded, as from Bailey and Johnson, as well as later works such as those by Entick and Browne. The Pocket Dictionary () nevertheless provides a definition of buggery (later excluded by Johnson, Fenning and later works) which manages to expand on that in Cawdrey (‘The coupling of one man with another; or of a man or woman with a beast’). Copulation, here in line with the stated moral tenor of the dictionary, is, however, defined only in terms of the legitimate production of offspring. Fisher, while placing her dictionary within an explicit pedagogic context, likewise included the forthright definition of terms such as courtesan (‘a common whore’); ‘A common harlot’, the Pocket Dictionary noted with similar opprobrium. Culturally constructed notions of taboo could elsewhere lead to a certain evasiveness in terms of definition; see further Mugglestone (a) – as in the definition of diarrhoea which appears in a range of dictionaries, including Johnson, Allen, and Browne as ‘a flux from the belly’. This could, on the other hand, be countered with remarkably explicitness in other works (‘a profuse evacuation of liquid excrement by stool’, as Barlow noted). Johnson’s delicate definition of fart (‘Wind from behind’), which is supported by appropriate literary citation from Suckling (‘Love is the fart / Of every heart; / It pains a man when ’tis kept close; / And others doth offend, when ’tis let loose’) can likewise be set alongside the far more vigorous definition provided by Marchant five years later: ‘a crack of wind from the posteriors’. Fenning, however, decided to omit the word altogether. Taboo, propriety and a range of ideological constructions can, in other respects, reveal productive intersections in many dictionaries, not least in the moral coding which can feature as a staple feature of defining practice. Assumptions of a monotheistic – and Christian – universe, for example, pervade many definitions, leading to a degree of semantic specialisation which is unmatched in modern lexicography. Wickedness in the OED is, for instance, defined in terms of transgression and culpability (for example ‘The quality of being wicked; wicked character or disposition; depravity, iniquity, immorality’; ‘Wicked action or conduct; iniquity as committed or perpetrated; occas. wicked speech or statement’). Eighteenth-century dictionaries could instead stress the conviction of Christian sin which this also comported (see for example Fenning (), wicked: ‘living in habitual contrariety to the laws of God’; wickedness (Pocket Dictionary : ‘whatever is a violation of our duty to God, our neighbours, or ourselves’)). Irrespective of its rarity in actual usage, it was likewise the theological sense of death (‘To die everlastingly’,
Johnson provides a citation, though one which deftly removes its relevance to humans: ‘The pizzle in animals is official to urine and generation’ (Browne’s Vulgar Errours).
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 329
as Johnson notes) which was prominent in contemporary definition. Die in Barlow is accordingly defined not only as ‘to lose life; to loose [sic] all the animal functions’ but also ‘to perish everlastingly, by losing communication with God, the fountain and author of true life’. Suicide in Johnson (and other dictionaries) is, in a similar way, charged with theological and moral opprobrium: ‘Self-murder; the horrid crime of destroying yourself’ (compare the factual neutrality of the modern Encarta World English Dictionary (): ‘the act of deliberately killing yourself’). Ideologies of gender and gender-appropriate behaviour can be equally pervasive. Female addressees are made explicit in a range of works (especially in the construction of the dictionary as a mediating device between the unlearned and the knowledge they are presumed to need). Gender-specific considerations similarly affect the definition of words such as kite (‘a machine made of paper fastened to sticks, which boys let fly in the air for their diversion’, Marchant ) or, as for giglet (‘a wanton, lascivious girl’, Universal Dictionary, ), and can articulate behavioural proscriptions in firmly condemnatory fashion. In what would prove to be an enduring folklinguistic stereotype, popular images of gender can also be used to emphasise ideals of female linguistic behaviour (and the particular utility of lexicography in this respect). ‘The unaffected grace which animates the conversation of a Lady, cannot fail to charm on paper’, the writer of Dictionary (: iii–iv) observed: ‘as the Fair Sex have hitherto maintained the prize of epistolary Ease, it may happen, that in the unpremeditated flow of stile, a word may be improperly spelled – the purer the snow the more conspicuous the speck; – the slightest reference to this Dictionary will remove the defect.’
Dictionaries and the proper speaker
Notions of decorum informed by ideologies of correctness, of course, constitute perhaps the approach to language which is most often associated with the eighteenth century. It was, as Tieken-Boon van Ostade (c: ) has noted, ‘the desire for a standard language, in national as well as individual terms’ which was to be one of the prominent issues of the day, foregrounded in Swift’s Proposal, and building on ideas already articulated by Dryden and Addison in the preceding century. Variability – even if a natural property of languages – was, in such conceptions, ideally subject to stringent regulation. The assumed role of dictionaries within such processes was also regularly made clear. As reference models, they should, many argued, not only describe but prescribe recommended norms of usage. Johnson’s Plan here set out the iconic image of a language controlled via lexicography, embedded in a culture of ‘ascertainment’: ‘This, my Lord, is my idea of an English
The most recent evidence in the OED derives from (Hakewill Apol. : ‘So long as God shall liue, so long shall the damned die’).
330 Eighteenth-century English
dictionary, a dictionary by which the pronunciation of the language may be fixed, and its attainment facilitated; by which its purity may be preserved, its use ascertained, and its duration lengthened’ (: ). While Johnson’s dictionary () offered a significantly restated position in some respects (see for example Lynch and McDermott ()), other lexicographers made plain the interventionist strategies (and active reform) which dictionaries might implement. ‘Three quarters of an hour, employed in pronouncing words in this distinct manner, in the order in which they occur, would be a sufficient exercise at a time’, William Johnston argued with reference to the proper use of his Pronouncing and Spelling Dictionary. He advocated repeating this exercise several times a day ‘for a month together’ by which time the dictionary should have been read in entirety and ‘a general knowledge and practice of a right pronunciation’ acquired (: ). As here, the dictionary could be constructed as a practical tool, engaged in the process of standardisation, and intentionally facilitating the displacement of specific features of one language variety by another. The pronouncing dictionaries which emerged in the second half of the eighteenth century were to be particularly explicit on the ways in which lexicography might foster a shared, and ‘standard’, mode of speech. While ‘true pronunciation’ appears as a stated feature of many dictionaries across the century (see for example Bailey ; Dyche and Pardon ), this rarely proceeded beyond the specification of word-stress. Martin provided a slightly elaborated version by specifying the number of syllables in each entry-word, as well as by deploying a system of double and single accents (a shift in methodology later criticised by Fisher, though one used earlier in the popular New General English Dictionary by Dyche and Pardon ()). While this perhaps provided a partial solution to one of Martin’s demands regarding the state of mid-eighteenth-century lexicography (‘By what Dictionary extant can a man regulate his Pronunciation, or correct his Errors in this Respect?’ : vii), it was only later that dictionaries would begin to focus on pronunciation – and the provision of a ‘standard’ of pronunciation – in real detail. Even Johnson had rejected the possibility of ‘enchaining syllables’ beyond the marking of stress (as in DECLA’IM, DECLAMA’TION), though it is also clear that, in this respect as in others, the authority of the lexicographer could also be privileged above that of usage: ‘It will sometimes be found, that the accent is placed by the authour quoted, on a different syllable from that marked …; it is then to be understood, that custom has varied, or that the authour has, in my opinion, pronounced wrong’ (Johnson : Av). Suggestions that dictionaries should engage with more than this could nevertheless be treated with outright scepticism. Given a level of
While the single accent, as in other works, denoted the position of main stress, the double accent hence indicated ‘that the Letter which begins the Syllable to which it is Prefi x’d has a double Sound, one of which belongs to the preceding Syllable. Thus the word A||nimal is sounded with a double n, as an-nimal ’ (Martin : vii).
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 331
geographical variation by which, as Dyche and Pardon stated (: n.p.), ‘the Southern parts of this kingdom differ very much from the Northern’, it was, they contended, only by direct and oral instruction that articulatory change might be effected, rather than by any rules a dictionary attempted to set down (‘it must be from the Conversation with the most learned and polite Persons, that Observations must be drawn to supply those Defects, which all the Rules and written Directions in the World cannot prevent’). As Johnson declared to Boswell with reference to Thomas Sheridan’s pronouncing dictionary of – which did indeed, as its title page stressed, engage with the attempted provision of ‘a plain and permanent standard of pronunciation’ – its utility was surely questionable: ‘You cannot always carry it about with you: and, when you want the word, you have not the Dictionary.’ Potential problems are illuminated by a characteristically inventive simile. ‘It is’, he adds, ‘like a man who has a sword that will not draw. It is an admirable sword, to be sure: but while your enemy is cutting your throat, you are unable to use it.’ It is, in fact, Sheridan who stands at the heart of the drive to reform the teaching of the spoken language, beginning in his British Education of , and continuing through his works (and lectures) on elocution in the s, and his own dictionary of with its explicitly normative aims. As Swift’s godson, Sheridan had been early sensitised to normative considerations of this kind (see Mugglestone b); his crusade to rouse a similar sensitisation on the part of the British public (‘No man can amend a fault of which he is not conscious; and consciousness cannot exert itself when barred up by habit’ : ) remained a motivating force throughout his life. The elocution lessons which, in the early s, he provided to James Boswell (among others) hence provided templates of practical reform. Boswell’s Scottish tones were thereby redirected towards more metropolitan models precisely in line with the thesis which Sheridan articulated in the lectures he delivered in London, Edinburgh and Oxford in , and which he published in . ‘In order to spread abroad the English language as a living tongue, and to facilitate the attainment of its speech, it is necessary … that a standard of pronunciation should be laid open’, he argued. The fact that, as he also stressed, pronunciation was replete with social meaning served to make his case stronger. The elite London accent Sheridan advocated for all was, as he persuasively explained, ‘a proof that one has kept good company’; regional accents merely connoted rusticity and ‘false pronunciation’, as well as ‘disgrace’. The potential of a reference model which detailed spoken as well as written English, and ‘standard’ rather than non-standard forms (especially in terms of a shared and ‘national’ accent (see Mugglestone b)) was to be endorsed
Though the prevention of a ‘Vicious Pronunciation’ is specified as one of Dyche and Pardon’s desiderata on their title page, this operated – as in Johnson and Martin – only with reference to the recommended position of word-stress.
332 Eighteenth-century English
by a range of writers on the language. Sheridan was, as we have seen, explicit about the benefits of assimilation to a particular style of speech (defined in both geographical and social terms). Buchanan’s Essay towards Establishing a Standard for an Elegant and Uniform Pronunciation of the English Language () offers an unambiguous statement of his intentions in this respect. Both Buchanan and Sheridan made clear the emulatory paradigms – and top-down models of assimilation – which were at stake. Even in (vii), Buchanan had stressed the negative repercussions of an ‘uncouth’ style of articulation (‘What can reflect more on a person’s reputation for learning, than to find him unable to pronounce with propriety and elocution?’), advocating instead regulation on a socio-cultural model of the ‘best speakers’. The Scots, he argued, hampered by their ‘rough and uncouth brogue’, stood perhaps most in need of this advice. The title-page of Kenrick () similarly makes plain the intended provision of ‘the present Practice of polished Speakers in the Metropolis’. ‘Right Pronunciation’, as specified on the title-page of Johnston (), was moreover distinguished from the ‘broad … accent’ which, he notes, inevitably impedes communicative success: Were a person ever so well qualified for agreeable conversation, by knowledge and learning, sense and genius … or were his composures to the public ever so valuable and elegant; yet if his conversation or discourses are uttered with a broad or foreign accent; their obscurity, thereby occasioned, will greatly obstruct the pleasure and profit, he would otherwise communicate. (: v) The fact that this appears in Johnston’s opening paragraph is a clear marker of this deliberate reorientation of priorities – as, of course, is the fact that his argument not only discourses on the importance of phonetic propriety, but also intentionally facilitates its acquisition by means of the system of notation used throughout the Preface as well as in his dictionary. Aesthetic and social considerations are also foregrounded (the regionally marked speaker, as Johnston points out, ‘will necessarily in some degree raise [the] dislike’ of his audience because of the ‘grating sounds of his language’). While this testifies to – and indeed echoes – the fostering of that ‘consciousness’ which Sheridan had earlier urged (‘many who labour under the disadvantages of a wrong pronunciation … have earnest desires to acquire a right one’, Johnston : vi), still more to the point are his comments on the specific demerits – and the need for appropriate remedy (and active standardisation) – of regional speech by means of lexicography: ‘I herein offer a help to the right Pronunciation of the English language … by which, I sincerely think, the youth of Cornwall and Cumberland, of Scotland and Ireland, or our remotest colonies … may learn by themselves to pronounce English tolerably well’ (: viii). The assimilation of normative ideologies within the dictionary, and with specific reference to the spoken language, could hardly be clearer. The enunciation of ‘the country people of England’ and ‘the proper, or that of
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 333
London’ are placed in consistent opposition, while the direction of convergence (both social and linguistic) is made particularly plain: ‘the standard of these sounds, which we would all along keep in view, is that pronunciation of them, in most general use, amongst people of elegance and taste of the English nation, and especially of London.’ Remedy is, via the dictionary, to be placed in the speaker’s own hands: if the learner thoroughly acquit himself with the different sounds of the letters, and with the observations and signs, which notify their sounds in words, by carefully perusing the Introduction; and if he for a while, daily pronounce a reasonable portion of the book, according to these observations and signs, and as directed in the Appendix, he will soon be able, with great ease, to read the words properly; and by the continued practice of attentively so reading them, he will in a short time, make desirable proficiency in a right pronunciation; in which, and in all his enterprises, I heartily wish him good success. (Johnston : ix) Eighteenth-century models of dictionary usage had in fact regularly stressed the need for memorisation and systematic study with reference to lexis and semantics. The (re)construction of the dictionary as a means to reform pronunciation followed the same lines. Even in , almost two decades before the appearance of his own lexicographical work, Sheridan had advocated the utility of dictionaries in this respect as he set out the proprieties (and improprieties) of the emergent shibboleth of /h/-articulation for the first time in English: ‘The best method of curing this will be to read over frequently all words beginning with the letter H … in the dictionary, and push them out with the full force of the breath’ (: ). Reviewing the commercial success of the pronouncing dictionary, Thomas Browne could comment not only on the fact that (at least in terms of contemporary language attitudes) the ‘vague and fluctuating pronunciation of our language’ was now increasingly subordinated to the sense of a ‘standard’ (i–ii), but, more specifically, ‘by the plain rules and institutes [Sheridan and Walker] have laid down, the pupil may be taught, at an early stage, to fashion his lisping accents, and to articulate with clarity and precision, all the classical words in the vernacular language’ (: i). While Sheridan had argued for the utility of print in this respect (‘this would be making a noble use of the invention of printing’ (: ), the reality of lexicographical practice over this period makes plain the difficulties of disseminating a specified norm. Only with the introduction of the International Phonetic Alphabet in would a consistent mechanism of indicating each individual sound by an equally individual symbol be deployed (it would take
Walker’s dictionary would often be recommended as an educational tool in the nineteenth century, particularly with the expectation that the emergent national educational system would teach spoken as well as written English. See further Mugglestone (b), chapter .
334 Eighteenth-century English
some time before this was used within dictionaries). The use of the written language to represent speech was, as Kenrick argued (: ), hence problematic in itself (‘the written elements of language are so inapplicable to the elements of speech’). A variety of solutions was adopted to facilitate transmission of the desired norms. Johnston, as we have seen, advocated a system of diacritics to indicate particular sound values, coupled with italicisation to denote, for instance, voiceless consonants, hence for /θ/, and for /ð/. Principles of semi-phonetic respelling were adopted by other writers such as Buchanan. Kenrick, however, provided a particularly critical review of practice in this respect. He retranscribed a passage from Johnson’s Idler to demonstrate – as (ironically) Johnson’s words here confirmed – the ways in which ‘Langwidsh suffers violins by harsh or by dairing figures, by unshootibl transpozeeshun’ [Language suffers violence by daring figures, by unsuitable transposition]. This was, Kenrick contended, ‘so horribly metamorphosised as to be unintelligible to both the eye and ear’. Indeed, Kenrick argued further, ‘this method of disfiguring the orthography is very prejudicial to the learner; who, in thus being taught how to speak and read, will forget, or never learn, how to write’ (: ii). Kenrick preferred instead numerical diacritics which, linked to individual sounds, provided a less ambiguous system for the requisite indication of sound. Sheridan had already indicated the utility of such a system as his own preferred method, though his dictionary would not appear for another seven years. Kenrick, however, presented a fully-fledged system of numerical notation by which ‘to ascertain the pronunciation’. Headwords were presented with the marking of stress-position and an accompanying transcription not only separated syllables but superimposed on each syllable a number (from one to sixteen) by which the precise quality of vowel-sounds was indicated with reference to a system of keywords (see : v). As in Johnston, consonants were also italicised if voiceless; voiced sounds remained in ordinary script. ‘The speaker who, observing these rules, should to due observation of the sound of syllables, add the true force of the different accents, would necessarily pronounce all English words with propriety’, Kenrick confidently concluded. Given his expressed interests in ‘ascertainment’ (and the inculcation of a ‘standard’ and non-localised speech), he emphasised too the remedial efficacy of this method for ‘the native of Scotland and Ireland, and the provincials of Wales, Yorkshire, and Cornwall’ (: viii). By the end of the eighteenth century – and indeed into the nineteenth – a notation based on numerical diacritics, often accompanied by respelling – had become the most popular system of lexicographical transcription, used by Sheridan and Walker (even if structured rather differently from Kenrick’s sixteen-point system), adopted in Jones (), Browne (),
Even in the OED, it was only with the second edition of that IPA transcription would be deployed.
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 335
and carried on in Benjamin Smart’s work (see further Beal ). Smart’s Walker Remodelled – with its even more stringent instructions on the need for a non-localised accent – appeared in . ‘The common standard dialect is that in which all marks of a particular place and residence are lost, and nothing appears to indicate any other habits of intercourse than with the well-bred and well-informed’, Smart confirmed. He confirmed too the deleterious effects of accents which failed to confirm to his idealised norm. Even if ‘a person need not blush because he cannot help betraying he is a Scotchman or an Irishman’, nevertheless ‘it may be an object of ambition to prove that his circle of intercourse has extended … beyond his native place’. This was still more imperative for those whose discourse signalled the Cockney or provincial. As Smart added, ‘a man displaying either must have a large portion of natural talent or acquired science, who surmounts the prejudice it creates.’ It is of course the seeds of this approach that we can detect in Smart’s late eighteenth-century counterparts. Sheridan had advocated not only the social consciousness of accent per se, but also the means by which a shared and uniform accent might be created in a beneficial – and democratic – process by which, as he argued, the ‘odious distinctions kept up between subjects of the same king’ would no longer hold true (see Sheridan : xv). The remedial efforts of Walker and others were directed to similar ends. In this idealistic light, the population of both, Britain and the Colonies, might indeed come to ‘speak the same language’, with a standard as a unifying rather than hegemonic device. Whereas the level of phonetic observation in such works can be acute, the presence of prescriptive (and intentionally proscriptive) agendas is often undeniable. Qualitative labels, for example, operated very effectively in setting out the parameters of acceptability (both social and linguistic), and the desired nuances of correctness. ‘Every correct ear would be disgusted as giving the a in these words the full long sound of a in father’, as Walker noted ([] : §), on the vexed subject of the ‘proper’ articulation of a before voiceless fricatives as in fast and bath; the proper pronunciation of -ing was, he commented with reference to another emergent and socially sensitive variable, ‘frequently a source of embarrassment to speakers who desire to pronounce correctly’ (: §). Sheridan similarly heightens the perceived politeness of /h/-fullness as part of his quest for a ‘standard’ accent. As in Walker, the metalanguage of later writers such as Smart constructs dyads of culture versus ignorance, education versus provinciality (or, still worse, ‘vulgarity’) on the basis of social – and metrocentric – norms of speech. By Smart was firmly engaged in setting out the contrastive qualities of ‘vulgar’ versus ‘well-bred’ speakers: ‘The well bred speaker employs a definite number of sounds, which he utters with precision, distinctness, and in their proper places; the vulgar speaker misapplies the sounds, mars, or alters them’ (Smart : xxv). Those with ‘Provincial habits, Defects, and Impediments in speech’ were urged to apply to Smart for private tuition.
336 Eighteenth-century English
As in Johnson’s attempt to constrain semantic change in words such as precarious, it is, however, clear that – in terms of sounds – the culture of ascertainment could lead to the construction of myths of correctness which expressed a set of distinctly conservative norms. Actual usage – ‘the despotism of usage’, as Walker argued, noting that ‘the most disgraceful irregularities are daily screened under the specious authority of custom’ (: ) – could thereby be set aside while ideologically constructed images of ‘good’ speech encouraged the retention (or, at times, the resumption) of notionally correct forms. Here, for example, we could place the often-stated belief that /r/ was never to be vocalised post-vocalically in ‘good’ English (a change instead often labelled ‘Cockney’ with intentional social-cultural dissuasion). Similar was the iterated emphasis – as in Smart and Walker – on non-merged vowels in words such as fir, fur and fern (a shift which had, in reality, been current in the capital since the seventeenth century). The resistance to the diffusion of lengthened sounds of a in fast can be seen under the same head, not least given the prevalence of such sounds within the discourse of lower-status Londoners (and the bottom-up models of change in progress which this of course also represented). Eighteenth-century pronouncing dictionaries can therefore represent a determined – sometimes very determined – engagement with issues of standardisation and the spoken language. Browne’s opening words in confirm the ideological shift at work; while Johnson had earlier defended the local tones of his native Lichfield as ‘the purest English’, it was, for Browne, now incontrovertible that ‘a just and polite pronunciation of the English tongue has become, as it were, the criterion of a liberal education’. ‘The importance of such an acquisition must be obvious to every person’, he pointedly adds (: i). Like Sheridan and Walker, he affixed a set of rules by which Irish, Scottish and possessors of lower-status London forms might ‘correct’ their speech in the requisite direction. Even if rejected by the OED (see MacMahon ), the assimilation of pronunciation within an explicit discourse of standardisation, and implemented by means of the dictionary, would continue through the nineteenth century. It was, for instance, by such means that the scientist Michael Faraday, initially possessed of those lowstatus London tones proscribed by Walker and Sheridan (and in turn firmly stigmatised by Smart), would endeavour to reform his own modes of speech. Just as Boswell declared himself to be Sheridan’s true disciple (‘My Mentor! My Socrates! direct my heedless steps! (see Pottle : )), so did Faraday – the son of a blacksmith – attend Smart’s lectures and, together with likeminded friends in the City Philosophical Society, embark on a programme of phonetic transformation and articulatory self-help. Faraday’s Common Place Book detailing his assiduous application – as well as Smart’s later attendance at Faraday’s own lectures, and the phonetic feedback (and articulatory monitoring Smart provided) – remain important evidence for ways in which prescriptive persuasions might indeed impact upon the individual
Dictionaries, diction and the art of elocution 337
speaker (see Mugglestone forthcoming). As here, it is incontrovertible that dictionary-makers, dictionaries and the ideologies they encode can have a real-world impact. Such principles of top-down emulation, as Winter contends, can, of course, ‘emphasize the capacity of dominant groups to act in effect as puppeteers, pulling the strings of cultural activity’ (: ). That elites can aim for this effect is self-evident (though the fact that other voices can and do contest their claims is equally clear). Pronunciation, and associated ideologies of standardisation, phrased in terms of social meaning and social success, could – for those receptive to its appeals, such as Faraday and his friends – nevertheless become part of a determined process of linguistic acquisition, where what is acquired is not language per se, but a particular way of articulating identity as well as words. By the phonetician Alexander Ellis would note the existence of what he now termed ‘received pronunciation’ (‘In the present day we may … recognise a received pronunciation all over the country, not widely differing in any particular locality and admitting a certain degree of variety’, : ). Even if remote from the shared accent for all which its earlier proponents had urged, it was, as Ellis’s words make clear, also undeniable that a non-localised accent had indeed come to exist within the phonetics of nineteenth-century English for a significant minority of speakers. That this form of speech was far from monolithic was, however, also true, even if a number of its features (/h/-fullness, the use of [n] rather than [ɪŋ] in words such as walking, nonrhoticity after vowels) clearly operated above levels of conscious social awareness. Equally self-evident were the continuing language loyalties of regional speakers all over the country who chose to retain their native tones, rather than necessarily subscribing to the ideologies of correctness which were so persuasively articulated by a range of writers and elocutionists. As modern sociolinguistic study repeatedly confirms, language behaviour is, in practice, open to a complex set of social as well as linguistic dynamics. Simple ‘ascertainment’ as a model would here prove demonstrably inadequate.
The ends of lexicography
Looking back to the eighteenth century, Trench and Murray articulated a catalogue of error and deficiency. Trench’s lectures took Johnson to task for his ‘desultory forays’ into supporting evidence (: ), and for policies by which obsolete words were ‘to be admitted … when they have any force or beauty that may deserve revival’ (see S. Johnson : Bv). As Trench countered (: ), ‘I will not pause to enquire what a lexicographer has to do with the question of whether a word deserves revival or not.’ The subjectivities – as well as outright plagiarism – which could inform the eighteenthcentury dictionary all came in for stringent reform. Philology – a ‘barren’ and ‘dusty desart’ which stood, for Johnson, in need of enlivening with ‘verdure and flowers’ (: B v) – would instead be the raison d’être of the OED – a
338 Eighteenth-century English
work in which empirical principles, the scientific approach to etymology, as well as a commitment to descriptive truth above prescriptive precept, were all adopted as salient features (see Mugglestone ). ‘One does not look in Johnson for Etymology, and more than in eighteenth-century writers for biology or electricity’, as Murray declared (see the unpublished letter from December by Murray to one Mr Jenkinson in which he stated that ‘etymology began in England in about ’). If both dictionary and dictionary-maker were, in essence, to be redefined once more – as Murray noted, the lexicographer was now a scientist rather than ‘a poet doomed to wake a lexicographer’: the legacies of earlier lexicographers nevertheless continued to have their value. ‘It is comparatively easy to pick a hole here, or to detect a flaw there; to point out stones, it may be many stones, lying in the way, which ought to have been built up into the wall’, Trench reminded his audience at the Philological Society (: ). Yet, he continued, ‘such edifices as our great English Dictionaries could only have been reared by enormous labour, patience, and skill … the same somewhat close examination which detects these little blemishes, and discovers these omissions … does to a far greater extent make us conscious how vast the amount is of that labour, patience, and skill which they represent and embody.’ Even the OED was dependent in this light on the lexicographical labours of the past. Or as Hartman has rightly concluded (: vii): ‘Most dictionaries have forerunners, and all have imitators; an understanding of the historical foundations of dictionary-making’ therefore importantly remains ‘one of the preconditions of further progress in academic lexicography’.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
Late seventeenth century –:
‘Glorious Revolution’. This included the ascension to the throne of the Protestant William III of Orange (–) in as King of England, Scotland and Ireland after he and his wife Mary accepted the Bill of Rights. The latter limited the power of sovereigns and increased that of Parliament, thus forming a cornerstone of English democracy. July: William continues fighting with Jacobites in Scotland with the Battle of Killiecrankie in Perthshire. Henry Purcell’s opera Dido and Aneas first performed. John Locke’s Essay Concerning Human Understanding is published. July: Irish Jacobites beaten at the Battle of Aughrim. The Salem witch trials take place in Massachusetts (February –May ). William Penn’s Essay on the Present and Future Peace of Europe is published. John Locke’s Ideas on Education is published. July: Bank of England founded by William Patterson. December: Death of Queen Mary. November: Whig party successful in elections to House of Commons. John Toland’s Christianity not Mysterious is published. John Baron Somers leads Whig government as Lord Chancellor. St Paul’s Cathedral, London, designed by Christopher Wren, is consecrated.
Eighteenth century
February: Centre of Edinburgh badly damaged by fire. May: John Dryden (–) dies. 339
340
Timeline for the eighteenth century
William Congreve’s The Way of the World first produced. Act of Settlement, excluding Catholics from the English throne, passed by Parliament. War of Spanish Succession (–) waged to stop French succession to the Spanish throne. August: Grand Alliance signed in The Hague. September: Death of former king James II. March: After death of William III, Queen Anne (last monarch of the House of Stuart) ascends the English throne as Queen of England, Scotland and Ireland. Queen Anne’s War (–) between France and England waged in North America for control of that continent. March: Single-sheet newspaper, Daily Courant, begins publication in London. May: War is declared on France and Spain. Sidney Godolphin (–) made Lord Treasurer. General election returns majority for the Tory party. Daniel Defoe’s The True-Born Englishman is published. Robert Dodsley, English publisher of language and literary works, is born. November – December: ‘The Great Storm’ causes extensive damage in southern England and in Wales with the loss of between , and , lives. Daniel Defoe’s book The Storm () contains an account of it. St Petersburg is founded by Peter the Great of Russia. May: The Tory Robert Harley becomes Secretary of State. July: Admiral Rooke takes Gibraltar for the British Crown. October: John Locke (–), English empiricist philosopher, dies. Satire A Tale of a Tub by Jonathan Swift appears. Irish Act, ‘to prevent the further growth of popery’, imposes restrictions on Catholics. Isaac Newton knighted in Cambridge by Queen Anne. February: Regency Act provides for transition to Hanoverian rule after death of Queen Anne. All Protestant members of this family are made British citizens (Act of Naturalisation). Grammatical Commentaries by Richard Johnson is published. January: Scottish Parliament accepts Act of Union. April: Henry Fielding (–), English novelist, dramatist and magistrate, is born.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
s
341
May: The Act of Union between England and Scotland comes into force. George Farquhar’s The Beaux Stratagem is performed at Drury Lane. February: Harley dismissed as Secretary of State. February: Robert Walpole (–) becomes Secretary at War. April: Whigs win majority in House of Commons elections. November: William Pitt the Elder (–), later prime minister (–), is born. The first Professorship of Poetry is founded at Oxford by Henry Birkhead. An extraordinarily cold winter prevails in north-west Europe. April: The Tatler, a thrice-weekly magazine providing ‘accounts of gallantry, pleasure and entertainment’, published by Richard Steele with Joseph Addison. September: Samuel Johnson (–), English lexicographer and man-of-letters, is born. The ‘Act for the Encouragement of Learning’ leads to the establishment of and adherence to copyright throughout the United Kingdom. August: The Tory periodical The Examiner first appears. August: Godolphin dismissed by Queen Anne. November: Sarah Fielding (–), author of children’s literature, is born. November: Robert Lowth (–), bishop and grammarian, is born. A London club, the Kit Cat Club, with literary and Whig political concerns, is active. It includes many prominent men of letters, for example Swift, Congreve and Addison, as its members. George Berkeley (–) publishes A Treatise Concerning the Principles of Human Knowledge. Tories win a majority in general elections. The Tory preacher Henry Sacheverell makes inflammatory speeches denouncing religious toleration. March: Robert Harley is made Lord Treasurer. April: David Hume (–), Scottish Enlightenment philosopher, is born.
342
Timeline for the eighteenth century
The Spectator founded by Steele and Addison. It appears daily until the following year, . Georg Friedrich Händel (–) comes to London to work as a composer. English form of his name – George Frideric Handel – is used. December: Marlborough dismissed from his army position. Alexander Pope’s Essay on Criticism is published anonymously. June: Jean-Jacques Rousseau (–), Swiss-French philosopher of the Enlightenment, is born. Sidney Godolphin (–), first Earl of Godolphin, dies. George Grenville (–), later prime minister (–), is born. November: Laurence Sterne (–), Anglo-Irish novelist, is born. Jonathan Swift becomes Dean of St Patrick’s in Dublin. Treaty of Utrecht recognises Spain’s cession of Gibraltar to England. May: Electress Sophia dies in Hanover. Her son, the Elector George Ludwig, becomes heir to the British Crown. August: Queen Anne dies. George I (House of Hanover) ascends the English throne. September: Marlborough reinstated by Whig government. October: Coronation of George I. Publication of mock-heroic poem The Rape of the Lock by Alexander Pope (revised and expanded version of edition). September: Louis XIV, king of France, dies. First Jacobite Rebellion, ‘The Fifteen’, defeated at the Battle of Preston (– November). April: The Septennial Act extends the span of Parliament to seven years. February: David Garrick (–), English actor and theatre manager, is born. Handel’s Water Music first performed for a royal occasion (George I’s barge on the River Thames). The Theatre Royal, Drury Lane, begins producing ballet. March: John Aislabie becomes Chancellor of Exchequer. December: Britain declares war on Spain. The gardens at Studley Royal in Yorkshire are pioneered by John Aislabie and his son William.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
343
June: Joseph Addison (–), essayist and poet, dies. Novel Robinson Crusoe by Daniel Defoe is published. September: Collapse of shares in the South Sea Company (known as the ‘South Sea Bubble’) due to panic selling. Tobias Smollett (–), Scottish novelist, is born (baptised March). Robert Walpole becomes the first de facto prime minister of Great Britain after obtaining the post of First Lord of the Treasury. Aislabie dismissed from office. Novel Moll Flanders by Daniel Defoe is published. John Churchill, first Duke of Marlborough (–), dies. Resentment in Ireland over the sale to an entrepreneur, William Wood, of the right to mint new coins for the country, known as ‘Wood’s Halfpence’. July: Joshua Reynolds (–), English portrait painter, is born. Duty on tea and coffee is reduced making their consumption more widespread. Daniel Defoe’s A Tour Thro’ the Whole Island of Great Britain is published. Robert Harley, first Earl of Oxford (–), dies. Jonathan Wild, ‘Thief-Taker General’, executed as part of a move against the underworld of crime. The previous year the highwayman Jack Sheppard was hanged before a huge crowd of onlookers. September: Treaty of Hanover forms an alliance of Britain, Prussia and France again Austria and Spain. October: John Wilkes (–), politician and reformer, is born. Wilkes supported the American move for independence and campaigned for civil liberties in Britain. The Drapier Letters by Jonathan Swift ridicule ‘Wood’s Halfpence’ and are instrumental in the withdrawal of the patent by Walpole. Guy’s Hospital in London is opened. March: John Vanbrugh (–), English architect and playwright, dies. He was the architect of Blenheim Palace, Oxfordshire (finished by Nicholas Hawksmoor), and of Castle Howard, Yorkshire. Novel Gulliver’s Travels by Jonathan Swift is published. Voltaire begins his three-year exile in England.
344
Timeline for the eighteenth century
–
The first circulating library in Great Britain is opened in Edinburgh by Allan Ramsay. June: George I dies in Osnabrück. George II (House of Hanover) ascends the English throne. May: Thomas Gainsborough (–), English portrait painter, is born. October: Coronation of George II in Westminster Abbey. January: First performance of The Beggar’s Opera by John Gay. Mock-heroic poem The Dunciad by Alexander Pope appears. January: Edmund Burke (–), state philosopher and politician, is born in Dublin. January: William Congreve (–), Anglo-Irish playwright, dies. September: Richard Steele (–) dies. Satirical essay, A Modest Proposal, by Jonathan Swift is published. Charles Wesley (–) with his brother John founds the ‘Holy Club’ at Oxford. The members of this group are later given the derisive name ‘Methodists’ which, however, became a general appellation. April (?) Daniel Defoe (c.–), novelist, journalist and pamphleteer, dies. April: The Gentleman’s Magazine is founded as a monthly digest by Edward Cave. July: Treaty of Vienna ends the Anglo-French entente. Frederick North (–), second Earl of Guilford, and known as ‘Lord North’, is born. North is later prime minister of Britain (–) during the American War of Independence (–). Warren Hastings (–), British politician and colonial administrator, is born. Jethro Tull (–), a farmer from Berkshire, publishes The Horse-Hoeing Husbandry, a treatise which acts as a guide for modern agricultural practices. William Hogarth (–) paints his series of eight pictures, The Rake’s Progress. Walpole wins a third term in office. January: James Watt (–), Scottish inventor of the steam engine, is born.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
–
–
345
March: Nicholas Hawksmoor (–), English architect in the baroque style, dies. May: Repeal of statutes against witchcraft. July: Anti-Irish riots in London. Irish accused of depressing work market by accepting low wages. January: Thomas Paine (–), English–American pamphleteer and advocate of independence for America from Britain, is born. With the Licensing Act the Lord Chamberlain recognises Covent Garden, Drury Lane and the King’s Theatre, Haymarket as patent theatres. January: Convention of the Prado attempts to settle commercial disputes with Spain. Very severe winter prevails in Britain. David Hume’s A Treatise on Human Nature is published anonymously. Frederick II (–), ‘Frederick the Great’, becomes King of Prussia. Famine breaks out in large parts of Ireland (–). Novel Pamela: Or, Virtue Rewarded by Samuel Richardson (– ) is published. Anthem ‘Rule Britannia’ is composed by Thomas Arne (–). January: Hester Lynch Thrale (née Salusbury and after her second marriage: Piozzi), English diarist, is born. War of Austrian Succession begins and lasts until . David Hume’s Essays Moral and Political is published. 13 April: Handel’s oratorio The Messiah has its first performance in Neal’s Music Hall in Fishamble Street, Dublin. Novel Joseph Andrews by Henry Fielding is published. August: Henry Pelham (–) succeeds Spencer Compton (Earl of Wilmington, –) as prime minister. William Hogarth produces his series of paintings Marriage à la Mode. May: Alexander Pope (–), essayist and poet, dies. Britain joins Austria and Holland against Prussia. The first fully recorded cricket match takes place in Finsbury, north of the city of London.
346
Timeline for the eighteenth century
George Anson (–) completes a circumnavigation of the world. Second Jacobite rebellion in Scotland under Charles Edward Stuart, ‘Bonnie Prince Charlie’, who challenged the House of Hanover’s succession in England (–). October: Jonathan Swift (–), political writer, satirist and poet, dies. April: Battle of Culloden, near Inverness, ends the Jacobite rising which began the previous year. Pelham wins elections and remains prime minister. Novel Clarissa: Or, the History of a Young Lady by Samuel Richardson is published. David Hume’s Enquiry concerning Human Understanding is published. Novel The Governess, or The Little Female Academy by Sarah Fielding is published. Novel Tom Jones by Henry Fielding is published. Blue Stockings Society is founded by the social reformer Elizabeth Montagu (–) and others to further women’s education and mutual co-operation. March: Prince of Wales dies. Thomas Gray (–) publishes his Elegy written in a Country Churchyard. June: Frances (Fanny) Burney (–), English novelist and diarist, is born. Adoption of the Gregorian Calendar (New Style) and rejection of the Julian Calendar (Old Style) in order to improve regulation of leap days. The difference between the Old and New Styles was fixed at days. January: George Berkeley, Irish philosopher and cleric, dies. Jewish Naturalisation Act passed by Parliament; later repealed. March: Henry Pelham dies. October: Henry Fielding dies. French and Indian War (–), a struggle between Britain and France for hegemony in North America, the Caribbean and India, begins. Britain was successful against France in its rivalry for colonies in North America and also against Spain which lost Florida in the conflict. Royal and Ancient Club is founded at St Andrews, formally establishing golf there.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
347
Thomas Pelham-Holles, Duke of Newcastle (–), becomes prime minister (until ). Samuel Johnson publishes A Dictionary of the English Language, the standard work in lexicography for the eighteenth and much of the nineteenth century. November: Major earthquake in Lisbon. November: Government crisis, Pitt leaves cabinet. January: Anglo-Prussian Treaty of Westminster which guarantees protection for Hanover. January: Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart (–), Austrian composer, is born in Salzburg. Seven Years’ War (–). A large component of this conflict was the tension between Britain and France in respect of claims at overseas locations such as North America, the Caribbean and West Africa (see ‘French and Indian War’ above). The other component consisted of tensions between powers in Europe, notably Prussia in its conflict with Saxony which went to war with Austria. June: Battle of Plassey (Palashi, West Bengal) establishes control over Bengal by the British East India Company, now both a military and commercial power in India. November: William Blake (–), English poet and painter, is born. Newcastle becomes prime minister again (until ). Britain comes to an agreement with Prussia over a military presence in Germany. Horatio Nelson (–), successful British naval commander against the French under Napoleon, is born. January: Robert Burns (–), Scottish poet, is born. April: Handel dies. May: William Pitt the Younger (–) is born, later prime minister from to and again from to . British Museum is opened to the public. – Novel The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, Gentleman by Laurence Sterne is published. October: George III (House of Hanover) ascends the English throne after the death of George II. Reigns until . January: French relinquish Pondicherry to the British thereby losing control in south-east India, including Chennai (then Madras). July: Samuel Richardson, English epistolary novelist, dies.
348
Timeline for the eighteenth century
May: George III takes up residence in Buckingham Palace. May: John Stuart Bute (–) becomes prime minister (until ). August: George IV is born. The anti-Tory weekly, the North Briton, begins publication. February: Treaty of Paris, signed by Britain, France and Spain, ends the Seven Years’ War. John Wilkes is imprisoned in the Tower of London for seditious libel on the basis of an article in the North Briton which was critical of George III. He is released shortly afterwards on the grounds of parliamentary privilege. May: Sugar tax proposed for the American colonies. July: Ann Radcliffe (–), English gothic novelist, is born. October: William Hogarth, English painter, dies. Robert Dodsley dies. Eight-year-old Mozart performs before George III. Novel The Castle of Otranto is published by Horace Walpole (–). March: The Stamp Act imposes further taxation on the American colonies. Repealed in . April: Edward Young (–), English poet, dies. Robert Clive (–) appointed governor of Bengal. Publication of novel The Vicar of Wakefield by Oliver Goldsmith (–). January: Maria Edgeworth (–), Anglo-Irish regional novelist, is born. June: House of Commons imposes import duty on tea, glass and paper for the American colonies. March: Laurence Sterne, Anglo-Irish novelist, dies shortly after completing his novel A Sentimental Journey Through France and Italy. April: Sarah Fielding dies. The Orchard Street Theatre in Bath receives a patent as Theatre Royal (the first in England outside London). May: James Cook (–) sets sail on his first Pacific voyage. In ( October) he reaches New Zealand and in ( April) lands at Botany Bay in the south-east of Australia. May: Arthur Wellesley, Duke of Wellington (–), is born.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
349
August: Napoleon Bonaparte (–) is born in Corsica. Famine afflicts north-west India; one third of the population of Bengal perishes (–). James Watt patents the steam engine. Josiah Wedgwood (–) opens the Etruria pottery works. Wedgwood was the maternal grandfather of Charles Darwin. April: William Wordsworth (–), English Romantic poet, is born. December: Ludwig van Beethoven (–), German composer, is born in Bonn. Taxes on colonial goods is lifted, but not that on tea. Lord North forms a government of ‘King’s Friends’. Edmund Burke completes his Thoughts on the Cause of the Present Discontents. Oliver Goldsmith’s poem The Deserted Village is published. August: Walter Scott (–), Scottish historical novelist, is born. September: Tobias Smollett dies. Spain recognises Britain’s claim to the Falkland Islands. September: Canal linking Birmingham with the River Severn is opened. October: Samuel Taylor Coleridge (–), poet and philosopher, is born. August: First partition of Poland between Russia, Prussia and Austria. Warren Hastings is appointed governor of Bengal. March: Oliver Goldsmith’s play She Stoops to Conquer is performed at Covent Garden. East India Company Act introduced by the British Parliament to secure control over the company. Further Acts follow in and . First Stock Exchange in Threadneedle Street, London, opens. December: ‘Boston Tea Party’: chests of tea are dumped into the sea at Boston harbour. Lord North responds to the protests in the province of Massachusetts with the Coercive Acts (popularly dubbed ‘The Intolerable Acts’) which, among other things, close the port of Boston. John Wilkes becomes Lord Mayor of London with much popular support embodied in the slogan ‘Wilkes and Liberty!’.
350
Timeline for the eighteenth century
January: Play The Rivals by Richard Brinsley Sheridan (– ) is performed at Covent Garden. April: Joseph Mallord William Turner (–), English Romantic painter, is born. December: Jane Austen (–), English novelist, is born. The American Revolutionary War, or American War of Independence, which led to independence from Britain for the Thirteen Colonies, begins with shooting at Lexington, Massachusetts. At its end in the United States of America is founded. June: John Constable (–), English Romantic painter, is born. July: United States Declaration of Independence, adopted by the Second Continental Congress, stated that the Thirteen Colonies were no longer part of the British Empire. August: John Hume, Scottish philosopher, dies. Adam Smith (–), Scottish philosopher and economist, publishes The Wealth of Nations. Volume of The Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire by Edward Gibbon is published; the remaining volumes follow in and respectively. American War of Independence continues; British enter Philadelphia. May: Richard Brinsley Sheridan’s School for Scandal is performed at Drury Lane. February: Britain declares war on France for aiding the Americans. May: Voltaire (François-Marie Arouet), French writer and philosopher of the Enlightenment, dies. July: Jean-Jacques Rousseau dies. August: Catholic Relief Act improves the rights of Catholics in Ireland. James Cook is the first European to reach the Hawaiian archipelago. Novel Evelina by Fanny Burney is published anonymously. January: David Garrick, English actor and theatre manager, dies. February: James Cook, on his third Pacific voyage, is killed by natives in Hawaii. Samuel Johnson publishes The Lives of the Poets.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
s
351
Early June: anti-Catholic riots, ‘Gordon Riots’, in London; several hundred people killed. November: Britain declares war on Holland for aiding the Americans. December: Lord North grants Irish free trade as a response to pressure from the parliament in Dublin. Development of reliable steam engines forms the basis for mechanised production and so initiates the Industrial Revolution. October: English general Charles Cornwallis (–) surrenders at Yorktown, Virginia, thus losing a decisive engagement of the American War of Independence. March: Lord North resigns as prime minister. April: Charles James Fox (–), a Whig and the son of Henry Fox (–), becomes foreign secretary and is thus of central importance during this period of the American War of Independence. June: An Irish parliament, led by Henry Grattan, is established with greater legislative independence.
February: Prime Minister William Petty Shelburne (–) resigns, in part over peace terms with the Americans. September: Treaty brings peace with France and Spain and the recognition of American independence. End of American Revolutionary War. December: William Pitt the Younger, at the age of twenty-four, becomes prime minister of a minority Tory government.
May: Foster’s Corn Law favours the development of farming in Ireland. August: The first mail-coach service from Bristol to London is established by John Palmer. August: The India Act places the East India Company under government control.
January: The Frenchman Jean-Pierre Blanchard and the American John Jeffries cross the Channel from Dover to Calais by balloon. December: The Prince of Wales secretly marries a widow, Maria Fitzherbert, in contravention of the Royal Marriage Act. Horace Walpole publishes Essay on Modern Gardening. Edmund Cartwright (–) invents the power loom for mechanised weaving.
352
Timeline for the eighteenth century
The daily The Times is founded, first under the name The Daily Universal Register. Anglo-Irish Trade Bill is abandoned given the protests from the business sector in England. Cornwallis is appointed governor-general of India and remains so until . Poems, chiefly in the Scottish Dialect by Robert Burns printed. Freed slaves from London found Freetown in what later becomes Sierra Leone. May: Edmund Burke impeaches Warren Hastings on charges of corruption in Bengal, India. September: United States Constitution is finalised. November: Robert Lowth dies. January: The Association for Promoting the Discovery of the Interior Parts of Africa is founded in London. January: The British First Fleet under Captain Arthur Philip lands in Botany Bay (just south of present-day Sydney) to found a penal colony in Australia. The colony was founded in Port Jackson just to the north. January: George Gordon Byron (–), English Romantic poet, is born. August, Thomas Gainsborough, English painter, dies. February: Pitt introduces the Regency Bill which limits the authority of the Prince of Wales. The bill is abandoned shortly afterwards when George III’s health improves. April: Mutiny aboard the HMS Bounty in the south Pacific (near Tonga). April: George Washington becomes the first president of the United States and remains so until . July: Storming of the Bastille in Paris initiates the French Revolution. November: The Thames–Severn canal is opened. Songs of Innocence is published by William Blake illustrated with his own engravings. January: The Coventry–Oxford canal is opened. June: The Forth–Clyde canal is opened. Edmund Burke publishes Reflections on the Revolution in France. March: A section of Thomas Paine’s The Rights of Man is printed and circulated.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
353
April: Captain George Vancouver embarks on a four-year expedition exploring the Pacific and the western coast of Canada. May: The Canada Constitution Act provides for separate legislatures for Upper Canada (Ontario) and Lower Canada (Quebec). July: Joseph Haydn receives an honorary doctorate in music at Oxford. There he conducts his own Symphony No. , the ‘Oxford Symphony’. October: The United Irish Society is founded in Belfast; its leader is Theobald Wolfe Tone. December The Observer, a Sunday newspaper, begins its publication. December: Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart, Austrian composer, dies. James Boswell, Scottish biographer, publishes The Life of Samuel Johnson. February: Joshua Reynolds, English painter, dies. August: Percy Bysshe Shelley (–), English Romantic poet, is born. April: The Relief Act allows Irish Catholics, among other things, to practise law. September: Prison riots in Paris. The French Republic is proclaimed. Arthur Young’s Travels in France appears. Mary Wollstonecraft’s A Vindication of the Rights of Woman appears. In it she laments the lack of educational opportunities for women. January: Louis XVI of France is executed. February: France declares war on Britain and Holland. February: The first coalition against France is formed between the following countries: Britain, Austria, the Netherlands, Prussia, Sardinia-Piedmont and Spain. March: Habeas Corpus Act suspended as an emergency measure in time of war. April: More rights are granted to Irish Catholics with the Further Relief Act. May: United Irishmen are outlawed. June: Naval victory, known as the ‘Glorious First of June’, under Admiral Lord Howe in the North Atlantic is won.
354
Timeline for the eighteenth century
July: The terror regime of Maximilien Robespierre (–) and the Jacobins ends with his execution and that of many of the leading figures around him. William Paley’s View of the Evidences of Christianity is published, as is James Stuart and Nicholas Revett’s The Antiquities of Rome, Measured and Delineated. August: Executive Directory assumes government of the French Republic (until ). September: British forces under Sir James Craig take Cape Town, South Africa, from the Dutch. September–October: The extreme food shortages and high prices throughout England lead to bread riots in many towns. Protests continue into the following year and affect the royal family in London (assaulted with stones by protesters). October: John Keats (–), English Romantic poet, is born. British land at the Cape of Good Hope, South Africa, ostensibly to pre-empt a takeover by the French. The Orange Society (later The Orange Order) is founded by Protestants after a clash with Catholics in Armagh on September. Humphrey Repton’s Sketches of History on Landscape Gardens is published, encouraging this type of gardening. July: Robert Burns, Scottish poet, dies. British take over Ceylon (present-day Sri Lanka) from the Dutch. Rebellion in Ireland by the United Irishmen, lasts until . – December: a French fleet, with Wolfe Tone aboard, lands with , troops in Bantry Bay, Co. Cork. February: British forces acquire the Caribbean islands of Trinidad and Saint Lucia. April–May: Mutiny in parts of the navy over lack of food and poor conditions. Leaders of the Nore mutiny are hanged ( June). July: Edmund Burke, Anglo-Irish political philosopher, dies. January: The independent parliament in Dublin holds its last session. May: Rebellion begins in Co. Wexford (south-east Ireland). August: Rear-Admiral Nelson defeats the French fleet in the battle of the Nile. August: About , French troops land at Killala Bay in the north-west of Ireland. These are forced to surrender shortly afterwards ( September).
Timeline for the eighteenth century
355
Publication of William Wordworth’s Lyrical Ballads, a seminal work of the early Romantic movement, co-authored with Samuel Taylor Coleridge. Cornwallis is appointed viceroy of Ireland and remains so until . United Irishmen, under Wolfe Tone (–), begin an uprising in Ireland. November: Wolfe Tone arrested after landing near Derry (in Lough Swilly). He takes his own life shortly afterwards in prison. Thomas Malthus (–) writes his Essay on the Principle of Population as it affects the Future Improvement of Society. Napoleon Bonaparte, French military leader, stages a coup d’état and becomes First Consul of France. June: William Pitt organises a second coalition against France consisting of Britain, Russia, Austria, Portugal, Turkey and Naples. John Venn founds the Church Missionary Society to serve in ‘Africa and the East’.
Early nineteenth century
October: Thomas Babington Macaulay (–), English historian and statesman, is born. William Wordsworth publishes the second edition of Lyrical Ballads with an important preface. Maria Edgeworth publishes Castle Rackrent, establishing the regional novel as a genre. January: Act of Union of Great Britain and Ireland comes into force. The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland is formed. February: Pitt resigns as prime minister over hostility to Catholic Emancipation. April: Habeas Corpus Act suspended as an emergency measure in time of war. June: Clergy Disqualification Act excludes clergy from the House of Commons. October: The Edinburgh Review, a Whig quarterly, starts publication with Francis Jeffrey as editor. It continues until . Peace negotiations between France and Britain in London. The first modern census to be carried out in Britain returns . million inhabitants for England, . million for Scotland, .
356
Timeline for the eighteenth century
million for Wales and . million for Ireland. Language use is not recorded until the census of . Treaty of Amiens ends current phase of the Napoleonic Wars and allows for a truce of some fourteen months. The Charlotte Dundas, the world’s first steam vessel, plies between the Forth and Clyde. April: Louisiana Purchase. Over two million square kilometres, virtually the entire area of the present-day central United States, was bought for a final sum of approximately million dollars. May: War flares up again between Britain and France. July: Rising in Ireland under Robert Emmet fails; he is later hanged ( September). Martello towers built as defence against suspected French invasion. John Dalton completes the table of atomic weights. Joseph Turner exhibits the famous painting Calais Pier. May: Pitt is again in charge of government (until ). May: Napoleon Bonaparte is proclaimed Emperor of the French and crowned in Notre Dame cathedral, Paris. October: The Battle of Trafalgar, the decisive sea engagement with Napoleonic France, is fought with Nelson securing a clear victory for the British. He is mortally wounded in the battle. December: Napoleon defeats Russians and Austrians at Austerlitz. London Docks open to commercial sea traffic. Walter Scott publishes the poem The Lay of the Last Minstrel. January: British seize the Dutch colony at the Cape of Good Hope. January: William Pitt the Younger dies. August: Formal ending of Holy Roman Empire; Austria attains an emperor in Vienna instead. Dartmoor prison built for captured French soldiers. March: Slave trade is abolished in the British Empire. January: Sierra Leone becomes a crown colony used for freed slaves of African origin. January: The radical weekly newspaper the Examiner is founded with Leigh Hunt as its editor. It continues publication until . September: The Theatre Royal at Covent Garden is destroyed by fire.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
357
February: The Quarterly Review, a Tory periodical founded by John Murray, begins publication. It continues until . June: ‘Curwen’s Act’, a private member’s bill aimed at curbing the sale of parliamentary seats to supporters, is passed. October: Spencer Perceval (–) succeeds as prime minister. Military struggle with Napoleonic forces continues. Social unrest due to Luddites, a movement consisting of textile workers who saw mechanised looms – a product of the Industrial Revolution – as a threat to their livelihood. February: The Framebreaking Act imposes the death penalty for Luddism (destruction of production machinery). May: Spencer Perceval is assassinated in the House of Commons. June: Robert Banks Jenkinson, Lord Liverpool (–), becomes prime minister and remains so until . June: The United States Congress declares war on Britain over the latter’s interference with American ships. Napoleon fails in his attempt to invade Russia due to adverse winter conditions. July: The East India Company loses its trade monopoly with India but keeps it for China. August: The Cape of Good Hope becomes a British colony. September: The Congress of Vienna takes place and seeks to establish the territorial boundaries for post-Napoleonic Europe. It lasts until June . January: British forces are defeated by Americans at the Battle of New Orleans. June: The Battle of Waterloo, the decisive victory over Napoleon, is fought with Arthur Wellesley (Duke of Wellington) as commander of the British forces. Later Napoleon is deported to St Helena in the South Atlantic. December: Spa Fields Riot at Clerkenwell over political reform. Further social unrest; ‘Blanketeers’ – a group of weavers carrying blankets – begin a hunger march from Manchester to London in protest. October: Border of USA and Canada west of the Great Lakes set at the th parallel. February: Stamford Raffles founds the Straits Settlement (later Singapore) for the East India Company.
358
Timeline for the eighteenth century
August: ‘Peterloo Massacre’ in which eleven people were killed at St Peter’s Fields, Manchester during a meeting pressing for political reform. January: George III dies; the Prince Regent ascends the throne as George IV. May: Napoleon dies on St Helena. July: Coronation of George IV. January: Robert Peel (–), founder of the modern Conservative Party, becomes home secretary. October: Sunday Times is first published. May: Daniel O’Connell establishes Catholic Association in Ireland. July: Peel’s Gaol Act makes conditions at prisons a responsibility of the Home Office. The Combination Act of , ‘An Act to prevent Unlawful Combinations of Workmen’, was repealed in and followed by a new Combination Act the following year allowing trade unions to form under strict conditions. June: The Cotton Mills Regulation Act limits the working day of children under to hours. July: British and foreign ships are allowed to trade in the United Kingdom on equal terms. September: The first steam-driven railway line from Stockton to Darlington opens. University College London is founded in Gower Street as a nonsectarian institution of higher education. April: George Canning becomes prime minister. Wellington becomes prime minister (until ). March: Catholic Emancipation Act (Roman Catholic Relief Bill) passes the House of Commons becoming law shortly afterwards. The Bow Street Runners are reorganised as a modern police force by Robert Peel and dubbed ‘peelers’, later ‘bobbies’. July: Death of George IV; William IV becomes king. September: National Association for the Protection of Labour is founded at Manchester. First Parliamentary Reform Bill for England and Wales introduced in the House of Commons but defeated at the committee stage. February: Cholera outbreak in London.
Timeline for the eighteenth century
March/April: Third Reform Bill passes House of Commons and House of Lords. Falkland Islands formally annexed by Britain. Parliament approves a bill to end slavery within a year. August: Slavery formally abolished in the British Empire. October: Destructive fire at the Palace of Westminster which contains the Houses of Commons and Lords. Peel becomes prime minister (until , again from –). February: Macaulay’s ‘Minute on Education’ favours the introduction of the English language and educational system in India for an elite class. July: William Lovett founds the London Working Men’s Association. August: Marriage Act allows for licences to be issued for weddings in non-conformist churches. June: William IV dies and is succeeded by his niece who is crowned Queen Victoria on June. She remains monarch until her death in .
English monarchs (–) House of Orange – –
William III (with Mary II) William III (alone)
House of Stuart – Anne House of Hanover – – – – – –
359
George I George II George III George IV William IV Victoria
References
PR I M A RY SOU RC ES Adams, James 1794. Euphonologia Linguae Anglicanae. English Linguistics 1500– 1800. No. 112, Menston: The Scolar Press, 1968. 1799. The Pronunciation of the English Language Vindicated from Imputed Anomaly and Caprice. Edinburgh: J. Moir for the Author. English Linguistics 1500–1800. No. 72, Menston: The Scolar Press, 1968. Account of the Surprising Deliverance of the Rev. Mr. John from a Threatened Imprisonment, An. 1770. Bath: T. Mills. A. F. 1746. The General Entertainer. London: Henry Slater and Richard Adams. Alexander, Caleb (translator) 1796. The Works of Virgil. Worcester: David West. Allardyce, Alexander 1888. Scotland and Scotsmen in the Eighteenth Century from the MSS of John Ramsay. Esqu. of Ochtertyre. 2 vols. Edinburgh and London: Blackwood. Allen, Francis 1765. The Complete English Dictionary. London: J. Wilson and J. Fell. Anon. 1724. The Many Advantages of a Good Language to any Nation with an Examination of the Present State of our own: As also, an Essay towards Correcting some Things that are Wrong in it. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Anon. 1767. Review of The Easiest Introduction to Dr. Lowth’s English Grammar, Designed for the Use of Children under Ten Years of Age, by John Ash. Critical Review 23: 74. Anon. 1781. English Grammar. Doway. Anon. 1800. The Juvenile Library, Including a Complete Course of Instruction on Every Useful Subject. London: Printed by T. Gillet for R. Phillips. Ash, John 1760. Grammatical Institutes: or Grammar, Adapted to the Genius of the English Tongue. Worcester: R. Lewis. 1763 [1769?]. Grammatical Institutes, Or, an Easy Introduction to Dr. Lowth’s English Grammar. London: Printed for Edward and Charles Dilly. 1766. The Easiest Introduction to Dr. Lowth’s English Grammar, Designed for the Use of Children under Ten Years of Age, to Lead Them into a Clear Knowledge of the First Principles of the English Language. London: Printed for Edward and Charles Dilly. 1775. The New and Complete Dictionary of the English Language. London: Printed for Edward and Charles Dilly, and R. Baldwin. Astell, Mary 1700. Some Reflections Upon Marriage. London. 360
References
361
1696. In Defense of the Female Sex. London. [also attributed to Judith Drake]. Bailey, Nathan 1721. An Universal Etymological English Dictionary. London: E. Bell. Fifth edition, 1731. 1730. Dictionarium Britannicum: or a More Compleat Universal Etymological English Dictionary than any Extant. London: T. Cox. 1744. English and Latin Exercises, for School-boys. Eleventh edition. London: Printed for R. Ware. Baker, David Erskine 1764. The Companion to the Play-House. 2 vols. London: T. Becket and P. A. Dehondt. Baker, Robert 1770. Reflections on the English Language. London. Barclay, James 1774. A Complete and Universal Dictionary on a New Plan. London: Richardson and Urquhart. Baretti, Giuseppe 1775. Easy Phraseology for the Use of Young Ladies, who Intend to Learn the Colloquial Part of the Italian Language. London: Printed for G. Robinson and Thomas Cadell. Barlow, Frederick 1773. The Complete English Dictionary: or, General Repository of the English Language. London: The Author. Baskerville, John 1765. A Vocabulary, Or Pocket Dictionary. Birmingham: John Baskerville. Bayley, M. 1764. An Universal Etymological Dictionary of the English Language. Edinburgh: The Proprietors. Beattie, James 1787. The Theory of Language. English Linguistics 1500–1800. No. 88, Menston: The Scolar Press, 1968. Bellum Grammaticale: or, the Grammatical Battel Royal. In Reflections on the Three English Grammars Published in About a Year Last Past. 1712. London: Printed for J. and M. Jerund. Bentick, John 1786. The Spelling and Explanatory Dictionary of the English Language. London: Thomas Carnan. Bettesworth, John 1778. The English Grammar Epitomis’d. London: Printed for G. Keeble and the Author. Blackhall, Offspring 1727. Practical Discourses on the Lord’s Prayer. London: Stephen Austen. Blount, Thomas 1656. Glossographia; Or a Dictionary, Interpreting all such Hard Words. London: Printed by The Newcomb. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Book of Common Prayer, The 1869. Philadelphia: Claxton, Remsen, and Haffelfinger. Boswell, James 1934. Life of Johnson. Edited by G. Birkbeck Hill, Revised and enlarged by L. F. Powell. 6 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Boyer, Abel 1702. Dictionnaire Royal, François et Anglois. La Haye. Volume 2. Brightland, John and Charles Gildon 1710. A Grammar of the English Tongue, with Notes, Giving the Grounds and Reason of Grammar in General. To Which Is Added a New Prosodia; Or, The Art of English Numbers. All Adapted to the Use of Gentlemen and Ladies, As Well As of the Schools of Great Britain. London: Printed for John Brightland. 1712. ‘Reasons for an English education’, Prefaced to A Grammar of the English Tongue, with Notes…To which are now Added, The Arts of Poetry, Rhetoric, Logic, &C. Making A Compleat System of an English Education. For the Use of the Schools Of Great Britain and Ireland. Second edition. London: R. Brugis, for John Brightland.
362 References 1721. A Grammar of the English Tongue, with the Arts of Logick, Rhetorick, Poetry, &C. Illustrated with Useful Notes…the Whole Making a Compleat System of an English Education. Fourth edition. London: Printed for J. Roberts, D. Brown, J. Wyatt, W. Taylor, J. Osborn [and 6 others in London]. The British Mercury. 1710–1715. London: Printed by M. Jenour. Browne, Thomas 1800. The Union Dictionary. London: J. W. Myers. Buchanan, James 1757. Linguae Britannicae Vera Pronunciatio. London: A. Millar. English Linguistics 1500–1800. No. 39, Menston: The Scolar Press, 1968. 1766. Essay towards Establishing a Standard for an Elegant and Uniform Pronunciation of the English Language. London: Printed for Edward and Charles Dilly. Bullen, Rev., Henry St. John 1797. Rudiments of English Grammar, for the Use of Schools. Bury St. Edmund’s: Printed and sold by P. Gedge; London: G. G. and J. Robinson. Bullokar, John 1616. An English Expositor: Teaching the Interpretation of the Hardest Words in our Language. London: Iohn Legatt. Burchfield, Robert W. 1972–86. A Supplement to the Oxford English Dictionary. 4 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Burney, Frances 1788. Evelina, Or the History of a Young Lady’s Entrance into the World (1778). Dresden: C. and F. Walther. 1842–46. Diary and Letters of Madame d’Arblay. 7 vols. London: H. Colburn. Byrd, William and Edmund Ruffin 2001 [1841]. The Westover Manuscripts: Containing the History of the Dividing Line Betwixt Virginia and North Carolina. www. docsouth.unc.edu/nc/byrd/byrd.html Callandar, John of Craigforth 1782. Two Ancient Scottish Poems; the Gaberlunzieman, and Christ’s Kirk on the Green. Edinburgh. Cawdrey, Robert 1604. A Table Alphabeticall, Conteyning and Teaching the True Writing, and Vnderstanding of Hard Vsuall English Wordes. London: Edmund Weauer. Caxton, William 1490. Prologue to Eneydos. Reprinted Cole Press, 2007. Chalmers, George 1807. Caledonia: […] with a Dictionary of Places, Chorographical and Philological. London: Cadell, Davies. Chesterfield, Philip Dormer Stanhope, Earl of 1778. The Beauties of Chesterfield: or, Remarks on Politeness, and of Knowing the World: Containing Necessary Instructions to Complete the Gentleman and Man of Fashion. Edinburgh: Robert Jamieson. Coles, Elisha 1676. An English Dictionary. London: Printed for Samuel Crouch. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1971. Cooper, Christopher 1687. English Teacher or the Discovery of the Art of Teaching and Learning the English Tongue. London: Printed by John Richardson. Coote, Charles 1788. Elements of the Grammar of the English Language. London: The Author. Crakelt, William 1786. Entick’s New Spelling Dictionary. Revised, Corrected, and Enlarged Throughout. London: Charles Dilly. New edition, 1787. Croft, Herbert 1792. Proposals for Publishing, in May Next, Croft’s Johnson’s Dictionary Corrected. London. Defoe, Benjamin Norton 1735. A Compleat English Dictionary. London: Olive Payne. Defoe, Daniel 1724 –27. A Tour Thro’ the Whole Island of Great Britain. London. Devis, Ellin 1775. The Accidence; Or First Rudiments of English Grammar. Designed for the Use of Young Ladies. London: Printed for the Author.
References
363
1777. The Accidence…with an Appendix Containing Examples of Grammatical Construction. Third edition. London: Printed for the Author. 1782. The Accidence; Or First Rudiments of English Grammar. Fourth edition. London: Printed for the Author. Dictionary of the English Language, Both with Regard to Sound and Meaning, A. 1794. London: W. Stewart. Dictionary of the Scots Language. www.dsl.ac.uk Du Bois, Dorothea 1771. The Lady’s Polite Secretary, Or New Female Letter Writer. London: Printed for J. Coote, and T. Evans. Duncan, Daniel 1731. A New English Grammar. London. Dyche, Thomas and William Pardon 1735. A New General English Dictionary. London: Richard Ware. Edgeworth, Maria and Richard Lovell Edgeworth 1798. Practical Education. Volume 2. London: Printed for J. Johnson. Edwards, M. C., Mrs. 1796. A Short Compendium of English Grammar, in Which the Several Parts of Speech Are Clearly Explained and Defined (By Way of QUESTION and ANSWER.). Brentford: Printed by P. Norbury. Edwards, M. C. Elegant Extracts: or Useful and Entertaining Passages in Prose Selected for the Improvement of Scholars … in the Art of Speaking, in Reading, Thinking, Composing; and in the Conduct of Life. A new edition. London, 1790[?] Eighteenth Century Collections Online, Gale Group. www.galenet. galegroup.com/servlet/ECCO Ellis, Alexander J. 1869–1889. On Early English Pronunciation. Vol 1–5. London: Asher and Co. for the Philological Society, Trübner and Co. for the Early English Text Society. Elphinston, James 1786. Propriety Ascertained in Her Picture; Or, Inglish Speech and Spelling Rendered Mutual Guides. Volume 1. London: Jon Walter. Elstob, Elizabeth 1715. The Rudiments of Grammar. For the English-Saxon Tongue, First Given in English; with an Apology for the Study of Northern Antiquities. Being Very Useful Towards the Understanding Our Ancient English Poets, and Other Writers. London: Printed by W. Bowyer. Elworthy, Frederic Thomas 1877. An Outline of the Grammar of the Dialect of West Somerset. London: Trübner. Publications of the English Dialect Society 19, Vaduz: Kraus Reprint Ltd., 1965. Encarta World English Dictionary. 1999. London: Bloomsbury. Entick, John 1765. The New Spelling Dictionary, Teaching to Write and Pronounce the English Tongue with Ease and Propriety. Second edition, 1766. London: Printed for Edward and Charles Dilly. Mrs. Eves, 1800. The Grammatical Play-Thing, Or, Winter Evening’s Recreation, for Young Ladies Four to Twelve Years Old. Birmingham: Printed [by] T. A. Pearson; London: Sold by John Marshall…and L. B. Seeley. Eves, Mrs. Female Tatler, The. 1709–1710. London: B. Bragge. [ECJ] Fenn, Ellenor 1783a. Fables, by Mrs. Teachwell: In Which the Morals Are Drawn Incidentally in Various Ways. London: Printed and sold by John Marshall and Co. 1783b. Juvenile Correspondence. London: Printed and sold by J. Marshall. 1785. The Art of Teaching in Sport; Designed As a Prelude to a Set of Toys, for Enabling Ladies to Instill the Rudiments of Spelling, Reading, Grammar, and
364 References Arithmetic, Under the Idea of Amusement. London: Printed and sold by John Marshall and Co. 1797 The Child’s Grammar. Designed to Enable Ladies Who May Not Have Attended to the Subject Themselves to Instruct Their Children. London: Printed and sold by John Marshall. 1798a. The Mother’s Grammar. Being a Continuation of the Child’s Grammar. With Lessons for Parsing. And a Few Already Done As Examples. London: Printed and sold by John Marsaall [sic]. 1798b. Parsing Lessons for Elder Pupils: Resolved Into Their Elements, for the Assistance of Parents and Teachers. London: Printed for E. Newbery, the Corner of St. Paul’s Church-yard. 1798c. Parsing Lessons for Young Children: Resolved Into Their Elements, for the Assistance of Parents and Teachers. London: Printed for E. Newbery, the Corner of St. Paul’s Church-Yard. 1799a. The Friend of Mothers: Designed to Assist Them in Their Attempts to Instill the Rudiments of Language and Arithmetic, At an Early Age, and in a Manner Agreeable to Their Children. London: Printed for E. Newbery. 1799b. The Child’s Grammar. Designed to Enable Ladies Who May Not Have Attended to the Subject Themselves to Instruct Their Children. Dublin: Printed by Robert Napper for B. Dugdale. Fenning, Daniel 1761. The Royal English Dictionary. Second edition, 1763. London: S. Crowder. 1771. A New Grammar of the English Language; Or an Easy Introduction to the Art of Speaking and Writing English with Propriety and Correctness. London: Printed for S. Crowder. Fielding, Henry 1749. The History of Tom Jones. Edited by R. P. C. Mutter. Reprinted London: Penguin Books, 1985. The Fine Gentleman’s Etiquette; Or, Lord Chesterfield’s Advice to his Son, Versified. By a Lady. 1776. London: T. Davies. Fisher, Ann 1750 [1745]. A New Grammar: Being the Most Easy Guide to Speaking and Writing the English Language Properly and Correctly. Containing I. Orthography…II. Prosody…III. Etymology…IV. Syntax…To Which Are Added, Exercises of Bad English, in the Manner of Clark’s and Bailey’s Examples for the Latin, to Prove Our Concord by. Second edition. Newcastle upon Tyne: Printed for I. Thompson and Co. 1753. A New Grammar, with Exercises of Bad English. Third edition. London: Printed for the Author. 1773. An Accurate New Spelling Dictionary of the English Language. Second edition. London: Printed for the Author. Sixth edition, 1786. 1779. A Practical New Grammar, with Exercises of Bad English. Eighteenth edition. Newcastle: Printed for Tho. Slack. Fogg, Peter Walkden 1792–1796. Elementa Anglicana. Or, the Principles of English Grammar Displayed and Exemplified. 2 vols. Stockport. Fordyce, James 1766. Sermons to Young Women. London: Printed for A. Millar and T. Cadell, J. Dodsley, and J. Payne. Gardiner, Jane 1799. The Young Ladies’ English Grammar; Adapted to the Different Classes of Learners. York: Printed by Thomas Wilson and Robert Spence, High Ousegate. London: Sold by Vernor and Hood. Beverley: M. Turner.
References
365
Geddes, Alexander 1792. Three Scottish Poems. with a Previous Dissertation on the Scoto-Saxon Dialect. Transactions of the Society of Antiquaries of Scotland. Volume 1, Edinburgh, pp. 402–68. General View of English Pronunciation to which are Added Easy Lessons for the Use of the English Class, A. 1784. Edinburgh. Gilman, E. Ward 1989. Webster’s Dictionary of English Usage. Springfield: Merriam- Webster. Glossographia Anglicana Nova: or, a Dictionary, Interpreting such Hard Words of Whatever Language, as are at Present Used in the English Tongue. London: Brown. Gough, James 1754. A Practical Grammar of the English Tongue. Dublin. Greenwood, James 1711. An Essay Towards a Practical English Grammar. Describing the Genius and Nature of the English Tongue: Giving Likewise a Rational and Plain Account of Grammar in General, with a Familiar Explanation of Its Terms. London: Printed by R. Tookey. Hall, Fitzedward 1873. Modern English. New York. Hamilton, Joseph 1794. Johnson’s Dictionary of the English Language in Miniature. London: George Stafford. Harris, George 1752. Observations upon the English Language. London: Edward Withers. Hawkins, Francis. 1663. Youths Behaviour, Or Decency in Conversation Amongst Men. London: W. Lee. Hickes, George 1689. Institutiones Grammaticae Anglo-Saxonicae. Reprinted 1990. Hill, William 1833. Fifteen Lessons, on the Analogy and Syntax of the English Language. Huddersfield. Historical Thesaurus of English, The. www.libra.englang.arts.gla.ac.uk/historical thesaurus Hogg, Henry 1790. The New and Complete Universal Letter-Writer or, Whole Art of Polite Correspondence. London: Printed for Alexander Hogg. Holished, Raphael 1577. Chronicles of England, Scotlande and Irelande. Reprinted by Ams Press, 1965. Holland, Lady Elizabeth 1908. The Journal of Elizabeth, Lady Holland. Vol. I. 1791–1799. Ed. Earl of Ilchester. 2 vols. London: Longmans, Green, and Co. Hore, Herbert 1862–3. ‘An account of the Barony of Forth in the County of Wexford’, Journal of the Kilkenny and South-East of Ireland Archaeological Society 4: 53 –84. Houstoun, James 1747. Dr. Houstoun’s Memoirs of his Own Life-Time. London: Laiston Gilliver. Howard, Robert Mowbray (ed.) 1925. Records and Letters of the Family of the Longs of Longville, Jamaica, and Hampton Lodge, Surrey. 2 vols. London: Simpkin, Marshall, Hamilton, Kent and Co. Kitson, Roger 1798. A Short Introduction to English Grammar, with Orthographical Exercises. Norwich: Printed and sold by Stevenson and Matchett. Johnson, J. 1763. The New Royal and Universal English Dictionary. 2 vols. London: A. Millard and Robert Dodsley. Johnson, Richard 1706. Grammatical Commentaries: being an Apparatus to a New National Grammar: by way of Animadversion upon the Falsities, Obscurities, Redundancies and Defects of Lilly’s System now in Use. London: Printed for the Author.
366 References Johnson, Samuel 1747. The Plan of a Dictionary of the English Language. London: J. and P. Knapton, T. Logman and T. Shewell, C. Hitch, A. Millar and R. Dodsley. 1755. A Dictionary of the English Language. 2 vols. London: W. Strahan; Fourth edition. London: W. Strahan, for J. and P. Knapton (1773); T. and T. Longman; C. Hitch and L. Hawes; A. Millar; and R. and J. Dodsley. Facsimile reproduction, Hildesheim: Georg Olms Verlagsbuchandlung. 1775. A Journey to the Western Islands of Scotland. Dublin: Thomas Walker. Johnston, William 1764. A Pronouncing and Spelling Dictionary. London: W. Johnston. Jones, Hugh 1724. An Accidence to the English Tongue. London. Jones, Stephen 1798. Sheridan Improved. A General Pronouncing and Explanatory Dictionary of the English Language. London: Vernor and Hood. Kenrick, William 1773. A New Dictionary of the English Language. London: John and Francis Rivington, William Johnston et al. 1784. A Rhetorical Grammar of the English Language wherein the Elements of Speech in General and those of the English Tongue in Particular are Analysed and the Rudiments of Articulation, Pronunciation, and Prosody Intelligibly Displayed. London: R. Cadell and W. Longman. Kersey, John 1708. Dictionarium Anglo-Britannicum. London: W. Wilde. Kirkby, John 1746. A New English Grammar, Or Guide to the English Tongue. London: R. Manby and H. S. Cox. Lily, William 1549. Latin Grammar. London Packet or New Lloyd’s Evening Post. [BNCN] Long, Edward 1774. The History of Jamaica. 3 vols. London: T. Lowndes. Loughton, William 1739. A Practical Grammar of the English Tongue. Third edition. London: Printed for Caesar Ward and Richard Chandler. Lowth, Robert 1762. A Short Introduction to English Grammar: With Critical Notes. London: Printed by J. Hughes; for A. Millar and R. and J. Dodsley. Macafee, Caroline (ed.) 1996. A Concise Ulster Dictionary. Oxford University Press. MacKinnon, Donald 1791. A Persian-English Grammar. Calcutta. Maittaire, Michael 1712. The English Grammar: or, an Essay on the Art of Grammar, Applied to and Exemplified in the English Tongue. London: Printed for H. Clements. Manlove, James 1741. New English Dictionary of All Such English Words (With Their Explanation) as are Generally Made Use of, in Speaking and Writing the English Language. London. Marchant, John 1760. A New and Complete Dictionary of the English Language. London: J. Fuller; Second edition, 1762. Martin, Benjamin 1748. Institutions of Language. London: S. Birt, J. Hodges et al. 1749. Lingua Britannica Reformata: or, A New English Dictionary. London: J. Hodges. Mason, John M 1748. An Essay on Elocution, Or, Pronunciation Intended Chiefly for the Assistance of those who Instruct Others in the Art of Reading. And of those who are Often Called to Speak in Publick. London. Mason, John M. 1798. Letters on Frequent Communion. New York: T. and J. Swords. Mercy, Blanch 1799. A Short Introduction to English Grammar. In Two Separate Volumes. Vol. 1. Or Scholar’s Book. Designed for the Use of Young Ladies. London: Printed for the Authoress.
References
367
1801. A Short Introduction to English Grammar. Vol. 2. Or Instructress’s Book: Designed for the Use of Ladies Who Wish to Acquire a Method of Teaching. Second edition. Carlisle: Printed by F. Jollie, for C. Law, London. Milroy, James and Lesley Milroy 1999. Authority in Language. Investigating Language Standardisation and Prescription. Third edition. London: Routledge. More, Hannah 1777. Essays on Various Subjects, Principally Designed for Young Ladies. London: Printed for J. Wilkie and T. Cadell. Montagu, Elizabeth Robinson. Letters. London: British Library Add. MS 40,663. Murray, Alexander 1818. ‘Observations on the history and language of the Pehts’, Archaeologia Scotica 2.1: 134 –149. Murray, James A. H. 1880 ‘Ninth annual address of the President to the Philological Society’, Transactions of the Philological Society, pp. 117–174. 1900. The Evolution of English Lexicography. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Murray, James A. H., Henry Bradley, William A. Craigie and Charles T. Onions (eds.) 1884–1928. A New English Dictionary on Historical Principles. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Murray, Lindley 1795. English Grammar, Adapted to the Different Classes of Learners. York: Printed and Sold by Wilson, Spence, and Mawman. 1797. An Abridgment of L. Murray’s English Grammar. With an Appendix, Containing an Exemplifi cation of the Parts of Speech. Designed for the Use of the Youngest Class of Learners. By Lindley Murray. York: Printed and sold by Wilson, Spence, and Mawman; sold also by Darton and Harvey, London. New Academy of Compliments, A: or, the Lover’s Secretary: Being Wit and Mirth Improved, by the Most Elegant Expressions Used in the Art of Courtship 1784. Seventeenth edition, with additions. London: J. Bew. New Academy of Complements, The, Erected for Ladies, Gentlewomen, Courtiers, Gentlemen, Scholars, Souldiers, Citizens, Country-men, and All Persons of what Degree soever, of both Sexes 1781 [1669]. London: George Sawbridge. Newbery, John 1745. An Easy Introduction to the English Language; Or, a Compendious Grammar for the Use of Young Gentlemen, Ladies, and Foreigners. Being the Second Volume of the Circle of the Sciences, &c. London: Printed for J. Newbery. 1769. Grammar Made Familiar and Easy to Young Gentlemen, Ladies, and Foreigners, Being the First Volume of the Circle of the Sciences, &c. The Third Edition, with Additions. London: Printed for Newbery and Carnan. New English Dictionary, A. 1737. London. Oldmixon, John 1712. The British Academy. London: n. p. Orton, Harold 1962. Survey of English Dialects – Introduction. Leeds: Edward Arnold. Orton, Harold and Eugen Dieth (eds.) 1962–1971. Survey of English Dialects. The Basic Material. Leeds: Edward Arnold. Orton, Harold and Eugen Dieth (eds.) The Oxford Dictionary of National Biography. www.oxforddnb.com Perry, William 1775. The Royal Standard English Dictionary. Edinburgh: David Willison. Phillips, Edward 1658. The New World of English Words: or, a General Dictionary. London: E. Tyler. Second edition, 1662; Sixth edition, revised J. Kersey, 1706. London: J. Phillips, H. Rhodes, and J. Taylor.
368 References Pinkerton, John (ed.) 1786. Ancient Scottish Poems, Never Before in Print. Edinburgh: Dilly and Creech. Piozzi, Hester Lynch 1786. Anecdotes of the Late Samuel Johnson, LL.D: During the Last Twenty Years of his Life. London: Printed for T. Cadell in the Strand. 1794. British Synonymy, Or, an Attempt at Regulating the Choice of Words in Familiar Conversation. 2 vols. London: Robinson. Pocket Dictionary or Complete English Expositor, A. 1753. London: J. Newbery. Poole, Joshua 1646. The English Accidence, Or, A Short, Plaine, and Easie Way for the More Speedy Attaining to the Latine Tongue. London. Pope, Alexander 1715. The Iliad of Homer, Translated by Mr. Pope. Volume 1. London: Printed by W. Bowyer, for Bernard Lintott. Puttenham, George 1589. The Arte of English Poesie. London: Richard Field. Ramsay, Allan 1721. Poems. Edinburgh: Thomas Ruddiman. Ramsay, Edward Bannerman 1872. Reminiscences of Scottish Life and Character. London: Gall and Inglis. Ray, John 1674. A Collection of English Words not Generally Used. London: Printed for Christopher Wilkinson. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Rice, John 1773. A Lecture on the Importance and Necessity of Rendering the English Language a Peculiar Branch of Female Education. London: Printed for G. Kearsley. Ritson, Joseph 1782. Observations on the First Three Volumes of the History of English Poetry. London: Stockdale and Fulder. Robinson, Robert 1617. The Art of Pronunciation. London: Printed by Nicholas Okes. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Russell, Charles W. 1892 [1857]. ‘The dialect of the barony of Forth, Co. Wexford’, Irish Monthly 20 : 580 –592. Scot, Alexander 1791. The Contrast: A Specimen of the Scottish Dialect, in Prose and Verse, According to the latest Improvements. Edinburgh. Scott, Joseph Nicol 1755. A New Universal Etymological English Dictionary. London: T. Osborne. Scott, Walter 1818. Tales of My Landlord. 4 vols. Edinburgh: Archibald Constable. Seally, John 1788. The Lady’s Encyclopedia: or, a Concise Analysis of the Belles Lettres, the Fine Arts, and the Sciences. Vol. 2. London. Sheridan, Richard Brinsley 1775. The Rivals. Reprinted 1994 with an Introduction by Colin Counsell. London: Nick Hern Book. Sheridan, Thomas 1756. British Education: or, the Source of the Disorders of Great Britain. Being an Essay towards Proving that the Immorality, Ignorance, and False Taste, which so Generally Prevail, and the Natural and Necessary Consequences of the Present Defective System of Education. Dublin: George Faulkner. 1761. A Dissertation on the Causes of the Difficulties which Occur, in Learning the English Tongue. London: R. and J. Dodsley. 1762. Course of Lectures on Elocution. London. Reprinted as English Linguistics 1500–1800. No. 129. Alston, Robin C. (ed.). Menston: The Scolar Press, 1968. 1780. A General Dictionary of the English Language. 2 vols. London: J. Dodsley. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1967. 1781. A Rhetorical Grammar of the English Language Calculated Solely for the Purpose of Teaching Propriety of Pronunciation and Justness of Delivery, in that Tongue. Dublin: Price. Reprinted as English Linguistics 1500–1800. No. 146. Alston, Robin C. (ed.), Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969.
References
369
Simpson, John A. and Edmund S. C. Weiner (eds.) 1989. The Oxford English Dictionary on CD-ROM. Second edition. Oxford University Press. www.dictionary.oed.com Sinclair, Sir John 1782. Observations on the Scottish Dialect. London. Smart, Benjamin H. 1812. A Grammar of English Sounds. London: John Richardson. 1836. Walker Remodelled. A New Critical Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language. London: T. Cadell. 1842. The Practice of Elocution. Fourth edition. London: Longman, Brown, Green and Longmans. Somerville, Martha 1873. Personal Recollections from Early Life to Old Age of Mary Somerville. London: John Murray. Southey, Robert (ed.) 1836. The Works of William Cowper, Comprising his Poems, Correspondence, and Translations. With a Life of the Author by the Editor, Robert Southey. Volume 5. London: Baldwin and Cradock. Sparrow, John 1739. New English Dictionary. London. Spectator, The 1711–1714. London: Printed for Sam. Buckley [later: Charles Lillie, J. Tonson]. [BNCN] Spence, Thomas 1775. The Grand Repository of the English Language. Newcastle: T. Saint. 1814. The Giant-killer, Or Anti-landlord. London. Stanihurst, Richard 1965 [1577]. ‘The description of Ireland’, in: Chronicles of England, Scotlande and Irelande edited by Raphael Holinshed. London. Reprinted by Ams Press. Sterne, Laurence 1760. The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, Gentleman. Edited by Melvyn New and Joan New. Reprinted London: Penguin Books, 1997. Story, Joshua 1783. An Introduction to English Grammar. Third edition. Fifth edition, 1793. Newcastle upon Tyne. Sundby, Bertil, Anne Kari Bjørge and Kari E. Haugland 1991. A Dictionary of English Normative Grammar 1700–1800. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Tatler, The by Isaac Bickerstaff, Esq. 1709–1711. London: Printed for the Author [later: John Morphew]. [ECJ] Taylor, Mrs. 1791. An Easy Introduction to General Knowledge and Liberal Education … For the Use of the Young Ladies, At Strangeways Hall, Manchester. Warrington: Printed by W. Eyres. Thorson, J. L. (ed.) 1983. Tobias Smollett Humphry Clinker. New York and London: W. W. Norton and Company. Thrale, Hester Lynch 1942. Thraliana. The Diary of Mrs. Hester Lynch Thrale (Later Mrs. Piozzi). 1776–1809. Volume 1: 1776–1784, Volume 2: 1785–1809. Edited by Katharine C. Balderston. 2 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Times, The. [BNCN] Todd, Loreto 1990. Words Apart. A Dictionary of Northern Irish English. Gerrards Cross: Colin Smythe. Trench, Richard C. 1860. On Some Deficiencies in Our English Dictionaries. Second, revised edition. London: John W. Parker and Sons. Trimmer, Sarah 1803. Review of English Grammar…, English Exercises…, And An Abridgement of Lindley Murray’s English Grammar, by Lindley Murray. Guardian of Education 2: 418 –419. Trusler, John 1766. The Difference, Between Words, Esteemed Synonymous, in the English Language; and, the Proper Choice of Them Determined. London.
370
References
Tucker, Abraham 1773. Vocal Sounds. London: Printed by T. Jones. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Universal Dictionary of the English Language, An. 1763. Edinburgh: Donaldson and Reid. Upton, John 1746. Critical Observations on Shakespeare. London. Ussher, G. Neville 1786 [1785]. The Elements of English Grammar, Methodically Arranged for the Assistance of Young Persons Who Study the English Language Grammatically: To Which Is Added a Concise Treatment of Rhetoric. Designed Particularly for the Use of Ladies’ Boarding Schools. Second edition. Glocester [sic]: Printed by R. Raikes. Vallancey, Charles 1788. ‘Memoir of the language, manners, and customs of an Anglo-Saxon colony settled in the baronies of Forth and Bargie, in: the County of Wexford, Ireland, in 1167, 1168, 1169’, Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy 2: 19–41. Walker, John 1774. A General Idea of a Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language. London: T. Becket. 1791. A Critical Pronouncing Dictionary and Expositor of the English Language. London: G. G. J. and J. Robinson; Second edition, 1797. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Ward, William 1765. An Essay on Grammar. London. 1767. A Grammar of the English Language. York: A. Ward. Welford, R. 1895. Men of Mark ’Twixt Tyne and Tweed. Newcastle: Walter Scott. Welsh, Charles 1885. A Bookseller of the Last Century. Being Some Account of the Life of John Newbery, and of the Books He Published, with a Notice of the Later Newberys. London and New York: Printed for Griffith, Farran, Okeden & Welsh. Wesley, John 1753. The Complete English Dictionary. London: J. Robinson. White, James 1761. The English Verb. London. Whitaker, Edward William 1795. A General and Connected View of the Prophecies Relating to the Times of the Gentiles. Egham, Surrey: C. Boult. Withers, Philip 1788. Aristarchus. London: J. Moore. Wits Academy, The: or, The Muses Delight. 1677. London and Westminster (no publisher). Wright, Joseph 1898–1905. The English Dialect Dictionary. Oxford: Henry Frowde. 1905. The English Dialect Grammar. Oxford: Henry Frowde. COR P OR A A N D ON LI N E R ESOU RC ES BNCN Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century Burney Collection Newspapers. www. find.galegroup.com/bncn CEECE The Corpus of Early English Correspondence Extension. Compiled by Terttu Nevalainen; Samuli Kaislaniemi, Mikko Laitinen, Minna Nevala, Arja Nurmi, Minna Palander-Collin, Helena Raumolin-Brunberg, Anni Sairio, Tuuli Tahko (Helsinki University). CED A Corpus of English Dialogues 1560–1760 (2006). Compiled by Merja Kytö (Uppsala University) and Jonathan Culpeper (Lancaster University). CIE A Corpus of Irish English (2003). Compiled by Raymond Hickey (Essen University).
References
371
COLMOBAENG A Corpus of Late Modern British and American English Prose 1700–1879. Compiled by Teresa Fanego (University of Santiago de Compostela). www.usc-teresafanego.es/COLMOBAENG.pdf ECCO Eighteenth Century Collections Online. www.galenet.galegroup.com/servlet/ ECCO ECJ Eighteenth Century Journals: A Portal to Newspapers and Periodicals, c1685– 1815. www.18thcjournals.amdigital.co.uk/Index.aspx EEBO Early English Books Online. www.eebo.chadwyck.com/home LION Literature Online. www.lion.chadwyck.co.uk OBR Old Bailey Records. www.oldbaileyonline.org ZEN Zurich English Newspaper Corpus, Version 1.0. Compiled by Udo Fries, Hans Martin Lehmann, Beni Ruef, Peter Schneider, Patrick Studer, Caren auf dem Keller, Beat Nietlispach, Sandra Engler, Sabine Hensel and Franziska Zeller. www.es-zen.unizh.ch. Zurich: University of Zurich
SECON DA RY SOU RC ES Aarts, Bas and April McMahon (eds.) 2006. The Handbook of English Linguistics. Malden, MA and Oxford: Blackwell. Abercrombie, David 1965. ‘RP and local accent’, in: David Abercrombie Studies in Phonetics and Linguistics. Oxford University Press, pp. 10–15. Adams, Michael and Anne Curzan (eds.) forthcoming. Contours of English. English Language Studies Presented to Richard W. Bailey. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press. Adams, George Brendan 1958. ‘The emergence of Ulster as a distinct dialect area’, Ulster Folklife 4: 61–73. 1967. ‘Northern England as a source of Ulster dialects’, Ulster Folklife 13: 69–74. 1977. ‘The dialects of Ulster’, in: Ó Muirithe (ed.), pp. 56–70. Adams, George Brendan (ed.) 1964. Ulster Dialects: An Introductory Symposium. Holywood, Co. Down: Ulster Folk and Transport Museum. Adamson, Sylvia, Vivien Law, Nigel Vincent and Susan Wright (eds.) 1990. Papers from the Fifth International Conference on English Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Aijmer, Karin 1996. Conversational Routines in English. Convention and Creativity. London: Longman. Aijmer, Karin and Anna-Brita Stenström (eds.) 2004. Discourse Patterns in Spoken and Written Corpora. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Aitchison, Jean 1981. Language Change: Progress or Decay? Cambridge University Press. Aitken, Adam. J. 1977. ‘How to pronounce Older Scots’, in: Aitken, McDiarmid and Thomson (eds.), pp. 1–21. 1981. ‘The Scottish vowel length rule’, in: Benskin and Samuels (eds.), pp. 131–157. Aitken, Adam J., Matthew P. McDiarmid and Derick S. Thomson (eds.) 1977. Bards and Makars. Scottish Language and Literature: Medieval and Renaissance. Glasgow University Press. Algeo, John 2001. ‘External history’, in: Algeo (ed.), pp. 1–58.
372
References
Algeo, John (ed.) 2001. English in North America. Cambridge History of the English Language. Volume 6. Cambridge University Press. Alston, Robin C. 1965. A Bibliography of the English Language from the Invention of Printing to the Year 1800. Volume 1. English Grammars Written in English. Leeds: E. J. Arnold and Son Limited. 1970. Facsimile Edition of William Lily and John Colet’s A Shorte Introduction of Grammar (1549). Menston: The Scolar Press. Anderwald, Lieselotte 2005. ‘Negative concord in British English dialects’, in: Iyeiri (ed.), pp. 113–137. Anderwald, Lieselotte and Susanne Wagner 2007. ‘The Freiburg English Dialect Corpus (FRED) – Applying corpus-linguistic research tools to the analysis of dialect data’, in: Beal, Corrigan and Moisl (eds.), Volume 1, pp. 35–53. Ando, Sadao 1976. A Descriptive Syntax of Christopher Marlowe’s Language. University of Tokyo Press. Antony, Laurence 2006. Antconc 3.1. www.antlab.sci.waseda.ac.jp/software.html Archer, Dawn (ed.) 2009. What’s in a Word-list? Investigating Word Frequency and Keyword Extraction. Farnham, Surrey: Ashgate. Auroux, Sylvain, E. F. Konrad Koerner, Hans-Josef Niederehe and Kees Versteegh (eds.) 2000. History of the Language Sciences…An International Handbook on the Evolution of the Study of Language From the Beginnings to the Present. Berlin: de Gruyter. Austin, Frances 1994. ‘The effect of exposure to Standard English: the language of William Clift’, in: Stein and Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.), pp. 285–313. 1996. ‘Lindley Murray’s ‘Little code of elementary instruction’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.), pp. 45–61. 2004. ‘Greenwood, James (1683[?]–1737)’, in: Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, ed. by Henry C. G. Matthew and Brian Harrison. Oxford University Press. www.oxforddnb.com/view/article/11435 Austin, Frances and Christopher Stray (eds.) 2003. The Teaching of English in the Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries. Essays for Ian Michael on his Eighty Eighth Birthday. Special issue of Paradigm Volume 2.7. Austin, Frances (ed.) 1991. The Clift Family Correspondence. Sheffield: CECTAL. Ayres-Bennett, Wendy (ed.) 1994. La Grammaire des Dames / Women and Grammar. Series: Histoire, Épistémologie, Langage 17. Bailey, Richard W. 1987. ‘Teaching in the Vernacular: Scotland, Schools, and Linguistic Diversity’, in: Macafee and Macleod (eds.), pp. 131–142. 1996. Nineteenth-Century English. Ann Arbor: The University of Michigan Press. 2003. ‘The ideology of English in the long eighteenth century’, in: Dossena and Jones (eds.), pp. 21–44. Bailey, Richard W., Marilyn Miller and Colette Moore (eds.) 2006. A London Provisioner’s Chronicle, 1550–1563, by Henry Machyn. www.ferment.umdl. umich.edu/m/machyn Bailyn, Bernard 1986. The Peopling of British North America. An Introduction. New York: Knopf. Baines, Paul 2003. ‘Writing, gender and discipline in Shenstone’s The SchoolMistress: “Tway Birchen Sprays” ’, British Journal for Eighteenth-Century Studies 26.2: 167–188.
References
373
Balderston, Katherine (ed.) 1951. Thraliana: The Diary of Mrs. Hester Lynch Thrale (Later Piozzi). 2 vols. [First edition, 1942]. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Bannet, Eve Tavor 2005. Empire of Letters. Letter Manuals and Transatlantic Correspondence, 1688–1820. Cambridge University Press. Barchas, Janine 1996. ‘Sarah Fielding’s dashing style and eighteenth-century print culture’, English Literary History 63.3: 633 –656. Bardon, Jonathan 1996. A Shorter Illustrated History of Ulster. Belfast: Blackstaff Press. Barker, Hannah Jane and Elaine Chalus (eds.) 1997. Gender in EighteenthCentury England: Roles, Representations and Responsibilities. London: Longman. Basker, James. G. 1993. ‘Scotticisms and the Problem of Cultural Identity in Eighteenth Century Britain’, in: Dwyer and Sher (eds.), pp. 81–95. Bately, Janet 1964. ‘Dryden’s revisions in the Essay of Dramatic Poesy: The preposition at the end of the sentence and the expression of the relative’, The Review of English Studies, New Series 15.59: 268 –282. Battestin, Martin C. and Clive T. Probyn (eds.) 1993. The Correspondence of Henry and Sarah Fielding. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Bauer, Laurie 1994. Watching English Change. An Introduction to the Study of Linguistic Change in Standard Englishes in the Twentieth Century. London: Longman. Baugh, Albert C. and Thomas Cable 1951. A History of the English Language [Fifth edition 2002]. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. Bax, Randy 2005. ‘Traces of Johnson in the language of Fanny Burney’, in: CondeSilvestre and Hernandez-Campoy (eds.), pp. 159–181. 2008. ‘Foolish, Foolisher, Foolishest: Eighteenth-century English grammars and the comparison of adjectives and adverbs’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 279–288. Beal, Joan C. 1993. ‘The grammar of Tyneside and Northumbrian English’, in: Milroy and Milroy (eds.), pp. 187–213. 1999. English Pronunciation in the Eighteenth Century. Thomas Spence’s Grand Repository of the English Language (1775). Oxford University Press. 2003. ‘John Walker: Prescriptivist or linguistic innovator?’, in: Dossena and Jones (eds.), pp. 83–105. 2004a. English in Modern Times: 1700–1945. London: Arnold. 2004b. ‘“Marks of disgrace”: Attitudes to non-standard pronunciation in eighteenth- century English pronouncing dictionaries’, in: Dossena and Lass (eds.), pp. 329–349. 2008. ‘ “Shamed by your English?” The market value of a good pronunciation’, in: Beal, Nocera and Sturiale (eds.), pp. 21–40. Beal, Joan, Karen Corrigan and Herman Moisl (eds.) 2007. Creating and Digitizing Language Corpora. Vol. 1: Synchronic Corpora. Vol. 2: Diachronic Databases. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Beal, Joan, Carmela Nocera and Massimo Sturiale (eds.) 2008. Perspectives on Prescriptivism. Bern: Peter Lang. Beetz, Manfred 1990. Frühmoderne Höflichkeit. Komplimentierkunst und Gesellschaftsrituale im altdeutschen Sprachraum. [Early modern politeness.
374
References
The art of complements and social rituals in the Old German language area]. Stuttgart: Metzler. 1999. ‘The polite answer in pre-modern German conversation culture’, in: Jucker, Fritz and Lebsanft (eds.), pp, 139–166. Béjoint, Henri 2000. Modern Lexicography. An Introduction. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Benskin, Michael and Michael Samuels (eds.) 1981. So Meny People Longages and Tonges. Philological Essays in Scots and Mediæval English Presented to Angus McIntosh. Edinburgh: The Editors. Bergs, Alexander 2005. Social Networks and Historical Sociolinguistics: Studies in Morphosyntactic Variation in the Paston Letters (1421–1503). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Bermingham, Ann and John Brewer (eds.) 1995. The Consumption of Culture 1600– 1800. Image, Object, Text. London: Routledge. Bernstein, Cynthia 2003. ‘Grammatical features of southern speech: yall, might could, and fixin to’, in: Nagle and Sanders (eds.), pp. 106–118. Bessborough, The Earl of (ed.) 1955. Georgiana. Extracts from the Correspondence of Georgiana Duchess of Devonshire. London: John Murray. Bex, Tony and Richard Watts (eds.) 1999. Standard English. The Widening Debate. London: Routledge. Biber, Douglas, Stig Johansson, Geoffrey Leech, Susan Conrad and Edward Finegan 1999. Longman Grammar of Spoken and Written English. Harlow: Longman. Biber, Douglas, Susan Conrad and Randi Reppen 1998. Corpus Linguistics. Investigating Language Structure and Use. Cambridge University Press. Bijkerk, Annemieke 2004. ‘Yours sincerely and yours affectionately: On the origin of two positive politeness formulas’, Journal of Historical Pragmatics 5.2: 297–311. Blake, Norman F. (ed.) 1992. The Cambridge History of the English Language. Vol. 2: 1066–1476. Cambridge University Press. Blake, Norman F. and Charles Jones (eds.) 1984. English Historical Linguistics: Studies in Development. Sheffield: CECTAL. Bliss, Alan J. 1979. Spoken English in: Ireland 1600–1740. Twenty-Seven Representative Texts Assembled and Analysed. Dublin: Cadenus Press. Blodgett, Harriet 1989. Centuries of Female Days. Englishwomen’s Private Diaries. Gloucester: Alan Sutton. Bloom, Lillian D. 1979. ‘Fanny Burney’s Camilla: The author as editor’, Bulletin of Research in the Humanities, 367–393. Boissevain, Jeremy 1974. Friends of Friends: Networks, Manipulators and Coalitions. Oxford: Blackwell. Bolton, William F. 1966. The English Language: Essays by English and American Men of Letters, 1490–1839. Cambridge University Press. Bond, Donald (ed.) 1965. The Spectator. 5 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Booth, Bradford A. and Ernest Mehew (eds.) 1994–1995. The Letters of Robert Louis Stevenson. New Haven: Yale University Press. Börjars, Kersti and Carol Chapman 1998. ‘Agreement and pro-drop in some dialects of English’, Linguistics 36: 71–98. Borsay, Peter 1990. The Eighteenth-Century Town. A Reader in English Urban History 1688–1820. London: Longman.
References
375
2002. ‘Urban life and culture’, in Dickinson (ed.), pp. 196–208. Bosanquet, Captain Henry T. A. 1921. ‘The Maritime School at Chelsea’, The Mariner’s Mirror 7: 322–329. Braidwood, John 1964. ‘Ulster and Elizabethan English’, in: Adams (ed.), pp. 5–109. 1969. The Ulster Dialect Lexicon. Queens University of Belfast. 1972. ‘Terms for “left-handed” in the Ulster dialects’, Ulster Folklife 18: 98 –110. Bree, Linda 1996. Sarah Fielding. New York: Twayne Publishers, London: Prentice Hall International. Bresnan, Joan, Ashwini Deo and Devyani Sharma 2007. ‘Typology in variation: a probabilistic approach to be and n’t in the Survey of English Dialects’, English Language and Linguistics 11: 301–346. Brewer, Charlotte 2007. Treasure-House of the Language: The Living OED. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press. Brewer, John and Susan Staves (eds.) 1996. Early Modern Conceptions of Property. London: Routledge. Brinton, Laurel 2007. ‘The development of I mean: Implications for the study of historical pragmatics’ in: Fitzmaurice and Taavitsainen (eds.), pp. 37–79. Brown, Penelope and Stephen Levinson 1987. Politeness. Some Universals in Language Usage. Cambridge University Press. Brownlees, Nicholas (ed.) 2006. News Discourse in Early Modern Britain. Selected Papers of CHINED 2004. Bern: Peter Lang. Bryson, Anna 1998. From Courtesy to Civility: Changing Codes of Conduct in Early Modern England. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Bryson, Bill 1990. Mother Tongue. The English Language. London: Penguin. Bunt, Gerrit H. V., Erik S. Kooper, J. L. Mackenzie and D. R. M. Wilkinson (eds.) 1987. One Hundred Years of English Studies in Dutch Universities. Amsterdam: Rodopi. Burchfield, Robert 1989. ‘The genealogy of dictionaries’, in: Robert Burchfield Unlocking the English Language. London: Faber and Faber, pp. 147–165. 1996. Fowler’s Modern English Usage [third edition]. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Burchfield, Robert (ed.) 1994. English in Britain and Overseas. Origins and Development. The Cambridge History of the English Language. Volume 5. Cambridge University Press. Burnley, David 2003. ‘The T/V pronouns in later Middle English literature’, in: Taavitsainen and Jucker (eds.), pp. 27–45. Burton, John Hill (ed.) 1910. The Autobiography of Dr. Alexander Carlyle of Inveresk, 1722–1805. London and Edinburgh: T. N. Foulis. Buschmann-Göbels, Astrid 2008. ‘Bellum Grammaticale (1712) – A battle of books and a battle for the market’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 81–100. Butters, Ronald R. 2001. ‘Grammatical structure’, in: Algeo (ed.), pp. 325–339. Butterworth, Brian, Bernard Comrie and Östen Dahl (eds.) 1984. Explanations for Language Universals. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Byrne, Joseph 2004. Byrne’s Dictionary of Irish Local History from Earliest Times to c. 1900. Cork: Mercier Press. Caie, Graham D., Carole Hough and Irené Wotherspoon (eds.) 2006. The Power of Words: Essays in Lexicography, Lexicology and Semantics. Amsterdam: Rodopi.
376
References
Cajka, Karen 2003. The Forgotten Women Grammarians of Eighteenth-Century England. PhD thesis: University of Connecticut. 2008. ‘Eighteenth-century teacher-grammarians and the education of “proper” women’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 191–221. Canny, Nicholas 2001. Making Ireland British 1580–1650. Oxford University Press. Canny, Nicholas (ed.) 1994. Europeans on the Move: Studies on European Migration, 1500–1800. Oxford University Press. Carter, Philip 2001. Men and the Emergence of Polite Society, 1660–1800. London: Pearson Education. Cash, Derek 2003. Access to Museum Culture: The British Museum from 1753 to 1836. www.thebritishmuseum.ac.uk/researchpublications/electronicPDF/133/133. html Cecil, Lord David 1945. ‘Fanny Burney’s novels’, in: Essays on the Eighteenth Century Presented to David Nichol Smith, Oxford: Clarendon Press, pp. 212–224. Chambers, J. K. and Peter Trudgill 1998. Dialectology. Second edition. Cambridge University Press. Chapman, Don 2008. ‘The eighteenth-century grammarians as language experts’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 21–36. Chapone, Hester 1773. Letters on the Improvement of the Mind. London: H. Hughes for J. Walter. Cheshire, Jenny, Viv Edwards and Pamela Whittle 1989. ‘Urban British dialect grammar: The question of dialect levelling’, English World-Wide 10 : 185 –225. 1993. ‘Non-standard English and dialect levelling’, in: Milroy and Milroy (eds.), pp. 53–96. Christian, Donna 1991. ‘The personal dative in Appalachian speech’, in: Trudgill and Chambers (eds.), pp. 11–19. Clarke, Aidan 1994 [1967]. ‘The colonisation of Ulster and the rebellion of 1641’, in: Moody and Martin (eds.), pp. 152–164. Clarke, Norma 2000. Dr. Johnson’s Women. Reprinted 2005. London: Pimlico. Clifford, James L. 1987. Hester Lynch Thrale Piozzi (Mrs. Thrale). Second edition. (First edition, 1941). New York: Columbia University Press. Cohen, Michèle 2004. ‘“Gender” and “method” in eighteenth-century English education’, History of Education 33.5: 585 –595. 2005. ‘Manners” make the man: politeness, chivalry, and the construction of masculinity, 1750–1830. Journal of British Studies 44, 312–329. 2006. ‘“A little learning”. The curriculum and the construction of gender difference in the long eighteenth century’, British Journal for Eighteenth-Century Studies 29.3: 321–335. 2009. ‘“A familiar explanation”: Social conversations, familiar conversations and domestic education in late eighteenth-century England’, in: Hilton and Shefrin (eds.), pp. 77–98. Cohen, Murray 1977. Sensible Words: Linguistic Practice in England 1640–1785. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Press. Cole, Peter and Jerry L. Morgan (eds.) 1975. Speech Acts. New York: Academic Press. Conde-Silvestre, Juan Camilo and Juan Manuel Hernandez-Campoy (eds.) 2005. Sociolinguistics and the History of English: Perspectives and Problems. Special issue of International Journal of English Studies.
References
377
Corkery, Daniel 1967 [1924]. The Hidden Ireland. A Study of Gaelic Munster in the Eighteenth Century. Dublin: Gill and Macmillan. Corrigan, Karen P. 2000. ‘“What bees to be maun be”: Aspects of deontic and epistemic modality in a northern dialect of Irish English’, English World-Wide 21.1: 25 –62. Cowan, Brian 2004. ‘Mr Spectator and the coffeehouse public sphere’, EighteenthCentury Studies 37.3: 345 –366. Cressy, David 1980. Literacy and Social Order: Reading and Writing in Tudor and Stuart England. Cambridge University Press. Crowley, Tony 2000. The Politics of Language in Ireland 1366–1922. A Sourcebook. London: Routledge. Crozier, Alan 1984. ‘The Scotch-Irish influence on American English’, American Speech 60, 310 –31. Crystal, David 1995. The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language. Cambridge University Press. 2004. The Stories of English. London: Allen Lane. Cullen, Louis 1994. ‘The Irish diaspora and the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries’, in: Canny (ed.), pp. 113–149. Culpeper, Jonathan 2009. ‘Keyness: Words, parts-of-speech and semantic categories in the character-talk of Shakespeare’s Romeo and Juliet’, International Journal of Corpus Linguistics 14.1: 29–59. Cunningham, Bernadette 2000. The World of Geoffrey Keating: History, Myth and Religion in Seventeenth Century Ireland. Dublin: Four Courts Press. Curtis, Edmund 1919. ‘The spoken languages of medieval Ireland’, Studies 8: 234 –254. Dalton-Puffer, Christiane, Nikolaus Ritt, Herbert Schendl and Dieter Kastovsky (eds.) 2006. Syntax, Style and Grammatical Norms: English from 1500–2000. Bern: Peter Lang. De Smet, Hendrik 2007. ‘For…to-infinitives as verbal complements in Late Modern and Present-Day English: Between motivation and change’, English Studies 88: 67–94. Deignan, Alice 2005. Metaphor and Corpus Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. DeMaria Jr., Robert 2005. ‘Johnson’s extempore history and grammar of the English language’, in: Lynch and McDermott (eds.), pp. 77–91. Denison, David 1998. ‘Syntax’, in: Romaine (ed.), pp. 92–329. Deumert, Ana and Wim Vandenbussche (eds.) 2003. Germanic Standardizations – Past to Present. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Dickinson, Harry Thomas 2002. A Companion to Eighteenth-Century Britain. Oxford: Blackwell. Dickson, David (ed.) 1987. The Gorgeous Mask: Dublin, 1700–1850. Dublin: Trinity History Workshop. Dickson, Peter G. M. 1960. The Sun Insurance Office 1710–1960: The History of Two and a Half Centuries of British Insurance. Oxford University Press. Dietrich, Julia C. 1981. ‘The Gaelic roots of a-prefixing in Appalachian English’, American Speech 56: 314. Dille, Catherine 2005a. ‘The Dictionary in abstract: Johnson’s abridgements of the Dictionary of the English Language for the common reader’, in: Lynch and McDermott (eds.), pp. 198–211.
378
References
2005b. ‘Johnson’s Dictionary in the nineteenth century: A legacy in transition’, The Age of Johnson 16: 21–37. Diller, Hans-Jürgen and Manfred Görlach (eds.) 2001. Towards a History of English as a History of Genres. Heidelberg: Winter. Di Martino, Gabriella 2000. ‘Politeness strategies in 17th century didactic dialogues’, in: di Martino and Lima (eds.), pp. 227–246. Di Martino, Gabriella and Maria Lima (eds.) 2000. English Diachronic Pragmatics. Napoli: CUEN. Dirven, René 2002. ‘Metonymy and metaphor: Different mental strategies of conceptualisation’, in: Dirven and Pörings (eds.), pp. 75–111. [Originally published in 1993 in Leuvense Bijdragen 82: 1–28]. Dirven, René and Ralf Pörings (eds.) 2002. Metaphor and Metonymy in Comparison and Contrast. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Dixon, Robert M. W. 1984. ‘The semantic basis of syntactic properties’, Proceedings of the Berkeley Linguistics Society 10 : 583–593. Dobson, E. J. 1955. ‘Early modern standard English’, Transactions of the Philological Society 53: 25 –54. 1957. English Pronunciation 1500–1700. Oxford University Press. Dodd, Donald B. 1993. Historical Statistics of the States of the United States. Westport: Greenwood Press. Dolan, Terence P. and Diarmuid Ó Muirithe (eds.) 1996 [1979]. The Dialect of Forth and Bargy. Second edition. Dublin: Four Courts Press. Dossena, Marina 2003. ‘Scots’, in: Deumert and Vandenbussche (eds.), pp. 383–404. 2004. ‘Towards a corpus of nineteenth-century Scottish correspondence’, Linguistica e Filologia 18: 195 –214. 2005. Scotticisms in Grammar and Vocabulary. Edinburgh: John Donald. 2006a. ‘Stance and authority in nineteenth-century bank correspondence – A case study’, in: Dossena and Fitzmaurice (eds.), pp. 175–192. 2006b. ‘Forms of self-representation in nineteenth-century business letters’, in: Dossena and Taavitsainen (eds.), pp. 173–190. 2006c. ‘Doing business in nineteenth-century Scotland: Expressing authority, conveying stance’, Orr (ed.), pp. 246–253. 2008a. ‘Prescriptivism a century ago: Business correspondence taught to emigrants – A case study’, in: Beal, Nocera and Sturiale (eds.), pp. 41–58. 2008b. ‘“We beg leave to refer to your decision”. Pragmatic traits of nineteenthcentury business correspondence’, in: Dossena and Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.), pp. 235–255. 2010. ‘Building trust through (self-)appraisal in nineteenth-century business correspondence’, in: Pahta et al. (eds.), pp. 191–209. Dossena, Marina and Charles Jones (eds.) 2007. Insights into Late Modern English. Second edition. Bern: Peter Lang. Dossena, Marina and Susan Fitzmaurice (eds.) 2006. Business and Official Correspondence: Historical Investigations. Bern: Peter Lang. Dossena, Marina and Andreas H. Jucker (eds.) 2007. (R)evolutions in Evaluation. Special issue of Textus 20.1. Genoa: Tilgher. Dossena, Marina and Roger Lass (eds.) 2004. Methods and Data in English Historical Dialectology. Linguistic Insights, Studies in Language and Communication, Volume 16. Bern: Peter Lang.
References
379
Dossena, Marina and Irma Taavitsainen (eds.) 2006. Diachronic Perspectives on Domain-Specific English. Bern: Peter Lang. Dossena, Marina and Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.) 2008. Studies in Late Modern English Correspondence: Methodology and Data. Bern: Peter Lang. Dowty, David R., Lauri Karttunen and Arnold M. Zwicky (eds.) 1985. Natural Language Parsing. Psychological, Computational, and Theoretical Perspectives. Cambridge University Press. Dryer, Matthew S. 1980. ‘The positional tendencies of sentential noun phrases in Universal Grammar’, Canadian Journal of Linguistics 25: 123 –195. Duffley, Patrick J. 1992. The English Infinitive. London: Longman. 2003. ‘The gerund and the to-infinitive as subject’, Journal of English Linguistics 31: 324 –352. 2006. The English Gerund-Participle. A Comparison with the Infinitive. Bern: Peter Lang. Duffy, Sean et al. (eds.) 1997. An Atlas of Irish History. Dublin: Gill and Macmillan. Duggan, George C. 1969 [1937]. The Stage Irishman: A History of the Irish Play and Stage Characters from Earliest Times. Dublin and Cork/London: Talbot Press. Dury, Richard 2006. ‘A Corpus of Nineteenth-century Business Correspondence: Methodology of transcription’, in: Dossena and Fitzmaurice (eds.), pp. 193–205. 2008. ‘Handwriting and the linguistic study of letters’, in: Dossena and TiekenBoon van Ostade (eds.). pp. 113–135. Dury, Richard, Maurizio Gotti and Marina Dossena (eds.) 2008. Selected Papers from the Fourteenth International Conference on English Historical Linguistics (ICEHL 14), Bergamo, 21–25 August 2006. Volume 2: Lexical and Semantic Change. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Duszak, Anna and Urszula Okulska (eds.) forthcoming. Crossing Age in Language and Culture. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Dwyer, John and Richard B. Sher (eds.) 1993. Sociability and Society in Eighteenth Century Scotland. Edinburgh: Mercat Press. Earle, Peter 1989. The Making of the English Middle Class: Business, Society and Family Life in London 1660–1730. Berkeley: University of California Press. Eaves, T. C. Duncan and Ben D. Kimpel 1967. ‘Richardson’s revisions of Pamela’, Studies in Bibliography 20 : 61–88. Eddy, Donald E. (ed.) 1993. Sale Catalogues of the Libraries of Samuel Johnson, Hester Lynch Thrale (Mrs. Piozzi) and James Boswell. New Castle, Delaware: Oak Knoll Books. Ehrenpreis, Irvin and Robert Halsband (eds.) 1969. The Lady of Letters in the Eighteenth Century. Los Angeles: William Andrews Clark Memorial Library, UCLA. Eitner, Walter H. 1991. ‘Affirmative “any more” in present-day American English’, in: Trudgill and Chambers (eds.), pp. 267–272. Elspaß, Stephan, Nils Langer, Joachim Scharloth and Wim Vandenbussche (eds.) 2007. Germanic Language Histories ‘From Below’ (1700–2000). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Emsley, Bert 1933. ‘James Buchanan and the eighteenth-century regulation of English usage’, Publications of the Modern Languages Association 18: 1154 –1166.
380 References Eustance, Sinclair S. 1969. ‘The meaning of the paleotype in A. J. Ellis’s On Early English Pronunciation 1869–89’, Transactions of the Philological Society 1969: 31–79. Evans, G. Blakemore (ed.) 1974. The Riverside Shakespeare. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company. Ezell, Margaret 1999. Social Authorship and the Advent of Print. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press. Facchinetti, Roberta and Matti Rissanen (eds.) 2006. Corpus-Based Studies of Diachronic English. Bern: Peter Lang. Fairman, Tony 2006. ‘Words in English record office documents of the early 1800s’, in: Kytö, Rydén and Smitterberg (eds.), pp. 56–88. 2007. ‘Letters of the English labouring class and the English language, 1800– 1834’, in: Dossena and Jones (eds.), pp. 265–282. Fanego, Teresa 1992. Infinitive Complements in Shakespeare’s English. Santiago de Compostela: Universidad de Santiago de Compostela. 1996a. ‘The development of gerunds as objects of subject-control verbs in English (1400–1760)’, Diachronica 13: 29–62. 1996b. ‘The gerund in Early Modern English: Evidence from the Helsinki Corpus’, Folia Linguistica Historica 17: 97–152. 1996c. ‘On the historical development of English retrospective verbs’, Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 97: 71–79. 1997. ‘On patterns of complementation with verbs of effort’, English Studies 78: 60 –67. 2004a. ‘On reanalysis and actualization in syntactic change: The rise and development of English verbal gerunds’, Diachronica 21: 5 –55. 2004b. ‘Some strategies for coding sentential subjects in English: From exaptation to grammaticalization’, Studies in Language 28: 321–361. 2007. ‘Drift and the development of sentential complements in British and American English from 1700 to the present day’, in: Pérez-Guerra, GonzálezÁlvarez, Bueno-Alonso and Rama-Martínez (eds.), pp. 161–235. Fasold, Ralph W. and Deborah Schriffin (eds.) 1989. Language Change and Variation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Feagin, Crawford 1979. Variation and Change in Alabama English. A Sociolinguistic Study of the White Community. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. Feather, John 1985. The Provincial Book Trade in Eighteenth-Century England. Cambridge University Press. Fennell, Barbara A. and Ronald R. Butters 1996. ‘Historical and contemporary distribution of double modals in English’, in: Schneider (ed.), pp. 265–288. Fens-de Zeeuw, Lyda 2008. ‘The letter-writing manual in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries: From polite to practical’, in: Dossena and Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.), pp. 163–192. Fenton, James 2000 [1995]. The Hamely Tongue. A Personal Record of Ulster-Scots in County Antrim. Second edition. Newtownards: Ulster-Scots Academic Press.
References
381
Fenton, Alexander and Donald A. McDonald (eds.) 1994. Studies in Scots and Gaelic. Proceedings of the Third International Conference on the Languages of Scotland. Edinburgh: Canongate Press. Ferdinand, Christine Y. 1997. Benjamin Collins and the Provincial Newspaper Trade in the Eighteenth Century. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Finegan, Edward 1992. ‘Style and standardization in England: 1700−1900’, in: Machan and Scott (eds.), pp. 103–130. 1998. ‘English grammar and usage’, in: Romaine (ed.), pp. 536–588. Fischer, Olga 1989. ‘The origin and spread of the accusative and infinitive construction in English’, Folia Linguistica Historica 8: 143 –217. 1992. ‘Syntax’, in: Blake (ed.), pp. 207–408. Fischer, Roswitha 2007. ‘To boldly split the infinitive – or not? Prescriptive traditions and current English usage’, in: Elspaß, Langer, Scharloth and Vandenbussche (eds.), pp. 259–274. Fisiak, Jacek (ed.) 1997. Studies in Middle English. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Fitzmaurice, Susan 1998. ‘The commerce of language in the pursuit of politeness in eighteenth-century England’, English Studies 79.4: 309–328. 2000a. ‘Coalitions and the investigation of social influence in linguistic history’, European Journal of English Studies 4.3: 265 –276. 2000b. ‘The Spectator, the politics of social networks, and language standardisation in eighteenth-century England’, in: Wright (ed.), pp. 195–218. 2004. ‘Orality, standardization, and the effects of print publication on the look of standard English in the eighteenth century’, in: Dossena and Lass (eds.), pp. 351–383. 2006. ‘Diplomatic business: Information, power, and persuasion in Late Modern English diplomatic correspondence’, in: Dossena and Fitzmaurice (eds.), pp. 77–106. 2008. ‘Epistolary identity: Convention and idiosyncrasy in Late Modern English letters’, in: Dossena and Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.), pp. 77–112. Fitzmaurice, Susan and Donka Minkova (eds.) 2008. Studies in the History of the English Language IV: Empirical and Analytical Advances in the Study of English Language Change. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Fitzmaurice, Susan and Irma Taavitsainen (eds.) 2007. Methodological Issues in Historical Pragmatics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, Fludernik, Monika 2007. Review of Susan Fitzmaurice, The Familiar Letter in Early Modern English: A Pragmatic Approach, 2002. Letter Writing, ed. by Terttu Nevalainen and Sanna-Kaisa Tanskanen. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 155–159. [Originally published in 2004 in Journal of Historical Pragmatics 5.2: 337–341]. Fodor, Janet Dean 1978. ‘Parsing strategies and constraints on transformations’, Linguistic Inquiry 8: 425 –504. 1984. ‘Constraints on gaps: Is the parser a significant influence?’, in: Butterworth, Comrie and Dahl (eds.), pp. 9–34. Fodor, Jerry Alan and Marrill Garrett 1967. ‘Some syntactic determinants of sentential complexity’, Perception and Psychophysics 2: 289–296. Foster, Roy F. 1988. Modern Ireland 1600–1972. Harmondsworth: Penguin.
382 References Francis, W. Nelson 1983. Dialectology. An Introduction. London/New York: Longman. Frazier, Lyn 1985. ‘Syntactic complexity’, in: Dowty, Karttunen and Zwicky (eds.), pp. 129–189. Fries, Udo and Peter Schneider 2000. ‘ZEN: Preparing the Zurich English Newspaper Corpus’, in: Ungerer (ed.), pp. 3–24. Gal, Susan 1978. ‘Peasant men can’t get wives: Language change and roles in a bilingual community’, Language in Society 7.1: 1–16. Gillingham, John 2002. ‘From civilitas to civility: Codes of manners in medieval and early modern England’, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society 12: 267–289. Goatly, Andrew 1997. The Language of Metaphors. London: Routledge. González-Díaz, Victorina 2008. ‘On normative grammarians and the double marking of degree’, in Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 289–309. González-Díaz, Victorina and Anita Auer 2005. ‘Eighteenth-century prescriptivism in English: a re-evaluation of its effects on actual language usage’, Multilingua 24: 317–341. Gorji, Mina (ed.) 2007. Rude Britannia. London: Routledge. Görlach, Manfred 1999a. English in Nineteenth-Century England: An Introduction. Cambridge University Press. 1999b. ‘Regional and social variation’, in: Lass (ed.), pp. 459–538. 2001. Eighteenth-Century English. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. Görlach, Manfred (ed.) 1985. Focus on Scotland. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Gotti, Maurizio 2006. ‘Communal correspondence in Early Modern English: The Philosophical Transactions network’, in: Dossena and Fitzmaurice (eds.), pp. 17–46. Granath, Solveig, June Millander and Elizabeth Wennö (eds.) 2005. The Power of Words. Karlstad: Karlstads Universitet. Greenberg, Joseph H. 1966. Language Universals, with Special Reference to Feature Hierarchies. The Hague: Mouton. Green, Lisa J. 2002. African American English. A Linguistic Introduction. Cambridge University Press. Gretsch, Mechthild 2007. ‘Elstob, Elizabeth (1683–1756)’, in: Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, ed. by Henry C. G. Matthew and Brian Harrison. Oxford University Press. www.oxforddnb.com/view/article/11435 Grice, Herbert Paul 1975. ‘Logic and conversation’, in: Cole and Morgan (eds.), pp. 41–58. Guest, Harriet 2000. Small Change. Women, Learning, Patriotism 1750–1810. University of Chicago Press. Häcker, Martina 2006. ‘An Englishman’s vindication of Scots: James Adams (1737–1802) – Jesuit, teacher and linguist’ Historiographia Linguistica 33.1: 85 –108. Haiman, John 1983. ‘Iconic and economic motivation’, Language 59: 781–819. 1985. Natural Syntax. Cambridge University Press. Halsband, Robert 1956. The Life of Lady Mary Wortley Montagu. Oxford: Clarendon Press. 1969. ‘Ladies of Letters in the Eighteenth Century’, in: Ehrenpreis and Halsband (eds.), pp. 31–51.
References
383
Halsband, Robert (ed.) 1965–7. The Complete Letters of Lady Mary Wortley Montagu. Vol 1: 1965, Vol 2: 1966, Vol. 3: 1967. Oxford University Press. Hans, Nicholas 1951. New Trends in Education in the Eighteenth Century. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul. Harris, John 1984. ‘English in the North of Ireland’, in: Trudgill (ed.), pp. 115–134. 1993. ‘The grammar of Irish English’, in: Milroy and Milroy (eds.), pp. 139–186. Harris, José (ed.) 2003. Civil Society in British History: Ideas, Identities, Institutions. Oxford University Press. Harris, Michael and Alan Lee (eds.) 1986. The Press in English Society from the Seventeenth to the Nineteenth Century. London: Associated Universities Press. Hartman, Reinhard K. K. (ed.) 1986. The History of Lexicography. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Harvey, Karen 2005. ‘The history of masculinity, circa 1650–1800’, Journal of British Studies 44: 296 –311. Haspelmath, Martin 1999. ‘Optimality and diachronic adaptation’, Zeitschrift für Sprachwissenschaft 18: 180 –205. Haugen, Einar 1972. ‘Dialect, language, nation’ in Pride and Holmes (eds.), pp. 97–111. Hawkins, John A. 1994. A Performance Theory of Order and Constituency. Cambridge University Press. 2004. Efficiency and Complexity in Grammars. Oxford University Press. Hemlow, Joyce (ed.) 1973. The Journals and Letters of Fanny Burney (Madame D’Arblay): Volume 4. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Hemlow, Joyce 1958. The History of Fanny Burney. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Henry, Alison 1995. Belfast English and Standard English. Dialect Variation and Parameter Setting. Oxford University Press. Hepworth, Brian 1978. Robert Lowth. Boston: Twayne Publishers. Herrmann, Tanja 2003. Relative Clauses in Dialects of English: A Typological Approach. PhD thesis. University of Freiburg. www.freidok.uni-freiburg.de/ volltexte/830 2005. ‘Relative clauses in English dialects of the British Isles’, in: Kortmann, Herrmann, Pietsch and Wagner, pp. 21–123. Heuser, Wilhelm 1904. Die Kildare-Gedichte. Die ältesten mittelenglischen Denkmäler in anglo-irischer Überlieferung. [The Kildare Poems. The oldest Middle English documents attested in Anglo-Irish] Bonner Beiträge zur Anglistik [Bonn Contributions to English Studies] Volume 14. Bonn: Hanstein. Hewett, Waterman T. 1904. ‘The historical use of relative pronouns in English literature’, Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 43: 278 –289. Hewitt, John Harold 1974. Rhyming Weavers and Other Country Poets of Antrim and Down. Belfast: Blackstaff Press. Hickey, Raymond 1986. ‘The interrelationship of epenthesis and syncope, evidence from Irish and Dutch’ Lingua 65: 239–259. 1997. ‘Assessing the relative status of languages in medieval Ireland’, in: Fisiak (ed.), pp. 181–205. 1999. ‘Ireland as a linguistic area’, in: Mallory (ed.), pp. 36–53. 2002. A Source Book for Irish English. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. 2003. Corpus Presenter. Processing Software for Language Analysis. Including A Corpus of Irish English. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
384 References 2004. A Sound Atlas of Irish English. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter. 2005. Dublin English. Evolution and Change. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. 2007. Irish English. History and Present-day Forms. Cambridge University Press. 2008a. ‘Feature loss in nineteenth century Irish English’, in: Nevalainen, Taavitsainen, Pahta and Korhonen (eds.), pp. 229–243. 2008b. ‘“What strikes the ear” Thomas Sheridan and regional pronunciation’, in: Fitzmaurice and Minkova (eds.), pp. 385–411. Hickey, Raymond (ed.) 2004. Legacies of Colonial English. Cambridge University Press. Hilton, Mary 2007. Women and the Shaping of the Nation’s Young. Education and Public Doctrine in Britain 1750–1850. Hampshire, UK and Burlington, VT: Ashgate. Hilton, Mary and Jill Shefrin (eds.) 2009. Educating the Child in Enlightenment Britain: Beliefs, Cultures, Practices. Aldershot, UK and Burlington, VT: Ashgate. Hiltunen, Risto, and Janne Skaffari (eds.) 2003. Discourse Perspectives on English. Medieval to Modern. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Hodson, Jane 2006. ‘The problem of Joseph Priestley’s prescriptivism’, Historiographia Linguistica 33.1/2: 57–84. 2008. ‘Joseph Priestley’s two Rudiments of English Grammar: 1761 and 1768’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 177–189. Hofland, Knut, Anne Lindebjerg and Jørn Thunestvedt (eds.) 1999. ICAME Collection of English Language Corpora. Second edition. Bergen: University of Bergen, The HIT Centre. Hogan, James Jeremiah 1927. The English Language in Ireland. Dublin: Educational Company of Ireland. Hogg, Richard M. (ed.) 1992. The Cambridge History of the English Language. Vol. 1: The Beginnings to 1066. Cambridge University Press. Holmberg, Borje 1964. On the Concept of Standard English and the History of Modern English Pronunciation. Lund: Gleerup. Holmes, Janet 1984. ‘Modifying illocutionary force’, Journal of Pragmatics 8: 345 –365. 1988. ‘Paying compliments: A sex preferential politeness strategy’, Journal of Pragmatics 12.4: 445 –465. 1995. Women, Men and Politeness. London: Longman. Honegger, Thomas 2003. ‘ “And if ye wol nat so, my lady sweete, thanne preye I thee, […].”: Forms of address in Chaucer’s Knight’s Tale’, in: Taavitsainen and Jucker (eds.), pp. 61–84. Honoré, Jean 1965. ‘Charles Gildon et la Grammaire de Brightland’ [Charles Gildon and the grammar of Brightland], Études Anglaises 18.2: 145 –165. Horn, Wilhelm and Martin Lehnert 1954. Laut und Leben. Englische Lautgeschichte der neueren Zeit (1400–1950) [Sound and life. The history of English sounds in the early modern period (1400–1950)]. 2 vols. Berlin: Deutscher Verlag der Wissenschaften. Houston, Anne 1989. ‘The English gerund: Syntactic change and discourse function’, in: Fasold and Schriffin (eds.), pp. 173–196. Howell, Wilbur Samuel 1971. ‘Sheridan. Minor actor as major elocutionist’, in: Howell (ed.), pp. 214–243.
References
385
Howell, Wilbur Samuel (ed.) 1971. Eighteenth Century British Logic and Rhetoric. Princeton, NJ: University Press. Huddleston, Rodney and Geoffrey K. Pullum et al. 2002. The Cambridge Grammar of the English Language. Cambridge University Press. Hughes, Arthur and Peter Trudgill 1996. English Accents and Dialects: An Introduction to Social and Regional Varieties of English in the British Isles. Third edition. London: Edward Arnold. Hughes, Geoffrey 1991. Swearing. A Social History of Foul Language, Oaths and Profanity in English. Oxford: Blackwell. Hussey, Stanley 1995. The English Language. Structure and Development. London: Longman. Hyde, Mary 1977. The Thrales of Streatham Park. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. Hyland, P. B. J. 1986. ‘Liberty and libel: Government and the press during the succession crisis in Britain, 1712–1716’, The English Historical Review 101(401): 863–888. Ihalainen, Ossi 1994. ‘The dialects of England since 1776’, in: Burchfield (ed.), pp. 197–274. Ilchester, Earl of 1908. The Journal of Elizabeth, Lady Holland (1791–1811). Volume 1. London: Longmans. Immel, Andrea 1997. ‘“Mistress of Infantine Language”: Lady Ellenor Fenn, her Set of Toys, and the “Education of Each Moment.”’ Children’s Literature 25: 214 –228. Immel, Andrea and Michael Witmore (eds.) 2006. Childhood and Children’s Books in Early Modern Europe. New York: Routledge. Isaac, Peter 2004a. ‘Fisher, Anne (1719–1778)’, in: Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, ed. by H. C. G. Matthew and Brian Harrison. Oxford University Press. www.oxforddnb.com/view/article/45847 2004b. ‘Slack, Thomas (baptised 1723, died 1784)’, in: Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, ed. by H. C. G. Matthew and Brian Harrison. Oxford University Press. www.oxforddnb.com/view/article/64284 Iyeiri, Yoko 2001. Negative Constructions in Middle English. Fukuoka: Kyushu University Press. Iyeiri, Yoko (ed.) 2005. Aspects of English Negation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Jackendoff, Ray S. 1977. X-bar Syntax: A Study of Phrase Structure. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Jackson, Heather J. 2001. Marginalia: Readers Writing in Books. New Haven and London: Yale University Press. Jacobsson, Mattias 2002. ‘“Thank you” and “thanks” in Early Modern English’, ICAME Journal 26: 63 –80. Jespersen, Otto 1961. A Modern English Grammar on Historical Principles [1922–49]. 7 vols. London: George Allen and Unwin. Johansson, Christine 2006. ‘Relativizers in nineteenth-century English’, in: Kytö, Rydén and Smitterberg (eds.), pp 136–182. Johns, Anne M. and John M. Swales 2002. ‘Literacy and disciplinary perspectives: Opening and closing perspectives’, Journal of English for Academic Purposes 1: 13–28. Johnson, Sally, Jonathan Culpeper and Stephanie Suhr 2003. ‘From “Politically correct councillors” to “Blairite nonsense”: Discourses of “political correctness” in three British newspapers’, Discourse and Society 14.1: 29–47.
386 References Johnston, Edith Mary 1994 [1974]. Eighteenth Century Ireland. The Long Peace. The New Gill History of Ireland, Volume 4. Dublin: Gill and Macmillan. Johnston, Freya 2005. Samuel Johnson and the Art of Sinking. Oxford University Press. Johnston, Paul A. 1984. ‘Variation in the Standard Scottish English of Morningside’, English World Wide 2: 133–185. 1985. ‘The rise and fall of the Morningside/Kelvinside accent,’ in Görlach (ed.), pp. 37–56. Jones, Absolom and Richard Allen 1993. A Narrative of the Proceedings of the Black People, During the Late Awful Calamity in Philadelphia (1794). Philadelphia: Independence National Historical Park. Jones, Bernard 1996. ‘The reception of Lindley Murray’s English Grammar’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 63–80. Jones, Charles. 1993. ‘Scottish Standard English in the late eighteenth century’, Transactions of the Philological Society 91: 95 –131. 1994. ‘Alexander Geddes. An eighteenth-century Scots orthoepist and dialectologist’, Folia Linguistica Historica 17: 71–103. 2006. English Pronunciation in the Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Jones, Charles (ed.) 1991. A Treatise on the Provincial Dialect of Scotland by Sylvester Douglas. Edinburgh University Press. Jones, Charles (ed.) 1997. The Edinburgh History of the Scots Language. Edinburgh University Press. Jones, Vivien (ed.) 2000. Women and Literature in Britain 1700–1800. Cambridge University Press. Joyce, Patrick Weston 1979 [1910]. English as we Speak it in Ireland. Dublin: Wolfhound Press. Jucker, Andreas H. 2006a. ‘“But ‘tis believed that…”: Speech and thought presentation in Early English newspapers’, in: Brownlees (ed.), pp. 105–125. 2006b. ‘“Thou art so loothly and so oold also”: The use of ye and thou in Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales’, Anglistik 17.2: 57–72. 2008 ‘Politeness in the history of English’, in: Dury, Gotti and Dossena (eds.), pp. 3–29. Jucker, Andreas H. and Irma Taavitsainen 2000. ‘Diachronic speech act analysis: Insults from flyting to flaming’, Journal of Historical Pragmatics 1.1: 67–95. Jucker, Andreas H. (ed.) 1995. Historical Pragmatics. Pragmatic Developments in the History of English. Pragmatics and Beyond, New Series, 35. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Jucker, Andreas H. Gerd Fritz and Franz Lebsanft (eds.) 1999. Historical Dialogue Analysis. Pragmatics and Beyond New Series 66. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Jucker, Andreas H. and Irma Taavitsainen (eds.) 2008. Speech Acts in the History of English. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Kaltenböck, Gunther 2004. ‘Using non-extraposition in spoken and written texts. A functional perspective’, in: Aijmer and Stenström (eds.), pp. 219–242.
References
387
Kapel, Scott E. 1995, 1996. ‘Mistakes, fallacies, and irresponsibilities of prescriptive grammar’ (or: ‘Bishop Lowth was a fool’), www.newdream.net/~scully/toelw/ Lowth.htm (accessed May 2007). Kastovsky, Dieter, Gunther Kaltenböck and Susanne Reichl (eds.) 2002. Proceedings of the Anglistentag 2001. Trier: Wissenschaftlicher Verlag. Kemenade, Ans van 2000. Ontkenning Ontkend. [Negation negated] Inaugural lecture, Katholieke Universiteit Nijmegen. Kemp, J. Alan 1996. ‘John Wallis’, in: Stammerjohann (ed.), pp. 989–993. Kiberd, Declan 1980. ‘The fall of the stage Irishman’, in: Schleifer (ed.), pp. 39–60. Kienpointer, Manfred (ed.) 1999. Ideologies of Politeness. Special issue of Pragmatics 9.1. Kiparsky, Paul and Carol Kiparsky 1971. ‘Fact’, in: Steinberg and Jakobovits (eds.), pp. 345–369. Kirk, John M. and Dónall Ó Baoill (eds.) 2001. Language Links: the Languages of Scotland and Ireland. Belfast Studies in Language, Culture and Politics, 2. Belfast: Queen’s University. Kjellmer, Göran 2006. ‘Panchrony in linguistic change: The case of courtesy’, in: Facchinetti and Rissanen (eds.), pp. 289–300. Klein, Lawrence E. 1994a. Shaftsbury and the Culture of Politeness. Moral Discourse and Cultural Politics in Early Eighteenth-Century England. Cambridge University Press. 1994b. ‘ “Politeness” as linguistic ideology in late seventeenth- and eighteenthcentury England’, in: Stein and Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.), pp. 31–50. 1995. ‘Politeness for plebes: Consumption and social identity in early eighteenthcentury England’, in: Bermingham and Brewer (eds.), pp. 362–382. 2002. ‘Politeness and the interpretation of the British eighteenth century’, The Historical Journal 45.4: 869–898. Klemola, Juhani 2002. ‘Continuity and change in dialect morphosyntax’, in: Kastovsky, Kaltenböck and Reichl (eds.), pp. 47–56. Kniezsa, Veronika 1985. ‘Jonathan Swift’s English’, in: Siegmund-Schulze (ed.), pp. 116–124. Knight, Charles A. 1986. ‘Bibliography and the shape of the literary periodical in the early eighteenth century’, The Library, Sixth series, 8.3: 232–248. Kohnen, Thomas. 2007. ‘Text types and the methodology of diachronic speech act analysis’, in: Fitzmaurice and Taavitsainen (eds.), pp. 139–166. Kohnen, Thomas 2008. ‘Linguistic politeness in Anglo-Saxon England? A study of Old English address terms’, Journal of Historical Pragmatics 9.1: 140 –158. Koivisto-Alanko, Päivi and Heli Tissari 2006. ‘Sense and sensibility: Rational thought versus emotion in metaphorical language’, in: Stefanowitsch and Gries (eds.), pp. 191–213. Kolb, Gwin J. and Robert DeMaria, Jr. (eds.) 2005. Johnson on the English Language. New Haven: Yale University Press. Koller, Veronika 2004. Metaphor and Gender in Business Media Discourse: A Critical Cognitive Study. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Kopytko, Roman 1993. Polite Discourse in Shakespeare’s English. Pozna : Wydawnictwo Naukowe Uniwersytetu im. Adam Mickiewicza w Poznaniu. 1995. ‘Linguistic politeness strategies in Shakespeare’s plays’, in: Jucker (ed.), pp. 515–540.
388 References Kortmann, Bernd and Benedikt Szmrecsanyi 2004. ‘Global synopsis: morphological and syntactic variation in English’, in: Kortmann and Schneider (eds.), pp. 1142–1202. Kortmann, Bernd and Susanne Wagner 2005. ‘The Freiburg English Dialect Project and Corpus’, in: Kortmann, Herrmann, Pietsch and Wagner, pp. 1–20. Kortmann, Bernd, Tanja Herrmann, Lukas Pietsch and Susanne Wagner 2005. A Comparative Grammar of British English Dialects: Agreement, Gender, Relative Clauses. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Kortmann, Bernd and Edgar W. Schneider (eds.) 2004. A Handbook of Varieties of English. Vol. 1: Phonology, Vol. 2: Morphology and Syntax. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter [Reprinted as 4 vols., 2008]. Kosok, Heinz 1990. Geschichte der anglo-irischen Literatur. [A history of Anglo-Irish literature] Berlin: Erich Schmidt. Kövecses, Zoltán 1990. Emotion Concepts. Berlin: Springer. 1995. ‘American friendship and the scope of metaphor’, Cognitive Linguistics 6.4: 315 –346. 2000. Metaphor and Emotion: Language, Culture and Body in Human Feeling. Cambridge University Press. 2005. Metaphor in Culture: Universality and Variation. Cambridge University Press. Kruisinga, Etsko 1905. A Grammar of the Dialect of West Somersetshire: Descriptive and Historical. Bonner Beiträge zur Anglistik, Volume 18. Bonn: Hanstein. Kytö, Merja 1996. Manual to the Diachronic Part of the Helsinki Corpus of English Texts: Coding Conventions and Lists of Source Texts. Third edition. Helsinki: Department of English, University of Helsinki. 2006. ‘Introduction: Exploring nineteenth century English – past and present perspectives’, in: Kytö, Rydén and Smitterberg (eds.), pp. 1–16. Kytö, Merja and Suzanne Romaine 2006. ‘Adjective comparison in nineteenth-century English’, in: Kytö, Rydén and Smitterberg (eds.), pp 194–214. Kytö, Merja, Mats Rydén and Erik Smitterberg (eds.) 2006. Nineteenth-Century English: Stability and Change. Cambridge University Press. Labov, William 1978. Sociolinguistic Patterns. Oxford: Blackwell. Lakoff, George 1987. Women, Fire, and Dangerous Things: What Categories Reveal about the Mind. University of Chicago Press. Lakoff, George and Mark Johnson 1980. Metaphors We Live By. University of Chicago Press. 1999. Philosophy in the Flesh: The Embodied Mind and Its Challenge to Western Thought. New York: Basic Books. Landau, Sydney I. 2001. Dictionaries: The Art and Craft of Lexicography. Cambridge University Press. Langford, Paul 1989. A Polite and Commercial People: England, 1727–1783. Oxford: Clarendon Press. 2002. ‘The uses of eighteenth-century politeness’, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society 12: 311–331. Lansdowne, Marquis of 1932. Johnson and Queeney. Letters from Dr. Johnson to Queeney Thrale from the Bowood Papers. London: Casell and Co. Ltd. Lass, Roger 1984. Phonology. Cambridge University Press. 1987. The Shape of English. Structure and History. London: Dent.
References
389
1999. ‘Phonology and morphology’, in Lass (ed.), pp. 56–186. 2004. ‘Ut custodiant litteras’: Editions, corpora and witnesshood’, in: Dossena and Lass (eds.), pp. 21–50. Lass, Roger (ed.) 1999. The Cambridge History of the English Language. Volume 3: 1476–1776. Cambridge University Press. Laws, Emma 2002. ‘Miniature libraries from the children’s books collections’, Exhibition at the National Art Library, Victoria and Albert Museum, London, May 20-November 17, 2002. www.nal.vam.ac.uk/exhibits/miniaturelibraries Leech, Geoffrey N. 1983. Principles of Pragmatics. London: Longman. Lefanu, William (ed.) 1960. Betsy Sheridan’s Journal. Letters from Sheridan’s Sister. Reprinted 1986. Oxford University Press. Legg, Marie-Louise (ed.) 1996. The Synge Letters. Bishop Edward Synge to his Daughter Alicia. Roscommon to Dublin 1746−1752. Dublin: The Lilliput Press. Lehmann, Hans Martin 2002. ‘Zero subject relative constructions in American and British English’, in: Peters, Collins and Smith (eds.), pp. 163–177. Lehmann, Hans Martin, Caren auf dem Keller und Beni Ruef 2006. ‘ZEN Corpus 1.0.’, in: Facchinetti and Rissanen (eds.), pp. 135–155. Lelièvre, F. J. 1956. ‘Maittaire and the classics in eighteenth-century Britain’, The Phoenix: The Journal of the Classical Association of Canada 10.3 : 103 –115. Leonard, S. A. 1929. The Doctrine of Correctness in English Usage, 1700−1800. Madison: University of Wisconsin. Letter to a School-Master in the Country, from his Friend in Town, relative to Mr. Sheridan’s Education 1758. Dublin: n. p. Levine, Joseph M. 1991. The Battle of the Books: History and Literature in the Augustan Age. Ithaca: Cornell University Press. Levinson, Stephen 2000. Presumptive Meanings. The Theory of Generalized Conversational Implicature. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Los, Bettelou 2005. The Rise of the To-Infinitive. Oxford University Press. Luce, R. Duncan, Robert R. Bush and Eugene Galanter (eds.) 1963. Handbook of Mathematical Psychology, Volume 2. New York: Wiley. Lydon, James 1998. The Making of Ireland. From Ancient Times to the Present. London: Routledge. Lynch, John and Anne McDermott 2005. Anniversary Essays on Johnson’s Dictionary. Cambridge University Press. Macafee, Caroline and Iseabail Macleod (eds.) 1987. The Nuttis Schell: Essays on the Scots Language. Aberdeen University Press. Machan, Tim William and Charles T. Scott (eds.) 1992. English in its Social Contexts. New York: Oxford University Press. MacMahon, Michael K. C. 1998. ‘Phonology’, in: Romaine (ed.), pp. 373–535. 2002. ‘Pronunciation in the OED’, in: Mugglestone (ed.), pp 172–188. Mair, Christian 1990. Infinitival Complement Clauses in English. A Study of Syntax in Discourse. Cambridge University Press. 2006. Twentieth-Century English: History, Variation and Standardization. Cambridge University Press. Mair, Christian and Geoffrey Leech. 2006. ‘Current changes in English syntax’, in: Aarts and McMahon (eds.), pp. 318–342.
390
References
Mäkinen, Martti 2006. ‘Dissemination of textual material and second-generation corpora: Finding intertexts in early English medical writing’, in: Dossena and Taavitsainen (eds.), pp. 191–205. Mallory, James P. (ed.) 1999. Language in Ulster. Special issue of Ulster Folklife 45. Manning, S. (ed.) 2007. The Edinburgh History of Scottish Literature. Vol. 3. Edinburgh University Press. Marcus, G. F., Steven Pinker, M. Ullman, M. Hollander, T. J. Rosen and F. Xu 1992. Overregularization in Language Acquisition, Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, 57.4. Marsden, Peter V. and Noah E. Friedkin 1994. ‘Network studies of social influence’, in: Wasserman and Galaskiewicz (eds.), pp. 3–25. Martin, James R. and Peter P. R. White 2005. The Language of Evaluation: Appraisal in English. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Martin, Joanna 2004. Wives and Daughters. Women and Children in the Georgian Country House. London: Hambledon and London. Martin, Stefan and Walt Wolfram 1998. ‘The sentence in African-American vernacular English’, in: Mufwene, Rickford, Bailey and Baugh (eds.), pp. 11–36. Maslen, Robert J. C., Anna L. Theakston, Elena V. M. Lieven and Michael Tomasello 2004. ‘A dense corpus study of past tense and plural overregularization in English’, Journal of Speech, Language, and Hearing Research 47: 1319–1333. Maxted, Ian 2004. ‘Newbery, John (baptised 1713, died 1767)’, in: Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, ed. Henry C. G. Matthew and Brian Harrison. Oxford University Press. www.oxforddnb.com/view/article/19978 McArthur, Tom 1992. Oxford Companion to the English Language. Oxford University Press. McCafferty, Kevin 2003. ‘The Northern Subject Rule in Ulster: How Scots, how English?’, Language Variation and Change 15: 105 –139. McCarthy, William 2006. ‘Performance, pedagogy and politics. Mrs. Thrale, Mrs. Barbauld, Monsieur Itard’, in: Immel and Witmore (eds.), pp. 261–276. McClure, J. Derrick 1994. ‘English in Scotland’, in: Burchfield (ed.), pp. 23–93. McEnery, Tony 2006. ‘Keywords and moral panics: Mary Whitehouse and media censorship’, Paper presented at Word Frequency and Keyword Extraction. AHRC ICT Methods Network Expert Seminar on Linguistics, 8 September, 2006. Lancaster University. McIntosh, Angus, Michael Samuels and Michael Benskin 1986. A Linguistic Atlas of Late Mediæval English. 4 vols. Aberdeen University Press. McIntosh, Carey 1998. The Evolution of English Prose 1700–1900. Style, Politeness and Print Culture. Cambridge University Press. McIntyre, Ian 1999. Garrick. London: Allen Lane. Meurman-Solin, Anneli 2001. ‘Structured text corpora in the study of language variation and change’, Literary and Linguistic Computing 16.1: 5 –27. Michael, Ian 1970. English Grammatical Categories and the Tradition to 1800. Cambridge University Press. 1987. The Teaching of English From the Sixteenth Century to 1870. Cambridge University Press. Miller, D. Gary 2002. Nonfinite Structures in Theory and Change. Oxford University Press.
References
391
Miller, George A. and Noam Chomsky 1963. ‘Finitary models of language users’, in: Luce, Bush and Galanter (eds.), pp. 419–492. Miller, Jim 1993. ‘The grammar of Scottish English’, in: Milroy and Milroy (eds.), pp. 99–138. Miller, Kerby 1985. Emigrants and Exiles: Ireland and the Irish Exodus to North America. Oxford University Press. Miller, Kerby and Paul Wagner 1994. Out of Ireland. The Story of Irish Emigration to America. London: Aurum Press. Milroy, James 1981. Regional Accents of English: Belfast. Belfast: Blackstaff. Milroy, James and John Harris 1980. ‘When is a merger not a merger? The meat/ mate problem in Belfast vernacular’, English World-Wide 1: 199–210. Milroy, James and Lesley Milroy 1992. ‘Speaker-innovation and linguistic change’, in: James Milroy 1992. Linguistic Variation and Change: On the Historical Sociolinguistics of English. Oxford: Blackwell. 1985. ‘Linguistic change, social network and speaker innovation’, Journal of Linguistics 21: 339–384. 1999. Authority in Language. Investigating Language Standardisation and Prescription. Third edition. London: Routledge. Milroy, James and Lesley Milroy (eds.) 1993. Real English. The Grammar of English Dialects in the British Isles. London: Longman. Milroy, Lesley 1987. Language and Social Networks. Second edition. Oxford: Blackwell. Mishoe, Margaret and Michael Montgomery 1994. ‘The pragmatics of multiple modal variation in North and South Carolina’, American Speech 69.1: 3 –29. Mitchell, Brian R. 1962. Abstract of British Historical Statistics. Cambridge University Press. Mitchell, Linda C. Grammar Wars. Language as Cultural Battlefield in Seventeenthand Eighteenth-Century England. Hampshire, UK and Burlington, VT: Ashgate. 2007. ‘Letter-writing instruction manuals in seventeenth- and eighteenth-century England’, in: Poster and Mitchell (eds.), pp. 178–199. Mittins, William H., Mary Salu, Mary Edminson and Sheila Coyne 1970. Attitudes to English Usage. Reprinted 1975. London: Oxford University Press. Mohr, Volker 2001. The Record of Scotticisms; Historical Sociolinguistics, Discourse and Lexicography. 3 vols. PhD thesis: University of Heidelberg. Molencki, Rafał 2003. ‘Proscriptive prescriptivists: On the loss of the “pleonastic” perfect infinitive in counterfactual constructions in Late Modern English’, in: Dossena and Jones (eds.), pp. 175–196. Montgomery, Michael 1994. ‘The evolution of verbal concord in Scots’, in: Fenton and MacDonald (eds.), pp. 81–95. 1995. ‘The linguistic value of Ulster emigrant letters’, Ulster Folklife 41: 1–15. 1997. ‘The rediscovery of the Ulster Scots language’, in: Schneider (ed.), pp. 211–226. 2000. ‘The Celtic element in American English’, in: Tristram (ed.), pp. 231–264. 2001. ‘British and Irish antecedents’, in: Algeo (ed.), pp. 86–153. 2004. ‘Solving Kurath’s puzzle. Establishing the antecedents of the American Midland dialect region’, in: Hickey (ed.), pp. 310–325.
392 References 2006a. ‘The morphology and syntax of Ulster Scots’, English World-Wide 27.3: 295 –329. 2006b. From Ulster to America. The Scotch-Irish Heritage of American English. Belfast: Ulster Historical Foundation. Montgomery, Michael and Robert Gregg 1997. ‘The Scots language in Ulster’, in: Jones (ed.), pp. 569–622. Montgomery, Michael and John M. Kirk 2001. ‘“My mother, whenever she passed away, she had pneumonia” The history and functions of whenever’, Journal of English Linguistics 29.3: 234 –249. Montgomery, Michael and Stephen J. Nagle 1994. ‘Double modals in Scotland and the Southern United States: Trans-Atlantic inheritance or independent development?’ Folia Linguistica Historica 14: 91–107. Moody, Theodore W. and Francis X. Martin (eds.) 1967. The Course of Irish History. Second imprint, 1994. Cork: Mercier Press. Morash, Christopher 2002. A History of Irish Theatre, 1601–2000. Dublin: Four Courts Press. Morton, Richard 1990. ‘Elizabeth Elstob’s Rudiments of Grammar (1715): Germanic philology for women’, Studies in Eighteenth-Century Culture 20 : 267–287. Morwood, James 1985. The Life and Works of Richard Brinsley Sheridan. Edinburgh: Scottish Academic Press. Mossé, Ferdinand 1952. A Handbook of Middle English. Baltimore: John Hopkins University Press. Mossner, E. C. and I. S. Ross (eds.) 1987. The Correspondence of Adam Smith. The Glasgow Edition of the Works and Correspondence of Adam Smith, Volume 6. Indianapolis: Liberty Fund. Mufwene, Salikoko, John R. Rickford, Guy Bailey and John Baugh (eds.) 1998. African-American English. Structure, History and Use. London: Routledge. Mugglestone, Lynda C. 1996. ‘“A subject so curious and useful”. Lindley Murray and pronunciation’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 145–161. 2002. ‘“Pioneers in the Untrodden Forest”. The New English Dictionary’, in: Mugglestone (ed.), pp. 189–206. 2003. ‘Sheridan in the schoolroom’, in: Austin and Stray (eds.), pp. 22–28. 2004. ‘Departures and returns. Writing the English dictionary in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries’, in: O’Gorman and Turner (eds.), pp. 144–162. 2005. Lost for Words. The Hidden History of the Oxford English Dictionary. London and New Haven: Yale University Press. 2006. ‘English in the nineteenth century’, in: Mugglestone (ed.), pp. 274–304. 2007a. Talking Proper. The Rise of Accent as Social Symbol. Second revised and expanded paperback edition. Oxford University Press. 2007b. ‘“The indefinable something”: Representing rudeness in the English dictionary’, in: Gorji (ed.), pp. 22–32. forthcoming. ‘Benjamin Smart and Michael Faraday. The principles and practice of “Talking Proper” in nineteenth-century England’, in: Adams and Curzan (eds.). Mugglestone, Lynda C. (ed.) 2002. Lexicography and the OED. Pioneers in the Untrodden Forest. Oxford University Press. Mugglestone, Lynda C. (ed.) 2006. The Oxford History of English. Oxford University Press. Myhill, John 1995. ‘Change and continuity in the functions of the American English modals’, Linguistics 33.2: 157–211.
References
393
Nagle, Stephen and Sara Sanders (eds.) 2003. English in the Southern United States. Cambridge University Press. Nash, Andrew 2007. ‘The Kailyard: Problem or illusion?, in: Manning (ed.), pp. 317–323. Nathan, Norman 1959. ‘Pronouns of address in the Canterbury Tales’, Mediaeval Studies 21: 193–201. Navest, Karlijn 2003. ‘Epistolary formulas in Queeney Thrale’s letters’, MA thesis: English Department, University of Leiden. 2006. ‘An index of names to Lowth’s Short Introduction to English Grammar (1762), (1763), (1764)’, Historical Sociolinguistics and Sociohistorical Linguistics 6. www. hum2.leidenuniv.nl/hsl_shl (> Contents > Articles) (accessed May 2007). 2008a. ‘Ash’s Grammatical Institutes and “Mrs Teachwell’s Library for her Young Ladies”’, in: Beal, Nocera and Sturiale (eds.), pp. 59–82. 2008b. ‘“Borrowing a few passages”: Lady Ellenor Fenn and her use of sources’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 223–243. Nevala, Minna 2004. Address in early English correspondence. Its forms and sociopragmatic functions, Mémoires de la Société Néophilologique de Helsinki 64. Helsinki: Société Néophilologique. 2007. ‘Inside and out. Forms of address in seventeenth- and eighteenth-century letters’, in: Nevalainen and Tanskanen (eds.), pp. 89–113. Nevalainen, Terttu 1999. ‘Early Modern English lexis and semantics’, in: Lass (ed.), pp. 332–458. 2001. ‘Continental conventions in early English correspondence’, in: Diller and Görlach (eds.), pp. 203–224. Nevalainen, Terttu and Helena Raumolin-Brunberg 1995. ‘Constraints on politeness: The pragmatics of address formulae in early English correspondence’, in: Jucker (ed.), pp. 541–601. 2003. Historical Sociolinguistics. Language Change in Tudor and Stuart English. London: Longman. Nevalainen, Terttu and Heli Tissari 2006. ‘Of politeness and people’, in: Caie, Hough and Wotherspoon (eds.), pp. 103–116. Nevalainen, Terttu and Leena Kahlas-Tarkka (eds.) 1997. To Explain the Present. Studies in the Changing English Language in Honour of Matti Rissanen. Helsinki: Société Néophilologique. Nevalainen, Terttu and Sanna-Kaisa Tanskanen (eds.) 2007. Letter Writing. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Nevalainen, Terttu, Irma Taavitsainen, Päivi Pahta and Minna Korhonen (eds.) 2008. The Dynamics of Linguistic Variation: Corpus Evidence on English Past and Present. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Newmeyer, Frederick J. 2005. Possible and Probable Languages. A Generative Perspective on Linguistic Typology. Oxford University Press. Nicholls, Jonathan 1985. The Matter of Courtesy: Medieval Courtesy Books and the Gawain-Poet. Woodbridge: D. S. Brewer. Nietz, John A. 1961. Old Textbooks. University of Pittsburgh Press. Nurmi, Arja, Minna Nevala and Minna Palander-Collin (eds.) 2009. The Language of Daily Life in England (1400–1800). Pragmatics and Beyond New Series, 134. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. O’Gorman, Francis and Katherine Turner (eds.) 2004. The Victorians and the Eighteenth Century: Reassessing the Tradition. London: Ashgate.
394
References
Ó Háinle, Cathal 1986. ‘Neighbours in eighteenth-century Dublin: Jonathan Swift and Seán Ó Neachtain’, Éire – Ireland 21: 106 –121. Oldireva, Larisa 1999. ‘Catched or caught: towards the standard usage of irregular verbs’, in: Taavitsainen, Melchers and Pahta (eds.), pp. 263–284. Olofsson, Arne 2005. ‘The rise of That and fall of Which: A case of monitored language change’, in: Granath, Millander and Wennö (eds.), pp. 159–167. Ó Muirithe, Diarmuid (ed.) 1977. The English Language in Ireland. Cork: Mercier. O’Rahilly, Thomas Francis 1932. Irish Dialects Past and Present. Dublin: Browne and Nolan. Orduna Nocito, Elena 2007. ‘The semantic field of “manners” in the eighteenth century: A cognitive approach’, in: Pérez-Guerra, González-Álvarez, BuenoAlonso and Rama-Martínez (eds.), pp. 383–400. Orr, Thomas (ed) 2006. IEEE Transactions on Professional Communication. Special issue on Insights from Corpus Linguistics for Professional Communication. Ortony, Andrew (ed.) 1979. Metaphor and Thought. Cambridge University Press. Osselton, N. E. 1979. ‘John Kersey and the ordinary words of English’, English Studies 60 : 555 –561. 1984. ‘Informal spelling systems in Early Modern English: 1500–1800’, in: Blake and Jones (eds.), pp. 123–137. Ó Tuama, Seán and Thomas Kinsella (eds.) 1981. An Duanaire 1600–1900: Poems of the Dispossessed. Dublin: the Dolmen Press. Padley, George A. 1988. Grammatical Theory in Western Europe 1500–1700. Trends in Vernacular Grammar II. Cambridge University Press. Pahta, Päivi, Minna Nevala and Minna Palander-Collin (eds.) forthcoming. Social Roles and Language Practices in Late Modern English. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Percy, Carol 1994. ‘Paradigms for their sex? Women’s grammars in late eighteenthcentury England’ in: Ayres-Bennett (ed.), pp. 121–141. 1997. ‘Paradigms lost: Bishop Lowth and the “poetic dialect” in his English Grammar’, Neophilologus 81: 129–144. 2003. ‘The art of grammar in the age of sensibility: The Accidence […] for […] Young Ladies (1775)’, in: Dossena and Jones (eds.), pp. 45–82. 2006. ‘Disciplining women? Grammar, gender, and leisure in the works of Ellenor Fenn (1743–1813)’, Historiographia Linguistica 33.1: 109–137. 2008. ‘Mid-century grammars and their reception in the Monthly Review and the Critical Review’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 125–142. 2009. ‘Learning and virtue: English grammar and the eighteenth-century girls’ school’, in: Hilton and Shefrin (eds.), pp. 77–98. Pérez-Guerra, Javier, Dolores González-Álvarez, Jorge L. Bueno-Alonso and Esperanza Rama-Martínez (eds.) 2007. ‘Of Varying Language and Opposing Creed’: New Insights into Late Modern English. Linguistic Insights Series 28. Bern: Peter Lang. Peters, Pam, Peter Collins and Adam Smith (eds.) 2002. New Frontiers of Corpus Research. Papers from the Twenty-First International Conference on English Language Research on Computerized Corpora. Sydney 2000. Amsterdam: Rodopi. Pietsch, Lukas 2005a. ‘“Some do and some doesn’t”: Verbal concord variation in the north of the British Isles’, in: Kortmann, Herrmann, Pietsch and Wagner, pp. 125–209.
References
395
Pietsch, Lukas 2005b. Variable Grammars: Verbal Agreement in Northern Dialects of English. Tübingen: Niemeyer. Pollock, Anthony 2007. ‘Neutering Addison and Steele: Aesthetic failure and the spectatorial public sphere’, English Literary History 74.3: 707–734. Pollock, Linda A. 1983. Forgotten Children: Parent-Child Relations from 1500–1900. Cambridge University Press. Poster, Carol and Linda C. Mitchell (eds), 2007. Letter-Writing Manuals: From Antiquity to the Present: Historical and Bibliographic Studies. Columbia, SC: The University of South Carolina Press. Pottle, Frederick A. 1951. Boswell’s London Journal. London: Heinemann. 1966. James Boswell. The Earlier Years 1740−1769. London: Heineman. Poutsma, Hendrik 1904. A Grammar of Late Modern English. Part 1: The Sentence. Groningen: Noordhoff. Power, Patrick C. (ed.) 1977. Cúirt an Mheán-Oíche - The Midnight Court by Brian Merriman. Cork: Mercier Press. Pride, John B. and Janet Holmes (eds.) 1972. Sociolinguistics. Harmondsworth: Penguin. Prins, Anton 1974. A History of English Phonemes. Leiden: University Press. Probyn, Clive T. 1991. The Social Humanist: The Life and Works of James Harris 1709–1780. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pullum, Geoffrey 1974. ‘Lowth’s grammar: A re-evaluation’, Linguistics 137: 63 –78. Pyles, Thomas and John Algeo 1993 [1964]. The Origins and Development of the English Language. Fourth edition. New York: Harbourt, Brace, Jovanovich. Quirk, Randolph, Sidney Greenbaum, Geoffrey Leech and Jan Svartvik 1985. A Comprehensive Grammar of the English Language. London: Longman. Ramsbottom, John D. 2002. ‘Women and the family’, in: Dickinson (ed.), pp. 209–222. Raumolin-Brunberg, Helena and Terttu Nevalainen 2007. ‘Historical sociolinguistics: The Corpus of Early English Correspondence’, in Beal, Corrigan and Moisl (eds.), Volume 2, pp. 148–171. Raven, James 1996. ‘Defending conduct and property. The London press and the luxury debate’, in: Brewer and Staves (eds.), pp. 301–322. Rayson, Paul 2008. ‘From key words to semantic domains’, International Journal of Corpus Linguistics 13.4: 519–549. Reddick, Allen 1996. The Making of Johnson’s Dictionary, 1746–1773. Cambridge University Press. Reddy, Michael 1979. ‘The conduit metaphor – a case of frame conflict in our language about language’, in: Ortony (ed.), pp. 284–324. Redford, Bruce (ed.) 1994. The Letters of Samuel Johnson. Vol 4: 1782–1784. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Renton, Alice 1991. Tyrant or Victim? A History of the British Governess. London: Weidenfeld and Nicholson. Rissanen, Matti 1999. ‘Syntax’, in: Lass (ed.), pp. 187–331. Robinson, Philip 1989. ‘The Scots language in seventeenth-century Ulster’, Ulster Folklife 35: 86 –99. 1994 [1984]. The Plantation of Ulster. British Settlement in an Irish Landscape, 1600–1670. Belfast: Ulster Historical Foundation.
396
References
1997. Ulster Scots. A Grammar of the Traditional Written and Spoken Language. Belfast: Ullans Press. Rodriguez-Alvarez, Alicia and Maria Esther Rodriguez-Gil 2006. ‘John Entick’s and Ann Fisher’s dictionaries: An eighteenth-century case of (cons)piracy?’, International Journal of Lexicography 19: 287–319. Rodríguez-Gil, María Esther 2002. ‘Ann Fisher: first female grammarian’, Historical Sociolinguisitcs and Sociohistorical Linguistics 2. 2003. ‘Ann Fisher, descriptive or prescriptive grammarian’, Linguistica e Filologia 17: 183–203. 2006. ‘Deconstructing female conventions: Ann Fisher (1719–1778)’, Historiographia Linguistica 33.1/2: 11–38. 2008. ‘Ann Fisher’s A New Grammar, Or was it Daniel Fisher’s work?’, in: TiekenBoon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 149–176. Rogers, Nicholas 2002. ‘The middling orders’, in Dickinson (ed.), pp. 172–182. Rohdenburg, Günter 1995. ‘On the replacement of finite complement clauses by infinitives in English’, English Studies 76: 367–388. 1996. ‘Cognitive complexity and increased grammatical explicitness in English’, Cognitive Linguistics 7: 149–182. 2006. ‘The role of functional constraints in the evolution of the English complementation system’, in: Dalton-Puffer, Ritt, Schendl and Kastovsky (eds.), pp. 143–166. Romaine, Suzanne (ed.) 1998. The Cambridge History of the English Language. Vol. 4: 1776–1997. Cambridge University Press. Roscoe, Sydney 1973. John Newbery and his Successors 1740–1814. A Bibliography. Wormley: Five Owls Press. Ross, Margaret Clunies and Amanda J. Collins 2004. ‘Maittaire, Michael (1668– 1747)’, in: Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, ed. by Henry C. G. Matthew, Brian Harrison. Oxford University Press. www.oxforddnb.com/ view/article/17841. Ruberg, Willemijn 2008. ‘Epistolary and emotional education. The letters of an Irish father to his daughter, 1747−1752’, Paedagogica Historica 44, pp. 207–218. Rudanko, Juhani 1998. Change and Continuity in the English Language. Studies on Complementation over the Past Three Hundred Years. Lanham: University Press of America. 1999. Diachronic Studies of English Complementation Patterns. EighteenthCentury Evidence in Tracing the Development of Verbs and Adjectives Selecting Prepositions and Complement Clauses. Lanham: University Press of America. 2000. Corpora and Complementation: Tracing Sentential Complementation Patterns of Nouns, Adjectives and Verbs over the Last Three Centuries. Lanham: University Press of America. Rydén, Mats and Sverker Brorström 1987. The Be/Have Variation with Intransitives in English. Stockholm: Almqvist and Wiksell. Sairio, Anni 2008. ‘Bluestocking letters and the influence of eighteenth-century grammars’, in: Dossena and Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.), pp. 137–162. Sambrook, James 2008. ‘Gildon, Charles (c.1665–1724)’, in: Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, ed. by H. C. G. Matthew and Brian Harrison. Oxford University Press. www.oxforddnb.com/view/article/10720 Schleifer, Ronald (ed.) 1980. The Genres of the Irish Literary Revival. Dublin.
References
397
Schlüter, Julia 2001. ‘Why worser is better. The double comparative in 16th to 17th century English’, Language Variation and Change 13: 193 –208. Schneider, Edgar (ed.) 1996. Focus on the USA. Varieties of English Around the World. General Series, Vol. 16. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Scott, Mike 1999. Wordsmith Tools. Oxford University Press. Scragg, Donald G. and Paul E. Szarmach (eds.) 1994. The Editing of Old English: Papers from the 1990 Manchester Conference Sponsored by the Manchester Centre for Anglo-Saxon Studies and the Center for Medieval and Early Renaissance Studies, State University of New York at Binghamton. Cambridge: D.S.Brewer. Searle, John 1979. Expression and Meaning. Studies in the Theory of Speech Acts. Cambridge University Press. Sell, Roger D. 2000. Literature as Communication. Pragmatics and Beyond New Series, 78. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Shefrin, Jill 2006. ‘ “Governesses to their children”: Royal and aristocratic mothers educating daughters in the reign of George III’, in: Immel and Witmore (eds.), pp. 181–211. Sheldon, Esther K. 1947. ‘Walker’s influence on the pronunciation of English’, Proceedings of the Modern Language Association of America 62: 130 –146. 1956. ‘Boswell’s English in the London Journal’, Publications of the Modern Langauges Association 71: 1067–1093. 1967. Thomas Sheridan of Smock Alley. Princeton, NJ: University Press. Shoemaker, Robert 2004. The London Mob: Violence and Disorder in EighteenthCentury England. London: Hambledon and London. Shorrocks, Graham 1991. ‘A. J. Ellis as dialectologist: A reassessment’, Historiographia Linguistica 18: 321–334. Siegmund-Schultze, Dorothea (ed.) 1985. Irland. Gesellschaft und Kultur. [Ireland. Society and culture] Vol. 4. Halle: University Press. Skedd, Susan 1997. ‘Women teachers and the expansion of girls’ schooling in England, c 1760–1820’, in: Barker and Chalus (eds.), pp. 101–125. Sklar, Elizabeth S. 1983. ‘Sexist grammar revisited’, College English 45.4: 348 –358. Sledd, James H. and Gwin J. Kolb 1955. Dr. Johnson’s Dictionary. University of Chicago Press. Smith, David Nichol 1945. Essays on the Eighteenth Century. Presented to David Nichol Smith in Honour of his Seventieth Birthday. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Smith, Tania Sona 2004. ‘The Lady’s Rhetorick (1707). The tip of the iceberg of women’s rhetorical education in enlightenment France and Britain’, Rhetorica 22.4: 349–373. Solomon, Harry M. 1996. The Rise of Robert Dodsley: Creating the New Age of Print. Carbondale and Edwardsville: Southern Illinois University Press. Speck, William 1986. ‘Politics and the press’, in: Harris and Lee (eds.), pp. 47–63. Stammerjohann, Harro (ed.) 1996. Lexicon Grammaticorum: Who’s Who in the History of World Linguistics. Túbingen: Niemeyer. Stanley, Julia 1979. ‘Sexist grammar’, College English 39: 800 –811. Starnes, de Witt T. and Gertrude E. Noyes 1991. The English Dictionary from Cawdrey to Johnson 1604–1755. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Staves, Susan 2006. A Literary History of Women’s Writing in Britain, 1660–1789. Cambridge University Press.
398
References
St Clair, William 2004. The Reading Nation in the Romantic Period. Cambridge University Press. Stefanowitsch, Anatol 2006. ‘Words and their metaphors: A corpus-based approach’, in: Stefanowitsch and Gries (eds.), pp. 63–105. Stefanowitsch, Anatol and Stefan Th. Gries (eds.) 2006. Corpus-Based Approaches to Metaphor and Metonymy. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Stein, Dieter and Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.) 1994. Towards a Standard English 1600–1800. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Steinberg, Danny D. and Leon A. Jakobovits (eds.) 1971. Semantics. An Interdisciplinary Reader in Philosophy, Linguistics, and Psychology. Cambridge University Press. Stoker, David 2007. ‘Ellenor Fenn as “Mrs. Teachwell” and “Mrs. Lovechild”: A pioneer late eighteenth-century children’s writer, educator, and philanthropist’, Princeton University Library Chronicle 68.3: 816 –850. Stone, Lawrence and Jeanne C. Fawtier-Stone 1986. An Open Elite? England 1540– 1800. Oxford University Press. Strang, Barbara 1967. ‘Swift and the English language’, To Honor Roman Jakobson III, The Hague: Mouton, pp. 1947–1959. Studer, Patrick 2008. Historical Corpus Stylistics. Media, Technology and Change. London: Continuum. Sundby, Bertil 1953. Christopher Cooper’s English Teacher (1687 ). Lund: Gleerup. Sutherland, John 1969. English Literature of the Late Seventeenth Century. Oxford: Clarendon. Sutherland, Kathryn 1994. ‘Editing for a New Century: Elizabeth Elstob’s AngloSaxon Manifesto and Ælfric’s St Gregory Homily’, in Scragg and Szarmach (eds.), pp. 213–237. 2000. ‘Writings on education and conduct: arguments for female improvement’, in: Jones (ed.), pp. 25–45. Swales, John 1988. ‘Discourse communities, genres and English as an international language’, World Englishes 7.2: 211–220. Szechi, Daniel 2002. ‘The Jacobite movement’, in Dickinson (ed.), pp. 81–96. Taavitsainen, Irma and Andreas H. Jucker 2007. ‘Speech acts and speech act verbs in the history of English’, Fitzmaurice and Taavitsainen (eds.), pp. 107–138. 2008. ‘“Methinks you seem more beautiful than ever”: Compliments and gender in the history of English’, in: Jucker and Taavitsainen (eds.), pp. 195–228. Taavitsainen, Irma and Andreas H. Jucker (eds.) 2003. Diachronic Perspectives on Address Term Systems. Pragmatics and Beyond New Series 107. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Taavitsainen, Irma, Gunnel Melchers and Päivi Pahta (eds.) 1999. Writing in Nonstandard English. Amsterdam: Benjamins. Tagliamonte, Sali and Rosalind Temple 2005. ‘New perspectives on an ol’ variable: (t, d) in British English’, Language Variation and Change 17: 281–302. Tajima, Matsuji 1985. The Syntactic Development of the Gerund in Middle English. Tokyo: Nan’un-do. Takada, Hiroyuki 2002. ‘Zum Begriff der Höflichkeit in Adelungs Wörterbuch. Ein Aspekt soziopragmatischer Sprachgeschichte im 18. Jahrhundert’, [On the notion of politeness in Adelung’s dictionary. An aspect of sociopragmatic
References
399
language history in the eighteenth century] Doitsu Bungaku [German literature] 108: 93–104. Tanskanen, Sanna-Kaisa 2003. ‘“Best patterns for your imitation”. Early modern letter-writing instruction and real correspondence’, in: Hiltunen and Skaffari (eds.), pp. 167–195. Thomson, Harold W. 1927. The Anecdotes and Egotisms of Henry Mackenzie 1745– 1831. Oxford University Press. Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Ingrid 1982. ‘Double negation and eighteenth-century English grammars’, Neophilologus 66: 278 –285. 1985. ‘Do-support in the writings of Lady Mary Wortley Montagu: A change in progress’, Folia Linguistica Historica 6: 127–151. 1987a. ‘Negative do in eighteenth-century English’, in: Bunt, Kooper, Mackenzie and Wilkinson (eds.), pp. 157–171. 1987b. The Auxiliary Do in Eighteenth-Century English: A Sociohistorical Linguistic Approach. Dordrecht: Foris. 1990a. ‘Betsy Sheridan: Fettered by grammatical rules?’, Leuvense Bijdragen 79: 79–90. 1990b. ‘Exemplification in eighteenth-century English grammars’, in: Adamson, Law, Vincent and Wright (eds.), pp. 481–496. 1991. ‘Social ambition reflected in the language of Betsy and Richard Sheridan’, Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 92: 237–246. 1992. ‘John Kirkby and The Practice of Speaking and Writing English: identification of a manuscript’, Leeds Studies in English 23: 157–179. 1994. ‘Standard and non-standard pronominal usage in English, with special reference to the eighteenth century’, in: Stein and Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.), pp. 217–242. 1996. ‘Two hundred years of Lindley Murray: An introduction’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 9–25. 1997. ‘Lowth’s corpus of prescriptivism’, in: Nevalainen and Kahlas-Tarkka (eds.), pp. 451–463. 1998. Review of David Nokes, John Gay. A Profession of Friendship. A Critical Biography. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1995. English Studies 79: 372–374. 2000a. ‘Social network analysis and the language of Sarah Fielding’, in: TiekenBoon van Ostade, Nevalainen and Caon (eds.), pp. 291–301. 2000b. ‘Robert Dodsley and the genesis of Lowth’s Short Introduction to English Grammar’, Historiographia Linguistica 27: 21–36. 2000c. ‘Female grammarians of the eighteenth century’, Historical Sociolinguistics and Sociohistorical Linguistics 1/1. www.hum2.leidenuniv.nl/hsl_shl (> Contents > Articles). 2000b. ‘Normative studies in England’, in: Auroux, Koerner, Niederehe and Versteegh (ed.), pp. 876–887. 2003. ‘“Tom’s grammar”: The genesis of Lowth’s Short Introduction to English Grammar revisited’, in: Austen and Stray (eds.), pp. 36–45. 2005. ‘Of social networks and linguistic influence: The language of Robert Lowth and his correspondents’, International Journal of English Studies 5.1: 135 –157. 2006a. ‘Eighteenth-century prescriptivism and the norm of correctness’, in: van Kemenade and Los (eds.), pp. 539–557.
400
References
2006b. ‘James Merrick (1720–1769). Poet, scholar, linguist’, Historiographia Linguistica 38.1/2: 39–56. 2006c. ‘English at the onset of the normative tradition’, in: Mugglestone (ed.), pp. 240–273. 2006d. ‘“Disrespectful and too familiar”? Abbreviations as an index of politeness in eighteenth-century letters’, in: Dalton-Puffer, Kastovsky, Ritt and Schendl (eds.), pp. 229–247. 2008a. ‘The 1760s: Grammars, grammarians and the booksellers’, in: TiekenBoon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 101–124. 2008b. ‘The codifiers and the history of multiple negation in English, Or, Why were the eighteenth-century grammarians so obsessed with double negation?’, in: Beal, Nocera and Sturiale (eds.), pp. 197–214. forthcoming. ‘Age and the codification of the English language’, in: Duszak and Okulska (eds.). Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Ingrid and Randy Bax 2002. ‘Of Dodsley’s projects and linguistic influence: The language of Johnson and Lowth’. Historical Sociolinguistics and Sociohistorical Linguistics 2. www.hum2.leidenuniv.nl/ hsl_shl Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Ingrid and Fátima Faya Cerqueiro 2007. ‘Saying “please” in Late Modern English’, in: Pérez-Guerra, González-Álvarez, Bueno-Alonso and Rama-Martínez (eds.), pp. 421–444. Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Ingrid (ed.) 1996. Two Hundred Years of Lindley Murray. Münster: Nodus Publikationen. Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Ingrid (ed.) 2008. Grammars, Grammarians and Grammar Writing in Eighteenth-Century England. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Ingrid, Terttu Nevalainen and Luisella Caon (eds.) 2000. Social Network Analysis and the History of English. Special issue of European Journal of English Studies 4.3. Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Ingrid and Wim van der Wurff (eds.) forthcoming. Proceedings of the Third Late Modern English Conference. Bern: Peter Lang. Tierney, James E. 1988. The Correspondence of Robert Dodsley 1733–1764. Cambridge University Press. Tissari, Heli 2003. LOVEscapes: Changes in Prototypical Senses and Cognitive Metaphors since 1500. Helsinki: Société Néophilologique. 2008. ‘A look at respect: Investigating metonymies in Early Modern English’, in: Dury, Gotti and Dossena (eds.), pp. 139–157. Toon, Thomas E. 1992. ‘Old English Dialects’, in: Hogg (ed.), pp. 409–451. Tosh, John 2002. ‘Gentlemanly politeness and manly simplicity in Victorian England’, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society 12: 455 –472. Traugott, Elizabeth Closs 1992. ‘Syntax’, in: Hogg (ed.), pp. 168–289. Tristram, Hildegard L. C. (ed.) 2000. The Celtic Englishes II. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. Troide, Lars E. (ed.) 1988. The Early Journals and Letters of Fanny Burney. Volume 1. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Troide, Lars E. and Stewart J. Cooke (eds.) 1994. The Early Journals and Letters of Fanny Burney. Volume 3. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Trousdale, Graeme and David Adger (eds.) 2007. Dialect Syntax. Special issue of English Language and Linguistics 11.2.
References
401
Trudgill, Peter 1990. The Dialects of England. Oxford: Basil Blackwell. Trudgill, Peter (ed.) 1984. Language in the British Isles. Cambridge University Press. Trudgill, Peter and J. K. Chambers (eds.) 1991. Dialects of English. Studies in Grammatical Variation. London: Longman. Trudgill, Peter, Daniel Schreier, Daniel Long and Jeffrey P. Williams 2004. ‘On the reversibility of mergers: /w/, /v/ and evidence from lesser-known Englishes’, Folia Linguistica Historica 24.1/2: 23 –45. Ungerer, Friedrich (ed.) 2000. English Media Texts Past and Present. Pragmatics and Beyond New Series, 80. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Upton, Clive and John D. Widdowson 1996. An Atlas of English Dialects. Oxford University Press. van Kemenade, Ans and Bettelou Los 2006. The Handbook of the History of English. Malden, MA and Oxford: Blackwell. Viereck, Wolfgang and Heinrich Ramisch 1991/1997. The Computerised Linguistic Atlas of England. Tübingen: Narr. Visser, Frederikus Theodorus 1963–1973. An Historical Syntax of the English Language. 3 parts in 4 vols. Leiden: E. J. Brill. Vorlat, Emma 1959. ‘The sources of Lindley Murray’s The English Grammar’, Leuvense Bijdragen 48: 108 –125. 1963. Progress in English Grammar 1585–1735: A Study of the Development of English Grammar and of the Interdependence Among the Early English Grammarians. Louvain: Catholic University of Louvain. 1975. The Development of English Grammatical Theory 1586–1737. With Special Reference to the Theory of the Parts of Speech. Leuven: Leuven University Press. 1979. ‘Criteria of grammaticalness in sixteenth- and seventeenth-century English grammar’, Leuvense Bijdragen 68: 129–140. 1996. ‘Lindley Murray’s prescriptive canon’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 163–182. Vosberg, Uwe 2006. Die große Komplementverschiebung. Außersemantische Einflüsse auf die Entwicklung satzwertiger Ergänzungen im Neuenglischen. [The great shift of complements. Extra-semantic influences on sentence complements in modern English] Language in Performance 34. Tübingen: Narr. Waddell, J. N. 1980. ‘Fanny Burney’s contribution to English vocabulary’, Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 81: 260 –263. Wagner, Susanne 2001. ‘Pronoun exchange – a feature of English dialects?’, Manuscript available at www.tu-chemnitz.de/phil/english/ling/staff_wagner. php 2004. ‘English dialects in the Southwest: morphology and syntax’, in: Kortmann and Schneider (eds.), pp. 154–174. Wakelin, Martyn F. 1984. ‘Rural dialects in England’, in: Trudgill (ed.), pp. 70–93. Wales, Katie 2006. Northern English. A Social and Cultural History. Cambridge University Press. Wardhaugh, Ronald 1999. Proper English: Myths and Misunderstandings about Language. Malden, MA and Oxford: Blackwell.
402
References
Warner, Anthony 1982. Complementation in Middle English and the Methodology of Historical Syntax. London: Croom Helm. Wasow, Thomas 1997. ‘Remarks on grammatical weight’, Language Variation and Change 9: 81–105. Wasserman, Stanely and Joseph Galaskiewicz (eds.) 1994. Advances in Social Network Analysis: Research in the Social and Behavioural Sciences. London: Sage Publications. Watts, Richard 1999a. ‘The social construction of Standard English: Grammar writers as a “discourse community”’, in: Bex and Watts (eds.), pp. 40–68. 1999b. ‘Language and politeness in early eighteenth-century Britain’, in: Kienpointer (ed.), pp. 5–20. 2002. ‘From polite language to educated language. The re-emergence of an ideology’, in: Watts and Trudgill (eds.), pp. 155–172. Watts, Richard and Peter Trudgill (eds.) 2002. Alternative Histories of English. London: Routledge. Wełna, Jerzy 1978. A Diachronic Grammar of English. Part One, Phonology. Warsaw: Panstwowe Wydawnictwo Naukowe. Wells, John C. 1982. Accents of English. 3 vols. Cambridge University Press. Wilcockson, Colin 1980. ‘“Thou” and “Ye” in Chaucer’s Clerk’s Tale’, The Use of English 31.3: 37–43. Winter, Jay 2006. Remembering War. New Haven and London: Yale University Press. Wolfram, Walt 1991. ‘Towards a description of a-prefixing in Appalachian English’, in: Trudgill and Chambers (eds.), pp. 229–240. Wolfram, Walt and Natalie Schilling-Estes 1998. American English. Dialects and Variation. Oxford: Blackwell. Wood, Curtis and Tyler Blethen (eds.) 1997. Ulster and North America: Transatlantic Perspectives on the Scotch-Irish. Tuscaloosa, AL: University of Alabama Press. Wright, Laura (ed.) 2000. The Development of Standard English, 1300–1800. Cambridge University Press. Wright, Susan 1994. ‘The critic and the grammarians: Joseph Addison and the prescriptivists’, in: Stein and Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.), pp. 243–284. Wyld, Henry C. 1936. A History of Modern Colloquial English. Third edition. Oxford: Blackwell. Xiao, Zhongua and Tony McEnery 2005. ‘Two approaches to genre analysis: Three genres in modern American English’, Journal of English Linguistics 33.1: 62–82. Yáñez-Bouza, Nuria 2008a. ‘Preposition stranding in the eighteenth century: Something to talk about’, in: Tieken-Boon van Ostade (ed.), pp. 251–277. 2008b. ‘To end or not to end a sentence with a preposition: an eighteenth-century Debate’, in: Beal, Nocera and Sturiale (eds.), pp. 237–264. Yngve, Victor H. 1960. ‘A model and an hypothesis for language structure’, Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 104: 444 –466. Zipf, George 1949. Human Behavior and the Principle of Least Effort. New York: Hafner.
Late modern English language studies R AYMON D H IC K EY Essen University
The following list is intended to document the rich set of works on the English language which appeared during the eighteenth century. There were precursors to these studies already in the late sixteenth century with the books by authors such as William Bullokar, Edmund Coote and John Harte. The seventeenth century saw a continuation and expansion of this activity. However, the nature of the studies had changed by the early eighteenth century. Prior to this, studies of English were concerned with such issues as explaining ‘hard words’ (words originating in or formed on the model of the classical languages Latin and Greek), the spelling of English and reflections on universal language with Latin as a model. By the advent of the eighteenth century the question of public acceptability of language had moved to the foreground. Prescriptivism arose in the English language and was there to stay. There are many strands to this prescriptivism: grammars, works on elocution and education, dictionaries of various kinds (general, etymological and pronouncing dictionaries). Throughout all these works one can recognise a desire to agree on a single form of English which would be received favourably in the prestigious sectors of society. Differences of opinion were commonplace and were expressed in print in no uncertain terms, for instance by John Walker in his disagreements with Thomas Sheridan. The nineteenth century continued what had, due to the sheer number of books, become a publishing tradition. The tone of language studies remained openly prescriptive until the third quarter of the nineteenth century when it was tempered somewhat with the advent of linguistic studies of English in the manner of the German Indo-European studies of the day. But many of these works retained a covert, indeed sometimes overt, prescriptivism which was continued well into the twentieth century, for instance with Henry Wyld. The stress on uniformity of language, the attempted suppression of regional variation and the seemingly arbitrary condemnation of forms and usages engendered in subsequent generations a sense of linguistic insecurity which is a clear legacy of eighteenth century concerns with ‘correctness’ in language. 403
404 Late modern English language studies PR E - E IGH T E E N T H C EN T U RY WOR K S ON E NGLISH Blount, Thomas 1656. Glossographia; Or a Dictionary, interpreting all such Hard Words. London: Printed by The Newcomb. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Bullokar, William 1581. Book at Large, for the Amendment of Orthographie for English Speech. 1586. Bref Grammar for English. London. Bullokar, John 1616. An English Expositor: Teaching the Interpretation of the Hardest Words in our Language. London: Iohn Legatt. Butler, Charles 1668. The English Grammar or the Institutions of Letters. Cawdrey, Robert 1604. A Table Alphabetical. London: Weaver. Clare, William 1690. A Compleat System of Grammar, English and Latin. London: Printed for H. Walwyn. Coles, Elisha 1674. The Compleat English Schoolmaster. London: Parker. 1676. An English Dictionary. London: Crouch. Cooper, Christopher 1685. Grammatica Linguae Anglicanae. 1687. English Teacher or the Discovery of the Art of Teaching and Learning the English Tongue. London: Printed by John Richardson. Coote, Edmund 1596. The English Schoole Maister. London: Jackson and Dexter. Daines, Simon 1640. Orthoepia Anglicana. London. Gil, Alexander 1619. Logonomia Anglicana. Hart, John 1551. The Opening of the Unreasonable Writing of Our Inglish Toung. 1569. An Orthographie of English. 1570. A Methode or Comfortable Beginning for All Unlearned. Hickes, George 1689. Institutiones Grammaticae Anglo-Saxonicae. Reprinted 1990. Mulcaster, Richard 1582. The First Part of the Elementarie Which Entreateth Chieflie of the Right Writing of Our English Tung. Phillips, Edward 1658. The New World of English Words: Or, a General Dictionary. London: E. Tyler. Second edition 1662); Sixth edition, revised J. Kersey (1706. London: J. Phillips, H. Rhodes, and J. Taylor). Puttenham, George 1589. The Arte of English Poesie. London. Ray, John 1674. A Collection of English Words not Generally Used with their Significations and Original in Two Alphabetical Catalogues. London: C. Wilkinson. Robinson, Robert 1617. The Art of Pronunciation. London: Printed by Nicholas Okes. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Wallis, John 1653. Grammatica Linguae Anglicanae. Oxford: Wallis. Wilkins, John 1668. An Essay Towards a Real Character, and a Philosophical Language. London: Gelibrand. E IGH T E E N T H C EN T U RY WOR K S ON E NGLISH General Baker, Robert 1770. Reflections on the English Language. London. Beattie, James 1788. The Theory of Language. London: Strahan. Blacklock, Thomas 1756. An Essay on Universal Etymology. Edinburgh: Printed for E. Wilson.
Late modern English language studies 405 Buchanan, James 1766. Essay Towards Establishing a Standard for an Elegant and Uniform Pronunciation of the English Language Through the British Dominions. London: Millar. Defoe, Daniel 1724. A Tour Thro’ the Whole Island of Great Britain. London. Dyche, Thomas 1707. A Guide to the English Tongue. London: Butler. Harris, George 1752. Observations upon the English Language. London: Edward Withers. Hogg, Henry 1790. The New and Complete Universal Letter-Writer or, Whole Art of Polite Correspondence. London: Printed for Alexander Hogg. Martin, Benjamin 1748. Institutions of Language; Containing a Physico- grammatical Essay on the Propriety and Rationale of the English Tongue. London: Printed for S. Birt. Nares, Robert 1784. Elements of Orthoepy: Containing a Distinct View of the Whole Analogy of the English Language. London: Printed for T. Payne. Robinson, Robert 1617. The Art of Pronunciation. London: Printed by Nicholas Okes. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Sheridan, Thomas 1761. A Dissertation on the Causes of the Difficulties which Occur, in Learning the English Tongue. London: R. and J. Dodsley. 1786. Elements of English: Being a New Method of Teaching the Whole Art of Reading, Both with Regard to Pronunciation and Spelling. London: Printed for C. Dilly. 1775. Lectures on the Art of Reading. 2 vols. London. Sinclair, Sir John 1782. Observations on the Scottish Dialect. London. Spence, Thomas 1775. The Grand Repository of the English Language. Newcastle: Printed by T. Saint. Swift, Jonathan 1712. A Proposal for Correcting, Improving and Ascertaining the English Language. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Tooke, John Horne 1798–1805. The Diversions of Purley. 2 vols. London. Webster, Noah 1783. A Grammatical Institute of the English Language, Comprising an Easy, Concise and Systematic Method of Education. Hartford, CT: Hudson and Goodwin. 1789. Dissertations of the English Language. Boston: Thomas. Dictionaries Allen, Francis 1765. The Complete English Dictionary. London: J. Wilson and J. Fell. Ash, John 1795. New and Complete Dictionary of the English Language. London: Printed for Edward and Charles Dilly, and R. Baldwin. Bailey, Nathan 1721. An Universal Etymological English Dictionary. London: E. Bell; [Fifth edition 1731]. 1730. Dictionarium Britannicum: or a More Compleat Universal Etymological English Dictionary than any Extant. London: T. Cox. 1755. A New Universal Etymological Dictionary. Revised and corrected by J. N. Scott. Barclay, James 1774. A Complete and Universal Dictionary on a New Plan. London: Richardson and Urquhart.
406 Late modern English language studies Barlow, Frederick 1773. The Complete English Dictionary: or, General Repository of the English Language. London: The Author. Baskerville, John 1765. A Vocabulary, Or Pocket Dictionary. Birmingham: John Baskerville. Bayley, M. 1764. An Universal Etymological Dictionary of the English Language. Edinburgh: The Proprietors. Bentick, John 1786. The Spelling and Explanatory Dictionary of the English Language. London: Thomas Carnan. Browne, Thomas 1800. The Union Dictionary. London: J. W. Myers. Buchanan, James 1757. A New English Dictionary. London Crakelt, William 1786. Entick’s New Spelling Dictionary. Revised, Corrected, and Enlarged Throughout. London: Charles Dilly. [New edition 1787]. Defoe, Benjamin Norton 1735. A Compleat English Dictionary. London: Olive Payne. Dyche, Thomas 1723. A Dictionary of All the Words Commonly Us’d in the English Tongue; and the Most Usual Proper Names; with Accent Directing to their True Pronunciation. London: Butler. Dyche, Thomas and William Pardon 1735. A New General English Dictionary. London: Richard Ware. Entick, John 1765. The New Spelling Dictionary, Teaching to Write and Pronounce the English Tongue with Ease and Propriety. Second edition 1766. London: Printed for Edward and Charles Dilly. Fenning, Daniel 1761. The Royal English Dictionary. Second edition 1763. London; S. Crowder. 1771. A New Grammar of the English Language; Or, an Easy Introduction to the Art of Speaking and Writing English with Propriety and Correctness. London: Printed for S. Crowder. Finkenstaedt, Thomas, Ernst Leisi and Dieter Wolff 1970. A Chronological English Dictionary: Listing 80,000 Words in Order of their Earliest Known Occurrence. Heidelberg: Winter. Fisher, Ann 1773. An Accurate New Spelling Dictionary of the English Language. Second edition. London: Printed for the Author. [Sixth edition 1786]. Grose, Francis 1785. A Classical Dictionary of the Vulgar Tongue. London: Hooper. 1787. A Provincial Glossary, with a Collection of Local Proverbs and Popular Superstitions. London: Printed for S. Hooper. Hamilton, Joseph 1794. Johnson’s Dictionary of the English Language in Miniature. London: George Stafford. Johnson, J. 1763. The New Royal and Universal English Dictionary. 2 vols. London: A. Millard and Robert Dodsley. Johnson, Samuel 1747. The Plan of a Dictionary of the English Language. London. 1755. A Dictionary of the English Language. London. Johnston, William 1764. A Pronouncing and Spelling Dictionary. London: W. Johnston. Jones, Stephen 1798. Sheridan Improved. A General Pronouncing and Explanatory Dictionary of the English Language. London: Vernor and Hood. Kenrick, William 1773. A New Dictionary of the English Language. London: John and Francis Rivington, William Johnston et al. Kersey, John 1708. Dictionarium Anglo-Britannicum. London: W. Wilde.
Late modern English language studies 407 Manlove, James 1741. New English Dictionary of All Such English Words (With Their Explanation) as are Generally Made Use of, in Speaking and Writing the English Language. London. Marchant, John 1760. A New and Complete Dictionary of the English Language. Second edition [1762]. London: J. Fuller. Martin, Benjamin 1749. Lingua Britannica Reformata: Or, A New English Dictionary. London: J. Hodges. Perry, William 1775. The Royal Standard English Dictionary. Edinburgh: David Willison. Scott, Joseph Nicol 1755. A New Universal Etymological English Dictionary. London: T. Osborne. Sheridan, Thomas 1780. A General Dictionary of the English Language, One Object of Which is to Establish a Plain and Permanent Standard of Pronunciation. 2 Vols. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1967. Sparrow, John 1739. New English Dictionary. London. Walker, John 1774. A General Idea of a Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language on a Plan Entirely New. London. 1819 [1775]. Rhyming Dictionary of the English Language. Third edition. London. 1815 [1791]. A Critical Pronouncing Dictionary and Expositor of the English Language. Fifteenth edition. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1968. Wesley, John 1753. The Complete English Dictionary. London: J. Robinson. Grammars, general Anon. 1733. The English Accidence, Being the Grounds of Our Mother Tongue; Or, a Plain and Easy Introduction to an English Grammar. London: Roberts. Anon 1781. English Grammar. Doway. Ash, John 1763. Grammatical Institutes; Or an Easy Introduction to Dr. Lowth’s Grammar. London: Dilly. 1766. The Easiest Introduction to Dr. Lowth’s English Grammar, Designed for the Use of Children under Ten Years of Age, to Lead Them into a Clear Knowledge of the First Principles of the English Language. London: Printed for Edward and Charles Dilly. Baker, Robert 1770. Reflections on the English Langauge, in the Nature of Vaugelas’s Reflections on the French. London: Bell. Bayly, Anselm 1772. A Plain and Complete Grammar of the English Language with The English Accidence. London: Printed for J. Ridley. Bellum Grammaticale: Or, the Grammatical Battel Royal. In Reflections on the Three English Grammars Published in about a Year Last Past. 1712. London: Printed for J. and M. Jerund. Bettesworth, John 1778. The English Grammar Epitomis’d. London: For G. Keeble and the Author. Bicknell, A. 1796. The Grammatical Wreath. 2 Vols. London. Brightland, John and Charles Gildon 1711. A Grammar of the English Tongue, with Notes, Giving the Grounds and Reason of Grammar in General. London: Brightland. Brittain, L. 1788. Rudiments of English Grammar. Louvain.
408 Late modern English language studies Buchanan, James 1762. The British Grammar: or, an Essay, in Four Parts, Towards Speaking and Writing the English Language Grammatically … for the Use of the Schools of Great Britain and Ireland, and of Private Young Gentlemen and Ladies. London. 1767. A Regular English Syntax. London: Wren. Bullen, Rev., Henry St. John 1797. Rudiments of English Grammar, for the Use of Schools. Bury St. Edmund’s: Printed and sold by P. Gedge; London: G. G. and J. Robinson. Collyer, John 1735. The General Principles of Grammar. Nottingham: Collyer. Coote, Charles 1788. Elements of the Grammar of the English Language. London: The Author. Devis, Ellin 1775. The Accidence, Or First Rudiments of English Grammar. Designed for the Use of Young Ladies … By a Lady. London. Dilworth, Thomas 1751. A New Guide to the English Tongue. Thirteenth edition. London: Kent. Duncan, Daniel 1731. A New English Grammar. London: Prevost. Edwards, Mrs. M. C. 1796. A Short Compendium of English Grammar, in Which the Several Parts of Speech Are Clearly Explained and Defined (By Way of QUESTION and ANSWER.). Brentford: Printed by P. Norbury. Elphinston, James 1786. Propriety Ascertained in Her Picture; Or, Inglish Speech and Spelling Rendered Mutual Guides, Vol. 1. London: Jon Walter. Elstob, Elizabeth 1715. The Rudiments of Grammar. For the English-Saxon Tongue, First Given in English; With an Apology for the Study of Northern Antiquities. Being Very Useful Towards the Understanding Our Ancient English Poets, and Other Writers. London: Printed by W. Bowyer. Eves, Mrs. 1800. The Grammatical Play-thing, Or, Winter Evening’s Recreation, for Young Ladies from Four to Twelve Years Old. Birmingham. Fenn, Lady Ellenor 1798. The Mother’s Grammar. Being a Continuation of the Child’s Grammar. With Lessons for Parsing. London. 1799a. The Friend of Mothers. Designed to Assist Them in Their Attempts to Instill the Rudiments of Language and Arithmetic, At an Early Age, and in a Manner Agreeable to Their Children. London: For E. Newbery. 1799b. The Child’s Grammar. Designed to Enable Ladies Who May Not Have Attended to the Subject Themselves to Instruct Their Children. Dublin: Printed by Robert Napper for B. Dugdale. Fisher, Ann 1745. A New Grammar. Being the Most Easy Guide to Speaking and Writing the English Language Properly and Correctly. Containing … Exercises of Bad English, in the Manner of Clark and Bailey’s Examples for the Latin… Designed for the Use of Schools. [Title from the second edition, 1750] Newcastle upon Tyne. Fogg, Peter Walkden 1796. Elementa Anglicana; Or, the Principles of English Grammar. 2 vols. Stockport. Gardiner, Jane 1799. The Young Ladies’ English Grammar; Adapted to the Different Classes of Learners. York: Printed by Thomas Wilson and Robert Spence, High Ousegate. London: Sold by Vernor and Hood. Beverley: M. Turner. Gough, James 1754. A Practical Grammar of the English Tongue. Containing the Most Material Rules and Observations for Understanding the English Language Well, and Writing with Propriety. Dublin: Isaac Jackson.
Late modern English language studies 409 Greenwood, James 1711. An Essay Towards a Practical English Grammar. Describing the Genius and Nature of the English Tongue: Giving Likewise a Rational and Plain Account of Grammar in General, with a Familiar Explanation of Its Terms. London: Printed by R. Tookey. Harris, James 1751. Hermes; Or, A Philosophical Inquiry Concerning Language and Universal Grammar. London: Woodfall. Harrison, Ralph 1777. Institutes of English Grammar. Manchester: Charles Wheeler. Hornsey, John 1793. A Short English Grammar in Two Parts: Simplified to the Capacities of Children. York: Wilson. Johnson, Richard 1706. Grammatical Commentaries: being an apparatus to a new national grammar: by way of animadversion upon the falsities, obscurities, redundancies and defects of Lilly’s system now in use. London: Printed for the Author. Jones, Hugh 1724. An Accidence to the English Tongue. London. Jones, Rowland 1771. The Circles of Gomer; Or, An Essay Towards an Investigation and Introduction to the English, as an Universal Language, upon the First Principles of Speech. London: Crowder. Kirkby, John 1746. A New English Grammar, Or, Guide to the English Tongue, with Notes. London: Printed for R. Manby and H. S. Cox. Kitson, Roger 1798. A Short Introduction to English Grammar, with Orthographical Exercises. Norwich: Printed and Sold by Stevenson and Matchett. Loughton, William 1739. A Practical Grammar of the English Tongue. Third edition. London: Printed for Caesar Ward and Richard Chandler. Lowth, Robert 1762. A Short Introduction to English Grammar: With Critical Notes. London: Printed by J. Hughes; for A. Millar and R. and J. Dodsley. Reprinted 1995. Mackintosh, Duncan 1797. A Plain, Rational Essay on English Grammar. Boston: Manning and Loring. Maittaire, Michael 1712. The English Grammar: Or, an Essay on the Art of Grammar, Applied to and Exemplified in the English Tongue. London: Printed for H. Clements. Marsden, William 1796. Catalogue of Dictionaries, Vocabularies, Grammars and Alphabets. London. Mercy, Blanch 1799. A Short Introduction to English Grammar. In Two Separate Volumes…Designed for the Use of Young Ladies. London: For the Authoress. 1801. A Short Introduction to English Grammar. Vol.II. Or Instructress’s Book: Designed for the Use of Ladies Who Wish to Acquire a Method of Teaching. Second edition. Carlisle: Printed by F. Jollie, for C. Law, London. Murray, Lindley 1795. English Grammar, Adapted to the Different Classes of Learners. York: Printed and Sold by Wilson, Spence and Mawman. 1797. An Abridgment of L. Murray’s English Grammar. With an Appendix, Containing an Exemplification of the Parts of Speech. Designed for the Use of the Youngest Class of Learners. By Lindley Murray. York: Printed and sold by Wilson, Spence, and Mawman: Sold also by Darton and Harvey, London. Newbery, John 1745. An Easy Introduction to the English Language; Or, a Compendious Grammar for the Use of Young Gentlemen, Ladies, and Foreigners. Being the Second Volume of the Circle of the Sciences, &c. London: Printed for J. Newbery.
410 Late modern English language studies 1769. Grammar Made Familiar and Easy to Young Gentlemen, Ladies, and Foreigners, Being the First Volume of the Circle of the Sciences, &c. The Third Edition, with Additions. London: Printed for Newbery and Carnan. Pickbourn, James 1789. A Dissertation on the English Verb. London: Printed by J. Davis. Piozzi, Hester Lynch 1794. British Synonymity; Or, an Attempt at Regulating the Choice of Words in Familiar Conversation. 2 vols. London: Robinson. Priestley, Joseph 1762. A Course of Lectures on the Theory of Language and Universal Grammar. Warrington. Salisbury, William 1768. Two Grammatical Essays. London: Bathurst. Saxon, Samuel 1737. The English Schollar’s Assistant; Or, the Rudiments of the English Tongue. Reading: Henry. Sedger, John 1798. The Structure of the English Language; Exhibiting an Easy and Familiar Method of Acquiring a Grammatical Knowledge of its Constituent Parts. London: Ashton. Smetham, T. 1774. The Practical Grammar. London. Stackhouse, Thomas 1731. Reflections on the Nature and Property of Languages in General, and on the Advantages, Defects, and Manner of Improving the English Tongue in Particular. London: Batley. Story, Joshua 1783. An Introduction to English Grammar. Third edition. Newcastle upon Tyne. Fifth edition, 1793. Trusler, John 1766. The Difference Between Words Esteemed Synonymous in the English Language; and the Proper Choice of them Determined. 2 vols. London: Dodsley. Ussher, G. Neville 1786 [1785]. The Elements of English Grammar, Methodically Arranged for the Assistance of Young Persons Who Study the English Language Grammatically: To Which Is Added a Concise Treatment of Rhetoric. Designed Particularly for the Use of Ladies’ Boarding Schools. Second edition. Glocester [sic]: Printed by R. Raikes. Ward, William 1765. An Essay on Grammar. London: Horsfield. 1767. A Grammar of the English Language. York: A. Ward. White, James 1761. The English Verb. London. Grammars, rhetorical Campbell, George 1776. The Philosophy of Rhetoric. Edinburgh. Gibbons, Thomas 1767. Rhetoric; Or, A View of its Principal Tropes and Figures, in Their Origin and Powers; With a Variety of Rules to Escape Errors and Blemishes, and Attain Propriety and Elegance in Composition. London: Oliver. Kenrick, William 1784. A Rhetorical Grammar of the English Language wherein the Elements of Speech in General and those of the English Tongue in Particular are Analysed and the Rudiments of Articulation, Pronunciation, and Prosody Intelligibly Displayed. London: R. Cadell and W. Longman. Rice, John 1763. An Introduction to the Art of Reading with Energy and Propriety. London: J. and R. Tonson. 1765. Syllabus of a Course of Rhetorical Lectures in which the Art of Reading and Speaking the English Language with Elegance and Propriety will be Laid Down. London.
Late modern English language studies 411 Sheridan, Thomas 1781. A Rhetorical Grammar of the English Language Calculated Solely for the Purpose of Teaching Propriety of Pronunciation and Justness of Delivery, in that Tongue. Dublin: Price. Works on pronunciation Adams, James 1794. Euphonologia Linguae Anglicanae. English Linguistics 1500– 1800. No 112. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1968. 1799. The Pronunciation of the English Language Vindicated from Imputed Anomaly and Caprice. Edinburgh. Anon. 1796. Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language. London: J. W. Myers. Anon. 1797. Vocabulary of such Words in the English Language as are of Dubious or Unsettled Pronunciation. London: Rivington. Buchanan, James 1757. Linguae Britannicae Vera Pronunciatio. London. Burn, John. 1786. A Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language. Glasgow: Printed by Alex Adam. Second edition. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. Enfield, William 1799 [1774]. The Speaker. London: Joseph Johnson. Johnston, William 1764. A Pronouncing and Spelling Dictionary of the English Language. London: The Author. Jones, Stephen 1798. Sheridan Improved: A General Pronouncing and Explanatory Dictionary of the English Language. Third edition. London: Vernor and Hood. Scott, William 1786. Spelling, Pronouncing and Explanatory Dictionary of the English Language. Smith, William 1795. An Attempt to Render the Pronunciation of the English Language More Easy to Foreigners: Being the Abridgement of a Larger Work to be Comprised of Three Volumes, and Entitled a Dictionary of the English and French Languages. London: Printed for the Author by T. Gillet. Watts, I. 1721. The Art of Reading and Writing English. London. Works on elocution Sheridan, Thomas 1762. A Course of Lectures on Elocution. Reprinted, Hildesheim: Georg Olms, 1970. Walker, John 1781. Elements of Elocution. London. 1785. A Rhetorical Grammar or Course of Lessons in Elocution. London. Reprinted, Hildesheim: Georg Olms, 1969. Works on education Buchanan, James 1770. A Plan of an English Grammar School Education. London: A. Millar. Priestley, Joseph 1768 [1761]. The Rudiments of English Grammar. Adapted to the Use of Schools. London. Rice, John 1773. A Lecture on the Importance and Necessity of Rendering the English Language a Peculiar Branch of Female Education. London: For G. Kearsley. Sheridan, Thomas 1756. British Education or, the Sources of the Disorders of Great Britain, Being an Essay Towards Proving, that the Immorality, Ignorance, and False
412 Late modern English language studies Taste, which so Generally Prevail, are the Natural and Necessary Consequences of the Present Defective System of Education with an Attempt to Shew, that a Revival of the Art of Speaking, and the Study of our own Language, Might Contribute, in a Great Measure, to the Cure of those Evils. London: Dodsley. Taylor, Mrs. 1791. An Easy Introduction to General Knowledge and Liberal Education … For the Use of the Young Ladies, At Strangeways Hall, Manchester. Warrington: Printed by W. Eyres, 1791. Williams, D. 1774. A Treatise on Education. London. Williams, John 1783. Thoughts on the Origin and on the Most Rational and Natural Method of Teaching the Languages: with some Observations on the Necessity of one Universal Language for all Works of Science. London: Printed by H. Goldney. Menston: The Scolar Press, 1969. N I N ET E E N T H C EN T U RY WOR K S ON E NGLISH General Batchelor, Thomas 1809. An Orthoëpical Analysis of the English Language, Including An Orthoëpical Analysis of the Dialect of Bedfordshire. London. Reprinted in Lund Studies in English, Vol. 45, edited by Arne Zettersten. Barnes, William 1878. An Outline of Speech-Craft. London: Kegan Paul. Kington-Oliphant, T. 1873. The Sources of Standard English. 2 Vols. London. Levante, Rev. E. R. de 1869. Orthoepy and Orthography of the English Language. London. Savage, W. H. 1833. The Vulgarisms and Improprieties of the English Language. London.DictionariesAxon, W. E. A. 1883. English Dialect Words in the Eighteenth Century as Shown in the Universal Etymological Dictionary of Nathaniel Bailey. London. Browne, T. 1806. The Union Dictionary. London. Fulton, G. and G. Knight 1833. A Dictionary of the English Language Greatly Improved. Edinburgh. Longmuir, J. 1864. Walker and Webster Combined in a Dictionary of the English Language. London. Lowe, E. C. 1867. An English Primer. London. Murray, James A. H., Henry Bradley, William A. Craigie and Charles T. Onions (eds) 1884 –1928. A New English Dictionary on Historical Principles. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pickering, John 1816. A Vocabulary of Collection of Words and Phrases which have been Supposed to be Peculiar to the United States of America. Boston: Cummings and Hilliard. Trench, Richard C. 1860. On Some Deficiencies in Our English Dictionaries. Second revised edition. London: John W. Parker and Sons. Webster, Noah 1828. American Dictionary of the English Language. New York: Converse.GrammarsBooth, David 1837. The Principles of English Grammar. London. Hill, William 1833. Fifteen Lessons, on the Analogy and Syntax of the English Language. Huddersfield. Livesey, T. J. 1881. How to Teach Grammar. Illustrated in a Series of Lessons. London. Martin, Thomas 1824. A Philological Grammar of the English Language. London: Rivington.
Late modern English language studies 413 Oliver, S. 1825. A General Critical Grammar of the Inglish Language on a System Novel and Extensive. London. Smart, Benjamin H. 1812. A Grammar of English Sounds. London: John Richardson. Wright, Joseph 1898–1905. The English Dialect Dictionary. Oxford: Henry Frowde. 1905. The English Dialect Grammar. Oxford: Henry Frowde.Works on pronunciationCoysh, G. 1837. The British Pronouncing and Self-Instructing Spelling Book. Topsham. Eccles, E. A. S. 1879. Harry Hawkins’ H Book. London. Enfield, William 1809. A Familiar Treatise on Rhetoric. London. H., Hon. Henry 1854–66. Poor Letter H: Its Use and Abuse. London. Leach, A. 1881. The Letter H. Past, Present, and Future. London. Newman F. W. 1869. Orthëpy: Or, a Simple Moder of Accenting English. London. Nuttall, Peter A. (ed.) 1863. The Standard Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language, Based on the Labours of Worcester, Richardson, Webster. London. 1855, 1868, 1872, 1873. Walker’s Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language. London. Ogilvie, J. 1870. The Comprehensive English Pronouncing Dictionary. London. Phyfe, W. 1885. How Should I Pronounce? Or the Art of Correct Pronunciation. London. Rogers, R. R. 1855. Poor Letter R. Its Use and Abuse. London. Sherman, L. 1885. A Handbook of Pronunciation. London. Smart, Benjamin H. 1810. A Practical Grammar of English Pronunciation. London. 1812. A Grammar of English Sounds. London. 1836. Walker Remodelled. A New Critical Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language. London: T. Cadell. Smith, C. W. 1866. Mind Your H’s and Take Care of Your R’s. London. Sweet, Henry 1877. Handbook of Phonetics. Oxford: Clarendon Press. 1890. A Primer of Spoken English. Oxford: Clarendon Press. 1908. The Sounds of English. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Young, T. (ed.) 1857. A Critical Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language. London.Works on elocutionGraham, William 1837. Principles of Elocution. Edinburgh: Chambers. Hullah, John 1870. The Cultivation of the Speaking Voice. Oxford. Smart, Benjamin H. 1842. The Practice of Elocution. Fourth edition. London: Longman, Brown, Green and Longmans. Smith, Charles W. 1858. Hints on Elocution and Public Speaking. London. Vandenhoff, George 1855. The Art of Elocution. London. Whyte, Samuel 1800. An Introductory Essay on the Art of Reading, and Speaking in Public. Dublin.Works on educationBartle, Rev. G. 1875. A Few Words to Parents and Guardians on the Education of Youth. London. Carlisle, Nicholas 1818. A Concise Description of the Endower Grammar Schools of England and Wales. London. Carpenter, Thomas 1825. The School Speaker. London. Cobbett, William 1818. A Grammar of the English Language, in a Series of Letters. Intended for the Use of Schools and of Young Persons in General; but more Especially for the Use of Soldiers, Sailors, Apprentices, and Ploughboys. New York, London. Poole, John 1813. The Village School Improved; Or, A New System of Education Practically Explained, and Adapted to the Case of Country Parishes. Second edition. Oxford.
Author Index
A. F. (Ann Fisher?), Abercrombie, David, Adams, George Brendan, , , Adams, James, , , , Adamson, Sylvia, Addison, Joseph, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Adelung, Johan Christoph, Aijmer, Karin, , , Aitchison, Jean, , , , Aitken, Adam J., , Algeo, John, , , Allardyce, Alexander, Allen, Francis, , , , Alston, Robin C., , , , Alvarez, Pablo, Anderwald, Liselotte, , Ando, Sadao, Antony, Laurence, Archer, Dawn, , Argyle, Duke of, Aristotle, Ash, John, , , , , , , , , , , , Astell, Mary, , , , , Astle, Daniel, Auer, Anita, , Austin, Frances, , , , , , Aylmoor, Lord, Backscheider, Paula R., Bailey, Nathan, , , , , , , , , , , , , Bailey, Richard W., , , , , , Bailyn, Bernard, Baines, Paul, , Baker, D. E., Baker, Dik, Baker, Robert, Balderston, Katherine, , , , , , , , Baldwin, Abigail, , Baldwin, Richard,
414
Bannet, Eve Tavor, , , Barchas, Janine, Barclay, James, Bardon, Jonathan, , Baretti, Giuseppe, , , Barlow, Frederick, , Barnes, William, , Barrett, Charlotte, Basker, James G., Baskerville, John, Bateley, Janet, Battesin, Martin C., , Bauer, Laurie, Baugh, Albert, , , Bax, Randy, , Bayley, M., Beal, Joan, xv, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Beattie, James, , , Beelaert, Anna Livia, Beetz, Manfred, Béjoint, Henri, Bellamy, Daniel, Bentick, John, , , , , Bentley, Richard, Bergs, Alexander, Berkeley, Bishop George, Bernstein, Cynthia, Bessborough, The Earl of, Bettesworth, John, Biber, Douglas, , , , Bickerstaff, Isaac, , Bijkerk, Annemieke, Blackall, Offspring, Blackmore, Richard, Blethen, Tyler, Bliss, Alan J., , Bloom, Lillian D., Blount, Thomas, , Boccalini, Traiano, Boileau, Nicolas, , Boiscot, Master, Boissevain, Jeremy,
Author index 415 Bolton, William F., Bond, Donald, , , , Börjars, Kersti, Borsay, Peter, Bosanquet, Captain Henry T. A., Boswell, James, , , , , , , Boucicault, Dion, Boyer, Abel, Boyse, Samuel, Braidwood, John, Bree, Linda, Bright, Mr, Brightland, John, , , , Brinton, Laurel, Brorström, Sverker, Brouwer, Mirthe, Brown, Penelope, , , Brown, Richard, Browne, R., Browne, Thomas, , , , , , Browning, Robert, Brownlees, Nicholas, Bryson, Anna, , , , Bryson, Bill, Buchan, Eleventh Earl of, Buchanan, James, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Buckingham, John Sheffield Duke of, Buckley, Samuel, , , , Budgell, Eustace, , , Bullen, Rev. Henry St. John, , Bullokar, John, Bullokar, William, Burchfield, Robert, , , , , Burke, Edmund, Burn, John, Burney, Charles, , Burney, Fanny, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Burney, Harry, Burnley, David, Burns, Robert, , , , Buschmann-Göbels, Astrid, , , Bute, Lord, Butters, Ronald R., , Byrd, William, Byrne, Joseph, Cable, Thomas, , , Cajka, Karen, , , , , , , , , , , , , , Calamy, Edmund, Canny, Nicholas, , Carey, Henry, Carlton, William, Carolan, Turlogh, Carter, Elizabeth,
Carter, Philip, , Cash, Derek, Cato, , Cawdrey, Robert, , , , , , Caxton, William, , Cecil, Lord David, Centlivre, Susannah, Chalmers, George, Chambers, J. K., , Chapman, Carol, Chapman, Don, , Chapone, Hester, , , Chaucer, Geoffrey, , , , , , Cheshire, Jenny, , Chesterfield, Lord, , , , , , , , , , , Chomsky, Noam, Christian, Donna, Cicero, Clarendon, Earl of (Sir Edward Hyde), Clarke, Aidan, Clarke, Norma, Claudian, Clerk, John, Clifford, James L., , , Clift, Elizabeth, , , , Clift, William, Clowes, William, Cobbett, William, Cocker, Edward, Cohen, Michèle, , , , , , , , Coleridge, Samuel Taylor, Coles, Elisha, , , Collier, Arthur, , , Collier, Jeremy, Collier, John, Collins, Amanda J., Congreve, William, , , , , Constable, Archibald, Cooke, Stewart J., , Cooper, Anthony Ashley, Cooper, Christopher, , , , , Coote, Charles, Corkery, Daniel, Cowan, Brian, Craigforth, Callander of, Crakelt, William, Creech, Thomas, Crispin, Daniel, Crockett, Samuel R., Croft, Herbert, Cromwell, Oliver, Crowley, Tony, Crozier, Alan, Crystal, David, Cullen, Louis, Culpeper, Jonathan, , ,
416 Author index Cunningham, Bernadette, Curtis, Edmund, Dante Alighieri, Darwin, Erasmus, Davenport, Mrs, de Coverley, Roger, , , De Smet, Hendrik, Deans, Effie, Defoe, Daniel, , , , , , , , , , , Deignan, Alice, , DeMaria, Robert, , , , Demosthenes, Denison, David, , Devis, Ellin, , , , , , , , , , , Devonshire, Duchess of, Devonshire, Georgiana Duchess of \t, , Di Martino, Gabriella, Dickson, David, Dickson, Peter G. M., Dieth, Eugen, , Dietrich, Julia, Dille, Catherine, Dirven, René, , Dixon, Henry, Dobson, Eric, , , Dodd, Donald B., Dodsley, James, Dodsley, Robert, , , , , , , , , , Dolan, Terence, , , Donne, John, Dossena, Marina, , , , Douglas, Sylvester, , Dryden, John, xv, , , , , , , , , , , , , , Dryer, Matthew S., Du Bois, Lady Dorothea, Duffley, Patrick J., , , Duffy, Sean, Duggan, George C., Duncan, Daniel, Dury, Richard, , Dyche, Thomas, , , Earle, Peter, Eaves, T. C. Duncan, Eddy, Donald E., Edgeworth, Maria, , Edgeworth, Richard Lovell, , , , , Edwards, Viv, Eliot, George (Mary Ann Evans), Ellis, Alexander, , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
Elphinston, James, , , Elstob, Elizabeth, , , , Elworthy, Frederic Thomas, Emsley, Bert, , Entick, John, , , , , , Eusden, Laurence, Eustance, Sinclair S., Eves, Mrs, , , Ezell, Margaret, Fairfax, Mary (Somerville), Fairman, Tony, Fanego, Teresa, , , , , , , , , , , , , Faraday, Michael, Farquhar, George, , , Faya Cerqueiro, Fátima, Feagin, Crawford, Feather, John, Fenn, Ellenor, , , , , , , , , , , , , , Fennell, Barbara A., Fenning, Daniel, , , , Fens-de Zeeuw, Lyda, , Fenton, James, , Ferguson, Adam, Fielding, Henry, , , , Fielding, Sarah, , , , , , Filliettaz, Monseigneur, Finegan, Edward, , Fischer, Olga, , , Fischer, Roswitha, Fisher, Ann, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Fitzmaurice, Susan, , , , , , , , , , , , Fitzmaurice, Thomas, , Fludernik, Monika, Fodor, Janet Dean, Fodor, Jerry Alan, Fogg, Peter Walkden, Fontenelle, Bernard le Bouvier de, Fordyce, James, Foster, Roy F., , Fox, Elizabeth Vassall, Francis, W. Nelson, Franklin, Benjamin, , , Frazier, Lyn, , , Freeport, Sir Andrew, , , , Friedkin, N. E., Fries, Udo, Gal, Susan, Galt, John, Gardiner, Jane, , , Garrett, Marrill, Garrick, David, , , , Gaultier, Abbé, ,
Author index 417 Gay, John, , Geddes, Alexander, , , Gil, Alexander, Gildon, Charles, , , , , , Gillingham, John, Gilman, E. Ward, Goatly, Andrew, Godolphin, Sidney, Goldsmith, Oliver, , , , González-Díaz, Victorina, , , Goodwin, Thomas, Görlach, Manfred, , , , , , , , , , , Gotti, Maurizio, Gough, James, Graham, William, Green, Lisa, Greenberg, Joseph H., Greenwood, James, , , , , , Gregg Robert, , , , , Gretsch, Mechthild, , Grice, Herbert Paul, Griffiths, Ralph, Guest, Harriet, , Gulston, Bishop William, Häcker, Martina, Haiman, John, Hakewill, George, Halifax, Lord, Hall, Fitzedward, Halsband, Robert, , , , , , Hamilton, Alexander, Hamilton, Joseph, , , , , Hamptden, Händel, Georg Friedrich, Hans, Nicholas, Hârith, Harley, Robert, , Harris, George, Harris, James, , , , , Harris, John, , Harris, José, Hart, John, , Hartman, Reinhard K. K., Harvey, Karen, , Haspelmath, Martin, , Haugen, Einar, Haugland, Kari E., Hawkins, John A., , , , , , , , , Hemlow, Joyce, Henry, Alison, Herrmann, Tanja, Heuser, Wilhelm, Hewett, Waterman T., Hewitt, John Harold, Hickes, George,
Hickey, Raymond, , , , , , , , , , , , , Hill, William, Hilton, Mary, , , Hofland, Knut, Hogan, James Jeremiah, , Hogg, Henry, Holinshed, Raphael, Holland, Lady, Holmberg, Borje, Holmes, Janet, Honegger, Thomas, Honeycomb, Will, , , Honoré, Jean, , , , Horace, , , , , Hore, Herbert, Horn, Wilhelm, Hornsey, John, Houston, Anne, Houstoun, James, Howard, Robert Mowbray, , Howell, Wilbur Samuel, Huddleston, Rodney, Hudson, Mary, Hughes, Arthur, Hughes, Geoffrey, Hughes, John, Hume, David, Hume, John, Hussey, Stanley, Hyde, Mary, , , , , , , , , , , , , Hyland, P. B. J., Ihalainen, Ossi, , , , , , , Ince, Richard, Isaac, Peter, Iyeiri, Yoko, Jackendoff, Ray, Jacobsson, Mattias, , Jespersen, Otto, Johansson, Christine, Johns A. M., Johnson, John, Johnson, Joseph, Johnson, Mark, , Johnson, Richard, , Johnson, Sally, Johnson, Samuel, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Johnston, Edith Mary, ,
418 Author index Johnston, Paul A., , Johnston, William, , , , Jones, Charles, , , , , , , , , , , , , , Jones, Hugh, Jones, John, Jones, Stephen, , Jones, William, Jonson, Ben, , Joyce, Patrick Weston, , Jucker, Andreas H., , , , , , , , , Kaislaniemi, Samuli, Kaltenböck, Gunther, , , , , Kapel, Scott E., Keating, Geoffrey (Seathrún Céitinn), Keith, Murray Mrs, Kemp, J. Alan, Kennett, White, Kenrick, William, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Kersey, John, , , , , , Kiberd, Declan, Kimpel, Ben D., Kinsella, Thomas, Kiparsky, Carol, Kiparsky, Paul, Kirk, John, Kirkby, John, , Kitson, Roger, , , Kjellmer, Göran, , Klein, Lawrence E., , , , , , , , Klemola, Juhani, Kniezsa, Veronica, Knight, Charles A., , Kohnen, Thomas, , Koivisto-Alanko, Päivi, , , Kolb, Gwin J., , , , Koller, Veronika, Kopytko, Roman, Kortmann, Bernd, , , , Kosok, Heinz, Kövecses, Zoltán, , , , Kruisinga, Etsko, Kytö, Merja, xv, xvi, , , , Labov, William, Lakoff, George, , , Landau, Sidney, Landsowne, Marquis of, Langford, Paul, , , , , , , Lansdowne, Marquis of, Lass, Roger, , , , , Leech, Geoffrey, , , Lefanu, William, ,
Legg, Marie-Louise, , , , , Legge, Henry Bilson, , , Lehmann, Hans Martin, Lehnert, Martin, Lennox, Charlotte, Leonard, Stephen A., , Levine, Joseph M., Levinson, Stephen, , , , Lewis, Matthew, Lichtenberg, Georg Christoph, Lillie, Charles, , Lily, William, , , , , Lintott, Bernard, Locke, John, , , , Long, Edward, Los, Bettylou, , , Loughton, William, , Lowth, Anthony, Lowth, Robert, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Lowth, Thomas Henry, Lucan, Lydon, James, Lye, Thomas, Lynch, Beth, Lynch., John, Macafee, Caroline, Mackenzie, Henry, , MacKinnon, Donald, MacMahon, Michael K. C., , Mair, Christian, , , Maittaire, Michael, , Mäkinen, Martti, Manlove, James, Marchant, John, , , , , Marcus, G. F., Marlborough, Duke of, Marlowe, Christopher, Marsden, P. V., Marshall, John, Marshall, William, Martin, Benjamin, , , , , , , , , , , Martin, Francis X., Martin, James R., Martin, Joanna, Martin, Stefan, Martyn, Henry, Maslen, Robert J., Mason, John, Mason, William, Maxted, Ian, , McArthur, Tom, , , McCafferty, Kevin,
Author index 419 McCarthy, William, McClure, J. Derrick, McDermott, A., McDiarmid, Hugh, McEnery, Tony, McGeary, Thomas N., McIntosh, Agnus, McIntosh, Carey, , McIntyre, Ian, Melmoth, William, Mercy, Blanch, , , , , Merrick, James, Merriman, Brian, Mesnager, Nicholas, Meurman-Solin, Anneli, Michael, Ian, , , , , , , , , , , Michelbourne, John, Millar, Andrew, Millar, John, Miller, George A., Miller, Jim, , , , , Miller, Kerby, , , Miller, Marilyn, Milroy, James, , , , , , , , Milroy, Lesley, , , , , , Milton, John, , , , , , , Mishoe, Margaret, Mitchell, Brian R., Mitchell, Linda C., , , , , Mittins, W. H., Mohr, Volker, , , , Moisl, Hermann, Molencki, Rafał, Molière (Jean-Baptiste Poquelin), Molière (Jean-Baptiste Poquelin) \t, , Molière (Jean-Baptiste Poquelin) \t, , Montagu, Charles, , Montagu, Elizabeth, , Montagu, Lady Mary Wortley, , , , , , , , , Montgomery, Michael, , , , , , , , , Moody, Theodore W., Morash, Christopher, , Morphew, John, , Morton, Richard, Mossé, Ferdinand, Mossner, E. C., Mugglestone, Lynda, , , , , , , , , , , , , , Murray, James, , , , , , , , Murray, Lindley, , , , , , , , , , Mutter, R. P. C., Myhill, John,
Nagle, Stephen, Napolean Bonaparte, Nash, Andrew, Nathan, Norman, Navest, Karlijn, , , , , , , , , , , , Nevala, Minna, , , , Nevalainen, Terttu, , , , , , , , , , , , , Newbery, Elizabeth, , Newbery, Francis, Newbery, John, , , , , , , , , Newmeyer, Frederick J., Newton, Isaac, Nicholls, Jonathan, Nichols, John, Nietz, John A., Nocito, Orduna, Noyes, Gertrude E., , Nurmi, Arja, , Nuttall, Peter, Ó Háinle, Cathal, Ó Muirithe, Diarmuid, , , Ó Neachtain, Seán, Ó Tuama, Seán, O’Cleary, Eamonn, O’Keefe, John, O’Rahilly, Thomas Francis, Oldireva, Larisa, Olofsson, Arne, Orton, Harold, , , Osborn, Thomas, Osselton, Noel E., , , Padley, George A., Pardon, William, , , Parnell, Thomas, Paston family, Percy, Carol, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Perry, Ruth, Perry, William, Philips, Ambrose, , Phillips, Edward, , , , Picton, J. A., Pierce, Eliza, Pietsch, Lukas, , , Pindar, Pinkerton, John, Piozzi, Gabriel, Plato, Pollock, Anthony, Pollock, Linda A., , Poole, Jacob, , Poole, Joshua,
420
Author index
Pope, Alexander, xv, , , , , , , , , , , , , Porter, Agnes, Portland, Duchess of, Pottle, Frederick A., , Poutsma, Hendrik, Priestley, Joseph, , , Primrose, Miss, Prior, Matthew, , Probyn, Clive T., , , , Pullum, Geoffrey K., , , , , Puttenham, George, , , , Pyles, Thomas, , Ramisch, Heinrich, Ramsay, Allan, , , Ramsay, E. B., Ramsbottom, John, Ramsey, James, Raumolin-Brunberg, Helena, , , , , , Raven, James, Ray, John, , Rayson, Paul, , Reddick, Allen, , Reddy, Michael, Redford, Bruce, Renton, Alice, , Rice, John, , Richardson, Samuel, , , Rissanen, Matti, , , Robinson, Philip, , , Robinson, Robert, Rodríguez-Gil, María Esther, , , , , , Rogers, Nicholas, Rohdenburg, Günter, , , , Roper, Abel, Roscoe, Sydney, Ross, Alexander, Ross, I.. S., Ross, Margaret Clunies, Ruberg, Willemijn, , , , Rudanko, Juhani, Ruffin, Edmund, Russell, Charles W., Rydén, Mats, xv, , Ryland, John, , , Säily, Tanja, , Sambrook, James, , Savoy, Prince Eugene of, Schilling-Estes, Natalie, , Schlüter, Julia, Schneider, Edgar W., Schneider, Peter, Scot, Alexander, , , , Scott, Mike,
Scott, Walter, , , , Scougal, Henry, Scudery, Mme de, Seally, John, Searle, John, , Sedger, John, Sell, Roger D., Shakespeare, William, , , , , , , , , , , , , , Shaw, George Bernard, Shefrin, Jill, Sheldon, Esther, , Sherbo, Sheridan, Betsy, , , Sheridan, Richard Brinsley, , , Sheridan, Thomas, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Shoemaker, Robert, , Shorrocks, Graham, , , Sinclair, James, , Skedd, Susan, Sklar, Elizabeth S., , , Slack, Mrs, , Slack, Thomas, Sledd, James H., Sluiter, Ineke, Smart, Benjamin, , , , , , Smith, Adam, , Smitterberg, Erik, xv, , Smollett, Tobias George, , , Socrates, Solomon, Harry M., Somers, Lord John, Sparrow, John, Speck, William, Spence, Joseph, Spence, Thomas, , , , , Spenser, Edmund, , Stanihurst, Richard, Starnes, De Witt T., , Staves, Susan, Steele, Richard, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Sterne, Laurence, , Stevenson, Robert Louis, Stewart, Charles Edward, Stoker, David, Story, Joshua, Strang, Barbara, Streatfeild, Sophia, Studer, Patrick, Sundby, Bertil, , , , , Sutherland, John, Sutherland, Kathryn,
Author index Swales, John, Sweet, Henry, Swift, Jonathan, xv, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Synge, Alicia, , , Synge, Edward, , , , , , Szechi, Daniel, Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt, Taavitsainen, Irma, , , , , Tagliamonte, Sali, Takada, Hiroyuki, Talbot, Thomas, Tanskanen, Sanna-Kaisa, Teachwell, Mrs, Temple, Rosalind, Temple, Sir William, Terry, Mrs, Thomson, Harold W., , Thrale, Henry, , Thrale, Hester, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Thrale, Susan, Thwaite, Edward, Tickell, Thomas, Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Ingrid, xv, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Tierney, James E., , Tigges, Wim, Tissari, Heli, , , , , , , , , , Todd, Loreto, , Tonson, Jacob, , , , , , , Toon, Thomas E., Tosh, John, , Traugott, Elizabeth Closs, Trench, Richard C., , , , , , , Trimmer, Sarah, Troide, Lars E., , , Trudgill, Peter, , , , , Trusler, John, , , Tucker, Abraham, Tyndale, William, Upton, Clive, Upton, John, ,
421
Ussher, G. Neville, , , Vallancey, Charles, van Kemenade, Ans, Vanbrugh, John, Verbist, Annemie, Vertot, René Aubert de, Viereck, Wolfgang, Virgil, , , , , Vorlat, Emma, , , , , , , Vosberg, Uwe, Waddell, J. N., Wagner, Paul, Wagner, Susanne, , , Wales, Katie, Walker, John, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Wallis, John, Walpole, Horace, , , , , Ward, William, , , Wardhaugh, Ronald, Warner, Anthony, , , , Warton, Joseph, Watts, Richard, , , , Wells, John C., , , , , , Wełna, Jerzy, Welsh, Charles, Wesley, John, , , , , Wesley, Susanna, , , White, James, White, Peter P. R., Whittle, Pamela, Whyte, Samuel, Widdowson, John, Wilcockson, Colin, Wilks, Robert, Williams, Jeffrey P., Wilmot, M., Withers, Philip, , Wolfram, Walt, , Wollstonecraft, Mary, Wood, Curtis, Wright, Joseph, , , , Wright, Susan, , , Wycliffe, John, Wyld, Henry C., Xenophon, Xiao, Zhongua, Yáñez-Bouza, Nuria, , , , , Yngve, Victor H.,
Index
Corpora A Corpus of Irish English, , Brown University Corpus, Concordancing software, Corpus of Early English Correspondence, , , , Corpus of Early Modern Dialogues –, Corpus of Late Modern British and American English Prose, , , , , , Corpus of Nineteenth-Century Scottish Correspondence, Freiburg English Dialect Corpus, , , , , , , , , , , , Freiburg Lancaster-Oslo/Bergen Corpus of British English, , , , , , Freiburg-Brown Corpus of American English, , , , , , , Helsinki Corpus of English Texts, , Historical Thesaurus of English, , International Corpus of English -Great Britain, , , , Lancaster-Oslo/Bergen Corpus of British English, Network of Eighteenth-century English Texts, , , Old Bailey Records, , Survey of English Dialects, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , The Computerised Linguistic Atlas of England, Zurich English Newspaper Corpus, Eighteenth-century society Attitudes to Scots, , , , British culture, Celtic regions, Coalitions and networks, Discourse communities, , , Future status of Scots,
422
Language and nationality, Licensing Act (), Notions of standard in Scotland, , Pronunciation of Scots, Rank versus class, Social mobility, , , , , , , Social network analysis, Tories, , , Whigs, , , , , , , , Women’s education, , , Women’s knowledge of Latin, Grammars and grammar writing Ash’s grammar, Bellum Grammaticale, Brightland-Gildon grammar, Devis’s grammar, Empowering of women writers, Fenn’s grammar, , Fisher’s grammar, Grammar of Anglo-Saxon, Grammars and prescriptivism, , , , Grammars and spelling, , Grammars and teaching, , , , , , Grammars by women, , , Grammars for children, Grammars for women, Grammatical tradition, Hester Lynch Thrale Acquaintance with Ash’s grammar, Acquaintance with Johnson’s Dictionary, Acquaintance with Lowth’s grammar, Acquaintance with Newbery’s grammar, Assessing her achievement, , , , Effectiveness as teacher, Knowledge of Italian, Knowledge of Latin,
Index Role as teacher, , Teaching of English grammar, Instruction through parents, Market for grammars, , , Port Royal grammar, Status of English vis-á-vis Latin, , , , , History Great Britain English Civil War, Growth of London, Parliament in Westminster, Population growth, Stability of the eighteenth century, Ireland Contrasts in the eighteenth century, Eighteenth century, Growth of Dublin, Rural population, United Irishmen, Scotland Growth of Edinburgh, Growth of Glasgow, Union with England, , United States Population growth, Language developments Absence of initial /h/, Appropriation or plagiarism, Attitudes to change, Attitudes to language Jonathan Swift, Regional variants, FOOT-STRUT split, Books on the English language, Explaining ‘hard words’, Religious background, Tone of criticism, Types, Censure of language use, , , Change in eighteenth-century English, Codification, , Demographics and language change, Development of the standard, Divergence of sound and spelling, Education and language change, Elocution, , , Thomas Sheridan, Correcting the natives, His influence, Fixing the language, , , , Grammars for the nation, Great Vowel Shift, Language and class, ‘Middling orders’, Language and society in eighteenthcentury England,
423
Language use Elisions and contractions, Fluidity, Legacy of the th century, Linguistic antiquarianism Forth and Bargy, Linguistic insecurity, , , Norms of correctness Sensitivity to norms, Variation in women’s speech, , , Women and norms, Alicia Synge, Betsy Sheridan, Elizabeth Clift, Fanny Burney, Hester, Thrale, Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, Sarah Fielding, Ongoing changes in eighteenth-century English, Possible split of English, Prescriptivism Background to Lowth’s grammar, Condemnation of grammatical errors in Lowth, Double negation in Lowth, Lowth and prescriptivism, Lowth as an icon of prescriptivism, Lowth’s criticism of Addison and Swift, Lowth’s original plan, Lowth’s position today, Lowth’s use of a corpus, Normative grammarians, Perception of Lowth, Prejudice against Lowth, Preposition stranding in Lowth, Present-day underestimation of Lowth, Reassessment of Lowth, Reception of Lowth’s grammar, Rise of prescriptivism, xv, Split infinitive in Lowth, Strictures found in Lowth, Publically acceptable pronunciation, Regulation and relative pronouns, Regulation and the Academy question, Regulation versus elegance, Suppression of variation, , Training for public speaking, Variation in language, Languages other than English Anglo-Norman, Danish, French, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
424
Index
Gaelic, , , German, , , , Germanic, , Greek, , , , , , , , , , Hebrew, , Irish, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Italian, , , , , , , , , , Latin, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Persian, Portuguese, Spanish, , , , Castilian, Turkish, , Welsh, Levels of language Phonology /e/ – /a/ variation before /r/, , /e/ vowels in Scotland, ‘Received Pronunciation’, Absence of initial /h/, , BOIL vowel, Dialect levelling in American English, FOOT vowel, , GOOSE vowel, Hypercorrection, MEAT vowel, Pronunciation of /r/, Stereotypes, Pragmatics Politeness, , Assessment of eighteenth-century situation, Assessment of politeness culture, Civil and polite language, Civility and Politeness, Compliments and thanks, Contextual approaches to politeness, Cultural histories, Forms of address, From the concrete to the abstract, Handbooks of etiquette, , , Literature on politeness, Metaphor and metonymy, Metaphors, Politeness and commerce, Politeness and ideology, Politeness in newspapers,
Politeness in novels, Politeness in the Old English period, Politeness theory, Roots of politeness, Social contexts, Social spheres, Thanks, Thanks in handbooks, Thanks in newspapers, Thanks in novels, Use of number, Politeness and speech acts, Etiquette, , Syntax Change, Domain minimisation, Efficiency principles, , , Extraposition, Hawkins’s processing model, Non-finite verb-forms, Performance-based models, Pre-verbal gerundives, Sentential complementation Development, Gerundives and infinitives, Verbal gerunds, Variables controlling gerundives, Verbal gerunds, Vocabulary New words in American English, New words in English, Lexicography ‘The art of definition’, Break with previous traditions, Compiling versus editing, Defining practice, Diachronic information in dictionaries, Dictionaries and decorum, Dictionaries and gender, Dictionaries and taboo issues, Dictionaries and the proper speaker, Dictionaries as interpreters, Dictionary versus lexicon, Eigtheenth-century context, Emulation of others, Goals of lexicography, Latinate terms, Mutability of dictionaries, Notion of coverage, Practical considerations (size and price), Pronouncing dictionaries, Favouring the standard, Prescriptivism, Question of appropriation, , Question of orthography,
Index Question of semantic equivalence, Redefining the dictionary, Samuel Johnson Standpoint regarding variation, Sheridan and the practice of his time, Synchronic information in dictionaries, Monarchy Anne, Augustan Age, xv Charles I, , Charles II, Elizabeth I, Jacobites, James II, James VI of Scotland (James I of England), Ludwig XIV, Queen Anne, xv Victorian era, xv William of Orange (William III), , , , Prescriptivism Double comparatives, Double negation, Preposition stranding, Split infinitives, Texts Book of Common Prayer, Business correspondence, Abbreviations, Assessment of documents, Concept of ‘public style’, Evaluative language, Forms of address, Question of genre, Question of modality, Question of variety, Style across languages, Terminological issues, Tone of letters, Transactions, Corpus linguistic analysis, Drama Eighteenth-century authors, Linguistic caricature, Use of eye dialect, Journals Critical Review, Monthly Review, King James Bible (Authorized Version), Newspapers Daily Courant, Examiner, Female Guardian, , Female Tatler, Freeholder, , ,
425
Guardian, , , , Medley, Review, Scots Magazine, Spectator, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Tatler, , , , , , Political pamphlets, , , , , A Fair Way with Dissenters (Astell), Conduct of the Allies (Swift), Text analysis Collocations, , , Keyness, Keyness and coalitions, Lexical expressions, Negative keywords, Word clusters, Varieties of English Definition of dialect, Dialect differences, Dialect grammar, Alexander Ellis’s paleotype, Assessment, Assessment of Alexander Ellis, Conservative features, Dialect tests, , English Dialect Dictionary (Wright), English Dialect Grammar (Wright), English Dialect Society, Late Modern English dialect syntax, Limitations on study, Multiple negation, Neglect of dialect syntax, NORMs, Northern Subject Rule, Old, Middle and Early Modern English, Philological Society, Pronoun exchange, Pseudo-passives, Relative clauses and relative pronouns, T-glottalling, TH-fronting, Dialects, Edinburgh Morningside, English in Scotland, Four Nations Scene (Henry V ), Glasgow Kelvinside, Individual variation, Irish English
426 Index Assessment of eighteenth-century forms, Background to the eighteenth century, Brogue, Coming of English, IrishEnglish Forth and Bargy Features, Lexical sets BATH, CLOTH, STRUT, TERM,
TURN, London dialect, Northern English, Northumbrian English, South-eastern English, , Standard Scottish English, , , Ulster Scots Attestations, Development, Features, Grammar, Transportation, Vocabulary,